Table of contents : Contents ......Page 4 Preface ......Page 10 Acknowledgments ......Page 14 1 Books and Journals ......Page 18 Introduction......Page 19 Pages and Page Numbers......Page 21 Running Heads......Page 23 Front Matter......Page 25 Text......Page 41 Back Matter......Page 45 Covers and Jackets......Page 50 Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords......Page 52 Introduction......Page 53 Page Numbers and Running Heads......Page 54 Covers, Front Matter, and HomePages......Page 55 Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords......Page 60 Articles and Other Components......Page 61 Tables and Illustrations......Page 64 Source Citations......Page 65 Version Control and Material Not Available in Print......Page 66 Design and Style......Page 67 Considerations for Electronic Formats ......Page 68 2 Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading ......Page 74 Overview and Process Outline ......Page 75 Basic Manuscript Submission Requirements......Page 78 Manuscript Formatting......Page 80 Preparing Illustrations and Tables......Page 87 Cross-Checking the Manuscript......Page 88 Preparing the Electronic Manuscript Files......Page 90 Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal......Page 91 Compiling a Manuscript fromPreviously Published Material......Page 93 Principles of Manuscript Editing......Page 94 Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript......Page 98 Communicating with Authors......Page 102 Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production......Page 104 The Mechanics of Electronic Editing......Page 106 The Mechanics of Editing on Paper......Page 115 Introduction......Page 119 Stages of Proof......Page 120 How to Proofread and What to Look For......Page 123 How to Mark Proofs......Page 126 Double-Checking Proofs and Assigning Responsibility......Page 132 Proofing and Testing Electronic Formats......Page 134 3 Illustrations and Tables ......Page 140 Types of Illustrations and Their Parts......Page 141 Placement and Numbering of Illustrations......Page 145 Preparation of Artwork......Page 149 Captions......Page 151 Credit Lines......Page 156 Lists of Illustrations......Page 159 Charts......Page 160 Introduction......Page 163 Table Numbering and Placement......Page 164 The Parts of a Table......Page 165 Cell Alignment and Formatting......Page 173 Notes to Tables......Page 178 Editing Tables......Page 180 4 Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration ......Page 186 Copyright Law and the Licensing of Rights ......Page 187 Varieties of Authorship......Page 189 Rights of the Copyright Owner......Page 190 Copyright and the Public Domain......Page 193 Assigning or Licensing Copyright......Page 198 Copyright Notice......Page 200 Deposit and Registration......Page 202 New Books......Page 204 Journal Articles......Page 210 Theses and Dissertations......Page 211 Alternative Publishing Arrangements......Page 212 Handling Subsidiary Rights......Page 215 The Author’s Responsibilities ......Page 220 Obtaining Permissions......Page 222 Requesting Permission......Page 229 5 Grammar and Usage ......Page 238 Introduction......Page 240 Nouns......Page 241 Pronouns......Page 248 Adjectives......Page 263 Verbs......Page 271 Adverbs......Page 290 Prepositions......Page 294 Conjunctions......Page 302 Interjections......Page 305 Syntax ......Page 306 The Four Traditional Types of Sentence Structures......Page 308 English Sentence Patterns......Page 309 Clauses......Page 310 Negation......Page 312 Expletives......Page 316 Parallel Structure......Page 317 Cleft Sentences......Page 319 Glossary of Problematic Words and Phrases......Page 321 Bias-Free Language......Page 373 6 Punctuation ......Page 378 Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text ......Page 379 Punctuation in Relation to Closing Quotation Marks......Page 382 Periods ......Page 384 Commas ......Page 385 Series and the Serial Comma ......Page 386 Commas with Independent Clauses......Page 388 Commas with Dependent Clauses ......Page 389 Commas with Relative Clauses, Appositives,and Descriptive Phrases......Page 391 Commas with Participal and Adverbial Phrases......Page 393 Commas with Introductory Words and Phrases......Page 395 Commas with Dates and Addresses......Page 396 Commas with Quotations and Questions......Page 397 Commas in Personal and Corporate Names......Page 399 Commas with Antithetical Elements......Page 400 Other Uses of the Comma......Page 401 Semicolons ......Page 404 Colons ......Page 406 Question Marks ......Page 408 Exclamation Points ......Page 410 En Dashes......Page 411 Em Dashes......Page 414 2-Em and 3-Em Dashes......Page 416 Parentheses ......Page 417 Brackets and Braces ......Page 418 Slashes ......Page 420 Quotation Marks ......Page 422 Spaces ......Page 423 Multiple Punctuation Marks ......Page 424 Lists and Outline Style ......Page 426 7 Spelling, Distinctive Treatment of Words, and Compounds ......Page 432 Overview ......Page 433 Plurals ......Page 434 The General Rule ......Page 437 Exceptions to the General Rule......Page 438 Particularities of the Possessive......Page 439 “A” and “An” ......Page 442 Ligatures ......Page 443 Word Division ......Page 444 Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks ......Page 447 Emphasis......Page 448 Words from Other Languages......Page 449 Highlighting Key Terms and Expressions......Page 450 Words as Words and Letters as Letters......Page 452 Music: Some Typographic Conventions......Page 454 Computer Terms......Page 456 Compounds and Hyphenation ......Page 458 8 Names, Terms, and Titles of Works ......Page 474 General Principles......Page 476 Non-English Names in an English Context......Page 478 Titles and Offices ......Page 482 Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications ......Page 489 Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups ......Page 491 Parts of the World......Page 493 Political Divisions......Page 496 Topographical Divisions ......Page 498 Public Places and Major Structures ......Page 499 Words Derived from Proper Names ......Page 501 Governmental Bodies ......Page 502 Political and Economic Organizations and Movements ......Page 505 Institutions and Companies ......Page 507 Associations......Page 508 Periods ......Page 509 Events ......Page 510 Cultural Movements and Styles......Page 512 Acts, Treaties, and Government Programs ......Page 514 Awards ......Page 515 Academic Subjects, Courses of Study, and Lecture Series ......Page 516 Calendar and Time Designations ......Page 517 Deities and Revered Persons ......Page 518 Religious Groups ......Page 519 Religious Writings ......Page 522 Religious Events, Concepts, Services, and Objects......Page 524 Forces and Troops......Page 525 Wars, Revolutions, Battles, and Campaigns ......Page 526 Names of Ships and Other Vehicles ......Page 528 Scientific Nantes of Plants and Animals......Page 529 Genetic Terms......Page 532 Astronomical Terms......Page 534 Medical Terms......Page 536 Physical and Chemical Terms......Page 537 Brand Names and Trademarks ......Page 538 Titles of Works ......Page 540 Capitalization, Punctuation, and Italics......Page 541 Books and Periodicals......Page 545 Articles in Periodicals and Parts of a Book ......Page 548 Poems and Plays......Page 550 Unpublished Works ......Page 551 Movies, Television, Radio, and Podcasts ......Page 552 Websites and Blogs......Page 553 Musical Works......Page 555 Works of Art and Exhibitions ......Page 556 9 Numbers ......Page 558 General Principles......Page 559 Large Numbers......Page 562 Physical Quantities......Page 564 Percentages and Decimal Fractions......Page 566 Money......Page 567 Numbered Divisions in Publications and Other Documents......Page 569 Dates ......Page 570 Time of Day......Page 573 Numbers with Proper Names and Titles......Page 575 Addresses and Thoroughfares ......Page 576 Plurals and Punctuation of Numbers ......Page 577 Inclusive Numbers ......Page 581 Roman Numerals ......Page 583 10 Abbreviations ......Page 586 Overview ......Page 587 Personal Names, Titles, and Degrees......Page 591 Companies and Other Organizations ......Page 596 Geographical Terms ......Page 598 Names of Countries......Page 600 Addresses......Page 601 Compass Points, Latitude, and Longitude......Page 602 Designations of Time ......Page 603 Scholarly Abbreviations ......Page 604 Biblical Abbreviations ......Page 611 Technology and Science ......Page 615 The International System of Units ......Page 620 Astronomy......Page 623 Chemical Elements......Page 624 US Measure ......Page 626 Business and Commerce ......Page 628 11 Languages Other than English ......Page 632 Words and Phrases from Other Languages......Page 633 Titles of Works from Other Languages......Page 636 Quotations from Other Languages......Page 637 Languages Using the Latin Alphabet ......Page 640 African Languages......Page 644 French......Page 645 German......Page 649 Italian......Page 652 Latin......Page 654 Spanish......Page 656 Other Languages Using the Latin Alphabet......Page 659 Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized)......Page 662 Arabic......Page 663 Chinese and Japanese......Page 666 Hebrew......Page 669 Russian......Page 671 Classical Greek ......Page 675 Breathings and Accents ......Page 676 Punctuation and Numbers......Page 677 Word Division......Page 678 Old English and Middle English ......Page 679 American Sign Language (ASL) ......Page 680 12 Mathematics in Type ......Page 684 General Usage......Page 685 Signs and Symbols......Page 688 Punctuation......Page 694 Mathematical Expressions in Display......Page 696 Numeration......Page 698 Delimiters......Page 699 Subscripts and Superscripts......Page 702 Summations and Integrals......Page 703 Radicals......Page 704 Fractions......Page 705 Matrices and Determinants......Page 707 Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors......Page 709 Definitions, Theorems, and Other Formal Statements......Page 710 Probability and Statistics......Page 711 Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts ......Page 713 13 Quotations and Dialogue ......Page 722 Overview ......Page 723 Permissible Changes to Quotations ......Page 725 Run In or Set Off......Page 726 Assimilation into the Surrounding Text......Page 727 Quotations and Punctuation......Page 728 Initial Capital or Lowercase Letter......Page 730 Block Quotations......Page 732 Poetry Extracts......Page 734 Double or Single Quotation Marks......Page 736 Quotations of More than One Paragraph......Page 737 Quotation Marks Omitted......Page 738 Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation ......Page 739 Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes ......Page 741 Ellipses ......Page 743 Interpolations and Clarifications ......Page 747 Attributing Quotations in Text ......Page 749 Sources Following Run-In Quotations......Page 751 Sources Following Block Quotations and Poetry Extracts ......Page 752 14 Notes and Bibliography ......Page 756 Source Citations: An Overview ......Page 758 Sources Consulted Online......Page 760 Basic Format, with Examples and Variations ......Page 766 Note Numbers......Page 770 Shortened Citations......Page 772 Commentary and Quotations in Notes......Page 776 Footnotes versus Endnotes......Page 777 Two Sets of Notes......Page 783 Special Types of Notes ......Page 784 Remedies for Excessive Annotation ......Page 789 Overview ......Page 791 Arrangement of Entries ......Page 796 The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography......Page 797 Author’s Name ......Page 799 Title of Work ......Page 806 Books ......Page 814 Editors, Translators, Compilers, or Cowriters......Page 815 Chapters or Other Parts of a Book ......Page 817 Edition......Page 821 Multivolume Works ......Page 822 Series ......Page 826 Facts of Publication......Page 828 Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information......Page 836 Electronic Books......Page 839 Periodicals ......Page 843 Journals......Page 844 Magazines ......Page 852 Newspapers......Page 853 Reviews ......Page 858 Websites, Blogs, and Social Media ......Page 859 Interviews and Personal Communications ......Page 864 Papers, Contracts, and Reports ......Page 866 Manuscript Collections ......Page 869 Reference Works......Page 873 Artwork and Illustrations ......Page 874 Scriptural References......Page 876 Classical Greek and Latin References......Page 877 Musical Scores ......Page 881 Patents and Standards ......Page 882 Citations Taken from Secondary Sources ......Page 883 Recordings and Live Performances......Page 884 Online Multimedia and Apps......Page 888 Legal and Public Documents ......Page 890 Cases and Court Decisions......Page 893 Legislative and Executive Documents......Page 895 Canada......Page 900 United Kingdom......Page 901 International Entities......Page 905 15 Author-Date References ......Page 906 Overview ......Page 907 Basic Format, with Examples and Variations ......Page 908 Reference Lists......Page 913 The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List......Page 915 Text Citations......Page 917 Author’s Name......Page 923 Title of Work......Page 925 Books......Page 926 Periodicals......Page 929 Websites, Blogs, and Social Media......Page 930 Manuscript Collections......Page 933 Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia......Page 934 Legal and Public Documents......Page 936 16 Indexes ......Page 938 Overview ......Page 939 Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators......Page 941 Cross-References......Page 944 Run-In versus Indented Indexes......Page 947 General Principles of Indexing ......Page 950 Indexing Proper Names and Variants ......Page 951 Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works ......Page 955 Alphabetizing ......Page 958 Letter by Letter or Word by Word?......Page 959 General Rules of Alphabetizing ......Page 961 Subentries......Page 963 Personal Names......Page 964 Non-English Personal Names......Page 965 Names of Organizations and Businesses......Page 969 Names of Places......Page 970 Punctuating Indexes: A Summary ......Page 971 Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions......Page 973 When to Begin......Page 974 What Parts of the Work to Index......Page 975 Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries......Page 977 Editing and Refining the Entries......Page 980 Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else ......Page 982 Typographical Considerations for Indexes ......Page 984 Examples of Indexes ......Page 985 Glossary ......Page 990 Bibliography ......Page 1006 1.1 Style ......Page 1007 1.2 Grammar and Usage ......Page 1010 1.3 Research and Writing ......Page 1011 2.1 Manuscript Editing and Proofreading ......Page 1013 2.3 Rights and Permissions ......Page 1014 2.4 Mathematics ......Page 1015 2.6 Design ......Page 1016 2.7 Production ......Page 1017 2.8 The Publishing Industry ......Page 1018 3.1 English Dictionaries ......Page 1019 3.3 Medical and Scientific Dictionaries ......Page 1020 4.1 Biography ......Page 1021 4.2 Geography ......Page 1022 4.5 Guides to Books, Periodicals, and Other Sources ......Page 1023 4.7 Abbreviations ......Page 1026 5 Miscellaneous Works Cited in Text ......Page 1027 Index ......Page 1030 The Chicago Manual of Style ......Page 1160
Citation preview
The Chicago
Manual of Style SEVENTEENTH EDITION
The University ofChicago Press
CHICAGO AND LONDON
The University of Chicago Press, Chicago 60637 The University of Chicago Press, Ltd., London
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or repro duced in any manner whatsoever without written permission, except in the case of brief quotations in critical articles and re views. For more information, contact the University of Chicago Press, 1427
E. 60th St., Chicago, IL 60637.
First edition published 1906. Seventeenth edition 2017. Printed in the United States of America 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
1 2 3 4 5
ISBN-13: 978-0-226-28705-8 (cloth) DOI: https://doi.org /10.7208/cmos17 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Title: The Chicago manual of style. Description: Seventeenth edition. I Chicago ; London : The University of Chicago Press, 2017. I Includes bibliographical references and indexes. Identifiers: LCCN 2017020712 I ISBN 9780226287058 (cloth : alk. paper) Subjects: LCSH: Printing-Style manuals. I Authorship-Style manuals. I Authorship-Handbooks, manuals, etc. I Publishers and publishing-United States-Handbooks, manuals, etc. Classification: LCC Z253 .U69 2017 I DDC 808/.0270973dc23 LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2017020712
@ This paper meets the requirements of ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (Permanence of Paper). The Chicago Manual of Style is a registered trademark of The University of Chicago.
Contents Preface xi Acknowledgments xv
Part I · The Publishing Process 1
2
Books and Journals 3
Overview 4 The Parts ofa Book 4 The Parts ofa Journal 38 Considerationsfor Electronic Formats
53
Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading 5 9
Overview and Process Outline 60 Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors Manuscript Editing 79 Proofreading 104
Illustrations and Tables 125
3
Overview 126 Illustrations 126 Tables 148
4
Rights, Permissions, and Copyright Administration 171 BY WILLIAM S. STRONG
Overview 172 Copyright Law and the Licensing ofRights The Publishing Agreement 189 Subsidiary Rights and Permissions 200 The Author's Responsibiliti_es 205
172
63
Part II Style and Usage ·
s
Grammar and Usage 223 BY BRYAN A. GARNER
Grammar 225 Syntax 291 Word Usage 306 6
7
s
Punctuation 363
Overview 364 Punctuation in Relation to Surrounding Text Periods 369 Commas 370 Semicolons 389 Colons 391 Question Marks 393 Exclamation Points 395 Hyphens and Dashes 396 Parentheses 402 Brackets and Braces 403 Slashes 405 Quotation Marks 407 Apostrophes 408 Spaces 408 Multiple Punctuation Marks 409 Lists and Outline Style 411
364
Spelling, Distinctive Treatment of Words, and Compounds 417
Overview 418 Plurals 419 Possessives 422 Contractions and Interjections 427 ''.A" and ''.An" 427 Ligatures 428 Word Division 429 Italics, Capitals, and Quotation Marks Compounds and Hyphenation 443
432
Names, Terms, and Titles of Works 45 9
Overview 461 Personal Names 461 Titles and Offices 467
Epithets, Kinship Names, and Personifications 474 Ethnic, Socioeconomic, and Other Groups 476 Names ofPlaces 478 Words Derivedfrom Proper Names 486 Names ofOrganizations 487 Historical and Cultural Terms 494 Calendar and Time Designations 502 Religious Names and Terms 503 Military Terms 510 Names ofShips and Other Vehicles 513 Scientific Terminology 514 Brand Names and Trademarks 523 Software and Devices 525 Titles ofWorks 525 9
Numbers 543 Overview 544 Numerals versus Words 544 Plurals and Punctuation ofNumbers Inclusive Numbers 566 Roman Numerals 568
562
Abbreviations 571
10
Overview 572 Names and Titles 576 Geographical Terms 583 Designations of Time 588 Scholarly Abbreviations 589 Biblical Abbreviations 596 Technology and Science 600 Business and Commerce 613
n
Languages Other than English 617 Overview 618 General Principles 618 Languages Using the Latin Alphabet 625 Languages Usually Transliterated (or Romanized) Classical Greek 660 Old English and Middle English 664 American Sign Language (ASL) 665
Overview 708 Permissible Changes to Qµotations 710 Quotations in Relation to Text 711 Quotation Marks 721 Speech, Dialogue, and Conversation 724 Drama, Discussions and Interviews, and Field Notes Ellipses 728 Interpolations and Clarifications 732 Attributing Quotations in Text 734
726
Part III· Source Citations and Indexes Notes and Bibliography 741
14
Source Citations: An Overview 743 Basic Format, with Examples and Variations 751 Notes 755 Bibliographies 776 Author's Name 784 Title of Work 791 Books 799 Periodicals 828 Websites, Blogs, and Social Media 844 Interviews and Personal Communications 849 Papers, Contracts, and Reports 851 Manuscript Collections 854 Special Types ofReferences 858 Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia 869 Legal and Public Documents 875
15
Author-Date References 891
Overview 892 Basic Format, with Examples and Variations Reference Lists and Text Citations 898 Author-Date References: Special Cases 908
893
16
Indexes 923 Overview 924 Components ofan Index 926 General Principles ofIndexing 9 35 Indexing Proper Names and Variants 936 Indexing Titles ofPublications and Other Works 9 40 Alphabetizing 9 43 Punctuating Indexes: A Summary 9 56 The Mechanics ofIndexing 9 58 Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else 968 Typographical Considerationsfor Indexes 970 Examples ofIndexes 9 71 Glossary 975 Bibliography 99 1 Index 1015
Preface Since the publication of the eleventh edition of The Chicago Manual of Style in 1949, each new edition has been marked by a significant shift in publishing technologies, starting with the advent of phototypesetting in the 1950s, whereby text was rendered on photographic paper rather than as lines of metal type, the norm since the first edition. The introduc tion of computers and desktop publishing drove further changes until, starting in the early 1990s, the graphical internet changed everything once again. Fast-forward to the seventeenth edition. Today, publishing generally relies on digital technologies (even for print) , and more often than not the end product is available in your pocket, a development that had just started to take hold when the sixteenth edition was published. It is safe to say that most of us now have ready access, at any given moment and from practically anywhere we happen to be, not only to the classic novel Moby-Dick but also to the Congressional Record and a map of the human genome as well as the catalog of the Library of Congress and countless - other databases. We can add to those practically anything else we might want (through a library or for a fee if necessary) . At the same time, many of us are busy adding our own ideas to the conversation from the same devices that we use to enjoy this access to the ideas of others. The seventeenth edition recognizes this shift in a number of ways. First, how we look for and find information influences what we choose to read. New coverage of metadata and keywords in chapters 1 and 2 recognizes the roles that authors and publishers play not only in making their work available but also in making sure it can be found by potential readers. This is complemented by significantly expanded coverage in chapter 4 of options for open-access publishing and distribution, which are also directly related to how readers engage with published sources. These and other discussions also recognize the needs of self-published authors and how they can benefit from close attention to procedures once followed mainly by traditional publishers. The ways in which we read and conduct research and how we record and share our findings have also influenced coverage of source citations. Chapters 14 and 15 have been updated to include more detailed coverage related to identifying and citing sources consulted online, including tips for choosing the best form of link to cite, when and how to list a time
P R E FA C E
stamp i n addition t o a date, and when t o keep a permanent copy o f a source. Expanded coverage of citation management applications rec ognizes that many writers document their sources automatically, often from the same platform used to consult the sources themselves. New coverage of social media demonstrates how to cite publicly accessible posts and comments as well as direct, private messages. Other newly added source types include live performances, app content (including video games) , published standards, self-published books, and maps (in cluding satellite data) . Dozens of changes throughout every chapter stem from the many ideas our readers have generously contributed through social media and our Q&A. For example, the new coverage on Hawaiian orthography in chapter 11 was inspired by reader requests. And the recognition in chap ter 5 of the rising use of they as a gender-neutral singular pronoun refer ring to a specific person stems in part from discussions with our readers that go back to at least the fourteenth edition. Many crucial additions were suggested by our advisory board. These include coverage of PDF annotation tools and the more detailed checklist for electronic books in chapter 2, the discussion of electronic theses and dissertations in chap ter 4, and coverage in chapters 1 and 14 related to journals that follow a continuous publishing model. Broader changes affect the manual as a whole or specific chapters or subsections. Our extensive coverage of source citations for legal and public documents in chapter 14 has once again been updated to reflect the latest edition of The Bluebook (now in its twentieth edition) . In gen eral, paragraph titles and text have been revised with keyword searching in mind to make it easier to find specific content. And the bibliography has been thoroughly updated not only to include the latest resources but also to recognize the latest versions of older resources, including those that have moved exclusively online (as is the case for the continually updated unabridged dictionary from Merriam-Webster) . Meanwhile, the chapters on style and usage have been revised to include many refinements, clarifications, and additions. For example, chapter 5 has been expanded to cover sentence structure and syntax, including elliptical sentences, negation, expletives, and cleft sentences. Chapter 6 now includes coverage related to the use of commas with phrases and clauses in all positions in a sentence and clarifies the use of commas relative to quoted material, coverage that continues in chap ter 13. Chapter 6 also includes new recommendations related to the use of nonbreaking and other types of spaces and the division of slashes and dashes at the ends of lines. Chapter 7 now recommends email (no hyphen) and internet (lowercase) in response to changes in usage and editorial preferences. Chapter 8 adds new guidelines for presenting xii
P R E FA C E
Korean names i n text and fo r styling the names o f operating systems, applications, and devices. Chapter 9 includes new examples featuring Chinese currency and bitcoins. Chapter 10 now sanctions using US as a noun (subject to editorial discretion) . In these chapters and throughout the manual, examples have been updated to feature additional scenarios or to reflect the latest usage. Once again, the recommendations in this manual have been guided by the principles that have been handed down through earlier editions, principles that have outlasted technological changes and cultural shifts. In writing, editing, and publishing, accuracy and attention to detail sup ported by clear, accessible prose never seem to go out of style. It is in support of these fundamental goals in the context of an evolving publish ing landscape that this edition is offered.
On behalfofthe University ofChicago Press Russell David Harper Spring 2017 _
Acknowledgments The Chicago Manual ofStyle strives to codify the best practices of an insti tution and an industry. It thus requires the participation of many hands and many voices if it is to succeed. This edition has benefitted from the carefully crafted recommendations-some sweeping, some minor, all essential-of a host of publishing professionals. At the same time, those recommendations needed to be compared, vetted, and applied in a consistent manner and with a clear vision, a challenging task per formed once again in exemplary fashion by this edition's principal reviser, Russell David Harper. A preliminary outline as well as the entire penultimate draft of the manuscript was shaped by the guidance of an advisory board represent ing various communities of readers: Shaye Areheart, Columbia Publishing Course Richard Brown, Georgetown University Press Marilyn Campbell, Rutgers University Press Samuel Fanous, Bodleian Library Barbara Flanagan, Macmillan Higher Education William Germano, The Cooper Union for the Advancement of Science and Art John E. Muenning, New England journal ofMedicine Peter Olson, Sheridan Journal Services Joshua Tallent, Firebrand Technologies Freelance editor Joe Brown, John E. Mcintyre of the Baltimore Sun, and Hope J. LeGro and Kathryn Owens of Georgetown University Press also offered numerous invaluable suggestions during the development pro cess. We would like to thank the many experts who advised us on our cov erage of languages: Michael K. Bourdaghs, T. David Brent, Erik Carlson, Dennis Cokely, Thibaut d'Hubert, Ariela Finkelstein, Victor Friedman, Kathleen Hansell, Wadad Kadi, Elsi Kaiser, Ron Kekeha Solis, Kathryn Krug, John M. Lipski, Bruce Maylath, Christina von Nokken, Lena Elisa beth Norrman, David A. Pharies, Thomas Shannon, Malynne Sternstein, Sem Sutter, Anna Szabolcsi, Jane Marie Todd, Marta Tonegutti, and Yuan Zhou. We are indebted to Diana Gillooly and Rick Schoen for their
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
advice o n mathematics; to Leslie Keros fo r her guidance o n documenta tion; to Krista Coulson for her insights on digital publishing conventions; to Dean Blobaum for his recommendations on metadata; and to Michael Magoulias for his knowledge of journals publishing. We are also grate ful to Susan Bielstein, Perry Cartwright, and Lisa Lucas for their review of copyright and permissions material; and to Ryden Anderson, Joseph Bizup, William T. FitzGerald, Ellen Gibson, Cheryl Iverson, and Angela Yokoe, who provided assistance on a variety of matters. We also owe a particular debt to Bryan A. Garner and William S. Strong for their author ship of whole chapters. Within the University of Chicago Press, thanks go to David Morrow and Mary E. Laur, who oversaw the revision and publication process and advised on the many incarnations of the manuscript; to Michael Boudreau, Ruth Goring, Christie Henry, Carol Kasper, Michael Koplow, Devon Ritter, Carol Fisher Saller, Anita Samen, and Jill Shimabukuro for their essential role in shaping the manuscript; to Rossen Angelov, Matt Avery, and Debra Hebda for their leadership in developing the on line edition; to Rachel Kelly, Bryanna Tartt, and Susan Zakin for their critical logistical support; and to Press director Garrett Kiely. Many other staff members contributed their knowledge and skills at various stages of the process: Carrie Adams, Skye Agnew, David Balsley, Adeetje Bouma, Michael Brehm, Owen Cook, Mary Corrado, Janet Deckenbach, Erin DeWitt, Elizabeth Ellingboe, Kelly Finefrock-Creed, Jenni Fry, Margaret Hivnor, Vinolia Huxley, Joe Jackson, Susan Karani, John C. Kessler, Ellen Kladky, James Lilly, Caterina MacLean, Anu Manila Mathew, Richard Martin, Timothy Mennel, Renaldo Migaldi, Scott Mitchell, Priya Nelson, Patricia O'Shea, Trevor Perri, Joseph G. Peterson, Randy Petilos, Mark Reschke, Jennifer Ringblom, Rose Rittenhouse, Lauren Salas, Christine Schwab, Joel Score, Amy Smith, Levi T. Stahl, Rachel Tenuta, Alan G. Thomas, Kyle Wagner, Ryo Yamaguchi, Serene Yang, Aiping Zhang, Langchi Zhu, and Yvonne Zipter. On behalf of the press, Christine Gever proofread the book, and Do Mi Stauber prepared the index. On a final note, this edition, like its predecessor, is in many ways most indebted to Catharine Seybold and Bruce Young, who compiled the landmark twelfth edition of this manual as well as the thirteenth, to John Grossman, who compiled the fourteenth edition, and to Margaret Mahan, who was responsible for the fifteenth. In preparing this, the seventeenth edition of the manual, we have again striven to match their high standard for what has come to be known as "Chicago style."
The University ofChicago Press Staff Spring 2017
l·The Publishing Process
1 Books and Journals ·
OVERV I E W 1.1 THE PARTS O F A B O O K 1.3 Introduction 1.3 Pages and Page Numbers 1.5 Running Heads 1.10 Front Matter 1.17 Title Pages 1.17 Copyright Page i.20 Dedication and Epigraph 1.36 Table of Contents and List of Illustrations or Tables 1.38 Foreword, Preface and Acknowledgments, and Introduction 1.40 Other Front Matter 1.44 Text 1.46 Text Divisions 1.47 Text Subdivisions 1.55 Back Matter 1.59 Covers and Jackets 1.69 Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords 1.75
THE PARTS OF A J O U RNAL 1.77 Introduction 1.77 Page Numbers and Running Heads 1.81 Covers, Front Matter, and Home Pages 1.84 Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords 1.92 Articles and Other Components 1.94 Tables and Illustrations 1.106 Source Citations 1.108 Indexes 1.110 Version Control and Material Not Available in Print 1.112 Design and Style 1.115
C O N S I D E RAT I O N S F O R E L E C T R O N I C FO RMATS 1.117
1.1
BOOKS AND JOURNALS
Overview 1.1
Scholarly publishing. Books and journals have constituted the core of
scholarly publishing for centuries. Book-length works in particular given their breadth and variety-provide an overview of the anatomy of a scholarly work that, in conjunction with the discussion of journals and journal articles (see 1.77-116) , can be usefully applied to many other types of published works. 1.2
Publication format. Almost all modern publishers have adopted an elec tronic workftow, from manuscript through publication. The published version can in turn be offered in a variety of formats, from printed and bound to online and other electronic formats. Many journal publishers have implemented a simultaneous print and electronic publishing model (see 1.77)-a model that has become the industry standard (though most readers now access journal content online) . For books, though print has remained for many readers the format of choice, publishers now offer e-book versions of most of their books in addition to print as a matter of course. Moreover, many publishers, booksellers, and libraries depend almost entirely on an electronic workftow for making publications avail able to readers through online catalogs, search engines, bookshelf ap plications, and other means. This chapter focuses on the essential com ponents of a book or a journal while taking into account the electronic workftow wherever it applies. For additional considerations related to electronic publication formats, see 1.117-25.
The Parts o f a Book Introduction 1.3
Divisions a n d parts o f a book-overview. Books are traditionally orga nized into three major divisions: the front matter (also called preliminary matter, or prelims) , the text, and the back matter (or end matter) . These divisions are generally reflected in how items are grouped in the table of contents. The front matter presents information about a book's title, publisher, and copyright; it acknowledges debts to the work of others; it provides a way to navigate the structure of the book; and it introduces the book and sets its tone. The text proper comprises the narrative including arguments, data, illustrations, and so forth-often divided into chapters and other meaningful sections. The back matter presents sources or source notes, appendixes, and other types of documentation
The Parts ofaBook
1.4
supporting the text but outside its central focus or narrative. This section discusses the parts of a book according to the standard outline of these divisions and their components presented in 1.4. 1.4
Divisions and parts of a book-outl ine. The list that follows presents the traditional arrangement for the divisions and parts of a book, using low ercase roman numerals for pages in the front matter and arabic numerals for all the rest. Few books contain all these elements, and some books have components not listed here. Page numbers as well as indications of recto (right-hand page) or verso (left-hand page) may be applicable only to printed-and-bound books. Starting pages that cannot be assigned page numbers until after page makeup begin on the first available recto or, in some cases, the first available page, whether recto or verso (see also 1.5) . Every page is counted in the page sequence, even those on which no number actually appears, such as the title and half-title pages, copy right page, and blank pages (see 1.6) . Books published electronically typi cally retain the order or presentation of elements, especially for the main text. For endpapers, see 1.72.
Front matter Book half title Series title, other works, frontispiece, or blank Title page Copyright page Dedication Epigraph (Table of) Contents (List of) Illustrations (List of) Tables Foreword Preface Acknowledgments (if not part of preface) Introduction (if not part of text) Abbreviations (if not in back matter) Chronology (if not in back matter) Text First text page (introduction or chapter 1) or Second half title or first part title Blank First text page Subsequent chapters
11
lll
lV
v v or v1 v or vii recto or verso recto or verso recto recto recto recto recto or verso recto
1 1 2 3 recto or verso
LS
BOOKS AND JOURNALS
Conclusion Epilogue or afterword
recto or verso recto or verso
Back matter Acknowledgments (if not in front matter) Appendix (or first, if more than one) Subsequent appendixes Chronology (if not in front matter) Abbreviations (if not in front matter) Glossary Notes (if not footnotes or chapter endnotes) Bibliography or References (List of) Contributors Illustration Credits (if not in captions or elsewhere) Index(es) About the author (if not on back cover or elsewhere)
recto recto recto or verso recto recto recto recto recto recto recto recto recto
Pages and Page Numbers 1.5
Book pages. Publishers refer to the trimmed sheets of paper that you turn in a printed-and-bound book as leaves (or, especially in older books, folios, a term that can also refer to page or leaf numbers; see 1.6, 14.155) . A page i s one side o f a leaf. The front o f the leaf, the side that lies t o the right in an open book, is called the recto. The back of the leaf, the side that lies to the left when the leaf is turned, is the verso. Rectos are always odd-numbered, versos always even-numbered. Electronic formats may or may not distinguish between recto and verso.
1.6
Page numbers. Printed books are paginated consecutively, and all pages except endpapers (see 1.72) are counted in the pagination, whether or not the numbers appear. The page number, or folio, is most commonly found at the top of the page, flush left verso, flush right recto. The folio may also be printed at the bottom of the page, and in that location it is called a drop folio. Drop folios usually appear either centered on each page or flush left verso and flush right recto. A page number that does not appear is sometimes referred to as a blind folio. Not paginated are pages that are inserted into printed books after pages have been made up-for example, color illustrations or photo galleries printed on a differ ent type of paper (see 1.39) . Reflowable electronic formats generally lack fixed page numbers, though many formats include location information to help orient readers in the text (see 1.123, 14.160).
The Parts ofaBook
1.7
1.9
Roman numerals for front matter. The front matter of a book is pag
inated with lowercase roman numerals (see 1.4) . This traditional prac tice prevents renumbering the remainder of a book when, for example, a dedication page or additional acknowledgments are added at the last moment. By convention, no folio appears on blank pages or on "display" pages (i.e., such stand-alone pages as those for the half title, title, copy right, dedication, and epigraph) , and a drop folio (or no folio) is used on the opening page of each succeeding section of the front matter (e.g., table of contents, foreword, preface) . 1.8
Arabic n u m bers for text a n d back matter. The text, or the central part
of a book, begins with arabic page 1. If the text is introduced by a second half title or opens with a part title, the half title or part title counts as page 1, its verso counts as page 2, and the first arabic number to appear is the drop folio 3 on the first page of text (see 1.46, 1.49) . (Some pub lishers ignore the second half title in paginating their books, counting the first page of text as p. 1.) Page numbers generally do not appear on part titles, but if text appears on a part-title page (see 1.48) , a drop fo lio may be used. Arabic numbering continues for the back matter. As in the front matter, the opening page of each chapter in the text and each section in the back matter carries either a drop folio or no page number. On pages containing only illustrations or tables, page numbers are some times omitted, except in the case of a long sequence of figures or tables. (When page numbers are retained, they are usually presented along with the running heads.) Page numbers are also omitted in the case of a blank page. 1.9
Page n u m bers for multivolume works. Pagination for works that run to more than one volume may depend on the index and the projected number of volumes. If an index to two volumes is to appear at the end of volume 2, consecutive pagination saves index entries from having to refer to volume as well as page number. In rare cases where back mat ter, such as an index, must be added to volume 1 later in the production process, lowercase roman folios may be used; these should continue the sequence from the front matter in that volume (including a final blank page)-if, for example, the last page of the front matter is xii, the back matter would start with page xiii. Multivolume works that run into the thousands of pages are usually paginated separately to avoid unwieldy page numbers. Index entries and other references to such works must include volume as well as page number. In either scenario-consecutive or separate pagination across volumes-the front matter in each volume begins anew with page i.
1.10
B O O K S AND J O U R NALS
Running Heads 1.10
R u n n i n g heads defined. Running heads-the headings at the tops of pages-function, like page numbers, as signposts. Especially useful in scholarly books and textbooks, they are sometimes omitted for practical or aesthetic reasons-in a novel or a book of poems, for example. Run ning heads are sometimes placed at the bottom of the page, where they are referred to as running feet, or, more rarely, in the left- and right-hand margins. In endnotes and other places where the information conveyed by these signposts is essential to readers, placement at the tops of pages is preferred. In this manual, running head is used for this element wher ever it appears. For preparation of running-head copy, see 2.76. In elec tronic formats, running heads may be supplanted by other navigational features (see 1.123) .
1.11
Running heads for front matter. Running heads are never used on dis play pages (half title, title, copyright, dedication, epigraph) or on the first page of the table of contents, preface, and so forth (see also 1.16) . Any element in the front matter that runs more than one page usually carries running heads, and the same running head appears on verso and recto pages.
Verso Contents Preface 1.12
Recto Contents Preface
Running heads for text. Chapter openings and other display pages carry no running heads (see also 1.16) . The choice of running heads for other text pages is governed chiefly by the structure and nature of the book. Among acceptable arrangements are the following:
Verso Part title Chapter number Chapter title Chapter title Chapter title Subhead Chapter author
Recto Chapter title Chapter title Subhead Chapter subtitle Chapter title Subhead Chapter title
Longer titles or heads may need to be shortened; see also 2.76. For a book without named chapters or other structural divisions (a novel, for 8
The Parts ofa Book
1.16
example) , the book title can be used for the running head on both verso and recto, or running heads can be omitted. In electronic formats, the title metadata may be used to supply the running heads by default (see also 1.75) . 1.13
Subheads as running heads. When subheads in the text are used as run ning heads on recto pages and more than one subhead falls on a single page, the last one on the page is used as the running head. When sub heads are used as running heads on versos, however, the first subhead on the page is used as the running head. (The principle is the same as for dictionary running heads.)
1 . 14
Running heads for back matter. Running heads for back matter follow the same pattern as those for front matter and text (but see 1.15) . Ifthere is an appendix, Appendix (or Appendix 1 or Appendix A, etc.) appears verso, the appendix title recto. If there is more than one index, the run ning heads must differentiate them (e.g., Index of Names, Index of Sub jects) .
1.15
Running heads for end notes. The running heads for a section of notes in the back of the book should give the inclusive page numbers or (much less useful for readers but more expedient for the publisher) the chapter where the relevant note references are found in the text. If chapter num bers are used, it is essential that the running heads in the text also in clude chapter numbers (see 1.12) . Thus, two facing running heads might read:
Verso Notes to Pages 2-10 or Notes to Chapter One
Recto Notes to Pages 11-25 Notes to Chapter Two
For a fuller explanation, see 14.47. 1.16
Omission of running heads. Besides display pages in the front matter
(see 1.11) , running heads are omitted on part titles, chapter openings, and any page containing only illustrations or tables. (For the omission of page numbers, see 1.7, 1.8.) Pages that include lines of text in addition to an illustration or table should include running heads. Running heads may also be included in long sequences of illustrations or tables to keep readers oriented.
1.17
BOOKS AND JOURNALS
Front Matter T I T L E PAG E S 1 . 17
Half title. The half title (p. i in a printed book, no folio) normally consists only of the main title (less any subtitle) and is usually counted as the very first page in a printed-and-bound book. All other information-including author name, publisher, and edition-is omitted.
1.18
Series title or frontispiece. The verso following the half-title page (p. ii in a printed book) is usually blank. But if the book is part of a series, it may includ.e the title and volume number of the series, the name of the general editor of the series, and sometimes the titles of previously pub lished books in the series. (A series title may appear on the title page in stead.) If the book is the published proceedings of a symposium, the title of the symposium and the date it was held and other relevant details may appear on page ii. Some publishers list an author's previous publications on page ii; Chicago generally lists these on the jacket or back cover (see 1.66) . Alternatively, page ii might carry an illustration, called a frontis piece. If the frontispiece is printed on a different stock from the text, and thus is inserted separately, it will not constitute page ii, though it will still appear opposite the title page, which is normally page iii (see 1.19) . Page ii might also be used for a title page across pages ii and iii.
1.19
Title page. The title page (p. iii or sometimes pp. ii and iii) includes the following elements:
Full title of the book Subtitle, if any Name of the author, editor ("Edited by"), or translator ("Translated by") Edition number, for a new edition (see 1.25, 1.26) Name and location (city or cities) of publisher
No colon or other punctuation is needed between title and subtitle if they are differentiated by type size or style. The author's name should appear in the form preferred by the author or by which the author is generally known; Chicago usually omits any academic degrees or affiliations (but see 1.66) . A publisher's logo may appear on the title page. Some publish ers include the date of publication, which should correspond to the copy right date if possible (see 1.22) . Self-publishers can follow this traditional arrangement as long as they publish under their own company name or
The Parts ofaBook
i.21
imprint; if not, information about the publisher can be omitted (though some commercial self-publishing platforms may add their own imprints) .
COPYRI GHT PAGE i.20
Components o f a copyright page. The Copyright Act of 1989 does not require that published works carry a copyright notice in order to secure copyright protection; nevertheless, most publishers continue to carry the notice to discourage infringement. The copyright notice is just one of several items typically included on the copyright page (p. iv) . Books published by the University of Chicago Press include the following:
Publisher's address Copyright notice-including, if applicable, copyright dates of previous editions and indication of copyright renewal or other changes, and followed by the state ment "All rights reserved" and related language Publication date, including publishing history Country of printing Impression line, indicating number and year of current printing International Standard Book Number (ISBN) for each available format (e.g., cloth, paper, e-book) For continuously published resources, the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) , one for each available format, in addition to the ISBN A Digital Object Identifier (DOI), for books that have one For translations, indication of original-language title, publisher, and copyright Acknowledgments, permissions, and other credits, including acknowledgment of grants, if applicable and space permitting Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data Paper durability statement
For an example, see figure 1.1. Information included by other publish ers may vary from this list. Self-published authors are encouraged to in clude, at a minimum, a copyright statement and a list of any assigned ISBNs, together with any other information that applies. i.21
Publisher's address. The address of the publisher-and sometimes the addresses of overseas agents-is typically, though not always, given on the copyright page. An address may be abbreviated, consisting, for ex ample, only of a city and perhaps a postal code. The URL for the publish er's home page may also be included. Self-published authors may want to include contact information to facilitate correspondence from readers.
F I G U R E 1.1. A typical copyright page, including copyright notice, impression date and number (denoting 2017 for the first impression), International Standard Book Number (ISBN) for each format, Digital Object Identifier (DOI), Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data, and paper durability statement. See 1.20.
The Parts ofa Book
1.23
T}\e UniversityofChicago Press, Chicago 60637
The Vmversity of Chicago Press, Ltd., London·
@·2008, :io14hy The Unrversity of Chicago All nghtsreserved. Firsteditton 2008. Second eSsed adjourns
Constitution; Convention
ca. 21 September Leaves Phila de lphia forNew York ·
24 September
26 September
F I G U RE
1.9.
·
Arriv�s in New York tti attend.Congress Awarded Doctor of Laws degree Col lege ofNew Jersey
in absentia by
Opening page of a chronology. See 1.60. For date style, see 6.38.
1.63
Bibliography or reference l ist. Bibliographies and reference lists are normally set smaller than the text and in flush-and-hang style. A bib liography usually precedes the index and follows the notes, if any. In a multiauthor book or a book that will be offered in the form of individual chapters, a brief bibliography may be placed at the end of each chapter (see 14.62) . For a discussion of the various kinds of bibliographies, see 14.64; for reference lists, see 15.10. For discographies and the like, which usually precede any bibliography or reference list but may instead be in cluded as an appendix, see 14.262. For a full discussion and examples, see chapters 14 and 15.
1.64
List of contributors. A list of contributors may be appropriate for a work . by many authors in which only the volume editor's name appears on the
The Parts ofa Book
1. 6 8
title page. The list (usually headed Contributors) may appear in the front matter, but the preferred location is in the back matter, immediately be fore the index. Names are arranged alphabetically by last name but not inverted ("Aiden A. Author," not "Author, Aiden A.") . Brief biographical notes, affiliations, and contact information (if authorized by the contrib utor) may accompany the names. See figure 1.10. A work by only a hand ful of authors does not require a formal list of contributors ifthe authors' names appear on the title page and biographical data can be included elsewhere in the book (see 1.50, 1.66, 14.55) . 1.65
Index. The index, or the first of several indexes, begins on a recto; subse quent indexes begin verso or recto. In a book with both name and subject indexes, the name index should precede the subject index. Indexes in printed books are normally set two columns to a page and in smaller type than the text. For a full discussion of indexes and indexing, see chap ter 16.
1.66
Biographical note. A brief note on the author or authors (including any editors, compilers, and translators) lists previous publications and, if relevant, academic affiliation. When such a note does not appear in the back matter (usually as the final element; but see 1.67) , it may appear in the front matter or, more commonly, on the back cover or on the inside flap of the dust jacket, according to the publisher's preference (see also 1.70, 1.71) . If such biographical information appears in more than one place, the details, if not the wording, must be consistent. In a departure from earlier practice, Chicago now prefers to place biographical notes on the back cover or on the inside flap of the dust jacket rather than on the copyright page.
1.67
Colophon. The last page of a specially designed and produced book occasionally contains a colophon-an inscription including the facts of production. For an example, see the last page of the print edition of this manual. For another meaning of colophon, see 1.69.
1. 6 8
Errata. In rare cases, errors severe enough to cause misunderstanding are detected in a finished book that has already been printed in signifi cant numbers. If the copies have not yet been distributed, a separate page that lists errata may be supplied. An errata page prepared along with the rest of the text may be justified when all or part of a book consists of pages scanned from an earlier publication. It may be placed either at the end of the front matter or at the end of the book and should be listed in the table of contents. The following form may be adapted to suit the par ticulars:
F I G U RE
1.10.
Partial list of contributors to an edited collection . See 1.64.
TheParts ofa Book
1.70
E RRATA Page 37, line 5 182, line 15 195, line 8 23, 214
For Peter W. Smith is subject to figure 3 Transpose captions of plates 2 and 51.
Read John Q. Jones is not subject to figure 15
Today it is more common for publishers to list such errata online, a prac tice especially suited to technical manuals. Publishers who make signif icant corrections to electronic versions of their books can include in the corrected version a notice and description of the changes (or a link to such documentation online) ; any readers who received the uncorrected version may need to be notified of the update. See also 1.28.
Covers and jackets 1.69
Clothbound covers. The traditional clothbound hardcover book
so-called for the integument of cloth stretched over a cardboard cover may include a paper dust jacket (see 1.71) . Underneath the jacket, on the cloth itself, the spine is generally imprinted with the author's (or editor's) full name, or the last name only if space is tight; the title of the book (and any edition number) ; and the publisher's name. The subtitle is usually omitted. The publisher's name is often shortened or replaced by an em blem or device known as a colophon or logo. (For another meaning of colophon, see 1.67.) Considering a book as it stands upright on a shelf, spine copy on American publications is most commonly printed verti cally (and read from the top down) , but when space allows (as with lon ger books with wider spines) , it may be printed horizontally (for easier reading on the shelf) . The front panel may be blank, but it sometimes bears stamped or printed material, such as the title and author's name or the publisher's colophon or some other decoration. The back panel is usually blank, though a product code may be necessary for books with no jacket (see 1.74) . 1.70
Paperback covers. The spine of paperback covers (and other flexible covers) usually carries the author's or editor's name, the publisher's name or colophon or both, and the title. The front cover carries the au thor's or editor's name, the title and (usually) the subtitle, and some times the name of a translator, a contributor of a foreword, an edition number, or the like. The back cover usually carries promotional copy, such as a description of the book or quotations from reviews or signed
1.71
B O O K S A N D JO U R N A L S
blurbs, a brief biographical statement about the author (see 1.66) , the se ries title if the book is part of a series, and, sometimes, information about the publisher. (Some paperbacks include gatefolds, also called French flaps-extensions to the front and back covers that are folded into the book just like the dust j acket to a hardcover book; see 1.71.) See also 1.74. 1. 71
Dust jackets. Hardcover books are often protected by a coated paper jacket (or dust j acket) . In addition to the three parts to be found on the book cover itself, the jacket also has flaps that tuck inside the front and back covers. The front and spine carry the same kind of material as the front and spine of paperback covers (see 1.70) . The material included on the back of a paperback cover is begun on the front flap of the hard cover jacket and completed on the back flap (where a biographical note on the author may appear; see 1.66) . The back panel sometimes includes promotional copy from the publisher. See also 1.74. An alternative to the dust j acket is provided by the paper-over-board format (also called litho case) , which allows full-color images and type to appear directly on the hard outer cover-including on the inside front and back panels.
1.72
End papers. An endpaper is one of two folded sheets of paper appearing at the beginning and end of a hardcover book (or, more rarely, a book with a sturdy paperback or other flexible binding) . Half of each sheet is glued against the inside of the cover, one to the front and one to the back; the base of each is then glued, at the fold (near the spine) , to the first and last page of the book. Endpapers help secure a book within its covers. The free half of each sheet is called a flylea£ Endpapers, sometimes col ored, are usually of a heavier stock than the book pages, and they some times feature printed text or illustrations. Endpapers are not counted in a book's pagination.
1. 73
Credit lines for cover art. If a credit line is required for artwork included
on a j acket or cover, it normally appears on the back flap of the j acket or the back cover of a paperback or other book without a j acket. Credit for artwork on a paperback cover or on the actual cover (as opposed to the jacket) of a hardcover book may also appear inside the book, usually on the copyright page, since the cover is a permanent part of the bound book. See 3.29-37 for styling of credit lines. 1 . 74
ISBN and bar codes on book covers. In addition to the International Standard Book Number (ISBN; see 1.32), book covers need to include product and price codes (bar codes) . These should appear at the foot of the back cover or dust j acket or any other protective case or wrapper. A detailed overview of the process and related resources can be found at
TheParts ofa Book
1.76
the website of the US ISBN Agency, R. R. Bowker, or the International ISBN Agency.
Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords 1.75
Metadata for books. Metadata (literally, data about data) consists of a
set of core elements that can be used to describe any resource. Metadata for a book includes such elements as title and subtitle, author and author biography, edition, publisher, publication date, ISBN, price, bar code, and a description of the book's content. Some or all of these elements are usually printed on a book's cover or jacket. To facilitate the catalog ing and selling of books, these and other metadata elements can be en tered into a publisher's database according to a standard syntax such as XML-based ONIX. This structured information can be used to automate the content on a publisher's product pages. It can also be shared with libraries, booksellers, and the like to facilitate online search and discov ery. Metadata is utilized by all parties involved in the publishing and sup plying of books, and some metadata originates outside the publisher for example, the CIP data created by the Library of Congress (see 1.34) . The creation and maintenance o f accurate and complete metadata is in fact an essential component of any modern publisher's workftow. (Authors who self-publish their books through a commercial service are usually required to supply and maintain basic metadata using the service's account management tools.) In addition to the elements men tioned above, metadata usually includes a cover image and information about formats-specifying, for instance, a hardcover book or a particular e-book format-as well as language, extent (e.g., page count or, for an audiobook, duration) , subject headings (using a standard classification system such as BISAC in the United States or Thema internationally) and keywords, intended audience, availability, and other vital statistics. More detailed information and guidance is available from The Metadata Handbook (bibliog. 2.7) and from the Book Industry Study Group. See also 1.76. 1.76
Abstracts and keywords for books. Abstracts, long a feature of journal
articles, are increasingly required for books. An abstract is a summary of a book's content written by the author and usually limited to a few hun dred words or less. Publishers may require a summary of each chapter (including any introduction and conclusion) in addition to the abstract for the book as a whole. Authors should be advised to take care in writing abstracts; though they usually do not appear in the book itself (except in the sciences) , abstracts often form the basis of a book's promotional
1.77
B O O KS A N D J O U R N A L S
copy or of the descriptive metadata shared with libraries and booksell ers. Abstracts may be supplemented by keywords. A keyword is a word or phrase that identifies an important concept or name in the book. Pub lishers may ask authors to supply a set of keywords for each chapter as well as for the book as a whole. Keyword metadata supplements a book's other descriptive metadata to make it more visible to search engines. Authors who self-publish their books through a commercial service are typically given the option of entering a description and keywords along with the other metadata elements for their books. See also 1.75, 2.25.
The Parts of a Journal Introduction 1. 77
Publication formats for journals. The majority of scholarly journals are offered either in print and electronic formats or electronically only. Even the few remaining print-only journals generally rely on a mostly elec tronic workflow. Electronically published journals usually contain all the material included in any printed counterpart except, in some cases, ad vertising. Electronic journals typically present articles and other content in one of two ways (and often both) : (1) as PDF files that correspond to the pages of the journal's print issues (if any) ; or (2) as full-text HTML suitable for viewing in a web browser and containing features and sup plementary materials not available in the print edition (see 1.78, 1.114) . Some journals also offer their content in EPUB or other e-book formats. (For definitions of PDF, HTML, EPUB, and related terms, see 1.118.)
1.78
Noting differe·nces between print and electronic versions. Although a
printed article should include all elements that are essential to under standing, interpreting, and documenting the text, many journals publish special materials electronically that are not available in the print version. These features-usually referred to collectively as supplementary data or supporting information-may include very large tables, supplemen tal reading lists, multimedia components, large data sets that can be ex ported to third-party software for analysis, or color versions of figures published in black and white in the printed journal; some of this material may constitute the basis of an online-only appendix (see also 1.114) . In addition, some journals release unedited versions of manuscripts that have been accepted for publication (see 1.113) . With the exception of these "in press" or "forthcoming" versions, any electronic-only articles, appendixes, and other features must be listed in the print version (either in the table of contents or on the first page of the applicable article) , and
The Parts ofa journal
1.s1
differences between the print and electronic versions must be made ap parent in the latter. See also 3.26. 1.79
ISSNs and DOis. The issues of a journal are usually identified by vol ume number and date. The journal as a whole is identified by an In ternational Standard Serial Number (ISSN) ; electronic journals are assigned a separate ISSN distinct from any counterpart for print. Jour nal articles are identified in three ways: (1) by page ranges, either print pages or e-pages; (2) by the Copyright Clearance Center code, which in cludes the ISSN and other information, including an article number (see 1.103) ; and (3) by Digital Object Identifiers (DOis) . A DOI is a unique, persistent identification string assigned to an article and sometimes to its components-including tables, figures, and multimedia objects that might be sold or packaged separately. (The metadata identifying such components must make it clear that they are part of a larger work; see also 1.92.) A DOI can form the basis of a persistent link when it is ap pended to https://doi.org/ (a practice recommended by the DOI regi's tration agency Crossref for DO Is wherever they are listed) . See also 14.8.
1.80
Journal volu mes a n d issues. A volume of a journal usually comprises the
issues published in a calendar year, though some journals (e.g., Modern Philology) prefer the academic year beginning in the autumn. The issues within a volume are typically numbered with arabic numerals, each new volume beginning with issue number 1. In some journals, however, the cover month, cover date, or season (Spring, Summer, etc., usually cap italized) is used in lieu of an issue number. In others, issue numbering does not start over with each volume, or the journal is numbered con secutively by issue only, with no volume number. For a journal published quarterly, a volume has four issues; for one published monthly, twelve is sues. Some journals, however, publish two or more volumes in one year, depending on the frequency and length of issues.
Page Numbers and Running Heads 1.81
Page n u m bers for journals. Page numbers in a printed journal usually start with 1 in the volume's first issue and run continuously to the end of the volume. An issue always begins on a right-hand page (recto) and ends on a left-hand page (verso) ; thus the last page of an issue is an even number (though the preceding recto may be counted as the last page of content) and the first page an odd one. If issue 1 ends with page 264 (or 263, if the content ends on the preceding recto) , then issue 2 starts on page 265. To help readers identify and cite articles, electronic journals
1.82
B O O K S A N D JO U R N A L S
with printed counterparts should list the page ranges that correspond to the printed version alongside information for the article wherever it ap pears (e.g., in the table of contents, at the head of the article itself, and in the citation data for the article) . See figure 1.11. This should be done even for articles that are published in an electronic format that does not feature page breaks. Articles published electronically ahead of print may need to employ "dummy folios" (e.g., 000-000) until the print issue has been paginated. Articles that do not appear in the print version of a jour nal can use a separate page-numbering system (e.g., El, E2, etc.) , again running continuously to the end of the volume. See also 1.82. 1.82
Page numbers for journals that use a continuous publishing model. To facilitate. publication and citation of articles independent of print issues, some journals have adopted a continuous publishing model, according to which each article is assigned a unique citation ID (which can be de rived from the DOI for the article; see 1.79) rather than a traditional page range. PDF versions of articles are each paginated starting with the num ber 1, and individual pages can be cited according to citation ID number plus page number (e.g., 1234, p. 1; 1234, p. 2; etc.) ; such pagination is con sidered final and is used instead of the traditional pagination scheme in any print version of the journal. See also 14.174.
1.83
R u n n i n g heads or r u n n i n g feet in journals. Running heads or feet typ
ically bear the title of the journal (either spelled out or in abbreviated form) ; the author's surname or, for more than one author, a shortened version of the author list (such as Aldrich et al.) ; and the title of the ar ticle, usually shortened, or the name of the journal section (such as Brief Reports) , or both. Arrangement of these pieces of information across rectos and versos varies among journals. For full-text, scrollable elec tronic articles, which will not have running heads per se, such informa tion may be presented at the head of each article. Articles that have been downloaded for individual use typically show a URL and date of down load in the header or footer of each page.
Covers, Front Matter, and Home Pages 1.84
Journal covers. A printed journal is usually bound in soft covers, like a paperback, and each issue generally uses the same overall design and color scheme. A journal's spine contains the title of the journal, the vol ume and issue numbers, and the date, month, or season and the year of publication. It may also note the beginning and ending page numbers
1 . 1 1 . Partial table of contents for an issue of an online scholarly jour nal. Note that the page numbers, as in many scholarly journals, are sequential throughout a volume. See 1.81, 1.87.
F I G U RE
1.85
B O O KS A N D J O U R N A L S
of that issue. Each of the remaining four sides of the cover also contains important information, as follows: Cover 1, the front cover, displays the title of the journal; the volume and issue numbers; the date, month, or season and the year of the issue; the publisher's name; and sometimes the table of contents or an illustration. The title of a spe cial issue, along with the name(s) of the editor(s) of the special issue, appears on cover 1. The front cover may be offered as an image on the home page for each issue. Cover 2, the inside front cover, usually contains the masthead with the names of the editor(s) and staff, the editorial board, the journal's International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) , its dates or frequency of publication, subscription informa tion, addresses for business and editorial correspondence, and the copyright line for the entire issue (see also 1.103) . Cover 2 may also include information about postage; a statement about paper durability (see also 1.35) ; a statement about copying beyond fair use; information about obtaining back issues; mention of a submission fee, ifthat is part of the journal's practice; information about indexing of the journal's articles; a statement about advertising policy; a caption for any illustration that appears on cover 1; and the URL of the journal's home page. If the journal is sponsored by a scholarly society or other organization, cover 2 may supply the name and address of the society and the names of officers. Occasion ally on cover 2 but more often in the front or back matter of each issue, there may be a statement of editorial policy for the journal indicating what kind of articles the journal publishes as well as information for contributors about how and in what form to submit a manuscript. Cover 3, the inside back cover, is often given over to advertising, or it may be used for information for contributors. If the table of contents begins on the back cover, it may be completed on cover 3. Cover 4, the back cover, carries the bar code for the journal issue in the lower right-hand corner. It may also carry the table ofcontents or titles of articles sched uled to appear in a forthcoming issue, or advertising. (If there is advertising on cover 4, the bar code may be put on cover 2 or cover 3.) If the table of contents begins on cover 1, it may be completed on cover 4. 1.85
Journal front matter. Many of the elements discussed in 1.84 can equally
occur in the front matter, or preliminary ("prelim") pages. Some jour nals, because they have a sizable staff and a large number of editors on their advisory board, have space on cover 2 only for the masthead and advisory board editors; the other items then appear in the front matter. 1.86
Jou rnal h o m e pages. Most journal home pages include all materials typ
ically found on the covers and in the front matter of a printed journal
The Parts ofa Journal
1.87
(see 1.84, 1.85) , starting with such essential information as the volume number and date of the current issue and a table of contents with links to the latest articles. A statement of copyright, frequency of publication, and ISSN (print and electronic) should also be made available from a journal's home page. In addition, journal home pages may also provide (or provide links to) some or all of the following resources: A fuller description ofthe journal and its editorial policies and information about staff members Information about the history of the journal and, if applicable, the sponsoring so ciety More extensive information for authors about preparation and submission of electronic text, tables, math, art, and other files (e.g., video files or large data sets) Links to other home pages (e.g., the publisher's home page, the sponsoring so ciety's home page, other relevant societi� s' home pages, and databases or other online resources associated with the journal or the field) Individual and institutional subscription forms Site license agreement and registration forms Links to tables of contents for previous issues of the journal Lists of articles scheduled for upcoming issues, or links to articles published elec tronically ahead of upcoming issues A journal-specific or broader search engine Information about indexing and abstracting services Society meeting abstracts and information about upcoming meetings Society membership information and application forms Information about special services for subscribers (e.g., tables of contents distrib uted by email before publication in print) Links to related products or features (e.g., books, newsfeeds, biogs) Mail-to links for questions about manuscript submission and review, subscrip tions, back issues, advertising, copyright and permissions, books and new media for review, passwords and other technical issues, and other topics
These resources are generally not associated with a particular issue of the journal but are simply updated as needed (but see 1.105) . 1.87
Journal table o f contents. The table o f contents, usually headed Con
tents, appears in the front matter or on the cover(s) of the print issue (see 1.84) and is also available from a journal's home page. The table of contents should include the title of the journal (or, for a special issue, the title of a special issue and the names of its editors) ; the date, month, or season and the year of publication; the volume and issue numbers; and the titles of the articles in the issue along with the authors' names
1.88
B O O KS A N D JO U R N A L S
and the page range for each article (or, in print, the number on which each article begins) . It may contain section titles, such as Reviews, or subheads for specific content areas. Additional items listed may include review articles, book reviews, book notes, commentaries, editorials, or other substantive items, and should include a list of articles published in electronic form only or direct readers to the journal's website for a list of those articles. The electronic table of contents, in addition to providing links to each format of each item in the list, will include links to article summaries, which usually include an abstract and other information that can be viewed without a subscription. See figure 1.11. Full articles that are freely available to the public should be labeled as such. Most journals also include options for downloading citations to individual articles (see also 14.5) , either in the table of contents or with the articles themselves, or both. ·
1.88
I nformation for journal contributors. Information for potential contrib utors can vary in length from a sentence to several pages. Some journals also include a statement of editorial policy. These components-when they do not appear on cover 2 or cover 3 in a printed journal (see 1.84) may appear in an issue's front or back matter. In many cases, the print journal will contain a brief version of these components and point the potential author to the electronic version for more details.
1.89
Journal acknowledgments, announcements, and calls for papers. Ac
knowledgments of reviewers, announcements of awards or conferences, and calls for papers are published periodically, and may appear in the preliminary pages or at the end of a journal issue. If the issue is a supple ment or special issue on a single topic, perhaps representing the proceed ings of a conference or symposium, the print issue may begin with a title page that contains the title of the supplement, the name (s) of any guest editor(s) , information about the source of the articles, and sponsorship information, if any. 1.90
Journal errata. Journals periodically publish errata, which, in print is
sues, may appear in the front or the back matter. Electronic journals should provide two-way links from errata to the articles that contain the errors; in other words, the articles themselves should be updated to link to or otherwise indicate the relevant errata. The entries in the table of contents for the original articles should also contain links to the errata. Small errors in online articles that are corrected after the original publi cation date (e.g., broken images and typographical errors) are best ac companied by a note indicating the nature of the changes and when they were made. See also 1.112.
TheParts ofajournal 1.9 1
1.93
Jour.n al retractions. Occasionally a journal will issue a retraction of a previously published article that has since been identified as unaccept able (e.g., for reasons of plagiarism or data falsification) . The retraction should include the title of the retracted article, the full author list, the volume and issue in which the article appeared, and a brief explanation for the retraction (usually two or three sentences) . The electronic version of the retraction should include a link to tqe retracted article; the article itself, which remains otherwise intact, should include a link to the retrac tion and a notice that it has been retracted.
Metadata, Abstracts, and Keywords 1.92
Journal article metadata. The majority of journal content is consumed
in the form ofindividual articles retrieved by readers through internet or library searches. To facilitate this process, accurate and complete article metadata must be incorporated into the electronic records that a journal publisher shares with libraries and other content providers. Metadata for a journal article includes such elements as the title of the journal and ISSN, volume and issue number, author and author affiliations, article title, page range, publication date, and article DOI. Some of these data elements are printed in the journal issue or on its cover and are displayed along with the article online. Metadata for journals is typically recorded using a standard XML-based syntax and may be retrieved from a sepa rate database or derived from the electronic markup of a journal's articles and other components. In addition to the items mentioned above, article metadata can include information about format (e.g., print, HTML, PDF, or e-book) , language, content (including abstract and keywords) , subject headings, access rights, sources of funding, and other pertinent details. Other types of metadata can help a publisher track the versions of a doc ument through the proofreading and testing stages or facilitate linking of source citations in a reference list. For more information, including information about best practices, consult the Dublin Core Metadata Ini tiative, an organization responsible for developing standards related to electronic resource description. See also 1.93, 1.117. 1.93
Journal article abstracts and keywords. Many journals-in the sciences
especially but also in the social sciences-publish abstracts along with their articles. These summaries, typically limited to a few hundred words or less, are usually supplied by the author and appear at the beginning of an article. Because abstracts are also generally made available as stand alone items to allow subscribers and nonsubscribers alike to preview an article before they read or purchase it, they normally do not contain cited
1.94
B O O K S AND J O U R NALS
references o r figure callouts o r any other direct links t o the article itself. The content of an abstract is extremely important because it can influ ence decisions made by researchers and other potential readers. Some journals have strict guidelines for what an abstract must include and how it should be structured-especially those that publish the results of orig inal research. Abstracts are not usually required for letters, reviews, and other such materials (see 1.94) . Abstracts are typically supplemented by keywords-words or phrases that are intended to increase the visibility of an article to search engines and to facilitate indexing (see 1.111) . Though keywords normally repeat key terms found in the title, abstract, and text, synonyms or other variations may be added to anticipate search terms. Keyword metadata can be supplied by the author or derived from a con trolled vocabulary such as the Medical Subject Headings (MeSH) used by the Natio n al Library of Medicine. See also 1.92.
Articles and Other Components 1.94
Journal articles versus other components. Journals consist princi pally of individual articles. Some journals also publish special kinds of articles-such as review essays, survey articles, or articles grouped as a symposium. Many articles include abstracts, which are considered part of the article (see 1.93) . In addition to articles, journals may publish brief reports, letters to the editor, book reviews, book notes, announcements, calls for papers, errata, notes on contributors, and other ancillary mate rials.
1.95
Journal article title, authorship, a n d other first-page i nformation. An
article should include-on the first page or, in the full-text electronic ver sion, at or near the top of the article-the title of the article, the author's or authors' name (s) , and the copyright line for the particular article (see 1.103) . Depending on the journal or on the needs of a given article, the first page may also include the affiliation of each author (and any rele vant financial interests or potential conflicts of interest) , an address for correspondence and reprints, dates of submission and acceptance of the article and date of electronic publication (most commonly in scien tific journals) , an abstract and keywords (see 1.93), an acknowledgment note, and sometimes an editor's note. A general section heading such as Articles, Review Essay, or Symposium or a specific heading such as Medical Microbiology may appear above the article title. 1.96
Cross-references a n d other links i n journal articles. Full-text electronic journal articles typically include links to elements within the document
The Parts ofa Journal
1.lOQ
(e.g., tables and illustrations, reference list entries, and notes) and of ten also to outside resources such as the sources cited in the reference list and field-specific indexes or databases. They may also include links to supplementary materials not available in the print version (see 1.78) . Articles are also typically accompanied by other linked items, including an article-specific list (or menu) that allows readers to move directly to other sections of the article (or to the PDF version) and a standard menu that allows them to move to the issue's table of contents, to the previous or next article in the issue, to the journal's home page, to search options and cited-by data, and to tools for citing and sharing the article. The dis play may also include thumbnail versions of the article's tables and illus trations. 1.97
Journal article subheads. An article, like a chapter in a book, may be di vided into sections and subsections headed by subheads, sub-subheads, and so on (see 1.55-58) . The number of subhead levels required may vary from article to article.
1.98
Journal reviews. Many journals include a book review section. Such sec tions, usually headed Reviews or Book Reviews, vary greatly in length from journal to journal. Within a section, each review carries a heading that lists information about the book being reviewed. The heading in cludes the author's name, the title of the book, place and date of publi cation, publisher's name, number of pages (including front matter) , and price. If the book is part of a series, the series title may be given. Some journals include reviews of other journals or of films or other media. The name of the reviewer usually appears at the end of the review but occa sionally follows the heading; alternatively, reviews are given a separate title in the manner of regular articles, and the name of the reviewer fol lows the title at the head of the review. Book notes use the same form of headings as book reviews, but the text is much shorter and reviewers may be listed by their initials. Some journals also publish a list of books or other materials received for review from publishers.
1.99
Journal announcements. Announcements include such items as notices
of future conferences and symposia; calls for papers, award nomina tions, or research subjects; and employment opportunities. 1.100
Journal contributors. Basic information about contributors such as their professional affiliations typically appears with each article, usually at the head of the article or elsewhere on the first page. This information is also generally included as part of an article's metadata (see 1.92) and may be offered along with the abstract as part of an article's online sum-
1.101
BOOKS AND JOURNALS
mary. Some journals offer a n index o f past contributors t o the journal as a whole. Journals may also feature a special section with additional infor mation about contributors, such as their publications or fields of study. 1.101
Letters t o t h e editor. Letters to the editor are typically treated as a minor component of a journal, published irregularly if at all, and sometimes only online. In some scientific journals, on the other hand, letters ap pear as a regular, prominent feature, often with replies, and may contain equations, tables, and figures.
1.102
Journal editorials. An editorial is not a regular feature in most academic journals but appears on a particular occasion. When there is a change of some sort-a new editor, modifications in editorial policy or style, fea tures added or dropped, or graphic redesign of the journal (see 1.115) an editorial announces and explains the change. A journal may provide an annual editorial summing up the year's activity. Some journals pub lish invited editorials, written by someone who is neither the journal's editor in chief nor a member of its editorial board, that comment on a particular article or group of articles. A special issue usually includes an introduction by the special issue's editor(s) . The heading Editorial or In troduction is used, and the editor's name appears at the end of the piece.
1.103
Journal copyright li nes. In addition to the copyright line that appears
For some journals, Chicago also includes a fourth element-the article's DOI (see 14.8) ; the DOI is always listed along with the full-text version of an article and its summary. Most but not all US journals use the CCC, which provides systems through which copyright owners can license the reproduction and distribution of materials in both print and electronic form. Its relations with equivalent agencies in other countries enable the CCC to collect fees for uses in those countries. Note that fees apply only to copyrighted material and not to articles in the public domain. See also 4.55-57, 4.97. 1.104
Publication history for journal articles. For all articles that are published electronically before they are published in print, the date of electronic publication should appear as part of the article's history, in both the print and the electronic versions, on the first page or otherwise near the head of the article. Some journals also include the date the article was received and the date it was accepted for publication. These dates provide impor tant context for interpretation of the article; in the sciences, especially, what is known-or at least what has been reported-can change rapidly.
1.105
Preserving t h e context o f individual journal articles. Publishers, librar ies, and online aggregators typically offer journal content in the form of individual articles, letters, or reviews rather than in the context of the original issue as a whole. Publishers who seek to preserve the historical context of their back issues might consider making covers, front matter, and other ancillary materials from the original issue readily available along with the articles themselves. Such materials can provide impor tant historical context about editors, sponsors, or even advertisers in the journal, all of which may be relevant in assessing the import of a work.
Tables and Illustrations 1.106
Tables in journal articles. Tables in electronic articles can be presented
in multiple formats-for example, as an image of the typeset table, as a searchable hypertext version with links, or as a machine-readable ver sion that allows readers to download the data and either repeat the anal yses used in the article or use the data, perhaps in combination with data from other sources, for their own analyses. Table footnote citations can be linked to the table footnotes themselves; this is especially useful for navigation in very large tables. Links also allow readers to move freely from text to tables and back again, as well as from one table to another. Very large tables may be published in electronic form only; ifthere is also
1.107
B O OKS A N D J O U R N A LS
a print version of the article, both versions should make this difference explicit (see 1.78) . For a full discussion of tables, see 3.47-88. 1.107
Ill ustrations in journal articles. An electronic article might display the same illustrations available in the print version of the article, though they may be presented in the text as thumbnail versions linked to larger, higher-resolution images. These images may contain additional nav igational aids like the ones described for tables (see 1.106) . A greater range of illustrations can be offered in electronic journals, which can in clude more illustrations than would be practical in print. Color can be used freely, without the costs associated with color printing (although color accuracy can vary considerably between display devices) . High resolution images can allow readers to see more detail, and electronic illustrations may include an audio component. Videos and animations allow readers to view movement and understand processes. Any differ ences between the content of the print and electronic versions should be noted explicitly in both formats (see 1.78, 3.26) . For a full discussion of illustrations, see 3.3-46.
Source Citations 1.108
Notes or author-date citations i n journals. One of the fundamental identifying marks of a journal is its documentation style-either notes (sometimes accompanied by a bibliography) or author-date citations. Notes, which still prevail in many humanities journals, may be footnotes or endnotes; if the latter, they appear at the end of the article, with the heading Notes. Author-date citations-used mostly by journals in science and the social sciences-consist of parenthetical text citations keyed to a reference list, which appears at the end of the article. For a discussion of Chicago's two preferred systems of documentation, see chapters 14 and 15. Some scientific journals use a system of numbered references cited in the text by reference number; depending on the system, the references are listed in alphabetical order or in the order cited in the text (see 14.3) .
1.109
Internal a n d external links t o cited sources in journals. In full-text elec tronic articles (and sometimes in enhanced PDF versions) , text citations typically link to references, notes, or items in a bibliography, as the case may be, allowing readers to move from the text citation to the cited item and back to the text. Reference lists and bibliographies may in turn link to resources outside the article-for example, to cited articles or to an outside index or database (see 1.111) .
The Parts ofa journal
1 . 11 2
Indexes 1.110
Indexes to printed journal volumes. At the end of a volume, some jour
nals publish an index to the articles and other pieces published in that volume. The index appears in the volume's last issue. Names of authors, titles of articles, and titles and authors of books reviewed are indexed. More detailed subject indexes, on the other hand, are becoming rare. In the sciences especially, subject indexes have been superseded by search able field-specific bibliographic databases (see 1.111) . 1.111
Electronic indexes and indexed searches. Many journals have dis pensed with subject indexes; readers have come to rely instead on indexed searches provided by the publisher or by a third-party bib liographic database or search engine to lead them to individual articles. In the sciences, journal subject indexes have been largely superseded by field-specific resources such as PubMed, the National Library of Med icine's bibliographic database of journal articles. PubMed allows read ers to search the entire field of biomedicine for electronically indexed articles-with the help of a standard keyword vocabulary-rather than searching individual journals at a publisher's website. (Readers who reach an article through a database or search engine rather than by sub scribing to the journal may need a subscription or otherwise pay to gain access to the full article.) See also 1.92, 1.93.
Version Control and Material Not Available in Print 1.112
Journal article version of record. Many journals consider the electronic version of an article to be the version of record; the print version, which should contain all elements that are essential to the article, may never theless include only a subset of the material available electronically. Whenever the electronic version is considered the version of record, it is extremely important to document any changes to the file after the electronic publication date. Release of electronic articles before they are published in print means that errors may turn up well before the print issue has been assembled; consequently, a print issue may include an er ratum that concerns an article in the same issue. In this case, the erratum should state that the article is in the current issue and should specify the date of electronic publication. Some journals use a system like Crossref's CrossMark to track versions and any corrections or retractions. For more information on best practices related to version control for jour-
1.113
B O OKS A N D JO U R N A L S
nal articles, consult journal Article Versions (]AV): Recommendations ofthe NISO/ALPSP ]AV Technical Working Group, published by the National In formation Standards Organization (bibliog. 2.7) . See also 1.90, 1.91. 1.113
Prepri nts and "in press" articles and articles publ ished ahead of print.
Manuscripts are sometimes released before publication: authors them selves may circulate drafts within a research community, or they may cir culate versions submitted to a journal. They may post drafts on a preprint server-as is standard practice in the physics community-or on their own web pages. Some journals post "in press" or "forthcoming" articles on their website that have been accepted but not yet edited. These ver sions of an article are not to be confused with the final, edited electronic articles published in advance of the print issue (see 1.112) . To facilitate publication of the latter, some journals in the sciences have adopted a continuous publishing model, according to which articles are published in final form individually, independent of any future print issue in which they may appear (see also 1.82) . 1. 114
Supplemental journal content. In addition to certain articles published
ahead of print (see 1.113) , journals often publish material not available in print or not applicable to print (e.g., multimedia components, large data sets) ; such material is usually referred to collectively as supplemen tary data or supporting information. Such supplemental content must be listed in any print version, and the electronic version must in turn make it clear that such material is available only online (see 1.78) . At the same time, publishers must provide this content in a way that ensures its on going availability and accessibility, whether or not the electronic version is considered the version ofrecord (see 1.112) . By implementing standard practices for do'cument structure and markup and for the inclusion and identification of supplemental media such as video and audio files, pub lishers can help ensure the permanence and accessibility of their mate rial in libraries and other archives. Publishers should remain abreast of the latest standards for archival practices by consulting such groups as the International Organization for Standardization and the Digital Li brary Federation.
Design and Style 1.115
Journal design. A journal's design-physical, visual, and editorial-is
determined when the journal is founded. At that time, a designer cre ates a design for the cover and the overall look of a journal and specifica tions for all of its regular features. Because the designer designs not for a
Considerationsfor Electronic Formats
1 . 1 17
specific text but for categories of text-article title, author's name, text, heads, subheads, and so on-the design of a journal should be simple and flexible as well as visually pleasing and easy to read. The design of the electronic version, which may be shared across journals offered via the same parent site, will have additional considerations based on the me dium (see 1.117-25) . It is the job of the manuscript editor and production personnel to fit the items for a particular issue into the overall design. A long-running journal may occasionally be redesigned typographically. More rarely in print but commonly in electronic formats, minor alter ations in style may be introduced to accommodate changing technol ogies. 1.116
Journal editorial style. A journal's editorial style governs such things as when to use numerals or percent signs, how to treat abbreviations or spe cial terms, and how to organize tables. Consistency of design and style contributes to a journal's identity; readers know what to expect, and the substantive contribution of each article stands out more sharply when typographical distractions are at a minimum.
Considerations for Electronic Formats 1. 117
Electronic workflows. Most modern publishers use an electronic work flow as the basis of their publications, and many publishers, in turn, offer their publications in more than one format. To achieve such flexibility, a system of electronic markup may be used to describe the structure and components of a document such that it can be readily converted to any of a number of formats, from the printed page to an e-book format or for presentation in a web browser or as an app. Many publishers rely at least at some stage on XML (extensible markup language) , a widely adopted standard initially developed to facilitate HTML presentations and now also used to facilitate EPUB, a standard e-book format. XML is also the basis of the Journal Article Tag Suite (JATS) published by the National Information Standards Organization (NISO) and used by many journal publishers. Publishers who do not use a standard set of tags can develop a customized workflow tailored to their requirements. In any electronic workflow, the primary function of markup is to identify the parts of a work-from titles and subheads to text and illustrations and other com ponents (see also 2.81-83) . Then, after conversion for publication, both the parts and the whole take on a new appearance and acquire new func tions in different contexts depending on publication format. Consid erations related to these differences are the subject of this section. (An extensive overview of publishing workflows and technologies, including
1.118
BOOKS AND JOURNALS
a discussion o f markup and related concepts, i s offered a s a supplement to the online edition of this manual.) 1 . 118
Electronic publication formats. Print, for centuries the basis of the pub lishing industry, has been joined in the last half century by a number of electronic formats, from plain-text ASCII files to full-featured web pre sentations and apps. Though plain text is technically sufficient for many purposes, the most common publishing formats support special charac ters, images, and other enhancements.
1. PDF. An abbreviation for portable document format, PDF is practically iden tical to print; in fact, it was designed as a means of preserving all the charac teristics of a fixed layout and forms the basis of most modern printed publica tions. Though PDF essentially provides an image of the printed page, the text can be searchable and hyperlinks can be added for internal cross-references or to external resources. (PDF also supports embedded multimedia content, but to date few publishers have taken advantage of this.) PDF readers typi cally include tools for annotation, making it a suitable alternative to paper for proofreading or editing (see 2.133) . PDF, offered by many journal publishers and used as the basis of some e-book formats, can also be included as a com ponent of web publications and apps. 2. E-book formats. Book publishers especially have turned to e-book formats as a means of offering their content in a way that mimics many of the char acteristics of the printed-and-bound book. PDF can be used as the basis of an e-book, but EPUB and a number of similar formats tailored to the special ized features of the software and devices that support them are more com mon. EPUB, short for electronic publication, is an open standard that defines the content and structure of e-books. Most e-book publications consist of re fiowable text �nd images, though EPUB and some other e-book formats also support fixed-layout options. E-book formats include linked tables of contents and other navigational tools and are designed to be read one screen or "page" at a time. Software and devices for e-books typically support note-taking and bookmarking features and some multimedia content. 3. HTML. An abbreviation for hypertext markup language, HTML refers to a spe cific set of tags used to describe the text and graphics that are displayed in a web browser. Many journals offer full-text HTML versions of their articles in addition to or instead of PDF. Browser-based HTML is ideal for present ing multimedia content and complex tabular matter and for facilitating au thor and reader interaction as well as links to related content-all as part of the larger context of the publisher's or content provider's website (see 1.86). HTML is also especially suited to complex, extensively hyperlinked publica tions such as dictionaries and other reference works. 4. Apps. The term app, short for application, can be used to refer to any soft-
Considerationsfor Electronic Formats
i.120
ware program, from a word processor to a web browser to the camera app on a mobile device. It can also refer to the software required to read a specific e-book format. For publishers, apps afford additional possibilities for offering content. Publishers of reference works or textbooks can develop app versions designed for the smaller screens and specialized hardware typical of mobile devices. Academic publishers, on the other hand, can tailor the electronic ver sions of their books and articles for compatibility with third-party bookshelf style apps. Apps, together with web presentations, offer the widest range of possibilities for presenting content. 1. 119
Functional features in electronic formats. The functional features avail
able for different electronic formats vary not only according to what each format supports but also in how publishers implement them. For PDF and e-book formats, functional features are typically determined by the applications and devices used to read them. The features for web pre sentations and apps, on the other hand, are generally determined by the publisher. For a full-text HTML journal article, the available features are usually determined by an established website or app design and rarely vary from one issue to the next. But for a custom web presentation or app, functionality may have to be determined, designed, developed, and implemented from scratch. In this case, technical and editorial consid erations overlap: functional features must be implemented and assessed with a clear understanding of the content and how the user will interact with that content. This is true to some degree of any electronic publica tion, as technologies change and even previously published content must be reevaluated in new contexts. Publishers must have a system in place for checking content in each environment in which it may be read (see 2.137-40) . 1.120
Navigation in electronic formats. Navigation is the basis of any elec tronic publication, starting with search. Searchable PDF may be en hanced by publishers with linked tables of contents and other internal links, or by links to outside resources, but need not be. Any other naviga tional tools for PDF will depend on the software used to read it. Linked tables of contents are created as a matter of course for EPUB and sim ilar e-book formats, which typically consist of a number of documents and images (i.e., the content of the book) "packaged" for delivery as a single set of files to be presented in a specific order according to a set of encoded instructions. Such navigation, then, is generally determined by the content and structure of the book itself, allowing publishers to streamline publication in e-book formats according to a strategy of con sistent markup and file formats. Markup for e-books may also include internal links to notes and other cross-references and links to outside re-
1.121
B O O KS A N D J O U R N A L S
sources (but see 1.121) . A web-based reference work or app, on the other hand, must take into account the fact that readers will typically consult smaller pieces of content and will expect to be able to shuttle through many parts of a work in a very short period of time and in no particular order. This generally involves a greater number of cross-references and hyperlinked items. Dictionaries, in fact, may be entirely hyperlinked, such that every word in every definition is linked to the entry for that term, and so on, providing endless pathways through a significant subset of a single language. Search is essential too. Readers expect to be able to search for and find any component of a work on the basis of a few key terms; any work that allows full-text searching will benefit from context sensitive keyword indexing (see 16.7) . Readers may also want to know where otl�er readers are landing, through links to the most popular con tent or to cited-by statistics. i.121
Links in electronic formats. There is no cost to following a hyperlink, provided there is a means of stepping back and forth between the link and the item it points to. But if there are too many links, or if they do not tend to lead to strongly related content-or, worse, if they fail-a pub lication risks irritating its readers. Beyond cross-references and linked tables of contents or other navigational items, a link can be directed to almost anything. Words might be linked to their definitions-either in a glossary or through a third-party dictionary. Authors' names might contain mail-to links or lead to their networking pages or to lists of their other works. URLs or other identifiers can be embedded in any piece of content. Some of these links, including links to dictionary definitions and outside searches for individual terms, may be a feature of a specific device or app. Publisher-created links, on the other hand, must be main tained and updated, often at significant cost. For this reason, links added to PDF and e-book formats are sometimes limited either to internal cross-references (which do not generally change) or to outside resources via a permanent identifier such as a DOI (see 14.8) . The content ofweb based works is generally more flexible, and some links can be checked or generated programmatically. For example, links to related titles or sub jects can be generated by matching title or subject metadata against an evolving database each time a user calls up a specific piece of content. See also 2.34.
1.122
Front or back matter i n electronic formats. PDF and most e-book for mats will retain the traditional front matter of a printed publication, in cluding the order in which it is presented. Readers of web-based publica tions, on the other hand, will want to be able to navigate primarily to the core content of the publication (and the content that it generates) rather
Considerationsfor Electronic Formats
1.123
than to ancillary elements such as prefaces, copyright information, or information about the publication or its authors. These elements can be demoted from their usual position in the front (or back) of a book and made accessible on the margins of the screen. Copyright information, however, should usually be included with each subdocument, and help and related documentation should also be available from any part of a publication. Much of the usual taxonomy for printed works-from copy right page to table of contents to preface, foreword, and introduction will benefit from a different set of categories (i.e., home pages, "about us" links, site maps, help menus and other tools, search engines, etc.) . The table of contents, however, especially in works that can be read in larger chunks-such as an online journal or this manual-may be a sig nificant driver in the top-level navigation of a web-based publication. See also 1.125. 1 . 12 3
Orienting t h e reader i n electronic formats. A primary advantage of a traditional printed-and-bound book or journal (or its PDF counterpart) is the presence of fixed page numbers. Page numbers give students and researchers a convenient means of making precise citations to the works they consult, allowing readers with access to the same book to retrace their steps (but without the benefit of searchable text) . Printed publica tions also typically include running heads specific to chapter (or article) , section, or other text division (see 1.10-16) . Many e-books lack fixed page numbers because they allow for reflowable text and user-defined options for typeface and size. Instead, software and devices for e-books orient readers by means of location or screen numbers (and sometimes percentage relative to the work as a whole) and by bars that graphically represent a reader's position in the book and provide a means of shut tling between locations. These navigational elements may appear in lieu of detailed running heads, or in addition to a simple running head displaying the title of the book (but see 2.76) . For web-based publications and apps, readers can be oriented in a variety of ways independent of page numbers or running heads per se. Dictionaries and encyclopedias rely on a natural organizing principle: readers cite material sub verbo-or "under the word"-that is, by entry or entry title (14.232-34) . Other types of publications broken into scrollable sections or subsections may ben efit from hierarchical navigation based on a table of contents; section or paragraph numbering can be added as an aid to navigation and citation.
2
2. EPUB and some related formats support the inclusion of page number markers, and publishers who use the same workflow for their print books and e-books should consider including this metadata to allow readers of the e-book (depending on software and device) to locate page numbers referring to the printed book (see also 14.160).
1.124
B O O K S A N D J O U R NA L S
Meanwhile, each page i n a web-based publication o r app can display the location in the current document relative to the section or chapter hier archy and to the work or site as a whole (e.g., 1: Books and Journals » Chapter Contents » Considerations for Electronic Formats)-or provide a ready means of returning to the top-level navigation. 1. 124
Source citations in electronic formats. A primary advantage of the elec tronic environment is the ability to link to and from in-text references and the items they refer to, solving the problem of footnotes versus end notes that arises in printed books (see 14.43-48) . A related advantage is the ability to link out to the cited resources themselves. Such links can be applied in any electronic format, from PDF to e-book to HTML (but see 1.121) . On the other hand, in some electronic formats, linked-to items in the notes or in the bibliography or reference list may be presented apart from the context of the list as a whole, making such traditional bibliographic strategies as ibid. or the 3-em dash for repeated references impractical (see 14.34, 14.67) .
1.125
Indexes i n electronic formats. Traditional back-of-the-book indexes, like footnotes or endnotes, can benefit from the electronic environment by being hyperlinked to the text. For indexes that refer to printed page numbers, linking in e-book versions can be facilitated by the addition of page number or other markers defined for EPUB or other structured markup. A similar strategy can be used for web-based publications or apps. A more elegant but time-consuming and therefore costly approach involves doing away with the page number references and instead link ing directly from the terms in the index to the corresponding location in the text. In the .case of an index that refers to numbered paragraphs (as the one for this manual) , linking an index is a relatively straightforward matter. See also 16.2, 16.13.
2 Manuscript Preparation, Manuscript Editing, and Proofreading ·
OVERV I E W A N D P R O C E S S O U T L I N E 2.1 MAN U S C RI P T P R E PARAT I O N G U I D E L I N E S F O R AUTHORS 2.3 Basic Manuscript Submission Requirements 2.3 Manuscript Formatting 2.7 Preparing Illustrations and Tables 2.26 Cross-Checking the Manuscript 2.32 Preparing the Electronic Manuscript Files 2.36 Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal 2.41 Compiling a Manuscript from Previously Published Material 2.43 MAN U S C RI P T E D I T I N G 2.48 Principles of Manuscript Editing 2.48 Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript 2.57 Communicating with Authors 2.68 Preparing a Final Manuscript for Production 2.73 The Mechanics of Electronic Editing 2.78 Preparation and Cleanup 2.78 Electronic Markup 2.81 Tracking Changes and Inserting Queries 2.84 The Mechanics of Editing on Paper 2.90 P R O O F R E A D I N G 2.100 Introduction 2.100 Stages of Proof 2.103 How to Proofread and What to Look For 2.110 How to Mark Proofs 2.119 Double-Checking Proofs and Assigning Responsibility 2.134 Proofing and Testing Electronic Formats 2.137
2.1
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
Overview and Process Outline 2.1
Overview-authors, manuscript editors, a n d proofreaders. This chapter is divided into three parts. The first part (2.3-47) is addressed primarily to authors, conceived broadly to include compilers, translators, volume edi tors, editors of journals, and contributors to journals or books. It provides guidelines for preparing manuscripts that have been accepted for publi cation. The second part of the chapter (2.48-99) gives a detailed look at what happens to a manuscript once it has been submitted to a publisher. Specifically, the role of manuscript editors (also called copyeditors) , whether on staff with a publisher or hired on a freelance basis, is dis cussed. The third part (2.100-140) deals with proofreading-essentially, the steps authors and publishers must take to ensure that their publica tions are ready to be presented to the public. The chapter uses the book as a model, though considerations for journals are included where appli cable. (Journals usually post specific requirements and instructions that journal authors will need to consult.) Many of the recommendations will apply to other types of publications, including self-published works.
2.2
Process outl ine-from approved manuscript t o published work. The following outline highlights the basic steps of the publication process from approved manuscript to published work. These steps are broadly modeled on a typical manuscript editing and proofreading schedule for a book-length work; the procedures for journals will vary. For a more de tailed look at manuscript preparation, editing, and proofreading, see the discussions in the remainder of this chapter. For sample timetables for producing a book and a journal, see figures 2.1 and 2.2.
1. Manuscript submission. In addition to the final manuscript, the author sub mits to the publisher all artwork and any necessary permissions to reproduce illustrations or previously published material or to cite unpublished data or personal communications. See 2.3-6. 2. Manuscript editing. The manuscript editor suggests changes to the manu script (and, where necessary, queries the author) and demarcates or checks the order and structure of the elements (e.g., illustrations, headings, text ex tracts) . See 2.57-67, 2.69. 3. Author review. The author reviews the edited manuscript and answers any queries. All remaining changes and adjustments to the manuscript need to be indicated by the author at this stage. See 2.71, 2.88. 4. Final manuscript. The manuscript editor produces a final manuscript, in corporating the results of the author's review of the edited manuscript and, among other things, double-checking each element in the manuscript against
F I G U RE
2.1.
Sample design and production schedule for a book.
2.2
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
FIGURE 2 . 2 .
Sample production schedule fo r a quarterly journal.
a design template for completeness, consistency, and proper markup. See 2.73-77. 5. Proofreading and indexing. Once the final manuscript has been converted for publication-for example, as a typeset and paginated book or journal ar ticle or the full text of an electronic publication (see 1.118)-it will need to be checked by the author and any additional proofreaders in at least one format (typically PDF or print, as page proofs or proof) for errors and inconsistencies. See 2.100-140. It is also at this stage that an index may be prepared and sub sequently edited (see chapter 16; for journal indexes, see 1.110-11).
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.3
6. Final revisions. As the publisher makes sure all necessary corrections have been made, the index, if there is one, is proofread in its final format and cor rected as needed (see 2.106). Book pages, especially, may go through several rounds of revision, though publishers usually set firm limits on changes be yond the first round of revisions. See 2.105. 7. Prepress or final review. For a printed-and-bound book, publishers usu ally review the typesetter's final files-either as an inexpensive printout or on-screen-before ink is committed to paper. Once the job is on the press, an initial set of folded-and-gathered sheets may be sent from the printer to the publisher for review before the job is finished (see 2.107) . For electronic formats, a final version must be reviewed in each context in which it will be published before it is posted or distributed or otherwise made available to the public (see 2.137-40). 8. Publication. In the stages leading up to publication it is critically important to make all possible efforts to eliminate any errors or inconsistencies (typograph ical or otherwise) or other problems. The occasional error in a published work is inevitable, but even minor errors reflect badly on publishers and authors alike.
Manuscript Preparation Guidelines for Authors Basic Manuscript Submission Requirements 2.3
Manuscript submission checklist. Before manuscript editing begins
(see 2.48-99), an author should provide any of the elements in the list that follows that are to be included in the work. This list is modeled on the parts of a book (see 1.3-76) . An author contributing to a journal should consult the journal's specific submission requirements. Title page Dedication Epigraph Table of contents List of illustrations List of tables Preface Acknowledgments Any other front matter All text matter, including introduction and part titles Notes Appendixes Glossary
2.4
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
Bibliography o r reference list Any other back matter All illustrations and all tables Illustration captions A list of special characters used in the manuscript Abstract(s) and keywords (see 1.76) All permissions, in writing, that may be required to reproduce illustrations or pre viously published material or to cite unpublished data or personal communica tions (see chapter 4)
All elements should be final and up to date-including any URLs cited in the work (see 14.6-18) . The publisher usually furnishes the half-title page (see 1.17} , the copyright page (see 1.20-35} , and copy for the run ning heads (see 1.10-16, 2.76) . 2.4
Submitting the manuscript. Publishers usually require the latest version of the electronic file (s) for the work, and authors are advised to make a secure backup of this final manuscript and to avoid making any further changes to it. Some publishers also require hard copy or PDF as a safe guard against any glitches in the electronic files-especially for book length works or works with complex formatting or special typographical needs. To ensure that this copy is identical to the electronic files, any last-minute changes made to the electronic files before the manuscript is submitted must be reflected in the hard copy or PDF-either by means of a new printout or PDF or marked by hand (see also 2.5) . Authors are advised to include a cover letter specifying the author's name, the title of the work, a total word count (rather than a page count) , the electronic file names, and the software used. Any material (such as artwork) that cannot be included in electronic form must be noted and described. Conversely, any material that cannot be printed or supplied as PDF (such as videos, animations, or large data files that might be included in an electronic journal or web-based publication) must also be noted and described; for all such material, the software used, the number of items, their type(s) , and the individual file names must be specified. For any additional instructions, authors should check with their publishers. For advice on manuscript formatting, see 2.7-25. For advice on preparing index manuscripts, see chapter 16. For paper-only manuscripts, see 2.6. For manuscripts consisting of previously published material, see 2.43.
2.5
Making changes after a manuscript has been submitted. Once an au thor has submitted a final manuscript to the publisher, the publisher is responsible for maintaining the version of record. An author who needs
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2 .7
to make further changes after submitting the files must therefore alert the publisher immediately. Minor changes can usually be indicated later, on the edited document that the manuscript editor will send to the author for review (see 2.71, 2.88). For major changes, the author may need to send a revised manuscript to the publisher before editing begins. Authors should be advised, however, that many book publishers begin manuscript preparation immediately upon receipt and may not be able to accept a revised version after the original submission of the final man uscript. For journals, major changes are rarely permitted after an article has been accepted; schedules do not allow for them. Peer-reviewed ar ticles that require major changes may also require additional review. 2.6
Submitting a paper-only manuscript. I n the rare case o f a typewritten
manuscript, authors are typically required to submit two paper copies of the manuscript; they should keep a third copy for themselves. All copy must be double-spaced to leave sufficient room for pencil-editing marks between the lines. It is essential, moreover, that everything in a paper only manuscript be legible. Anything added in handwriting before the manuscript is submitted to the publisher must be clearly written, in upper- and lowercase letters, directly above the line or in the margin. Avoid writing on the backs of pages in case the publisher photocopies the manuscript. Any correction longer than a short phrase should be provided as a separate document and inserted in the manuscript fol lowing the page to which it pertains-clearly labeled in both places to show where it should be inserted. Finally, to facilitate photocopying, use good-quality paper in a standard size-usually 8 1/2 x 11 inches or A4 (210 x 297 mm) . See also 2.43.
Manuscript Formatting 2.7
Publishers' manuscript-preparation guideli nes. Many publishers have
specific requirements or preferences regarding choice of software and typeface, as well as formats for submitting illustrations and tables along with the manuscript. These should be followed to the letter. Consistency and simplicity in all matters is essential. Authors should know that their manuscripts will almost always be converted into another software en vironment for publication and that, therefore, the consistency and ac curacy of the content (i.e., the words themselves and the order in which they are presented) are more important than the style of presentation. As long as the basic structure of chapters and sections and the like is clear, a simple presentation is always preferable to an elaborately formatted
2.8
M A N US C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
manuscript. Authors who want a more explicit idea o f what publishers look for in the format and structure of a manuscript would do well to consider the steps in a manuscript editor's typical cleanup routine (see 2.80) . 2.s
L i n e spacing. Though authors may prefer to use less line spacing on the screen, publishers have customarily required that any printout be double-spaced-including all extracts and lists, footnotes or endnotes, bibliographies or reference lists, and any other material. The extra line spacing is crucial for manuscripts edited with pencil on paper; some pub lishers will choose to edit the paper copy and update the electronic files based on this edited copy. (Authors concerned about saving paper are encouraged to consult with their publishers about line-spacing require ments and any option for sending PDF instead of paper; see 2.4.) Avoid extra space or blank lines between paragraphs (see 2.12) . If such a break is intended to appear in the printed version, indicate this explicitly with three asterisks set on a line by themselves (see also 1.58). If blank space rather than an ornament is preferred, specify this in a note to the pub lisher. For stanza breaks in poetry, see 2.20.
2. 9
Space between sentences or after colons. One space or two? Like most publishers, Chicago advises leaving a single character space, not two spaces, between sentences and after colons used within a sentence, and this recommendation applies to both the manuscript and the published work. In fact, a well-structured electronic document will never include more than one consecutive character space. See also 2.12, 6.119-21.
2.10
Justification a n � margins. To avoid the appearance ofinconsistent spac
ing between words and sentences, all text in a manuscript should be pre sented flush left (ragged right)-that is, lines should not be "justified" to the right margin. To leave enough room for handwritten queries, mar gins of at least one inch should appear on all four sides of the hard copy. 2 . 11
Tabs versus indents. Tabs are entered with the Tab key. Indents are ap plied using a word processor's indentation feature. Tabs can usually be identified on-screen by the right-pointing arrows that will appear in most word-processing programs when nonprinting characters are revealed; aside from the position of the text, indents are generally signaled on a graphical ruler or by a dialog box for paragraph formatting. (In word pro cessing, a "paragraph" is any string of text that begins on a new line and is followed by a hard return, including not only the blocks of text tradi tionally referred to as paragraphs but also items in a list, headings, etc.) There are three basic types of indent:
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2 . 13
First-line indent. A first-line indent (also called a paragraph indent) is normally applied to each new paragraph of regular text. As its name suggests, only the first line is indented (from the left margin). A first-line indent can be applied either using a word processor's indentation feature or with a tab. Choose one method and use it consistently. Left or right indent. A left indent applies an equal indent relative to the left margin for each line in a paragraph, including the first line and any runover lines, and can be used to set off prose and poetry extracts. Never use tabs to achieve left indents. Indents from the right margin are usually not needed at the manuscript stage. Hanging indent. A hanging indent (also called flush-and-hang), in which every line but the first is indented from the left margin, is used for the items in a list, includ ing a bibliography or reference list or an index. Never use tabs to achieve hanging indents.
In some cases, it will be necessary to use a first-line or hanging indent in combination with a left indent (as for a new paragraph in a block quota tion or for a poetry extract; see 2.19, 2.20) . For the purposes of the man uscript, the typical default value for tabs or indents can normally be used (usually half an inch) . Avoid using two or more consecutive tabs. With the exception of a tab at the beginning of a new paragraph or a tab after a number or symbol in a vertical list (see 2.21) , tabs should never appear within a paragraph. 2.12
Paragraph format. Each new paragraph should begin with a first-line indent, applied either with the Tab key or with your word processor's indentation feature (see 2.11) ; do not use the Space bar. Never use the Enter key or the Tab key in the middle of a paragraph; let the word pro cessor determine the breaks at the ends oflines. Be sure to eliminate any extra character space or tab after the final punctuation at the end of a paragraph; the hard return should follow the punctuation immediately. When a paragraph is interrupted by a prose or poetry extract, list, equa tion, or the like, the text after the interruption begins flush left (i.e., with no first-line indent) unless it constitutes a new paragraph. For prose ex tracts, see 2.19; for poetry, see 2.20; for lists, see 2.21. See also 2.24.
2.13
Hyphenation. The hyphenation function on your word processor should be turned off. The only hyphens that should appear in the manuscript are hyphens that would appear regardless of where they appeared on the page (e.g., in compound forms) . Do not worry if such a hyphen happens to fall at the end of a line or ifthe right-hand margin is extremely ragged. By the same token, do not attempt to manually break excessively long words (e.g., long URLs) with a hyphen. See also 2.96.
2 . 14
M A N US C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
2 . 14
Dashes. For an em dash-one that indicates a break in a sentence like this-either use the em dash character on your word processor or type two hyphens (leave no space on either side) . The 3-em dash, used in some bib liographies for a repeated author name, is usually best left to the manu� script editor; if it must be used, insert either three consecutive em dashes or six unspaced hyphens (see also 14.67) . (For more on the em dash, see 6.8 5-92, 6.93-94.) Ensuring proper use of the en dash-a shorter dash that has special significance in certain types of compounds and in number ranges-is usually considered the manuscript editor's responsibility; au thors can generally avoid the en dash and use hyphens instead. (For more on the en dash, see 6.78-84.)
2 . 1s
Italics, u nderline, and boldface. Though underlining will generally be construed by publishers to mean italics, italics should be used instead wherever italics are intended. (In an electronically redlined manuscript, underlining may denote editorial changes; see 2.84 and fig. 2.4.) An au thor who intends underlining rather than italics to appear in certain in stances in the published work must make these instances clear in a letter to the publisher (or a note to the manuscript editor) . Use boldface only for words that must appear thus in the published version (but see 2.18) .
2.16
Special characters. As far as your software allows, use the character that you intend rather than any keyboard substitute. For example, if you want a prime symbol, use the prime symbol from your word processor's list of special characters rather than an apostrophe. Since the advent of the Unicode standard for character encoding (see 11.2) , many software en vironments include a wide array of special characters without the need for special fonts or other add-ons. Nonetheless, if you run up against a character that is not available to you, enclose a descriptive shorthand in angle brackets; for example, aci might indicate that the publisher should render the Hausa word 6aci. In either case, include a list of special characters used in your manuscript. See tables 11.1 and 11.2, which list some special characters and their names and hexadecimal code points for Unicode. Your list should show how each character is supposed to look; if a character is unavailable to you, copy the correct character from the applicable code chart from the Unicode website or elsewhere or draw it in by hand. If you plan to use a special font that may not support Uni code, consult your publisher first. For quotation marks and apostrophes, see 6.115, 6.117.
2 . 17
Format for chapter titles and titles of other parts. Titles for chapters and other parts of a manuscript usually begin on a new page. Use upper-
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.20
and lowercase letters rather than full capitals. The titles should match the entries in the table of contents. "Chapter 1," "Chapter 2," and so on should appear above the titles to numbered chapters. (For an overview of the parts of a book or a journal, see chapter 1.) 2.18
Format for subheads. Set each subhead on a new line, flush left. Each level of subhead must be clearly distinguished so that the different lev els can be identified and carried over for publication. Levels can be dis tinguished by font size (e.g., larger for first-level subheads, smaller for second-level heads, etc.) . A word processor's style palette can be useful in applying such distinctions and in managing subhead levels. (Authors are encouraged to consult their publishers' manuscript preparation guidelines for the preferred approach.) Use upper- and lowercase letters rather than full capitals. Chicago prefers headline-style capitalization for subheads (see 8.159), with no period added at the end. An exception is made for run-in heads, which are usually italicized and followed by a pe riod and capitalized sentence-style (see 8.158) . See also 1.56.
2 . 19
Format for prose extracts. Prose extracts (also called block quotations) should be indented from the left margin using your word processor's in dentation feature, never with tabs. The first line should not have an addi tional paragraph indent. If there is more than one paragraph within the extract, however, each new paragraph should begin with an additional first-line paragraph indent, which can be added using the Tab key or your word processor's indentation feature. See 2.11. Use a hard return only at the end of the extract and after any paragraphs within the extract. Prose extracts should have the same line spacing as the surrounding text (see 2.8) ; they do not need to appear in a smaller font. The text that follows an extract should get a first-line indent only if it constitutes a new para graph; if it continues the text that introduced the extract, it should start flush left (see 2.12) . See also 13.22-24. For ellipses, see 13.50-58.
2.20
Format for poetry extracts. A poetry extract should be indented but not centered (even if it might appear centered in the printed version) . Use your word processor's indentation feature to assign both a left in dent and a hanging indent to each line. Let runover lines wrap to the next line normally; use a hard return at the end of each full line of poetry but never in the middle of a line, and do not use the Tab key to indent runovers. See 2.11. Runover lines must be clearly distinguished from in dented lines of poetry. If certain lines of a poem are to receive a deeper indent than others, increase the left indent value accordingly. For poetry with unusual spacing or indentation, append a photocopy or scan of the
2.21
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
original printed poem. Indicate a stanza break with a n extra hard return. The source, if given after the extract, should appear in parentheses on a separate line, indented like the first line of the poem. (In the published version, the source may appear flush right.) Poetry extracts should have the same line spacing as the surrounding text (see 2.8) ; they do not need to appear in a smaller font. The text that follows a poetry extract should get a first-line indent only ifit constitutes a new paragraph; if it continues the text that introduced the extract, it should start flush left (see 2.12) . See also 13.25-29. For ellipses, see 13.57. 2.21
Format for lists a n d outlines. Items in an unnumbered list should be for matted using your word processor's indentation feature to assign both a left indent and a hanging indent. Let runover lines wrap to the next line normally; do not use the Tab key to indent runovers. See 2.11. In addi tion, in a numbered or lettered list (including a multilevel list or outline) , each number or letter should normally be followed by a period or other punctuation and a tab. Bullets in a bulleted list are likewise followed by a tab. Alternatively, you may use your word processor's list and outline fea tures, which will apply the necessary indents, tabs, and numbers, letters, punctuation, or symbols automatically. (These automatically generated numbers or letters or symbols may need to be converted to regular text to ensure compatibility with the software used for publication, a task that is normally considered to be the manuscript editor's or publisher's respon sibility.) The text that follows a list should get a first-line indent only if it constitutes a new paragraph; if it continues the text that introduced the list, it should start flush left (see 2 .12) . See also 6.127-32.
2.22
Format for footnotes and endnotes. To take advantage of automatic re numbering, create notes that are linked to the text by using the footnote or endnote function on your word processor. The text of the notes should have the same line spacing as the rest of the manuscript; do not insert an extra hard return between notes (see also 2.8) . Unless your publisher requests otherwise, in the manuscript notes may appear either as foot notes or as chapter or book endnotes (starting over at 1 for each chap ter) , regardless of how they are to appear in the published version. Do not mix footnotes and endnotes unless such a system is truly necessary (see 14.49) . Avoid appending note references to chapter titles (see 1.49) . Notes to tables should be numbered separately (see 2.31) . For note form, see 14.24-60. For some considerations related to citation management software, see 14.5.
2.23
Format for g lossaries a n d lists of abbreviations. Each entry in a glossary or list of abbreviations should begin on a new line, capitalized only if the
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.2s
term is capitalized in the text. Separate each term from the definition that follows with a period, a colon, or an em dash (choose one and use it consistently; see also 1.61, 2.14) . In a glossary, begin the definition with a capital letter, as if it were a new sentence; in a list of abbreviations, the expanded term should be capitalized or lowercased as it would be in text. Unless all definitions consist ofincomplete sentences, each glossary entry should end with a period. Any term or abbreviation that is consis tently italicized in the text (not just on first use) should also be italicized in the glossary or list of abbreviations. (Abbreviations of consistently ital icized terms should generally themselves be italicized; see also 14.60.) Entries should have the same line spacing as the rest of the manuscript (see 2.8) and may be formatted in flush-and-hang style or with ordinary first-line paragraph indents (see 2.11) . Avoid multiple columns. See also 1.44 and 1.61. 2.24
Format for bibliographies and reference lists. Each entry in a bibliogra phy or reference list should begin on a new line. Use your word proces sor's indentation feature to assign a hanging indent to each line. Never use the Tab key to indent runover lines. See 2.11. Use the same line spac ing as for the rest of the manuscript (see 2.8) . For capitalization, use of italics, and other matters of bibliographic style, see chapter 14. For some considerations related to citation management software, see 14.5.
2.25
Format for abstracts a n d keywords. Authors may be required to submit an abstract and keywords, not only for the book as a whole but for in dividual chapters as well. Abstracts and keywords are typically submitted as a separate file; some publishers provide a template. A book abstract normally consists of a single paragraph, not longer than 500 words, with no tables, lists, illustrations, or notes; chapter abstracts are usually some what shorter. (Publishers will often specify a word limit for each.) The book abstract should give a clear summary of the book's main arguments and conclusions. Chapter abstracts should give a clear overview of each chapter. Keywords, typically a set of five to ten key terms, accompany the book abstract, with additional sets for any chapter abstracts. Keywords are designed to enhance a book's visibility to search engines by repeating significant terms found in the abstract, though they can also include a synonym or other related term that users might be expected to enter in a search. Each keyword should consist of a single word (e.g., Olympics) or an accepted compound of no more than a few words (e.g., table tennis) . Authors should take care in writing an abstract and choosing keywords; though they usually do not appear in the book itself (except in the sci ences) , they often form the basis of the promotional copy or descriptive metadata shared with libraries and booksellers. See also 1.76. Journal
2.26
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
publishers usually have their own set o f requirements fo r abstracts that authors can consult; see also 1.93.
Preparing Illustrations and Tables 2.26
Formatting a n d submitting illustrations, captions, a n d tables. Publish ers usually prefer separate files for illustrations. Many publishers also prefer tables in separate files, but those created using a word processor may not need to be; consult your publisher. The approximate placement of illustrations or tables submitted as separate files should be called out in the text, keeping in mind that the exact locations of figures in a man uscript will be determined during typesetting (see 2.30) . Captions for all illustrations should be furnished in a separate file; any list of illustrations should follow the table of contents (see 1.39) . For a more detailed over . view of illustrations and tables, see chapter 3.
2.27
Subm itting artwork. Text figures that are to be supplied in digital for
mat or reproduced by scanning a hard-copy original-such as paintings, maps, and photographic prints-should be furnished according to the publisher's specifications. Publishers often prefer to do their own scans. Glossy prints must be clearly labeled, usually on the back of the print or on a self-sticking label, in a manner that does not impair their quality (see 3.16) . For further discussion, see 3.15-20. 2.28
Numbering illustrations. Illustrations may be consecutively numbered, or, in scientific and technical books, heavily illustrated books, and books with chapters by different authors, double numeration may be used. In double numerati on, provide the chapter number, followed by a period, followed by the figure number (e.g., fig. 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . . , 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, . . , etc.) . In the event a figure is dropped or added, double numeration will simplify the work needed to renumber not just the illustrations but any applicable cross-references, especially in a heavily illustrated book. Illus trations are enumerated separately from tables. Plates to be grouped in a gallery are numbered separately from figures interspersed in the text (see 3.14) . Even if numbers are not to appear with the illustrations in the published version, working numbers should be assigned for identifica tion and should accompany the captions (see 3.13) . For more details, see 3.8-14. .
2.29
Numbering tables. Tables may be numbered consecutively throughout a book or, in a book with many tables or with chapters by different au thors, double numeration may be used (e.g., table 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . . , 2.1,
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.32
2.2, 2.3, . . . , etc.) . In a book with many tables, double numeration can simplify the task of renumbering in the event a table is dropped or added. Tables are enumerated separately from illustrations. Very simple tabular material (e.g., a two-column list) may be presented, unnumbered, along with the text. See also 3.50-51. 2.30
Formatting text references a n d callouts t o tables a n d i l l ustrations. A text reference is addressed to the reader ("see table 5," or "fig. 3.2 ") and will appear in the published version. A callout is an instruction, which will not appear in the published work, telling where a table or an illus tration is to appear. In the manuscript, a callout should be enclosed in angle brackets or some other delimiter and placed on a separate line fol lowing the paragraph in which the table or illustration is first referred to ("
"; "") or, if a later location is preferable, where the table or illustration is to appear. Tables and such illustrations as graphs and diagrams require both a text reference and a placement callout, unless they are to be grouped in a section separate from the regular text. Illustrations that are not referred to in the text still usually require placement callouts (see 3.8-14) ; unnumbered tables pre sented in the run of text do not require callouts (see 3.51) .
2.31
Formatting table notes a n d source notes. Source notes appear at the foot of the table before any other notes. They are preceded by the word "Source" followed by a colon. Other notes to the table as a whole follow any source note and may be preceded by the word "Note" followed by a colon. Specific notes follow any other notes, and the notes to each table must be enumerated separately from any notes to the text (see 3.79) . For a fuller discussion of notes to tables, see 3.76-80.
Cross-Checking the Manuscript 2.32
Items to cross-check. Before submitting a manuscript for publication, an author must cross-check all of its parts to avoid discrepancies. The following list includes major items to check:
All titles and subtitles (introduction, parts, chapters, etc.) against table of con tents Subheads against table of contents (if subheads are included there; see 1.38) Illustrations against their captions, text references, and callouts Illustration captions against list of illustrations Tables against their text references and callouts Table titles against list of tables
2.33
M A N US C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
All internal cross-references o r hyperlinks (see also 2.35) All URLs and other external links All quotations against their original sources Notes against their text references Notes against bibliography (see chapter 14) Parenthetical text citations against reference list (see chapter 15) Abbreviations against list of abbreviations In a multiauthor work, authors' names in table of contents against chapter head ings and list of contributors 2.33
Checking quotations against original sources. All quoted matter should
be checked against the original sources, for both content and source ci tations, before a manuscript is submitted for publication. This authorial task is crucial because manuscript editors will not have access to all the sources that the author has used. 2 . 34
Checking URLs and other external links. Any URLs or other links to out
side resources (e.g., database accession numbers)-including any men tioned in the text-should be double-checked just before a manuscript is submitted for publication. Those that no longer point to the intended source should be updated. At the same time, source citations that include links should be checked for completeness according to the guidelines in chapter 14; in most cases, readers should be able to find the resource with or without the link. See also 14.6-18. 2.35
Checking cross-references. All cross-references, whether to a chapter,
a section, an appendix, or even a sentence of text, should be verified be fore a manuscript is submitted for publication. A chapter number or title may have been ch anged, or a passage deleted, after the original refer ence to it. Cross-references are best made to chapter or section numbers because these are known and can be entered at the manuscript stage. (Keep in mind, however, that references to whole chapters are often gra tuitous and unhelpful; it's best to avoid peppering a manuscript with "see chapter 2 above" and "see chapter 4 below.") References to page num bers are generally discouraged because the pagination of a published work will not correspond to that of the manuscript, and the correct num ber will have to be supplied later in the process (usually by the author) . Moreover, such cross-references may become meaningless in e-book versions that lack fixed page numbers (successful linking will require page number data from the printed version) . Where absolutely neces sary, use three zeros (e.g., "see p. 000") to signal the need to supply the final page number.
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.37
Preparing the Electronic Manuscript Files 2.36
Publishers' g uidelines for preparing and submitting electronic files.
For book-length projects, publishers may prefer to get separate electronic files for each of the various elements-front matter through table of con tents, preface, chapters, appendixes, and so on (some of which will in clude embedded notes) . Appropriately named separate files-especially for complex works-can help publishers get a sense of and deal with a book's component parts. Some authors (and editors) , however, will pre fer to work in a single file to facilitate searching and to take advantage of the outline views and other navigational tools available in modern word processors. Authors should always consult their publishers' man uscript preparation guidelines before submitting a final manuscript, whether for a book or for a journal article. Illustrations, which publishers handle separately from the text, should always be in separate files; ta bles created in an author's word-processing software may not need to be (see 2.26) . 2.37
Naming and saving the electronic files. File names for a book should correspond more or less to the parts of the manuscript as listed in the table of contents (see 1.4) . File names that include an author name and a descriptive label will help publishers keep track of them. For books with more than a few parts, use file names that will line up in book order in an alphanumerically sorted directory. The numerals added to the beginning of each of the following file names will facilitate this:
01 Jones contents 02 Jones preface 03 Jones chapOl 04 Jones chap02 12 Jones biblio
File names usually also include extensions (e.g., .docx or .odf) ; whether or not these are visible, they should never be changed or deleted. A sep arate file for illustration captions might start with "00" (e.g., "00 Jones captions"). Electronic artwork files should usually be submitted as a separate group and named accordingly (e.g., "Jones fig 1.1,'' "Jones fig 1.2,'' etc.) . File names for color illustrations may include the word color, especially if black-and-white illustrations have also been submitted. A
2.38
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
complete list o f all submitted files, including files for captions and illus trations, should accompany the manuscript. If PDF versions are required, these files should also be listed. If a hard copy is required, the manuscriptshould be arranged in the order specified in the table of contents. 2.38
N umbering manuscript pages. Each page of a manuscript, whether electronic or hard copy, must be numbered. Manuscripts submitted as multiple files need not be numbered consecutively from page 1 through to the end of the book. Instead, to ensure that no two pages in the manu script are numbered the same, add descriptive page headers next to the page numbers in each file (e.g., " Introduction: 1," " Introduction: 2," etc.; "chapter 1: 1," "chapter 1: 2," etc.) . Arabic numerals may be used for the front matter even though these pages may take on roman numerals in the published work. (It is typically the job of the manuscript editor to in dicate where roman numerals will apply; see 2.75.) Manuscripts submit ted as one file, on the other hand, can be numbered consecutively across the book starting with page 1 (see also 2.37) . In a paper-only manuscript, pages added after the initial numbering may be numbered with a or b (e.g., 55, 55a, 55b) .
2.39
Removing comments and revision marks from t h e final files. Authors should delete any comments embedded in their electronic manuscripts before submitting them for publication. This includes any text formatted as "hidden" and any comments inserted using the commenting feature in a word processor. Any outstanding queries should be addressed in a cover letter. Moreover, it is crucial that any revision marks (or "tracked changes") be removed before the manuscript is submitted-and that the final manuscript represent the very latest version. (Manuscript editors should always check for hidden text, comments, and revision marks and alert the author or publisher about any potential problems.)
2.40
Backing up the final manuscript. In addition to saving a separate elec tronic copy of each crucial stage of work on their manuscripts, authors are advised to save a backup copy of the version sent to the publisher for editing and publication. Prudence dictates retaining copies in at least two separate locations (e.g., on a computer hard drive and on a portable drive or with a secure file-hosting service) . See also 2.5.
Preparing a Manuscript for a Multiauthor Book or Journal 2.41
Volume editor's manuscript preparation responsibilities. The specific
responsibilities of the volume editor, contributors, and publisher (includ-
Manuscript Preparation Guidelinesfor Authors
2.42
ing manuscript editor) must be determined before a multiauthor manu script is submitted. If there is more than one volume editor, the responsi bilities of each must be spelled out. After ensuring that the contributors furnish their papers in a uniform style agreed to by all parties, the volume editor is usually responsible for the following: Getting manuscripts, including illustrations, from all contributors in a form ac ceptable to the publisher well before the date for submitting the volume Securing (or ensuring that the contributors have secured) written permission from copyright owners to reproduce material in copyrighted works published elsewhere, illustrations taken from another work, and the like (see chapter 4) Editing each contribution for sense and checking references and other docu mentation for uniformity of style (unless the publisher agrees to allow different documentation styles for separate chapters; see also 2.64) , then sending edited manuscripts to the contributors for their approval before the volume is submitted to the publisher (an activity distinct from the manuscript editing that will be done later by the publisher) Providing a list of contributors with their affiliations and brief biographical notes to be included in the volume Providing a title page, table of contents, and any necessary prefatory material Sending the complete manuscript to the publisher in a form acceptable for publi cation (having first made sure that the manuscript includes only the latest version of each contributor's chapter) Adhering to the publisher's schedule, ensuring that contributors do likewise, keeping track of the contributors' whereabouts at all stages of publication, and assuming the responsibilities of any contributor who cannot fulfill them
Most if not all of these responsibilities also apply to journal editors. 2.42
Additional responsibilities of the volume editor. Depending on the ar
rangement with the publisher, the volume editor may also be responsible for the following: Sending a publishing agreement (provided by the publisher) to each contributor and returning the agreements, fully executed, to the publisher (see 4.58) Checking the edited manuscript and responding to all queries, or distributing the edited manuscript to the contributors and checking it after their review to ensure that all queries have been answered Proofreading the final version of the volume or delegating proofreading to the contributors and then checking their corrections Preparing the index
2.43
M A N US C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
Compiling a Manuscriptfrom Previously Published Material 2.43
Preparing previously published material. Manuscripts for an anthol ogy or other work comprising previously published material are said to have been compiled. If the compiler retypes the original source or scans it using optical character recognition (OCR) , the resulting text should be incorporated into a manuscript that follows the formatting requirements outlined in paragraphs 2.7-25. Manuscripts consisting of retyped text or text prepared with OCR must be proofread word for word against the original material before the final manuscript is submitted to the publisher for editing; in addition, publishers may request copies of the originals. If the original material is submitted on paper only, make sure the material is entirely legible (publishers may prefer legible single-sided photocopies or scans to pages from the original source) . Unless there is ample space to insert corrections above the printed lines, any corrections should be written in the margins (see 2.119-33) . See also 4.105.
2.44
Perm issible changes to previously published material. The compiler of previously published material may make the following changes to the published material without editorial comment: notes may be renum bered; cross-references to parts of the original work that are no longer relevant may be deleted; obvious typographical errors and inadvertent grammatical slips may be silently corrected. See also 13.7-8. If wholesale changes have been made-for example, in spelling or capitalization con ventions or notes style-the compiler should note such changes in a pref ace or elsewhere. For deletions indicated by ellipsis points, see 13.50-58.
2.45
Footnotes or endnotes i n previously published material. Footnotes that appear as such in the original pages may be presented as footnotes or endnotes in the published version. If a compiler's or volume editor's notes are being added along with the original footnotes or endnotes, the new notes should be intermingled with but distinguished from the orig inal notes (see 14.51) ; if the original material is being submitted to the publisher on paper only, it may be preferable to produce a separate elec tronic document for the notes.
2.46
Source notes for previously published material. Each selection of pre viously published material should be accompanied either by a headnote (a brief introduction preceding the selection) or by an unnumbered foot note on the first page of text. Include the source, the name of the copy right owner if the selection is in copyright (see chapter 4, esp. 4.2-49) ,
Manuscript Editing
2.49
and the original title if it has been changed. See also 14.54. If a selection has previously appeared in various places and different versions, the source note need not give the entire publishing history but must state which version is being reprinted. 2.47
Reprod ucing previously published illustrations. Compilers should contact their publisher about how to obtain illustrations from previ ously published material in a format suitable for printing. Photocopies of illustrations are not acceptable for reproduction. The compiler should procure glossy prints or the original publisher's scans. If these are un available, it may be possible to reproduce an illustration from the original publication.
Levels of manuscript editing and who is responsible. Manuscript ed iting, also called copyediting or line editing, requires attention to every word and mark of punctuation in a manuscript, a thorough knowledge of the style to be followed, and the ability to make quick, logical, and defensible decisions. It is undertaken by the publisher-either in-house or through the services of a freelance editor-when a manuscript has been accepted for publication. (Self-publishing authors, too, can benefit from the services of a professional editor.) It may include both mechan ical editing (see 2.49) and substantive editing (see 2.50) . It is distinct from developmental editing (not discussed in this manual) , which more directly shapes the content of a work, the way material should be pre sented, the need for more or less documentation and how it should be handled, and so on. Since developmental editing may involve total re writing or reorganization of a work, it should be done-if needed before manuscript editing begins. For a comprehensive overview of the editing process, see What Editors Do: The Art, Craft, and Business ofBook Editing, edited by Peter Ginna (bibliog. 2.1) . For more on developmental editing, consult Scott Norton's Developmental Editing: A Handbookfor Freelancers, Authors, and Publishers (bibliog. 2.1) . -
2.4 9
Mechanical editing. Mechanical editing involves the consistent appli cation of a particular style to a written work-including text and docu mentation and any tables and illustrations. The central focus of part 2 in this manual, style is used here to refer to rules related to capitaliza tion, spelling, hyphenation, and abbreviations; punctuation, including
2.50
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
ellipsis points, parentheses, and quotation marks; and the way numbers are treated. Mechanical editing also includes attention to grammar, syn tax, and usage. The rules set forth in a style manual like this one may be supplemented by a publisher's house style or the style of a particular dis cipline. Journal editors in particular follow a journal's established style, augmented by additional resources specific to the subject area. Books in a series or multivolume works should all follow one style consistently, as should separately authored chapters in a multiauthor book (but see 2.41) . The style of any work, as well as occasional deviations from it, must be determined by author, editor, and publisher before editing begins. For substantive editing, see 2.50. See also 2.51, 2.55. 2.50
Su bstantive editi ng. Substantive editing deals with the organization
and presentation of existing content. It involves rewriting to improve style or to eliminate ambiguity, reorganizing or tightening disorganized or loosely written sections, adjusting or recasting tables, and other re medial activities. (It should not be confused with developmental edit ing, a more drastic process; see 2 .48.) In general, no substantive editing should be undertaken without agreement between publisher and editor, especially for book-length works; if major substantive work is needed, the author should be consulted and perhaps invited to approve a sample before the editing proceeds. A journal's manuscript editors, however, working on rigid schedules, may need to do substantive editing without prior consultation with authors if problems of organization, writing style, and presentation have not been addressed at earlier stages. 2.51
Ed itorial discretion. A light editorial hand is nearly always more ef fective than a heavy one. An experienced editor will recognize and not tamper with unusual figures of speech or idiomatic usage and will know when to make an editorial change and when simply to suggest it, whether to delete a repetition or an unnecessary recapitulation or simply to point it out to the author, and how to suggest tactfully that an expression may be inappropriate (or that an assertion might not be accurate) . An author's own style should be respected, whether flamboyant or pedestrian. On the other hand, manuscript editors should be aware of any requirements of a publisher's house style, including any policies that are essential to the publisher-for example, those covering bias-free language (see 5.25160) . For communicating with the author and querying, see 2.68-72.
2.52
Estimating editing time. It is important to come up with a realistic es timate for how long the job of manuscript editing should take. This esti-
Manuscript Editing
2.53
mate (which is typically determined by the publisher and agreed to by the manuscript editor or, in the case of self-publishers, negotiated be tween author and manuscript editor) is important not only in ensuring the quality of the editor's work but in determining a reasonable fee as well as a schedule for completing the work. Most estimates start with the length of the manuscript. Because of inevitable variatiop.s in typefaces and margins and other formatting characteristics from one manuscript to another, the length is best determined by a word count rather than a page count (a word count can be derived from a page count for paper only manuscripts) . A 100,000-word book manuscript, edited by an ex perienced editor, might take seventy-five to one hundred hours of work before being sent to the author, plus ten to twenty additional hours after the author's review. This rough estimate may need to be adjusted to take into account any complexities in the text or documentation, the pres ence and characteristics of any tables and illustrations, and the degree of electronic formatting and markup that an editor will need to remove or impose (see 2.80) . Ifin doubt, edit a small sample to serve as the basis of an estimate. An additional factor is of course the publication schedule, which may determine how many days are available for the editing stage or, in turn, may need to be adjusted depending on the estimate of edit ing time. Also pertinent is information about the author's availability to review the edited manuscript, amenability to being edited, propensity to revise, and so forth. 2.53
Stages o f manuscript editing. Editors usually go through a manuscript three times-once to do the initial editing, easily the longest stage; a second time to review, refine, and sometimes correct the editing; and a third time after the author's review (see 2.72, 2.88) . Editors working on electronic manuscripts may also be required to perform an initial, systematic cleanup (see 2.80)-though a publisher's manuscript editing or production department may perform such a cleanup before turn ing a manuscript over to an editor. Most editors begin the initial editing stage-sometimes in conjunction with the electronic cleanup-by look ing through the entire document to assess the nature and scope of the work that will be required, to identify any matters that should be clar ified with the author before editing begins, and to reduce the number of surprises that could cause delays if discovered later in the process. Then, some editors will prefer to edit the notes, bibliography, tables, fig ures, and other components separately from the text; others edit notes and other textual apparatus, or a part of it, along with the text. What ever the procedure, all elements must be compared to ensure that the notes match their text references, citations correspond to the entries in
2.54
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
the bibliography o r reference list, tables correspond to any discussion of them in the text, and so on. 2.54
Choosing a d ictionary a n d other reference works. A good dictionary is
essential to a manuscript editor. Chicago recommends Webster's Third New International Dictionary and the latest edition of its chief abridg ment, Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary; both are revised and up dated online under the imprint of Merriam-Webster (see bibliog. 3.1) . Editors also need reference works that furnish reliable spellings and identifications of persons, places, historical events, technical terminol ogy, and the like. For some basic reference works, see section 4 of the bibliography. For a complete discussion of names and terms, see chap ter 8. If a system of documentation other than Chicago is to be used, the applicable style manual should be at hand (see bibliog. 1.1) . 2.55
Keeping a n editorial style sheet. To ensure consistency, fo r each man uscript the editor must keep an alphabetical list of words or terms to be capitalized, italicized, hyphenated, spelled, or otherwise treated in any way unique to the manuscript. Changes that are made simply for consis tency with house style need not be noted on the style sheet. It is enough to note, for example, "In all other respects, Chicago style is followed." (For paper-only manuscripts it is useful to add the page number of the first occurrence of each item.) Special punctuation, unusual diacritics, and other items should also be noted on the style sheet. Not only the au thor but also the publisher may need to refer to the style sheet at various stages of editing and production. See figure 2.3.
2.56
Fact-checking. I n book publishing, the author i s finally responsible for the accuracy ofa work; most book publishers do not perform fact checking in any systematic way or expect it of their manuscript editors unless specifically agreed upon up front. Nonetheless, obvious errors, including errors in mathematical calculations, should always be pointed out to the author, and questionable proper names, bibliographic refer ences, and the like should be checked and any apparent irregularities queried. Editors need to be systematic about what they fact-check to avoid being distracted from the work at hand. It will sometimes be ef ficient to point out and correct obvious errors of fact that can be easily double-checked against reliable sources. For anything beyond that, how ever, fact-checking should be limited to what is needed to form an effec tive and judicious query to the author (see 2.69) . For more information, consult Brooke Borel, The Chicago Guide to Fact-Checking (bibliog. 2.1) .
Manuscript Editing
2.ss
F I G U RE 2 . 3 . Manuscript editor's style sheet. When prepared for a pencil-edited manuscript, the style sheet usually indicates the page number for the first appear ance of each item.
Editing Specific Parts of a Manuscript 2.57
Editing front matter. An editor should check any half title, title page,
table of contents, and list of illustrations against the text and captions and against any applicable documentation included with the manuscript; discrepancies should be queried. If subheads are to be dropped from the table of contents, the author should be consulted (see also 1.38) . For books, the editor should pay attention to the order of elements and may be asked to label the manuscript to ensure correct roman numeral pagi nation (see 1.7; see also 2.75) . Publishers generally prepare the copyright page, though editors may be expected to review the author's biographical note and other elements (see 1.20; see also 1.66) . 2. 5 8
Editing part titles and chapter or article titles. The editor of a book manuscript should ensure that part and chapter titles and their subtitles, 83
2.59
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
if any, are consistent with the text in spelling, hyphenation, and italics. Chicago recommends that all titles be in headline style unless a work is part of a series or journal that follows some other capitalization style (see 8.159) . Part and chapter titles must be checked against the table of con tents, and any discrepancy must be queried. Each title should be iden tified on the manuscript according to the publisher's requirements (for electronic manuscripts, see 2.81-83; for paper manuscripts, see 2.99) . See also 1.47-54. 2.59
Editing subheads. Subheads should be checked for consistency with the text in spelling, hyphenation, and italics, and for parallel structure and tone. The text that immediately follows a subhead should be adjusted as needed for proper wording relative to the subhead (see 1.55) . If there is more than one level of subhead, the hierarchy needs to be checked for sense and each level clearly identified (for electronic manuscripts, see 2.81-83; for paper manuscripts, see 2.99) . If there are more than three levels of subhead, determine whether the lowest level can be elim inated. For electronic manuscripts, it may be wise to apply the appropri ate markup for the different subhead levels based on the author's typo graphic distinctions at the outset, lest these distinctions be eliminated by any cleanup routine (see 2.80) . If subheads are to appear in the table of contents, they must be cross-checked for consistency. Chicago rec ommends that all subheads be in headline style unless a work is part of a series or journal that follows some other capitalization style (see 8.159) . But if an author has consistently used sentence style for subheads (see 8.158), that style should not be altered without consultation with the au thor and publisher, since it may be more appropriate in a particular work. If the majority of subheads consist of full sentences, sentence style may be preferred; no period is added except in the case of a run-in head (see 1.56) . See also 1.55-58.
2.60
Editing cross-references. All references to tables, figures, appendixes, bibliographies, or other parts of a work should be checked by the man uscript editor. If the author, for example, mentions a statistic for 2017 and refers readers to table 4, which gives statistics only through 2016, the editor must point out the discrepancy. Place-names on a map that illustrate the text must be spelled as in the text. Cross-references to spe cific pages-the numbering of which is subject to change in the published version-should be minimized or eliminated. See also 2.35.
2.61
Editing quotations and previously published material. Aside from ad justing quotation marks and ellipsis points and the like to conform to house style (see 13.7-8) , the editor must do nothing to quoted material
Manuscript Editing
2.63
unless the author is translating it from another language (or moderniz ing it) , in which case it may be lightly edited (see 11.16) ; transcribed in terviews or field notes may also be subject to editing (see 13.48, 13.49) . Misspelled words and apparent transcription errors should be queried. An author who appears to have been careless in transcribing should be asked to recheck all quotations for accuracy, including punctuation. The editor should ensure that sources are given for all quoted material, whether following the quotation or in a note. In editing previously pub lished material, especially if it has been abridged, the editor should read for sense to ensure that nothing is out of order or has been inadvertently omitted. Discrepancies should be queried. If the previously published material has been provided on paper only, any ambiguous end-of-line hyphens should be clarified (see 2.96) . See also 2.43. 2.62
Editing notes. Each note must be checked against the text to ensure that its text reference is correct and in the right place and that any terms used in the note are treated the same way as in the text. When notes are to be printed as footnotes, the author may be asked to shorten an excessively long note or to incorporate some of the note into the text. Lists, tables, and figures should be placed not in footnotes but in the text or in an ap pendix. Manuscript editors may sometimes request an additional note to accommodate a needed source or citation. More frequently, in con sultation with the author, they will combine notes or delete unneeded ones. See 14.56-60. An editor working on paper must take special care in renumbering notes. See also 2.63.
2.63
Editing note citations, bibliographies, a n d reference lists. Citations in notes, bibliographies, and reference lists must be carefully checked for documentation style (chapters 14 and 15; but see 2.64) . Further, every subsequent reference to a work previously cited in the text or in a note must be given in the same form as the first reference or in the same short ened form (see 14.29-36) . In a work containing a bibliography as well as notes, each citation in the notes should be checked against the bibli ography and any discrepancy resolved or, if necessary, queried in both contexts so that the author can easily compare them (see 2.69) . A bibli ography need not include every work cited in the notes and may properly include some entries that are not cited. If author-date style is used, the editor will have checked all text citations against the reference list while editing the text and will have queried or resolved discrepancies. Bibli ographies and reference lists should be checked for alphabetical order and, where applicable, for chronological order. For bibliographies, see 14.61-71; for reference lists and text citations, see 15.10-31. Many editors find it helpful to edit the bibliography or reference list before the text and 85
2 . 64
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
notes. Editors working on-screen may need to make sure that the source citations and related text are free of any underlying codes generated by the author in creating or organizing them (see 14.5) . 2.64
Flexi bility in style for source citations. Imposing house style on notes prepared in another style can be immensely time-consuming and, if the existing form is consistent and clear to the reader, is often unnecessary. This is especially true of books, many of which are intended to stand alone. Before making sweeping changes, the manuscript editor should consult with the author or the publisher or both. In journal editing, on the other hand, such flexibility is generally not allowed. For the published journal, citations are often linked to the resources themselves; the cre ation of such links can be facilitated by a consistent, predictable format · across articles.
2.65
Editing ill ustrations a n d captions. Wording in diagrams, charts, maps, and the like should generally conform to the spelling and capitalization used in captions or the text. Captions in turn must conform to the style of the text. Source information should be edited in consultation with the publisher and in conformance with any letters of permission. (If permis sions are outstanding, the publisher, not the editor, should take up the matter with the author.) Illustrations may be added, dropped, or renum bered during editing; it is therefore essential to make a final check of all illustrations against their text references and callouts (see 2.30) and against the captions and list of illustrations to be sure that they match and that the illustrations show what they say they do. For details on pre paring illustrations and captions, see 3.3-46. For checking credits, see 3.29-37.
2.66
Editing tables. Tables are usually best edited together, as a group, to en sure consistent style and presentation. Tables should also be checked for consistent numbering and correspondence with the text-including text references and placement callouts (see 2.30) . For specific guidelines on editing tables, see 3.81-88.
2.67
Editing indexes. The schedule for editing an index-which, if it depends on page number locators rather than paragraph numbers, is almost never prepared before book or journal pages have been composed-must usu ally correspond to the schedule for reviewing corrections to proofs. For a more detailed discussion, including an index-editing checklist, see 16.132-34.
Manuscript Editing
2.69
Communicating with Authors 2.68
Contacting t h e author after a n initial review of t h e manuscript. Editors of book-length works are urged to contact their authors early on, after an initial review of the manuscript. This is especially important if an editor has questions or plans to make significant changes that, in the event the author proves not to be amenable, might take time and effort to undo. Likewise, to expedite production, a journal's manuscript editors may no tify authors right away of any plans for systematic changes. Most authors are content to submit to a house style; those who are not may be willing to compromise. Unless usage is determined by journal or series style, the author's wishes should generally be respected. For a manuscript that re quires extensive changes, it may be wise, if the schedule allows, to send a sample of the editing for the author's approval before proceeding (see 2.50) .
2.69
Writing author comments a n d queries. Editors may generally impose a
consistent style and correct errors without further comment-assuming these changes are apparent on the edited manuscript. Corrections to less obvious problems may warrant a comment. Comments should be con cise, and they should avoid sounding casual, pedantic, condescending, or indignant; often, a simple "OK?" is enough. Comments that are not answerable by a yes or a no may be more specific: "Do you mean X or Y?" Examples of instances in which an editor might comment or query include the following: To note, on an electronic manuscript, that a particular global change has been corrected silently (i.e., without marking or tracking the change) after the first in stance To point out a discrepancy, as between two spellings in a name, or between a source cited differently in the notes than in the bibliography To point out an apparent omission, such as a missing quotation mark or a missing source citation To point out a possible error in a quotation To point out repetition (e.g., "Repetition intentional?" or "Rephrased to avoid repetition; OK?") To ask for verification, as of a name or term whose spelling cannot be easily ver ified To ask for clarification where the text is ambiguous or garbled To point to the sources an editor has consulted in correcting errors of fact (but see 2.56)
2.70
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
For the mechanics o f entering queries o n a manuscript, see 2 . 8 7 (for electronic manuscripts) and 2.92 (for paper manuscripts) . 2.70
Writing a cover letter to the author. The letter sent to the author with the edited manuscript, or sometimes separately, should include some or all of the following items (unless already communicated) :
An explanation of the nature and scope of the editing-for example, adjustment of spelling and punctuation to conform to house style (or to a particular style manual) and occasional rephrasing for clarity or to eliminate inadvertent rep etition If the editing has been shown, an indication of how this has been done-that is, with change-tracking (redlining) software (see 2.84) or with pencil and paper ' (2.91)-and brier instructions for interpreting the marks Instructions as to how the author should respond to queries, veto any unwanted editing, and make any further adjustments to the edited manuscript (see 2.88, 2.91) A warning that the author's review of the edited manuscript constitutes the last opportunity to make any substantive changes, additions, or deletions and that quoted matter and citations should be checked if necessary A reminder to review the editing carefully, since even editors are fallible and the correction of any errors missed in editing and not caught until proofs may be deemed "author's alterations" and charged to the author (see 2.136) A reminder to retain a copy of the reviewed and corrected manuscript (to refer to at the proofreading stage) The deadline for return of the edited copy A brief discussion about the index, if any-whether the author is to prepare it, whether instructions are needed (see chapter 16) , or whether a freelance indexer is to be engaged at the ·author's expense A request for confirmation ofthe author's contact information and availability for the rest of the publishing process 2.71
Sending the edited manuscript to the author. An electronically edited
book manuscript-because of its length and, often, its complexity-may be sent to the author as hard copy (or as a PDF file that the author is asked to print out) . The author reads and marks this printout as necessary, then returns it to the editor, who incorporates the author's marks into the electronic manuscript. The author may instead review the electronic manuscript (using the same word-processing software that the editor ha s used)-a procedure that saves printing and shipping costs. An editor working with an author in this manner needs to make sure the author does not make any undocumented changes-inadvertently or otherwise. (One strategy is to lock the document for editing such that any changes
Manuscript Editing
2.73
the author makes will be visibly tracked.) Alternatively, especially for article-length works, an author may be asked to review and annotate a PDF version of the edited manuscript on-screen (see 2.133) . A pencil edited manuscript should be scanned or photocopied before being sent to the author; likewise, authors are advised to photocopy or scan paper manuscripts with their handwritten comments before sending them back to the editor. Any manuscript that has been pencil edited-as well as electronically edited printouts that have been marked up by hand-is one of a kind; if lost, the work must be done over. 2.72
Checki ng the author's review of the ed ited manuscript. When the
manuscript comes back from the author, the editor goes through it once again to see what the author has done, checking that all queries have been answered and editing any new material. (If the author has rewrit ten extensively, another editing pass and author review may be needed.) Except for style adjustments, the author's version should prevail; if that version is unacceptable for any reason, a compromise should be sought. As a part of this process, the editor updates the electronic files (see 2.89) or, if a manuscript is to be updated or typeset from a pencil-edited paper copy, clarifies or retypes the new material and crosses out the queries (see 2.92) .
Preparing a Final Manuscriptfor Production 2.73
Ensuring correct markup. Ensuring correct markup for a manuscript
entails double-checking that each of its component parts has been prop erly identified in the final, edited manuscript, according to whatever system of markup has been used at that stage. For a book, these parts will include title and table of contents, chapters and sections and sub sections, individual subheads, paragraphs of text, extracts, lists, notes, illustrations and captions, tables, and so forth. {Journal articles and other smaller documents may include fewer component parts.) Character level markup must also be checked. This includes the markup required for any numeral, symbol, letter, word, or phrase that might be differenti ated from the surrounding text-for example, a word or phrase that might be italicized for emphasis or a cross-reference (like the ones at the end of this paragraph) that might be hyperlinked online. Checking markup is usually the manuscript editor's responsibility, at least initially. Manu script editors are closest to the content and will be able to spot any miss ing or incorrectly identified elements, or items that are not accounted for in the publisher's design template or style sheets. Once a manuscript is in production, however, markup generally becomes the responsibility
2 . 74
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
o f the publisher's production department. (Self-published authors who do not engage the services of a manuscript editor or book designer will need to pay close attention to the details described in this section and to be aware of any formatting and submission guidelines provided by their self-publishing platform.) For electronic markup options, see 2.81-83; for paper manuscripts, see 2.99. For an overview of the parts of a book or a journal, see chapter 1. 2 . 74
Type specifications and hand markup. An editor may occasionally need
to mark up the hard copy of a manuscript with appropriate type specifi cations at the first occurrence of the element they apply to. For example, in the margin next to the first block of regular text, "text: 10/12 Times Roman x 26" (meaning 10-point type with 12-point leading, each line 26 picas wide) ; and next to the first extract, "extract: 9/11 Times Roman; in dent 2 pi from left." As long as all extracts have been identified as "ext," all first-level subheads as "A," and so forth, markup can be kept to a min imum. For more on hand markup, see 2.90-99. 2.75
Ensuring correct pagination. Publishers may require editors to indicate on the manuscript where roman page numbers are to end and arabic numbers begin-whether or not the number will actually appear (i.e., whether the folio is to be "expressed" or "blind"; see 1.46) . Furthermore, if there is a part title and the first chapter begins on page 3, "arabic p. 3 " will have t o be specified a t the chapter opening. The editor might also b e required t o specify whether subsequent elements are t o begin o n a recto or on a verso (see 1.4) . Repagination of typeset, printed books is expen sive; the editor should check that all elements-in the front matter, the text, and the back matter-are in their correct order and that the order is reflected in the tabfe of contents. For journals, see 1.81.
2 . 76
Preparing running heads. The editor may be required to provide a list of suggested copy for running heads (or feet) (see 1.10-16) . The list must clearly indicate which heads are to appear on versos (left-hand pages) and which on rectos (right-hand pages) . To fit on a single line, usually containing the page number as well (see 1.6) , a chapter or article title may have to be shortened for a running head but must include the key terms in the title. (In some cases, the key terms will be in the chapter sub title.) For certain languages other than English, it is important to retain any word that governs the case ending of another word in the running head. The author's approval may be needed; if possible, the editor should send the running-head copy to the author along with the edited manu script. Running-head copy normally accompanies the manuscript to the typesetter and should be included with the other electronic files. If the
Manuscript Editing
2.78
running heads are to reflect the content of particular pages (rather than chapters or sections) , the exact copy must be determined after (or as) the pages are typeset. For example, running heads to notes that include page ranges can be determined only from the typeset pages (see 1.15) . These are typically indicated by the publisher on the first proofreading copy. To accommodate the potential for running heads in electronic formats, short forms for chapter and other titles can be specified as part of the markup (e.g., as an "alt-title") and used for running heads where needed or for other purposes. 2.77
A production checklist. Manuscripts that are ready to be typeset or con verted for publication are usually accompanied by a checklist of vital statistics that includes information about the project and how it is to be produced. Such a checklist, especially necessary for one-of-a-kind book length works, might consist of the following information:
Name of author(s) and title of work A list of component parts of the project: electronic files, printout, illustrations, and so forth Details about the software used to prepare the final manuscript and a list of file names An indication of how the electronic files have been marked up for production, a list of markup labels or styles, and any special instructions, including a list of any special characters or fonts A list of any material that is still to come An indication of how notes are to be set-for example, as footnotes, as chapter endnotes, or as endnotes to the book A list of elements to be included in the front matter, the text, and the end matter, and an indication of which elements must start recto (see 1.4) For book-length manuscripts, an indication of who will be receiving page proofs, and in what format (e.g., print or PDF)
The Mechanics ofElectronic Editing P R E PA R AT I O N A N D C L E A N U P 2 . 78
Saving the manuscript files and keeping backups. It is best to save and back up a manuscript in stages, creating separate copies of each signif icant version. The author's original, unedited copy should be archived (i.e., saved without further changes) , as should every significant stage of the editing process. Each major stage should be saved with a different name-for example, by appending "author's original," "clean unedited,"
2.79
M A N US C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
"first edit," "to author,'' and s o forth to the file name. For complex proj ects, use different directories (i.e., folders) for the different stages. Exer cise caution when saving files and working on new versions: avoid saving over-or inadvertently working on-an earlier version of a file. During editing, open documents should be saved frequently. Some editors ar chive daily or weekly versions so that an earlier stage of the editing can be consulted if necessary. Another strategy is to use a file-hosting service that allows access to previously saved versions or deleted files. All saved versions should always be backed up to a second location as protection against loss. 2.79
Manuscript cleanup tools. Many publishers provide manuscript editors with a cleaned-up version of the author's electronic file (s)-formatted and ready to edit. The publisher usually specifies the required software and may expect the editor to use or apply a certain type of markup (see 2.81-83) . (Publishers may instead give editors hard copy only, updating the electronic files from the pencil-edited copy as part of the production process; for paper editing, see 2.90-99.) Some editors, however, are re quired to clean up and format the author's electronic files themselves. Full-featured word processors provide a number of tools that can save time by automating certain tasks. At the very least, it is important to learn about search-and-replace options, including the use of pattern matching (with wildcards or regular expressions) , and about macros, which can save keystrokes by replicating and repeating repetitive tasks (including tasks that involve searching and replacing) . (Consult your word-processor's Help documentation for instructions and examples.) Some editors take advantage of third-party add-ins preloaded with cleanup macros, ep.hanced search-and-replace options, and other edit ing tools.
2.80
Man uscript cleanup checklist. Before editing the manuscript, the ed itor must be certain that the files represent the author's latest version (the presence of embedded revision marks may be a sign that this is not the case; see 2.39). The next step is to get the electronic files ready to edit-if the publisher has not done this already. The following checklist suggests a set of steps that can be adapted as necessary to become part of an editor's word-processing cleanup routine. Not all manuscripts will require each step, and the suggested order need not be adhered to. Some of the steps can be automated, but most of the checklist can also be ac complished manually-that is, applied on a case-by-case basis, as part of the first read-through (see 2.53) . Always review-and be prepared to undo-any global change before saving a permanent version of a file.
Manuscript Editing 2.so
Modify this checklist as needed to accord not only with the requirements of a specific manuscript but also with those of the publisher. Automatic redlining should usually be turned offduring these steps (see 2.84) . 1. Convert files for use in the editing software required by the publisher, if nec essary. 2. To avoid having to apply this checklist more than once, consider combining separate files into a single electronic file. (Care must be taken to produce a complete manuscript, in the proper order and with no inadvertent deletions; always double-check the beginning and ending of each component and any notes thereto both when combining multiple files and when breaking a single file into smaller components.) Another option is to use macros that work across multiple files in a single directory (see 2.79) . 3. If necessary, change the language settings of the manuscript and any subdoc uments (e.g., from British English to American English, or vice versa) . This will ensure, among other things, that the main dictionary gives appropriate suggestions. 4. Scroll through the whole manuscript (with the editing software set to display formatting and any markup-including marks for such "invisible" elements as spaces and hard returns), looking for and fixing any obvious conversion errors (e.g., with special characters) and formatting problems (e.g., hard returns in the middle of a paragraph), with reference to the original manuscript as nec essary. 5. Identify any graphic elements and tables and handle appropriately-for ex ample, moving figures or tables to separate files (see 2.26, 2.30). 6. Apply appropriate markup, as required, to any elements that are easy to iden tify at the outset but whose visual cues may be lost as the text is formatted. Look for chapter titles, subheads (and subhead levels), epigraphs, text and poetry extracts, extra line space (which may signal a stanza break in poetry or require an ornament or other device in text), and so forth. See also 2.81-83. 7. Delete or fix extraneous spaces and tabs, including instances of two or more consecutive spaces (between sentences or anywhere else) or spaces or tabs at the ends of paragraphs. Multiple spaces used to create first-line paragraph and other indents should be replaced either with tabs or with software-defined indents (be consistent) . 8. Change instances of multiple hard returns to single hard returns. 9. Change underlining to italics. Some underlining, however, may be intended to represent true underscore-in, for example, a collection that transcribes handwritten letters; this should be preserved, with a note to the publisher ex plaining the exception. See also 6.2. 10. Fix quotation marks and apostrophes; make sure that apostrophes at the be ginning ofwords are correct (e.g., 'em not 'em for "them"). But first determine,
2.81
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R AT I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
a s applicable, that left and right single quotation marks have not been used by the author to stand in for breathing marks or other orthographic devices in transliterated languages (see chapter 11). See also 6.115, 6.117. 11. Fix commas and periods relative to quotation marks (see table 6.1) . 12. Regularize em dashes and ellipses. For proper use of em dashes, see 6.85-92. For ellipses, see 13.50-58. 13. Replace hyphens between numerals with en dashes as appropriate. If you are using a macro to do this, it may be more efficient to let the macro run and to fix or add any exceptions during the first editing pass. For proper use of en dashes, see 6.78-84. 14. Convert footnotes to endnotes, or vice versa. 15. Delete any optional or conditional hyphens (i.e., software-dependent hyphens that allow words to break across the end of a line whether or not the hyphen ation feature is turned on) . Most word processors will allow you to search for these. 16. Find any lowercase els used as ones and any ohs (capital or lowercase) used as zeros-or vice versa-and fix. This can be done by using pattern matching to search for two-character combinations containing either an el or an oh next to an expression that will find any numeral (see also 2.79) . 17. Fix any other global inconsistencies that might be amenable to pattern matching strategies. For example, in a bibliography in which two- or three letter initials in names have been closed up, you can search for and evaluate capital letter combinations and replace as necessary with the same combina tion plus a space (e.g., changing E.B. White to E. B. White) . 18. Adjust line spacing, font, and margins as desired.
As a final step-assuming these steps have been applied before editing save a copy of the resulting clean, unedited manuscript in case it be comes necessary to refer to it later (see 2.78) .
ELECTRONIC MARKUP 2.81
Generic markup for electronic manuscripts. Each element o f a manu
script-chapter display, subheads, text, prose extracts, poetry, notes, captions, and so forth-must be identified using consistent markup. The most basic (if least efficient) way to do this is with generic labels mod eled on the descriptive identifiers used on pencil-edited manuscripts (see 2.99) . Such labels are enclosed in angle brackets (< >) , curly brack ets ({ }) , or some other delimiters such that they can be systematically identified and replaced for publication by formal typesetting markup. (This generic application of delimiters must not be mistaken for the tags used in formal markup languages such as XML.) Except for labels meant
Manuscript Editing
2.s2
to be replaced with a character or string of characters, they are usually applied at the beginning and end of each element to which they apply. Publishers differ not only in what type of markup they recommend but also in what elements they mark up. Some require that every element be labeled, including body text; others regard body text as a default. Most do not require any markup for character-level formatting (e.g., italics, small capitals, boldface) because a word-processing software's built-in formatting attributes can be manipulated as necessary. Editors may need to invent markup for unusual elements. Consistency and accuracy are crucial. Moreover, editors must supply a complete list of markup with the manuscript. Some samples are as follows: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
chapter number chapter title first-level subhead (A-head) second-level subhead (B-head) block quotation (prose extract) poetry extract first-level subhead in endnotes section t with dot below (i.e., when the Unicode character for t is not available in the font being used to prepare the manuscript; see 11.2) instruction to the typesetter-for example, to con sult hard copy or page image for proper alignment or other formatting
The end "tags"-those that include a forward slash (/) and that indicate the end of a labeled element-may be unnecessary for elements that con sist of a single paragraph. Consult the publisher's or typesetter's require ments. For using a word processor's built-in styles, see 2.82; for formal markup languages such as XML, see 2.83. 2.82
Word-processing styles. Manuscript editors may be expected to use a word-processing template loaded with paragraph and character styles defined for a book or article manuscript and supplied by the publisher. The advantage of such an approach is that manuscript editors (and au thors, including self-published authors) can work in a familiar software environment while facilitating the more detailed markup required for publication in electronic formats. Word-processing styles are applied to each element of a manuscript, from chapter title to the title of a book in a reference list entry to the reference list entry itself. Each style carries a unique name and can be applied to any paragraph or string of characters within a paragraph. (A paragraph is any string of text followed by a single
2.83
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
hard return.) Paragraph-level style names should b e descriptive, corre sponding to the type of element (e.g., "chapter number" or "A-head") rather than to its format or appearance. Character-level styles, by the same token, should specify the intent of the style rather than its format for example, "emphasis" rather than "italic" or "exponent" rather than "superscript." 1 Appropriate font size, line spacing, italics, and other formatting attributes can and should be defined for each style in the manuscript to facilitate editing and author review. On the other hand, accuracy and consistency in applying styles is more important than any formatting in the manuscript. The publisher will map the styles to a de sign template for the printed work or to XML, which can be used to ac commodate presentation in multiple formats, including print. If there are any text elements that do not lend themselves easily to the styles in a given template, it may be necessary to define new styles or to query the publisher. (Authors reviewing the edited manuscript should be advised not to modify styles.) An annotated list of styles should accompany the manuscript sent to production. See also 2.83. 2.83
Formal markup languages. A manuscript edited on paper or in a word processor may have to be converted and marked up at some point ac cording to the rules defined for a formal markup language such as XML, especially if it is to be published as an e-book or as a web-presentation or app (see 1.117-25) . Such a conversion can be facilitated during the editing stage by the use of word-processing styles (see 2.82) . Styles are mapped to corresponding tags, and additional markup is added to de lineate the structure of the manuscript, facilitate linking, and so forth. Each element, including each document or subdocument, is identified by a pair of opening and closing tags according to the rules of the par ticular markup language. Tags are nested; for example, the body of the document, enclosed between an opening and a closing tag, will include all sections and subsections of the document, and each of those parts in turn will be delimited by a pair of tags that identify the element and its place in the hierarchy. Tags are also used to delimit any element that may 1. Many publishers do not require editors to apply semantic markup for every character level style, asking instead that they simply specify the intended format (e.g., italics or su perscript). This approach, though easy to apply, has certain limitations. For example, read ers using text-to-speech and related tools may not be able to fully appreciate the sense of the text if everything from an emphasized word to a term in a different language to a book title is marked simply as italic. Publishers concerned about providing accessible content for people with disabilities are encouraged to consult the guidelines offered by the Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) and, for EPUB (a standard format for e-books), the Accessibility Guidelines available from the Interna tional Digital Publishing Forum.
Manuscript Editing
2.ss
have a special function (such as a cross-reference that will be hyperlinked in electronic formats) or that will need to be differentiated from the sur rounding text (such as an emphasized term or a book title) . Such tagging is structural as well as semantic: each element is identified according to what it is rather than by how it is to be presented (but see 2.82, note 1) . Details about presentation, including appearance and function, are spec ified in a style sheet for each format of publication. If editing takes place after conversion to a formal markup language, the editor usually helps to ensure that the tags have been applied correctly (see also 2.137-40) . The successful implementation of such a workflow, on the other hand, requires significant technical expertise.
T R A C K I N G C H A N G E S A N D I N S E R T I N G QU E R I E S 2 . 84
Tracking changes (red lin ing). To show their work and thus facilitate the
author's review, many editors use the change-tracking feature in their word processor to produce what is sometimes referred to as a redlined version (a name that invokes, in another medium, the editor's red pen cil) . The principle is simple: as long as the tracking feature is turned on, text that is added is underlined, like this ; text that is deleted is struck through, like this. (Added or deleted text can be displayed in a variety of other ways depending on software and settings.) Author queries are inserted using the word-processor's commenting feature (see 2.87) . For a demonstration, see fig. 2.4. (Comments and changes usually appear in color by default; editors sending black-and-white printouts to their authors for review must take care that everything remains legible.) For any change that might be ambiguous or hard to interpret (e.g., a struck through hyphenated term) , it can be helpful to include an explanatory comment to the author at least at the first occurrence. By the same token, it is best to avoid making changes that might be missed; when in doubt, strike out the entire term and replace it by the corrected or preferred ver sion. For example, to indicate a preference for the closed-up version of the name of the famous educator and writer, show Du BoisDuBois rather than Du-Bois, the latter of which may be mistaken for a hyphenated term. See also 2.85. For marking changes on PDF files, see 2.133. 2.85
Making si lent changes (not tracking). Whether to track all editing,
mechanical as well as substantive, depends on a number of factors, in cluding the editor's and publisher's preferences. In order to avoid irri tating or distracting the author, some editors will prefer to track only the first instance of a global change (such as capitalization of a certain term) and alert the author to the change in a comment (see 2.87) . Certain
2.85
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
FIGU RE 2 . 4 . A manuscript page illustrating the principles o f on-screen revision marks (redlining) and author queries using Microsoft Word. Markup for head ings, paragraphs, and text has been applied using Word's paragraph and character styles. See 2.82.
adjustments should almost never be shown-for example, changes to margins or a global application of "smart" quotation marks and apos trophes (see 6.115, 6.117) . In general, most of the things listed in the cleanup checklist at 2.80 may be done silently. If a section of the man uscript such as a bibliography has been heavily edited, the editor may
Manuscript Editing
2.88
send a clean version of that section for the author to approve, with or without a version showing the edits for reference. But if changes have not been tracked for any reason, the editor must delineate for the author the nature of the editing either in a comment or in the cover letter with the edited manuscript (see 2.70) . 2.86
Document comparison software. Document comparison software can
highlight the differences between two versions of a document automati cally. Best results are had with shorter documents in which the latest ver sion is compared against an earlier version that has already been cleaned up and formatted (see 2.80) . Comparing an edited document against the author's original manuscript may result in too many changes being re ported, or worse, the results may be unintelligible. Editors should turn to document comparison software only in specific instances-for example, to make sure they are working on the latest version of a document. For communicating changes to the author, which usually requires a more predictable presentation in which some types of changes are made si lently while others must be spelled out as clearly as possible, editors should track their changes as they edit (see 2.84) . 2.87
Inserti ng comments a n d queries. Author queries should be inserted using the commenting feature available in most word processors. See fig. 2.4 for an example. Chicago no longer recommends using footnotes or bracketed text to insert queries. As a matter of principle, it is best to avoid adding content that is not intended for publication to the run of text. (Exceptions can be made for structural signposts such as image call outs or similar elements intended to be incorporated into the markup for the published version; see 2.30. Another exception is made by some pub lishers for embedded notes, which in certain applications do not support comments; alternatively, such comments may be placed in the text at the note reference marker.) See also 2.69.
2.88
Author's review o f t h e redl ined manuscript. Authors who review
changes and queries online should be asked to use a compatible version of the software used to edit the manuscript. (Authors who cannot accom modate this request may have to review a printout instead or annotate a PDF file; see 2.71.) To guard against unwanted changes-inadvertent or otherwise-the editor may want to protect the manuscript with a pass word such that any changes the author makes will be visibly tracked. (Ed itors are advised to take care not to lose the password; it will be needed in order to unlock the files returned by the author and prepare the final manuscript.) Editors should include detailed instructions for making changes and adding or responding to queries. With password protection,
2.89
M A N U S C R I P T P R E PA R A T I O N , E D I T I N G , A N D P R O O F R E A D I N G
authors can usually b e asked simply t o type any additions into the manu script and delete any of the editor's changes or other unwanted text. For comments and replies to queries, however, authors should generally be advised to use the commenting feature lest any of their comments inad vertently make it into the text (see also 2.87) . 2.89
Accepting or rejecting tracked changes a n d deleting queries. After
the author has returned the redlined manuscript, the editor should go through each tracked change carefully and accept it or reject it, as the case may be, using the available word-processing tools. New material in serted by the author should be edited as necessary, and any other type of change should be checked for continuity with the surrounding text. It may be wise to read through each author comment or query first in or der to spot any potential problems. After all comments and queries have been read and all changes have been incorporated, any remaining com ments and queries should be deleted. Because of the potential for errors introduced at this stage, a spelling check should be run again as a final step. The final manuscript should have no remaining tracked changes or comments, with the exception of any comments intended for the pub lisher (though it may be better to send these in a cover letter) .
The Mechanics ofEditing on Paper 2.90
Keeping a clean copy o f paper manuscripts. A n editor working on pa per should always keep a clean copy of the unedited manuscript to refer to-or as a backup in case any reediting is necessary. If the paper copy is a printout of an el�ctronic manuscript, it is enough to archive a copy of the latter.
2.91
Marking manuscripts on paper. Editing a manuscript on paper whether it is to be typeset from scratch or used to update the author's electronic manuscript-requires a technique similar to the one used for marking corrections on proofs (see 2.119-33) . To allow for the more ex tensive changes typical of the editing stage, however, paper manuscripts are usually double-spaced so that editing can appear above the word or words it pertains to, rather than in the margin. (Manuscripts that consist of photocopies of tightly spaced previously published material are edited in the manner of page proofs.) All editorial changes should be made in a color that will reproduce clearly if the edited manuscript is photocopied or faxed, and the author should be asked to respond to the editing in a color distinct from that used by the editor. For marking queries, see 2.92. For a sample of a correctly marked manuscript, see figure 2.5.
Manuscript Editing
How an9' ¥ Editor - marks a 11anusor'ipt
"
'
ed.lted _ -us-i'n·up)? consider replacing with a. short torm ot citation. .
·
...
·
Bfbliography: Check for proper formattin g . Jf iong U R Ls a re i n c l uded, it .is best to left-j ustify the.text of the whole bibliography to avoid large gaps between words.
lnd�x: Retai n any index from a printed counterpart, i n c l udin g a l l entri es . Page n u m ber ref . erenc;es. shou·1d . link to the. proper l oc at i o n · ih thE! book. This can be either the print page number (0425), x (0426), II (0427), q (0428), w (0429), Ill (042A), 'b 6 (042B), &1 6 {042C), b 6 (0420), 3 (042E), JO (042F), ll
u f kh ts ch sh shch ,, (2010)7 y ' (2019)9 e yu ya
rs•
x c
# (02BA)8
# (02BA)8
' (02B9)10 e (om) 1ii• la•
' (02B9) 10 (OOE8) ju ja
c
sc
e
The Library of Congress and linguistic systems employ the same characters as the US Board system except where noted. 1 The Unicode numbers are the same for the upright and cursive characters; the differences in appearance depend on the italic version of a given typeface. 2 The term linguistic describes a system generally preferred by journals of Slavic studies {see 11.98). 3 Initially and after a vowel or 'I> or b. 4 Not considered a separate letter; usually represented in Russian by e. 5 Character tie, sometimes omitted, may be produced by using the combining double inverted breve (U+0361). 6 Does not occur initially. 7 Right double quotation mark. 8 Modifier letter double prime (hard sign). 9 Right single quotation mark. 10 Modifier letter prime (soft sign). NOTE:
11.100
11.100
LANGUAGE S OTHER THAN ENGLISH
Titles o f Russian works. Only the first word and any proper nouns are
capitalized in titles. N. A. Kurakin, Lenin i Trotskiy O. I. Skorokhodova, Kak ya vosprinimayu i predstavlyayu okruzhayushchiy mir [How I perceive and imagine the external world]
Note that in the original Cyrillic, titles are set in ordinary type; the Cyril lic kursiv is used more sparingly than our italic and never for book titles. In transliterations, however, italic should be used. 11.101
Russian quotations a n d d ialogue. Russian generally resembles French in its use of guillemets ( « » ) for dialogue and quoted material and of dashes for dialogue (see 11.29, 11.31) .
«Bozhe, bozhe, bozhe! » govorit Boris. -S kem ya rabotayu? -S tovarishchem. -Kak my rabotayem? -S interesom.
To set off a quotation within a speech, guillemets may be used, as in French. For an example, see 11.31. 11.102
Russian ellipses. Ellipses are used as in French (see 11.32) to indicate interruptions or br�aks in thought.
Ya . . . vy . . . my tol'ko chto priyekhali.
In Russian, an exclamation point or a question mark often takes the place of one of the dots; this convention may be regularized to three dots in English publications. Mitya! . . . Gde vy byli? . . . 11.103
Russian uses of the dash. A dash is sometimes inserted, with a space on either side, between subject and complement when the equivalent of is or are is omitted.
Moskva - stolitsa Rossii.
Languages Usualry Transliterated (or Romanized)
11.10s
Similarly, a dash, preceded and followed by a space, is used in place of a verb omitted because it would be identical to the preceding verb. Ivan i Sonya poyedut v Moskvu poyezdom, Lev i Lyuba - avtobusom. 11.104
Russian word division-general. Transliterated Russian should be di vided according to the rules governing word division in the Cyrillic orig inal. The guidelines in this section are adapted from the transliteration system of the United States Board on Geographic Names.
11. 1 o s
Combinations not t o b e divided in Cyri llic transliteration. Combina tions representing single Cyrillic letters-ch, kh, sh, shch, ts, ya,ye,ye,yu, zh-should never be divided, nor should combinations of a vowel plus short i (or yod, transliteratedy) : ay, ey, yey, and so on.
11.106
Division between Russian consonants. Words may be divided between
single consonants or between a consonant and a consonant combination. ubor-ku
chudes-nym
mol-cha
mor-skoy
sred-stvo
The following consonant combinations are not normally divided: bl, h r, dr, dv, ft,fr, gl, gr, kl, kr, ml, pl, pr, sk, skr, skv, st, str, stv, tr, tv, vl, vr, zhd. They may, however, be divided if they fall across the boundary of a prefix and a root or other such units (e.g., ob-lech', ras-kol) . 11.107
Division of Russian words after prefixes or between parts. Words may be divided after a prefix, but generally the prefix itself should not be di vided.
bes-poryadok
pere-stroyka
za-dat'
pred-lozhit'
pro-vesti
obo-gnat'
Compound words should be divided between parts. radio-priyemnik 11.108
gor-sovet
kino-teatr
Division of Russian words after vowel or diphthong. Words may be di vided after a vowel or a diphthong before a single (Cyrillic) consonant.
Si-bir'
voy-na
Gorba-chev
da-zhe
Division after a vowel may also be made before a consonant combina tion. puteshe-stvennik
khi-trit'
pro-stak
ru-brika
11.109
LANGUAGES OTHER THAN ENGLISH
South Asian Languages 11.109
South Asian special characters. Transliteration of the principal South
Asian languages may require the following special characters (see also table 11.2) : A a , 1;> ¢>
3 'V
RADIA L UNITS
CONS TA N TS
7l
e
G E OME TRY _!_
II l!
L
. a(x1 , X2 , , Xn ) • • •
Its determinant (usually referred to as the Jacobian) is denoted as
I
a( /1 , /2 , a(x1 , X2,
. . . • • •
•
fn) , Xn)
I
·
Scalars, Vectors, and Tensors 12.52
Scalars, vectors, and tensors defined. Three basic quantities often en countered in scientific mathematical material are scalars, vectors, and tensors. Scalars, usually denoted by lowercase italic or Greek letters, are ordinary numbers and are treated as such. Vectors are quantities that have direction as well as magnitude, and they are often denoted by bold face letters or by an arrow diacritic to distinguish them from scalars:
r or r. Because authors do not always follow these conventions, editors should be prepared to query. A vector may be written as the sum of its compo nents:
The circumflex over the e is used to denote a vector of length 1, called a unit vector. Tensors are multidimensional quantities that extend the vector concept. A scalar is a tensor of rank O, and a vector is a tensor of rank 1. 12.53
Vector a n d tensor multiplication. Vector and tensor multiplication em ploys a special notation that is relatively easy to identify in text. The inner or dot product of two vectors u and w is denoted u w; the dot product is signified by the boldface multiplication dot. The vector or cross product of two vectors u and w is denoted u x w; the cross product is signified by the boldface multiplication cross. The multiplication dot and multipli cation cross are not interchangeable for vectors as they are for ordinary multiplication. The standard notation for the tensor product of tensors ·
Style ofMathematical Expressions
12.56
T and S is T ® S. Index notation for vectors and tensors usually takes the following form: S
=
Sjkeje k ,
Bn T, i0 0 ·l· m - A i · ·· ·m k· · k· · n I ' bi =
j. a!c J
Note the correspondence of the indices in these expressions (see 12.38 for discussion of index positioning) . The Einstein convention has been used here, which implies summation over the repeated index. Thus
Ck = }:. ajbjk j
is the same as
Ck = ajbjk
unless otherwise stated. 12.54
Additional tensor notation. Two additional special notations are used to differentiate tensors. One is A i,j , where the subscript comma indicates a coordinate (or "ordinary") derivative. The other is A i ;j , where the sub
script semicolon indicates the covariant derivative. See also 12.38.
12.55
Dirac notation. A special form of the inner product, used especially in physics, is the Dirac bracket notation,
< a l b>, which can also be used in combination with operators, as in (al T lb> (which is not the same as (aTb>) or (Ta l b). The combinations (al and lb> are also used to denote dual vectors and vectors, respectively.
Definitions, Theorems, and Other Formal Statements 12.56
Formal mathematical statements in text. For definitions, theorems, propositions, corollaries, lemmas, axioms, and rules (collectively called "enunciations") , it is common practice to distinguish the head from the text-for example, by setting the head in caps and small caps (as in the examples here) or in bold or italic. Numbers for these statements, un like those for equations, are not enclosed in parentheses, and in cross references the numbers are also not enclosed.
DEFINITION. A permutation is a one-to-one transformation of a finite set into itself.
12.57
M AT H E M A T I C S I N T Y P E
(In a definition, the term being defined i s set i n italic type i n order to distinguish it from the rest of the text.) TH E O REM 1. The order of a finite group is a multiple of the order of each of its subgroups. CORO LLARY. Ifp and q are distinct prime numbers and a is an in teger not divisible by either p or q, then
a(p-i)(q-i) = l(mod pq). LEMMA 2. The product of two primitive polynomials is itself prim itive. AXI O M . Every set of nonnegative integers that contains at least one element contains a smallest element. RULE 4.4. The length of a vertical segment joining two points is given by the difference of the ordinates of the upper and lower points. Proofs, examples, remarks, demonstrations, and solutions are usually treated in a similar manner. PRO O F. Let A = B. Hence C = D. SOLUTION. Ify o, then x = 5. =
Proofs of theorems often end with the abbreviation QED or a special symbol, D or • .
Probability and Statistics 12.57
Probability and statistics-additional resources. The fields of probabil ity and statistics are used by many disciplines beyond those of math and science. As a result of these cross-disciplinary applications, the conven tions for probability and statistics are not nearly as well established as they are for many of the other concepts covered in this chapter. Those looking for more comprehensive treatment beyond the brief coverage of fered here should consult the AMA Manual ofStyle or Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1).
12.58
Probability. The notation Pr(A) or P(A) is used to denote the probability of an event A. The sample space-that is, the set of all possible outcomes of a given experiment-is usually denoted 0. An event A is a subset of the sample space: A � 0. The elements of the sample space are usually de noted w . The conditional probability of event A relative to event B-that
Style ofMathematical Expressions
12.59
is, the probability that event A occurs given that event B has occurred-is written Pr(A I B) or P ( A I B ) . Variance is denoted Var(X) and covariance is denoted Cov(X, Y) . Both the variance and the covariance functions may be expressed with low ercase letters. 12.59
M eans and standard deviations. The population mean is often given a special symbol in statistics, µ(X) . The sample mean is denoted by x. In evaluating an expression, be careful not to substitute angle brackets, (X), for an overbar, x. They can mean very different things. The population standard deviation (the most common measure of dispersion) is denoted by er (Greek lowercase sigma), and the sample standard deviation is more commonly denoted by s; sd or SD may be used to distinguish it from se or SE, for standard error. The arithmetic mean is most frequently written in physical sciences literature as (A) or A and the cumulant as ((A)). Several abbreviations are used in stochastic theory and probability theory with out special definition: a.e., almost everywhere; a.c., almost certainly; a.s., almost surely. See table 12.3 for statistical notation. TABLE 1 2 . 3 .
Statistical notation
GREEK A L PHA B E T
a
� K
Probability of rejecting a true null hypothesis (type I error) Probability of accepting a false null hypothesis (type II error) Cumulant; also kappa statistic
LA TIN ALPHA B E T
df, DF, dof F H
Ho
In log mse, MSE p, P, Pr rp
rs
Degrees of freedom F-ratio Value from the KruskalWallis test Null hypothesis Natural logarithm Logarithm to base 10 Mean squared error Probability Pearson correlation coefficient Value from the Spearman rank-order test
µ (X)
l: CJ
a2
x•
s, sd, SD se, SE sem, SEM t T u
w. z
Mean of the population Sum of Population standard deviation Population variance Value for the chi-squared distribution
Sample standard deviation Standard error Standard error of the mean Value from Student's t-test Value from the Wilcoxon matched-pairs signedrank test Value from the MannWhitney test Value from the Wilcoxon rank sum test Value from the normal distribution
12.60
1 2 .60
M AT H E M AT I C S I N T Y P E
Uncertainties. Uncertainties in quantities are usually written with a plus or minus sign (±) : 2.501 ± 0.002 or, if there is an exponent, (6.157 ± 0.07) x 105 or 10 4 ·3±0·3• However, there are cases in which the bounds rather than the range are given, and these may be unequal; hence,
. . . where D/ H
=
1.65�8:6� x 10-s. . . .
Uncertainties may also be specified as se for standard error, 1 a (or a larger multiple) or sd for standard deviation. Finally, separation into ran dom and systematic uncertainties is written as 71.0 ± 5.0 (random) ± 2.5 (sys) or 71.0��:� (random) �i:� (sys) for asymmetric bounds. When such expres sions occur in an exponent, it is preferable to write a separate expression for the exponent (see 12.49) .
Preparation and Editing of Paper Manuscripts 12.61
Format o f paper manuscripts for mathematics. Manuscripts for math ematical articles and books should be printed out one-sided and double spaced, on 81/z x 11-inch white paper, with 11,4-inch margins for text and 2-inch margins for display work. The print quality should be 300 dots per inch or better. If handwritten equations or symbols are to be inserted in the printout, allow generous space for them. Since the editor will need to provide instructions to the typesetter, there should be ample margins.
12.62
Setting mathematics from t h e author's hard copy. In the event that the publisher cannot use the electronic files prepared by the author, and to the extent that a manuscript shows all the necessary characters, symbols, and signs as they should appear, the typesetter may simply be instructed to follow the author's hard copy. Any unusual characters not achieved in the manuscript must be marked or identified. Authors should supply the highest-quality printout possible.
12.63
Marking italic type for mathematics. The editor of a mathematical text should either underline all copy that is to be set in italics or give general instructions to the typesetter to set all Latin single-letter mathematical objects in italics unless they are marked otherwise. The general instruc tions to the typesetter should also specify italic type for such letters used in subscripts or superscripts. If italics have been used in the manuscript, the editor can instruct the typesetter to follow the copy.
Preparation and Editing ofPaper Manuscripts 12. 64
12.65
12.67
Marking common mathematical abbreviations. Abbreviations for com mon functions, geometric points, units of measurement, and chemical elements, which are set in roman type, should be marked as roman by the editor only where ambiguity could occur. For a list of some frequently used abbreviations, see table 12.2. Marking single mathematical letters in other type styles. Special mark
ing must be used when single letters representing mathematical objects are to be set in any typeface other than italics. A mathematical text may require the use of some roman letters, usually to indicate properties dif ferent from those expressed by the same letters in italics. Underlining is the standard method ofindicating italics, but it can be used instead, with instructions to the typesetter, to indicate letters that are to be in roman. If, however, the editor does not use general instructions but underlines all letters to be set italic, then letters not underlined will be set, as im plied, in roman type. Double underlining is used to indicate small capi tals. Wavy underlining is used for boldface. Color codes are often used to indicate other typefaces. For example, red underlining or circling can be used for Fraktur, blue for script, green for sans serif, and so forth. The general instructions to the typesetter must clearly explain the marking and coding system used. If a photocopy must be made of the edited man uscript for estimating by the typesetter or for querying the author, avoid color coding. 12.66
Mathematical fonts t o mark on a paper manuscript. Boldface, script, Fraktur, and sans serif are frequently used in mathematical expressions and should be indicated on a paper manuscript as suggested in 12.65.
Boldface ABCD
Script
cll'B C'D
Fraktur
�UBU::'.D
Sans serif ABCD
Double-struck, o r blackboard, characters are often used fo r special mathematical symbols-for example, �, 71., Q, �, ([ (see also 12.14) . These should b e clearly indicated o n the manuscript. 12.67
Marking mathematical subscripts and superscri pts. As long as inferior and superior characters have been marked in a few places by the symbols v and A (see examples below), and new characters or symbols are iden tified when they first appear, a typesetter should have no difficulty inter preting the manuscript. If the spatial relationship of terms is not clearly shown in a typed or handwritten expression, the terms should be marked to avoid ambiguity. For example, given the copy
12.68
M A T H E M AT I C S I N T Y P E
i t may not be clear from the manuscript whether this means
xti_
or
x�
or
xt.
The expression should therefore be marked in one of the following ways for complete clarity:
Jtl
or
Jt/i
or
J.�
The examples above show the subscripts and superscripts aligned, or stacked. See 12.38 for discussion and examples of staggered subscripts and superscripts. 12.68
Examples o f marked mathematical copy. Figure 12.1 shows a page of a paper manuscript as marked initially by the author and then by the editor before being sent to the typesetter. The author's marks merely identify ambiguous symbols. Figure 12.2 shows that same page set in type. Figure 12.3 shows the LaTeX source code that would generate the first part of figure 12.2. Signs and symbols that could be misread by the typesetter should be clearly identified on a paper manuscript by marginal notations or in a separate list. For lists of symbols and special characters commonly used in mathematics, see table 12.1. Illegible handwriting and uniden tifiable signs and symbols can reduce composition speed and result in time-consuming and costly corrections. Certain letters, numbers, and symbols can easily be misread, especially when Greek, Fraktur, script, and sans serif let�ers are handwritten rather than typed. Some of the characters that cause the most difficulty are shown in table 12.4.
1 2 . 1 . An example of typewritten and hand-marked mathematical copy. (Note that this page is not intended to make mathematical sense but is merely meant to illustrate some of the issues that may arise in preparing mathematical copy.)
FIGURE
F I G URE
1 2 . 2 . The page of manuscript shown in figure 12.1 set in type.
FIGURE 1 2 . 3 . LaTeX source listing that would generate a portion of the mathe matical copy shown in figure 12.2.
TABLE 1 2 . 4 .
Symbols set in type• a
a
ex:
00
B
�
x x x x
I) a d
Potentially ambiguous mathematical symbols Marginal notation to operatorb
Remarks and suggestions for manuscript preparation
le "aye" le Gr. alpha proportional to infinity
Leave medium space before and after ex: and all binary operation signs (=, $, E, n, c, etc.).
cap "bee" le Gr. beta le Gr. chi �ap "ex" ,, le "ex "times" or "mult"
le Gr. delta partial differential le "dee"
E
le Gr. epsilon "element of"
'l n
le Gr. eta le "en"
y T r
K
l
.e
Simpler to use printer's term "round dee."
le Gr. gamma le Gr. tau lc "ar" le "tee" le Gr. iota le "eye"
k K K
Leave medium space before and after x and all other operation signs (+ , -, +, etc.). Do not add space when such signs as -, + , or ± are used to modify symbols or expressions (-3, ±1, etc.). Do not add space when operations appear as subscripts or superscripts.
Avoid using 1 and i together because of similarity in print.
le Gr. kappa le "kay" cap Gr. kappa cap "kay" le "el" script "el" numeral !
In some fonts, 1 and 1 look identical; note "el" but leave numeral unmarked; .f should not be used if l is available.
TA B L E 1 2 . 4 .
Symbols set in type a v v
0
0
0
0
0
A A
.p, cp 0 IT n
TC
p
(continued)
Marginal notation to operator b
Remarks and suggestions for manuscript preparation
le Gr. nu le "vee"
Avoid using v and v together because of similar ity in print.
cap "oh" le "oh" zero cap Gr. omicron le Gr. omicron degree sign
Asymptotic upper bounds O(x) and o(x) may occur together.
cap Gr. lambda wedge le Gr. phi empty or null set product cap Gr. pi le Gr. pi
p
le Gr. rho le "pee"
r �
summation cap Gr. sigma
e, a e u u u
µ
v
u
w
iD
w z z
2
Preference for form cp should be specified by author;
lisher or other content owner) . DOis are often listed with a source in the form of " DOI:" followed by the prefix and suffix; in their source citations, authors should append this DOI to https://doi.org/ to form a URL as described above. (To find a DOI link or its target, the string starting with the prefix can be entered into the metadata search tool available from Crossref or the DOI resolver provided by the Inter national DOI Foundation.) DO Is are an implementation of the Handle System, which also provides for URLs that begin with https://hdl.handle .net/ and function in much the same way as DOI-based URLs. Authors should prefer a DOI- or Handle-based URL whenever one is available. Examples are included throughout the section on journals (14.168-87) and at 14.161 and 14.234.
2. For more information about DO Is, consult the websites of the International DOI Foun dation and Crossref.
Source Citations: An Overview
14 . 1 0
14. 9
Permalinks a n d t h e like. URLs are usually recorded by copying the ver sion of the URL that appears with the source in a web browser's address bar (or sometimes through a sharing option) as the current link for the reference. Some internet resources list another version of the URL along with the resource itself intended for citing or sharing the link. In the ab sence of a DOI or the like (see 14.8) , these URLs-often labeled as per sistent URLs, permalinks, stable URLs, or the like-should generally be preferred. As with any URL, they should be tested to make sure they lead where intended. When a URL points to a location that requires a sub scription to a commercial database (e.g., through a library) , it may be better to name the database instead (see 14.11) .
14. 1 0
Short forms for URLs. A very long URL-one that runs to as much as a
line or more of text, especially if it contains a lot of punctuation or other syntax readable mainly by computers-can often be shortened simply by finding a better version of the link. If the source offers a DOI (see 14.8), use that; otherwise, determine whether a permalink or the like is avail able (see 14.9) . If not, it is still often possible to find a better version of the URL, sometimes by relinking to the source using the available tools for navigation. For example, a search for the 1913 novel Pollyanna in the Google Books database may yield a URL that looks like this: https://books.google.com/books?id =bF81AAAAMAAJ&pg= PA226#v=onepage &q&f=false
That URL, the result of a search for a specific passage, points to a corre sponding page in the book (p. 226) . The URL for the main page for the book looks like this (and should be preferred, assuming a page reference is included as part of the full citation) : https://books.google.com/books?id =bF81AAAAMAAJ
Alternatively, it is usually acceptable for such formally published re sources simply to list the domain name (e.g., https://books.google.com/) or the name of the database (e.g., Google Books) ; interested readers should be able to search for and find the cited source based on the full facts ofpublication. On the other hand, shortened versions ofa URL pro vided by third-party services (and intended primarily for use with social media) should never be used. Not only are such services prone to dis appear, but the original URL identifies the domain name and other ele ments that may be important to the citation. Publishers, however, may choose to make an exception, especially for DO Is. (Short forms for DO Is are available through a service from the International DOI Foundation.)
14. 1 1
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
14. 1 1
Library a n d other bibliographic databases. For a source consulted via a library or other commercial bibliographic database and available only through a subscription or library account, it may be best to name the database in lieu of a URL. Even a URL recommended for such a source (see 14.9) may lead a nonsubscriber to a login page with no information about the source itself. If in doubt, test the URL while logged out of the library or database; a URL that leads to information about the source, if not full access to it, is safe to use. A URL based on a DOI, which will always direct readers to information about the source, if not full access to it, should be preferred where available (see 14.8) . For more information and examples, see 14.161 (books) , 14.175 (journals) , 14.215 (theses and dissertations) .
14. 1 2
Access dates. An access date-that is, the self-reported date on which
an author consulted a source-is of limited value: previous versions will often be unavailable to readers; authors typically consult a source any number of times over the course of days or months; and the accuracy of such dates, once recorded, cannot readily be verified by editors or pub lishers. Chicago does not therefore require access dates in its published citations of electronic sources unless no date of publication or revision can be determined from the source (see also 14.13) . Because some pub lishers in some disciplines-in particular, research-intensive fields such as science and medicine-do require access dates, authors should check with their publishers early on, and it never hurts to record dates of access during research (citation management software will do this automati cally) . (Students may be required to include access dates in their papers.) For examples, see 14.176, 14.207, and 14.233. For access dates in author date format, see 15.50. 14.13
"Last mod ified" and other revision dates. Some electronic documents will include a date on each page or screen indicating the last time the document was modified or revised. There are no accepted standards for this practice, and for formally published material the date of publication is generally more important. A revision date should be included, how ever, if it is presented as the de facto date of publication or is otherwise the only available date. Such dates may be particularly useful for citing wikis and other frequently updated works. For examples, see 14.207, 14.233, 14.234.
14. 14
Authority and permanence. Much as they do for printed publications,
authors must weigh the authority of any electronic sources they choose to cite. Electronic content presented without formal ties to a publisher or sponsoring body has the authority equivalent to that of unpublished
Source Citations: An Overview
14.17
or self-published material in other media. Moreover, such content is far more likely to change without notice-or disappear altogether-than for mally published materials. On the other hand, self-published material from an authority on a given subject can usually be relied on. Authors should note that anything posted on the internet is "published" in the sense of copyright and must be treated as such for the purposes of com plete citation and clearance of permissions, ifrelevant (see 4.2, 4.64-69) . 14. 1 5
Preserving a permanent record. As part of their research, and in addi tion to recording accurate and complete source citations as described throughout this chapter and chapter 15, authors are strongly encouraged to keep a copy of any source that is not formally published, as a hedge against potential challenges to the research or data before, during, or af ter publication. Such a source might include a post on a social-networking site or app, a page from the website of a banking institution, or a version of an article on a news site reporting an ongoing crisis-any source that may be difficult to track down at a later date in exactly the form in which it was consulted. (Examples of sources that would not be subject to this recommendation would include an article in a journal or a magazine or any book cataloged by the Library of Congress or other national registry.) Copies may be kept in the form of printouts or as digital files (e.g., as PDFs or screen captures) , or by means of a permanent link creation ser vice such as Perma.cc.
14. 1 6
Publications avai lable i n more than o n e medium. In many cases the contents of the print and electronic forms of the same publication are intended to be identical. Moreover, publishers are encouraged to note explicitly any differences between the two (see 1.78) . In practice, because there is always the potential for differences, intentional or otherwise, au thors should cite the version consulted. Chicago recommends including a URL to indicate that a work was consulted online. For practical pur poses, alternate electronic formats offered by a single publisher from the same URL-for example, PDF and HTML versions of the journal article mentioned in 14.8-do not need to be indicated in the citation. More over, a DOI-based URL technically points to each medium in which a work is published. (Though a print source may list a DOI, authors need not record it as part of their research unless their publisher or discipline requires it.) For items designed to be read apart from any website, the application, format, device, or medium should be specified, depending on what might be required to consult a particular version. See also 14.6.
14.17
URLs and other such elements in relation to surrounding text. URLs, email addresses, and the like are unique strings that contain no spaces.
14. 1 8
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
URLs should b e presented i n full, beginning with the protocol (usually http, for hypertext transfer protocol, or https, a version of the protocolthat adds support for enhanced security mechanisms) . Even ifit follows a pe riod, the first letter ofthe protocol (e.g., the h in http) is not capitalized. (In running text, avoid beginning a sentence with a URL.) The capitalization of the remaining components varies; because some resource identifiers are case sensitive, they should not be edited for style. A "trailing slash" (/), the last character in a URL pointing to a directory, is part of the URL. Other punctuation marks that follow a URL or other such identifier will readily be perceived as belonging to the surrounding text; sentences or citations that include a URL or the like should therefore be punctuated normally. Though angle brackets or other "wrappers" are standard with email address.es or URLs in some applications, these are unnecessary in the context of notes and bibliographies or in running text (see also 6.8) . 14.18
U RLs and line breaks. In a printed work, if a URL has to be broken at the end of a line, the break should be made after a colon or a double slash (//); before a single slash (/), a tilde (-) , a period, a comma, a hyphen, an underline ( _ ) , a question mark, a number sign, or a percent symbol; or before or after an equals sign or an ampersand. Such breaks help to signal that the URL has been carried over to the next line. A hyphen should never be added to a URL to denote a line break, nor should a hyphen that is part of a URL appear at the end of a line. If a particularly long element must be broken to avoid a seriously loose or tight line, it can be broken between words or syllables according to the guidelines for word division offered in 7.36-47. Editors, proofreaders, and compositors should use their discretion in applying these recommendations, aiming for a bal ance between read �bility and aesthetics.
It is generally unnecessary to specify breaks for URLs in electronic pub lication formats with refiowable text, and authors should avoid forcing them to break in their manuscripts (see 2.13) .
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations
14 . 2 0
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations 14.19
Notes and bibliog raphy-an overview. In the system favored by many writers in the humanities, bibliographic citations are provided in notes, preferably supplemented by a bibliography. The notes, whether foot notes or endnotes, are usually numbered and correspond to superscript note reference numbers in the text (but see 14.53) ; in electronic formats, notes and note numbers are usually linked. Notes are styled much like running text, with authors' names in normal order and the elements sep arated by commas or parentheses.
1. Stuart Shea, Wrigley Field: The Long Life and Contentious Times ofthe Friendly Confines (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014), 51-52.
If the bibliography includes all works cited in the notes, the notes need not duplicate the source information in full because readers can consult the bibliography for publication details and other information. In works with no bibliography or only a selected list, full details must be given in a note at first mention of any work cited; subsequent citations need only include a short form. 2. Shea, Wrigley Field, 138.
In bibliographies, where entries are listed alphabetically, the name of the first author is inverted, and the main elements are separated by periods. Shea, Stuart. Wrigley Field: The Long Life and Contentious Times ofthe Friendly Con fines. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014.
For examples of the difference in format between note citations and bib liography entries, see 14.23. For a detailed discussion of notes, see 14.2460. For shortened references, see 14.29-36. For a detailed discussion of bibliographies, see 14.61-71. 14. 2 0
Basic structure o f a note. A footnote o r a n endnote generally lists the author, title, and facts of publication, in that order. Elements are sepa rated by commas; the facts of publication are enclosed in parentheses. Authors' names are presented in standard order (first name first) . Titles are capitalized headline-style (see 8.159) , unless they are in another language (see 11.6) . Titles oflarger works (e.g., books and journals) are italicized; titles of smaller works (e.g., chapters, articles) or unpublished works are presented in roman and enclosed in quotation marks (see
14. 2 1
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
8.163). Such terms a s editor/edited by, translator/translated by, volume, and edition are abbreviated. 14. 2 1
Basic structure o f a bibliography entry. I n a bibliography entry the el ements are separated by periods rather than by commas; the facts of publication are not enclosed in parentheses; and the first-listed author's name, according to which the entry is alphabetized in the bibliography, is usually inverted (last name first) . A bibliography entry starts with a capital letter unless the first word would normally be lowercased (as in a last name that begins with a lowercase particle; see 8.5) . As in a note, titles are capitalized headline-style unless they are in another language; titles of larger works (e.g., books and journals) are italicized; and titles of smaller works (e.g., chapters, articles) or unpublished works are pre sented in roman and enclosed in quotation marks. Noun forms such as editor, translator, volume, and edition are abbreviated, but verb forms such as edited by and translated by-abbreviated in a note-are spelled out in a bibliography. Compare 14.20.
14. 2 2
Page numbers a n d other locators. I n notes, where reference i s usually to a particular passage in a book or journal, only the page numbers per taining to that passage are given. In bibliographies, no page numbers are given for books cited as a whole; for easier location of journal articles or chapters or other sections of a book, the beginning and ending page numbers of the entire article or chapter are given. Electronic sources do not always include page numbers (and some that do include them repag inate according to user-defined text size) . For such unpaginated works, it may be appropriate in a note to include a chapter or paragraph number (if available) , a sec;tion heading, or a descriptive phrase that follows the organizational divisions of the work. In citations especially of shorter electronic works presented as a single, searchable document, such loca tors may be unnecessary. See also 14.160.
14. 2 3
Notes a n d bibliography-examples a n d variations. The examples that follow provide an overview of the notes and bibliography style, featuring books and journal articles as models. Each example includes a numbered note and a corresponding bibliography entry. Each example also includes a shortened form of the note, suitable for subsequent citations of a source already cited in full; in practice, in works that include a bibliogra phy that lists in full all sources cited, it is acceptable to use the shortened form in the notes even at first mention. For advice on constructing short forms for notes, see 14.29-36. For many more examples, consult the sections dealing with specific types of sources throughout this chapter.
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations
14. 2 3
Book with Single Author or Editor For a book with a single author, invert the name in the bibliography but not in the notes. Punctuate and capitalize as shown. Note the shortened form in the second note. Note also that page numbers are included in a note but not in a bibliography entry, unless the entry is for a chapter (see "Chapter in an Edited Book," below) . The first note cites two consecutive pages; the second note cites two nonconsecutive pages. See also 14.148. 1. Cheryl Strayed, Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2012), 87-88. 2. Strayed, Wild, 261, 265. Strayed, Cheryl. Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail. New York: Al fred A. Knopf, 2012.
A book with an editor in place of an author includes the abbreviation ed. (editor; for more than one editor, use eds.). Note that the shortened form does not include ed. 1. Meghan Daum, ed., Selfish, Shallow, and Self-Absorbed: Sixteen Writers on the Decision Not to Have Kids (New York: Picador, 2015) , 32. 2. Daum, Selfish, 134-35. Daum, Meghan, ed. Selfish, Shallow, and Self-Absorbed: Sixteen Writers on the Deci sion Not to Have Kids. New York: Picador, 2015.
Book with Multiple Authors For a book with two authors, note that only the first-listed name is in verted in the bibliography entry. 1. Brian Grazer and Charles Fishman, A Curious Mind: The Secret to a Bigger Life (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2015) , 188. 2. Grazer and Fishman, Curious Mind, 190. Grazer, Brian, and Charles Fishman. A Curious Mind: The Secret to a Bigger Life. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2015.
For a book with three authors, adapt as follows:
14 . 2 3
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
1. Alexander Berkman, Henry Bauer, and Carl Nold, Prison Blossoms: Anarchist Voicesfrom . . . 2. Berkman, Bauer, and Nold, Prison Blossoms . . . Berkman, Alexander, Henry Bauer, and Carl Nold. Prison Blossoms: Anarchist Voicesfrom . . .
For a book with four or more authors, list all the authors in the bibliogra phy entry. Word order and punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In the note, however, cite only the name of the first-listed au thor, followed by et al. See also 14.76. 1. Claire Hacek et al., Mediated Lives: Reflections on Wearable Technologies . . . 2. Haeek et al., Mediated Lives . . .
Book with Author plus Editor or Translator In a book with an editor or translator in addition to the author, ed. or trans. in the note becomes Edited by or Translated by in the bibliography entry. See also 14.104. 1. Gabriel Garcia Marquez, Love in the Time ofCholera, trans. Edith Grossman (London: Cape, 1988), 242-55. 2. Garcia Marquez, Cholera, 33. Garcia Marquez, Gabriel. Love in the Time of Cholera. Translated by Edith Gross man. London: Cape, 1988.
Chapter in an Edited Book When citing a chapter or similar part of an edited book, include the chap ter author; the chapter title, in quotation marks; and the editor. Precede the title of the book with in. Note the location of the page range for the chapter in the bibliography entry. See also 14.106-12. 1. Glenn Gould, "Streisand as Schwarzkopf," in The Glenn Gould Reader, ed. Tim Page (New York: Vintage Books, 1984), 310. 2. Gould, "Streisand as Schwarzkopf," 309. Gould, Glenn. "Streisand as Schwarzkopf." In The Glenn Gould Reader, edited by Tim Page, 308-11. New York: Vintage Books, 1984.
Notes
14. 24
journal Article Citations of journals typically include the volume and issue number and date of publication. The volume number follows the italicized j ournal title in roman and with no intervening punctuation. A specific page ref erence is included in the notes; the page range for an article is included in the bibliography. In the full citation, page numbers are preceded by a colon. Authors should record the full information for the issue, including issue number, even if a journal is paginated consecutively across a vol ume or ifthe month or season appears with the year. 1. Benjamin Bagley, "Loving Someone in Particular," Ethics 125, no. 2 (January 2015) : 484-85. 2. Bagley, "Loving Someone in Particular," 501. Bagley, Benjamin. " Loving Someone in Particular." Ethics 125, no. 2 (January 2015) : 477-507.
The URL in the following example indicates that the article was con sulted online; in this case, it is based on a DOI and is preferred to the URL that appears with the article (see 14.7, 14.8) . Some publishers will use the URL as the basis of a link to the cited resource. Shortened cita tions for subsequent references to an online source need not repeat the URL. For access dates (not shown here) , see 14.176. 1. Jui-Ch'i Liu, "Beholding the Feminine Sublime: Lee Miller's War Photogra phy," Signs 40, no. 2 (Winter 2015) : 311, https://doi.org/10.1086/678242. 2. Liu, "Beholding the Feminine Sublime," 312. Liu, Jui-Ch'i. "Beholding the Feminine Sublime: Lee Miller's War Photography." Signs 40, no. 2 (Winter 2015): 308-19. https://doi.org/10.1086/678242.
Notes Note Numbers 14. 24
N u m bers in text versus numbers in notes. Note reference numbers in text are set as superior (superscript) numbers. In the notes themselves, they are normally full size, not raised, and followed by a period. (In man uscripts, superscript numbers in both places-the typical default setting in the note-making feature of a word processor-are perfectly accept able.)
14. 2 5
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
"Crushed thirty feet upwards, the waters flashed fo r a n instant like heaps of fountains, then brokenly sank in a shower of flakes, leaving the circling surface creamed like new milk round the marble trunk of the whale." 1 1. Herman Melville, Moby-Dick; or, The Whale (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1851), 627.
If a symbol rather than a number is used (see 14.25) , the symbol appears as a superscript in the text but not in the note, where it is not followed by a period but may be followed by a space, as long as this is done con sistently. (In some typefaces, symbols may become difficult to read as superscripts; in such cases, they may be set on the line, full size, in the text as well as the notes.) 14. 2 5
Sequencing o f note numbers a n d symbols. Notes, whether footnotes or endnotes, should be numbered consecutively, beginning with 1, throughout each article and for each new chapter-not throughout an en tire book unless the text has no internal divisions. Where only a handful of footnotes appear in an entire book or, perhaps, just one in an article, symbols may be used instead of numbers (see also 14.24) . Usually an as terisk is enough, but if more than one note is needed on the same page, the sequence is * u. For using a combination of numbers and symbols for two sets of notes, see 14.49-51. For notes to tables and other nontextual matter, which are usually handled independently of the notes to the text, see 3.76-80.
14. 2 6
Placement o f note n u mber. A note number should generally be placed at the end of a sentence or at the end of a clause. The number normally follows a quotatioa (whether it is run in to the text or set as an extract) . Relative to other punctuation, the number follows any punctuation mark except for the dash, which it precedes.
"This," wrote George Templeton Strong, "is what our tailors can do." 1 It was the hour of "national paths" toward socialism;9 but that expression, which turned out to be temporary, was more an incantation than a discovery. The bias was apparent in the Shotwell series3-and it must be remembered that Shotwell was a student of Robinson's.
Though a note number normally follows a closing parenthesis, it may on rare occasion be more appropriate to place the number inside the closing parenthesis-if, for example, the note applies to a specific term within the parentheses.
Notes
14. 2 9
(In an earlier book he had said quite the opposite.) 2 Men and their unions, as they entered industrial work, negotiated two things: young women would be laid off once they married (the commonly acknowledged "marriage bar" 1), and men would be paid a "family wage." 14. 2 7
Note n u mbers with chapter a n d article titles a n d subheads. In books, a
note number should never appear within or at the end of a chapter title. A note that applies to an entire chapter should be unnumbered and is preferably placed at the foot of the first page of the chapter, preceding any numbered notes (see 14.52-55) . (In the case of an electronic format that does not support footnotes as such, an unnumbered note might ap pear immediately after, or be linked from, the chapter title.) Some jour nal publishers place an asterisk at the end of the article title for notes that apply to an article as a whole and reserve numbered references for other notes. Note references appearing with a subhead within a book chapter or an article should be numbered along with the rest of the notes, though some editors will prefer to move such references into the text that fol lows the subhead. 14. 2 8
M u ltiple citations a n d multiple note references. More than one note reference should never appear in the same place (such as5>6) ; however, a single note can contain more than one citation or comment (see 14.57) . Nor can a note number reappear out of sequence; the substance of a note that applies to more than one location must be repeated under a new note number. To avoid such repetition, especially for a longer discursive note, a cross-reference may be used-though these must be checked carefully before publication. (See also 14.29-36.)
18. See note 3 above.
Some systems of numbered references used by publications in the sci ences not only allow multiple reference numbers in the same location but also allow numbers to reappear out of sequence for repeated notes; for more details, consult Scientific Style and Format (bibliog. 1.1) .
Shortened Citations 14 . 2 9
When t o u s e shortened citations. To reduce the bulk of documentation
in works that use footnotes or endnotes, subsequent citations of sources already given in full-either in a previous note or in a bibliography that provides complete bibliographic data-should be shortened whenever
14 . 3 0
N O T E S A N D B I B .L I O G R A P H Y
possible. (In a work without a bibliography, it i s preferable t o repeat the full citation the first time it appears in each new chapter.) The shortf o rm, as distinct from an abbreviation, should include enough information to remind readers of the full title or to lead them to the appropriate entry in the bibliography. (Some short forms are not covered here: for citing different chapters in the same work, see 14.108; for letters, see 14.111; for legal citations, see 14.275. Other short forms may be patterned on the examples in this section.) 14. 3 0
Basic structure o f t h e short form. The most common short form con sists of the last name of the author and the main title of the work cited, usually shortened if more than four words, as in examples 4-6 below. For more on authors' names, see 14.32. For more on short titles, see 14.33. For more on journal articles, see 14.185.
1. Samuel A. Morley, Poverty and Inequality in Latin America: The Impact ofAd justment and Recovery (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1995) , 24-25. 2. Regina M. Schwartz, "Nationals and Nationalism: Adultery in the House of David," Critical Inquiry 19, no. 1 (1992) : 131-32. 3. Ernest Kaiser, "The Literature of Harlem," in Harlem: A Community in Transition, ed. J. H. Clarke (New York: Citadel Press, 1964) . 4. Morley, Poverty and Inequality, 43. 5. Schwartz, "Nationals and Nationalism," 138. 6. Kaiser, "Literature of Harlem," 189-90. 14. 3 1
Cross-reference t o ful l citation. When references to a particular source
are far apart, readers encountering the short form may be helped by a cross-reference to. the original note-especially in the absence of a full bibliography. These cross-references must be checked carefully before the work is published. 1. Miller, Qµest, 81 (see chap. 1, n. 4) .
It may be better simply to repeat the full details for a source at its first appearance in the notes to each new chapter, an approach recommended by Chicago for works that lack a full bibliography. 14. 3 2
Short form for authors' names. Only the last name of the author, or of the editor or translator if given first in the full reference, is needed in the short form. Full names or initials are included only when authors with the same last name must be distinguished from one another. Such abbre viations as ed. or trans. following a name in the full reference are omitted in subsequent references. If a work has two or three authors, give the
Notes
14.34
last name of each; for more than three, the last name of the first author followed by et al. 1. Kathryn Petras and Ross Petras, eds., Very Bad Poetry . . . 2. Joseph A. Bellizzi, H. F. Kruckeberg, J. R. Hamilton, and W. S. Martin, "Con sumer Perceptions of National, Private, and Generic Brands," . . . 3. Petras and Petras, Very Bad Poetry . . . 4. Bellizzi et al., "Consumer Perceptions," . . . 14. 3 3
Short form for titles o f works. The short title contains the key word or words from the main title. An initial A or The is usually omitted. The or der of the words should not be changed (for example, Daily Notes ofa Trip around the World should be shortened not to World Trip but to Daily Notes or Around the World) . Titles of four words or fewer are seldom shortened. The short title is italicized or set in roman and quotation marks accord ing to the way the full title appears.
The War journal ofMajor Damon "Rocky" Gause (Short title) War journal "A Brief Account of the Reconstruction of Aristotle's Protrepticus" (Short title) "Aristotle's Protrepticus"
Kriegstagebuch des Oberkommandos der Wehrmacht, 1940-1945 (Short title) Kriegstagebuch
In short titles in languages other than English, no word should be omit ted that governs the case ending of a word included in the short title. If in doubt, ask someone who knows the language. 14.34
ibid. (from ibidem, "in the same place") usually refers to a single work cited in the note im mediately preceding. In a departure from previous editions, Chicago discourages the use of ibid. in favor of shortened citations as described elsewhere in this section; to avoid repetition, the title of a work just cited may be omitted. Shortened citations generally take up less than a line, meaning that ibid. saves no space, and in electronic formats that link to one note at a time, ibid. risks confusing the reader. In the following ex amples, shortened citations are used for the first reference, as in a work with a full bibliography (see 14.29) . The short forms now preferred by Chicago are followed by the same examples using ibid. Note that either abbreviated form (author only or ibid.) is appropriate only when it refers to the last item cited; where this is not the case, or where the previous Shortened citations versus "ibid." The abbreviation
14. 35
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
note cites more than one source, the fuller form o fthe shortened citation must be repeated. Note also that with the preferred short form, a page reference must be repeated even if it is the same as the last-cited loca tion (as in note 3) ; with ibid., an identical page location is not repeated. The word ibid. , italicized here only because it is a word used as a word (see 7.63) , is capitalized at the beginning of a note and followed by a period. 1. Morrison, Beloved, 3. 2. Morrison, 18. 3. Morrison, 18. 4. Morrison, 24-26. 5. Morrison, Song ofSolomon, 401-2. 6. Morrison, 433. 7. Diaz, Oscar Wao, 37-38. 8. Morrison, Song ofSolomon, 403. 9. Diaz, Oscar Wao, 152. 10. Diaz, 201-2. 11. Morrison, Song ofSolomon, 240; Beloved, 32. 12. Morrison, Beloved, 33.
or or or
2. Ibid., 18. 3. Ibid. 4. Ibid., 24-26.
or
6. Ibid., 433.
or
10. Ibid., 201-2.
An author-only reference (or ibid.) may also be used within one note in successive references to the same work. 13. Morris Birkbeck, "The Illinois Prairies and Settlers,'' in Prairie State: Im pressions ofIllinois, 1 673-1967, by Travelers and Other Observers, ed. Paul M. Angle (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1968), 62. "The soil of the Big-prairie, which is of no great extent notwithstanding its name, is a rich, cool sand; that is to say, one of the most desirable description" (Birkbeck, 63 [or ibid., 63] ) .
To avoid a succession o f repeated notes fo r the same works, the content of notes 2-4, 6, and 8-12 in the examples above might instead be placed parenthetically in the text in place of the note references, but only if the works under discussion are clear from the text (see also 13.66) . 14. 3 5
"Idem." When several works by the same person are cited successively in the same note, idem ("the same," sometimes abbreviated to id.) has sometimes been used in place of the author's name. Except in le gal references, where the abbreviation id. is used in place of ibid. , the term is rarely used anymore. Chicago discourages the use of idem, rec ommending instead that the author's last name be repeated. See also 14.34.
Notes 14. 3 6
14 . 3 9
"Op. cit." a n d "loc. cit." Op.
cit. (opere citato, "in the work cited") and foe. cit. (loco citato, "in the place cited") , used with an author's last name and standing in place of a previously cited title, have rightly fallen into dis use. Consider a reader's frustration on meeting, for example, "Wells, op. cit., 10" in note 95 and having to search back to note 2 for the full source or, worse still, finding that two works by Wells have been cited. Chicago disallows both op. cit. and loc. cit. and instead uses the short-title form described in 14.33.
Commentary and Quotations in Notes 14. 3 7
Citations p l u s commentary in a note. When a note contains not only the
source of a fact or quotation in the text but related substantive material as well, the source comes first. A period usually separates the citation from the commentary. Such comments as "emphasis mine" are usually put in parentheses. See also 13.62. 1. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar, act 3, sc. 1. Caesar's claim of constancy should be taken with a grain of salt. 2. Little, "Norms of Collegiality,'' 330 (my italics) . 14. 3 8
Quotation within a note. When a note includes a quotation, the source normally follows the terminal punctuation of the quotation. The entire source need not be put in parentheses, which involves changing existing parentheses to brackets (see 6.101) and creating unnecessary clutter.
1. One estimate of the size of the reading public at this time was that of Sydney Smith: "Readers are fourfold in number compared with what they were before the beginning of the French war. . . . There are four or five hundred thousand read ers more than there were thirty years ago, among the lower orders." Letters, ed. Nowell C. Smith (New York: Oxford University Press, 1953), 1:341, 343.
Long quotations should be set off as extracts in notes as they would be in text (see 13.10) . In notes, more than three lines of poetry should be set off (but see 13.25; see also 13.29) . 14 .39
Substantive notes. Substantive, or discursive, notes may merely amplify the text and include no sources. Such notes may augment any system of source citation, including the author-date system (see chapter 15) . When a source is needed, it is treated as in the example in 14.38 or, if brief and already cited in full, may appear parenthetically, as in the following ex ample:
14.40
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
1. Ernst Cassirer takes important notice o f this i n Language and Myth (59-62) and offers a searching analysis of man's regard for things on which his power of inspirited action may crucially depend. 14.40
Parag raphing within long notes. To avoid page makeup problems, very long footnotes should be avoided (see 14.44) . No such bar exists for end notes, however, and very long endnotes should be broken into multiple paragraphs as an aid to reading. Authors and editors should first con sider, however, whether such a note would be more effective if shortened or at least partially incorporated into the text. See also 14.45.
14.41
Footnotes that break across pages in a printed work. When a footnote begins on one. page and continues on the next, the break should be made in midsentence lest readers miss the end of the note; a short rule appears above the continued part (see fig. 14.1) . This advice applies only to the published form of a work (and is something that is generally imposed at the typesetting stage) . At the manuscript stage, authors and editors should let the note-making feature in their word-processing software de termine any such breaks.
14.42
"See" and "cf." Notes are often used to invite readers to consult further resources. When doing so, authors should keep in mind the distinction between see and cf., using cf. only to mean "compare" or "see, by way of comparison." Neither term is italicized in notes (though see is italicized in indexes; see 16.22) .
1. For further discussion o f this problem, see Jones, Conflict, 49. 2. Others disagre � with my position; cf. Fisher and Ury, Getting to Yes, 101-3.
Footnotes versus Endnotes 14.43
Footnotes and end notes-an overview. As their name suggests, foot notes appear at the foot of a page. In a journal, endnotes appear at the end of an article; in a book, at the end of a chapter or, more commonly, at the back of the book. In multiauthor books, where the notes may differ in kind and length, and where chapters may be offered separately, they are usually placed at the end of the chapter to which they pertain. (The de cision of where to place the notes is generally made by the publisher.) In electronic formats, notes are often linked to the text, and the distinction between footnotes and endnotes may not apply. At the manuscript stage, authors can work with whichever form seems most convenient, though notes should be inserted with a word processor's note-making function
FIGURE 1 4 . 1 . A page of text with footnotes; the first note is continued from the previous page (with a short rule above it). See 14.41.
14.44
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
t o facilitate automatic renumbering when notes are added o r deleted (see also 2.22) . For footnotes to tables, see 2.31, 3.76-80. For notes in previously published material, see 2.45. 14.44
Footnotes-pros and cons. Readers of printed works usually prefer foot notes for ease of reference. This is especially true where the notes are closely integrated into the text and make interesting reading, or if im mediate knowledge of the sources is essential to readers. The limiting factor in printed works is page makeup-it can be difficult or impossible to fit a close succession of long footnotes onto the pages they pertain to, especially in an illustrated work (a basic requirement for all footnotes is that they at least begin on the page on which they are referenced) . There is also the matter of appearance; a page consisting almost exclu sively of footnotes is daunting for many readers. For some remedies, see 14.56-60.
14.45
Endnotes-pros and cons. Endnotes, which pose no page makeup chal lenges beyond those of ordinary text, obviate many of the disadvantages of footnotes in printed works (see 14.44) . Because of this flexibility, and because pages free of footnotes are less intimidating to many readers, publishers' marketing and sales staff may recommend endnotes in books directed to general as well as scholarly or professional readers. Nonethe less, because general readers may be disappointed to find a third or more of a book devoted to endnotes, authors still need to aim for a healthy balance between text and notes (i.e., by resisting the temptation to in clude an excessive number of discursive notes) . The main problem with endnotes is that of finding a particular note. This difficulty (usually not encountered in electronic texts, where text and notes are linked) can be ameliorated by informative running heads (see 14.47) .
14.46
Endnote placement. Endnotes to each chapter of a book are often best grouped in the end matter, following the text and any appendixes and preceding the bibliography if there is one (see 1.4) . The main heading is simply "Notes," and the group of notes to each chapter is introduced by a subhead bearing the chapter number or title or both (see fig. 14.2) . In a book that has a different author for each chapter, or whose chapters may be offered separately, endnotes normally appear at the end of each chapter. In a journal, they appear at the end of each article. In the latter two cases, a subhead "Notes" usually appears between text and notes (see fig. 14.3) .
14.47
Running heads for endnotes. Where endnotes are gathered at the back of a printed book and occupy more than two or three pages, running
FIGURE 14.2. A page of endnotes, with a subhead introducing the notes to a new chapter and a running head showing the text pages on which the notes are refer enced. See 14.46, 14.47.
F I GU RE 14. 3 . Chapter endnotes (first page of notes only) , prefaced by the sub head "Notes." See 14.46.
Notes
14.48
heads (both verso and recto) showing the page numbers to which the notes pertain are a boon to readers (see 1.15) . (In electronic formats without fixed pages, such running heads will not apply; instead, the notes may be linked to the text as an aid to navigation.) To determine what page numbers to use in the running head for a particular page of notes, find the numbers of the first and last notes beginning on that page (dis regarding a runover from a previous page) and locate the references to these notes in the main text. The numbers of the first and last pages on which these references appear in text are the numbers to use in the run ning head: for example, "Notes to Pages 123-125." The last number is not abbreviated; compare 9.61. (If, as occasionally happens, only one note appears on a page, use the singular: e.g., "Note to Page 23.") Since these running heads can be completed only when page proofs are available, the corrections are considered "alterations" (see 2.135), and the cost may be charged to the publisher. (Another option, less useful for readers but cheaper for the publisher, is to include running heads that simply read "Notes to Chapter One," "Notes to Chapter Two," and so on; since readers are often unaware of the number of the chapter they are reading, chapter numbers must also appear in the running heads of the text itself.) When notes appear at the ends of chapters, note-related running heads are rarely necessary. 14.48
Special considerations for endnotes. Whereas footnote citations, be cause they appear so close to the text, can omit certain elements men tioned in the text, omitting them in endnotes risks irritating readers, who have to go back and forth. For example, an author or a title mentioned in the text need not be repeated in the footnote citation, though it is often helpful to do so. In an endnote, however, the author (or at least the au thor's last name, unless it is obvious) and title should be repeated, since at least some readers may have forgotten whether the note number was 93 or 94 by the time they find it at the back of the work. It is particularly annoying to arrive at the right place in the endnotes only to find another ibid. (see also 14.34) . Such frustration can be further prevented by con solidating some of the endnote references, using the devices illustrated in the examples below.
1. This and the preceding four quotations are all from Hamlet, act 1, sc. 4. 2. Mary Norris, Between You & Me: Confessions ofa Comma Queen (New York: W. W. Norton, 2015), 65. Further citations of this work are given in the text.
The device in the second example should be used only if the source is clear from the text, without reference to the endnotes. See also 13.67.
14.49
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Two Sets ofNotes 14.49
Endnotes plus footnotes. In a heavily documented work it is occasion ally helpful to separate substantive notes from source citations. In such a case, the citation notes should be numbered and appear as endnotes. The substantive notes, indicated by asterisks and other symbols, appear as footnotes. The first footnote on each printed page is referenced by an asterisk. If more than one footnote begins on a page, the sequence of symbols is * t * . Should more than three such notes appear on the same page, the symbols are doubled for the fourth to the sixth notes: * * tt ** . (In certain electronic formats where pagination is fluid and there is no distinction b.etween footnotes and endnotes, such a system may need to be adapted.) See also 3.79, 14.24.
14. 5 0
Footnotes plus author-date citations. The rather cumbersome practice described in 14.49 may be avoided by the use of author-date citations for sources (see 14.2 and chapter 15) and numbered footnotes or end notes for the substantive comments. Moreover, the numbered notes can themselves contain parenthetical author-date citations when necessary, adding to the flexibility of such a system. See also 15.31.
14. 5 1
Editor's or translator's notes plus author's notes. I n a n edited o r trans lated work that includes notes by the original author, any additional notes furnished by the editor or translator must be distinguished from the oth ers. Most commonly, the added notes are interspersed and consecutively numbered with the original notes but distinguished from them either by appending "-Ed -'. ' or "-Trans." at the end of the note (following the pe riod or other final punctuation) or by enclosing the entire note, except the number, in square brackets. (An editor's or translator's comment can also be added as needed in square brackets within an original note; see 6.99.)
1. Millicent Cliff was Norton Westermont's first cousin, although to the very last she denied it.-Ed.
or
2. [The original reads gesungen; presumably gesunken is meant.]
Alternatively, if there are only a few added notes, these can be referenced by asterisks and other symbols and appear as footnotes; the original notes, numbered, then appear below them, as footnotes (see fig. 14.4) , or are treated as endnotes (see 14.49) .
Notes
14. 5 2
F I G U R E 14.4.
Translator's footnote referenced by an asterisk, followed by au thor's numbered footnotes. At the foot of the page, notes referenced by symbols always precede numbered notes, regardless of the order in which the symbols and numbers appear in the text. See 14.51.
Special Types ofNotes 14. 5 2
Unnu mbered notes. Footnotes without numbers or symbols always pre cede any numbered notes on the same page. They most often appear on the opening page of a chapter or other main division of a work. In a work with endnotes in which an unnumbered footnote is not an option, an un numbered endnote-to be used with caution because it is easily missed should appear immediately before note 1 to the relevant chapter. An ex ample of such a note would be a note applying to a book epigraph (see 1.37) , which would precede the endnotes to the first chapter and appear
14. 5 3
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
under a heading "Epigraph." Notes t o chapter epigraphs can b e handled similarly. Source notes, biographical notes, and other notes pertaining to an entire chapter or section-which often appear as unnumbered footnotes-are treated in 14.54 and 14.55. In the case of an electronic format that does not support footnotes as such, an unnumbered note might appear immediately after, or be linked from, the element to which it pertains. 14. 5 3
Notes keyed t o text b y l i n e or page numbers. In some works-trans lations and editions of the classics, for example, or books intended for a more general audience-it may be desirable to omit note numbers in the text. Any necessary notes may then be keyed to the text by line or page number, or both, usually followed by the word or phrase being annotated. (Line numbers are used as locators only if line numbers ap pear in the text.) Such notes may appear as footnotes or endnotes. Notes keyed to words or phrases in the text are a nicety usually applied by the publisher; unless instructed otherwise, authors should insert numbered notes in their manuscripts as described in 2�22. The annotated word or phrase may be distinguished from the annotation typographically (e.g., with italics or boldface) and separated from it by a colon or the use of brackets or other devices. Quotation marks, if used at all, should be re served for words that are themselves direct quotations in the text. See figures 14.5, 14.6. In electronic formats, the annotated word or phrase may be linked directly to and from its appearance in the main text.
14. 5 4
Source notes for previously published material. In anthologies and other collections of previously published material, or in largely new pub lications that contain one or more previously published chapters, the source of each reprinted piece may be given in an unnumbered footnote on the first printed page of the chapter, preceding any numbered foot notes. If the other notes are endnotes, the source note should remain a footnote if possible (and some copyright holders may request such a placement) . (In certain electronic formats that do not support footnotes as such, a source note may need to be linked from, or appear imme diately after, the chapter title.) For material still in copyright, the note should include the original title, publisher or journal, publication date, page numbers or other locators, and-very important-mention of per mission from the copyright owner to reprint. It may also include a copy right notice if requested. Some permissions grantors demand particular language in the source note. For exercising discretion versus acceding literally to the grantor's request, see 3.32, which deals with illustrations but applies equally to text. In many cases, wording can be adjusted for
Notes
14.54
Footnotes keyed to line numbers-a device best used with verse. (With prose, the notes cannot be numbered until the text has been typeset.) See 14.53.
F I G U R E 14. 5 .
consistency as long as proper credit is given. The following examples show various acceptable forms. See also 4.102. Reprinted with permission from Steven Shapin, The Scientific Revolution (Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 1996) , 15-64.
FIGURE 14. 6 . Endnotes keyed to page numbers, with key phrases in bold and italics. Though unnumbered in the text, notes that share the same page have been numbered in the endnotes to facilitate reference to individual notes. See 14.53, 14.157.
If an article or chapter has been revised: Originally published in a slightly different form in The Metropolis in Modern Life, ed. Robert Moore Fisher (New York: Doubleday, 1955), 125-48. Reprinted by per mission of the author and the publisher.
If a work is in the public domain (such as government publications) : Reprinted from Ambler Thompson and Barry N. Taylor, Guide for the Use ofthe In ternational System ofUnits (SI) (Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2008), 38-39. 14 . 5 5
Biographical notes a n d acknowledgments. In journals or multiauthor works, a brief biographical note on the author or authors may appear as an unnumbered note on the first page of each article or chapter. Alterna tively, some publications put such notes at the end of the article or chap ter (an approach that is sometimes also used for electronic formats that do not support the placement of unnumbered footnotes) . Such identify ing notes are unnecessary when the work includes a list of contributors with their affiliations. (See also 1.64, 1.66.)
Philip Ball is a freelance writer who lives in London. His many books include Curiosity: How Science Became Interested in Everything and Serving the Reich: The Struggle for the Soul ofPhysics under Hitler, both also published by the University of Chicago Press.
Similarly, special acknowledgments may be given in an unnumbered note, sometimes appended to the biographical information. The authors gratefully acknowledge the assistance ofJanni R. Blazer of the Chain and Fob Archive in the preparation of this chapter. Michael Saler is professor of history at the University of California, Davis. For their comments and assistance the author would like to thank . . .
notes-should be reduced or integrated into the text (see 14.44) . Notes presented as endnotes can generally accommodate lengthier commen tary, but this should be limited in a judicious manner (see 14.45) . Com plicated tabular material, lists, and other entities not part of the text should be put in an appendix rather than in the footnotes (see 1.59) . A parenthetical note in the text might read, for example, "For a list ofinsti tutions involved, see appendix A." 14 . 5 7
Several cit�tions in one note. The number of note references in a sen tence or a paragraph can sometimes be reduced by grouping several ci tations in a single note. The citations are separated by semicolons and must appear in the same order as the text material (whether works, quo tations, or whatever) to which they pertain. Take care to avoid any ambi guity as to what is documenting what.
Text: Only when we gather the work of several scholars-Walter Sutton's explications of some of Whitman's shorter poems; Paul Fussell's careful study of structure in "Cradle"; S. K. Coffman's close readings of "Crossing Brooklyn Ferry" and " Pas sage to India" ; and the attempts of Thomas I. Rountree and John Lovell, deal ing with "Song of Myself" and "Passage to India," respectively, to elucidate the strategy in "indirection"-do we begin to get a sense of both the extent and the specificity ofWhit� an's forms. 1
Note: 1. Sutton, "The Analysis of Free Verse Form, Illustrated by a Reading ofWhit man," Journal ofAesthetics and Art Criticism 18, no. 2 (December 1959) : 241-54; Fussell, "Whitman's Curious Warble: Reminiscence and Reconciliation," in The Presence of Walt Whitman, ed. R. W. B. Lewis (New York: Columbia University Press, 1962), 28-51; Coffman, " 'Crossing Brooklyn Ferry': A Note on the Catalog Technique in Whitman's Poetry," Modern Philology 51, no. 4 (May 1954) : 225-32; Coffman, "Form and Meaning in Whitman's 'Passage to India,"' PMLA 70, no. 3 (June 1955) : 337-49; Rountree, "Whitman's Indirect Expression and Its Applica tion to 'Song of Myself,"' PMLA 73, no. 5 (December 1958) : 549-55; and Lovell, "Appreciating Whitman: ' Passage to India,' " Modern Language Quarterly 21, no. 2 (June 1960): 131-41.
Notes
14. 6 0
In the example above, authors' given names are omitted in the note be cause they appear in the text. For inclusion of names in endnotes versus footnotes, see 14.48. 14. 5 8
Citing sources in t h e text rather than in t h e notes. Another way to re duce the number of notes is to cite sources (usually in parentheses) in the text. This approach can work well for a string of consecutive citations that refer to the same source (with or without the use of ibid. ; see 14.34) . For discussion and examples, see 13.64-72.
14. 5 9
Abbreviations for frequently cited works. If necessary, a frequently
mentioned work may be cited either parenthetically in text or in subse quent notes by means of an abbreviation, with the full citation provided in a note at first mention. (This practice is more helpful with footnotes than with endnotes.) See also 13.67, 14.60, 14.29-36. 1. Fran�ois Furet, The Passing ofan Illusion: The Idea ofCommunism in the Twen tieth Century, trans. Deborah Furet (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999), 368 (hereafter cited in text as PI) . (Subsequent text references) "In this sense, the Second World War completed what the First had begun-the domination of the great political religions over European public opinion," Furet points out (PI, 360) . But he goes on to argue . . .
An abbreviation differs from a short title (see 14.33) in that words may be abbreviated and the word order changed. In the following example, the author's name need not be repeated unless it is relevant to the citation. 2. Nathaniel B. Shurtleff, ed., Records ofthe Governor and Company ofthe Mas sachusetts Bay in New England (1628-86), 5 vols. (Boston, 1853-54) , 1:126 (hereaf ter cited as Mass. Records) . 3. Mass. Records, 2:330. 14. 6 0
List o f abbreviations. Where many abbreviations o f titles, manuscript collections, personal names, or other entities are used in a work-say, ten or more-they are best listed alphabetically in a separate section. In a book, the list may appear in the front matter (if footnotes are used) or in the end matter preceding the endnotes (if these are used) . It is usu ally headed "Abbreviations" and should be included in the table of con tents (see 1.4, 1.44) . Where only a few abbreviations are used, these are occasionally listed as the first section of the endnotes (see fig. 14.7) or at the head of the bibliography. Titles that are italicized in the notes or
14. 6 1
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
FIGURE
14 . 7 .
A short list o f abbreviations preceding endnotes. See 14.60.
bibliography should be italicized in their abbreviated form in the list of abbreviations and elsewhere.
Bibliographies Overview 14. 61
Relationship o f bibliog raphies t o notes. Although not all annotated works require a bibliography, since full details can be given in the notes, an alphabetical bibliography serves a number of purposes. Specifically, a full bibliography that includes all the sources cited in the text, in addition to providing an overview of the sources and therefore an indication of the scope of an author's research, can serve as a convenient key to short-
Bibliographies
14 . 6 4
ened forms of the notes (see 14.19,_ 14.29) . In some types of electronic publication formats, a full bibliography can streamline the process of creating links to works cited (which, in turn, enables publishers of those cited works to identify and create "cited by" links) . 14. 6 2
Format a n d placement o f bibliography. A bibliography arranged i n a single alphabetical list is the most common and usually the most reader friendly form for a work with or without notes to the text. All sources to be included-books, articles, dissertations, and so on-are alphabetically arranged in a single list by the last names of the authors (or, if no author or editor is given, by the title or, failing that, by a descriptive phrase) . A bibliography is normally placed at the end, preceding the index. In a multiauthor book or a textbook (or in a book offered in the form of sepa rate chapters) , each chapter may be followed by a brief bibliography. For an illustration, see figure 14.8; for the arrangement of entries, see 14.6566. For division into sections, see 14.63.
14. 6 3
Dividing a bibliography into sections. A bibliography may occasionally be divided into sections-but only if doing so would make the reader's job significantly easier. It may be appropriate to subdivide a bibliography (1) when it includes manuscript sources, archival collections, or other materials that do not fit into a straight alphabetical list; (2) when readers need to see at a glance the distinction between different kinds of works for example, in a study of one writer, between works by the writer and those about him or her; or (3) when the bibliography is intended primar ily as a guide to further reading (as in this manual) . When divisions are necessary, a headnote should appear at the beginning of the bibliogra phy, and each section should be introduced by an explanatory subhead (see fig. 14.9) . No source should be listed in more than one section. For alphabetizing, see 14.65-66.
14. 64
Kinds of bibliographies. Though Chicago generally recommends a full bibliography for book-length works, any of the bibliography categories listed here may be suited to a particular type of work. For author-date reference lists, see 15.10-16.
1. Full bibliography. A full bibliography includes all works cited, whether in text or in notes, other than personal communications (see 14.214) . Some particu larly relevant works the author has consulted may also be listed, even if not mentioned in the text. The usual heading is Bibliography, though Works Cited or Literature Cited may be used if no additional works are included. 2. Selected bibliography. If, for whatever reason, the author does not wish to list all works cited, the title must so indicate: Selected Bibliography may be
F I G U R E 14 . 8 .
The first page of a bibliography for a book. See 14.62, 14.67-71.
Bibliographies
F I G U R E 14 . 9 .
14 . 6 4
The opening page of a bibliography divided into sections, with an
author ' s note explaining the principle of selection. See 14.63, 14.64.
used (and is preferred over Select Bibliography) or, if the list is quite short, Suggested Readings or Further Readings. A headnote should explain the prin ciples of selection. See figure 14.9.
3. Annotated bibliography. Generally more convenient for readers than a bib liographic essay (see next item) is an annotated bibliography. Annotations may simply follow the publication details (sometimes in brackets if only a few entries are annotated), or they may start a new line (and are often indented from the left margin) . See figure 14.10.
4. Bibliographic essay. Less formal than an annotated bibliography is a bib liographic essay, in which the author treats the literature discursively. Because
F I G U R E 14 . 1 0 .
Part of the first section of an annotated bibliography. See 14.64.
Bibliographies
F I G U R E 14 . 1 1 .
14. 6 5
Part ofthe first section of a bibliographic essay. See 14.64.
works treated in this way are not alphabetized, subject divisions may be made freely (see 14.63) . Such an essay may be particularly suited to certain types of archival sources that do not easily lend themselves to an alphabetical list. It may be included in addition to a bibliography, in which case it should come first. If works discussed in the essay are listed in the bibliography, they may be given in shortened form (as in notes) . If there is no bibliography, the essay must include full facts of publication, whether or not the titles also appear in the notes. For an illustration, see figure 14.11. 5. List ofworks by one author. A list of works by one author, usually titled Pub lished Works [of Author's Name] or Writings [of Author's Name] , is most of ten arranged chronologically. If several titles are listed for each year, the dates may appear as subheads.
Arrangement ofEntries 14. 6 5
Alphabetical order for bibliog raphy entries.
The rules for alphabetiz ing index entries (see 16.56-93) apply also to a bibliography, with the
14 . 6 6
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
modifications described i n this section and, where appropriate, i n 14.6771. As for index entries, Chicago recommends the letter-by-letter system but will accept the word-by-word system, which is closer to what some word processors produce. Under the letter-by-letter system, an entry for " Fernandez, Angelines" would precede an entry for " Fernan Gomez, Fernando" ; under the word-by-word system, the opposite order would prevail. Note that word processors, though they can provide a significant head start, will generally not produce a perfectly sorted list for either sys tem. In addition to correcting any software-based errors and variations, authors may need to make adjustments for any entries beginning with a 3-em dash (but see 14.67) . 14. 6 6
Arrangement o f bibliography entries with more than o n e author. A
single-author entry precedes a multiauthor entry beginning with the same name. Only the name of the first author is inverted. Kogan, Herman. The First Century: The Chicago Bar Association, 1874-1974. Chi cago: Rand McNally, 1974. Kogan, Herman, and Lloyd Wendt. Chicago: A Pictorial History. New York: Dut ton, 1958.
Successive entries by two or more authors in which only the first au thor's name is the same are alphabetized according to the coauthors' last names (regardless of the number of coauthors) . Brooks, Daniel R., and Deborah A. McLennan. The Nature ofDiversity: An Evolu tionary Voyage ofDiscovery. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002. Brooks, Daniel R., and E. 0. Wiley. Evolution as Entropy. 2nd ed. Chicago: Univer sity of Chicago Press, 1986.
The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Bibliography 14.67
The 3-em dash in bibliographies-some caveats. The advice in this sec
tion, which explains how to use the 3-em dash to stand in for repeated bibliography entries under the same name, is aimed primarily at pub lishers and editors. Authors usually should not use the 3-em dash for repeated names in their manuscripts. Among other potential pitfalls, 3-em dashes do not work in computerized sorts (i.e., all entries with 3em dashes will line up in one place) . Moreover, an incorrectly applied dash may obscure an important detail-for example, the abbreviation ed. or trans. Publishers, too, may decide not to use 3-em dashes: 3-em dashes make it impractical to present an entry outside the context of the
Bibliographies
14. 6 9
list and can hide entries from bibliographic databases, both of which are concerns for electronic publication formats. Where 3-em dashes are not used, simply repeat the authors' names and sort the entries as described throughout this section. See also 6.94. 14. 6 8
T h e 3 - e m dash for o n e repeated name. For successive entries by the
same author, editor, translator, or compiler, a 3-em dash (followed by a period or comma, depending on the presence of an abbreviation such as ed.) replaces the name after the first appearance (but see 14.67) . Alpha betization is by title of work (abbreviations such as ed. or trans., which must always be included, do not influence the order of entries) . See also 14.71. Judt, Tony. A Grand Illusion? An Essay on Europe. New York: Hill and Wang, 1996. . Reappraisals: Reflections on the Forgotten Twentieth Century. New York: Pen guin Press, 2008. , ed. Resistance and Revolution in Mediterranean Europe, 1939-1948. New York: Routledge, 1989. Squire, Larry R. "The Hippocampus and the Neuropsychology of Memory." In Neurobiology ofthe Hippocampus, edited by W. Seifert, 491-511. New York: Ox ford University Press, 1983. . Memory and Brain. New York: Oxford University Press, 1987.
--
--
--
14. 6 9
T h e 3 - e m dash for more than o n e repeated name. The 3-em dash can
stand for the same two or more authors (or editors or translators, etc.) as in the previous entry, provided they are listed in the same order and no author appears for one source but not for the other. Note that the second listed work is authored by (rather than edited by) Marty and Appleby; ab breviations for editor, translator, and so forth cannot be replaced by the 3-em dash and must always be listed explicitly. See also 14.67. Marty, Martin E., and R. Scott Appleby, eds. Fundamentalisms Comprehended. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995. . The Glory and the Power: The Fundamentalist Challenge to the Modern World. Boston: Beacon Press, 1992. but Comaroff, Jean, and John Comaroff, eds. Modernity and Its Malcontents: Ritual and Power in Postcolonial Africa. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993. Comaroff, John, and Jean Comaroff. OfRevelation and Revolution. 2 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1991-97. never Author 1, Author 2, Author 3. Title . . . --, Author 4, . Title . . . --
--
14.70
14.70
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RA P H Y
T h e 3-em dash for a n institutional name. The 3-em dash may also be
used for institutional or corporate authors. Note that identical titles must be repeated. See also 14.67. Unicode Consortium. The Unicode Standard. Version 5.0. Edited by Julie D. Allen et al. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Addison-Wesley, 2007. , . The Unicode Standard. Version 7.0.0. Edited by Julie D. Allen et al. Moun tain View, CA: Unicode Consortium, 2014. http://www.unicode.org/versions /Unicode7.0.0/.
--
14.71
Alphabetical order for titles by the same author. In a bibliography (as
opposed to a reference list; see 15.18) , titles by the same author are nor mally listed alphabetically. An initial the, a, or an is ignored in the alpha betizing. Note that all works by the same person (or by the same persons in the same order)-whether that person is editor, author, translator, or compiler-appear together, regardless of the added abbreviation. Diaz, Junot. The Brief Wondrous Life ofOscar Wao. New York: Riverhead Books, 2007. . Drown. New York: Riverhead Books, 1996. . This Is How You Lose Her. New York: Riverhead Books, 2012. Monmonier, Mark. Coast Lines: How Mapmakers Frame the World and Chart Envi ronmental Change. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2008. --. From Squaw Tit to Whorehouse Meadow: How Maps Name, Claim, and In flame. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. Mulvany, Nancy C. Indexing Books. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2005. , ed. Indexing, Providing Access to Information-Looking Back, Looking Ahead: Proceedings ofthe 25th Annual Meeting ofthe American Society ofIndexers. Port Aransas, TX: American Society of lndexers, 1993. --. "Software Tools for Indexing: What We Need." Indexer 17 (October 1990): 108-13. --
--
--
On the other hand, a bibliography of works by a single author (Writings of Author Name) is usually arranged chronologically. (For an example, see section 2 in fig. 14.9.) Two or more titles published in any one year are arranged alphabetically. See also 14.67.
Author's Name 14.72
Author's name-overview and related discussions. This section, on
the correct form for the name of the author in source citations, applies
Author's Name
14 . 7 5
to most of the resource types discussed in this chapter. (The examples mainly show books and journal articles.) For personal names in index entries, which are inverted in the same manner as in bibliographies and reference lists, see 16.71-74, 16.75-87. 14.73
Form of author's name. Authors' names are normally given as they ap pear with the source itself-that is, on the title page of a book or other stand-alone work or at the head of a journal article or the like. Certain adjustments, however, may be made to assist correct identification (but see 15.12) . First names may be given in full in place of initials (but see 14.74) . If an author uses his or her given name in one cited work and ini tials in another (e.g., "Mary L. Jones" versus "M. L. Jones"), the same form, preferably the fuller one, should be used in references to that au thor for both works. To help differentiate similar names, middle initials may be given where known. Degrees and affiliations following names on a title page are omitted.
14.74
Authors preferring initials. For authors who always use initials, full
names should not be supplied-for example, T. S. Eliot, M. F. K. Fisher, 0. Henry (pseud.) , P. D. James, C. S. Lewis, J. D. Salinger, H. G. Wells. Note that space is added between initials. (Exceptions may be made for special cases like H.D.-the pen name for Hilda Doolittle.) In some in stances, a cross-reference may be appropriate (see 14.8 1) . See also 10.12. Very rarely, a portion of an author's given name omitted in the source is supplied in brackets in a bibliography entry. This practice should be limited to authors who may be known by both forms: for example, R. S. Crane may be listed as R[onald] S. Crane. See also 15.33. 14. 7 5
One author. In a note, the author's name is given in the normal order.
In a bibliography, where names are arranged alphabetically, it is usually inverted (last name first) . See also 14.23. 1. David Shields, How Literature Saved My Life (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2013), 33. 2. Wendy Hui Kyong Chun, "On Hypo-real Models or Global Climate Change: A Challenge for the Humanities," Critical Inquiry 41, no. 3 (Spring 2015) : 677. 3. Jeffrey Q. McCune Jr., Sexual Discretion: Black Masculinity and the Politics of Passing (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014), 5. 4. Shields, Literature, 100-101. 5. Chun, "Hypo-real Models," 681. 6. McCune, Sexual Discretion, 105-11.
14.76
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Chun, Wendy Hui Kyong. " O n Hypo-real Models o r Global Climate Change: A Challenge for the Humanities." Critical Inquiry 41, no. 3 (Spring 2015) : 675-703. McCune, Jeffrey Q., Jr. Sexual Discretion: Black Masculinity and the Politics ofPass ing. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014. Shields, David. How Literature Saved My Life. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2013.
14. 7 6
Two o r more authors (or editors). Two or three authors (or editors) ofthe
same work are listed in the order in which they appear with the source. In a bibliography, only the first author's name is inverted, and a comma must appear both before and after the first author's given name or ini tials. Use the conjunction and (not an ampersand) . 1. Kathryn Sorrells and Sachi Sekimoto, eds., Globalizing Intercultural Commu nication: A Reader (Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE, 2015), xvi. 2. Steven D. Levitt and Stephen J. Dubner, Freakonomics: A Rogue Economist Explores the Hidden Side ofEverything (New York: William Morrow, 2005), 20-21. 3. Kate D. L. Umbers, Matthew R. E. Symonds, and Hanna Kokko, "The Moth ematics of Female Pheromone Signaling: Strategies for Aging Virgins," American Naturalist 185, no. 3 (March 2015) : 422. 4. Sorrells and Sekimoto, Globalizing Intercultural Communication, xx-xxi. Levitt, Steven D., and Stephen J. Dubner. Freakonomics: A Rogue Economist Ex plores the Hidden Side ofEverything. New York: William Morrow, 2005. Sorrells, Kathryn, and Sachi Sekimoto, eds. Globalizing Intercultural Communica tion: A Reader. Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE, 2015. Umbers, Kate D. L., Matthew R. E. Symonds, and Hanna Kokko. "The Mothemat ics of Female Pheromone Signaling: Strategies for Aging Virgins." American Naturalist 185, no. 3 (March 2015) : 417-32.
For works by or edited by four to ten persons, all names are usually given in the bibliography. Word order and punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In a note, only the name of the first author is included, followed by et al. with no intervening comma. 5. Natalia V. Gmuca et al., "The Fat and the Furriest: Morphological Changes in Harp Seal Fur with Ontogeny," Physiological and Biochemical Zoology 88, no. 2 (March/April 2015) : 158. 6. Gmuca et al.; "Harp Seal Fur," 160. _ Gmuca, Natalia V., Linnea E. Pearson, Jennifer M. Burns, and Heather E. M. Liwanag. "The Fat and the Furriest: Morphological Changes in Harp Seal Fur
Author's Name
14.79
with Ontogeny." Physiological and Biochemical Zoology 88, no. 2 (March/April 2015) : 158-66.
For works with more than ten authors-more common in the natural sciences-Chicago recommends the policy followed by the American Naturalist (see bibliog. 5) : only the first seven should be listed in the bib liography, followed by et al. (Where space is limited, the policy of the American Medical Association may be followed: up to six authors' names are listed; if there are more than six, only the first three are listed, fol lowed by et al.) 14.77
Two or more authors (or editors) with same family name. When two or
more authors (or editors) share the same family name (and are credited as such in the source) , the name is repeated (even if the family name is not repeated in the source itself) . 1. Christopher Kendris and Theodore Kendris, 501 Spanish Verbs, 7th ed. (Hauppauge, NY: Barron's Educational Series, 2010), 14. 2. Kendris and Kendris, 501 Spanish Verbs, 27-28. 14.78
Author's name in title. When the name of the author appears in the title
or subtitle of a cited work (such as an autobiography) , the note citation may begin with the title (i.e., assuming the authorship is clear either from the title or in the text) . The bibliography entry, however, should begin with the author's name, even though it is repeated in the title. See also 14.103. 1. Autobiography ofBenjamin Franklin, ed. John Bigelow (Philadelphia: J. B. Lip pincott, 1868), 233. 2. Autobiography ofBenjamin Franklin, 234. Franklin, Benjamin. Autobiography ofBenjamin Franklin. Edited by John Bigelow. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott, 1868.
14 .79
No listed author (anonymous works). Ifthe author or editor is unknown, the note or bibliography entry should normally begin with the title. An initial article is ignored in alphabetizing. (For pseudonyms, see 14.80.)
1. A True and Sincere Declaration ofthe Purpose and Ends ofthe Plantation Begun in Virginia, ofthe Degrees Which It Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced (London, 1610). 2. Stanze in lode della donna brutta (Florence, 1547) .
14. 8 0
NOTES A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Stanze i n lode delta donna brutta. Florence, 1547. A True and Sincere Declaration of the Purpose and Ends ofthe Plantation Begun in Virginia, ofthe Degrees Which It Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced. London, 1610.
Although the use ofAnonymous is generally to be avoided for works with no attribution, it may stand in place of the author's name in a bibliogra phy in which several anonymous works need to be grouped. In such an instance, Anonymous or Anon. (set in roman) appears at the first entry, and 3-em dashes may be used thereafter (but see 14.67) . (The dashes do not necessarily imply the same anonymous author.) Anonymous. Stanze in lode delta donna brutta. Florence, 1547. . A True and Sincere Declaration . . .
--
If, on the other hand, a work is explicitly attributed to "Anonymous" (e.g., on the title page or at the head of the work) , it should be cited ac cordingly. Anonymous. "Our Family Secrets." Annals ofInternal Medicine 163, no. 4 (August 2015) : 321. https://doi.org/10.7326/M14-2168.
If the authorship is known or guessed at but was omitted on the title page, the name is included in brackets (with a question mark for cases of uncertainty) . (Note that in the Hawkes example, both New York and Tea Party are hyphenated in the original source.) 1. [Samuel Horsley] , On the Prosodies ofthe Greek and Latin Languages (London, . 1796). 2. [James Hawkes?] , A Retrospect of the Boston Tea-Party, with a Memoir of George R. T. Hewes, by a Citizen of New-York (New-York, 1834) . [Hawkes, James?) . A Retrospect of the Boston Tea-Party, with a Memoir of George R. T. Hewes. By a Citizen of New-York. New-York, 1834. [Horsley, Samuel] . On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. London, 1796. 14. 8 0
Pseudonyms. If a work is attributed to an invented or descriptive name, and the author's real name is not known, pseud. (roman, in brackets) may follow the name, especially if it might not be immediately clear to read ers that the name is false (as in the first two examples below) . (An initial The or A may be omitted. In a text citation, or in a shortened form in a note, pseud. is usually omitted.)
Author's Name
14 . 8 1
AK Muckraker [pseud.] . "Palin Is Back at Work." Mudflats: Tiptoeing through the Muck ofAlaskan Politics (blog) , December 5, 2008. https://mudfiats.wordpress .com/2008/12/05/palin-is-back-at-work/. Centinel [pseud.] . Letters. In The Complete Anti-Federalist, edited by Herbert J. Storing. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981. Cotton Manufacturer. An Inquiry into the Causes of the Present Long-Continued Depression in the Cotton Trade, with Suggestions for Its Improvement. Bury, UK, 1869.
A widely used pseudonym is generally treated as if it were the author's real name. Eliot, George. Middlemarch. Norton Critical Editions. New York: Norton, 1977. Twain, Mark. The Prince and the Pauper: A Tale for Young People ofAll Ages. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1899.
The real name, if of interest to readers, may follow the pseudonym in brackets. See also 14.81. Jay-Z [Shawn Carter] . Decoded. New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2010. Le Carre, John [David John Moore Cornwell] . The Quest for Karla. New York: Al fred A. Knopf, 1982. Stendhal [Marie-Henri Beyle] . The Charterhouse of Parma. Trans. C. K. Scott Moncrieff. New York: Boni and Liveright, 1925.
If the author's real name is better known than the pseudonym, the real name should be used. If needed, the pseudonym may be included in brackets, followed by pseud. Bronte, Charlotte. Jane Eyre. London, 1847. or Bronte, Charlotte [ Currer Bell, pseud.] . Jane Eyre. London, 1847.
For examples of screen names, see 14.208 and 14.209. 14. 8 1
Cross-references for pseudonyms. In some cases, a cross-reference from a real name to a pseudonym, or vice versa, may be desired. Italicize words like See.
Carter, Shawn. See Jay-Z.
If a bibliography includes two or more works published by the same au thor but under different pseudonyms, all may be listed under the real
14 . 8 2
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
name followed b y the appropriate pseudonym i n brackets, with cross references under the pseudonyms (see also 14.68) . Alternatively, they may be listed under the pseudonyms, with a cross-reference at the real name to each pseudonym. Ashe, Gordon. See Creasey, John. Creasey, John [Gordon Ashe, pseud.] . A Blast of Trumpets. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976. [Anthony Morton, pseud.] . Hide the Baron. New York: Walker, 1978. -- [Jeremy York, pseud.] . Death to My Killer. New York: Macmillan, 1966. Morton, Anthony. See Creasey, John. York, Jeremy. See Creasey, John. or Ashe, Gordon [John Creasey] . A Blast of Trumpets. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976. Creasey, John. See Ashe, Gordon; Morton, Anthony; York, Jeremy. --
14. 8 2
Alternative real names. When a writer has published under different
forms of his or her name, each work should be listed under the name that appears with the work-unless the difference is merely the use of initials versus full names (see 14.73) . Cross-references are occasionally used (whether or not the 3-em dash is used; see also 14.67) . Doniger, Wendy. The Bedtrick: Tales ofSex and Masquerade. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000. . See also O'Flaherty, Wendy Doniger.
--
If a person discuss � d in the text publishes under a name not used in the text, a cross-reference may be useful. Overstone, Lord. See Loyd, Samuel Jones. 14. 8 3
Authors known b y a given name. Authors generally known only b y their given names (i.e., and not by any surname) or by a mononym (other than a mononymous pseudonym) are listed and alphabetized by those names. Such titles as "King" or "Saint" or identifiers by place (e.g., "of Hippo" or "of England") are omitted, as are any alternative or fuller versions of the name, unless needed for reasons of disambiguation.
Augustine. On Christian Doctrine. Translated by D. W. Robertson Jr. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1958. Elizabeth I. Collected Works. Edited by Leah S. Marcus, Janel Mueller, and Mary Beth Rose. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000.
Title ofWork
14 . 8 6
Virgil. "The Aeneid. Translated by Robert Fitzgerald. New York: Vintage Books, 1990.
For pseudonyms, see 14.80. See also 14.246. 14.84
Organization as author. If a publication issued by an organization, as
sociation, or corporation carries no personal author's name on the title page, the organization is listed as author in a bibliography, even if it is also given as publisher. (But cf. 14.79.) International Organization for Standardization. Information and Documentation Rules for the Abbreviation of Title Words and Titles ofPublications. ISO 4. Paris: ISO, 1997. University of Chicago Press. The Chicago Manual ofStyle. 17th ed. Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press, 2017.
Title of Work 14. 8 5
Additional discussion o f titles. This section discusses the correct form
for a title of a work in source citations and applies to most of the re source types discussed in this chapter. The examples mainly show titles of books (in italics) and journal articles (in quotation marks) . For a de tailed discussion of titles of works in terms of capitalization, punctua tion, wording, and relationship to surrounding text, see 8.156-201. Most of the advice there applies equally to source citations. 14. 8 6
Italics versus quotation marks for titles o f cited works. In source cita tions as in running text, italics are used for the titles of books and jour nals. Italics are also used for the titles of newspapers and biogs, movies and video games, paintings, and other types of works. Quotation marks are generally reserved for the titles of subsections of larger works including chapter and article titles and the titles of poems in a collec tion. For some types of works-for example, a book series or a website neither italics nor quotation marks are used. For titles within titles, see 14.94. The examples below cite an article in a journal (first example) and a book (second example) . For books, see 14.10 0-163; for journals, see 14.168-8 7. Other types of sources are treated in the remainder of this chapter and in chapter 15.
Jhang, Ji Hoon, and John G. Lynch Jr. "Pardon the Interruption: Goal Proximity, Perceived Spare Time, and Impatience." Journal of Consumer Research 41, no. 5 (February 2015) : 1267-83.
14 . 8 7
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Sandberg, Sheryl. Lean In: Women, Work, and the Will to Lead. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2013. 14. 8 7
Capital ization o f titles o f cited works. As in running text, English language titles ofworks are capitalized headline-style in source citations. In headline style, the first and last words of title and subtitle and all other major words are capitalized. For a more detailed definition and many more examples, see 8.159. For hyphenated compounds in headline style, see 8.161.
Quiet: The Power ofIntroverts in a World That Can't Stop Talking "Shooting an Elephant"
For titles in other languages, which are usually capitalized sentence style, see 14.98. 14. 8 8
Some permissible changes t o titles o f cited works. The spelling, hy phenation, and punctuation in the original title should be preserved, with the following exceptions: words in full capitals on the original title page (except for initialisms or acronyms) should be set in upper- and lower case; headline-style capitalization should be applied (but see 14.98) ; and, subject to editorial discretion, an ampersand may be changed to and. Numbers should remain spelled out or given as numerals according to the original (Twelfth Century or 12th Century) unless there is a good reason to make them consistent (but 12th may be changed to 12th) . In some cases, punctuation separating the main title from a subtitle may be adjusted (see 14.89, 14.90, 14.91) . For more on permissible changes to titles, including the addition of colons and commas (including serial commas) , see 8.165. For older titles, see 14.97.
14. 8 9
Su btitles i n cited works a n d t h e u s e o f t h e colon. A colon is used to
separate the main title from the subtitle (even if no colon appears in the source itself) . A space follows the colon. In italicized titles, the colon is also italicized. The subtitle, like the title, always begins with a capital let ter. See also 8.164, 8.165. Gladwell, Malcolm. David and Goliath: Underdogs, Misfits, and the Art ofBattling Giants. New York: Little, Brown, 2013.
Although in European bibliographic style a period often separates title from subtitle, English-language publications need not follow that con vention for non-English titles. See also 14.98. Fausts Himmelfahrt: Zur letzten Szene der Tragodie
Title ofWork 14. 9 0
14. 9 2
Two subtitles i n a cited work. If, a s occasionally happens, there are two
subtitles in the original (an awkward contingency), a colon normally pre cedes the first and a semicolon the second. The second subtitle also be gins with a capital. Sereny, Gitta. Cries Unheard: Why Children Kill; The Story ofMary Bell. New York: Metropolitan Books / Henry Holt, 1999.
Note that an em dash is usually considered part of a title or subtitle. William C. David. Crucible of Command: Ulysses S. Grant and Robert E. Lee-the War They Fought, the Peace They Forged. Boston: Da Capo Press, 2014. 14. 9 1
U s e o f "or" with double titles. Old-fashioned double titles (or titles and
subtitles) connected by or have traditionally been separated by a semi colon (or sometimes a colon) , with a comma following or, or more simply by a single comma preceding or. (Various other combinations have also been used.) When referring to such titles, prefer the punctuation on the title page or at the head of the original source. In the absence of such punctuation (e.g., when the title is distinguished from the subtitle by ty pography alone), or when the original source is not available to consult, use the simpler form shown in the first example. This departure from earlier editions recognizes the importance of balancing editorial expe diency with fidelity to original sources. The second example preserves the usage on the original title pages of the American and British editions of Melville's classic novel (and assumes one of those editions, or a later edition that preserves such punctuation, was in fact consulted) . The third example (of a modern film) preserves the colon of the original title se quence but adds a comma to separate the main title from the secondary title (distinguished only graphically in the original) . In all cases, the first word of the subtitle (following or) should be capitalized. See also 14.87, 14.88. The Tempest, or The Enchanted Island but Moby-Dick; or, The Whale Dr. Strangelove, or: How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb 14. 9 2
"And other stories" a n d such. Such tags as and other stories or and other poems, often seen with titles of books, are treated as part of the main title but usually separated from the title story, poem, essay, or whatever by a comma, even when such comma does not appear on the title page. The first part of the title is not enclosed in quotation marks (but see 14.94) . 793
14 . 9 3
N O T E S A N D B I BL I O G RA P H Y
1 . Norman Maclean, A River Runs through It, and Other Stories (Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press, 1976), 104.
When the main title ends with a question mark or exclamation point, the comma is omitted. See also 14.96. 2. Herrlee Glessner Creel, What Is Taoism? and Other Studies in Chinese Cul tural History (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970), 34. 14. 9 3
Dates i n titles o f cited works. When not introduced by a preposition
(e.g., "from 1920 to 1945 ") , dates in a title or subtitle are set off by com mas, even if differentiated only by type style or a new line on the title page or at the head of the work. If a colon has been used in the origi nal, however, it should be retained (but see 14.90) . (Note that commas should not be added to non-English titles before dates; see 11.7.) Beiser, Frederick C. After Hegel: German Philosophy, 1840-1900. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2014. 14.94
Quoted titles and other terms within cited titles of works. Titles oflong or short works appearing within an italicized title are enclosed in quo tation marks, regardless of how such titles would appear alone (but see 14.95) .
1. Steven D. Levitt and Stephen J. Dubner, Think Like a Freak: The Authors of "Freakonomics" Offer to Retrain Your Brain (New York: William Morrow, 2014) . 2. Roland McHugh, Annotations to "Finnegans Wake" (Baltimore: Johns Hop kins University Press, 1980) .
Quotation marks within an italicized title do not, of course, always de note another title. 3. Henry Louis Gates Jr. and Kwame Anthony Appiah, eds., "Race," Writing, and Difference (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986).
A term normally quoted is enclosed in single quotation marks when it appears within a title in quotation marks (see 13.30; see also 6.11) . Retain both double and single quotation marks, if any, in short citations. See also 8.165, 8.177. 4. Judith Lewis, " "Tis a Misfortune to Be a Great Ladie': Maternal Mortality in the British Aristocracy, 1558-1959," journal ofBritish Studies 37, no. 1 (1998) : 28-29. 5. Lewis, " "Tis a Misfortune,"' 32.
Title ofWork
14.96
Lewis, Judith Lewis. " "Tis a Misfortune to Be a Great Ladie': Maternal Mortality in the British Aristocracy, 1558-1959." journal ofBritish Studies 37, no. 1 (1998) : 26-53. 14. 9 5
Italicized titles and other terms within cited titles of works. When terms normally italicized in running text, such as species names or names of ships or words in another language (but not titles of works, which take quotation marks; see 14.94) , appear within an italicized title, they are set in roman ("reverse italics"; see 8.173) . When, however, such a term makes up the entire title, it should be italicized.
Stafford, Edward Peary. The Big E: The Story ofthe USS Enterprise. New York: Ran dom House, 1962. Van Wagenen, Gertrude, and Miriam E. Simpson. Postnatal Development of the Ovary in Homo sapiens and Macaca mulatta and Induction of Ovulation in the Macaque. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1973. Weigel, Detlef, and Jane Glazebrook. Arabidopsis: A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor, NY: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2002. but Hume, Christine. Musca domestica. Boston: Beacon Press, 2000.
Italicized terms (including titles of works) within an article or a chapter title or any other title set in roman type remain in italics. For the capital ization of non-English titles (as in the example from Modern Philology), see 14.98; for species names, see 8.159. 1. Gang Zhou et al., "Induction of Maggot Antimicrobial Peptides and Treat ment Effect in Salmonella pullorum-Infected Chickens," journal ofApplied Poultry Research 23, no. 3 (September 2014) : 380. 2. Andrew Ford, "The Purpose of Aristotle's Poetics," Classical Philology 110, no. 1 (January 2015) : 8-9. 3. Jacob Sider Jost, "Bergotte's Other Patch of Yellow: A Fragment of Heraclitus in Proust's La prisonniere," Modern Philology 112, no. 4 (May 2015) : 714. 4. Zhou et al., "Salmonella pullorum-In fe cted Chickens," 381. 5. Ford, "Aristotle's Poetics," 20. 6. Sider Jost, "Proust's La prisonniere," 717-18. 14. 9 6
Question marks or exclamation points in titles of cited works. When a
main title ends with a question mark or an exclamation point, no colon is added before any subtitle. When the question mark or exclamation point is followed by a closing quotation mark, however, retain a colon before the subtitle (see fifth and sixth examples below) . Any punctuation other than a period required by the surrounding text, note, or bibliography
14.97
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
entry should b e retained (as i n example notes 3 , 7-8, and 10-12; s e e also 6.125) . 1. Yogi Berra, What Time Is Itr You Mean Nowr Advicefo r Life from the Zennest Master of Them All, with Dave Kaplan (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2002) , 63. 2. Alison Oram, Her Husband Was a Woman! Women's Gender-Crossing and British Popular Culture (London: Routledge, 2007) , 183. 3. Michael Tessler et al., "Diversity and Distribution of Stream Bryophytes: Does pH Matter?," Freshwater Science 33, no. 3 (September 2014) : 778. 4. C. Daniel Batson, "How Social Is the Animal? The Human Capacity for Car ing," American Psychologist 45 (March 1990) : 336. 5. Edward Buscombe, "Injuns!": Native Americans in the Movies (London: Reaktion, 2006), 12. 6. Daniel Bertrand Monk, '"Welcome to Crisis! ' : Notes for a Pictorial His tory of the Pictorial Histories of the Arab Israeli War of June 1967," Grey Room 7 (Spring 2002) : 139, http://www.jstor.org/stable/1262596. 7. Berra, What Time Is Itr, 55-56. 8. Oram, Her Husband Was a Woman!, 184. 9. Tessler et al., "Diversity and Distribution," 780. 10. Batson, "How Social Is the Animal?," 337. 11. Buscombe, "Injuns!, " 114-15. 12. Monk, " 'Welcome to Crisis!,"' 140.
When a title ending with a question mark or an exclamation mark would normally be followed by a period, the period is omitted (see also 6.124) . Hornby, Nick. Vous descendezr Translated by Nicolas Richard. Paris: Pion, 2005. Tessler, Michael, Kain M. Truhn, Meghan Bliss-Moreau, and John D. Wehr. " Di versity and Distribution of Stream Bryophytes: Does pH Matter?" Freshwater Science 33, no. 3 (September 2014) : 778-87. 14. 97
Older titles and very long titles. Titles of works published in the eigh
teenth century or earlier may retain their original punctuation, spell ing, and capitalization (except for whole words in capital letters, which should be given an initial capital only) . Very long titles may be shortened in a bibliography or a note; indicate such omissions by the use of brack eted ellipses. As they do for the place-name London in the second ex ample (for which the place of publication was known but did not appear with the source) , the brackets signal that the ellipsis has been supplied by the author and is not part of the original title (see also 13.58) . At the end of a title, the bracketed ellipsis should be followed by a period.
Title ofWork
14 . 9 8
Escalante, Bernardino. A Discourse ofthe.Navigation which the Portugales doe make to the Realmes and Provinces ofthe East Partes ofthe Worlde [ . . . ] . Translated by John Frampton. London, 1579. Ray, John. Observations Topographical, Moral, and Physiological: Made in a Journey Through part ofthe Low-Countries, Germany, Italy, and France: with A Catalogue ofPlants not Native ofEngland [ . . . ] Whereunto is added A BriefAccount ofFran cis Willughby, Esq., his Voyage through a great part ofSpain. [London] , 1673. 14. 9 8
Non-English titles of cited works. Sentence-style capitalization is strongly recommended for non-English titles (see 8.158) . Capitalize the first word of a title or subtitle and any word that would be capitalized in the original language (e.g., Wahrheit, Sowjetunion, and Inquisicion in ex amples 2 and 3 and Gatine, Societe, and l'Ouest in example 7) . Writers or editors unfamiliar with the usage of the language concerned, however, should not attempt to alter capitalization without expert help (in a pinch, a library-catalog entry may come in helpful) . For the use ofEnglish forms for place-names, see 14.131.
1. Danielle Maisonneuve, Jean-Fran�ois Lamarche, and Yves St-Amand, Les relations publiques dans une societe en mouvance (Sainte-Foy, QC: Presses de l'Uni versite du Quebec, 1998) . 2. Gabriele Krone-Schmalz, In Wahrheit sind wir starker: Frauenalltag i n der Sowjetunion (Frankfurt am Main: Fischer Taschenbuch Verlag, 1992) . 3. Daniel Munoz Sempere, La Inquisici6n espanola como tema literario: Politica, historia y ficci6n en la crisis del antiguo regimen (Woodbridge, UK: Tame sis, 2008). 4. G. Martellotti et al., La letteratura italiana: Storia e testi, vol. 7 (Milan: Ric cardo Ricciardi, 1955). 5. Ljiljana Piletic Stojanovic, ed., Gutfreund i ceski kubizam (Belgrade: Muzej savremene umetnosti, 1971) . 6. Dinda L. Gorlee, "i Eureka! La traducci6n como un descubrimiento prag matico," Anuario filos6fico 29, no. 3 (1996) : 1403. 7. Marcel Garaud, "Recherches sur !es defrichements dans la Gatine poitevine aux x1e et xne siecles," Bulletin de la Societe des antiquaires de l'Ouest, 4th ser., 9 (1967) : 11-27.
Note that, with non-English journal titles (as with any title in a language other than English) , an initial definite article (Le, Der, etc.) should be re tained, since it may govern the inflection of the following word (see also 8.170) . Months and the equivalents of such abbreviations as no. or pt. are usually given in English (but see 14.102) . For a full discussion of non English titles of works, see 11.6-10.
14. 9 9
14. 9 9
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
Translated titles o f cited works. I f a n English translation o f a title is
needed, it follows the original title and is enclosed in brackets, without italics or quotation marks. It is capitalized sentence-style regardless of the bibliographic style followed. (In running text, parentheses are used instead of brackets; see 11.9.) 1. Henryk Wereszycki, Koniec sojuszu trzech cesarzy [The end of the Three Em perors' League] (Warsaw: PWN, 1977); includes a summary in German. 2. W. Kern, "Waar verzamelde Pigafetta zijn Maleise woorden?" [Where did Pigafetta collect his Malaysian words?] , Tijdschrift voor Indische taal-, land- en volkenkunde 78 (1938) : 272. Kern, W. "Waar verzamelde Pigafetta zijn Maleise woorden?" [Where did Piga fetta collect his Malaysian words?] . Tijdschrift voor Indische taal-, land- en volkenkunde 78 (1938) : 271-73. Pirumova, Natalia Mikhailovna. Zemskoe liberal'noe dvizhenie: Sotsial'nye komi i evoliutsiia do nachala XX veka [The zemstvo liberal movement: Its social roots and evolution to the beginning of the twentieth century] . Moscow: Izdatel'stvo "Nauka," 1977.
If a title is given only in English translation, however, the original lan guage must be specified. 3. N. M. Pirumova, The Zemstvo Liberal Movement: Its Social Roots and Evolu tion to the Beginning .of the Twentieth Century [in Russian] (Moscow: Izdatel'stvo "Nauka," 1977) . Chu Ching and Long Zhi. "The Vicissitudes o f the Giant Panda, Ailuropoda mela noleuca (David) ." [In Chinese.] Acta Zoologica Sinica 29, no. 1 (1983) : 93-104.
A published translation is normally treated as illustrated in 14.104 or 14.183. If, for some reason, both the original and the translation need to be cited, both may be listed. For books, either of the following forms may be used, depending on whether the original or the translation is of greater interest to readers: Furet, Frans;ois. Le passe d'une illusion. Paris: Editions Robert Laffont, 1995. Translated by Deborah Furet as The Passing ofan Illusion (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999) . or Furet, Frans;ois. The Passing ofan Illusion. Translated by Deborah Furet. Chicago:
Books
14. 1 0 1
University of Chicago Press, 1999. Originally published as Le passe d'une illu sion (Paris: Editions Robert Laffont, 1995).
For other types of sources, adapt the relevant example as needed.
Books 14. 1 0 0
Elements t o include when citing a book. A reference to a book must include enough information to lead interested readers to the source. Most references contain at least some information not strictly needed for that purpose but potentially helpful nonetheless. The elements listed below are included, where applicable, in full notes and bibliography en tries. The order in which they appear will vary slightly according to type of book, and certain elements are sometimes omitted; such variation will be noted and illustrated in the course of this section. (For author date style reference list entries, which vary only in the placement of the date of publication, see chapter 15.)
1. Author: full name of author(s) or editor(s) or, if no author or editor is listed, name ofinstitution standing in their place; see also 14.72-84 2. Title: full title of the book, including subtitle ifthere is one; see also 14.85-99 3. Editor, compiler, or translator, if any, iflisted on title page in addition to author 4. Edition, if not the first 5. Volume: total number of volumes if multivolume work is referred to as a whole; individual number if single volume of multivolume work is cited, and title of individual volume if applicable 6. Series title if applicable, and volume number within series if series is numbered 7. Facts of publication: city, publisher, and date 8. Page number or numbers if applicable 9. For books consulted online, a URL (or DOI-based URL) ; for other types of electronic books, the application, format, device, or medium consulted; see also 14.6-18 14.101
Form o f author's name a n d title o f book in source citations. An author's
name and the title of a book should generally be cited according to how it appears on the title page. In a bibliography entry, the first-listed author's name is normally inverted. 1. Atul Gawande, Being Mortal: Medicine and What Matters in the End (London: Profile Books, 2014), 79-80. 2. Gawande, Being Mortal, 191.
14. 1 0 2
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Gawande, Atul. Being Mortal: Medicine and What Matters in the End. London: Pro file Books, 2014.
For additional considerations and many more examples, see 14.72-84 and 14.85-99. 14. 1 0 2
Non-English bibl iog raphic terms a n d abbreviations. When books in a language other than English are cited in an English-language work, terms used for volume, edition, and so on may be translated-but only if the author or editor has a firm grasp of bibliographic terms in the other language. It is often wiser to leave them in the original. "Ausgabe in ei nem Band," for example, may be rendered as "one-volume edition" or simply left untranslated. Moreover, abbreviations such as " Bd." and "t." (German and French/Spanish equivalents of vol. , respectively) that are likely to have been recorded that way in a library catalog may best be left in that form. Ifin doubt, check a major catalog such as that of the Library of Congress or World Cat.
Editors, Translators, Compilers, or Cowriters 14. 1 0 3
Editor in place o f author. When no author appears on the title page, a work is listed by the name (s) of the editor(s) , compiler(s) , or transla tor(s) . In full note citations and in bibliographies, the abbreviation ed. or eds. , comp. or comps. , or trans. follows the name, preceded by a comma. In shortened note citations and text citations, the abbreviation is omitted.
1. Jennifer Egan, �d., The Best American Short Stories, 2014 (Boston: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2014) , 100. 2. Harold Schechter and Kurt Brown, comps., Killer Verse: Poems ofMurder and Mayhem (London: Everyman Paperback Classics, 2011), 33. 3. Theodore Silverstein, trans., Sir Gawain and the Green Knight (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1974), 34. 4. Egan, Best American Short Stories, 301-2. 5. Schechter and Brown, Killer Verse, 54-56. 6. Silverstein, Sir Gawain, 38. Egan, Jennifer, ed. The Best American Short Stories, 2014. Boston: Houghton Mif flin Harcourt, 2014. Schechter, Harold, and Kurt Brown, comps. Killer Verse: Poems ofMurder and May hem. London: Everyman Paperback Classics, 2011. Silverstein, Theodore, trans. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1974.
Books
14.104
On the other hand, certain well-known reference works may be listed by title rather than by editor; for an example, see 14.232. 14 . 1 0 4
Ed itor or translator in addition to author. The edited, compiled, or translated work of one author is normally listed with the author's name appearing first and the name (s) of the editor(s) , compiler(s) , or transla tor(s) appearing after the title, preceded by edited by or ed. , compiled by or comp. , or translated by or trans. Note that the plural forms eds. and comps. are never used in this position. Note also that edited by and the like are usually spelled out in bibliographies but abbreviated in notes. If a trans lator as well as an editor is listed, the names should appear in the same order as on the title page of the original. When the title page carries such phrases as "Edited with an Introduction and Notes by" or "Translated with a Foreword by," the bibliographic or note reference can usually be simplified to "Edited by" or "Translated by." See also 14.78, 14.107, 14.99.
1. Yves Bonnefoy, New and Selected Poems, ed. John Naughton and Anthony Rudolf (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995). 2. Rigoberta Menchu, Crossing Borders, trans. and ed. Ann Wright (New York: Verso, 1999) . 3. Four Farces by Georges Feydeau, trans. Norman R. Shapiro (Chicago: Univer sity of Chicago Press, 1970) . 4. Theodor W. Adorno and Walter Benjamin, The Complete Correspondence, 1928-1940, ed. Henri Lonitz, trans. Nicholas Walker (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999) . Adorno, Theodor W., and Walter Benjamin. The Complete Correspondence, 19281940. Edited by Henri Lonitz. Translated by Nicholas Walker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999. Bonnefoy, Yves. New and Selected Poems. Edited by John Naughton and Anthony Rudo!£ Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995. Feydeau, Georges. Four Farces by Georges Feydeau. Translated by Norman R. Sha piro. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970. Menchu, Rigoberta. Crossing Borders. Translated and edited by Ann Wright. New York: Verso, 1999.
Occasionally, when an editor or a translator is more important to a dis cussion than the original author, a book may be listed under the editor's name. Eliot, T. S., ed. Literary Essays. By Ezra Pound. New York: New Directions, 1953.
14. 1 0 5
14. 1 0 5
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Other contributors listed on t h e title page. The title page may list the
names of people other than an author, editor, compiler, or translator. Such names may be included in a full note or a bibliography entry if they are considered to be a significant factor in a reader's assessment of the book. For ghostwritten books, with is usually sufficient. For other contri butions, descriptions should accurately convey the information on the title page. Authors of forewords or introductions to books by other au thors may be included if they are considered sufficiently important to mention. Chaucer Life-Records. Edited by Martin M. Crow and Clair C. Olson from mate rials compiled by John M. Manly and Edith Rickert, with the assistance of Lil ian J. Red&tone et al. London: Oxford University Press, 1966. Conway, Tim. What's So Funny? My Hilarious Life. With Jane Scovell and with a foreword by Carol Burnett. New York: Howard Books, 2013. Cullen, John B. Old Times in the Faulkner Country. In collaboration with Floyd C. Watkins. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1961. Hayek, F. A. The Road to Serfdom. With a new introduction by Milton Friedman. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994. Prather, Marla.Alexander Calder, 1898-1976. With contributions by Arnauld Pierre and Alexander S. C. Rower. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1998. Schellinger, Paul, ed. Encyclopedia ofthe Novel. With the assistance of Christopher Hudson and Marijke Rijsberman. 2 vols. Chicago: Fitzroy Dearborn, 1998. Williams, Joseph M. Style: Toward Clarity and Grace. With two chapters co authored by Gregory G. Colomb. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1995.
For specific citation of a foreword or an introduction, see 14.110.
Chapters or Other Parts of a Book 14. 1 0 6
Chapter in a single-author book. When a specific chapter (or other titled part of a book) is cited in the notes, the author's name is followed by the title of the chapter (or other part) , followed by in, followed by the title of the book. The chapter title is enclosed in quotation marks. Either the inclusive page numbers (see 9.61) or the chapter or part number is usu ally given also, though a note may instead list the page or pages cited. In the bibliography, either the chapter or the book may be listed first. For a multiauthor work, see 14.107. See also 14.153.
1. Kate Andersen Brower, "Backstairs Gossip and Mischief," in The Residence: lnside the Private World ofthe White House (New York: Harper, 2015) , 211.
Books
14. 1 0 8
2. John Samples, "The Origins of Modern Campaign Finance Law," chap. 7 in The Fallacy of Campaign Finance Reform (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006) . 3 . Samples, "Campaign Finance Law," 30-31. Brower, Kate Andersen. "Backstairs Gossip and Mischief." In The Residence: Inside the Private World ofthe White House, 207-22. New York: Harper, 2015. Samples, John. "The Origins of Modern Campaign Finance Law." Chap. 7 in The Fallacy of Campaign Finance Reform. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. or Samples, John. The Fallacy of Campaign Finance Reform. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. See esp. chap. 7, "The Origins of Modern Campaign Fi nance Law."
For chapters originally published as articles in a journal, see 14.181. 14. 1 0 7
Contribution t o a multiauthor book. When one contribution to a multi
author book is cited, the contributor's name comes first, followed by the title of the contribution in roman, followed by in (also roman) , followed by the title of the book in italics, followed by the name (s) of the editor(s) . In a bibliography entry, the inclusive page numbers are usually given also (as in the second example below) . In notes and bibliographies, the con tribution title is enclosed in quotation marks. For several contributions to the same book, see 14.108. 1. Ruth A. Miller, "Posthuman," in Critical Terms for the Study of Gender, ed. Catharine R. Stimpson and Gilbert Herdt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014), 325. Ellet, Elizabeth F. L. "By Rail and Stage to Galena." In Prairie State: Impressions of Illinois, 1673-1967, by Travelers and Other Observers, edited by Paul M. Angle, 271-79. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1968. 14. 1 0 8
Several contributions t o t h e same mu ltiauthor book. If two or more contributions to the same multiauthor book are cited, the book itself, as well as the specific contributions, may be listed in the bibliography. The entries for the individual contributions may then cross-refer to the book's editor, thus avoiding clutter. In notes, details of the book may be given the first time it is mentioned, with subsequent references in short ened form (see also 14.31) .
14 . 1 0 9
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
1. William H. Keating, "Fort Dearborn and Chicago," i n Prairie State: Impres sions of Illinois, 1673-1967, by Travelers and Other Observers, ed. Paul M. Angle (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1967) , 84-87. 2. Sara Clarke Lippincott, "Chicago," in Angle, Prairie State, 362-70. Draper, Joan E. " Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chicago." In Zukowsky, Chicago Architecture, 107-19. Harrington, Elaine. "International Influences on Henry Hobson Richardson's Glessner House." In Zukowsky, Chicago Architecture, 189-207. Zukowsky, John, ed. Chicago Architecture, 1872-1922: Birth of a Metropolis. Mu nich: Prestel-Verlag in association with the Art Institute of Chicago, 1987. 14 . 1 0 9
Book-length work within a book. If the cited part of a book would nor mally be italicized if published alone, it too may be italicized rather than placed in quotation marks. See also 8.163, 8.183.
1. Thomas Bernhard, A Partyfor Boris, in Histrionics: Three Plays, trans. Peter K. Jansen and Kenneth Northcott (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1990). Updike, John. Rabbit, Run. In Rabbit Angstrom: A Tetralogy. New York: Everyman's Library, 1995. 14 .110
I ntroductions, prefaces, afterwords, and the like. If the reference is to a
generic title such as introduction, preface, or afterword, that term (lower cased unless following a period) is added before the title of the book. See also 8.179. 1. Toni Morrison, foreword to Song of Solomon (New York: Vintage Interna tional, 2004) .
If the author of the introduction or other part is someone other than the main author of a book, that author comes first, and the author of the book follows the title. In a bibliography entry, include the page number range for the part cited, as shown in the second example below. 2. Christopher Hitchens, introduction to Civilization and Its Discontents, by Sigmund Freud, trans. and ed. James Strachey (New York: W. W. Norton, 2010). Mansfield, Harvey, and Delba Winthrop. Introduction to Democracy in America, by Alexis de Tocqueville, xvii-lxxxvi. Translated and edited by Harvey Mans field and Delba Winthrop. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000.
Books
14 . 1 1 2
For including information about a foreword or other contributions to a book cited as a whole, see 14.105. 14.111
Letters i n published collections. A reference to a letter (or memoran dum or similar communication) in a published collection begins with the names of the sender and the recipient, in that order, followed by a date and sometimes the place where the communication was prepared. Words such as letter, postcard, email, and the like are usually unneces sary, but other forms, such as reports or memorandums, should be spec ified. The title of the collection is given in the usual form for a book. If not clear in the text or otherwise, a short form for the collection may be needed if correspondents differ from those listed in the first full citation (as shown in note 4) . For unpublished communications, see 14.214; see also 14.228.
1. Adams to Charles Milnes Gaskell, Baden, September 22, 1867, in Letters of Henry Adams, 1858-1891, ed. Worthington Chauncey Ford (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1930), 133-34. 2. White to Harold Ross, memorandum, May 2, 1946, in Letters ofE. B. White, ed. Dorothy Lobrano Guth (New York: Harper & Row, 1976), 273. 3. Adams to Gaskell, London, March 30, 1868, 141. 4. Adams to John Hay, Washington, October 26, 1884, in Ford, Letters, 361. Adams, Henry. Letters of Henry Adams, 1858-1891. Edited by Worthington Chauncey Ford. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1930. White, E. B. Letters ofE. B. White. Edited by Dorothy Lobrano Guth. New York: Harper & Row, 1976.
When it is necessary to include a single letter in a bibliography, it is listed under the writer's name only. Jackson, Paulina. Paulina Jackson to John Pepys Junior, October 3, 1676. In The Letters ofSamuel Pepys and His Family Circle, edited by Helen Truesdell Heath, no. 42. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1955. 14.112
Online-only supplement to a book. To cite an online-only supplement
or enhancement to a book, include a title or a description for the content and a URL (see 14.6) in addition to the publication details for the book. Specify file format if applicable. 1. Steven J. Luck, "Electrodes and Skin Potentials" (PDF) , online supplement to chap. 5 of An Introduction to the Event-Related Potential Technique, 2nd ed.
14.113
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
(Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2014), http://mitpress.mit.edu/books/introduction -event-related-potential-technique-0.
Edition 14. 113
Ed itions other than the fi rst. When an edition other than the first is used or cited, the number or description of the edition follows the title in the listing. An edition number usually appears on the title page and is re peated, along with the date of the edition, on the copyright page. Such wording as Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged is abbreviated in notes and bibliographies simply as 2nd ed. ; Revised Edition (with no number) is abbreviated·as rev. ed. Other terms are similarly abbreviated. (Any infor mation about volumes follows the edition number; for an example, see 14.232.) For the use of the word edition and Chicago's preferences, see 1.26. For inclusion of the original date of an older work cited in a modern edition, see 14.114.
1. Amy Einsohn, The Copyeditor's Handbook: A Guide for Book Publishing and Corporate Communications, with Exercises and Answer Keys, 3rd ed. (Berkeley: Uni versity of California Press, 2011), 401-2. 2. Kathryn Parker Boudett, Elizabeth A. City, and Richard J. Murnane, eds., Data Wise: A Step-by-Step Guide to Using Assessment Results to Improve Teaching and Learning, rev. ed. (Cambridge, MA: Harvard Education Press, 2013), 101. 3. Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Aurora Leigh: Authoritative Text, Backgrounds and Contexts, Criticism, ed. Margaret Reynolds, Norton Critical Editions (New York: W. W. Norton, 1996) . All subsequent citations refer to this edition. Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White. The Elements ofStyle. 4th ed. New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2000. 14. 1 14
Reprint editions and modern editions. Books may be reissued in pa perback by the original publisher or in paper or hardcover by another company. In bibliographic listings, if the original publication details particularly the date-are relevant, include them. If page numbers are mentioned, specify the edition cited unless pagination is the same. The availability of a different format (e.g., paperback or an electronic ver sion) , the addition of new material, or other such matters can be added as needed. Modern editions of Greek, Latin, and medieval classics are discussed in 14.242-52; modern editions of English classics in 14.25354; electronic book formats in 14.159-63.
Books
14.116
1. Ernest Gowers, The Complete Plain Words, 3rd ed. (London: H.M. Stationery Office, 1986; Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books, 1987), 26. Citations refer to the Penguin edition. 2. Jacques Barzun, Simple and Direct: A Rhetoric for Writers, rev. ed. (1985; repr., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994), 152-53. Bahadur, Gaiutra. Coolie Woman: The Odyssey ofIndenture. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014. First published 2013 by C. Hurst (London) . Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Nature. 1836. Facsimile of the first edition, with an intro duction by Jaroslav Pelikan. Boston: Beacon Press, 1985. Fitzgerald, F. Scott. The Great Gatsby. New York: Scribner, 1925. Reprinted with preface and notes by Matthew J. Bruccoli. New York: Collier Books, 1992. Page references are to the 1992 edition. National Reconnaissance Office. The KH-4B Camera System. Washington, DC: National Photographic Interpretation Center, 1967. Now declassified and also available online, http://www.fas.org/irp/imint/docs/kh-4_camera_system.htm. Schweitzer, Albert. ]. S. Bach. Translated by Ernest Newman. 2 vols. 1911. Reprint, New York: Dover, 1966. 14. 115
M icroform editions. Works consulted in microform editions (i.e., cop ies of printed matter reproduced for storage at a smaller size, usually on film, and read using a specialized viewer) should be cited according to the format of the original publication (e.g., book, newspaper article, or dissertation) . In addition, specify the format actually consulted (e.g., mi crofiche or microfilm) after the facts of publication. In the first example below, the page number refers to the printed text; the other locator indi cates the fiche (i.e., sheet) and frame numbers, and the letter indicates the row. Such locators will vary according to the resource.
1. Beatrice Farwell, French Popular Lithographic Imagery, 1815-1870, vol. 12, Lithography in Art and Commerce (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1997) , microfiche, p. 67, 3C12. Tauber, Abraham. "Spelling Reform in the United States." PhD diss., Columbia University, 1958. Microfilm.
Multivolume Works 14 .116
Volume numbers and page numbers. In source citations, volume num
bers are always given in arabic numerals, even ifin the original work they appear in roman numerals or are spelled out. If the volume number is
14.117
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
immediately followed by a page number, the abbreviation vol. i s omitted and a colon separates the volume number from the page number with no intervening space. See the examples throughout this section. See also 14.177. 14. 117
Citing a m u ltivolume work as a whole. When a multivolume work is cited as a whole, the total number of volumes is given after the title of the work (or, if an editor as well as an author is mentioned, after the editor's name) . If the volumes have been published over several years, the dates of the first and last volumes are given, separated by an en dash (see 9.64) . See also 14.78.
1. Aristotle, Complete Works of Aristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation, ed. J. Barnes, 2 vols., Bollingen Series (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1983) . Byrne, Muriel S t . Clare, e d . The Lisle Letters. 6 vols. Chicago: University o f Chi cago Press, 1981. Grene, David, and Richmond Lattimore, eds. The Complete Greek Tragedies. 3rd ed., edited by Mark Griffith and Glenn W. Most. 9 vols. (unnumbered) . Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2013. James, Henry. The Complete Tales of Henry fames. Edited by Leon Edel. 12 vols. London: Rupert Hart-Davis, 1962-64. 14 . 118
Citing a particular volume in a note. If a particular volume of a multivol ume work is cited, the volume number and the individual volume title, if there is one, are given in addition to the general title. If volumes have been published in different years, only the date of the cited volume is given.
1. Muriel St. Clare Byrne, ed., The Lisle Letters (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981), 4:243. 2. The Complete Tales ofHenry fames, ed. Leon Edel, vol. 5, 1883-1884 (London: Rupert Hart-Davis, 1963) , 32-33. 3. Byrne, Lisle Letters, 4:245. 4. Complete Tales ofHenry fames, 5:34.
The different treatment of the volume numbers in the examples above is prescribed by logic: all six volumes of the Byrne work appeared in 1981 under the same title, whereas volume 5 of the James tales carries an ad ditional title with a publication date not shared by all volumes in the set. The shortened form, however, need not refer to the title of the individual volume. Information about the total number of volumes (as in a work without a corresponding bibliography) may be added as follows:
Books
14 . 1 2 1
1. Muriel St. Clare Byrne, ed., The Lisle.Letters, 6 vols . . . . 2. The Complete Tales ofHenry fames, ed. Leon Edel, vol. 5 of 12, . . .
See also 14.122. 14.119
Citing a particular volume i n a bibliog raphy. If only one volume of
a multivolume work is of interest to readers, it may be listed alone in a bibliography in either of the following ways: Carson, Clayborne, ed. The Papers ofMartin Luther King, fr. Vol. 7, To Save the Soul ofAmerica, January 1961-August 1962, edited by Tenisha Armstrong. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2014. or Armstrong, Tenisha, ed. To Save the Soul ofAmerica, January 1961-August 1962. Vol. 7 of The Papers of Martin Luther King, fr. , edited by Clayborne Carson. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1992-.
If they are different, the editor(s) for the series as a whole and for the in dividual volume should both be listed (see also 14.122) . The publication date (or date range; see 14.117) should normally correspond to the last mentioned title. See also 14.121, 14.144. 14. 1 2 0
Chapters a n d other parts o f individual volu mes. Specific parts of indi vidual volumes of multivolume books are cited in the same way as parts of single-volume books (see 14.106-12) . In a note that refers to the entire chapter, a chapter number, if available, may replace page numbers (e.g., "vol. 3, chap. 9").
1. Chen Jian, "China and the Cold War after Mao," i n The Cambridge History of the Cold War, ed. Melvyn P. Leffler and Odd Arne Westad (Cambridge: Cam bridge University Press, 2010), 3:180. 2. Unpublished letter to the editor of the Afro-American (Washington, DC) , in The Papers ofMartin Luther King, fr., ed. Clayborne Carson, vol. 7, To Save the Soul ofAmerica, January 1961-August 1962, ed. Tenisha Armstrong (Berkeley: Univer sity of California Press, 2014) , 169-71. Jian, Chen. "China and the Cold War after Mao." In Endings, ed. Melvyn P. Leffler and Odd Arne Westad, 181-200. Vol. 3 of The Cambridge History ofthe Cold War. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010.
See also 14.107, 14.122. 14.121
One vol u me i n two or more books. Occasionally, if it is very long, a
single volume of a multivolume work may be published as two or more
14 . 1 2 2
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
physical books. The reference must then include book a s well a s volume number. 1. Donald Lach, Asia in the Making ofEurope, vol. 2, bk. 3, The Scholarly Disci plines (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1977) , 351. Harley, J. B., and David Woodward, eds. The History ofCartography. Vol. 2, bk. 2, Cartography in the Traditional East and Southeast Asian Societies. Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press, 1994. or Harley, J. B., and David Woodward, eds. Cartography in the Traditional East and Southeast Asian Societies. Vol. 2, bk. 2, of The History ofCartography. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987-.
14. 1 2 2
Authors a n d ed itors o f mu ltivolume works. Some multivolume works have both a general editor and individual editors or authors for each vol ume (and, as in the third example, additional editors for new editions) . When individual volumes are cited, the editor's (or translator's) name follows that part for which he or she is responsible.
1. Herbert Barrows, Reading the Short Story, vol. 1 of An Introduction to Litera ture, ed. Gordon N. Ray (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959) . 2. The Variorum Edition ofthe Poetry ofjohn Donne, ed. Gary A. Stringer, vol. 6, The ''Anniversaries " and the "Epicedes and Obsequies," ed. Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry Pebworth (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1995) . 3 . Orestes, trans. William Arrowsmith, i n Euripides IV, unnumbered vol. 6 of The Complete Greek Tragedies, ed. David Grene and Richmond Lattimore, 3rd ed., ed. Mark Griffith and Glenn W. Most (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2013) .
Note the different capitalization and punctuation of edited by in the fol lowing alternative versions, analogous to the treatment of a chapter in a multiauthor book (see 14.107) . (Certain multivolume works may, for bib liographic purposes, more conveniently be treated as series; see 14.124.) Donne, John. The Variorum Edition ofthe Poetry ofjohn Donne. Edited by Gary A. Stringer. Vol. 6, "The Anniversaries" and the "Epicedes and Obsequies," edited by Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry Pebworth. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1995. or Donne, John. The ''Anniversaries" and the "Epicedes and Obsequies." Edited by Gary A. Stringer and Ted-Larry Pebworth. Vol. 6 of The Variorum Edition ofthe Poetry ofjohn Donne, edited by Gary A. Stringer. Bloomington: Indiana Uni versity Press, 1995.
Books
14. 12 3
Ray, Gordon N ., ed. An Introduction to Literature. Vol. 1, Reading the Short Story, by Herbert Barrows. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959. or Barrows, Herbert. Reading the Short Story. Vol. 1 of An Introduction to Literature, edited by Gordon N. Ray. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959.
Series 14.123
Series titles, numbers, and editors. Including a series title in a citation often helps readers decide whether to pursue a reference. But if books belonging to a series can be located without the series title, it may be omitted to save space (especially in a footnote) . If the series title is in cluded, it is capitalized headline-style, but it is neither italicized nor put in quotation marks or parentheses. Some series are numbered; many are not. The number (if any) follows the series title with no intervening comma unless vol. or no. is used. These abbreviations may be omitted, however, unless both are needed in a single reference (see fourth ex ample below) , or unless a series editor or other notation intervenes (see 14.124, third example) . For a non-English series title, use sentence style (see 11.6 and second example below) .
1. Sean Hsiang-Jin Lei, Neither Donkey nor Horse: Medicine in the Struggle over China's Modernity, Studies of the Weatherhead East Asian Institute (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014). Martin, Jean-Pierre. L'autre vie d'Orwell. Collection l'un et l'autre. Paris: Galli mard, 2013. Mazrim, Robert F. At Home in the Illinois Country: French Colonial Domestic Site Ar chaeology in the Midwest, 1730-1800. Studies in Illinois Archaeology 9. Urbana: Illinois State Archaeological Survey, 2011. Wauchope, Robert. A Tentative Sequence ofPre-Classic Ceramics in Middle Amer ica. Middle American Research Records, vol. 1, no. 14. New Orleans: Tulane University, 1950.
The name of the series editor is usually omitted. When included, it fol lows the series title. Allen, Judith A. The Feminism of Charlotte Perkins Gilman: Sexualities, Histories, Progressivism. Women in Culture and Society, edited by Catharine R. Stimp son. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009.
14.124
14. 124
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
Series or m u ltivolume work? Certain types of series may lend them
selves to being cited as a whole. In such cases, the series may be treated as a multivolume work, with the title of the series in italics. Boyer, John W., and Julius Kirshner, eds. Readings in Western Civilization. 9 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986-87. Grene, David, and Richmond Lattimore, eds. The Complete Greek Tragedies. 3rd ed., edited by Mark Griffith and Glenn W. Most. 9 vols. (unnumbered) . Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2013.
Usually, however, it is preferable to cite individual titles in the series, as described in 14.123; the series title then appears in roman. Cochrane, Eric W., Charles K. Gray, and Mark Kishlansky. Early Modern Europe: Crisis ofAuthority. Readings in Western Civilization, edited by John W. Boyer and Julius Kirshner, vol. 6. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987. Euripides. Orestes. Translated by William Arrowsmith. In Euripides IV, edited by David Grene and Richmond Lattimore. 3rd ed., edited by Mark Griffith and Glenn W. Most. The Complete Greek Tragedies. Chicago: University of Chi cago Press, 2013. 14. 125
M u ltivolume work withi n a series. If a book within a series consists of more than one volume, the number of volumes or the volume number (if reference is to a particular volume) follows the book title.
Ferrer Benimeli, Jose Antonio. Masoneria, iglesia e ilustracion. Vol. 1, Las bases de un confticto (1700-1739) . Vol. 2, Inquisicion: Procesos historicos (1739-1750). Publicaciones de la Fundacion Universitaria Espanola, Monografias 17. Ma drid, 1976. 14. 1 2 6
" O l d series" a n d "new series." Some numbered series have gone on so
long that, as with certain long-lived journals, numbering has started over again, preceded by n.s. (new series) , 2nd ser. (second series) , or some similar notation, usually enclosed in commas. (A change of publisher may also be the occasion for a change in series designation.) Books in the old series may be identified by o.s. , 1st ser. , or whatever complements the notation for the new series. 1. Charles R. Boxer, ed. South China in the Sixteenth Century, Hakluyt Society Publications, 2nd ser., vol. 106 (London: Hakluyt, 1953). Palmatary, Helen C. The Pottery of Marajo Island, Brazil. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, n.s., 39, pt. 3. Philadelphia: American Phil osophical Society, 1950.
Books
14. 1 3 0
Facts ofPublication 14.127
Place, publ isher, and date. Traditionally, the facts of publication for books include the place (city) , the publisher, and the date (year) . These elements are put in parentheses in a note but not in a bibliography. A colon appears between place and publisher. In a note or a bibliography, the date follows the publisher, preceded by a comma. See also 14.23.
1. Virginia Woolf, To the Lighthouse (London: Hogarth Press, 1927) . Thomas, Matthew. We Are Not Ourselves. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2014.
P L A C E OF P U B L I C A T I O N 14.128
Place and date only, for books publ ished before 1900. For books pub lished before 1900, it is acceptable to omit publishers' names and to include only the place and date of publication. A comma, not a colon, follows the place. See also 14.132, 14.137.
1. Oliver Goldsmith, The Vicar ofWakefield (Salisbury, 1766) . Cervantes Saavedra, Miguel de. El ingenioso hidalgo Don Quixote de la Mancha. 2 vols. Madrid, 1605-15. 14 .129
Place of publication-city. The place to be included is the one that usu ally appears on the title page but sometimes on the copyright page of the book cited-the city where the publisher's main editorial offices are lo cated. Where two or more cities are given ("Chicago and London," for example, appears on the title page of the print edition of this manual) , only the first is normally included in the citation.
Berkeley: University of California Press Los Angeles: Getty Publications New York: Macmillan New York: Oxford University Press Oxford: Clarendon Press 14 .130
When to specify state, province, or cou ntry of publication. If the city of
publication may be unknown to readers or may be confused with another city of the same name, the abbreviation of the state, province, or (some times) country is usually added. Washington is traditionally followed by
14. 13 1
N O T E S AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
D C , but other major cities, such a s Los Angeles and Baltimore, need no state abbreviation. (For countries not easily abbreviated, spell out the name.) Chicago's preference is for the two-letter postal codes (IL, MA, etc.) , but some publishers prefer the conventional state abbreviations (Ill., Mass., etc.) . See 10.4, 10.27. For Canadian provinces and territories, see 10.28. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press Cambridge, MA: MIT Press Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press New Haven, CT: Yale University Press Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press Reading, MA: Perseus Books Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press Waterloo, ON: Wilfrid Laurier University Press but Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
When the publisher's name includes the state name, the abbreviation is not needed. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press 14.131
City names in languages other than English. Current, commonly used English names for cities such as those listed here are usually preferred whenever such forms exist. If in doubt about what form to use, record the name of the city as it appears with the source. (Names for cities such as Beijing or Mumbai that were once commonly known under older forms can usually be recorded as they appear in the source. See also 11.83.)
Belgrade (not Beograd) Cologne (not Koln) Mexico City (not Mexico) Milan (not Milano) Munich (not Miinchen) Prague (not Praha) Rome (not Roma) The Hague (not den Haag) Turin (not Torino) Vienna (not Wien)
Books 14.132
14.134
No place of publ ication. When the place of publication is not known, the abbreviation n.p. (or N.p. if following a period) may be used before the publisher's name. If the place can be surmised, it may be given with a question mark, in brackets. See also 14.128.
It is common for more recent books published through commercial self publishing platforms not to list a place of publication. In such cases, the place of publication can usually be omitted; for examples, see 14.137.
PUBL I S H E R' S NAME 14.133
Preferred form of publisher's name. The publisher's name may be given either in full (e.g., as printed on the title page of the book) or in a some what abbreviated form. The shorter forms are preferred in most bibli ographies (see 14.134) . The form should, however, reflect the publish er's name at the date of publication, not the current name if the name has changed. Most publishers' names at the time of publication can be double-checked through any number of reputable sources, including the catalogs of the Library of Congress, WorldCat, and the Books in Print re sources available through R. R. Bowker (see bibliog. 4.5) . For reprint and other editions, see 14.113-15.
14. 134
Abbreviations and omissible parts of a publisher's name. In notes and
bibliography, an initial The is omitted from a publisher's name, as are such abbreviations as Inc. , Ltd. , or S.A. following a name. Co. , & Co. , Publishing Co., and the like are also omitted, even if Company is spelled out. Such corporate features of a publisher's name-often subject to many changes over the years-are far less important in leading a reader to the source consulted than the publication date, and attempting to in clude them will invariably lead to inconsistencies. A given name or ini tials preceding a family name, however, may be retained, as may terms such as Sons, Brothers, and so forth. Books is usually retained (Basic Books, Riverhead Books) . The word Press can sometimes be omitted (for example, Pergamon Press and Ecco Press can be abbreviated to Perga mon and Ecco, but Free Press and New Press-whose names might be confusing without Press-must be given in full) . Press should not be omit ted from the name of a university press because the university itself may issue publications independent of its press. The word University may be abbreviated to Univ. if done consistently.
14.135
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Houghton Mifflin not Houghton Mifflin Co. Little, Brown not Little, Brown & Co. Macmillan not Macmillan Publishing Co. W. W. Norton not W. W. Norton & Company
Note that there is no comma in Houghton Mifflin, but there is one in Little, Brown. Likewise, Harcourt, Brace has a comma, but Harcourt Brace Jovanovich does not. If in doubt, consult one of the sources men tioned in 14.133. 14. 1 3 5
"And" or ampersand in publisher's name. Either and or & may be used
in a publisher's name, regardless of how it is rendered on the title page. It is advisable . to stick to one or the other throughout a bibliography. If the publisher's name is not in English, the equivalent of and must be used unless an ampersand is used instead. Duncker und Humblot or Duncker & Humblot Harper and Row or Harper & Row
In publisher names that form a series, the serial comma is usually omit ted before an ampersand but not before and (see also 6.21) . An exception may be made for Farrar, Straus and Giroux, which is generally so written (i.e., with an and but not with a serial comma) . 14 .136
Non-English publishers' names. No part of a publisher's name in a lan guage other than English should be translated, even if the city has been given in its English form (see 14.131) .
Mexico City: Fondo de Cultura Econ6mica, 2010 Munich: Delphin Verlag, 2015 Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 2011
Note that abbreviations corresponding to Inc. or Ltd. (German GmbH, for example) are omitted (see 14.134) . Capitalization of a publisher's name should follow the original unless the name appears in full capitals there; in that case, it should be capitalized headline-style; if in doubt about the correct capitalization, consult one of the sources mentioned in 14.133. 14.137
Self-publ ished or privately published books. Books published by the au thor should be cited according to information available on the title page or copyright page or otherwise known. Unless the work has been pub lished under a publisher or imprint name (in which case it can be cited as described elsewhere in this section) , such language as "self-published"
Books
14. 1 3 8
(abbreviated as "self-pub." in a note but not in a bibliography entry) or "printed by the author" is usually appropriate. For works distributed through a commercial self-publishing platform, the name of the platform or distributor may be added. It is common for self-published books not to list a place of publication on the title page or copyright page; unless a place is listed or otherwise known, it can usually be omitted (see also 14.132) . For e-books, add the name of the application or device required to read the book or the name of the file format, or both (see also 14.159) . 1. Vasiliy Karavaev, GOA: Confession ofthe Psychedelic Oyster (self-pub., 2015), iBooks. 2. Frank Landis, Hot Earth Dreams: What If Severe Climate Change Happens, and Humans Survive? (self-pub., Smashwords, 2015), EPUB. Rai, Alisha. Serving Pleasure. Self-published, CreateSpace, 2015. Shumaker, 0. W. Anna's Bear: 5 Days ofMoral Conflict and Pursuit, Nazi Germany, 1939. Self-published, Amazon Digital Services, 2014. Kindle.
Older self-published works are more likely to list a city of publication or printing (see also 14.128) . Albin, Eleazar. A Natural History ofBirds: Illustrated with a Hundred and One Cop per Plates, Engraven from the Life. London: printed by the author, 1738. 14 .138
Parent companies, im prints, and such. When a parent company's name appears on the title page in addition to the publisher's name or imprint, it is usually sufficient to cite the latter (but see 14.139) . For example, the title page of a 1995 edition of Old New York: Four Novellas, by Edith Whar ton, bears the imprint "Scribner Paperback Fiction" ; below that appears " Published by Simon & Schuster." (The cities listed are New York, Lon don, Toronto, and Sydney.) The spine carries "Scribner Paperback Fic tion" (but not Simon & Schuster) . The copyright page gives an address for Simon & Schuster and further explains that (for the time being) Scrib ner Paperback Fiction is a trademark of Macmillan Library Reference USA. Such complex arrangements are common in book publishing. Cite the work as follows:
Wharton, Edith. Old New York: Four Novellas. New York: Scribner Paperback Fic tion, 1995.
If it is not clear which name to list, check with one of the catalogs listed in 14.133 to see which publisher is listed there, being careful to find the entry in the catalog that matches the facts of publication for the item in
14.139
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
question. I f this i s not possible, o r i f i t remains unclear which name to list, include both, separated by a slash (/) with a space on either side. 14 . 139
Special academic imprints and joint imprints. Some academic publish
ers issue certain books through a special publishing division or under a special imprint or as part of a publishing consortium (or joint imprint) . In such instances the imprint arrangement may be specified. If the wording is not clear on the title page, copyright page, or elsewhere, consult one of the resources mentioned in 14.133. Buell, Lawrence. Emerson. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 2003. Spivack, Kathleen. With Robert Lowell and His Circle: Sylvia Plath, Anne Sexton, Elizabeth Bishop, Stanley Kunitz, and Others. Boston: Northeastern University Press, an imprint of University Press of New England, 2012. Taylor, Judith M. Visions of Loveliness: Great Flower Breeders of the Past. Athens: Swallow Press, an imprint of Ohio University Press, 2014. •
Note that in the Taylor example, the state would need to be specified (i.e., Athens, OH) if the citation were to include Swallow Press but not the parent company. See also 14.141. 14 . 14 0
Copubl ication. When books are published simultaneously (or almost so) by two publishers, usually in different countries, only one publisher need be listed-the one that is more relevant to the users of the citation. For example, if a book copublished by a British and an American publisher is listed in the bibliography of an American publication, only the American publication details need be given. If for some reason (e.g., as a matter of historical interest) information is included for both publishers, a semico lon should be used as a separator. (Occasionally, the dates of publication will be different; in such cases, record both.) For reprints, see 14.114.
Levi-Strauss, Claude. The Savage Mind. Chicago: University of Chicago Press; London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1962.
Some copublications occur between a publisher and another institution such as a museum. These can usually be handled in the same way (but for exhibition catalogs, see 14.236) . 14. 141
Distributed books. For a book published by one company and distrib uted by another, the name on the title page should be used. Since distri-
Books
14.144
bution agreements are sometimes impermanent, the distributor's name is best omitted unless essential to users of a bibliography. Willke, Helmut. Smart Governance: Governing the Global Knowledge Society. Frank furt am Main: Campus Verlag, 2007. Distributed by University of Chicago Press.
Wording on the title page such as "Published by arrangement with . . . ,'' if it is of particular interest, may be included in a similar manner. For books distributed by a retail self-publishing platform, see 14.137.
D A T E O F P U B L I C AT I O N 14.142
Publication date-general. For books, only the year, not the month or day, is included in the publication date. The date is found on the title page or, more commonly, on the copyright page. It is usually the same as the copyright date. If two or more copyright dates appear in a book, the first being those of earlier editions or versions, the most recent indicates the publication date. Chicago's books normally carry both copyright date and publication date on the copyright page. For any edition other than the first, both the edition and the date of that edition must be included in a listing (see 14.113-15) .
1. The Chicago Manual ofStyle, 17th ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2017), 6.56; c£ 16th ed. (2010), 6.54. Turabian, Kate L. A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and Dissertations. 8th ed. Revised by Wayne C. Booth, Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams, and the University of Chicago Press Staff. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2013. 14 . 143
New impressions and renewal of copyright. The publication date must not be confused with the date of a subsequent printing or a renewal of copyright. Such statements on the copyright page as " 53rd impression" or "Copyright renewed 1980" should be disregarded. For new editions as opposed to new impressions, see 1.26; for reprints, see 14.114.
14. 144
M u ltivolume works published over more than one year. When an en tire multivolume, multiyear work is cited, the range of dates is given (see 6. 78) . If the work has not yet been completed, the date of the first volume is followed by an en dash (with no space between the en dash and the
14. 145
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
punctuation that follows; s e e 6.79) . S e e also 9.64. I f a single volume is cited, only the date of that volume need appear. See also 14.116-22. 1. The Collected Works ofF. A. Hayek, ed. Bruce Caldwell, vol. 17, The Constitu tion ofLiberty: The Definitive Edition, ed. Ronald Hamowy (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2011), 329. Hayek, F. A. The Constitution ofLiberty: The Definitive Edition. Edited by Ronald Hamowy. Vol. 17 of The Collected Works ofF. A. Hayek, edited by Bruce Cald well. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988-. Tillich, Paul. Systematic Theology. 3 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1951-63. 14. 145
No date of publ ication. When the publication date of a printed work can not be ascertained, the abbreviation n.d. takes the place of the year in the publication details. A guessed-at date may either be substituted (in brackets) or added. See also 14.132.
Boston, n.d. Edinburgh, [1750 ?] or Edinburgh, n.d., ca. 1750
A work for which no publisher, place, or date can be determined or rea sonably guessed at should be included in a bibliography only if accompa nied by the location where a copy can be found (e.g., "Two copies in the Special Collections Department of the University of Chicago Library"). For the use of n.d. in author-date citations, see 15.44. 14. 146
. Forthcoming pu blications. When a book is under contract with a pub
lisher and is already titled, but the date of publication is not yet known, forthcoming is used in place of the date. Although in press is sometimes used (strictly speaking for a printed work that has already been typeset and paginated) , Chicago recommends the more inclusive term, which can also be used for nonprint media, for any work under contract. If page numbers are available, they may be given. Books not under contract are treated as unpublished manuscripts (see 14.2 15-20) . 1. Jane Q. Author, Book Title (Place: Publisher, forthcoming) . 2. John J. Writer, Another Book Title (Place: Publisher, forthcoming), 345-46. Contributor, Anna. "Contribution." In Edited Volume, edited by Ellen Editor. Place: Publisher, forthcoming.
Books
14. 148
Wheri a publication that cites a forthcoming title is reprinted, the cita tion need not be updated. For a revised edition, on the other hand, the citation can be updated to provide the final facts of publication, but only after direct quotations and other details have been checked for accuracy against the published source.
Page, Volume, and Other Locating Information 14. 147
Arabic versus roman numerals. As the examples throughout this chap
ter (and chapter 15) suggest, arabic numerals should be used wherever possible in source citations-for volumes, chapters, and other divisions regardless of the way the numerals appear in the works cited, with the notable exception of pages numbered with roman numerals in the origi nal (usually lowercased, in the front matter of a book) . Occasional excep tions are made, for exar.:1ple, in certain legal contexts (see 14.280). 1. See the article "Feathers," in Johnson's Universal Cyclopaedia, rev. ed. (New York: A. J. Johnson, 1886), vol. 3. 2. Jerome Kagan, "Introduction to the Tenth-Anniversary Edition," in The Na ture ofthe Child (New York: Basic Books, 1994), xxii-xxiv.
Any number in a title of a work should generally be left as is (see also 14.88) . 14. 148
Citing a range of page numbers or other specific locators. For Chi cago's preferred style in expressing a range of consecutive pages, para graphs, or similar numbered divisions, see 9.61. First and last numbers should be used rather than first number plus ff. (but see 14.149) .
1. Chicago Manual of Style, 17th ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2017) , 14.147-58. 2. Dave Eggers, The Circle (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2013), 215-16.
See the rest of this chapter for many more examples in context. Refer ences to nonconsecutive pages or other locations in the same work are separated by commas. 3. Eggers, Circle, 220, 222.
For author-date style, see 15.23.
14. 149
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
14. 149
Page references with "ff." and "passim." Only when referring to a sec tion for which no final number can usefully be given should.ff. ("and the following pages, paragraphs, etc.") be resorted to. Instead of the singular f., the subsequent number should be used (e.g., " 140-41" not " 140f."). Similarly, passim ("here and there") is to be discouraged unless it follows a stated range of pages within which there are more than three or four precise references ( " 324-32 passim") . When used, ff. has no space be tween it and the preceding number and is followed by a period; passim, being a complete word, takes no period. Neither is italicized. (For passim in indexes, see 16.12.)
14. 1 5 0
Abbreviations for "page," "volume," a n d s o o n . In source citations, the words page, volume, and the like are usually abbreviated and often simply omitted (see 14.151) . The most commonly used abbreviations are p. (pl. pp.) , vol., pt. , chap., bk. , sec. , n. (pl. nn. ) , no. , app. , and .fig. ; for these and others, see chapter 10, especially 10.42. Unless following a period, all are lowercased, and none is italicized (except in the rare case where it forms part of an italicized book title) . All the abbreviations mentioned in this paragraph, except for p. and n., form their plurals by adding s.
A Cry ofAbsence, chap. 6 A Dance to the Music of Time, 4 vols. 14. 1 5 1
When t o o m i t "p." a n d "pp." When a number or a range of numbers
clearly denotes the pages in a book, p. or pp. may be omitted; the num bers alone, preceded by a comma, are sufficient. Where the presence of other numerals threatens ambiguity, p. or pp. may be added for clarity. (And if an author has used p. and pp. consistently throughout a work, there is no need tb delete them.) See also 14.152, 14.156. Charlotte's Web, 75-76 but Complete Poems ofMichelangelo, p. 89, lines 135-36 14 . 1 5 2
When t o o m i t "vol." When a volume number is followed immediately by
a page number, neither vol. nor p. or pp. is needed. The numbers alone are used, separated by a colon but no space. A comma usually precedes the volume number, except with periodicals (see 14.171) and certain types of classical references (see 14.242-52) . For more on volume num bers, see 14.116-22. For citing a particular volume, with and without the abbreviation vol. , see 14.118. The Complete Tales ofHenry fames, 10:122
Books 14 . 1 5 3
14.157
Page and chapter numbers. Page numbers, needed for specific refer
ences in notes and parenthetical text citations, are usually unnecessary in bibliographies except when the piece cited is a part within a whole (see 14.10 6-12; for journal articles, see 14.174) . If the chapter or other section number is given, page numbers may be omitted. The total page count of a book is not included in source citations. (Total page counts do, how ever, appear in headings to book reviews, catalog entries, and the like. For book review headings, see 1.98.) 1. Claire Kehrwald Cook, "Mismanaged Numbers and References," in Line by Line: How to Edit Your Own Writing (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1985), 81. 2. Nuala O'Faolain, Are You Somebody? The Accidental Memoir of a Dublin Woman (New York: Holt, 1996), chap. 17. 14. 154
Sig ned signatures. Some books printed before 1800 did not carry page numbers, but each signature (a group of consecutive pages) bore a letter, numeral, or other symbol (its "signature") to help the binder gather them in correct sequence. In citing pages in books of this kind, the signature symbol is given first, then the number of the leaf within the signature, and finally r (recto, the front of the leaf) or v (verso, the back of the leaf) . Thus, for example, G6v identifies one page, G6r-7v a range of four pages.
14. 1 5 5
Numbered leaves, or folios. Some early books had leaf numbers rather than page numbers. Such leaves were typically numbered only on the front, or recto, side. A page citation therefore consists of the number on the leaf plus r (recto) or v (verso)-for example, 176r, 231v, or 232r-v. Such leaves are sometimes referred to as folios (e.g., folio 176r) . For books or parts of books with no discernible numbers at all, pages can sometimes be counted and the result placed in square brackets. See also 14.154, 14.225.
14 . 1 5 6
L i n e numbers. The abbreviations l. (line) and
ll. (lines) can too easily be confused with the numerals 1 and 11 and so should be avoided. Line or lines should be used or, where it has been made clear that reference is to lines, simply omitted (see 13.67) . 1. Ogden Nash, "Song for Ditherers," lines 1-4.
14. 157
n or nn. The usage recommended here is also used for indexes (see 16.111, 16.112, 16.113) . If the note cited is the only footnote on a particular page or is an unnumbered footnote, the page number is followed by n alone.
Citing n u m bered notes. Notes are cited with the abbreviation
14 . 1 5 8
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
1. Anthony Grafton, The Footnote: A Curious History (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1997), 72n, 80n.
If there are other notes on the same page as the note cited, a number must be added. In this case the page number is followed by n or (if two or more consecutive notes are cited) nn, followed by the note number (or numbers or, in rare cases, an asterisk or other symbol) . No intervening space or punctuation is required. 2. Dwight Bolinger, Language: The Loaded Weapon (London: Longman, 1980), 192n23, 192n30, 199n14, 201nn16-1Z 3. Richard Rorty, Philosophical Papers (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991), 1:15n2.9. 14 . 15 8
Citing illustrations a n d tables. The abbreviation.fig. may be used for.fig
ure, but table, map, plate, and other illustration forms are spelled out. The page number, if given, precedes the illustration number, with a comma between them. 1. Jean-Paul Chavas, David Hummels, and Brian D. Wright, eds., The Eco nomics ofFood Price Volatility (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014) , 167, table 4.4.
To cite art in collections and other stand-alone works, see 14.235-37.
Electronic Books 14.159
Books requ iring a specific appl ication or device (e-books). Many books are published in print and as a downloadable file in one or more elec tronic formats. Because of the potential for differences, authors must in dicate which format was consulted. E-book formats include EPUB, PDF, and many others (see 1.118) . To account for differences in the ways these formats are adapted for publication, it is often more helpful to specify the name of the application (or, in some cases, the device) used to read or acquire the book than to name the specific file format (which may not be readily apparent) . Like a URL for books consulted online (see 14.161) , this information should be the last part of a full citation that follows the recommendations for citing books as detailed elsewhere in this section. The following examples show how to list different versions of the same book, formatted as a bibliography entry, starting with the print version and followed by versions acquired from a variety of different sources, from Apple to Google, for use with their branded applications or devices.
Books
14 . 1 6 0
Begley, Adam. Updike. New York: Harper, 2014. Begley, Adam. Updike. New York: Harper, 2014. iBooks. Begley, Adam. Updike. New York: Harper, 2014. Kindle. Begley, Adam. Updike. New York: Harper, 2014. NOOK. Begley, Adam. Updike. New York: Harper, 2014. Google Play Books.
In some cases, a file format will be specified at the time a book is ac quired (e.g., EPUB or PDF) . In such cases, include the name of the for mat together with the application or device required to view or acquire the file, if any. Borel, Brooke. Infested: How the Bed Bug Infiltrated Our Bedrooms and Took Over the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2015. Adobe Digital Editions EPUB.
Many e-books constitute a reprint of an earlier printed edition published before any e-book format was available (see also 1.23) . In such cases, a citation should feature the original publication data (typically included in the title page and copyright information for the e-book) , followed by information about the e-book. For example, to cite a Kindle version of Philip Roth's Goodbye, Columbus based on the 1989 30th anniversary edition of Roth's book (first published in 1959) , it is sufficient to include publication details about the 1989 edition only (but see 14.114) . Roth, Philip. Goodbye, Columbus, and Five Short Stories. 30th anniversary ed. Bos ton: Houghton Mifflin, 1989. Kindle.
In a note, information about the e-book follows any page or other loca tor information. For examples, see 14.160. For self-published books, see 14.137. 14. 160
Page or location numbers in electronic formats. Many e-books and other electronic formats feature refl.owable or scrollable text and there fore do not have fixed pages. Depending on the application or device, "page" or other location numbers displayed along with the text in re fl.owable e-book formats may vary according to user-defined text size, making any reference to such numbers unhelpful to others wishing to consult the same text. Even where such numbers are invariable, they will be helpful only to those who consult the same e-book format. In such cases, it is often best to cite a chapter number or a section heading or other such milepost in lieu of a page or location number. (If paragraphs are numbered, as in this manual, cite those.)
14.161
N O T E S AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
1. Adam Begley, Updike (New York: Harper, 2014) , chap. 2, iBooks. 2. Begley, Updike, chap. 9.
If a location number needs to be cited or referred to for any reason, in clude both the specific location and the total number of locations, using the terminology in the application. This will allow readers using other formats (including formats for which location numbers are variable) to calculate an approximate position in the book. (See also 14.137.) 3. Mary Ann Noe, Ivory Trenches: Adventures of an English Teacher (self-pub., Amazon Digital Services, 2016), Joe. 444 of 3023, Kindle.
Some publishers include data about page numbers in their e-book for mats that correspond to a print version-a practice that is especially help ful for orienting readers of e-book formats in terms of the printed book (see 1.123) . (Such page numbers are not to be confused with the so-called pages in certain e-book formats representing screens of text.) Note, how ever, that such page numbers tend to be approximate: a single page in a printed book typically corresponds to two or more screens of text in an e-book format (usually without any indication in the latter of the precise location of the page breaks) . If possible, such page numbers should be checked against-and cited to-the printed version. 14.161
Books consulted online. When citing the online version of a book, add a URL as part of the citation (but see below) . The URL should be the last part of a full citation based on the principles outlined throughout this section on citing books. Note the reference to chapter in lieu of page number(s) for the source in notes 1 and 3, which lacks fixed page num bers (see 14.160) . In those notes, the URLs are based on the DOis for the chapters rather than the DOI for the work as a whole (as in the bibliogra phy entry) . See also 14.7, 14.8.
1. Mark Evan Bonds, Absolute Music: The History of an Idea (New York: Ox ford University Press, 2014) , chap. 3, https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780 199343638.003.0004. 2. Karen Lystra, Dangerous Intimacy: The Untold Story ofMark Twain's Final Years (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2004), 59, http://ark.cdlib.org/ark: /13030/kt8779q6kr/. 3. Bonds, Absolute Music, chap. 11, https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780 199343638.003.0012. 4. Lystra, Dangerous Intimacy, 60-61.
Books
14 . 1 6 2
Bonds, Mark Evan. Absolute Music: The History ofan Idea. New York: Oxford Uni versity Press, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199343638.001 .0001. Lystra, Karen. Dangerous Intimacy: The Untold Story ofMark Twain's Final Years. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2004. http://ark.cdlib.org/ark:/130 30/kt8779q6kr/.
Especially for in-copyright books consulted through a commercial li brary database, a suitable URL may not be available. Even suggested links listed with the source may work only for subscribers or those with access to a particular library. (A URL based on a DOI, on the other hand, will always direct readers to information about the source, if not full ac cess to it.) In such cases, list the name of the commercial database rather than the URL. Borel, Brooke. Infested: How the Bed Bug Infiltrated Our Bedrooms and Took Over the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2015. EBSCOhost. 14 . 1 6 2
Freely available electronic editions o f older works. Books and other documents that have fallen out of copyright are often freely available online. When possible, prefer scanned pages to reflowable text for the purposes of source citation. In the James examples below, the Project Gutenberg text is apparently based on the 1909 New York edition of The Ambassadors-and is available in a number ofreflowable formats, includ ing HTML and EPUB. But the scanned pages from Google Books of an actual copy of the 1909 edition (published in two volumes) are prefer able. Not only is the Google Books version more authoritative (in part because the original title and copyright pages are included) but it also facilitates citations to fixed page numbers (see 14.160; see also 14.118) .
1. Henry James, The Ambassadors (New York, 1909; Project Gutenberg, 2008), bk. 6, chap. 1, http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/432. or, better, 2. Henry James, The Ambassadors, 2 vols. (New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1909), 1:243, https://books.google.com/books?id=WYlUAAAAYAAJ.
The Melville examples below further demonstrate the importance of finding and citing publication details about the original. The citations are for the same passage of text (see 14.24)--first, as it appears in a scanned copy of the first American edition, and next, as it appears in a similarly prepared copy of the first British edition (published in three volumes) . The URL gives interested readers a chance to consult the same resources,
14. 1 6 3
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
but the citation does not depend o n i t (because the originals have been sufficiently identified) . 3. Herman Melville, Moby-Dick; or, The Whale (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1851), 627, http://mel.hofstra.edu/moby-dick-the-whale-proofs.html. 4. Herman Melville, Moby-Dick; or, The Whale, 3 vols. (London: Richard Bent ley, 1851), 3:302, http://mel.hofstra.edu/moby-dick-the-whale-proofs.html.
A bibliography entry would not include page references. Melville, Herman. Moby-Dick; or, The Whale. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1851. http://mel.hofstra.edu/moby-dick-the-whale-proofs.html.
See also 14.10, 14.114. 14 . 1 6 3
Books on CD-ROM a n d other fixed media. In the increasingly rare case of a citation for a book on CD-ROM or other fixed media, indicate the medium after the full facts of publication, including any page or other locator information in a note.
1. The Chicago Manual ofStyle, 15th ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003), 1.4, CD-ROM. Hicks, Rodney J. Nuclear Medicine: From the Center ofOur Universe. Victoria, Aus tral.: ICE T Multimedia, 1996. CD-ROM.
Periodicals 14. 164
14. 1 6 5
"Periodicals" defined. In this manual, periodical refers to scholarly and professional journals, popular magazines, and newspapers. Periodicals are far more likely than books to be consulted online. Except for the ad dition of a URL (preferably based on a DOI) or, in some cases, the name of a bibliographic database, the citation of a periodical consulted online is the same as the one recommended for printed periodicals. (Some pub lishers may also require an access date; see 14.12.) See examples of such information, and special considerations, under specific types of periodi cals. See also 14.6-18. Information t o b e included. Citations of periodicals require some or all
of the following data: 1. Full name(s) of author or authors 2. Title and subtitle of article or column
Periodicals
3. 4. 5. 6.
14. 1 6 8
Title of periodical Issue information (volume, issue number, date, etc.) Page reference (where appropriate) For periodicals consulted online, a URL or, in some cases, the name of the database used to consult the resource (see 14.6-18)
Indispensable for newspapers and most magazines is the specific date (month, day, and year) . For journals, the volume and year plus the month or issue number are usually cited. Additional data make location easier. 14. 1 6 6
Journals versus magazines. A journal is a scholarly or professional pe
riodical available mainly by subscription (e.g., Library Quarterry, New England Journal ofMedicine) . Journals are normally cited by volume and date (see 14.171) . A magazine is a weekly or monthly (or sometimes daily) periodical-professionally produced, sometimes specialized, but more accessible to general readers-that is available in individual issues at li braries or bookstores or newsstands or offered online, with or without a subscription (e.g., Scientific American, the New Yorker) . Magazines are normally cited by date alone (see 14.188) . Ifin doubt whether a particular periodical is better treated as a journal or as a magazine, use journal form if the volume number is easily located, magazine form if it is not. 14.167
Basic structure of a periodical citation. In notes, commas appear be tween author; title of article (in quotation marks) ; title of magazine, newspaper, or journal (in italics) ; and, for sources consulted online, URL or database name. In bibliographies, periods replace these commas. Note that in is not used between the article title and the journal title. (In is used only with chapters or other parts of books; see 14.106, 14.107.) Punctuation relative to any volume and issue number and for dates and page numbers depends on periodical type. In bibliography entries, the first and last pages of an article are given (for inclusive numbers, see 9.61) . In notes and text citations, only specific pages need be cited (un less the article as a whole is referred to) . In some electronic formats, page numbers will be unavailable (see 14.22) . For examples, see 14.23, 14.168-87 (journals) , 14.188-90 (magazines) , and 14.191-200 (news papers) .
journals 14. 1 6 8
Journal article-author's name. Authors' names are normally given as
they appear at the heads of their articles. Adjustments can be made, however, as indicated in 14.73. For the treatment oftwo or more authors,
14 . 1 6 9
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
see 14.76. For additional considerations related t o names o f authors, see 14.72-84. 14. 1 6 9
Jou rnal article-title. Titles of articles are set in roman (except for in
dividual words or phrases that require italics, such as species names or book titles; see 14.95) ; they are usually capitalized headline-style and put in quotation marks. As with a book, title and subtitle are separated by a colon. For examples, see 14.23 and the paragraphs below. For shortened forms of article titles, see 14.185. For additional considerations related to titles of works, see 14.85-99. 14. 170
Title of journal. Titles of journals are italicized and capitalized headline style. They l;lre usually given in full-except for the omission of an initial The-in notes and bibliographies (e.g., Journal ofBusiness) . With journals and magazines with non-English titles, an initial article should be re tained (e.g., Der Spiegel) . See also 8.170. Occasionally an initialism, such as PMLA, is the official title and is never spelled out. In some disciplines, especially in science and medicine, journal titles are routinely abbrevi ated (e.g., Plant Syst Evol) , unless they consist of only one word (e.g., Sci ence, Mind) ; see 15.46. Chicago recommends giving titles in full unless a particular publisher or discipline requires otherwise.
14. 17 1
Jou rnal volume, issue, a n d date. Most journal citations include volume,
issue number or month, and year. The volume number, set in roman, follows the title without intervening punctuation; arabic numerals are used even if the journal itself uses roman numerals. The issue number follows the volume number, separated by a comma and preceded by no. The issue number should be recorded even if pagination is continuous throughout a volume or when a month or season precedes the year. The year, sometimes preceded by an exact date, a month, or a season, ap pears in parentheses after the volume and issue data. Seasons, though not capitalized in running text (see 8.88) , are capitalized in source cita tions. Months may be abbreviated or spelled in full (as here) ; seasons are best spelled out (see also 10.39) . 1. Margaret Lock, "Comprehending the Body i n the Era o f the Epigenome," Current Anthropology 56, no. 2 (April 2015) : 155, https://doi.org/10.1086/680350. 2. Sharon R. Wesoky, "Bringing the fia Back into Guojia: Engendering Chinese Intellectual Politics," Signs 40, no. 3 (Spring 2015) : 651, https://doi.org/10.1086 /679524. 3. David G. Harper, "Bringing Accommodation into Focus: The Several Dis coveries of the Ciliary Muscle," JAMA Ophthalmology 132, no. 5 (May 2014) : 645, https://doi.org/10.1001/jamaophthalmol.2013.5525.
Periodicals
14 .172
Harper, David G. "Bringing Accommodation into Focus: The Several Discoveries of the Ciliary Muscle." ]AMA Ophthalmology 132, no. 5 (2014) : 645-48. https:// doi.org/10.1001/jamaophthalmol.2013.5525. Lock, Margaret Lock. "Comprehending the Body in the Era of the Epigenome." Current Anthropology 56, no. 2 (April 2015) : 151-77. https://doi.org/10.1086 /680350. Wesoky, Sharon R. "Bringing the ]ia Back into Guojia: Engendering Chinese In tellectual Politics." Signs 40, no. 3 (Spring 2015) : 647-66. https://doi.org/10 .1086/679524.
Where more than one issue number is included, follow the usage in the journal itself, using either plural nos. or singular no. (always lowercase) and separating the digits by a slash, a hyphen (use an en dash in the pub lished version; see 6.78), or the like. Where a span of months or seasons is given, follow the usage of the journal (but use an en dash rather than a hyphen in the published version-e.g., September-December) . 4. Ismael Galvan and Francisco Solano, "Melanin Chemistry and the Ecology of Stress," Physiological and Biochemical Zoology 88, no. 3 (May/June 2015) : 353, https://doi.org/10.1086/680362. 5. Lina Perkins Wilder, '"My Exion Is Entered': Anatomy, Costume, and The atrical Knowledge in 2 Henry IV," Renaissance Drama 41, no. 1/2 (Fall 2013) : 60, https://doi.org/10.1086/673907.
When a journal uses issue numbers only, without volume numbers, a comma follows the journal title. 6. J. M. Beattie, "The Pattern of Crime in England, 1660-1800," Past and Pres ent, no. 62 (February 1974) : 52, http://www.jstor.org/stable/650463.
When only a date is available, treat the resource like a magazine (see 14.188) . 14 .172
Forthcoming journal articles. If an article has been accepted for publi cation by a journal but has not yet appeared, forthcoming stands in place of the year and the page numbers. Any article not yet accepted should be treated as an unpublished manuscript (see 14.218) . See also 14.173.
1. Margaret M. Author, "Article Title," journal Title 98 (forthcoming). Author, Margaret M. "Article Title." journal Title 98 (forthcoming).
If an article is published by a journal electronically ahead of the official publication date, use the posted publication date. In such cases, page
14 . 173
NOTES AND BIBLIOG RAPHY
numbers o r volume and issue information, o r both, may not yet be avail able (but see 14.174) . Jubb, Robert. "The Real Value of Equality." Journal ofPolitics 77, no. 3. Published ahead of print, April 14, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1086/68 1262. 14. 173
Journal article preprints. Not having been subject to peer review, pre prints are treated as unpublished material. See also 1.113.
Huang, Zhiqi. "Revisiting the Cosmological Bias Due to Local Gravitational Red shifts." Preprint, submitted April 24, 2015. http://arxiv.org/abs/1504.06600vl. 14. 174
Journal page references. In citing a particular passage in a journal ar ticle, only the page or pages concerned are given. In references to the article as a whole (as in a bibliography) , first and last pages are given.
1. Donald Maletz, "Tocqueville's Tangents to Democracy," American Political Thought 4, no. 4 (Fall 2015) : 615. Gold, Ann Grodzins. "Grains of Truth: Shifting Hierarchies of Food and Grace in Three Rajasthani Tales." History ofReligions 38, no. 2 (1998) : 150-71.
To facilitate online publication schedules, some journals have adopted a continuous publishing model in which each article is assigned a unique ID and is considered final the moment it is published online; any sub sequent print version is reproduced without any changes. Articles that include a PDF version are all paginated starting at 1 and can be cited in the notes accordingly. In a note, cited page numbers precede the article ID (e01243 10 in the example below) . In a bibliography, do not include the page range for an article published in this way. 2. Priyamvada Paudyal et al., "Obtaining Self-Samples to Diagnose Curable Sexually Transmitted Infections: A Systematic Review of Patients' Experiences," PLoS ONE 10, no. 4 (2015) : 2-3, e0124310. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone .0124310. Paudyal, Priyamvada, Carrie Llewellyn, Jason Lau, Mohammad Mahmud, and Helen Smith. "Obtaining Self-Samples to Diagnose Curable Sexually Trans mitted Infections: A Systematic Review of Patients' Experiences," PLoS ONE 10, no. 4 (2015) : e0124310. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0124310.
Most electronic journals provide page numbers. Where this is not the case, another type of locator such as a subheading may become appro priate in a note. None, however, is required. See also 14.22.
Periodicals
14. 176
3. Jamison, Shelly, " I (ntcrnct) Do (mains) : The New Rules of Selection,'' Cul ture Critique 3, no. 5 (2009), under " Park Avenue Revisited." 14.175
Journal articles consu lted onli ne. Most people find journal articles
through a library or other bibliographic database. To facilitate discovery by other readers (and linking in publications) , information about the on line resource should be added to the end of a citation. Many of the ex amples in this section include a URL. A URL based on a DOI (appended to https://doi.org/} , ifit is available, is preferable to the URL that appears in your browser's address bar when viewing the article (or the abstract) . In the absence of a DOI, choose the form of the URL offered along with the article, if any. For articles offered online in more than one format (e.g., PDF or HTML), there is usually no need to specify which format was cited. (If an article was consulted in print, there is no need to include a URL.) 1. Frank P. Whitney, "The Six-Year High School in Cleveland," School Review 37, no. 4 (April 1929) : 268, http://www.j stor.org/stable/1078814. 2. Miriam Schocnfield, "Mc·al Vagueness Is Ontic Vagueness,'' Ethics 126, no. 2 (2016): 260-61, https://doi.o:g/10.1086/683541.
Sometimes a suitable URL will not be available. Even suggested links listed with the source may work only for subscribers or those with access to a particular libra1y. (A URL based on a DOI, on the other hand, will always direct readers to information about the source, if not full access to it.) In such cases, list the name of the commercial database rather than the URL. 3. Zina Giannopoulou, " Prisoners of Plot in Jose Saramago's The Cave," Philos ophy and Literature 38, no. 2 (2014) : 335, Project MUSE.
See also 14.6-18. 14 . 176
Access dates for journal articles. Access dates are not required by Chi
cago in citations offol"J"aally published electronic sources, for the reasons discussed in 14.12. Some publishers and some disciplines, however, may require them. When they are included, they should immediately precede the URL (or database information) , separated from the surrounding cita tion by commas in a note and periods in a bibliography entry. 1. Charlotte F. Narr and Amy C. Krist, "Host Diet Alters Trematode Replica tion and Elemental Composition,'' Freshwater Science 34, no. 1 (March 2015) : 81, accessed August 1, 2017, https://doi.org/10.1086/679411. 3. Narr and Krist, " Host Diet," 88-89.
14.177
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Narr, Charlotte F., and Amy C. Krist, "Host Diet Alters Trematode Replication and Elemental Composition." Freshwater Science 34, no. 1 (March 2015) : 8191. Accessed August 1, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1086/679411. 14.177
Article page numbers in relation to volume or issue num bers. When page numbers immediately follow a volume number, separated only by a colon (as in a shortened citation; see 14.185), no space follows the colon. But when parenthetical information intervenes, a space follows the colon. (This rule applies to other types of volumes as well; see, e.g., 14.116.)
When, as occasionally happens, the page number follows an issue num ber, a comma-not a colon-should be used. Diogenes, no. 25, 84-117. 14 . 178
Jou rnal special issues. A journal issue (occasionally a double issue) de voted to a single theme is known as a special issue. It carries the normal volume and issue number (or numbers if a double issue) . Such an issue may have an editor and a title of its own. An article within the issue is cited as in the first example; a special issue as a whole may be cited as in the second example.
1. Miwako Tezuka, "Jikken Kobo and Takiguchi Shiizo: The New Deal Collec tivism of 1950s Japan," in "Collectivism in Twentieth-Century Japanese Art," ed. Reiko Tomii and Midori Yoshimoto, special issue, Positions: Asia Critique 21, no. 2 (Spring 2013): 351-81, https://doi.org/10.1215/10679847-2018283. Tomii, Reiko, and Midori Yoshimoto, eds. "Collectivism in Twentieth-Century Japanese Art." Special issue, Positions: Asia Critique 21, no. 2 (Spring 2013) . 14.179
Jou rnal supplements. A journal supplement, unlike a special issue (see
14.178) , is numbered separately from the regular issues of the journal. Like a special issue, however, it may have a title and author or editor of its own. Agha, Asif. "Tropes of Branding in Forms of Life." In "The Semiotic Corpora tion," edited by Kyung-Nan Koh and Greg Urban. Supplement, Signs and Soci ety 3, no. Sl (2015) : S174-94. https://doi.org/10.1086/679004.
Periodicals 14 .18 0
14 . 1 8 3
Articles published in installments. Articles published in parts over two
or more issues may be listed separately or in the same entry, depending on whether the part or the whole is cited. 1. George C. Brown, ed., "A Swedish Traveler in Early Wisconsin: The Ob servations of Fredrika Bremer," pt. 1, Wisconsin Magazine ofHistory 61 (Summer 1978) : 312. 2. Brown, "Swedish Traveler," pt. 2, Wisconsin Magazine ofHistory 62 (Autumn 1978) : 50. Brown, George C., ed. "A Swedish Traveler in Early Wisconsin: The Observations of Fredrika Bremer." Pts. 1 and 2. Wisconsin Magazine ofHistory 61 (Summer 1978) : 300-318; 62 (Autumn 1978) : 41-56. 14. 1 8 1
Article appearing in two publications. Chapters in books have some times begun their lives as journal articles, or vice versa. Revisions are of ten made along the way. The version actually consulted should be cited in a note or text citation, but annotation such as the following, if of spe cific interest to readers, may follow the citation. See also 14.54.
Previously published as "Article Title," Journal Title 20, no. 3 (2016) : 345-62. A slightly revised version appears in Book Title, ed. E. Editor (Place: Publisher, 2017) , 15-30. 14. 1 8 2
Place where journal is published. If a journal might be confused with
another with a similar title, or if it might not be known to the users of a bibliography, add the name of the place or institution where it is pub lished in parentheses after the journal title. 1. Diane-Dinh Kim Luu, "Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage ofthe 'Morn ing After' Pill,'' Lost in Thought: Undergraduate Research Journal (Indiana Univer sity South Bend) 2 (1999) : 65-70. Garrett, Marvin P. "Language and Design in Pippa Passes." Victorian Poetry (West Virginia University) 13, no. 1 (1975) : 47-60. 14. 1 8 3
Translated or edited article. A translated or edited article follows essen
tially the same style as a translated or edited book (see 14.104) . 1 . Arthur Q. Author, "Article Title,'' trans. Tim Z . Translator, Journal Title . . . Author, Arthur Q. "Article Title." Edited by Edward A. Editor. Journal Title . . .
14.184
14.184
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
New series for journal vol umes. New series in journa! volumes are iden tified by n.s. (new series) , 2nd ser. , and so forth, as they are for books (see 14.126) . Note the comma between the series identifier and the volume number.
1. "Letter of Jonathan Sewall," Proceedings ofthe Massachusetts Historical Soci ety, 2nd ser., 10 (January 1896): 414. Moraes, G. M. "St. Francis Xavier, Apostolic Nuncio, 1542-52." journal ofthe Bom bay Branch ofthe Royal Asiatic Society, n.s., 26 (1950) : 279-313. 14. 18 5
Short titles for articles. In subsequent references to journal articles, the
author's last. name and the main title of the article (often shortened) are most commonly used. In the absence of a full bibliography, however, the journal title, volume number, and page number(s) may prove more help ful guides to the source. 1. Daniel Rosenblum, "Unintended Consequences of Women's Inheritance Rights on Female Mortality in India," Economic Development and Cultural Change 63, no. 2 (January 2015) : 223, https://doi.org/10.1086/679059. 2. Rosenblum, "Female Mortality in India," 225. or 3. Rosenblum, Economic Development and Cultural Change 63:225.
The page numbering for Economic Development and Cultural Change is continuous throughout a single volume. Where that is not the case, the short form should include the issue number in addition to the volume number (i.e., " 63 (2) : 225"). 14.186
Abstracts. An abstract is treated like a journal article, but the word ab stract must be added.
Matute, Daniel R. "Noisy Neighbors Can Hamper the Evolution of Reproductive Isolation by Reinforcing Selection." Abstract. American Naturalist 185, no. 2 (February 2015): 253-69. https://doi.org/10.1086/679504. 14.187
Electronic supplements or enhancements to journal articles. Compo nents of journal articles with a printed counterpart that are offered only online-including supplementary data or supporting information, some times also referred to as enhancements-can usually be cited according to how they are referred to in the journal. File formats for multimedia content should be indicated if relevant.
Periodicals
14. 1 8 8
1. . "Ghost Dancing Music," Naraya no. 2, MP3 audio, cited in Richard W. Stoffle et al., "Ghost Dancing the Grand Canyon," Current Anthropology 41, no. 1 (2000), https://doi.org/10.1086/300101. 2. Gemma L. Cole and John A. Endler, "Variable Environmental Effects on a Multicomponent Sexually Selected Trait," American Naturalist 185, no. 4 (April 2015) : table A.3 (online only), https://doi.org/10.1086/680022. 3. M. Suarez-Rodriguez and C. Macias Garcia, "There Is No Such a Thing as a Free Cigarette: Lining Nests with Discarded Butts Brings Short-Term Benefits, but Causes Toxic Damage," journal ofEvolutionary Biology 27, no. 12 (December 2014) : 2719-26, https://doi.org/10.1111/jeb.12531, data deposited at Dryad Digi tal Repository, https://doi.org/10.5061/dryad.4t5rt. Song, Aiping, Linxiao Wang, Sumei Chen, Jiafu Jiang, Zhiyong Guan, Peiling Li, and Fadi Chen. Target gene sequences (file name: "Dataset Sl.seq") . In "Iden tification of Nitrogen Starvation-Responsive MicroRNAs in Chrysanthemum nankingense." Plant Physiology and Biochemistry 91 (June 2015) : 41-48. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.plaphy.2015.04.003.
See also 14.159, 14.257, 14.261-68.
Magazines 14 .188
Basic citation format for magazine articles. Many of the guidelines for citing journals apply to magazines also (and see 14.166) . Titles of maga zine articles are treated like titles of journal articles: they are capitalized headline-style, set in roman, and placed in quotation marks (see 14.169) ; as with the titles of journals, an initial The in the title of the magazine is usually dropped, and the title is set in italics (see 14.170) . Weekly or monthly (or bimonthly) magazines, even if numbered by volume and is sue, are usually cited by date only. The date, being an essential element in the citation, is not enclosed in parentheses. While a specific page num ber may be cited in a note, the inclusive page numbers of an article may be omitted, since they are often widely separated by extraneous mate rial. When page numbers are included, a comma rather than a colon sep arates them from the date of issue.
1. Beth Saulnier, "From Vine to Wine," Cornell Alumni Magazine, September/ October 2008, 48. 2. Jill Lepore, "The Man Who Broke the Music Business," New Yorker, April 27, 2015, 59.
14 . 1 8 9
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Walker, Mandy. "Secrets t o Stress-Free Flying." Consumer Reports, October 2016.
See also 14.190 and the guidelines for newspapers (14.191-99) . 14. 189
Magazine articles consulted on line. For magazine articles consulted on line, include a URL at the end of a citation or, ifno suitable URL is avail able, the name of the database (see also 14.175) . Specific page numbers usually will not be available but may be cited if they are (see also 14.22) . See also 14.6-18.
1. Karl Vick, "Cuba on the Cusp," Time, March 26, 2015, http://time.com /3759629/cuba-us-policy/. 2. Henry William Hanemann, "French as She Is Now Spoken," Life, August 26, 1926, 5, ProQuest.
Magazine articles offered for download using a specific app should cite the name of the application or device used to acquire or read the article. 3. Adam Gopnik, "Trollope Trending," New Yorker (iPhone app), May 4, 2015. 14. 1 9 0
Magazine departments. Titles of regular departments in a magazine are capitalized headline-style but not put in quotation marks.
1. Patricia Marx, "Big Skyline," Talk of the Town, New Yorker, April 27, 2015, http://www.newyorker.com/magazine/2015/04/27/big-skyline. 2. Debra Klein, Focus on Travel, Newsweek, April 17, 2000. Wallraff, Ba_rbara. Word Fugitives. Atlantic Monthly, July/August 2008.
A department without a named author is best cited by the title of the magazine. Gourmet. Kitchen Notebook. May 2000.
Newspapers 14.191
Basic citation format for newspaper articles. The name of the author
(if known) and the headline or column heading in a daily newspaper are cited much like the corresponding elements in magazines (see 14.18890). The month (often abbreviated) , day, and year are the indispensable elements. Because a newspaper's issue of any given day may include sev� eral editions, and items may be moved or eliminated in various editions,
Periodicals
14 . 1 9 2
page numbers may usually be omitted (for an example of a page number in a citation, see 14.197) . In a note or bibliographic entry, it may be useful to add "final edition," "Midwest edition," or some such identifier. If the paper is published in several sections, the section number (e.g., sec. 1) or title (e.g., Nation) may be given. To cite an article consulted online, include the URL or, if no suitable URL is available, the name of the data base (see also 14.175) . 1. Editorial, Philadelphia Inquirer, July 30, 1990. 2. Mike Royko, "Next Time, Dan, Take Aim at Arnold," Chicago Tribune, Sep tember 23, 1992. 3. Christopher Lehmann-Haupt, "Robert Giroux, Editor, Publisher and Nur turer of Literary Giants, Is Dead at 94," New York Times, September 6, 2008, New York edition. 4. "Pushcarts Evolve to Trendy Kiosks," Lake Forester (Lake Forest, IL), March 23, 2000. 5. David G. Savage, "Stanford Student Goes to Supreme Court to Fight for Her Moms," Los Angeles Times, April 27, 2015, Nation, http://www.latimes.com/nation /la-na-gay-marriage-children-20150424-story.html. 6. John Myers, "Invasive Faucet Snails Confirmed in Twin Ports Harbor," Du luth (MN) News-Tribune, September 26, 2014, EBSCOhost.
Because news sites may update certain stories as they unfold, it may be appropriate to include a time stamp for an article that includes one. List the time as posted with the article; if the time zone is not included, it may need to be determined from context (e.g., EST in the example be low) . A copy ofthe article should be retained as cited (see 14.15) . See also 10.41. 7. Jason Samenow, "Blizzard Warning: High Winds, About Two Feet of Snow Forecast for D.C. Arca," Washington Post, January 21, 2016, 3:55 p.m. EST, https:// www.washingtonpost.com/news/capital-weather-gang/wp/20 1 6/0l/2 1/bliz zard-warning-high-winds-around-two-feet-of-snow-forecast-for-d-c-area/.
For biogs, which are cited similarly to online newspapers, see 14.205-10. 14 .192
Newspaper head li nes. Since headlines are often grammatical sentences, sentence-style capitalization is preferred in the headlines of many news papers. In source citations, however, Chicago recommends headline style for citing headlines in notes and bibliographies for the sake of con sistency with other titles. See also 8.158, 8.159.
"Justices Limit Visiting Rights of Grandparents in Divided Case"
14 . 1 9 3
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
Headlines presented entirely i n full capitals i n the original are usually converted to upper- and lowercase in a citation (but see 7.52) . 14 .193
The is omitted from the title of a news paper (see 8.170) . A city name, if not part of the title of a local news paper, should be added. The name of the state or, in the case of Canada, province may be added in parentheses if needed (usually in abbre viated form; see 10.27, 10.28) . In some cases, the city or state can be added and italicized as part of the official title; if in doubt, add the infor mation, in parentheses and roman type, after the italicized title of the newspaper. Titles of newspapers. An initial
Chicago Tribune Guardian (Manchester) Hackensack (NJ) Record Oregonian (Portland, OR)
Ottawa (IL) Daily Times Saint Paul (Alberta or AB) journal Times (London)
For such well-known national papers as the Wall Street Journal or the Christian Science Monitor, no city name is added. In some cases, how ever, a newspaper will need to be identified by nation. Times (UK) Guardian (UK edition) Guardian (US edition) but International New York Times 14. 194
Non-English titl!!s of newspapers. Names of cities not part of the titles of newspapers published in languages other than English may be added in roman and parentheses after the title (see also 14.131) . An initial The, omitted for English-language papers, is retained in titles ofnon-English language papers ifthe article is part of the title (see 14.98) . Titles ofnews papers are treated in many languages more like the names ofinstitutions than like the titles of books and other works; in general, the capitalization of the source (in the masthead or elsewhere) can be used. If in doubt, however, prefer sentence style (see 11.6) . (Titles in all capitals should be rendered in sentence style.)
Al-Akhbar (Beirut) Al-Akhbar (Cairo) El Pais (Madrid) Frankfurter Zeitung
Il Messaggero (Rome) La Cr6nica de Hoy (Mexico City) Mladd fronta dnes (Prague) Wen Hui Bao (Shanghai)
Periodicals 14. 1 9 5
14 . 197
Reg ular columns or featu res. Regular columns or features may carry headlines as well as column titles. Like the names of sections (see 14.191) , these should appear in roman, capitalized but without quotation marks, when they are included in a citation.
1. Marc Jaffe, "Finding Love in Seesawing Libidos," Modern Love, New York Times, March 6, 2015, http://www.nytimes.com/2015/03/08/style/finding-equilibrium-in -seesawing-libidos.html.
Editorials and the like may be described generically. 2. "Junk Science at the F.B.I.,'' editorial, New York Times, April 27, 2015, http:// .nytimes.com/2015/04/27/opinion/junk-science-at-the-fbi.html.
www
14. 1 9 6
Letters t o t h e editor a n d readers' com ments. Published letters to the editor, like editorials (see 14.195) , are treated generically, usually with out headlines.
1. John Q. Public, letter to the editor, Los Angeles Times, September 7, 2008.
Readers' comments are treated like the comments for a blog post (see 14.208; see also 14.209) . In a note, list names as they are recorded with the comment; any other identifying information can usually be included in parentheses. A direct link to the comment may be included if avail able; otherwise, link to the article. Replies can be cited in reference to the cited comment, using a short form for the latter (with the help of a cross-reference to the relevant note, if necessary; see 14.31). 2. Chris (California) , April 29, 2015, comment on Sheryl Gay Stolberg and Richard Perez-Pena, "Baltimore Police Cite Presence of Minors in Defending Response to Unrest," New York Times, April 28, 2015, http://www.nytimes.com /2015/04/29/us/baltimore-riots.html#permid=14810877. 3. Lizzy (St. Louis, MO), reply to Chris, April 29, 2015. 14 .197
Weekend supplements, magazines, and the like. Articles from Sunday
supplements or other special sections are treated in the same way as magazine articles-that is, cited by date. They are usually dealt with in notes or parenthetical references rather than in bibliographies. Citations of print editions may include a specific page reference (see 14.188) . 1. Rachel Kaadzi Ghansah, "What Toni Morrison Saw," New York Times Maga zine, April 12, 2015, 48.
14 . 1 9 8
14. 1 9 8
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
Citing a newspaper article in text rather than in a bibliography. News papers are more commonly cited in notes or parenthetical references than in bibliographies. A list of works cited need not list newspaper items if these have been documented in the text. No corresponding entry in a bibliography would be needed for the following citation (nor would it be necessary in such a case to include information about edition or, for an article consulted online, a URL) :
The New York Times, in advance of the 2015 NFL season, published a report that the Green Bay Packers would host the Chicago Bears on Thanksgiving Evening, "a renewal of the N.F.L.'s longest-running rivalry," during which the Packers were planning to retire Brett Favre's jersey (" Patriots-Steelers to Open N.F.L. Season,'' Associated Press, April 22, 2015) . Favre, a three-time NFL MVP, is mentioned without further attribution.
If a bibliography entry were needed, it would appear as follows (see also 14.200): Associated Press. " Patriots-Steelers to Open N.F.L. Season." New York Times, April 22, 2015. http://www.nytimes.com/2015/04/22/sports/football/patriots -steelers-to-open-nfl-season.html. 14.199
U nsig ned newspaper articles. Unsigned newspaper articles or features
are best dealt with in text or notes. But if a bibliography entry should be needed, the title of the newspaper stands in place of the author. 1. "In Texas, Ad Heats Up Race for Governor," New York Times, July 30, 2002.
New York Times. "In Texas, Ad Heats Up Race for Governor.'' July 30, 2002. 14. 2 0 0
News services a n d news releases. Names o f news services, unlike titles of newspapers, are capitalized but not italicized.
the Associated Press (AP) United Press International (UPI) 1. Associated Press, "Texas A&M Galveston Professor Fails Entire Class, Quits Course," Dallas Morning News, April 28, 2015, http://www. dallasnews.com/news /education/headlines/20150428 -texas-am-galveston-profe ssor-fails-entire -class-quits-course.ece.
A news release (also called a press release) is treated similarly.
Periodicals
14. 2 0 3
2. Federal Emergency Management Agency, "FEMA Awards $2,781,435 Grant to DuPage County," news release no. RV-NR-2015-006, March 19, 2015, https:// www.fema.gov/news-release/2015/03/19/fema-awards-2781435-grant-dupage -county.
Reviews 14. 2 0 1
Basic citation format for reviews. I n citations o f reviews o f publica tions, performances, and the like, the elements are given in the following order:
1. Name of reviewer ifthe review is signed 2. Title of the review, if any (a headline should be included only if needed for locating the review) 3. The words review of, followed by the name of the work reviewed and its author (or composer, or director, or whomever) or sponsor (network, studio, label, etc.) 4. Location and date (in the case of a performance) 5. The listing of the periodical in which the review appeared
If a review is included in a bibliography, it is alphabetized by the name of the reviewer or, ifunattributed, by the title of the periodical (see 14.204) . 14. 2 0 2
Book reviews. Cite book reviews by author of the review and include book title and author(s) or editor(s) . Follow applicable guidelines for cit ing periodicals.
1. Ben Ratliff, review of The Mystery of Samba: Popular Music and National Identity in Brazil, by Hermano Vianna, ed. and trans. John Charles Chasteen, Lin gua Franca 9 (April 1999): Bl3-B14. 2. David Kamp, "Deconstructing Dinner," review of The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History ofFour Meals, by Michael Pollan, New York Times, April 23, 2006, Sunday Book Review, http://www.nytimes.com/2006/04/23/books/review/23 kamp.html. Brehm, William C. Review of Strike for America: Chicago Teachers against Aus terity, by Micah Uetricht. Comparative Education Review 59, no. 1 (February 2015) : 177-79. https://doi.org/10.1086/679296. 14. 2 0 3
Reviews o f plays, movies, television prog rams, concerts, a n d t h e l i ke.
Reviews of plays, concerts, movies, and the like may include the name of
14. 2 0 4
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
a director i n addition t o any author, producer, sponsor, o r performer, as applicable. 1. Ben Brantley, review of Our Lady ofSligo, by Sebastian Barry, directed by Max Stafford-Clark, Irish Repertory Theater, New York, New York Times, April 21, 2000, Weekend section. 2. Emily Nussbaum, "Button-Pusher," review of Black Mirror, Channel 4 (UK) , created by Charlie Brooker, New Yorker, January 5, 2015, http://www.newyorker , .com/magazine/2015/01/05/button-pusher. 3. Manohla Dargis, "She's the Droid of His Dreams," review of Ex Machina, directed by Alex Garland, New York Times, April 10, 2015, New York edition. 4. Nussbaum, review of Black Mirror. Kozinn, Allan. Review of concert performance by Timothy Fain (violin) and Ste ven Beck (piano) , 92nd Street Y, New York. New York Times, April 21, 2000, Weekend section. 14. 2 0 4
Unsigned reviews. Unsigned reviews are treated similarly to unsigned articles (see 14.199) . If such a review must appear in the bibliography, it is listed under the title of the periodical.
1. Unsigned review of Geschichten der romanischen und germanischen Volker, by Leopold von Ranke, Ergiinzungsbliitter zur Allgemeinen Literatur-Zeitung, February 1828, nos. 23-24.
Ergiinzungsbliitter zur Allgemeinen Literatur-Zeitung. Unsigned review of Geschich ten der romanischen und germanischen Volker, by Leopold von Ranke. February 1828, nos. 23-24.,
Websites, Biogs, and Social Media 14 . 2 0 5
Websites, biogs, a n d social media defined. For the purposes of this dis
cussion, website refers to the collection of pages (web pages) made publicly available via the internet at a specific location on the World Wide Web by an individual or an organization. A blog (from weblog) is a web-based forum that consists of posted entries organized by date or topic (and often also titled or signed, or both) and usually accompanied by read ers' comments. Social media (or social networking) refers to any internet based forum for public communication shared by means of a dedicated platform or service. A website can host or consist of a blog or social me dia content, and biogs overlap with social media (not to mention online periodicals) , blurring the distinctions between the terms. All three can
Websites, Biogs, and Social Media
14 . 2 0 7
include multimedia content (see 14.267-68) . Social media can also con sist of privately shared content, which is normally cited like other forms of personal communication (see 14.2 14) . 14. 2 0 6
Titles for websites, biogs, and social media. Titles o f websites are gen
erally set in roman without quotation marks and capitalized headline style. In a departure from the recommendations in the previous edition, the title of a website that is analogous to a traditionally printed work but does not have (and never had) a printed counterpart can be treated like the titles of other websites, subject to editorial discretion. For example, Wikipedia can be treated as a website rather than as a conventional en cyclopedia, with roman rather than italics for the title. (When in doubt, opt for roman.) Titled sections or pages of a website are usually placed in quotation marks. The titles of biogs-like those of journals and other periodicals-can usually be set in italics; titles of blog posts (analogous to articles in a periodical) are placed in quotation marks. (The distinction between a blog and a website is often unclear; when in doubt, treat the title like that of a website.) Many websites do not have titles per se; these can be identified in terms of the entity responsible for the site (and cited accordingly) . For additional examples, see 8.191-92. the website for the University of Chicago; the "Alumni & Friends" page the website of the New York Times; the New York Times online The Chicago Manual ofStyle Online; "Chicago Style Q&A" Wikipedia; Wikipedia's "Let It Be" entry; Wikipedia's entry on the Beatles' album Let It Be Google; Google Maps; the "Google Maps Help Center" Dot Earth (blog) ; "Can Future Global Warming Matter Today?," by Andrew C. Revkin, posted August 23, 2016
Social media content is usually untitled. If needed for the purposes of citation, the text of a post itself (either in part or as a whole) can stand in as title. For examples, see 14.209. 14 . 2 0 7
Citing web pages a n d websites. To cite original website content other than the types of formally published sources discussed elsewhere in this chapter, include as much of the following as can be determined: the title or description of the specific page (if cited) ; the title or description of the site as a whole (see 14.206) ; the owner or sponsor of the site; and a URL. The word website (or web page) may be added (in parentheses) after the title or description of the site if the nature of the source may otherwise be unclear. Also include a publication date or date of revision or modifi cation (see 14.13) ; if no such date can be determined, include an access
14. 2 0 8
NOTES AND BIBLIO G RAPHY
date (see 14.12) . For frequently updated resources, a time stamp may b e included (as i n the Wikipedia example, which records the time a s i t was listed with the source; see also 9.39) . Citations of website content can of ten be limited to the notes; in works with no notes, they may be included in the bibliography (cited by the owner or sponsor of the site) . 1. "Apps for Office Sample Pack," Office Dev Center, Microsoft Corporation, updated October 20, 2015, https://code.msdn.microsoft.com/office/Apps-for -Office-code-d04762b7. 2. "Privacy Policy," Privacy & Terms, Google, last modified March 25, 2016, http://www. google.com/policies/privacy/. 3. "Balkan Romani," Endangered Languages, Alliance for Linguistic Diversity, accessed April 6, 2016, http://www. endangeredlanguages.com/lang/5342. 4. "Wikipedia: Manual of Style," Wikimedia Foundation, last modified April 7, 2016, 23:58, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Manual_of_Style. 5. City oflthaca, New York (website) , CivicPlus Content Management System, accessed April 6, 2016, http://www.cityofithaca.org/. Microsoft Corporation. "Apps for Office Sample Pack." Office Dev Center. Up dated October 20, 2015. https://code.msdn.microsoft.com/office/Apps-for -Office-code-d04762b7.
If a site ceases to exist before publication, or if the information cited is modified or deleted, this information should be included in the text or note. As of April 1, 2015, the city was forecasting a completion date of "late summer [2015] " for the renoyations (a projection that had been removed from the city's website by July 15, 2015) . 6. "Biography," on Pete Townshend's official website, accessed December 15, 2001, http://www.petetownshend.co.uk/petet_bio.html (site discontinued) .
Such dates, together with the URL, give interested readers a chance to find the information through the Internet Archive or other means. At the same time, authors should retain a copy of any source that is likely to change or disappear (see 14.15) . 14. 2 0 8
Citing blog posts a n d biogs. Blog posts are cited like online newspaper
articles (see 14.191-200) . Citations include the author of the post; the title of the post, in quotation marks; the title of the blog, in italics (see 14.206); the date of the post; and a URL. The word blog may be added (in
Websites, Biogs, and Social Media
14 . 2 0 8
parentheses) after the title of the blog (unless the word blog is part of the title) . Blogs that are part of a larger publication should also include the name of that publication. Citations of blog posts, like those of newspaper articles, can often be relegated to the text or notes (see also 14.198) ; if a bibliography entry is needed, it should be listed under the author of the post. 1. Deb Amlen, "One Who Gives a Hoot," Wordplay (blog) , New York Times, Jan uary 26, 2015, http://wordplay.blogs.nytimes.com/2015/0l/26/one-who-gives-a -hoot/. 2. William Germano, "Futurist Shock,'' Lingua Franca (blog), Chronicle ofHigher Education, February 15, 2017, http://www.chronicle.com/blogs/linguafranca/2017 /02/15/futurist-shock/. Germano, William. "Futurist Shock." Lingua Franca (blog) . Chronicle of Higher Education, February 15, 2017. http://www. chronicle.com/blogs/linguafranca /2017/02/15/futurist-shock/.
If it is necessary to cite an entire blog, list it in a bibliography under the name of the editor (if any) or the title of the blog. Amlen, Deb, ed. Wordplay (blog) . New York Times. http://wordplay.blogs.nytimes .com/. Lingua Franca (blog). The Chronicle ofHigher Education. http://www.chronicle.com /blogs/linguafranca/.
Comments can usually be cited in the text, in reference to the related post. If the comment is cited in a note, list the name of the commenter and the date of the comment, followed by the information for the related post. Use a shortened form to refer to a post that has been fully cited else where (see 14.29-36) . A URL for the comment is usually unnecessary but may be listed if available. For obviously fictitious names, there is usually no need to add pseud. (if known, the identity can be given in the text or in the citation, following the screen name in square brackets; see 14.80) . A name in all lowercase can usually be capitalized (see 8.4) . 3. Viv (Jerusalem, Isr.) , January 27, 2015, comment on Amlen, "Hoot." 4. Jim, February 16, 2017, comment on Germano, "Futurist Shock," http:// www.chronicle.com/blogs/linguafranca/2017/02/15/futurist-shock/#comment -3158909472. 5. Stephanos C, February 21, 2017, reply to Jim, http://www.chronicle.com /blogs/linguafranca/2017/02/15/futurist-shock/#comment-3167173570.
14. 2 0 9
14 . 2 0 9
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
Citing social media content. Cite publicly available content shared via
social media according to the general guidelines and examples in this paragraph. Private content, including direct messages, is considered a form of personal communication and should be cited as described in 14.214. For a citation in a note or bibliography entry, include the follow ing elements: 1. The author of the post. List the real name (ofthe person, group, or institution), if known, followed by a screen name, if any, in parentheses. If only a screen name is known, use the screen name in place of the author's name. 2. In place of a title, the text of the post. Quote as much as the first 160 charac ters, including spaces (the maximum length of a typical text message) , capi talized as in the original. (If the post has been quoted in the text, it need not be repeated in a note.) 3. The type of post. List the name of the social media service and include a de scription if relevant (photo, video, etc.) . 4. The date, including month, day, and year. Time stamps are usually unneces sary but may be included to differentiate a post or comment from others on the same day. 5. A URL. A URL for a specific item can often be found via the date stamp.
Comments are cited in reference to the related post, in a shortened form if fully cited elsewhere (see 14.29-36) . A URL for the comment itself is optional but may be added if available. See also 14.208. Citations of social media content can often be limited to the text, as in the first ex ample; if it is important to provide a link, include a note. A frequently cited account or an extensive thread related to a single subject or post may be included in a bibliography. Conan O'Brien's tweet was characteristically deadpan: "In honor of Earth Day, I'm recycling my tweets" (@ConanOBrien, April 22, 2015) . 1. Junot Diaz, "Always surprises my students when I tell them that the 'real' medieval was more diverse than the fake ones most of us consume," Facebook, February 24, 2016, https://www. facebook.com/junotdiaz.writer/posts/9724955 72815454. 2. Conan O'Brien (@ConanOBrien) , "In honor of Earth Day, I'm recycling my tweets," Twitter, April 22, 2015, 11:10 a.m., https://twitter.com/ConanOBrien /status/590940792967016448. 3. Chicago Manual of Style, "Is the world ready for singular they? We thought so back in 1993," Facebook, April 17, 2015, https://www.facebook.com/Chicago Manual/posts/10152906193679151. 4. Pete Souza (@petesouza) , "President Obama bids farewell to President Xi
Interviews and Personal Communications
14 . 2 11
of China at the conclusion of the Nuclear Security Summit," Instagram photo, April 1, 2016, https://www.instagram.com/p/BDrmfXTtNCt/. 5. Kristaps Licis, "But what is the surprise here?," February 24, 2016, comment on Diaz, "Always surprises," https://www. facebook.com/junotdiaz.writer/posts /972495572815454?comment id=972558569475821. 6. Michele Truty, "We do need a gender-neutral pronoun," April 17, 2015, com ment on Chicago Manual of Style, "singular they," https://www. facebook.com /ChicagoManual/posts/10152906193679151?comment_id=10152906356479151. 7. Souza, "President Obama." Chicago Manual ofStyle. "Is the world ready for singular they? We thought so back in 1993." Facebook, April 17, 2015. https://www.facebook.com/ChicagoManual /posts/10152906193679151.
Because social media content is subject to editing and deletion, authors are advised to retain a copy of anything they cite (see 14.15) . For addi tional considerations, see 14.6-18. 14. 2 10
Electronic mailing lists and forums. Content posted to electronic mail ing lists or forums can be cited much like other types of social media (see 14.209) . Include the name of the correspondent, the title of the subject or thread (in quotation marks and capitalized as in the original) , the title of the list or forum (followed by list or forum or the like, if not part of the title) , the title of any host site (see also 14.206), the date of the message or post, and a URL. (Posts on private forums or lists can be cited like per sonal communications; see 14.2 14.)
1. John Powell, " Pattern matching," Grapevine digest mailing list archives, Electric Editors, April 23, 1998, http://www.electriceditors.net/grapevine/archives .php. 2. Caroline Braun, reply to " How did the 'cool kids' from high school turn out?," Quora, August 9, 2016, https://www.quora.com/How-did-the-cool-kids -from-high-school-tum-out/.
Interviews and Personal Communications 14. 2 1 1
Unpublished interviews. Unpublished interviews are best cited in text or in notes, though they occasionally appear in bibliographies. Citations should include the names of both the person interviewed and the inter viewer; brief identifying information, if appropriate; the place or date of the interview (or both, if known) ; and, if a transcript or recording is
14 . 2 12
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
available, where i t may b e found. Permission t o quote may b e needed; see chapter 4. 1. Andrew Macmillan (principal adviser, Investment Center Division, FAO), in discussion with the author, September 1998. 2. Benjamin Spock, interview by Milton J. E. Senn, November 20, 1974, inter view 67A, transcript, Senn Oral History Collection, National Library of Medicine, Bethesda, MD. 3. Macmillan, discussion; Spock, interview. 14. 2 1 2
U nattributed i nterviews. An interview with a person who prefers to remain anonymous or whose name the author does not wish to reveal may be cited in whatever form is appropriate in context. The absence of a name should be explained (e.g., "All interviews were conducted in confidentiality, and the names of interviewees are withheld by mutual agreement").
1. Interview with health-care worker, July 31, 2017. 14. 213
Published or broadcast interviews. An interview that has been pub lished or broadcast or made available online can usually be treated like an article or other item in a periodical. Interviews consulted online should include a URL or similar identifier (see 14.6-18) . See also 14.264, 14.267.
1. Lydia Davis, "The Art of Fiction No. 227," interview by Andrea Aguilar and Johanne Fronth-Nygren, Paris Review, no. 212 (Spring 2015) : 172, EBSCOhost. 2. McGeorge Bundy, interview by Robert MacNeil, MacNeil/Lehrer NewsHour, PBS, February ?, 1990. 3. Russell Crowe, interview by Charlie Rose, Charlie Rose, April 23, 2015, http:// www.charlierose.com/watch/60551640. Bellour, Raymond. "Alternation, Segmentation, Hypnosis: Interview with Ray mond Bellour." By Janet Bergstrom. Camera Obscura, nos. 3-4 (Summer 1979) : 89-94. 14. 2 14
Personal communications. References to conversations (whether face to-face or by telephone) or to letters, email or text messages, or direct or private messages shared through social media and received by the author are usually run in to the text or given in a note. They are rarely listed in a bibliography. Most such information can be referred to simply as a conversation, message, or the like; the medium may be mentioned if relevant.
Papers, Contracts, and Reports
14.216
In a conversation with the author on January 6, 2009, lobbyist John Q. Advocate admitted that . . . Though inconclusive, a fifteen-second video shared with the author via Instagram by the subject's family did suggest significant dementia. 1. Jane E. Correspondent, email message to author, April 23, 2017. 2. Face book direct message to author, April 30, 2017.
An email address or the like belonging to an individual should be omit ted. Should it be needed in a specific context, it must be cited only with the permission of its owner. See also 13.3.
Papers, Contracts, and Reports 14. 2 1 5
Theses a n d dissertations. Titles of theses and dissertations appear in
quotation marks-not in italics; otherwise, they are cited like books. The kind of thesis, the academic institution, and the date follow the title. Like the publication data of a book, these are enclosed in parentheses in a note but not in a bibliography. If the document was consulted online, in clude a URL or, for documents retrieved from a commercial database, the name of the database and, in parentheses, any identification number supplied or recommended by the database. For dissertations issued on microfilm, see 14.115. To cite an abstract (as in the notes) , simply add the word "abstract" after the title (see also 14.186) . 1. Ilya Vedrashko, "Advertising in Computer Games" (master's thesis, MIT, 2006) , 59, http://hdl.handle.net/1721.1/39144. 2. Melanie Subacus, "Duae Patriae: Cicero and Political Cosmopolitanism in Rome," abstract (PhD diss., New York University, 2015) , v, http://pqdtopen.pro quest.com/pubnum/3685917.html. 3. Vedrashko, "Advertising in Computer Games," 61-62. Choi, Mihwa. "Contesting Imaginaires in Death Rituals during the Northern Song Dynasty." PhD diss., University of Chicago, 2008. ProQuest (AAT 3300426) . 14. 2 1 6
Unpublished manuscripts. Titles of unpublished manuscripts, like the titles of other unpublished works, appear in quotation marks. (For man uscripts under contract but not yet published, see 14.146.) Include the words unpublished manuscript and the date of the version consulted, if known; for electronic files, a last-saved or last-modified date may be ap propriate. End the citation with an indication of format.
14.217
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
1. Lane Redburn, "Touch-Sensitive Interiors: A Behavioral Analysis" (unpub lished manuscript, May 5, 2017) , LaTeX and GIF files. Balderdash, Pat. "Presbyopia and Screen Size: A Relational Analysis." Unpub lished manuscript, last modified May 5, 2017. Microsoft Word file. 14. 2 17
Lectu res and papers or posters presented at meetings. The sponsor
ship, location, and date of the meeting at which a speech was given or a paper, slides, or poster presented follow the title. This information is put in parentheses in a note but not in a bibliography. If the information is available online, include a URL. 1. David G. Harper, "The Several Discoveries of the Ciliary Muscle" (Power Point presentation, 25th Anniversary of the Cogan Ophthalmic History Society, Bethesda, MD, March 31, 2012) . 2. Viviana Hong, "Censorship i n Children's Literature during Argentina's Dirty War (1976-1983) " (lecture, University of Chicago, Chicago, IL, April 30, 2015) . Rohde, Hannah, Roger Levy, and Andrew Kehler. "Implicit Causality Biases Influence Relative Clause Attachment." Poster presented at the 21st CUNY Conference on Human Sentence Processing, Chapel Hill, NC, March 2008. http://idiom.ucsd.edu/-rlevy/papers/cuny20 08/rohde-levy-kehler-20 0 8 -cuny.pdf. Teplin, Linda A., Gary M. McClelland, Karen M. Abram, and Jason J. Washburn. "Early Violent Death in Delinquent Youth: A Prospective Longitudinal Study." Paper presented �t the Annual Meeting of the American Psychology-Law Soci ety, La Jolla, CA, March 2005.
A paper included in the published proceedings of a meeting may be treated like a chapter in a book (see 14.120) . If published in a journal, it is treated as an article (see 14.168-87) . 14 . 2 1 8
Working papers a n d t h e l i ke. Working papers and similar documents,
sometimes produced in advance of publication on a particular topic, can be treated in much the same way as a dissertation or thesis (14.215) or a lecture, paper, or other presentation (14.217) . 1. Deborah D. Lucki and Richard W. Pollay, "Content Analyses of Advertising: A Review of the Literature" (working paper, History of Advertising Archives, Fac ulty of Commerce, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, 1980).
Papers, Contracts, and Reports
14. 2 2 0
Bronfenbrenner, Kate, and Dorian Warren. "The Empirical Case for Streamlining the NLRB Certification Process: The Role of Date ofUnfair Labor Practice Oc currence." ISERP Working Papers Series 2011.01, Columbia University, New York, NY, June 2011. http://hdl.handle.net/10022/AC:P:10603.
In the second example above the term working paper is part of a formal series title, therefore capitalized (see 14.123-26) . Unless the item is avail able online, it is sometimes useful to add photocopy or otherwise indicate the form in which an unpublished document may be consulted. Alarcon, Salvador Florencio de. "Compendia de las noticias correspondientes a el real y minas San Francisco de Aziz de Rio Chico . . . de 20 de octobre [1771] ." Photocopy, Department of Geography, University of California, Berkeley.
For journal article preprints, see 14.173. 14. 2 1 9
Private contracts, wills, a n d s u c h . Private documents are occasionally cited in notes but rarely in bibliographies. More appropriately they are referred to in text (e.g., "Marcy T. Feldspar, in her will dated January 20, 1976, directed . . . ") or in notes. Capitalization is usually a matter of edi torial discretion.
1. Samuel Henshaw, will dated June 5, 1806, proved July 5, 1809, no. 46, box 70, Hampshire County Registry of Probate, Northampton, MA. 2. Agreement to teach in the Editing Program of the Graham School, Univer sity of Chicago, signed by Helolse Abelard, June 1, 2017. 14. 2 2 0
Pamphlets, reports, a n d t h e like. Pamphlets, corporate reports, bro chures, and other freestanding publications are treated essentially as books. Data on author and publisher may not fit the normal pattern, but sufficient information should be given to identify the document.
1. Hazel V. Clark, Mesopotamia: Between Two Rivers (Mesopotamia, OH: Trum bull County Historical Society, 1957) . 2. Lifestyles i n Retirement, Library Series (New York: TIAA-CREF, 1996). 3. McDonald's Corporation, 2014 Annual Report, March 2015, http://www .aboutmcdonalds.com/mcd/investors/annual_reports.html.
Material obtained through loose-leaf services can be handled similarly. 4. Standard Federal Tax Reporter, 1996 ed., vol. 4 (Chicago: Commerce Clear ing House, 1996), ,I 2,620.
14. 2 2 1
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
Manuscript Collections 14 . 2 2 1
Overview a n d additional resources. The 1987 edition of the Guide to the National Archives of the United States offers the following advice : "The most convenient citation for archives is one similar to that used for personal papers and other historical manuscripts. Full identification of most unpublished material usually requires giving the title and date of the item, series title (if applicable) , name of the collection, and name of the depository. Except for placing the cited item first [in a note] , there is no general agreement on the sequence of the remaining elements in the citation . . . . Whatever sequence is adopted, however, should be used consistently throughout the same work" (761) . This advice has been ex tended by the leaflet Citing Records in the National Archives ofthe United States (available from the National Archives and Records Administration; see bibliog. 4.5) , which includes advice on citing textual and nontextual records, including electronic records and digitized resources. Citations of collections consulted online (to date, a relative rarity for this type of material) will usually take the same form as citations of physical collec tions, aside from the addition of a URL or database name (see 14.6-18) .
14. 2 2 2
Note forms versus bibliography entries. In a note, the main element of a manuscript citation is usually a specific item (a letter, a memorandum, or whatever) and is thus cited first. In a bibliography, the main element is usually either the collection in which the specific item may be found, the author(s) of the items in the collection, or the depository for the collec tion. (Entries beginning with the name of the collection or the last name of the author-which sometimes overlap-tend to be easiest to locate in a bibliography.)
1. James Oglethorpe to the Trustees, 13 January 1733, Phillipps Collection of Egmont Manuscripts, 14200 :13, University of Georgia Library. 2. Alvin Johnson, memorandum, 1937, file 36, Horace Kallen Papers, YIVO In stitute for Jewish Research, New York. 3. Revere's Waste and Memoranda Book (vol. 1, 1761-83; vol. 2, 1783-97) , Re vere Family Papers, Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston. Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library. Kallen, Horace. Papers. YIVO Institute for Jewish Research, New York. Revere Family Papers. Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston.
Specific items are not included in a bibliography unless only one item from a collection is cited. For more examples, see 14.229, 14.230.
Manuscript Collections 14 . 2 2 3
14. 2 2 8
Specific versus generic titles for manuscript col lections. In notes and
bibliographies, quotation marks are used only for specific titles (e.g., "Canoeing through Northern Minnesota"), but not for generic names such as report or minutes. Generic names of this kind are capitalized if part of a formal heading actually appearing on the manuscript, lower cased if merely descriptive. Compare 14.229, example notes 7-10. 14.224
Dates for manuscript collections. Names of months may be spelled out or abbreviated, as long as done consistently (see 10.39) . If there are many references to specific dates, as in a collection of letters or diaries, the day-month-year form (8 May 1945) , used in some of the examples below, will reduce clutter, though the American month-day-year style used throughout this manual may be preferred instead (May 8, 1945) . See also 6.38, 9.31.
14. 2 2 5
Folios, page num bers, a n d such for manuscript collections. Older man uscripts are usually numbered by signatures only or by leaves (sometimes called folios) rather than by page (see 14.154, 14.155) . More recent ones usually carry page numbers (and some older manuscripts have been pag inated in the modern era) ; if needed, the abbreviations p. and pp. should be used to avoid ambiguity. Leaves introduced at the beginning or end of a manuscript when rebound (e.g., by a modern library or publisher) are not usually counted in the numbering. Some manuscript collections have identifying series or file numbers, which may be included in a citation.
14 . 2 2 6
"Papers" a n d "manuscripts." In titles of manuscript collections, the terms papers and manuscripts are synonymous. Both are acceptable, as are the abbreviations MS and (pl.) MSS. If it is necessary to distinguish a typescript or computer printout from a handwritten document, the ab breviation TS may be used. See also 10.42.
14. 2 2 7
Location o f depositories. The location (city and state) of such well known depositories as major university libraries is rarely necessary (see examples in 14.229) .
University of Chicago Library 14. 2 2 8
Oberlin College Library
Collections o f letters a n d t h e like. A note citation of a letter starts with the name of the letter writer, followed by to, followed by the name of the recipient. Given names may be omitted if the identities of sender and recipient are clear from the text. (Identifying material may be added if appropriate; see 14.211.) The word letter is usually omitted-that is, understood-but other forms of communication (telegram, memoran-
14 . 2 2 9
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
dum) are specified. I f such other forms occur frequently i n the same col lection, it may be helpful to specify letters also. For capitalization and the use of quotation marks, see 14.223. For date form, see 14.224. See also 14.111, 14.214, 14.231. 14. 2 2 9
Examples o f note forms for manuscript collections. See also
14.222,
14.223. 1. George Creel to Colonel House, 25 September 1918, Edward M. House Pa pers, Yale University Library. 2. James Oglethorpe to the Trustees, 13 January 1733, Phillipps Collection of Egmont Manuscripts, 14200:13, University of Georgia Library (hereafter cited as Egmont MSS) . 3. Burton to Merriam, telegram, 26 January 1923, box 26, folder 17, Charles E. Merriam Papers, Special Collections Research Center, University of Chicago Li brary. 4. Minutes of the Committee for Improving the Condition of the Free Blacks, Pennsylvania Abolition Society, 1790-1803, Papers of the Pennsylvania Society for the Abolition of Slavery, Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia (hereafter cited as Minutes, Pennsylvania Society) . 5. Hiram Johnson to John Callan O'Laughlin, 13 and 16 July 1916, 28 Novem ber 1916, O'Laughlin Papers, Theodore Roosevelt Collection, Harvard College Library. 6. Memorandum by Alvin Johnson, 1937, file 36, Horace Kallen Papers, YIVO Institute for Jewish Research, New York. 7. Undated correspondence between French Strother and Edward Lowry, con tainer 1-G/961 600, Herbert Hoover Presidential Library, West Branch, IA. 8. Memorandum,, "Concerning a Court of Arbitration," n.d., Philander C. Knox Papers, Manuscripts Division, Library of Congress. 9. Joseph Purcell, "A Map of the Southern Indian District of North America" [ca. 1772] , MS 228, Ayer Collection, Newberry Library, Chicago. 10. Louis Agassiz, report to the Committee of Overseers . . . [28 December 1859] , Overseers Reports, Professional Series, vol. 2, Harvard University Ar chives. 11. Gilbert McMicken to Alexander Morris, 29 November 1881, Glasgow (Scot land), Document 1359, fol. lr, Alexander Morris Papers, MG-12-84, Provincial Ar chives of Manitoba, Winnipeg. 12. Daily Expenses, July 1787, images 7-8, George Washington Papers, Series 5: Financial Papers, 1750-96, Library of Congress, Washington, DC, http://memory .loc.gov/ammem/gwhtml/gwseries5.html.
The content of subsequent citations of other items in a cited manuscript collection (short forms) will vary according to the proximity of the earlier
Manuscript Collections
14 . 2 3 1
notes, the use of abbreviations, and other factors. Absolute consistency may occasionally be sacrificed to readers' convenience. 13. R. S. Baker to House, 1 November 1919, House Papers. 14. Thomas Causton to his wife, 12 March 1733, Egmont MSS, 14200:53. 15. Minutes, 15 April 1795, Pennsylvania Society. 14 . 2 3 0
Examples o f bibliography entries for manuscript collections. The style
of the first six examples below is appropriate if more than one item from a collection is cited in the text or notes. Entries are usually listed under the name of the collection or under the author(s) of the items contained therein. See also 14.222. Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library. Merriam, Charles E. Papers. Special Collections Research Center, University of Chicago Library. Pennsylvania Society for the Abolition of Slavery. Papers. Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia. Strother, French, and Edward Lowry. Undated correspondence. Herbert Hoover Presidential Library, West Branch, IA. Washington, George. Papers. Series 5: Financial Papers, 1750-96. Library of Con gress, Washington, DC. http://memory.loc.gov/ammem/gwhtml/gwseries5 .html. Women's Organization for National Prohibition Reform. Papers. Alice Belin du Pont files, Pierre S. du Pont Papers. Eleutherian Mills Historical Library, Wilmington, DE.
If only one item from a collection has been mentioned in text or in a note and is considered important enough to include in a bibliography, the en try will begin with the item. Dinkel, Joseph. Description of Louis Agassiz written at the request of Elizabeth Cary Agassiz, n.d. Louis Agassiz Papers. Houghton Library, Harvard Univer sity. 14. 2 3 1
Letters a n d t h e like in private collections. Letters, memorandums, and such that have not been archived may be cited like other unpublished material. Information on the depository is replaced by such wording as " in the author's possession" or "private collection," and the location is not mentioned.
14 . 2 3 2
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Special Types of References Reference Works 14 . 2 3 2
Reference works consu lted in physical formats. Well-known reference books, such as major dictionaries and encyclopedias, are normally cited in notes rather than in bibliographies. They are also more likely than many resources to be consulted online (see 14.233) . If a physical edition is cited, not only the edition number (if not the first) but also the date the volume or set was issued must be specified. References to an alpha betically arranged work cite the item (not the volume or page number) preceded by s.v. (sub verbo, "under the word"; pl. s.vv.).
1. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 15th e d . (1980), s.v. "salvation." 2. Oxford English Dictionary, 2nd ed. (CD -ROM, version 4.0, 2009) , s.v. "hoot(e)nanny, hootananny." 3. Dictionary ofAmerican Biography (1937), s.v. "Wadsworth, Jeremiah."
Most other reference works, however, are more appropriately listed with full publication details like any other book resource. (For examples of how to cite individual entries by author, see 14.234.) 4. The Times Style and Usage Guide, comp. Tim Austin (London: Times Books, 2003), s.vv. "police ranks," "postal addresses." 5. MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing, 3rd ed. (New York: Modern Language Association of America, 2008), 6.8.2.
Diccionario de historia de Venezuela. 2nd ed. 4 vols. Caracas: Fundaci6n Polar, 1997. Garner, Bryan A. Garner's Modern English Usage. 4th ed. New York: Oxford Uni versity Press, 2016. 14 . 2 3 3
Reference works consu lted online. Online reference works can be cited much like their printed antecedents; they are normally cited in the notes rather than in bibliographies (see 14.232) . For continually updated re sources, an edition number will usually be unnecessary. Instead, include a posted publication or revision date for the cited entry; if none is avail able, supply an access date. Time stamps may be included for frequently updated resources (as in the Wikipedia example, which records the time as it was included with the entry; see also 9.39) . Include a URL as the last element of citation; if the entry lists a recommended form for the URL,
Special Types ofReferences
14 . 2 3 5
use that version. See also 14.6-18. The facts of publication are often omit ted, but signed entries may include the name of the author. Note that names in entries are not always inverted as in printed editions; follow the usage in the source (cf. example notes 1 and 2) . For the use of italics versus roman in titles like Wikipedia, see 14.206. 1. Encyclopaedia Britannica Online, Academic ed., s.v. "Arturo Toscanini," ac cessed April 6, 2016, http://academic.eb.com/EBchecked/topic/600338/Arturo -Toscanini. 2. Grove Music Online, s.v. "Toscanini, Arturo,'' by David Cairns, accessed April 6, 2016, http://www.oxfordmusiconline.com/subscriber/article/grove/music /28197. 3. Wikipedia, s.v. "Stevie Nicks,'' last modified April 2, 2016, 18:30, http://en .wikipedia.org/wiki/Stevie_Nicks. 4. Merriam-Webster, s.v. "app (n.)," accessed April 6, 2016, http://www.mer riam-webster.com/dictionary/app. 14. 2 34
Citing individual reference entries by author. For certain reference
works-particularly those with substantial, authored entries-it may be appropriate to cite individual entries by author, much like contributions to a multiauthor book (see 14.107) . Such citations may be included in a bibliography. Isaacson, Melissa. "Bulls." In Encyclopedia of Chicago, edited by Janice L. Reiff, Ann Durkin Keating, and James R. Grossman. Chicago Historical Society, 2005. http://www.encyclopedia.chicagohistory.org/pages/184.html. Masolo, Dismas. "African Sage Philosophy." In Stanford Encyclopedia ofPhilosophy. Stanford University, 1997-. Article published February 14, 2006; last modified February 22, 2016. http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/spr2016/entries/african -sage/. Middleton, Richard. " Lennon, John Ono (1940-1980)." In Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. Oxford University Press, 2004; online ed., 2011. https:// doi.org/10.1093/ref:odnb/31351.
Artwork and Illustrations 14. 2 3 5
Citing paintings, photographs, a n d scul pture. Information about paint ings, photographs, sculptures, or other works of art can usually be pre sented in the text rather than in a note or bibliography. If a note or bib liography entry is needed, list the artist, a title (in italics) , and a date of creation or completion, followed by information about the medium and the location of the work. For works consulted online, add a URL.
14 . 2 3 6
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Salvador Dali, The Persistence ofMemory, 1931, oil o n canvas, 91/2 x 1 3 " (24.1 33 cm), Museum of Modern Art, New York, http://www.moma.org/collection /works/79018. 2. Dorothea Lange, Black Maria, Oakland, 1957, printed 1965, gelatin silver print, 39.3 x 37 cm, Art Institute, Chicago, http://www.artic.edu/aic/collections /artwork/220174. x
Mccurry, Steve. Afghan Girl. December 1984. Photograph. National Geographic, cover, June 1985. Picasso, Pablo. Bull's Head. Spring 1942. Bicycle saddle and handlebars, 33.5 x 43.5 x 19 cm. Musee Picasso Paris.
To cite a work of art included as a numbered illustration in another pub lication, see 14.158. 14 . 2 3 6
Citing exhibition catalogs. An exhibition catalog is often published as a
book and is treated as such. Witkovsky, Matthew S., ed. Sarah Charlesworth: Stills. Chicago: Art Institute of Chicago, 2014. Published in conjunction with an exhibition of the same title, organized by and presented at the Art Institute of Chicago, September 18, 2014-January 4, 2015.
or, ifspace is tight, Witkovsky, Matthew S., ed. Sarah Charlesworth: Stills. Chicago: Art Institute of Chicago, 2014. Exhibition catalog.
A brochure-the kind often available to visitors to an exhibition-may be treated similarly. 14. 2 3 7
Citing maps. Information about maps can usually be presented in the text rather than in a note or bibliography. If a note or bibliography en try is needed, list the cartographer (if known) and the title of the map (in italics) or a description (in roman) , followed by the scale and size (if known) and publication details or location of the map (see also 8.199, 14.235) . Undated maps consulted online should include an access or re vision date (see also 14.12, 14.13) .
1. Samuel de Champlain, cartographer, Carte geographique de la Nouvelle Franse, 1612, 43 x 76 cm, in The History of Cartography, vol. 3, Cartography in the European Renaissance (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007), fig. 51.3. 2. Yuji tu [Map of the tracks of Yu) , AD 1136, Forest of Stone Steles Museum,
Special Types ofReferences
14.240
Xi'an, China, stone rubbing, 1933?, 84 x 82 cm, Library of Congress, http://www .loc.gov/item/gm71005080/. 3. Satellite view of Chicago, Google Earth, accessed April 2, 2016, https:// www.google.com/maps/@41.7682665,-87.723154,93759m/data=!3ml!le3. US Geological Survey. California: Yosemite Quadrangle. 1909; repr., 1951. 30minute series quadrangle, 1:125,000 scale. National Map, Historic Topographic Map Collection. http://nationalmap.gov/.
See also 14.158.
Scriptural References 14. 2 3 8
Bibl ical references-additional resource. Any writer or editor working extensively with biblical material should consult the latest edition of The SBL Handbook ofStyle (bibliog. 1.1), which offers excellent advice and nu merous abbreviations.
14. 2 3 9
Bible chapter a n d verse. References to the Jewish or Christian scriptures usually appear in text citations or notes rather than in bibliographies. Parenthetical or note references to the Bible should include book (in ro man and usually abbreviated) , chapter, and verse-never a page num ber. A colon is used between chapter and verse. Note that the traditional abbreviations use periods but the shorter forms do not. For guidance on when to abbreviate and when not to, see 10.44. For full forms and abbre viations, see 10.45, 10.46, 10.47.
Traditional abbreviations: 1. 1 Thess. 4:11, 5:2-5, 5:14. 2. Heb. 13:8, 13:12. 3. Gen. 25:19-36:43.
Shorter abbreviations: 4. 2 Sm 11:1-17, 11:26-27; 1 Chr 10:13-14. 5. Jo 5:9-12; Mt 26:2-5. 14. 240
Versions of the Bible. Since books and numbering are not identical in
different versions, it is essential to identify which version is being cited. For a work intended for general readers, the version should be spelled
14. 241
NOTES AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
out, at least o n first occurrence. For specialists, abbreviations may b e used throughout. For abbreviations o f versions, see 10.48. 1. 2 Kings 11:8 (New Revised Standard Version) . 2. 1 Cor. 6:1-10 (NRSV) . 14. 241
Other sacred works. References to the sacred and revered works of other religious traditions may, according to context, be treated in a man ner similar to those of biblical or classical works. Citations of translit erated texts should indicate the name of the version or translator. The Koran (or Qur'an) is set in roman, and citations of its sections use arabic numerals and colons (e.g., Koran 19:17-21) . Such collective terms as the Vedas or the Upanishads are normally capitalized and set in roman, but particular parts are italicized (e.g., the Rig-Veda or the Brihad-Aranyaka Upanishad) . For authoritative usage, consult History ofReligions, an inter national journal for comparative historical studies (bibliog. 5) .
Classical Greek and Latin References 14. 242
Where to cite classical references. Classical primary source references are ordinarily given in text or notes. They are included in a bibliography only when the reference is to information or annotation supplied by a modern author (see 14.246, 14.251) .
The eighty days o f inactivity reported by Thucydides (8.44.4) fo r the Pelopon nesian fleet at Rhodes, terminating before the end of Thucydides's winter (8.60.2-3), suggests : . . 14. 243
Identifying numbers in classical references. The numbers identifying the various parts of classical works-books, sections, lines, and so on remain the same in all editions, whether in the original language or in translation. (In poetry, line content may vary slightly from the original in some translations.) Arabic numerals are used. Where letters also are used, they are usually lowercased but may be capitalized if the source being cited uses capitals. Page numbers are omitted except in references to introductions, notes, and the like supplied by a modern editor or to specific translations. See also 14.245, 14.250.
Abbreviations in classical references. Abbreviations of authors' names
as well as of works, collections, and so forth are used extensively in clas sical references. The most widely accepted standard for abbreviations is the list included in The Oxford Classical Dictionary (bibliog. 5) . When abbreviations are used, these rather than ibid. should be used in succeed ing references to the same work. (Abbreviations are best avoided when only two letters are omitted, and they must not be used when more than one writer could be meant-Hipponax or Hipparchus, Aristotle or Aris tophanes.) 1. Thuc. 2.40.2-3. 2. Pindar, Isthm. 7.43-45. 14. 245
Pu nctuation in classical references. Place a comma between the name of a classical author (abbreviated or not) and the title of a work. No punc tuation intervenes, however, between title and identifying number (or between author and number when the author is standing in for the title) . Numerical divisions are separated by periods with no space following each period. Commas are used between two or more references to the same source, semicolons between references to different sources, and en dashes between continuing numbers. If such abbreviations as bk. or sec. are needed for clarity, commas separate the different elements.
1. Aristophanes, Frogs 1019-30. 2. Cic., Verr. 1.3.21, 2.3.120; Caes., B Gall. 6.19; Tac., Germ. 10.2-3. 3. Hdt. 7.1.2. 4. Sappho, Invocation to Aphrodite, st. 1, lines 1-6. 14.246
Citing specific editions of classical references. Details of the edition
used, along with translator (if any) and the facts of publication, should be either specified the first time a classical work is cited or given elsewhere in the scholarly apparatus. If several editions are used, the edition (or an abbreviation) should accompany each citation. Although many clas sicists will recognize a well-known edition merely from the last name of the editor or translator, a full citation, at least in the bibliography, should be furnished as a courtesy. 1. Epictetus, Dissertationes, ed. Heinrich Schenk! (Stuttgart: Teubner, 1916) . 2. Herodotus, The History, trans. David Grene (Chicago: University o f Chicago Press, 1987) . 3 . Solon (Edmonds's numbering) 36.20-27.
14. 247
14.247
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Titles of classical works and collections. Titles of works and pub
lished collections are italicized whether given in full or abbreviated (see 14.244) . Latin and transliterated Greek titles are capitalized sentence style (see 8.158, 11.6, 11.54) . 1. Cato's uses ofpaterfamilias in Agr. (2.1, 2.7, 3.1, 3.2) are exclusively in refer ence to estate management. For the diligens paterfamilias in Columella, see Rust. 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 5.6.37, 9.1.6, 12.21.6. 2. Scholia graeca in Homeri Odysseam, ed. Wilhelm Dindorf (Oxford, 1855; repr. 1962). 3. Patrologiae cursus completus, series graeca (Paris: Migne, 1857-66) . 14. 248
Su perscripts in classical references. In classical references, a superior figure is sometimes used immediately after the title of a work (or its ab breviation) , and preceding any other punctuation, to indicate the num ber of the edition.
1. Stolz-Schmalz, Lat. Gram. 5 (rev. Leumann-Hoffmann; Munich, 1928) , 390-91. 2. Ausgewiihlte Komodien des T. M. Plautus2, vol. 2 (1883) .
In former practice, the letters accompanying numerals in citations of classical works (see 14.243) sometimes appeared as superscripts (e.g., 3.2.996 b 5-8) . 14. 249
Collections of inscriptions. Arabic numerals are used in references to volumes in collections of inscriptions. Periods follow the volume and in scription numbers, and further subdivisions are treated as in other clas sical references.
Some collections are cited only by the name of the editor. Since the edi tor's name here stands in place of a title, no comma is needed. 4. Dessau 6964.23-29. [= H. Dessau, ed., Jnscriptiones latinae selectae] 14. 2 5 0
Frag ments o f classical texts. Fragments of classical texts (some only recently discovered) are not uniformly numbered. They are published in
Special Types ofReferences
14. 2 5 2
collections, and the numbering is usually unique to a particular edition. Two numbers separated by a period usually indicate fragment and line. The editor's name, often abbreviated in subsequent references, must therefore follow the number. 1. Empedocles, frag. 115 Diels-Kranz. 2. Anacreon, frag. 2.10 Diehl. 3. Hesiod, frag. 239.1 Merkelbach and West. 4. Anacreon, frag. 5.2 D. 5. Hesiod, frag. 220 M.-W.
In citations of two or more editions of the same set of fragments, either parentheses or an equals sign may be used. 6. Pindar, frag. 133 Bergk (frag. 127 Bowra). or 7. Pindar, frag. 133 Bergk 127 Bowra. =
14. 2 5 1
Modern editions o f t h e classics. When Greek, Latin, or medieval clas sics are cited by page number, the edition must be specified, and the nor mal rules for citing books are followed. See also 14.246.
1. Propertius, Elegies, ed. and trans. G. P. Goold, Loeb Classical Library 18 (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1990), 45. Aristotle. Complete Works ofAristotle: The Revised Oxford Translation. Edited by J. Barnes. 2 vols. Bollingen Series. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1983. Maimonides. The Code ofMaimonides, Book 5: The Book ofHoliness. Edited by Leon Nemoy. Translated by Louis I. Rabinowitz and Philip Grossman. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1965. 14 . 2 5 2
Medieval references. The form for classical references may equally well be applied to medieval works.
1. Augustine, De civitate Dei 20.2. 2. Augustine, The City ofGod, trans. John Healey (New York: Dutton, 1931), 20.2. 3. Beowulf, lines 2401-7. 4. Abelard, Epistle 17 to Heloise (Migne, PL 180.375c-378a) . 5. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, trans. Theodore Silverstein (Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press, 1974) , pt. 3, p. 57.
14 . 2 5 3
N O T E S AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
Classic English Poems and Plays 14 . 2 5 3
Citing editions o f classic English poems and plays. Classic English po
ems and plays can often be cited by book, canto, and stanza; stanza and line; act, scene, and line; or similar divisions. Publication facts can then be omitted. For frequently cited works-especially those of Shakespeare, where variations can occur in wording, line numbering, and even scene division-the edition is normally specified in the first note reference or in the bibliography. The edition must be mentioned if page numbers are cited (see 14.251) . 1. Chaucer, "Wife of Bath's Prologue," Canterbury Tales, frag. 3, lines 105-14. 2. Spenser, The Faerie Queene, bk. 2, canto 8, st. 14. 3. Milton, Paradise Lost, bk. 1, lines 83-86. 4. King Lear, ed. David Bevington et al. (New York: Bantam Books, 2005) , 3.2.49-60. References are t o act, scene, and line. Dryden, John. Dramatic Essays. Everyman's Library. New York: Dutton, 1912. Shakespeare, William. Hamlet. Edited by Ann Thompson and Neil Taylor. Arden Shakespeare, 3rd ser. London: Thomson Learning, 2006. 14. 2 54
Short forms for citing classic Engl ish poems and plays. A citation may be shortened by omitting act, line, and the like, as long as the system used has been explained. Arabic numerals are used, separated by peri ods. In immediately succeeding references, it is usually safer to repeat all the numbers. The author's name may be omitted if clear from the text. For citing sources in text, see 13.67.
Publ ished scores. Published musical scores are treated in much the
same way as books. 1. Giuseppe Verdi, II corsaro (melodramma tragico in three acts) , libretto by Francesco Maria Piave, ed. Elizabeth Hudson, 2 vols., The Works ofGiuseppe Verdi, ser. 1, Operas (Chicago: University of Chicago Press; Milan: G. Ricordi, 1998) .
Special Types ofReferences
14.258
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus. Sonatas and Fantasies for the Piano. Prepared from the autographs and earliest printed sources by Nathan Broder. Rev. ed. Bryn Mawr, PA: Theodore Presser, 1960. Schubert, Franz. "Das Wandern (Wandering) ," Die schOne Mullerin (The Maid of the Mill). In First Vocal Album (for high voice) . New York: G. Schirmer, 1895.
In the last example above, the words and titles are given in both German and English in the score itself. See also 14.99. 14 . 2 5 6
Unpublished scores. Unpublished scores are treated in the same way as other unpublished material in manuscript collections (see 14.221-31) .
1. Ralph Shapey, "Partita for Violin and Thirteen Players," score, 1966, Special Collections, Joseph Regenstein Library, University of Chicago.
Scientific Databases 14. 2 5 7
Citing data from a scientific database. In the sciences especially, it has become customary to cite data from a database by listing, at a minimum, the name of the database, a descriptive phrase or record locator (such as a data marker or accession number) indicating the part of the database being cited or explaining the nature of the reference, an access date, and a URL. In bibliographies, list under the name of the database. See also 14.6-18.
1. NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (object name IRAS F00400+4059; ac cessed April 6, 2016), http://ned.ipac.caltech.edu/. 2. GenBank (for RP11-322N14 BAC [accession number AC087526.3] ; ac cessed April 6, 2016), http://www. ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/nuccore/19683167. GenBank (for RP11-322N14 BAC [accession number AC087526.3] ; accessed April 6, 2016). http://www. ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/nuccore/19683167. NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (object name IRAS F00400+4059; ac cessed April 6, 2016). http://ned.ipac.caltech.edu/.
To cite supplementary data for a journal article, see 14.187.
Patents and Standards 14 . 2 5 8
Patents. Patents are cited under the names of the creators and dated by the year of filing.
14 . 2 5 9
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
Iizuka, Masanori, and Hideki Tanaka. Cement admixture. U S Patent 4,586,960, filed June 26, 1984, and issued May 6, 1986. 14. 2 5 9
Standards. To cite a standard published by a specific industry group or by
a national or international standards organization, include the name of the organization, the title of the standard (in italics) , an edition or other identifying number or label, and publication information. Standards consulted online should include a URL. In the notes, standards can be cited by title; in a bibliography entry, list under the group or organization, even if that entity is also the publisher. 1. Bibliographic References, ANSI/NISO Z39.29-2005 (Bethesda, MD: National Information Standards Organization, approved June 9, 2005; reaffirmed May 13, 2010), 3.2.2. 2. Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0, 5th ed., ed. Tim Bray, Jean Paoli, C. M. Sperberg-McQueen, Eve Maler, and Fran�ois Yergeau (W3C, November 26, 2008), http://www.w3.org/TR/2008/REC-xml-20081126/. National Information Standards Organization. Bibliographic References. ANSI/ NISO Z39.29-2005. Bethesda, MD: NISO, approved June 9, 2005; reaffirmed May 13, 2010. Worldwide Web Consortium (W3C) . Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0. 5th ed. Edited by Tim Bray, Jean Paoli, C. M. Sperberg-McQueen, Eve Maler, and Fran�ois Yergeau. W3C, November 26, 2008. http://www.w3.org/TR/2008 /REC-xml-20081126/.
Citations Tak�n from Secondary Sources 14. 2 6 0
Citations taken from secondary sources. To cite a source from a sec
ondary source ("quoted in . . . ") is generally to be discouraged, since authors are expected to have examined the works they cite. If an origi nal source is unavailable, however, both the original and the secondary source must be listed. 1. Louis Zukofsky, "Sincerity and Objectification,'' Poetry 37 (February 1931) : 269, quoted i n Bonnie Costello, Marianne Moore: Imaginary Possessions (Cam bridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1981), 78.
Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia
14.263
Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia 14. 2 6 1
M ultimedia-elements o f t h e citation. The citation for recordings and other multimedia content usually includes some or all of the following elements:
1. The name of the composer, writer, performer, or other person primarily responsible for the content. Include designations such as vocalist, conductor, or director as appropriate. 2. The title of the work, in italics or quotation marks, as applicable (see 8.197) . 3 . Information about the work, including the names o f additional contributors and the date and location of the recording, production, or performance. 4. Information about the publisher, including date of publication. 5. Information about the medium or format (e.g., LP, DVD, MP3, AVI) . Supple mentary information, such as the number of discs in an album and the dura tion of the recording, as applicable, may also be given. 6. Any additional information that might be relevant to the citation. 7. For sources consulted online, a URL (see 14.6-18) .
The order of these elements-and which ones are included-will depend not only on the nature of the source but also on whether a part or the whole is cited and whether a particular contributor is the focus of the citation. 14 . 2 6 2
Discographies, filmog l'aphies, a n d t h e like. Discographies, filmogra phies, and the like are specialized bibliographies that list (and sometimes annotate) materials such as audio recordings, video recordings, and mul timedia packages. The examples in this section are modeled on notes and bibliography entries but would be appropriately presented as a sep arate list, either preceding the bibliography or as an appendix (see also 14.63) . For advice on music discographies, consult Suzanne E. Thorin and Carole Franklin Vidali, The Acquisition and Cataloging ofMusic and Sound Recordings (bibliog. 5) . For an example, see figure 14.12.
Recordings and Live Performances 14. 2 6 3
M usical record ings. For the typographic treatment of musical compo sitions in running text, see 8.193-97. Those guidelines, however, do not necessarily apply to recordings when listed in a note or a bibliography. Symphony or sonata, for example, is capitalized when part of the title of a recording. A citation may begin with a title in a note; in a bibliography
14. 2 6 3
N O T E S A N D BIBLI O G RAPHY
F I G U R E 14 . 1 2 .
The first page o f a discography. S e e 14.262.
entry, list by author, performer, or other primary contributor. If the con ductor or performer is the focus of the recording or is more relevant to the discussion than the composer, either one may be listed first. For the date, include the date of the recording or the copyright date or published date included with the recording, or both. If a date or other information cannot be determined from the recording (a common problem with older
Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia
14 . 2 6 4
recordings and with music files downloaded out of context) , consult a library catalog or other resource; citations without such information are generally unacceptable. If no date can be found, use "n.d." (for no date) . Recordings on LP or disc typically include acquisition numbers, which follow the name of the publisher with no intervening comma. For streaming audio formats and downloads, list the service or the file for mat, as applicable. 1. The Fireside Treasury of Folk Songs, vol. 1, orchestra and chorus dir. Mitch Miller, Golden Record A198:17A-B, 1958, 331/3 rpm. 2. New York Trumpet Ensemble, with Edward Carroll (trumpet) and Edward Brewer (organ) , Art of the Trumpet, recorded at the Madeira Festival, June 1-2, 1981, Vax/Turnabout PVT 7183, 1982, compact disc. 3. Richard Strauss, Don Quixote, with Emanuel Feuermann (violoncello) and the Philadelphia Orchestra, conducted by Eugene Ormandy, recorded Febru ary 24, 1940, Biddulph LAB 042, 1991, compact disc. 4. Billie Holiday, vocalist, "I'm a Fool to Want You," by Joel Herron, Frank Sinatra, and Jack Wolf, recorded February 20, 1958, with Ray Ellis, track 1 on Lady in Satin, Columbia CL 1157, 331/3 rpm. 5. "Umbrella," featuring Jay-Z, MP3 audio, track 1 on Rihanna, Good Girl Gone Bad, Island DefJam, 2007. or 6. "Umbrella," featuring Jay-Z, Spotify, track 1 on Rihanna, Good Girl Gone Bad, Island Def Jam, 2007. Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus. Don Giovanni. Orchestra and Chorus of the Royal Opera House, Covent Garden. Sir Colin Davis. With Ingvar Wixell, Luigi Roni, Martina Arroyo, Stuart Burrows, Kiri Te Kanawa, et al. Recorded May 1973. Philips 422 541-2, 1991, 3 compact discs. Pink Floyd. Atom Heart Mother. Capitol CDP 7 46381 2, 1990, compact disc. Orig inally released in 1970. Rubinstein, Artur, pianist. The Chopin Collection. Recorded 1946, 1958-67. RCA Victor / BMG 60822-2-RG, 1991, 11 compact discs. Weingartner, Felix von, conductor. 150 fahre Wiener Philharmoniker. Recorded in 1936. Preiser Records PR90113 (mono), 1992, compact disc. Includes Beetho ven's Symphony no. 3 in E-flat Major and Symphony no. 8 in F Major.
Musical recordings are usually listed in a separate discography (see fig. 14.12) rather than in a bibliography. Ifincluded in a bibliography, they are best grouped under an appropriate subhead (see 14.63) . 14 . 2 64
Recorded read ings, lectu res, audiobooks, and the like. Recordings of drama, prose or poetry readings, lectures, and the like are treated much
14 . 2 6 5
N O T E S AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
the same a s musical recordings (see 14.263) . Facts o f publication, where needed, follow the style for print media. See also 14.267-68. 1. Dylan Thomas, Under Milk Wood, performed by Dylan Thomas et al., Caed mon TC-2005, 1953, 33% rpm, 2 LPs. 2. Harry S. Truman, "First Speech to Congress," April 16, 1945, Miller Center of Public Affairs, University ofVirginia, transcript and Adobe Flash audio, 18:13, http://millercenter.org/president/speeches/speech-3339. 3. Calvin Coolidge, "Equal Rights" (speech) , ca. 1920, in "American Leaders Speak: Recordings from World War I and the 1920 Election, 1918-1920," Library of Congress, copy of an undated 78 rpm disc, RealAudio and WAV formats, 3:45, http://memory.loc.gov/ammem/nfhtml/. 4. Eleanor Roosevelt, "Is America Facing World Leadership?," convocation speech, Ball State Teacher's College, May 6, 1959, Muncie, IN, radio broadcast, reel to-reel tape, MPEG copy, 1:12:49, http://libx.bsu.edu/cdm/singleitem/collection /ElRoos/id/1. Auden, W. H. Selected Poems. Read by the author. Spoken Arts 7137, 1991. Audio cassette. Strayed, Cheryl. Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail. Read by Ber nadette Dunne. New York: Random House Audio, 2012. Audible audio ed., 13 hr., 6 min. 14. 2 6 5
Video a n d fil m recordings. Citations of video and film recordings, like
citations of sound recordings, will vary according to the nature of the material (television show, movie, etc.) . Any facts relevant to identifying the item should be included. Indexed scenes are treated as chapters and cited by title or by number. Ancillary material, such as critical commen tary, is cited by author and title. Note that in the Monty Python example, the citation is of material original to the 2001 edition, so the original re lease date of the film (1975) is omitted. See also 14.267-68. 1. American Crime Story: The People v. 0 . /. Simpson, episode 6, "Marcia, Marcia, Marcia," directed by Ryan Murphy, written by D. V. Devincentis, featuring Ster ling K. Brown, Kenneth Choi, and Sarah Paulson, aired March 8, 2016, on FX, https://www.amazon.com/dp/BOlARVPCOA/. 2. "Crop Duster Attack," North by Northwest, directed by Alfred Hitchcock (1959; Burbank, CA: Warner Home Video, 2000), DVD. 3. Louis J. Mihalyi, Landscapes ofZambia, Central Africa (Santa Barbara, CA: Visual Education, 1975), 35 mm slides, 40 frames. 4. The Greek and Roman World (Chicago: Society for Visual Education, 1977) , filmstrip, 4 4 min.
Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia
14 . 2 6 7
Cleese, John, Terry Gilliam, Eric Idle, Terry Jones, and Michael Palin. "Commen taries." Disc 2. Monty Python and the Holy Grail, special ed. DVD. Directed by Terry Gilliam and Terry Jones. Culver City, CA: Columbia Tristar Home Entertainment, 2001. Cuaron, Alfonso, dir. Gravity. 2013; Burbank, CA: Warner Bros. Pictures, 2014. Blu-ray Disc, 1080p HD. Handel, George Frideric. Messiah. Atlanta Symphony Orchestra and Chamber Chorus, Robert Shaw. Performed December 19, 1987. Ansonia Station, NY: Video Artists International, 1988. Videocassette (VHS) , 141 min. Mayberry, Russ, dir. The Brady Bunch. Season 3, episode 10, "Her Sister's Sha dow." Aired November 19, 1971, on ABC. https://www.hulu.com/the-brady -bunch. 14. 2 6 6
Live performances. Live performances, unlike recordings, cannot be consulted as such by readers. For that reason, it is generally sufficient to mention details in the text or in the notes rather than in a bibliography. In addition to specifying the name and location of the venue and the date of the performance, include as much information as needed to identify the performance according to the guidelines outlined in 14.261. For the use of italics and quotation marks and other considerations for titles of works, see 8.156-201.
In a performance of Lin-Manuel Miranda's Hamilton at the Richard Rodgers The atre in New York on February 2, 2016, . . . 1. Hamilton, music and lyrics by Lin-Manuel Miranda, dir. Thomas Kail, chor. Andy Blakenbuehler, Richard Rodgers Theatre, New York, NY, February 2, 2016.
To cite a recording of a live performance, consult the relevant examples at 14.263, 14.264, and 14.265.
Online Multimedia and Apps 14. 267
Videos, podcasts, and other online multimedia. Cite online multime
dia according to the recommendations throughout this section; include a URL as the final element of the citation (see also 14.261) . Ifno date can be determined from the source, include the date the material was last accessed. (See also 14.6-18.) If the material is a recording of a speech or other performance, or if it is a digital version of a published source, in clude information about the original performance or source. Whether to list information about the original or the digitized copy first will depend
14 . 2 6 8
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
o n the information available and i s usually up t o the author. Copies of sources that are under copyright and which have been posted without ties to any publisher or sponsor should be cited with caution. For multi media designed to run in a web browser, a file format does not need to be mentioned; if a downloadable file was consulted (as in example notes 1 and 3) , specify format. See also 14.264, 14.187. 1. A. E. Weed, At the Foot of the Flatiron (American Mutoscope and Biograph Co., 1903) , 35 mm film, from Library of Congress, The Life ofa City: Early Films of New York, 1898-1906, MPEG video, 2:19 at 15 fps, http://www. loc.gov/item /00694378. 2. "Lang Lang: The Chopin Album," interview by Jeff Spurgeon, Artists at Google, October 15, 2012, video, 54:47, October 18, 2012, featuring performances of Nocturne in E-ftat Major, op. 55, no. 2; Etude in F Minor, op. 25, no. 2; Etude in E Major, op. 10, no. 3; and "Grande valse brillante" in E-ftat Major, op. 18, https:// youtu. be/ld8xvlHHKtl. 3. Mike Danforth and Ian Chillag, "F-Bombs, Chicken, and Exclamation Points," April 21, 2015, in How to Do Everything, produced by Gillian Donovan, podcast, MP3 audio, 18:46, http://www.npr.org/podcasts/510303/how-to-do -everything. Brown, Evan. "The 10 Commandments of Typography." Infographic. Design Mantic, April 11, 2014. http://www. designmantic.com/blog/infographics/ten -commandments-of-typography/. Kessler, Aaron M. "The Driverless Now." Produced by Poh Si Teng and Jessica Naudziunas. New York Times, May 2, 2015. Video, 2:01. http://www.nytimes .com/video/business/100000003662208/the-driverless-now.html. Lyiscott, Jamila. " � Ways to Speak English." Filmed February 2014 in New York, NY. TED video, 4:29. https://www. ted.com/talks/jamila_lyiscott_3_ways_to _speak_english.
To cite comments, adapt the recommendations for citing comments on blog posts or social media (see 14.208, 14.209) . 4. Frithjof Meyer, comment on "Lang Lang," March 2015. 14. 2 6 8
Multimedia a p p content. Multimedia apps include video games, inter active books and encyclopedias, and other content designed to function as a stand-alone application for use on a computer or other device. To cite, list relevant information as described throughout this section on recordings and multimedia and elsewhere. Include any version number and information about the device or operating system required to run the app. In the next-to-last example, the publishing information for Gems
Legal and Public Documents
14.270
and Gemstones is in parentheses because such annotations are styled like notes. See also 8.190. 1. Gems and Jewels, iPad ed., v. 1.01 (Touchpress, 2011), adapted from Lance Grande and Allison Augustyn, Gems and Gemstones: Timeless Natural Beauty ofthe Mineral World (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009) . 2. Angry Birds Transfomurs, v. 1.4.25 ( Rovio Entertainment, 2014) , Android 4.0 or later, soundtrack by Vince Di Cola and Kenny Meriedeth. Grande, Lance, and Allison Augustyn. Gems and Jewels. iPad ed., v. 1.01. Touch press, 2011. Adapted from Lance Grande and Allison Augustyn, Gems and Gemstones: Timeless Natural Beauty ofthe Mineral World (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009). Rovio Entertainment. Ang1y Birds Transformers. V. 1.4.25. Rovio Entertainment, 2014. Android 4.0 or later. Soundtrack by Vince Di Cola and Kenny Meriedeth.
Legal and Public Documents 14. 2 6 9
Recommended stylebooks. Citations in predominantly legal works generally follow one of two guides: (1) The Bluebook: A Uniform System ofCitation, published by the Harvard Law Review Association; or (2) the ALWD Guide to Legal Citation, prepared and published by the Associa tion of Legal Writing Directors and Coleen M. Barger (see bibliog. 1.1) . The Bluebook i s the most widely used citation guide; its conventions pre dominate in law reviews. The ALWD Guide differs in some elements and aims to be somewhat simpler. Chicago recommends using one of these systems for citing legal and public documents-including cases, consti tutions, statutes, and other government documents-even in works with a predominantly nonlegal subject matter. This approach recognizes the ubiquity of these citation formats in legal publications, commercial data bases, and government archives. Any editor working extensively with le gal and public documents should have one of these manuals on hand. Most of the examples in this section are based on The Bluebook (excep tions are made for secondary sources and certain unpublished govern ment documents; see 14.291, 14.292) . The Bluebook and the ALWD Guide are used in the United States. For citation guides used in Canada, see 14.293; for those used in the United Kingdom, see 14.297.
14 . 270
Legal and public documents online.
The Bluebook includes specific guidelines for citing sources consulted online. In general, for citations of cases, constitutions and statutes, and like materials, print sources are preferred, but online versions authenticated by a government entity or
14 . 2 7 1
NOTES AND BIBLIOG RAPHY
considered to be the official version (or an exact copy thereof) can be treated as if they were print. (If a URL is required, it may be appended as the last element of the citation; for an example, see 14.276.) Citations of sources consulted through commercial databases such as Westlaw or LexisNexis should include the database name and any applicable iden tification number (or, in the case of constitutions and statutes, infor mation about the currency of the database) . For examples, see 14.276. To cite books, periodicals, and other types of nonlegal sources con sulted online, Chicago's recommendations can usually be followed (see 14.6-18) . 14. 2 7 1
Note form for legal-style citations. Legal publications use notes for documentation and rarely include bibliographies. The examples in this section, based on the recommendations in The Bluebook, are accordingly given in note form only. Any work so cited need not be listed in a bibli ography (but see 14.291) . Works using the author-date style (chapter 15) and citing only a handful of legal and public documents may limit those citations to the text, using citation sentences and clauses that include the same information as footnotes, as suggested in The Bluebook; those with more than a very few legal-style citations, however, may need to supple ment the author-date system with footnotes or endnotes. See 15.58-59.
14.272
Typefaces in legal-style citations. In Bluebook style, italics are used for
titles of articles and chapters (a major difference from nonlegal usage) , uncommon words or phrases in languages other than English (but not such well-known terms as de facto or habeas corpus) , certain introduc tory signals indicating a cross-reference (such as See) , case history (such as aff'd; see 14.278) , and procedural phrases (such as In re) . Italics are also used for case names in textual sentences, whether in the running text or in the notes. All other material, including case names in citations, appears in roman. (See 14.276.) In addition, formal Bluebook style spec ifies caps and small caps for constitutions, the titles of books and their authors, and the names of periodicals and websites. The examples in this section use a simpler style advocated by some law reviews, substituting upper- and lowercase roman type for caps and small caps. Note, how ever, that the examples in this section are limited to legal and public doc uments (but see 14.291) . Though Bluebook-style citations to books, ar ticles, and other types of secondary sources may be appropriate in works with predominantly legal subject matter, these are not covered here. 14 .273
Page num bers and other locators in legal-style citations. In Bluebook style, for most sources the first page number is cited, following the name of the source and usually with no intervening punctuation; references
Legal and Public Documents
14.275
to specific page numbers follow the first page number, separated by a comma. Some types of sources are cited by section (§) or paragraph (,I) number; references to specific pages within such sections follow a comma and at (in roman type) . 14. 2 74
Abbreviations in legal-style citations. The Bluebook specifies abbrevia tions for the names of reporters, cases, courts, and legislative documents, as well as journals and compilation services. It also includes guidelines for abbreviating certain terms commonly used in legal citations. Most abbreviations in The Bluebook use periods or apostrophes, but exceptions are made for abbreviations of organizational names such as NBC or FDA. In citations (but not in running text) , Bluebook style specifies 2d and 3d rather than 2nd and 3rd for ordinals and capitalizes abbreviations like No. and Sess. Works that otherwise follow Chicago style-which dif fers on some of these points (see, e.g., 10.4)-should, for legal citations, follow Bluebook style, as shown in the examples in this section. The fol lowing example cites a decision by the United States Court of Appeals for the Seventh Circuit, reported in volume 206 of the Federal Reporter, third series, beginning on page 752, with the citation specifically referring to footnote 1 on that page (see also 14.278) .
In running text, most terms should be spelled out-including terms such as chapter, part, article, section, paragraph, and so forth (but, in case names, not v. or common abbreviations such as Co. , Inc., or Gov't) . For more specific recommendations, consult The Bluebook. See also 8.80, 8.82. 14. 2 7 5
Short forms for legal-style citations. The Bluebook allows certain short forms for subsequent citations to the same source. Short forms include case names reduced to the name of only one party (usually the plaintiff or the nongovernmental party) ; statutes and legislative documents iden tified only by name or document and section numbers; treaties identi fied only by name (or sometimes a short form thereof) ; and the use of id. (in italics) . Cases are the most readily shortened forms; examples are included in the section that treats them (14.276-79) . Works that cite only a few legal documents may be better off using the full form for each cita tion. See also 14.29-36.
14.276
N O T E S A N D B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Cases and Court Decisions 14 . 2 76
Cases or court decisions-basic elements. Full case names in citations, including the abbreviation v. , are set in roman in notes; short forms in subsequent citations are italicized (as are full case names mentioned in textual sentences; see example 3) . Full citations include volume number (arabic) , abbreviated name of the reporter(s) , the ordinal series num ber of the reporter (if applicable) , the abbreviated name of the court (if not indicated by the reporter) and the date together in parentheses, and other relevant information (see 14.279) . A single page number desig nates the opening page of a decision; an additional number designates an actual page cited. In a shortened citation, at is used to cite a particular page (example 3) ; absence of at implies reference to the decision as a whole (example 4) . See also 14.272, 14.275.
1. United States v. Christmas, 222 F.3d 141, 145 (4th Cir. 2000). 2. Profit Sharing Plan v. Mbank Dallas, N.A., 683 F. Supp. 592 (N.D. Tex. 1988) . 3 . Christmas, 2 2 2 F.3d at 145. The court also noted that under United States v. Sokolow, 490 U.S. 1, 7 (1989), police may briefly detain a person without probable cause if the officer believes criminal activity "may be afoot." Christmas, 222 F.3d at 143; see also Terry v. Ohio, 392 U.S. 1 (1968) . 4 . Profit Sharing Plan, 683 F. Supp. 592.
Cases consulted online should normally be cited to the appropriate re porter(s) . Though rarely used in Bluebook-style citations, a URL that points directly to an official resource may be appended as shown here (see also 14.6) . 5. State v. Griffin, 211 W. Va. 508, 566 S.E.2d 645 (2002) , http://www.courtswv .gov/supreme-court/docs/spring2002/30433.htm.
When a commercial electronic database is cited, include the docket num ber, name of the database, and any identifying date and number supplied by the database. References to page or screen numbers are preceded by an asterisk. Short forms may include only the database identifier. 6. Family Serv. Ass'n v. Wells Twp., No. 14-4020, 2015 U.S. App. LEXIS 6174 (6th Cir. Apr. 16, 2015) . 7. In re D.S., No. 13-0888, 2014 WL 1495489 (Iowa Ct. App. Apr. 1 6 , 2014) . 8. Family Serv. Ass'n, 2015 U.S. App. LEXIS 6174, at '5. 9. D.S., 2014 WL 1495489, at 'l.
See also 14.270.
Legal and Public Documents 14 . 277
14. 2 7 9
U nited States Supreme Court decisions. All Supreme Court decisions are published in the United States Reports (abbreviated U.S.) and are pref erably cited to that reporter. Cases not yet published therein may be cited to the Supreme Court Reporter (S. Ct.) , which publishes decisions more quickly. Because the court's name is indicated by the reporter, it is not repeated before the date.
1. Citizens United v. Federal Election Comm'n, 558 U.S. 310 (2010). 2. Obergefell v. Hodges, 135 S. Ct. 2584 (2015) . 3 . Citizens United, 5 5 8 U.S. a t 322. 14 . 2 78
Lower federal-court decisions. Lower federal-court decisions are usu ally cited to the Federal Reporter (F.) or to the Federal Supplement (F. Supp.) . Relevant case history should be included.
1. United States v. Dennis, 183 F. 201 (2d Cir. 1950) . 2. Locke v. Shore, 682 F. Supp. 2d 1283 (N.D. Fla. 2010), ajf'd, 634 F.3d 1185 (11th Cir. 2011). 3. Eaton v. IBM Corp., 925 F. Supp. 487 (S.D. Tex. 1996) . 4. Dennis, 183 F. at 202. 5. Locke, 682 F. Supp. 2d at 1292.
For the use of spaces relative to ordinals, see 14.279. 14. 2 7 9
State- a n d local-court decisions. Decisions of state and local courts are
cited much like federal-court decisions. If both the official and the com mercial reporters are cited, they are separated by a comma. If the court's name is identified unambiguously by the reporter, it is not repeated be fore the date. If a case was decided in a lower court, the abbreviated court name appears before the date (as in example 4) . Note that a space is used before an ordinal that follows an abbreviated reporter name consisting of two or more letters-"Cal. 2d" (California Reports, second series)-but not with initialisms like "A." in "A.2d" (Atlantic Reporter, second series) or "N.Y.S." in "N.Y.S.2d" (New York Supplement, second series) . Some state courts have adopted a public domain citation format for more re cent cases; consult The Bluebook for guidance. 1. Williams v. Davis, 27 Cal. 2d 746 (1946) . 2. Id. at 747. 3. Henningsen v. Bloomfield Motors, Inc., 32 N.J. 358, 161 A.2d 69 (1960) . 4. Kendig v. Kendig, 981 N.Y.S.2d 411 (App. Div. 2014) . 5 . Williams, 2 7 Cal. 2 d 746.
14 . 2 8 0
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
I fi t i s important t o avoid id. (as i n a n electronic format where individual notes may be presented out of context) , use a shortened citation form instead. The short form for note 2, above, would be " Williams, 27 Cal. 2d at 747." See also 14.34, 14.35.
Constitutions 14. 2 8 0
Constitutions. In citations to constitutions, the article and amendment numbers appear in roman numerals; other subdivision numbers are in arabic. (For nonlegal style see 9.28.) In Bluebook style the name of the constitution is capitalized; other abbreviations are lowercased.
1. U.S. Const. art. I, § 4, cl. 2. 2. U.S. Const. amend. XIV, § 2. 3. Ariz. Const. art. VII, § 5. 4. Ark. Const. of 1868, art. III, § 2 (superseded 1874) .
Legislative and Executive Documents 14. 2 8 1
Leg islative documents-abbreviations. Abbreviations for federal legis lative documents include "Cong." (Congress) , "H." (House) , "S." (Sen ate) , and other standard abbreviations for such terms as document, ses sion, and resolution. Unless it is not clear from the context, "U.S." may be omitted (and, for House and Senate documents published as of1907, the session number can generally be omitted) . For lists of abbreviations and many examples, consult The Bluebook. See also 14.274.
14. 2 8 2
Laws a n d statutes. Bills or joint resolutions that have been signed into
law-"public laws," or statutes-are first published separately, as slip laws, and then collected in the annual bound volumes of the United States Statutes at Large (abbreviated in legal style as "Stat."), where they are referred to as session laws. Later they are incorporated into the United States Code (U.S.C.) . 1. Homeland Security Act of2002, Pub. L. No. 107-296, 116 Stat. 2135 (2012) . 2. Homeland Security Act of2002, 6 U.S.C. § 101 (2012) . 14. 2 8 3
B i l l s a n d resolutions. Congressional bills (proposed laws) and reso
lutions are published in pamphlet form (slip bills) . In citations, bills or resolutions originating in the House of Representatives are abbreviated "H.R." or "H.R. Res.," and those originating in the Senate, "S." or "S.
Legal and Public Documents
14 . 2 8 6
Res." The title of the bill (if there is one) is followed by the bill number, the number of the Congress, a section number (if relevant) , and the year of publication in parentheses. Authors wishing to cite a bill that has been enacted should cite it as a statute (see 14.282) . 1. Safe and Accurate Food Labeling Act of2015, H.R. 1599, 114th Cong. (2015) . 14 .284
Hearings. Records of testimony given before congressional committees are usually published with titles, which should be cited in full and set in italics. The relevant cvmmittee should be listed as part of the title. Note that Before-which Chicago would normally lowercase in a title (see 8.159)-is capitalized according to Bluebook style, which capitalizes prep ositions of more than four letters. (This style need not be followed in a book that otherwise foll0ws Chicago style.) Include the number of the Congress, the page number cited (if any) , the year in parentheses, and the speaker's name, title, and affiliation in parentheses.
1. Homeland Security Act of2002: Hearings on H.R. 5005, Day 3, Before the Se lect Comm. on Homelaud Security, 107th Cong. 203 (2002) (statement of David Walker, Comptroller General of the United States) . 14 . 2 8 5
Congressional reports a n d documents. In Bluebook style, numbered re ports and documents are cited by the number of the Congress, which is joined to the document number by a hyphen. House and Senate reports are abbreviated "H.R. Rep." or "S. Rep."; documents are abbreviated "H.R. Doc." or "S. Doc." A specific page reference, if needed, is added following at. The year of the report or document is placed in parentheses. Additional information (e.g., to indicate a conference report) follows the year, in parentheses. If not mentioned in text, a title and author (if any) may be included in the citation.
1. Select Comm. on Homeland Security, Homeland Security Act of2002, H.R. Rep. No. 107-609, pt. 1 (2002) . 2. H.R. Rep. No. 113-564, at 5 4 (2014) (Conf. Rep.) . 3. S. Doc. No. 77-148, at 2-5 (1941) . 14 . 2 8 6
Congressional debates since 1 873. Since 18 73, congressional debates have been published by the government in the Congressional Record. Daily issues are bound in paper biweekly and in permanent volumes (di vided into parts) yearly. Since material may be added, deleted, or mod ified when the final volumes are prepared, pagination will vary among the different editions. Whenever possible, citation should be made to the permanent volumes. Note that, following Bluebook style, italics are
14.287
N O T E S AND BIBLI O G RAPHY
not used fo r the name o f the publication. The page number (preceded by "H" or "S," for House or Senate, in the daily edition) is followed by the date, which is placed in parentheses. If the identity of a speaker is necessary, include it in parentheses. 1. 147 Cong. Rec. 19,000 (2001) . 2. 161 Cong. Rec. 84335 (daily e d . June 2 2 , 2015) (statement o f Sen. Hatch) . 14 . 2 8 7
Records o f congressional debates before 1 873. Until 1873, congressio nal debates were privately printed in Annals of the Congress ofthe United States (covering the years 1789-1824; also known by other names) , Regis ter ofDebates (1824-37) , and Congressional Globe (1833-73) . In citing the date, refer to the year of publication rather than the year in which the debate occurred. Note that the Globe is normally cited by number and session of Congress (and page number) , whereas the Annals and Debates are cited by volume number. As with citations to the Congressional Rec ord, the titles are abbreviated and not italicized.
State laws a n d municipal ordi nances. The titles of state codes (compi lations) for laws and municipal ordinances are set in roman type. A name is included in parentheses where necessary to indicate the version of a code cited. The date following a code (or the version of a code) indicates the year the current code was published. Form of citation will vary by state. The date a specific law was passed may be included in parentheses at the end of the citation. For an exhaustive treatment of state-by-state variations, consult The Bluebook.
1. Ohio Rev. Code Ann. § 3305.08 (West 2003) . 2. A n Act Guaranteeing Governmental Independence, Ky. Rev. Stat. Ann. § 520.020 (LexisNexis 1985) (passed Jan. 3, 1974) . 14 . 2 8 9
Presidential documents. Presidential proclamations, executive orders, vetoes, addresses, and the like are published in the Weekry Compilation of Presidential Documents (Weekly Comp. Pres. Doc.) and in the Public Pa pers ofthe Presidents ofthe United States (Pub. Papers) . Proclamations and executive orders are also carried in the daily Federal Register (Fed. Reg.) and then published in title 3 of the Code ofFederal Regulations (C.F.R.) . Some executive orders and proclamations appear in the United States Code; include a citation if therein (see example 3) .
For more examples, consult The Bluebook. 14. 2 9 0
Treaties. The texts of treaties signed before 1950 are published in United States Statutes at Large; the unofficial citation is to the Treaty Series (T.S.) or the Executive Agreement Series (E.A.S.) , each ofwhich assigns a number to a treaty covered. Those signed in 1950 and later appear in United States Treaties and Other International Agreements (U.S.T., 1950-) or Treaties and Other International Acts Series (T.I.A.S., 1945-), which also assigns a number. Treaties involving more than two nations may be found in the United Nations Treaty Series (U.N.T.S., 1946-) or, from 1920 to 1946, in the League ofNations Treaty Series (L.N.T.S., 1920-46) . These and other sources are listed in The Bluebook. Titles of treaties are set in roman and capitalized headline-style (recall that The Bluebook capitalizes preposi tions of more than four letters) . Country names are generally abbrevi ated (see also 14.274) . An exact date indicates the date of signing and is therefore preferable to a year alone, which may differ from the year the treaty was published in one of the works above. Page numbers are given where relevant.
1. Treaty Banning Nuclear Weapon Tests in the Atmosphere, in Outer Space and Under Water, U.S.-U.K.-U.S.S.R., Aug. 5, 1963, 14 U.S.T. 1313. 2. Convention Concerning Militaiy Service, Den.-It., July 15, 1954, 250 T.I.A.S. 3516, at 45. 14. 2 9 1
Secondary sources a n d freestanding publications. When citing sec ondary sources and other freestanding publications, Chicago rather than Bluebook style can usually be followed. Such materials include not just books and articles but also legislative documents, pamphlets, and reports. For subsequent citations or citations of individual documents, shortened forms may be devised as needed (as in example notes 2 and 4; see also 14.59) . The following examples are not meant to be exhaustive. Those who are required to follow Bluebook style should consult that man ual, whose recommendations differ.
1. The Federalist Papers, ed. Lawrence Goldman (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008) . 2. Federalist, no. 4 2 (James Madison) .
14 . 2 9 2
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
3 . journals of the Continental Congress, 1774-1789, ed. Worthington C. Ford et al. (Washington, DC, 1904-37), 15:1341. 4. ]CC 25:863. 5. Public Papers ofthe Presidents ofthe United States: Herbert Hoover, 1929-1933, 4 vols. (Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1974-77), 1:134. 6. Martha L. Minow, "Making History or Making Peace: When Prosecutions Should Give Way to Truth Commissions and Peace Negotiations," journal ofHu man Rights 7, no. 2 (2008): 174-75. 7. Median Gross Rent by Counties of the United States, 1970, prepared by the Geography Division in cooperation with the Housing Division, Bureau of the Cen sus (Washington, DC, 1975) . 8. Ralph I. Straus, Expanding Private Investment for Free World Economic Growth, special report prepared at the request of the Department of State, April 1959, 12. 9. Illinois General Assembly, Law Revision Commission, Report to the 80th General Assembly ofthe State ofIllinois (Chicago, 1977), 14-18.
Though the legal-style citations discussed elsewhere in this section are usually limited to the notes (see 14.271), the secondary sources or free standing works discussed here may be included in a bibliography (see also 14.61) . Continental Congress. Journals ofthe Continental Congress, 1774-1789. Edited by Worthington C. Ford et al. 34 vols. Washington, DC, 1904-37. 14. 2 9 2
Unpublished government documents. For general guidelines and many examples that can be adapted to government documents, see 14.221-31. Most unpublished documents of the federal government are housed in the National Archives and Records Administration in Washington, DC, or in one of its branches. All, including films, photographs, and sound recordings as well as written materials, are cited by record group (RG) number. A list of the record groups and their numbers is given in the Guide to the National Archives ofthe United States, augmented by the leaf let Citing Records in the National Archives of the United States (available from the National Archives; see bibliog. 4.5) , which includes advice on citing its electronic records and digitized resources. Names of specific documents are given in quotation marks.
1. Senate Committee on the Judiciary, "Lobbying," file 71A-F15, RG 46, Na tional Archives. 2. National Archives Branch Depository, Suitland, MD, Records of the Na tional Commission on Law Observance and Enforcement, RG 10.
Legal and Public Documents
14. 2 9 5
Canada 14 . 2 93
Canadian reference works. The major reference work for citing Canadian public documents and legal cases in a Canadian context is the Canadian Guide to Uniform Legal Citation, edited and published (in English and French) by the Carswell/McGill Law Journal (see bibliog. 1.1) . Also valu able are Douglass T. MacEllven, Michael J. McGuire, Neil A. Campbell, and John N. Davis, Legal Research Handbook (bibliog. 5) ; Canadian Al manac and Directory (bibliog. 4.4) ; and Gerald L. Gall, F. Pearl Eliadis, and France Allard, The Canadian Legal System (bibliog. 5) . Authors cit ing more than a few Canadian legal or public documents should consult one of these works. Additional resources may be found online through Lexum. For citing the occasional example in a US context, The Bluebook (see 14.269) provides some recommendations and examples.
14. 2 9 4
Canadian legal cases. The following examples illustrate Bluebook style.
The basic elements are similar to those used in US law citations; the date is enclosed in square brackets, followed by the volume number if pertinent, the abbreviated name of the reporter, and the page number. Canadian Supreme Court cases since 1876 are cited to Supreme Court Reports (S.C.R.) . Federal Court cases are cited to Federal Courts Reports (F.C., 1971-2003; F.C.R., 2004-) or Exchequer Court Reports (Ex. C.R., 1875-1971) . Cases not found in any of these sources are cited to Domin ion Law Reports (D.L.R.) . Cite the year of the decision in parentheses if it is different from the reporter year. Include the volume number of the reporter if applicable. Add "Can." and the abbreviated court name in pa rentheses if not clear from the context. For citing other reporters, includ ing those covering the provinces and territories, consult The Bluebook. 1. Egan v. Canada, [1995) 2 S.C.R. 513. 2. American Cyanamid Co. v. Novopharm Ltd., [1972) F.C. 739 (Can. C.A.) . 3. Canada v. CBC/Radio-Canada (2012), [2014) l F.C.R. 142.
Since 1998, many cases have been assigned neutral citations to facili tate immediate publication online. A neutral citation should appear first, ahead of any parallel citation to an official reporter. In the following ex ample, "SCC" (no periods) refers to the Supreme Court of Canada. 4. Robertson v. Thomson Corp., 2006 SCC 43, [2006) 2 S.C.R. 363 (Can.) . 14. 2 9 5
Canad ian statutes. Federal statutes appeared through 1985 in the Re vised Statutes of Canada (R.S.C.) , a consolidation that was published
14. 2 9 6
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
every fifteen t o thirty years; federal statutes enacted since then are cited as session laws in the annual Statutes ofCanada (S.C.) . (Current consol idated federal statutes are available online from the Justice Laws Con solidated Acts collection.) Citation elements are similar to US statutes: the name of the act, the abbreviated name of the compilation, publica tion date, chapter number (in R.S.C. , the chapter number includes the initial letter of the name of the act) , and section number if applicable. Add "Can." in parentheses if it is not clear from the context. Statutes for the provinces and territories are cited similarly; consult The Bluebook for guidance. 1. Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act, R.S.C. 1985, c. C-36, s. 5 (Can.) . 2. Canada Elections Act, S.C. 2000, c . 9. 14. 2 9 6
Unpu blished Canadian government documents. Library and Archives Canada (LAC) houses the unpublished records of the federal govern ment, both individually written and institutional, as well as historically significant documents from the private sector. The guide to the entire LAC collections is available online, as are the archives for each province and territory. For citing unpublished materials, see the guidelines and examples in 14.221-31.
United Kingdom 14. 297
U K reference works. The catalogs of the National Archives (the official
archive for England, Wales, and the central UK government) , available online, extend to the documents of the former Public Record Office, the Historical Manus cripts Commission, the Office of Public Sector Infor mation, and Her Majesty's Stationery Office (HMSO) , among others. The UK Parliament also makes its catalogs available online. Printed guides include the Guide to the Contents ofthe Public Record Office; Frank Rodg ers, A Guide to British Government Publications; and John E. Pemberton, ed., The Bibliographic Control of Official Publications (all in bibliog. 4.5) . For citing U K legal and public documents in a US context, The Bluebook (see 14.269) provides an overview. 14. 2 9 8
U K legal cases. In Bluebook style, the basic elements in citations to UK legal cases are similar to those used in US law citations: the name of the case, in roman (cases involving the Crown use the abbreviation " R'' for Rex or Regina) ; the date, which is enclosed in parentheses when the vol umes of the reporter are numbered cumulatively, or in square brackets
Legal and Public Documents
14. 3 0 0
when the year is essential to locating the case (there is either no volume number or the volumes for each year are numbered anew, not cumula tively) ; the abbreviated name of the reporter; and the opening page of the decision. If the court is not apparent from the name of the reporter, or if the jurisdiction is not clear from the context, include either or both, as necessary, in parentheses. Until recently, the courts of highest appeal in the United Kingdom (except for criminal cases in Scotland) were the House of Lords (H.L.) and the Judicial Committee of the Privy Coun cil (P.C.) . In 2005 the Supreme Court of the United Kingdom was es tablished. In 2009 it assumed the appellate jurisdiction of the House of Lords and the devolution jurisdiction of the Judicial Committee of the Privy Council. Most cases are cited to the applicable report in the Law Reports, among these the Appeal Cases (A.C.), Queen's (King's) Bench (Q.B., K.B.), Chancery (Ch.) , Family (Fam.), and Probate (P.) reports. For other reports applicable to cases dating back to AD 1094, consult The Bluebook. 1. R v. Dudley and Stephens, (1884) 14 Q.B.D. 273 (D.C.) . 2. Regal (Hastings) Ltd. v. Gulliver, [1967] 2 A.C. 134 (H.L.) (appeal taken from Eng.) .
Cases heard since 2001 are assigned a neutral citation to allow for im mediate online publishing. A neutral citation should appear first, ahead of any parallel citation to an official reporter. In the following example, "UKSC" (no periods) refers to the Supreme Court of the United Kingdom. 3. HJ (Iran) v. Sec'y of State for the Home Dep't, [2010] UKSC 31, (2011] 1 A.C. 596 (appeal taken from Eng. & Wales C.A.) . 14. 2 9 9
U K parliamentary publications. Parliamentary publications include all materials issued by both houses of Parliament, the House of Commons (H.C.) and the House of Lords (H.L.) : journals of both houses (some times abbreviated CJ and Lf) ; votes and proceedings; debates; bills, re ports, and papers; and statutes.
14. 3 0 0
U K statutes. The Acts o f Parliament are identified by title (in roman) , year (also include the regnal year for statutes enacted before 1963) , and chapter number (c. for chapter; arabic numeral for national number, lowercase roman for local) . Monarchs' names in regnal-year citations are abbreviated as follows: Ann., Car. (Charles) , Edw., Eliz., Geo., Hen., Jae. (James) , Phil. & M., Rich., Viet., Will., W. & M. The year precedes the name; the monarch's ordinal, if any, follows it (15 Geo. 6) , both in arabic
14. 3 0 1
NOTES AND B I B L I O G RAPHY
numerals. A n ampersand i s used between regnal years and between names of dual monarchs (1 & 2 W. & M.) . The Bluebook advises including the jurisdiction in parentheses if it is not clear from the context. 1. Act of Settlement, 1701, 12 & 13 Will. 3, c. 2. 2. Consolidated Fund Act, 1963, c. 1 (Eng.) . 3. Manchester Corporation Act, 1967, c. xi.
Early statutory material for the United Kingdom is compiled in The Stat utes ofthe Realm (1235-1714) and Acts and Ordinances ofthe Interregnum (1642-60) ; additional material through 1800 has been published in var ious versions of The Statutes at Large. Later acts have been published as Public General Acts. For more information, see Legislation.gov.uk, a database of UK legislation published by the National Archives. 14. 3 0 1
Publ ication o f U K parliamentary debates. Before 1909, debates from both houses were published together; since then they have been pub lished in separate series.
Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 1st series (1803-20) Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 2d series (1820-30) Hansard Parliamentary Debates, 3d series (1830-91) Parliamentary Debates, 4th series (1892-1908) Parliamentary Debates, Commons, 5th series (1909-81) Parliamentary Debates, Commons, 6th series (1981-) Parliamentary Debates, Lords, 5th series (1909-)
In Bluebook style, cite the volume number and series and include the year and column number. In example 3, H.C. is included to indicate the House of Commons series. (In the first two examples, no such indication is necessary.) 1. 249 Par!. Deb. (3d ser.) (1879) cols. 611-27. 2. 13 Par!. Deb. (4th ser.) (1893) col. 1273. 3. 407 Par!. Deb. H.C. (5th ser.) (1944-45) cols. 425-46.
Although no longer the official name, Hansard (less often, Hansard's) is still sometimes used in citations to all series of parliamentary debates. Such usage is best avoided, however. 14. 3 0 2
UK command papers. Command papers are so called because they orig inate outside Parliament and are ostensibly presented to Parliament "by command of Her [His] Majesty." The different abbreviations for "com-
Legal and Public Documents
14 . 3 0 3
mand" indicate the series and must not be altered. No s is added to the plural (Cmnd. 38 34, 3835) . C. (1st series) 1 to C . (1st series) 4222 (1833-69) C. (2d series) 1 to C. (2d series) 9550 (1870-99) Cd. 1 to Cd. 9239 (1900-1918) Cmd. 1 to Cmd. 9889 (1919-56) Cmnd. 1-9927 (1956-86) Cm. 1- (1986-)
A command paper may consist of a pamphlet or several volumes. If not clear from the context, the author of the report is included. Dates may include a month or just a year. 1. HM Treasury, The Basie Facility and the Sterling Area, 1968, Cmnd. 3787, at 15-16. 2. First Interim Report of the Committee on Currency and Foreign Exchanges after the War, 1918, Cd. 9182. 3. Review Body on Doctors' and Dentists' Remuneration, Thirteenth Report, 1983, Cmnd. 8878. 14. 3 0 3
Unpubl ished U K government documents. For general guidelines and many examples, which can be adapted to government documents, see 14.221-31. The main depositories for unpublished government docu ments in the United Kingdom are the National Archives (NA) and the British Library (BL), both in London. Their catalogs are available online through the websites of the National Archives and the British Library. (The British Library is a division of the British Museum; before it was called the British Library, citations to documents housed therein used the abbreviation BM.) References usually include such classifications as Admiralty (Adm.) , Chancery (C) , Colonial Office (CO) , Exchequer (E) , Foreign Office (FO) , or State Papers (SP) as well as the collection and vol ume numbers and, where relevant, the folio or page number(s) . Among important collections in the British Library are the Cotton Manuscripts (with subdivisions named after Roman emperors, e.g., Cotton MSS, Caligula [Calig.] D.VII) , the Harleian Manuscripts, the Sloane Manu scripts, and the Additional Manuscripts (Add. or Addit.) .
1. Patent Rolls, 3 Rich. 2, pt. 1, m. 12d, NA (Calendar of Patent Rolls, 13771381, 470) . 2. Hodgson to Halifax, 22 Feb. 1752, NA, CO 137:48. 3. Clarendon to Lumley, 16 Jan. 1869, NA, FO Belgium/133, no. 6.
14 . 3 0 4
NOTES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
4 . [Henry Elsynge] , "The moderne forme o f the Parliaments o f England," BL, Add. MSS 26645. 5. Minutes of the General Court, 17 Apr. 1733, 3:21, BL, Add. MSS 25545. 6. Letter of a Bristol Man, BL, Add. MSS 33029:152-55.
International Entities 14. 3 0 4
Intergovernmental bodies. The Bluebook outlines the main reporters for international courts (such as the International Court of Justice) , com missions, and tribunals. Also included are abbreviations for intergov ernmental bodies such as the United Nations (and its principal organs) , the European Union, and those devoted to specific areas such as human rights, trade, and health. The basic elements of citations to international law cases are similar to those used in US law citations (see 14.276-79) ; for examples, consult The Bluebook. (In addition to intergovernmental bodies, The Bluebook covers about three dozen jurisdictions outside the United States.) For treaties, see 14.290.
14. 3 0 5
United Nations documents. The United Nations makes many ofits doc uments available online (in English)-including those published by the General Assembly and the Security Council and dating back to the first General Assembly in 1946. The Bluebook provides guidance primarily for citing documents in the Official Records, but it considers the website of the United Nations an acceptable alternative. In general, list by the au thorizing body (and the author or editor where appropriate) , the topic or title of the paper, the document number or code (if any) , and the date. Series and publication numbers, place of publication, and a page refer ence may also be included. For documents consulted online, include a URL as the final element in the citation (see 14.6-18) .
1. UN Security Council, Resolution 2222, Protection of Civilians in Armed Conflict, S/RES/2222, ,I 5 (May 27, 2015), http://www. un.org/en/sc/documents /resolutions/2015.shtml. 2. UN General Assembly, Resolution 67/18, Education for Democracy, A/RES /67/18 (Nov. 28, 2012), http://www. un.org/en/ga/67/resolutions.shtml. 3. S/RES/2222, ,1 16.
15 Author-Date References ·
OVERVIEW 15.1 BASIC F O R M AT, WITH EXAMPLES AND VARIAT I O N S 15.5 R E F E R E N C E LISTS AND TEXT C I TAT I O N S 15.10 Reference Lists 15.10 The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List 15.17 Text Citations 15.21 AU T H O R-DATE R E F E RE N C E S : S P E C IAL CASES 15.32 Author's Name 15.33 Title ofWork 15.38 Books 15.40 Edition, Volume, or Collection 15.40 Facts of Publication 15.44 Periodicals 15.46 Websites, Biogs, and Social Media 15 .50 Interviews and Personal Communications 15.53 Manuscript Collections 15.54 Patents and Standards 15.55 Citations Taken from Secondary Sources 15.56 Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia 15.57 Legal and Public Documents 15 .58
15.1
A U T H O R- D ATE R E F E R E N C E S
Overview 15.1
T h e scope o f t h i s chapter. This chapter describes the second of Chica
go's two systems of source citation, which uses parenthetical author-date references and a corresponding reference list. Because this system is similar in many respects to the notes and bibliography system discussed in chapter 14, much of the information from that chapter is not repeated here. For an introduction to source citations in general, including a dis cussion of systems other than the two recommended by Chicago, readers are encouraged to consult the overview in chapter 14 (14.1-18) . 15.2
Author-date .references versus notes a n d bibliography. Most of the rec
ommendations in chapter 14 for how to style names of authors, titles of works, and other components in notes and bibliographies are identical for the author-date system described in this chapter. The author-date system differs primarily in its use of parenthetical text citations rather than citations in numbered notes and, in the bibliography (called a refer ence list in author-date style) , the placement for the year of publication. For the use of notes with the author-date system, see 15.31. 15.3
Notes a n d bibliography entries a s models for author-date references.
Most of the examples in chapter 14 are readily adapted to the author-date citation style-in almost all cases by a different ordering or arrangement of elements. Most reference list entries are identical to entries in a bib liography except for the position of the year of publication, which in a reference list follows the author's name. Unlike bibliography entries (see 14.64) , each entry in the reference list must correspond to a work cited in the text. Text citations differ from citations in notes by presenting only the author's last name and the year of publication, followed by a page number or other locator, if any. This chapter, by focusing on these and other differences, will show how to adapt any of the examples in chapter 14 to the author-date system. 15.4
Sources consulted online. For a detailed discussion of URLs and DOis, access dates and revision dates, and other considerations for citing sources consulted online, see 14.6:-18. Most types of sources consulted online can be cited by adding a URL (or, in some cases, the name of the bibliographic database) after the full facts of publication. For examples in the author-date style, see 15.9, under "Journal Article," and through out 15.46-49 and 15.50-52. For more examples, see 14.161, 14.162, and throughout the discussions on periodicals (14.164-204) and elsewhere
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations
15.5
in chapter 14. For examples of access dates in author-date format, see 15.50.
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations 15.5
T h e author-date system-overview. The author-date system is used by
many in the physical, natural, and social sciences and is recommended by Chicago for works in those areas. Sources are cited in the text, usually in parentheses, by the author's last (family) name, the publication date of the work cited, and a page number ifneeded. Full details appear in the reference list-usually titled "References" or "Works Cited"-in which the year of publication appears immediately after the author's name (see fig. 15.1) . This arrangement makes it easy to follow a text citation to the corresponding full source in the reference list. (In electronic formats, text citations may be linked to their corresponding reference list entries.) Text citations: Like many other cultural fields, the video game industry is one that rewards nov elty, especially when it is packaged in terms that are recognizable to consumers and critics (Lampel, Lant, and Shamsie 2000; Hutter 2011) . . . . But the forefront of the industry finds continuous experimentation with the singular challenge of video gaming: how to create a convincing form of narrative storytelling that is nonetheless animated, perhaps uniquely so, by the actions of the users (Bissell 2011).
Reference list entries: Bissell, Tom. 2011. Extra Lives: Why Video Games Matter. New York: Vintage Books. Hutter, Michael. 2011. "Infinite Surprises: Value in the Creative Industries." In The Worth ofGoods: Valuation and Pricing in the Economy, edited by Jens Beck ert and Patrick Aspers, 201-20. New York: Oxford University Press. Lampel, Joseph, Theresa Lant, and Jamal Shamsie. 2000. "Balancing Act: Learn ing from Organizing Practices in Cultural Industries." Organization Science 11 (3) : 263-69.
For more examples of text citations and reference list entries, see 15.9. For a detailed discussion of reference lists, see 15.10-16 and 15.17-20. For text citations, see 15.21-31.
F I G U R E 15 . 1 .
Part of a reference list for a journal article in the social sciences.
See 15.5, 15.6, 15.10-16.
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations
15.9
15. 6
Basic structure of a reference list entry. In a reference list entry, the year of publication is the second element, following the author's name. Otherwise, a reference list entry is structured like an entry in a bibliog raphy (see 14.21) : the elements are separated by periods, and the first listed author's name, according to which the entry is alphabetized in the reference list, is usually inverted (last name first) . Titles are capitalized headline-style unless they are in a language other than English (see 8.159, 11.6) ; titles of larger works such as books and journals are itali cized; and titles of smaller works such as journal articles are presented in roman and enclosed in quotation marks (see 8.163, 14.86) . Noun forms such as editor, translator, volume, and edition are abbreviated, but verb forms such as edited by and translated by are spelled out.
15.7
Basic structure of an in-text citation. In the author-date system, a cita tion in the text usually appears in parentheses and includes only the first two elements in a reference list-the author and the year of publication (hence the name of the system) , with no intervening punctuation. A page number or other locator may be added, following a comma. Terms such as editor or translator, abbreviated in a reference list, are omitted from a text citation. In a parenthetical reference to two or more works, a semi colon usually separates each work from the next (but see 15.30) .
15 . 8
Page n u m bers and other locators. I n text citations, where reference is usually to a particular passage in a book or journal, only the page num bers pertaining to that passage are given. In reference lists, no page num bers are given for books; for easier location of journal articles or chapters or other sections of a book, the beginning and ending page numbers of the entire article or chapter are given. See also 15.23.
15 .9
Author-date references-examples and variations. The examples that
follow provide an overview of the author-date system, featuring books and journal articles as models. Each example includes a reference list entry and a corresponding text citation. For the sake of consistency, text citations are presented in parentheses, though they do not always appear that way in practice (see 15.28) . For more examples, consult the sections dealing with specific types of works throughout this chapter.
Book with Single Author or Editor For a book with a single author, invert the name in the reference list; in the text, include only the last name. Punctuate and capitalize as shown. To cite a specific passage, a page number or range is included in a text
15.9
A U T H O R-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
citation, separated from the year by a comma (a comma i s also used be tween nonconsecutive page references) . Page numbers are not included in a reference list unless the entry is for a chapter (see "Chapter in an Edited Book," below) . See also 9.60-64. Strayed, Cheryl. 2012. Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail. New York: Alfred A. Knopf. (Strayed 2012, 87-88) (Strayed 2012, 261, 265)
A book with an editor in place of an author includes the abbreviation ed. (editor; for more than one editor, use eds.) . Note that the text citation does not include ed. Daum, Meghan, ed. 2015. Selfish, Shallow, and Self-Absorbed: Sixteen Writers on the Decision Not to Have Kids. New York: Picador. (Daum 2015, 32)
Book with Multiple Authors For a book with two authors, only the first-listed name is inverted in the reference list. Grazer, Brian, and Charles Fishman. 2015. A Curious Mind: The Secret to a Bigger Life. New York: Simon & Schuster. (Grazer and Fishman 2015, 188)
For a book with three authors, adapt as follows: Berkman, Alexander, Henry Bauer, and Carl Nold. 2011. Prison Blossoms: Anar chist Voicesfrom . . . (Berkman, Bauer, and Nold 2011, 7-10)
For a book with four or more authors, include all the authors in the refer ence list entry (see also 14.76) . Word order and punctuation are the same as for two or three authors. In the text, however, cite only the last name of the first-listed author, followed by et al. (see also 15.29) . (Hacek et al. 2015, 384)
Basic Format, with Examples and Variations
15. 9
Book with Author plus Editor or Translator In the reference list, do not abbreviate Edited by or Translated by. See also 14.104. Garcia Marquez, Gabriel. 1988. Love in the Time of Cholera. Translated by Edith Grossman. London: Cape. (Garcia Marquez 1988, 242-55)
Chapter in an Edited Book In citations of a chapter or similar part of an edited book, include the chapter author; the chapter title, in quotation marks; and the editor. Pre cede the title of the book with In. Note the location of the page range for the chapter in the reference list entry. See also 14.106-12. Gould, Glenn. 1984. "Streisand as Schwarzkopf." In The Glenn Gould Reader, ed ited by Tim Page, 308-11. New York: Vintage Books. (Gould 1984, 310)
journal Article Citations of journals typically include the volume and issue number and date of publication. The volume number follows the italicized journal title in roman and with no intervening punctuation. A specific page ref erence is included in the text; the page range for an article is included in the reference list, preceded by a colon. Authors should record the full in formation for the issue, including issue number, even if a journal is pag inated consecutively across a volume or if the month or season appears with the year. Bagley, Benjamin. 2015. "Loving Someone in Particular." Ethics 125, no. 2 (Janu ary) : 477-507. (Bagley 2015, 484-85)
The URL in the following example indicates that the article was con sulted online; in this case, it is based on a DOI and is preferred to the URL that appears with the article (see 14.7, 14.8) . Some publishers will
15.10
AU T H O R- D A T E R E F E R E N C E S
use the URL a s the basis o f a link to the cited resource. For access dates (not shown here), see 14.176. Liu, Jui-Ch'i. 2015. "Beholding the Feminine Sublime: Lee Miller's War Photogra phy." Signs 40, no. 2 (Winter) : 308-19. https://doi.org/10.1086/678242. (Liu 2015, 312)
For the use of parentheses with issue numbers (as for a journal for which the month or season is unavailable or otherwise not listed) , see 15.47. For the use of a colon with volume numbers (as for a journal for which only volume and year are listed) , see 15.48.
Reference Lists and Text Citations Reference Lists 15.10
Function a n d placement o f reference lists. In the author-date system, the reference list is the prime vehicle for documentation. The text cita tions (see 15.21-31) are merely pointers to the full list. A reference list, like other types of bibliographies (see 14.64) , is normally placed at the end of a work, preceding the index, if there is one. In a multiauthor book or a textbook (or any book to be offered in the form of individual chap ters) , each chapter is usually followed by its own reference list, in which case the list is preceded by a subhead such as References or Literature Cited. Journal articles are always treated this way.
15.11
Alphabetical arrangement of reference list entries. A reference list is
arranged alphabetically (except in a numbered reference system; see 14.3) and should generally not be divided into sections. (Types of sources that are not readily adapted to author-date style are often better cited in notes; see, for example, 15.58-59.) All sources are listed by the last names of the authors (or, if no author or editor is given, by the title or, failing that, a descriptive phrase) . Rules for alphabetizing an index (see 16.56-93) apply also to a reference list, with the modifications described in 14.66 and 15.17-20. For an illustration, see figure 15.1. 15.12
Authors' names in reference list entries. In a reference list as in a bibli
ography, record the authors' names as they appear on the title page or at the head of an article or chapter, with the exceptions noted in 14.72-84. Some publications, especially in the natural sciences, use initials rather
Reference Lists and Text Citations
15.16
than full given names (see 15.33) . Where this practice is followed, an ex ception should be made where two authors share the same initials and last name. For text citations, see 15.22. 15.13
Titles in reference list entries. Titles and subtitles of books, articles, and
other works in reference lists should be treated according to the rules set forth in 14.8 5-99 and exemplified throughout chapter 14. It is rec ognized, however, that some publications-particularly journals in the natural sciences-generally prefer sentence-style capitalization for titles (see 8.158) , tend not to use quotation marks or italics, and abbreviate journal titles (see 15.46) . 1 5 . 14
Placement of dates in reference list entries. Because the text citations consist of the last name of the author or authors (or that of the editor or translator) and the year of publication, the year in the reference list ap pears directly after the name, not with the publication details. (When the date of publication includes month and day, the year may be repeated to avoid any confusion; for an example, see 15.49.) This arrangement facil itates easy lookup of reference list entries.
Pager, Devah, and David S. Pedulla. 2015. "Race, Self-Selection, and the Job Search Process." American Journal ofSociology 120, no. 4 (January) : 1005-54. https://doi.org/10.1086/681072. Unger, Roberto Mangabeira, and Lee Smolin. 2014. The Singular Universe and the Reality of Time: A Proposal in Natural Philosophy. Cambridge: Cambridge Uni versity Press.
For n.d. and the use of access dates for sources consulted online, see 15.44 and 15.50. See also 15.55. 15.15
Abbreviations in reference list entries. In reference lists, spell out such
phrases as edited by or translated by, which are capitalized if following a period. On the other hand, noun forms such as editor (ed.) and trans lator (trans.) are always abbreviated, as are such standard bibliographic terms as volume (vol.) , number (no.), and so forth. Abbreviations may be used with greater frequency as long as they are used consistently. For example, University may be abbreviated to Univ. , and months given with journal citations may be abbreviated (see 10.39) . See also 15.33, 15.46. 15.16
Single author versus several authors-reference list order. As in a bibli ography (chapter 14) , a single-author entry in a reference list precedes a multiauthor entry beginning with the same name. Only the first author's
1 5 . 17
AU T H O R - D A T E R E F E R E N C E S
name i s inverted. Successive entries by two o r more authors i n which only the first author's name is the same are alphabetized according to the coauthors' last names (regardless of how many coauthors there are) . Lamont, Michele. 2012. "Toward a Comparative Sociology of Valuation and Evaluation." Annual Review of Sociology 38 (August) : 201-22. https://doi.org /10.1146/annurev-soc-070308-120022. Lamont, Michele, and Nicolas Duvoux. 2014. "How Neo-liberalism Has Trans formed France's Symbolic Boundaries?" French Politics, Culture & Society 32, no. 2 (Summer) : 57-75. https://doi.org/10.3167/fpcs.2014.320208. Lamont, Michele, Jason Kaufman, and Michael Moody. 2000. "The Best of the Brightest: Definitions of the Ideal Self among Prize-Winning Students." Socio logical Forum 15, no. 2 (June) : 187-224. http://www.jstor.org/stable/684814. Lamont, Michele, and Ann Swidler. 2014. "Methodological Pluralism and the Possibilities and Limits of lnterviewing." Qualitative Sociology 37, no. 2 (June) : 153-71. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11133-014-9274-z.
The 3-Em Dash for Repeated Names in a Reference List 1 5 . 17
The 3-em dash in reference lists-some caveats. The advice in this sec
tion, which explains how to use the 3-em dash to stand in for repeated reference list entries under the same name, is aimed primarily at pub lishers and editors. Authors usually should not use the 3-em dash for repeated names in their manuscripts. Among other potential pitfalls, 3em dashes do not work in computerized sorts (i.e., all entries with 3-em dashes will line up in one place) . Moreover, an incorrectly applied dash may obscure an i�portant detail-for example, the abbreviation ed. or trans. Publishers, too, may decide not to apply 3-em dashes: 3-em dashes make it impractical to present entries outside the context of the list (e.g., in a pop-up box or when linking directly from in-text citation to refer ence list entry) and can hide entries from bibliographic databases, both of which are concerns for electronic publication formats. Where 3-em dashes are not used, simply repeat author name (s) and sort the entries as described throughout this section. See also 6.94. 15.18
Chronolog ical order for repeated names in a reference list. For suc cessive entries by the same author(s) , translator(s) , editor(s) , or compil er(s) , a 3-em dash replaces the name (s) after the first appearance (but see 15.17) . The entries are arranged chronologically by year of publica tion in ascending order, not alphabetized by title (as in a bibliography; see 14.71) . Undated works designated n.d. orforthcoming follow all dated works (see 15.44-45) .
Reference Lists and Text Citations
1s.20
Schuman, Howard, and Jacqueline Scott. 1987. "Problems in the Use of Survey Questions to Measure Public Opinion." Science 236 (4804) : 957-59. https://doi .org/10.1126/science.236.4804.957. --. 1989. "Generations and Collective Memories." American Sociological Re view 54, no. 3 (June) : 359-81. http://www.jstor.org/stable/2095611.
Note that the 3-em dash cannot stand in for the same two or more au thors as in the previous entry if they appear in a different order. The fol lowing two entries are alphabetized as if they are by two different sets of authors (i.e., "Jean" comes before "John") : Comaroff, Jean, and John Comaroff, eds. 1993. Modernity and Its Malcontents: Ritual and Power in Postcolonial Africa. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Comaroff, John, and Jean Comaroff. 1991-97. OfRevelation and Revolution. 2 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 15.19
The 3-em dash with edited, translated, or compiled works. The 3-em
dash replaces the preceding name or names only, not an added ed. , trans., comp., or whatever. The chronological order is maintained, regardless of the added abbreviation. Woodward, David. 1977. The All-American Map: Wax Engraving and Its Influence on Cartography. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. --, ed. 1987. Art and Cartography: Six Historical Essays. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. --. 1996. Catalogue ofWatermarks in Italian Printed Maps, ca. 1540-1600. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press.
Woodward is the author of the first and third items, editor of the second. 15.20
Reference list entries with same author(s), same year. Two or more works by the same author in the same year must be differentiated by the addition of a, b, and so forth (regardless of whether they were authored, edited, compiled, or translated) and are listed alphabetically by title. Text citations consist of author and year plus letter.
Fogel, Robert William. 2004a. The Escape from Hunger and Premature Death, 1700-2100: Europe, America, and the Third World. New York: Cambridge Uni versity Press. --. 2004b. "Technophysio Evolution and the Measurement of Economic Growth." Journal ofEvolutionary Economics 14, no. 2 (June) : 217-21. https://doi .org/10.1007/s00191- 004-0188-x.
15.21
AUT H O R- D ATE R E F E R E N C E S
(Fogel 2004b, 218) (Fogel 2004a, 45-46)
When works by the same two or more authors list their names in a differ ent order, then a, b, and so forth cannot be used. See 15.18.
Text Citations 1s.21
Agreement o f text citation a n d reference list entry. For each author
date citation in the text, there must be a corresponding entry in the ref erence list under the same name and date. It is the author's responsibility to ensure such agreement as well as the accuracy of the reference (see 2.32) . Among other things, specific page references to a journal article, when given in a text citation, must fall within the range of pages given for the article in the reference list entry. Manuscript editors can help authors by cross-checking text citations and reference lists and rectifying or que rying any discrepancies or omissions (see 2.63). 1s . 2 2
Text citations-basic form. A n author-date citation i n running text o r at
the end of a block quotation usually consists of the last (family) name of the author, followed by the year of publication of the work in question. In this context, author may refer not only to one or more authors or an institution but also to one or more editors, translators, or compilers. No punctuation appears between author and date. Abbreviations such as ed. or trans. are omitted. See also 15.23. Text citations: (Hetherington and Rudolph 2015)
(Grove 2015)
References: Grove, John. "Calhoun and Conservative Reform." 2015. American Political Thought 4, no. 2 (March) : 203-27. https://doi.org/10.1086/680389. Hetherington, Marc J., and Thomas J. Rudolph. 2015. Why Washington Won't Work: Polarization, Political Trust, and the Governing Crisis. Chicago: Univer sity of Chicago Press.
To refer to two or more sources in the same text citation, separate the sources with semicolons (but see 15.30) . (Hetherington and Rudolph 2015; Grove 2015)
Reference Lists and Text Citations
1 5 . 24
Where two or more works by different authors with the same last name are listed in a reference list, the text citation must include an initial (or two initials or a given name if necessary) . Text citations: (C. Doershuk 2017)
(J. Doershuk 2016)
References: Doershuk, Carl. 2017. . . . 15.23
Doershuk, John. 2016 . . . .
Page a n d volume numbers or other specific locators in text citations.
When a specific page, section, equation, or other division of the work is cited, it follows the date, preceded by a comma. When a volume as a whole is referred to, without a page number, vol. is used. For volume plus page, only a colon is needed. The n in the Fischer and Siple example below indicates "note" (see 14.157) . The last example shows one strategy for citing a specific location (e.g., a section heading) in a work that con tains no page or section numbers or other numerical signposts-the case for some electronic formats (see 14.160) . (Piaget 1980, 74) (LaFree 2010, 413, 417-18) (Claussen 2015, para. 2.15) or (Claussen 2015, ,1 2.15) (Johnson 1979, sec. 24) or (Johnson 1979, § 24) (Fowler and Hoyle 1965, eq. 87) (Hsu 2017, chap. 4) (Garcia 1987, vol. 2) (Garcia 1987, 2:345) (Barnes 1998, 2:354-55, 3:29) (Fischer and Siple 1990, 212n3) (Hellman 2017, under "The Battleground")
Some journals omit page numbers in citations of other journal articles except when citing a direct quotation. 15 . 24
Additional material in text citations. The parentheses that enclose a text
citation may also include a comment, separated from the citation by a semicolon (see also 15.30) . (Mandolan 2017; t-tests are used here)
15.25
15.25
A U T H O R- D A T E R E F E R E N C E S
Text citations in relation t o surrounding text a n d punctuation. Except
at the end of block quotations (see 15.26) , author-date citations are usu ally placed just before a mark of punctuation though need not be if the sentence would otherwise not require it. See also 15.28. Recent literature has examined long-run price drifts following initial public of ferings (Ritter 1991; Loughran and Ritter 1995), stock splits (Ikenberry, Rankine, and Stice 1996), seasoned equity offerings (Loughran and Ritter 1995), and equity repurchases (Ikenberry, Lakonishok, and Vermaelen 1995). but There is evidence, for example, that the negative outcomes associated with fam ily structure instability are more pronounced for young children as compared with older children (Sigle-Rushton and McLanahan 2004) and for boys as compared with girls (Cooper et al. 2011).
Where the author's name appears in the text, it need not be repeated in the parenthetical citation. Note that the date should immediately follow the author's name, even ifthe name is used in the possessive. This usage serves the logic and economy of the author-date style. (For a reference to a person rather than the work, it may be appropriate to include the given name on first mention.) Fiorina et al. (2005) and Fischer and Hout (2006) reach more or less the same conclusions. In contrast, Abramowitz and Saunders (2005) suggest that the mass public is deeply divided between red states and blue states and between church goers and secular voters. Tufte's (2001) exce,llent book on chart design warns against a common error. 15.26
Text citations in relation t o direct quotations. Although a source cita
tion normally follows a direct quotation, it may precede the quotation especially if such a placement allows the date to appear with the author's name. As Edward Tufte points out, "A graphical element may carry data information and also perform a design function usually left to non-data-ink" (2001, 139) . or
As Edward Tufte (2001, 139) points out, "A graphical element may carry data in formation and also perform a design function usually left to non-data-ink."
When the source of a block quotation is given in parentheses at the end of the quotation, the opening parenthesis appears after the final punctu-
Reference Lists and Text Citations
15.28
ation mark of the quoted material. No period either precedes or follows the closing parenthesis. If you happen to be fishing, and you get a strike, and whatever it is starts off with the preliminaries of a vigorous fight; and by and by, looking down over the side through the glassy water, you see a rosy golden gleam, the mere specter of a fish, shining below in the clear depths; and when you look again a sort of glory of golden light flashes and dazzles as it circles nearer beneath and around and under the boat; . . . and you land a slim and graceful and impossibly beautiful three-foot goldfish, whose fierce and vivid yellow is touched around the edges with a violent red-when all these things happen to you, fortunate but bewildered fisherman, then you may know you have been fishing in the Galapagos Islands and have taken a Golden Grouper. (Pinchot 1930, 123)
See also 13.70-72. 15 . 2 7
Several references t o t h e same source. When the same page (or page range) in the same source is cited more than once in one paragraph, the parenthetical citation can be placed after the last reference or at the end of the paragraph (but preceding the final period) . When referring to dif ferent pages in the same source, however, include a full parenthetical ci tation at the first reference; subsequent citations need only include page numbers.
Complexion figures prominently in Morgan's descriptions. When Jasper compli ments his mother's choice of car (a twelve-cylinder Mediterranean roadster with leather and wood-grained interior) , "his cheeks blotch indignantly, painted by jealousy and rage" (Chaston 2000, 47) . On the other hand, his mother's mask never changes, her "even-tanned good looks" (56) , "burnished visage" (101) , and "air-brushed confidence" (2 11) providing the foil to the drama in her midst. 15.28
Syntactic considerations with text citations. An author-date citation
is a form of bibliographic shorthand that corresponds to a fully cited work; it does not refer to a person. Note how, in the examples in 15.25 and 15.26, the wording distinguishes between authors and works. A lo cution such as "in Smith 2009,'' though technically proper, is usually best avoided except as part of a parenthetical citation. To help readers identify the source citation, prefer "in Smith (2009) " or, for example, "in Smith's (1999) study." Note that square brackets should be used in parenthetical text references that require additional parentheses, as in the second example (see 6.101) .
15.29
AUTHOR-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
There are at least three works that satisfy the criteria outlined i n Smith's (1999) study (see Rowen 2006; Bettelthorp 2004a; Choi 2008) . These processes have, i n turn, affected the way many Latin Americans are treated in the United States (see, e.g., Haviland [2003, 767] on how US courts disregard the existence ofindigenous languages and "reluctantly" make allowance only for Spanish in translation services) . 15.29
Text citations o f works with more than three authors. For more than
three authors (or in some science publications, more than two} , only the name of the first author is used, followed by et al. (and others) . Note that et al. is not italicized in text citations. (Schonen et al. 2017) According to the data collected by Schonen et al. (2017), . . .
If a reference list includes another work of the same date that would also be abbreviated as "Schonen et al." but whose coauthors are different per sons or listed in a different order, the text citations must distinguish be tween them. In such cases, the first two authors (or the first three) should be cited, followed by et al. (Schonen, Baker, et al. 2017)
(Schonen, Brooks, et al. 2017)
Alternatively, a shortened title, enclosed in commas, may be added. In the following examples, et al. refers to different coauthors, so a, b, and so on cannot be used (see 15.20) : (Schonen et al., "Tilting at Windmills," 2017) (Schonen et al., "Gasoline Farmers," 2017)
For treatment of multiple authors in a bibliography or reference list, see 14.76, 15.9 (under " Book with Multiple Authors") , 15.16. 15.30
M u ltiple text references. Two or more references in a single parenthet ical citation are separated by semicolons. The order in which they are given may depend on what is being cited, and in what order, or it may reflect the relative importance of the items cited. If neither criterion ap plies, alphabetical or chronological order may be appropriate. Unless the order is prescribed by a particular journal style, the decision is the au thor's.
(Armstrong and Malacinski 1989; Beigl 1989; Pickett and White 1985)
Reference Lists and Text Citations
15.31
Additional works by the same author(s) are cited by date only, separated by commas except where page numbers are required. (Whittaker 1967, 1975; Wiens 1989a, 1989b) (Wong 1999, 328; 2000, 475; Garcia 1998, 67)
Additional references prefaced by "see also" follow any other references (see also 15.24) . (Guest e t al. 2006; see also Stolle e t al. 2008; Rahn e t al. 2009) 15 . 3 1
Author-date system with notes. Where footnotes o r endnotes are used
to supplement the author-date system, source citations within notes are treated in the same way as in text (see fig. 15.2) . 1. James Wilson has noted that "no politician ever lost votes by denouncing the bureaucracy" (1989, 235) . Yet little is actually ever done to bring major reforms to the system.
For the use of notes with legal-style citations, see 15.58. For more on footnotes and endnotes, see 14.24-60.
FIGURE 15.2.
note. See 15.31.
A sample of text with both parenthetical text citations and a foot
15.32
A U T H O R-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
Author-Date References: Special Cases 15.32
Items not necessarily covered in chapter 1 4 . The majority of examples in chapter 14 can be adapted to the author-date system simply by moving the year of publication to follow the author's name (see 15.3) . This sec tion focuses on special cases not necessarily covered there or for which a suitable author-date form may not be apparent.
Author's Name 15.33
Publ ications preferring initials for authors' names. The reference lists in some publications, especially journals in the natural sciences, always use initials instead of given names. When periods are used, space ap pears between them (Wells, H. G.) ; when periods are omitted, as in some journals' styles, no comma intervenes between last name and initials, and no space appears between the initials (Wells HG) . Chicago recom mends using the form of the name as it appears with the source unless otherwise required.
1 5 . 34
Author-date format for anonymous works (no listed author). If the au
thor, editor, translator, or the like for the work is unknown, the reference list entry should normally begin with the title. An initial article is ignored in alphabetizing. Text citations may refer to a short form of the title but must include the first word (other than an initial article) . See also 15.37, 15.39, 15.49, 14.79. Stanze in lode delta donna brutta. 1547. Florence. A True and Sincere Declaration ofthe Purpose and Ends ofthe Plantation Begun in Virginia, ofthe Degrees Which It Hath Received, and Means by Which It Hath Been Advanced. 1610. London. (True and Sincere Declaration 1610) (Stanze in lode delta donna brutta 1547) or (Stanze 1547)
As in notes and bibliographies, bracket a name in reference lists and text citations ifthe authorship is known or guessed at but was omitted on the title page (use a question mark to indicate uncertainty) . (Note that in the Hawkes example, both New York and Tea Party are hyphenated in the original source.) [Hawkes, James?] . 1834. A Retrospect of the Boston Tea-Party, with a Memoir of George R. T. Hewes. By a Citizen of New-York. New-York.
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.37
[Horsley, Samuel] . 1796. On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. London. ([Horsley] 1796)
([Hawkes?] 1834)
Works explicitly attributed to "Anonymous" (e.g., on the title page or at the head of the work) should be cited accordingly. Anonymous. 2015. "Our Family Secrets." Annals of Internal Medicine 163, no. 4 (August) : 321. https://doi.org/10.7326/M14-2168. (Anonymous 2015) 15.35
Pseudonyms in author-date references. Pseudonyms are indicated in reference lists in exactly the same manner as they are in bibliographies (see 14.80, 14.81) . Text citations should refer to the first-listed name and will omit the indication pseud.
Centinel [pseud.] . 1981. Letters. In The Complete Anti-Federalist, edited by Her bert J. Storing. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Stendhal [Marie-Henri Beyle] . 1925. The Charterhouse of Parma. Translated by C. K. Scott-Moncrieff. New York: Boni and Liveright. (Stendhal 1925)
(Centinel 1981)
See also 14.82. For examples of screen names in author-date references, see 15.52. 15.36
Ed itor in place o f author in text citations. For works listed by editor(s) or compiler(s) or translator(s) in a reference list, abbreviations such as ed. or eds., comp. or comps. , or trans. following the name are omitted in text citations.
Silverstein, Theodore, trans. 1974. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press. Soltes, Ori Z., ed. 1999. Georgia: Art and Civilization through the Ages. London: Philip Wilson. (Silverstein 1974) 15.37
(Soltes 1999)
Organization as author in author-date references. If a publication is
sued by an organization, association, or corporation carries no personal author's name on the title page, the organization may be listed as author
15.38
AUTHOR-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
i n the reference list, even i f i t i s also given a s publisher. To facilitate shorter parenthetical text citations, the organization may be listed under an abbreviation, in which case the entry must be alphabetized under that abbreviation (rather than the spelled-out name) in the reference list. ISO (International Organization for Standardization) . 1997. Information and Documentation-Rules for the Abbreviation of Title Words and Titles ofPublica tions. ISO 4:1997. Paris: ISO. NISO (National Information Standards Organization) . 2010. Bibliographic Ref erences. ANSI/NISO Z39.29-2005. Bethesda, MD: NISO, approved June 9, 2005; reaffirmed May 13, 2010. (NIS0 2010)°
(ISO 1997)
See also 15.55, 14.259.
Title of Work 15.38
Publ ications preferring sentence-style capitalization for titles. Espe cially in the natural sciences, many publications that use a version of the author-date style prefer sentence-style capitalization for cited titles (except, usually, the titles of journals, which are often abbreviated; see 15.46) . In sentence style, only the first word in a title or a subtitle and any proper names are capitalized (see 8.158) . Some publications do not capitalize the first word in a subtitle unless it is a proper noun. Works that prefer this style also may not use quotation marks for chapter or article _ titles or italics for titles of books (and sometimes journals) . (Such usage is normally limited to reference lists; in the text, the use of headline style capitalization, quotation marks, and italics for titles is the norm for English-language publications.) Though Chicago recommends headline style and the use of quotation marks or italics in both its systems of doc umentation, these forms can be readily adapted to other, sparer systems.
15.39
Citing author-date sources by title. Works for which no author is cred ited or can be determined (including any organization or publisher as author; see 15.37, 15.49) are listed by title in a reference list entry. In the text, a short version of the title (up to four words) may be used. Unlike short forms for titles in notes and bibliography style (see 14.33) , short forms for in-text references must include the first word of the title (aside from any article) to facilitate alphabetical lookup. For examples, see 15.34.
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.40
Books E D I T I O N , V O L U M E , OR C O L L E C T I O N
15.40
Reprint editions and modern editions-more than one date. When cit ing a reprint or modern edition in the author-date system, it is sometimes desirable to include the original date of publication. Whether or not any information about the original publication is included, the original date is listed first, in parentheses. If the pagination of the original edition does not match that of the reprint, indicate the edition cited.
Austen, Jane. (1813) 2003. Pride and Prejudice. London: T. Egerton. Reprint, New York: Penguin Classics. Citations refer to the Penguin edition. Darwin, Charles. (1859) 1964. On the Origin ofSpecies. Facsimile of the first edi tion, with an introduction by Ernest Mayr. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Univer sity Press. Maitland, Frederic W. (1898) 1998. Roman Canon Law in the Church ofEngland. Reprint, Union, NJ: Lawbook Exchange.
The parentheses are rendered as square brackets in the in-text citation (see 6.101) . (Austen [1813] 2003)
(Darwin [1859] 1964)
(Maitland [1898] 1998)
For more than one work by the same author, the first date determines placement in the reference list (see 15.18) . Maitland, Frederic W. (1898) 1998. Roman Canon Law in the Church ofEngland. Reprint, Union, NJ: Lawbook Exchange. . (1909) 1926. Equity, Also the Forms ofAction at Common Law: Two Courses ofLectures. Edited by A. H. Chaytor and W. J. Whittaker. Reprint, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
--
When the original date is less important to the discussion, use the date of the modern source. The date of original publication may be included at the end of the reference list entry but need not be. Trollope, Anthony. 1977. The Claverings. With a new introduction by Norman Donaldson. New York: Dover. First published 1866-67. . 1983. He Knew He Was Right. 2 vols. in one. New York: Dover. First published 1869.
--
(Trollope 1977)
(Trollope 1983)
15.41
15.41
A U T H O R-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
Multivolume works publ ished over more than one year. When a multi volume, multiyear work is included as an entry in the reference list (as in the Tillich example below) , the range of dates for the work as a whole fol lows the author's name. The corresponding text citation should include a volume number with any references to specific page numbers or to cite a specific volume (see also 15.23) . When an individual volume is listed (as in the Hayek example) , the date for that volume should follow the name of the author; information about the work as a whole follows information about the individual volume. If the work has not yet been completed, the date of the first volume is followed by an en dash (with no space between the en dash and the punctuation that follows) . Text citations of volumes listed individually in the reference list do not include the volume num ber, even with references to specific page numbers. See also 14.116-22. For en dashes with numbers, see 6.78, 6.79, 9.64.
Hayek, F. A. 2011. The Constitution of Liberty: The Definitive Edition. Edited by Ronald Hamowy. Vol. 17 of The Collected Works ofF. A. Hayek, edited by Bruce Caldwell. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988-. Tillich, Paul. 1951-63. Systematic Theology. 3 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. (Tillich 1951-63, 1:133) 15.42
(Tillich 1951-63, vol. 2)
(Hayek 2011, 329)
Cross-references to multiauthor books in reference lists. To avoid re peating information, individual contributions to an edited volume may include cross-references to an entry for the volume as a whole. Note that cross-references to other titles in the reference list take the form of text citations but without any parentheses.
Draper, Joan E. 1987. "Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chicago." In Zukowsky 1987, 107-19. Harrington, Elaine. 1987. "International Influences on Henry Hobson Richard son's Glessner House." In Zukowsky 1987, 189-207. Zukowsky, John, ed. 1987. Chicago Architecture, 1872-1922: Birth ofa Metropolis. Munich: Prestel-Verlag in association with the Art Institute of Chicago.
This approach is best used only if more than a few individual contribu tions to the same volume are cited or if the volume itself is also cited in the text. Otherwise, include full publication details in the entry for each individual contribution. See also 14.107. Draper, Joan E. 1987. "Paris by the Lake: Sources of Burnham's Plan of Chi cago." In Chicago Architecture, 1872-1922: Birth ofa Metropolis, edited by John
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15 .45
Zukowsky, 107-19. Munich: Prestel-Verlag in association with the Art Institute of Chicago. 15.43
Author-date style for letters in published collections. In the author
date system, letters in published collections should be cited by the date of the collection. The dates of individual correspondence should be wo ven into the text. The material in the examples at 14.111 could be cited as follows: Adams, Henry. 1930. Letters ofHenry Adams, 1858-1891. Edited by Worthington Chauncey Ford. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. White, E. B. 1976. Letters ofE. B. White. Edited by Dorothy Lobrano Guth. New York: Harper & Row. In a letter to Charles Milnes Gaskell from London, March 30, 1868 (Adams 1930, 141), Adams wrote . . . White (1976, 273) sent Ross an interoffice memo on May 2, 1946, pointing out that . . .
FA C T S O F P U B L I C A T I O N
15 .44
No date of publication in author-date references. When the publication date of a book or other work cannot be ascertained, the abbreviation n.d. takes the place of the year in the reference list entry and text citations. Though it follows a period in the reference list, n.d. remains lowercased to avoid conflation with the author's name; in text citations, it is pre ceded by a comma. A guessed-at date may be substituted (in brackets, with a question mark to indicate uncertainty) . See also 14.132, 15.18.
Nano, Jasmine L. [1750?] . Title ofWork . . . . n.d. Title ofAnother Work . . .
--
(Nano (1750?])
(Nano, n.d.)
For the use of n.d. for website content cited by access date, see 15.50. See also 15.54. 15.45
n.d. (see 15.44) , forth coming can stand in place of the date in author-date references. It should be reserved for books under contract with a publisher and already titled but for which the date of publication is not yet known. If page numbers "Forthcoming" in author-date references. Like
15.46
A U T H O R-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
are available, they should b e given a s needed. Books not under contract are treated as unpublished manuscripts (see 14.216) . In text citations, forthcoming is preceded by a comma. See also 14.146. Faraday, Carry. Forthcoming. " Protean Photography." In Seven Trips beyond the Asteroid Belt, edited by James Oring. Cape Canaveral, FL: Launch Press. (Faraday, forthcoming)
Periodicals 15.46
Publications preferring abbreviations for journal titles. In many publi cations in the sciences, journal titles are abbreviated (often with periods omitted) unless they consist of only one word. ISO 4, a standard devel oped by the International Organization for Standardization, is the main authority for abbreviations of words in serial titles (bibliog. 4.7) . Stan dard abbreviations for scientific journals may also be found in BIOSIS Serial Sources and through the NLM Catalog, a service of the US National Library of Medicine, among other resources (bibliog. 4.5) . For more de tailed information, including lists of additional resources, see the latest edition of Scientific Style and Format or the AMA Manual of Style (bib liog. 1.1) .
15.47
Parentheses or comma with issue number. Though authors are encour aged to record all available data for their manuscripts (see 15.9, under "Journal Article"), sometimes only a volume and issue number will be available (and il) some cases, it may be a publisher's preferred style not to record a month or season) . When that is the case, the issue number is placed in parentheses. When only an issue number is used, it is set off by commas and not enclosed in parentheses. Compare 15.48.
Glass, Jennifer, and Philip Levchak. 2014. "Red States, Blue States, and Divorce: Understanding the Impact of Conservative Protestantism on Regional Varia tion in Divorce Rates." American Journal ofSociology 119 (4) : 1002-46. https:// doi.org/10.1086/674703. Meyerovitch, Eva. 1959. "The Gnostic Manuscripts of Upper Egypt." Diogenes, no. 25, 84-117. 15.48
Colon with volume n u mber. Authors are encouraged to record all
available data for their manuscripts (see 15.9, under "Journal Article") . Sometimes, however, there is no issue number, or it may be intention ally omitted (usually according to a publisher's preferred style) , either
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.50
for a reference to a journal that is paginated continuously throughout a volume or when a month or season is included. When there is no issue number, and where no month or season is recorded, the page number reference follows the volume number, separated by a colon and with no intervening space. If the month or season is included, it is enclosed in parentheses, and a space follows the colon. Compare 15.47. Gunderson, Alex R., and Manuel Leal. 2015. "Patterns of Thermal Constraint on Ectotherm Activity." American Naturalist 185:653-64. https://doi.org/10.1086 /680849. but Gunderson, Alex R., and Manuel Leal. 2015. "Patterns of Thermal Constraint on Ectotherm Activity." American Naturalist 185 (May) : 653-64. https://doi.org /10.1086/680849. 15.49
Newspapers and magazi nes in reference lists. It is usually sufficient to cite newspaper and magazines articles entirely within the text-a strat egy that is identical in form in both systems of citation. See 14.198. If a reference list entry is needed, repeat the year of publication with the month and day to avoid any confusion.
Kauffman, Stanley. 1989. Review ofA Dry White Season (film), directed by Euzhan Paley. New Republic, October 9, 1989, 24-25. Meikle, James. 2015. "Nearly 75% of Men and 65% of Women in UK to Be Over weight by 2030-Study." Guardian (UK edition), May 5, 2015. http://www.the guardian.com/society/2015/may/05/obesity-crisis-projections-uk-2030-men -women.
If a newspaper article is unsigned, the title of the newspaper stands in place of the author. New York Times. 2002. "In Texas, Ad Heats Up Race for Governor." July 30, 2002. (New York Times 2002)
See also 15.34, 15.37.
Websites, Biogs, and Social Media 15.50
Websites and access dates in author-date format. Chicago requires an
access date in citations of websites and other sources consulted online only if no date of publication or revision can be determined from the
15.51
A U T H O R- D A T E R E F E R E N C E S
source (see 14.12) . I n those cases-that is, when only a n access date is used-record n.d. as the date of publication in the reference list entry and for the in-text citation. To avoid conflation with the name of the author, n.d. is always lowercase (see also 15.44). Alliance for Linguistic Diversity. n.d. "Balkan Romani." Endangered Languages. Accessed April 6, 2016. http://www.endangeredlanguages.com/lang/5342. CivicPlus Content Management System. n.d. City of Ithaca, New York (website). Accessed April 6, 2016. http://www.cityofithaca.org/. (Alliance for Linguistic Diversity, n.d.)
(CivicPlus, n.d.)
For sources that include a date of publication or revision, use the year of publication in the reference list entry. Repeat the year with the month and day to avoid any confusion. Google. 2016. "Privacy Policy." Privacy & Terms. Last modified March 25, 2016. http://www.google.com/policies/privacy/. (Google 2016)
See also 15.37. 15.51
Citing biogs i n author-date format. Blogs and blog posts are cited in
author-date format by adapting the recommendations outlined in 14.208. It is often sufficient to cite blog posts, like newspaper and maga zine articles, entirely within the text (see 15.49). If a reference list entry is needed, repeat the year of publication with the month and day to avoid any confusion. · Germano, William. 2014. " Futurist Shock." Lingua Franca (blog) , Chronicle of Higher Education. February 15, 2017. http://www.chronicle.com/blogs/lingua franca/2017/02/15/futurist-shock/. (Germano 2017)
Comments are not included in reference lists; instead, they should be cited in the text, in reference to the related post. A comment on Germano (2017) from Word Obsessed (on March 15, 2017) insisted that . . .
References to an entire blog should likewise be made in the text rather than in a reference list. The URL can be listed in parentheses.
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.52
Lingua Franca, a blog published by the Chronicle ofHigher Education (http://www .chronicle.com/blogs/linguafranca/) . . .
For the use of screen names in author-date format, see 15.52. 15 . 5 2
Citing social media content in author-date format. Social media con tent can be cited in author-date format by adapting the recommenda tions outlined and exemplified in 14.209. Like citations for text messages and other personal communications (see 15.53), citations of social media content can often be limited to the text. A frequently cited account or an extensive thread related to a single subject or post, however, may be included in a reference list. In the reference list, include the real name and a screen name, if both are available. In the text, cite the name under which the entry is listed (usually the real name unless only a screen name is available) . Repeat the year with the month and day in the reference list to avoid any confusion. See also 15.35.
Chicago Manual of Style. 2015. "Is the world ready for singular they? We thought so back in 1993." Face book, April 17, 2015. https://www.facebook.com/Chicago Manualjposts/10152906193679151. Diaz, Junot. 2016. "Always surprises my students when I tell them that the 'real' medieval was more diverse than the fake ones most of us consume." Face book, February 24, 2016. https://www. facebook.com/junotdiaz.writer/posts /972495572815454. O' Brien, Conan (@ConanOBrien) . 2015. "In honor of Earth Day, I'm recycHng my tweets." Twitter, April 22, 2015, 11:10 a.m. https://twitter.com/ConanOBrien /status/590940792967016448. Souza, Pete (@petesouza) . 2016. "President Obama bids farewell to President Xi of China at the conclusion of the Nuclear Security Summit." Instagram photo, April 1, 2016. https://www.instagram.com/p/BDrmfXTtNCt/. (Chicago Manual of Style 2015) (Diaz 2016) (O'Brien 2015) (Souza 2016)
Comments are cited only in the text, in reference to the related post. Michele Truty agreed, saying that "we do need a gender-neutral pronoun" (April 17, 2015, comment on Chicago Manual of Style 2015) .
Direct o r private messages shared through social media and received by the author are cited as personal communications (see 15.53) .
15.53
A U T H O R-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
Interviews and Personal Communications 15 . 5 3
Unpublished interviews a n d personal communications. In a paren thetical citation, the terms personal communication (or pers. comm.), un published data, and the like may be used after the name (s) of the per son(s) concerned, following a comma. If the medium is important and not mentioned in the text, it may be incorporated into the parenthetical reference. Reference list entries are unneeded, though each person cited must be fully identified elsewhere in the text. Initials may be used for first names. Unless it is mentioned in the text, a date should be added in parentheses, following a comma. The abbreviation et al. should be avoided in such citations.
(Julie Cantor, pers. comm.) (Jonathan Lee, Facebook direct message to author, May 5, 2017) (Brenda Hasbrouck, text message to author, May 5, 2017) (A. P. MeJ!ler, unpublished data; C. R. Brown and M. B. Brown, unpublished data)
Manuscript Collections 1 5 . 54
Manuscript collections in author-date format. When citing manuscript collections in author-date format, it is unnecessary to use n.d. (no date) in place of the date. Dates ofindividual items should be mentioned in the text, when applicable.
Egmont Manuscripts. Phillipps Collection. University of Georgia Library. Kallen, Horace. Papers. YIVO Institute for Jewish Research, New York. Oglethorpe wrote to the trustees on January 13, 1733 (Egmont Manuscripts) , to say . . . Alvin Johnson, in a memorandum prepared sometime in 1937 (Kallen Papers, file 36), observed that . . .
If only one item from a collection has been mentioned in the text, how ever, the entry may begin with the writer's name (if known) . In such a case, the use of n.d. may be appropriate. See also 15.44. Dinkel, Joseph. n.d. Description of Louis Agassiz written at the request of Eliz abeth Cary Agassiz. Agassiz Papers. Houghton Library, Harvard University. (Dinkel, n.d.)
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.57
Patents and Standards 15.55
Patents or other documents cited b y more than o n e date. Cite patents and other documents that include more than one date as follows (note that the year of issue is repeated to avoid ambiguity) :
Iizuka, Masanori, and Hideki Tanaka. 1986. Cement admixture. US Patent 4,586,960, filed June 26, 1984, and issued May 6, 1986.
For examples of standards cited in author-date format, see 15.37.
Citations Taken from Secondary Sources 15.56
"Quoted in" in author-date references. To cite a source from a second ary source ("quoted in . . . ") is generally to be discouraged, since authors are expected to have examined the works they cite. If an original source is unavailable, however, mention the original author and date in the text, and cite the secondary source in the reference list entry.
Costello, Bonnie. 1981. Marianne Moore: Imaginary Possessions. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. In Louis Zukofsky's "Sincerity and Objectification," from the February 1931 issue of Poetry magazine (quoted in Costello 1981) . . .
Audiovisual Recordings and Other Multimedia 15.57
Citing record ings a n d multimedia in author-date format. Audiovisual recordings and other multimedia can be cited in author-date format by adapting the recommendations and examples outlined and exemplified in 14.261-68. (In many cases, however, it will be more appropriate to list such materials in running text and group them in a separate section or discography; see 14.262.) Older sources on outdated media are more likely to be consulted in the form of a digital copy; though authors should cite the format consulted, it is generally useful to give information about the original source, if available. Moreover, the date of the original re cording should be privileged in the citation. Whom to list as "author" depends on the focus of the citation and is a matter of authorial discre tion.
15.57
AUTHOR-DATE R E F E R E N C E S
Coolidge, Calvin. [1920?] . "Equal Rights" (speech). I n "American Leaders Speak: Recordings from World War I and the 1920 Election, 1918-1920." Library of Congress. Copy of an undated 78 rpm disc, RealAudio and WAV formats, 3:45. http://memory.loc.gov/ammem/nfhtml/. Grande, Lance, and Allison Augustyn. 2011. Gems and Jewels. iPad ed., v. 1.01. Touchpress. Adapted from Lance Grande and Allison Augustyn, Gems and Gemstones: Timeless Natural Beauty of the Mineral World (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009). Holiday, Billie, vocalist. 1958. "I'm a Fool to Want You." By Joel Herron, Frank Sinatra, and Jack Wolf. Recorded February 20, 1958, with Ray Ellis. Track 1 on Lady in Satin. Columbia CL 1157, 331/3 rpm. Lyiscott, Jamila. 2014. "3 Ways to Speak English." Filmed February 2014 in New York, NY. TED video, 4:29. https://www.ted.com/talks/jamila_lyiscott_3_ways _to_speak_english. Pink Floyd. 1970. Atom Heart Mother. Capitol CDP 7 46381 2, 1990, compact disc. Rihanna [Robin Fenty] , vocalist. 2007. "Umbrella." Featuring Jay-Z. MP3 audio. Track 1 on Rihanna, Good Girl Gone Bad. Island Def Jam. Rovio Entertainment. 2014. Angry Birds Transformers. V. 1.4.25. Rovio Entertain ment. Android 4.0 or later. Soundtrack by Vince DiCola and Kenny Meriedeth. Strayed, Cheryl. 2012. Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail. Read by Bernadette Dunne. New York: Random House Audio. Audible audio ed., 13 hr., 6 min. Weingartner, Felix von, conductor. 1936. 150 fahre Wiener Philharmoniker. Prei ser Records PR90113 (mono) , 1992, compact disc. Includes Beethoven's Sym phony no. 3 in E-fiat Major and Symphony no. 8 in F Major. (Coolidge [1920?]) (Grande and Augu�tyn 2011) (Holiday 1958) (Lyiscott 2014) (Pink Floyd 1970, track 2)
(Rihanna 2007) (Rovio Entertainment 2014) (Strayed 2012) (Weingartner 1936)
Live performances, which cannot be consulted as such by readers, are generally not cited in a reference list. Instead, incorporate the details about the performance into the text. See also 14.266. In a performance of Lin-Manuel Miranda's Hamilton at the Richard Rodgers The atre in New York on February 2, 2016, . . .
Author-Date References: Special Cases
15.59
Legal and Public Documents 15.58
Using notes for legal a n d public documents. Legal publications use notes for documentation and few include bibliographies. Any work us ing the author-date style that needs to do more than mention the occa sional source in the text should therefore use supplementary footnotes or endnotes; see 15.31. This advice does not extend to documents that are collected in secondary sources or published as freestanding works (see 14.291), since these are readily adaptable to the author-date system (see 15.3) . For a full discussion of legal and public documents, including examples, see 14.269-305.
15.59
Citing legal a n d public documents i n text. Works with only a handful
of citations to legal and public documents may be able to limit these to the text, using the forms detailed in 14.269-305. Note that in legal style, parentheses within parentheses are used (see also 6.97) . In NLRB v. Somerville Construction Co. (206 F.3d 752 (7th Cir. 2000)), the court ruled that . . . In the Congressional Record for that day (147 Cong. Rec. 19,000 (2001)), Senator Burns is quoted as saying that . . .
In order to avoid such awkward constructions in the text, however, Chi cago advises using notes for citations to legal and public documents whenever possible (see 14.271) .
16 · Indexes OVERVIEW 16.1 C O M P O N E NTS O F AN I N D E X 16.9 Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators 16.9 Cross-References 16.15 Run-In versus Indented Indexes 16.24
G E N E RAL P R I N C I P L E S OF I N D E X I N G 16.29 I N D E X I N G P R O P E R NAMES AND VARIANTS 16.32 I N D E X I N G T I T L E S OF PUBLICATIONS AND O T H E R WORKS 16.47 ALPHABETI Z I N G 16.56 Letter by Letter or Word by Word? 16.58 General Rules of Alphabetizing 16.62 Subentries 16.68 Personal Names 16.71 Non-English Personal Names 16.75 Names of Organizations and Businesses 16.88 Names of Places 16.90 P U N C T UAT I N G I N D E X E S : A S U M MARY 16.94 T H E M E C H A N I C S OF I N D E X I N G 16.101 Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions 16.101 When to Begin 16.108 What Parts of the Work to Index 16.109 Marking Proofs and Preparing Entries 16.117 Editing and Refining the Entries 16.126 Submitting the Index 16.131 E D I T I N G AN I N D E X C O M P I L E D BY S O M E O N E E L S E 16.132 TYPO G RAP H I C AL C O N S I D ERAT I O N S FOR I N D E X E S 16.135 EXAM P L E S O F I N D E XES 16.141
16.1
INDEXES
Overview 16.1
T h e back-of-the-book index a s model. This chapter offers basic guide
lines for preparing and editing an alphabetically arranged index to a book-length work. Much of the advice-modeled on the requirements for a book with fixed page numbers or other locators (see 16.12)-applies also to indexes for electronic formats that lack such mileposts (see 16.13) . General principles o f indexing are covered, a s are the specifics o f Chica go's preferred style in matters of typography, alphabetizing, and the like. 16.2
W h y i ndex? In this age of searchable text, the need for an index made with human input is sometimes questioned. But a good index can do what a plain search cannot: it gathers all the substantive terms and sub jects of the work, sorts them alphabetically, provides cross-references to and from related terms, and includes specific page numbers or other lo cators or, for electronic formats, direct links to the text. This painstaking intellectual labor serves readers of any longer work, whether it is search able or not. For searchable texts, an index provides insurance against fruitless queries and unintended results. In a word, a good index makes the text more accessible.
16.3
W h o should index a work? The ideal indexer sees the work as a whole,
understands the emphasis of the various parts and their relation to the whole, and knows-or guesses-what readers of the particular work are likely to look for and what headings they will think of. The indexer should be widely read, scrupulous in handling detail, analytically minded, well acquainted with publishing practices, and capable of meeting almost impossible deadlines. Although authors know better than anyone else their subject matter and the audience to whom the work is addressed, not all can look at their work through the eyes of a potential reader. Nor do many authors have the technical skills, let alone the time, necessary to prepare a good index that meets the publisher's deadline. Some authors produce excellent indexes. Others would do better to enlist the aid of a professional indexer. 16.4
The indexer and dead lines. Most book indexes have to be made between the time page proofs are issued and the time they are returned to the typesetter-usually about four weeks. (For an illustration of how index ing fits into the overall publishing process for books, see 2.2.) An author preparing his or her own index will have to proofread as well as index the work in that short time span. Good indexing requires reflection; the indexer needs to stop frequently and decide whether the right choices
Overview
16.7
have been made. A professional indexer, familiar with the publisher's re quirements, may be better equipped for such reflection. For journals that publish a volume index (see 1.110), the indexer may have several months to prepare a preliminary index, adding entries as new issues of the jour nal arrive. The final issue in the volume is typically indexed from page proofs, however, and the indexer may have as little as a week to work on the last issue and prepare the final draft of the index. 16.5
T h e role o f software i n indexi ng. A concordance-or a complete list of
terms (typically minus articles, prepositions, and other irrelevant ele ments) and their page locations or frequency of use-can be produced automatically. But a concordance is not the same as an index. Most in dexes of the type described in this chapter are produced from scratch, typically from paginated page proofs, either electronic or hard copy, gen erated by a page-layout program. Word processors are typically used in entering and editing terms and locators in a separate document and can provide rudimentary help in the process of sorting entries and managing cross-references. Dedicated word processors for indexers can automate many of the formatting and cross-referencing tasks particular to index ing and are a good investment especially for professional indexers (see 16.104) . See also 16.7, 16.13. 16.6
Single versus multiple indexes. A single, comprehensive index-one that includes concepts and names of persons and other subjects-is recommended for most works. Certain publications, however, such as journals and lengthy scientific works that cite numerous authors of other studies, may include an index of named authors (see 16.115) in addition to a subject index. An anthology may include an author-and-title index, and a collection of poetry or hymns may have an index of first lines as well as an index of titles. It is generally an advantage if two or more in dexes appearing in one work are visually distinct from one another so that users know immediately where they are. In a biological work, for ex ample, the headings in the index of names will all be in roman type and will begin with capital letters, and there will be no subentries, whereas most of the headings in the general subject index will begin lowercase and many subentries will appear; and if there is a taxonomic index, many headings will be in italics. Separate running heads should be used, indicating the title of each index (e.g., Index of Names, Index of Sub jects) .
16. 7
Embedded indexes. An embedded index consists of key terms anchored with underlying codes to particular points in the text of an electronic pub lication. These terms can facilitate a reader's queries to a search engine
16.8
INDEXES
i n much the same way that a good subject index gathers keywords under subject headings to increase the chances that a reader will be led only to the relevant areas of a text. For example, a search for the word "because" in a properly coded online encyclopedia might lead to those passages that discuss the Beatles' Abbey Road song " Because" rather than to every instance of the omnipresent conjunction. The principles of selection for embedded indexes are similar to those for traditional back-of-the-book indexes. Many journal publishers, especially in the sciences, rely on stan dard keyword vocabularies and have largely done away with traditional indexes. On the other hand, many book publishers anchor their back of-the-book index entries to the electronic files that drive publication in print and other formats in order to facilitate hyperlinked indexes for e-book formats (see also 16.13) . 16.8
Resources for indexers. For greatly expanded coverage of the present guidelines, along with alternative methods, consult the second edition of Nancy Mulvany's Indexing Books (bibliog. 2.5) . Anyone likely to prepare a number of indexes should acquire that work. For further reference, see Hans H. Wellisch, Indexingfrom A to Z, and Linda K. Fetters, Handbook ofIndexing Techniques (bibliog. 2.5) .
Components of an Index Main Headings, Subentries, and Locators 16.9
M a i n headings for index entries. The main heading of an index entry
is normally a no-µn or noun phrase-the name of a person, a place, an object, or an abstraction. An adjective alone should almost never con stitute a heading; it should rather be paired with a noun to form a noun phrase. A noun phrase is sometimes inverted to allow the keyword-the word a reader is most likely to look under-to appear first. The heading is typically followed by page (or paragraph) numbers (see 16.12) and some times a cross-reference (see 16.15-23) . For capitalization, see 16.11. agricultural collectivization, 143-46, 198 Aron, Raymond, 312-14 Bloomsbury group, 269 Brest-Litovsk, Treaty of, 61, 76, 85 Cold War, 396-437 Communist Party (American), 425
Communist Party (British), 268 imperialism, American, 393, 403 police, Soviet secret. See Soviet secret police war communism, 90, 95, 125 World War I, 34-61 Yalta conference, 348, 398
Components ofan lndex 16.10
16.12
Index subentries. An entry that requires more than five or six locators
(page or paragraph numbers) is usually broken up into subentries to spare readers unnecessary excursions. A subentry, like an entry, consists of a heading (usually referred to as a subheading) , page references, and, rarely, cross-references. Subheadings often form a grammatical relation ship with the main heading, whereby heading and subheading combine into a single phrase, as in the first example below. Other subheadings form divisions or units within the larger category of the heading, as in the second example. Both kinds can be used within one index. See also 16.127. For sub-subentries, see 16.27, 16.28. capitalism: and American pro Sovietism, 273, 274; bourgeoisie as symbol of, 4, 13; as creation of soci ety, 7; Khrushchev on burying, 480; student protests against, 491, 493
Initial lowercase letters in m a i n head i ngs a n d subheadings. The first word of a main heading is normally capitalized only if capitalized in text-a proper noun (as in the second example in 16.10), a genus name, the title of a work, and so on. Traditionally, all main headings in an index were capitalized. Chicago recommends this practice only where the sub entries are so numerous that capitalized main headings make for easier navigation. Indexes in the sciences, however, should generally avoid ini tial capitals because the distinction between capitalized and lowercased terms in the text may be crucial. Subheadings are always lowercased unless the keyword is capitalized in text (like " Khrushchev" in the first example in 16.10 and all the subentries in the second example) .
16.12
Locators i n indexes. In a printed work or PDF, locators are usually page numbers, though they can also be paragraph numbers (as in this manual) , section numbers, or the like. When discussion of a subject continues for more than a page, paragraph, or section, the first and last numbers (in clusive numbers) are given: 34-36 (if pages), 10.36-41 (if paragraphs) , and so on (see 16.14) . The abbreviations ff. or et seq. should never be used in an index. Scattered references to a subject over several pages or sec tions are usually indicated by separate locators (34, 35, 36; or 8.18, 8.20, 8.21) . Though the term passim has often been used to indicate scattered references over a number of not necessarily sequential pages or sections (e.g., 78-88 passim) , individual locators are preferred. For use of the en dash, see 6.78.
16.13
INDEXES
1 6 . 13
Linked indexes for e-books and other electronic formats. At a mini mum, indexes destined for e-book formats should be linked to the text. Page number data for a printed format can provide the basis of such links, and publishers are encouraged to include this data in their elec tronic publication formats. In formats with reftowable text, however, the actual place in the text may be several screens beyond the location of the first "page." For this reason, index entries are best linked directly to the passage of text to which they refer. (In works like this manual, links can be made directly to numbered paragraphs.) This approach, though it re quires considerable intervention on the part of the publisher or indexer, produces a better experience for the reader. A detailed specification for indexes using EPUB, a standard format for e-books, is available from the International Digital Publishing Forum.
1 6 . 14
Inclusive numbers in indexes. Publishers vary in their preferences for the form of inclusive numbers (also known as continuing numbers) . Al though the simplest and most foolproof system is to give the full form of numbers everywhere (e.g., 234-235) , Chicago prefers its traditional sys tem (presented below) , which is efficient and unambiguous. The system is followed in all examples in this chapter. Whichever form is used in the text should be used in the index as well.
First number Less than 100
Second number Use all digits
Examples 3-10 71-72 96-117
100 or multiples oflOO
Use all digits
100-104 1100-1113
101 through 109, 201 through 209, etc.
Use changed part only
101-8 808-33 1103-4
110 through 199, 210 through 299, etc.
Use two digits unless more are needed to in clude all changed parts
Roman numerals are always given in full-for example, xxv-xxviii, cvi cix. In an index that refers to section numbers, the same principles apply
Components ofan lndex
16.17
as for page numbers (e.g., 16.9-14, 16.141-45) . For use of the en dash be tween numerals, see 6.78; see also 9.60.
Cross-References 16.15
Cross-references in indexes-general principles. Cross-references are of two main kinds-see references and see also references. Each is treated differently according to whether it refers to a main heading or to a sub heading. See and see also are set in italics (but see 16.22) . In electronic publication formats, cross-references should link to the terms to which they refer. Cross-references should be used with discretion; an over abundance, besides irritating the reader, may signal the need for consol idation of entries.
16.16
"See" references a n d "double posting." See references direct a reader from, for example, an informal term to a technical one, a pseudonym to a real name, an inverted term to a noninverted one. They are also used for variant spellings, synonyms, aliases, abbreviations, and so on. The choice of the term under which the full entry appears depends largely on where readers are most likely to look. See references should therefore be given only where the indexer believes many readers might otherwise miss the full entry. Further, the indexer and anyone editing an index must make certain that no see reference merely leads to another see refer ence (a "blind cross-reference"). If, on the other hand, the entry to which the see reference refers is about the same length as the see reference itself, it is often more useful to omit the see reference and simply give the page numbers under both headings. Such duplication (or "double posting") will save readers a trip.
FBI (Federal Bureau of lnvestigation), 145-48 Federal Bureau of Investigation, 145-48 rather than Federal Bureau oflnvestigation. See FBI
See also 16.46. 1 6 . 17
"See" references following a main heading. When a see reference fol lows a main heading, as it usually does, it is preceded by a period and See
16.18
INDEXES
i s capitalized. I f two o r more see references are needed, they are arranged in alphabetical order and separated by semicolons. They reflect the cap italization and word order of the main heading. adolescence. See teenagers; youth American Communist Party. See Communist Party (American) baking soda. See sodium bicarbonate Clemens, Samuel. See Twain, Mark Den Haag ('s Gravenhage) . See Hague, The Lunt, Mrs. Alfred. See Fontanne, Lynn Mormons. See Latter day Saints, Church of Jesus Christ of .
16.18
-
Roman Catholic Church. See Catholicism The Hague. See Hague, The Turwyn. See Terouenne universities. See Harvard University; Princeton University; University of Chicago van Gogh, Vincent. See Gogh, Vincent van Virgin Queen. See Elizabeth I
"See" references following a subheading. When a see reference follows
a subheading, it is put in parentheses and see is lowercased. statistical material, 16, 17, 89; as on line supplement (see supplements, online) ; proofreading, 183
This usage applies to both run-in and indented indexes, and to sub subentries. See 16.27, 16.28. 1 6 . 19
"See" references to a subheading. Most see references are to a main en try, as in the examples in 16.17. When a cross-reference directs readers to a subentry under. another main heading, see under may be used.
lace making. See under Bruges Pride and Prejudice. See under Austen, Jane
An alternative, to be used when a see under reference might fail to direct readers to the right spot, is to drop the word under and add the wording of the subheading, following a colon. (Although a comma is sometimes used, a colon is preferred.) The wording of the cross-reference must correspond to that of the relevant subheading so that readers can find it quickly. lace making. See Bruges: lace making Pride and Prejudice. See Austen, Jane: Pride and Prejudice
Components ofan lndex 16.20
16.22
"See also" references. See also references are placed at the end of an en try when additional information can be found in another entry. In run-in indexes, they follow a period; in indented indexes, they appear on a sepa rate line (see 16.26) . See is capitalized, and both words are in italics. If the cross-reference is to a subentry under another main heading, the words see also under may be used. If two or more see also references are needed, they are arranged in alphabetical order and separated by semicolons. As with see referenc�s, see also references must never lead to a see reference.
copyright, 95-100. See also permission to reprint; source notes Maya: art of, 236-43; cities of, 178; present day, 267. See also under Yucatan
If see also under does not work in a particular context-for example, when one of the see also references is to a main entry and another to a subentry-the word under should be dropped and the wording of the sub entry added after a colon. Maya: art of, 236-43; cities of, 178. See also Mexican art; Yucatan: Maya
When a see also reference comes at the end of a subentry-a rare oc currence, and somewhat distracting-it is put in parentheses and see is lowercased. equality: as bourgeois ideal, 5-6, 7; contractual quality, 13; in democra cy's definition, 24 (see also democ racy) ; League of the Rights of Man debate on, 234-35 16.21
Correspondence between cross-references a n d headings. All cross
referenced headings (and subheadings, ifused) should generally be cited in full, with capitalization, inversion, and punctuation exactly as in the heading referred to. But a long heading may occasionally be shortened if no confusion results. For example, in an index with frequent references to Beethoven, " See also Beethoven, Ludwig van" could be shortened to " See also Beethoven" if done consistently. 16.22
Italics for "see," "see also," a n d s o forth. The words see, see under, and see also are normally italicized. But if what follows (e.g., a book title or
16.23
INDEXES
a word i n another language) i s i n italics, the words are preferably set in roman to distinguish them from the rest of the cross-reference. This is not necessary when they follow italics. Austen, Jane. See Pride and Prejudice but Pride and Prejudice. See Austen, Jane 16.23
Generic cross-references. Both see and see also references may include generic references; that is, they may refer to a type of heading rather than to several specific headings. The entire cross-reference is then set in italics.
public buildings. See names ofindivid ual buildings sacred writings, 345-46, 390-401, 455-65. See also specific titles
When generic cross-references accompany specific cross-references, the former are placed last, even if out of alphabetical order. The conjunction and is normally used, following a semicolon (even if the generic cross reference follows only one other cross-reference) . dogs, 35-42. See also American Kennel Club; shelters; and individual breed names
Run-In versus indented Indexes 1 6 . 24
Flush-and-hang formatting for indexes. Indexes are generally format ted in flush-and-hang (or hanging-indent) style. The first line of each entry, the main heading, is set flush left, and any following lines are indented. When there are subentries, a choice must be made between run-in and indented styles (see 16.25, 16.26) . In print publications (and electronic works modeled on the printed page) , indexes are usually set in multiple columns. In manuscripts, however, columns should not be used (see 16.131).
16.25
R u n - i n style for indexes. In run-in style, the subentries follow the main entry and one another without starting a new line. They are separated by semicolons. If the main heading is immediately followed by subentries, it is separated from them by a colon (see first example below) . If it is im-
Components ofan lndex
16.27
mediately followed by locators, these are preceded by a comma and fol lowed by a semicolon (see second example below) . Further examples of run-in entries may be seen in 16.10, 16.20, 16.141. coordinate systems: Cartesian, 14; distance within, 154-55; time dila tion and, 108-14. See also inertial systems; moving systems
Sabha da Castiglione, Monsignor, 209, 337; on cosmetics, 190; on whether to marry, 210-11; on wives' proper behavior, 230-40, 350
Chicago and many other publishers generally prefer run-in style because it requires less space. It works best, however, when there is only one level of subentry (but see 16.27) . For the examples above in indented style, see 16.26. 16.26
Indented style for indexes. In indented style (also known as stacked style) , each subentry begins a new line and is indented (usually one em) . No colon appears before the first subheading, and subentries are not sep arated by semicolons. Runover lines must therefore be further indented (usually two ems) to distinguish them clearly from subentries; whether runover lines belong to the main entry or to subentries, their indentation should be the same. (Indentation is always measured from the left mar gin, not from the first word in the line above.) See also cross-references belonging to the entry as a whole appear at the end of the list of sub entries (as shown in the first example below) . A see or see also reference belonging to a specific subentry is placed in parentheses at the end of the subentry, as in run-in indexes (see 16.18, 16.20). See also 16.23.
coordinate systems Cartesian, 14 distance within, 154-55 time dilation and, 108-14 See also inertial systems; moving systems
Sabha da Castiglione, Monsignor, 209, 337 on cosmetics, 190 on whether to marry, 210-11 on wives' proper behavior, 230-40, 350
Indented style is usually preferred in scientific works and reference works (such as this manual) . It is particularly useful where sub-subentries are required (see 16.28). 16.27
Sub-subentries in r u n - i n indexes. If more than a handful of sub
subentries are needed in an index, the indented format rather than the run-in type should be chosen. A very few, however, can be accommo dated in a run-in index or, better, avoided by repeating a keyword (see ex ample A) . If repetition will not work, subentries requiring sub-subentries
16.28
INDEXES
can be indented, each starting a new line but preceded by a n e m dash flush with the margin; the sub-subentries are then run in (see example B) . Em dashes are not used where only one level of subentry is needed. Example A (run-in index: sub-subentries avoided) Inuits: language, 18; pottery, 432-37; tradition of, in Alaska, 123; tradition of, in California, 127
Example B (run-in index: subentries requiring sub-subentries indented with em dash, sub-subentries run in) Argos: cremation at, 302; and Danaos of Egypt, 108; Middle Helladic, 77; shaft graves at, 84 Arkadia, 4; Early Helladic, 26, 40; Mycenaean, 269, 306 armor and weapons -attack weapons (general) : Early Helladic and Cycladic, 33; Myce naean, 225, 255, 258-60; from shaft 16.28
Sub-su bentries i n indented indexes. In an indented index, sub
subentries are best run in (see example A below) . If, in a particular index, running them in makes the index hard to use, they have to be indented more deeply than the subentries (example B) . When the first method is used, runover lines need not be indented more than the standard two ems, already a fairly deep indentation. When the second is used, runover lines have to be indented three ems, which may result in some very short lines. See also 16.142, 16.143. Example A (indented index: run-in sub-subentries) nutritional analysis of bamboo, 72-81 digestible energy, 94-96, 2 13-14, 222 inorganic constituents: minerals, 81, 83-85, 89; silica (see silica levels in bamboo) ; total ash, 73, 79, 80, 91, 269, 270 methods used, 72-73
If sub-sub-subentries are required (which heaven forbid!), style B must be used, and they must be run in.
General Principles of Indexing 16.29
Style a n d usage in t h e i ndex relative t o t h e work. Each index is a tool for one particular work. By the time the index is prepared, the style used in the work has long been determined, and the index must reflect that style. If British spelling has been used throughout the text, it must be used in the index. Shakspere in the text calls for Shakspere in the index. Hernando Cortez should not be indexed as Cortes. Older geographical terms should not be altered to their present form (Constantinople to Is tanbul, Siam to Thailand, etc.) . The use of accents and other diacritical marks must be observed exactly as in the text (Schonberg not Schoen berg) . Only in the rare instance in which readers might not find infor mation sought should a cross-reference be given. Any terms italicized or enclosed in quotation marks in the text should be treated similarly in the index. Ifinclusive numbers are given in full in the text (see 16.14; see also 9.62) , that style should be used in the index.
16.30
Choosing indexing terms. The wording for all headings should be con
cise and logical. As far as possible, terms should be chosen according to the author's usage. If, for example, the author ofa philosophical work uses essence to mean being, the main entry should be under essence, possibly with a cross-reference from being. If the terms are used interchangeably,
16.31
INDEXES
the indexer may either choose one (in this case a cross-reference i s im perative) or list both (see 16.16) . An indexer relatively unfamiliar with the subject matter may find it useful to ask the author for a brief list of terms that must appear in the index, though such terms will usually sug gest themselves as the indexer proceeds through the proofs. Common sense is the best guide. For journals, terms may have been established in advance, either by a predetermined list of keywords within the discipline or by previous journal indexes (see 1.111) . See also 16.21. 16.31
Terms that should not be indexed. Although proper names are an im
portant element in most indexes, there are times when they should be ignored. In a work on the history of the automobile in the United States, for example, �n author might write, "After World War II small sports cars like the British MG, often owned by returning veterans, began to make their appearance in college towns like Northampton, Massachusetts, and Ann Arbor, Michigan." An indexer should resist the temptation to index these place-names; the two towns mentioned have nothing to do with the theme of the work. The MG sports car, on the other hand, should be indexed, given the subject of the work. Similarly, names or terms that oc cur in passing references and scene-setting elements that are not essen tial to the theme of a work need not be indexed. (An exception might be made if certain readers of a publication would be likely to look for their own names in the index. Occasional vanity entries are not forbidden.)
Indexing Proper Names and Variants 16.32
Choosing between variant names. When proper names appear in the text in more than o ne form, or in an incomplete form, the indexer must decide which form to use for the main entry and which for the cross reference (if any) and occasionally must furnish identifying information not given in the text. Few indexes need to provide the kind of detail found in biographical or geographical dictionaries, though reference works of that kind will help in decision-making.
16.33
Indexing familiar forms o f personal names. The full form of personal names should be indexed as they have become widely known. (Any vari ant spelling preferred in the text, however, must likewise be preferred in the index; see 16.29.) Note that brackets are used in the following ex amples to distinguish Chicago's editorial glosses from parenthetical tags such as those in some of the examples elsewhere in this section, which would actually appear in a published index.
Indexing Proper Names and Variants
Cervantes., Miguel de [not Cervantes Saavedra, Miguel de] Fisher, M. F. K. [not Fisher, Mary Frances Kennedy]
16.35
London, Jack [not London, John Griffith] Poe, Edgar Allan [not Poe, E. A., or Poe, Edgar A.]
But in a work devoted to, say, M. F. K. Fisher or Cervantes, the full form of the name should appear in the index. 16.34
I ndexing pseudonyms or stage names. Persons who have used pseu donyms or other professional names are usually listed under their real names. If the pseudonym has become a household word, however, it should be used as the main entry, with the real name in parentheses if it is relevant to the work; a cross-reference is seldom necessary.
lE. See Russell, George William Ouida. See Ramee, Marie Louise de la Ramee, Marie Louise de la (pseud. Ouida) Russell, George William (pseud. lE) but Moliere (Jean-Baptiste Poquelin) Monroe, Marilyn (Norma Jean Baker) Rihanna (Robyn Rihanna Fenty) Twain, Mark (Samuel Langhorne Clemens) Voltaire (Fran�ois-Marie Arouet) 16.35
Indexing persons with t h e same name. Persons with the same name should be distinguished by a middle initial (if either has one) or by a par enthetical tag.
Campbell, James Campbell, James B. Field, David Dudley (clergyman)
Field, David Dudley (lawyer) Pitt, William (the elder) Pitt, William (the younger)
In works that include many persons with the same last name (often a family name) , parenthetical identifications are useful. For example, in Two Lucky People, by Milton Friedman and Rose D. Friedman (University of Chicago Press, 1998), the following identifications appear: Friedman, David (son of MF and RDF) Friedman, Helen (sister of MF) Friedman, Janet (daughter of MF and RDF)
Friedman, Milton (MF) Friedman, Rose Director (RDF) Friedman, Sarah Ethel Landau (mother of MF)
!l � 7
16.36
16.36
INDEXES
Indexing married women's names. A married woman who is known variously by her birth name or by her married name, depending on con text, should be indexed by her birth name unless the married name is the more familiar. A married woman who uses both birth and married names together is usually indexed by her married name (unless the two names are hyphenated) . Parenthetical clarifications or cross-references may be supplied as necessary.
Marinoff, Fania (Mrs. Carl Van Vechten) Sutherland, Joan (Mrs. Richard Bonynge) Van Vechten, Fania. See Marinoff, Fania but Besant, Annie (nee Wood) Browning, Elizabeth Barrett Clinton, Hillary Rodham 16.37
Indexing monarchs, popes, a n d t h e like. Monarchs, popes, and others who are known by their official names, often including a roman numeral, should be indexed under the official name. Identifying tags may be omit ted or expanded as appropriate in a particular work.
Anne, Queen 16.38
Benedict XVI (pope)
Elizabeth II (queen)
Indexing princes, d u kes, a n d other titled persons. Princes and prin cesses are usually indexed under their given names. Dukes, earls, and the like are indexed under the title. A cross-reference may be needed where a title differs from a family name.
Charles, Prince ofWales Cooper, Anthony Ashley. See Shaftes bury, 7th Earl of
Shaftesbury, 7th Earl of (Anthony Ashley Cooper) William, Prince
Unless necessary for identification, the titles Lord and Lady are best omit ted from an index, since their use with given names is far from simple. Sir and Dame, while easier to cope with, are also unnecessary in most indexes. Brackets are used here to denote Chicago's editorial glosses (see 16.33) . Churchill, Winston [or Churchill, Sir Winston] Hess, Myra [or Hess, Dame Myra] Thatcher, Margaret [even if referred to as Lady Thatcher in text]
Indexing Proper Names and Variants
16.43
But in a work dealing with the nobility, or a historical work such as The Lisle Letters (University of Chicago Press, 1981) , from which the follow ing examples are taken, titles may be an appropriate or needed element in index entries. The last two examples illustrate distinctions for which expert advice may be needed. Arundell, Sir John Audley, Thomas Lord Grey, Lady Jane [" Lady Jane Grey" in text] 16.39
Whethill, Elizabeth (Muston), Lady ["Lady Whethill" in text]
Clerical titles in index entries. Like titles of nobility, such abbreviations
as Rev. or Msgr. should be used only when necessary for identification (see 16.38) . Councell, George E . (rector o f the Church o f the Holy Spirit) Cranmer, Thomas (archbishop of Canterbury) Jaki, Rev. Stanley S. Manniere, Msgr. Charles L. 16.40
Academic titles and degrees in index entries. Academic titles such as Prof. and Dr., used before a name, are not retained in indexing, nor are abbreviations of degrees such as PhD or MD.
16.41
"Jr.," "Sr.," " I l l," and the like in i ndex entries. Abbreviations such as fr.
are retained in indexing but are placed after the given name and pre ceded by a comma (see also 6.43) . King, Martin Luther, Jr. Stevenson, Adlai E., III 16.42
Indexing saints. Saints are indexed under their given names unless an other name is equally well or better known. Parenthetical identifications or cross-references (as well as discretion) may be needed. See also 16.74.
Aquinas. See Thomas Aquinas, Saint Borromeo, Saint Charles Catherine of Siena, Saint 16.43
Chrysostom, Saint John Thomas, Saint (the apostle) Thomas Aquinas, Saint
Indexing persons whose ful l names are unknown. Persons referred to in the work by first or last names only should be parenthetically identified if the full name is unavailable.
16 .44
INDEXES
John (Smith's shipmate o n Stella) Thaxter (family physician) 1 6 . 44
I ndexing i ncomplete names or names alluded to in text. Even if only an epithet or a shortened form of a name is used in the text, the index should give the full form.
Index Michigan, Lake San Francisco Bay Greenwich Village Lincoln, Abraham
Text the lake the bay the Village the Great Emancipator 16.45
Indexing confusing names. When the same name is used of more than one entity, identifying tags should be provided.
New York (city) New York (state) 16.46
or or
New York City New York State
I ndexi ng abbreviations. Organizations that are widely known under their abbreviations should be indexed and alphabetized according to the abbreviations. Parenthetical glosses, cross-references, or both should be added if the abbreviations, however familiar to the indexer, may not be known to all readers of the particular work. Lesser-known organizations are better indexed under the full name, with a cross-reference from the abbreviation if it is used frequently in the work. See also 16.16.
EEC (European Economic Community) MLA. See Modern Language Association NATO
Indexing Titles of Publications and Other Works 16.47
Typographic treatment for indexed titles of works. Titles of newspa
pers, books, journals, stories, poems, artwork, musical compositions, and such should be treated typographically as they appear in text-whether italicized, set in roman and enclosed in quotation marks, or simply capi talized (see also 8.156-201) . 16.48
Indexing newspaper titles. English-language newspapers should be in dexed as they are generally known, whether or not the city of publication
Indexing Titles ofPublications and Other Works
16.so
appears on the masthead. The name is italicized, as in text, and The is omitted. If necessary, a city of publication may be added in parentheses following the title. New York Times Times (London) Wall Street Journal
Chicago Sun-Times Christian Science Monitor Cleveland Plain Dealer
For newspapers published in languages other than English, any article (Le, Die, etc.) normally follows the name, separated by a comma (but see 16.52) . The city of publication may be added parenthetically, following the title. Akhbar, Al- (Cairo) Monde, Le (Paris) 16.49
Prensa, La (Buenos Aires) Suddeutsche Zeitung, Die
Indexing magazine and journal titles. Magazines and journals are in dexed in the same way as newspapers (see 16.48) . The is omitted in English-language publications, but the article is included, following the name, for non-English ones (but see 16.52) .
JAMA (Journal ofthe American Medical Association) New England Journal ofMedicine Spiegel, Der Time 16.50
Indexi ng authored titles o f works. A published work, a musical compo sition, or a piece of art that merits its own main entry should also be in dexed under the name ofits creator, often as a subentry. The main head ing is followed by the creator's name in parentheses (except in an index in which all titles cited have the same creator) .
Look Homeward, Angel (Wolfe), 34-37 Wolfe, Thomas: childhood, 6-8; early literary influences on, 7-10; Look Homeward, Angel, 34-37; and Max well Perkins, 30-41
Several works by a single creator are sometimes treated as subentries un der a new main heading, following a main entry on the creator. This de vice is best employed when many works as well as many topics are listed. Separate main entries may also be included for the works.
16.51
INDEXES
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 49-51, 55-56; early musical compositions of, 67-72, 74-80; to Italy with fa ther, 85-92; Salzburg appointment, 93-95; in Vienna, 98-105
16.51
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, works of: La clemenza di Tito, 114; Don Gio vanni, 115; Idomeneo, 105-6; Jupiter Symphony, 107; The Magic Flute, 11113; The Marriage ofFigaro, 109-12
Indexing English-language titles beg inning with an article. In titles be ginning with A, An, or The, the article is traditionally placed at the end of the title, following a comma, when the title forms a main heading. When such a title occurs as a subheading, it appears in its normal position in a run-in index, where inversion would be clumsy and unnecessary, but is inverted in an indented index for easier alphabetic scanning.
Professor and the Madman, The (Win chester) , 209-11 Winchester, Simon: Pacific, 190-95; The Professor and the Madman, 209-11; The River at the Center ofthe World, 211-15
Winchester, Simon Pacific, 190-95 Professor and the Madman, The, 209-11 River at the Center ofthe World, The, 211-15
See also 16.56. 16.52
Indexing non-Engl ish titles beg inning with a n article. Since initial ar ticles in non-English titles sometimes modify the following word, they are usually retained in an index. In publications intended for a general audience, especially those that mention only a few such titles, it is ac ceptable to list the titles in the index exactly as they appear in the text, without inversion and alphabetized according to the article.
Eine kleine Nachtmusik (Mozart) , 23 La boheme (Puccini) , 211
In a more specialized work, or any work intended for readers who are likely to be well versed in the languages of any non-English titles men tioned in the text, the titles may be inverted as they are in English (see 16.51) . According to this practice, the articles follow the rest of the title in main headings but remain, as in English titles, in their normal posi tion in run-in subheadings. In both positions, the articles are ignored in alphabetizing. boheme, La (Puccini) , 211 clemenza de Tito, La (Mozart) , 22 kleine Nachtmusik, Eine (Mozart) , 23
Alphabetizing
16.56
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus: La clemenza de Tito, 22; Eine kleine Nachtmusik, 23 trovatore, Il (Verdi) , 323 but "Un deux trois" (Luboff), 47 [alpha betize under U]
An indexer unfamiliar with the language of a title should make sure that the article is indeed an article and not a number (see last example above ) . French un and une and German ein and eine, for example, can mean one as well as a. See also 11.6-10. 16.53
Indexi ng titles beginning with a preposition. Unlike articles, preposi tions beginning a title always remain in their original position and are never dropped, whether in English or non-English titles-nor are they ignored in alphabetizing.
For Whom the Bell Tolls Por quien doblan las campanas 16.54
Indexing titles ending with a question mark or exclamation point. A question mark or exclamation point at the end of an indexed title should be followed by a comma wherever a comma is called for by the syntax of the heading. See also 16.94, 6.125.
Carver, Raymond, 23-27, 101, 143-44; "Are You a Doctor?," 25; Will You Please Be Quiet, Please?, 25-27, 143. See also Iowa Writers' Workshop 16.55
Subtitles in index entries. Subtitles ofbooks or articles are omitted both in main headings and in subheadings unless essential for identification.
Alphabetizing 16.56
Alphabetizing main headi ngs-the basic rule. To exploit the virtues of
alphabetizing and thus ease the way for readers, the first word in a main heading should always determine the location of the entry. This principle occasionally entails inversion of the main heading. Thus, for example, A Tale of Two Cities is inverted as Tale of Two Cities, A and alphabetized
16.57
INDEXES
under T, where readers would b e inclined t o look first. See also 16.9, 16.51, 16.52. For subentries, see 16.68-70. 16.57
Computerized sorting. Few computerized sorting options-and none of the standard options available with ordinary word processors-can perfectly conform to either system of alphabetization as described here. Those using a word processor to create their indexes will have to edit the finished product for the glitches and inconsistencies that invariably re main. Because word processors tend to produce a variation on the word by-word system, it may be easier to opt for that system rather than im posing letter-by-letter (see 16.58) . Some dedicated indexing programs, on the other hand, have been specially programmed to sort according to the letter-by-letter or word-by-word system in conformance with the detailed guidelines presented in this section. See also 16.104, 16.67.
Letter by Letter or Word by Word? 16.58
Two systems o f alphabetizing-an overview. The two principal modes
of alphabetizing-or sorting-indexes are the letter-by-letter and the word-by-word systems. A choice between the two should be made before indexing begins, though occasionally an indexer will find, as indexing progresses, that a change from one to the other is appropriate. (Such a change would of course need to be applied to the entire index.) Dictio naries are arranged letter by letter, library catalogs word by word (though online catalogs can usually be sorted by other criteria, such as format, date, availability, or relevance to a search) . Chicago, most university presses, and many other publishers have traditionally preferred the letter-by-letter system but will normally not impose it on a well-prepared index that has been arranged word by word. In an index with many open compounds starting with the same word, the word-by-word system may be easier for users. Both systems have their advantages and disadvan tages, and few users are confused by either. Most people simply scan an alphabetic block until they find what they are looking for. The indexer must understand both systems, however, and the following paragraphs offer guidelines for each. For a fuller discussion, consult Nancy Mulvany, Indexing Books (bibliog. 2.5) . 16.59
T h e letter-by-letter system. In the letter-by-letter system, alphabetiz
ing continues up to the first parenthesis or comma; it then starts again after the punctuation point. Spaces and all other punctuation marks are ignored. The order of precedence is one word, word followed by a pa renthesis, word followed by a comma, then (ignoring spaces and other
Alphabetizing
16.61
punctuation) word followed by a number, and word followed by letters. The index to this manual, in accordance with Chicago's traditional pref erence, is arranged letter by letter. 16.60
T h e word-by-word system. In the word-by-word system, alphabetizing
continues only up to the end of the first word (counting an abbreviation or a hyphenated compound as one word) , using subsequent words only when additional headings begin with the same word. As in the letter by-letter system, alphabetizing continues up to the first parenthesis or comma; it then starts again after the punctuation point. The order of pre cedence is one word, word followed by a parenthesis, word followed by a comma, word followed by a space, then (ignoring other punctuation) word followed by a number, and word followed by letters. 16.61
T h e two systems compared. In both systems a parenthesis or comma
(in that order) interrupts the alphabetizing, and other punctuation marks (hyphens, slashes, quotation marks, periods, etc.) are ignored. The col umns below illustrate the similarities and differences between the sys tems. Letter by letter NEW (Neighbors Ever Watchful) NEW (Now End War) New, Arthur New, Zoe new-12 compound newborn newcomer New Deal new economics newel New England "new-fangled notions" Newfoundland N. Ewing & Sons newlyweds new math new/old continuum news, lamentable News, Networks, and the Arts newsboy news conference newsletter
Word by word N. Ewing & Sons NEW (Neighbors Ever Watchful) NEW (Now End War) New, Arthur New, Zoe New Deal new economics New England new math New Thorndale new town New Year's Day new-12 compound newborn newcomer newel "new-fangled notions" Newfoundland newlyweds new/old continuum news, lamentable News, Networks, and the Arts
16.62
INDEXES
News ofthe World (Queen) news release newt NEWT (Northern Estuary Wind Tunnel) New Thorndale new town New Year's Day
Alphabetizing items with the same name. When a person, a place, and
a thing have the same name, they are arranged in normal alphabetical order. hoe, garden Hoe, Robert
London, England London, Jack
Common sense must be exercised. If Amy London and Carolyn Hoe were to appear in the same index as illustrated above, adjustments in the other entries would be needed. garden hoe hoe. See garden hoe Hoe, Carolyn Hoe, Robert 16.63
London (England) London, Amy London, Jack
Alphabetizing i nltials versus spelled-out names. Initials used in place
of a given name come before any spelled-out name beginning with the same letter. Oppenheimer, J. Robert Oppenheimer, James N. 1 6 . 64
Oppenheimer, K. T. Oppenheimer, Katharine S.
Alphabetizing abbreviations. Acronyms, initialisms, and most abbrevi
ations are alphabetized as they appear, not according to their spelled out versions, and are interspersed alphabetically among entries. See also 16.46, 16.74. faculty clubs FBI Feely, John LBJ. See Johnson, Lyndon B.
NATO North Pole NOW (National Organization for Women)
Alphabetizing
16.67
Two exceptions: an ampersand (&) may be treated as if spelled out, and an at sign (@) , which normally can be treated like the letter a, may be ignored as part of a screen name. 16.65
Al phabetizing headings beginning with numerals. Isolated entries be
ginning with numerals are alphabetized as though spelled out. (For nu merals occurring in the middle of a heading, see 16.61, 16.66.) 1984 (Orwell) [alphabetized as nine teen eighty-four] 125th Street [alphabetized as one hun dred twenty-fifth street]
10 Downing Street [alphabetized as ten downing street]
If many numerals occur in an index, they may be listed together in nu merical order at the beginning of the index, before the As. 16.66
Alphabetizing similar headings containing numerals. When two or
more similar headings with numerals occur together, they are ordered numerically, regardless of how they would be spelled out. Henry III Henry IV Henry V
L7 L44 L50
section 9 section 44 section 77
The L entries above would be placed at the beginning of the L section. See also 16.61. 16.67
Alphabetizing accented letters. Words beginning with or including ac
cented letters are alphabetized as though they were unaccented. (Note that this rule is intended for English-language indexes that include some non-English words. The alphabetizing practices of other languages are not relevant in such instances.) Ubeda Uber den Gipfel Ubina
Schoenberg Schomberg Schonborn
This system, more than adequate for most English-language indexes, may need to be supplemented by more comprehensive systems for in dexes that contain many terms in other languages. The Unicode Con sortium has developed extensive specifications and recommendations for sorting (or collating) the characters used in many of the world's lan guages. For more information, refer to the latest version of the Unicode
16.68
INDEXES
Collation Algorithm, published by the Unicode Consortium (bibliog. 5) . See also 11.2.
Subentries 16.68
Alphabetical order o f subentries. Introductory articles, prepositions,
and conjunctions are disregarded in alphabetizing subentries (but see 16.53), whether the subentries are run in or indented. To preserve the alphabetic logic of the keywords, avoid substantive introductory words at the beginnings of subheadings (e.g., " relations with,'' " views on"). Churchill, Winston: as anti-Fascist, 369; on Curzon line, 348, 379; and de Gaulle, 544n4
In indented style, where alphabetizing functions more visually, it may be better to dispense with such introductory words or to invert the head ings, amplifying them as needed. The subheadings from the first ex ample could be edited for an indented index as follows: Churchill, Winston anti-Fascism of, 369 Curzon line, views on, 348, 379 de Gaulle, relations with, 544n4 16.69
Nu merical order o f subentries. Occasional subentries demand numer ical order even if .others in the same index (but not the same entry) are alphabetized.
Daley, Richard J. (mayor) : third term, 205; fourth term, 206-7 flora, alpine: at 1,000-meter level, 46, 130-35; at 1,500-meter level, 146-54; at 2,000-meter level, 49, 164-74 16.70
Chronological order of su bentries. In a run-in index, the subentries for the subject of a biography may be arranged chronologically rather than alphabetically so as to provide a quick summary of the subject's career and to avoid, for example, a subheading "death of" near the beginning of the entry. This system should be used with caution, however, and only
Alphabetizing
16.73
when the biographical and chronological logic is obvious from the sub entries.
Personal Names 16.71
I ndexing names with particles. In alphabetizing family names con taining particles, the indexer must consider the individual's personal preference (if known) as well as traditional and national usages. The biographical entries in Merriam-Webster's dictionaries (bibliog. 3.1) are authoritative for well-known persons long deceased; library catalogs and encyclopedias are far broader in scope. Cross-references are often advis able (see 16.17) . Note the wide variations in the following list of actual names arranged alphabetically as they might appear in an index. See also
8.5, 16.75, 16.84. Beauvoir, Simone de Ben-Gurion, David Costa, Uriel da da Cunha, Euclides D'Amato, Alfonse de Gaulle, Charles
di Leonardo, Micaela Keere, Pieter van den La Fontaine, Jean de Leonardo da Vinci Medici, Lorenzo de' Van Rensselaer, Stephen
Charles de Gaulle is a good example of the opportunity for occasional editorial discretion: Webster's and the Library of Congress, for example, list the French statesman under "Gaulle"; the entry in American Heritage is under "de Gaulle"-the usage normally preferred by Chicago. 16.72
Indexing compound names. Compound family names, with or without hyphens, are usually alphabetized according to the first element (but see 16.36) . See also 8.6, 8.11, 16.83, 16.84.
Lloyd George, David Mies van der Rohe, Ludwig 16.73
Sackville-West, Victoria Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre
Indexing names with "Mac," "Mc," or "O'." Names beginning with Mac or Mc are alphabetized letter by letter, as they appear.
Macalister, Donald MacAlister, Paul Macauley, Catharine Macmillan, Harold
Madison, James McAllister, Ward McAuley, Catherine McMillan, Edwin M.
1 6 . 74
INDEXES
Names beginning with O' are alphabetized a s i f the apostrophe were missing. Onassis, Aristotle O'Neill, Eugene Ongaro, Francesco dall' 1 6 . 74
Indexing names with "Saint." A family name in the form of a saint's name is alphabetized letter by letter as the name is spelled, whether Saint, San, St. , or however. A cross-reference may be useful if Saint and St. are far apart in an index. See also 16.42, 16.93.
Sainte-Beuve, 'Charles-Augustin Saint-Gaudens, Augustus Saint-Saens, Camille
San Martin, Jose de St. Denis, Ruth St. Laurent, Louis Stephen
Non-English Personal Names 16.75
Indexi ng Arabic names. Modern Arabic names consisting of one or more given names followed by a surname present no problem.
Himsi, Ahmad Hamid Sadat, Anwar
Arabic surnames prefixed by al or el (the) are alphabetized under the ele ment following the particle; the article is treated like de in many French names. Hakim, Tawfiq alJamal, Muhammad Hamid al-
Names beginning with Abu, Abd, and Ibn, elements as integral to the names as Mc or Fitz, are alphabetized under those elements. Abu Zafar Nadvi, Syed Ibn Saud, Abdul Aziz
Context and readership may suggest cross-references. For example, in an index to a work likely to have readers unfamiliar with Arabic names, a cross-reference may be useful (i.e., "al-Farabi. See Farabi, al-").
Alphabetizing 16.76
16.79
Indexi ng Bu rmese names. Burmese persons are usually known by a given name of one or more elements and should be indexed under the first element. If the name is preceded in text by a term of respect (U, Daw, etc.) , that term either is omitted or follows in the index.
Aung San Suu Kyi [alphabetize under A] Thant, U [alphabetize under T] 16.77
Indexing Chinese names. Chinese names should be indexed as spelled in the work, whether in the Pinyin or the Wade-Giles system. Cross references are needed only if alternative forms are used in the text. Since the family name precedes the given name in Chinese usage, names are not inverted in the index, and no comma is used.
Li Bai [Pinyin; alphabetize under L] Mao Tse-tung [Wade-Giles; alphabetize under M]
Persons of Chinese ancestry or origin who have adopted the Western practice of giving the family name last are indexed with inversion and a comma. Kung, H. H. 16.78
Tsou, Tang
Indexing H u ngarian names. In Hungarian practice the family name precedes the given name-for example, Bartok Bela, Molnar Ferenc. In English contexts, however, such names are usually inverted; in an index they are therefore reinverted, with a comma added.
Bart6k, Bela
Molnar, Ferenc
Family names beginning with an initial should be indexed under the ini tial (see also 8.13) . E. Kiss, Katalin 16.79
Indexing Indian names. Modern Indian names generally appear with the family name last and are indexed accordingly. As with all names, the per sonal preference of the individual as well as usage should be observed.
Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand Krishna Menon, V. K. Narayan, R. K.
16.80
16.80
INDEXES
Indexing Indonesian names. Usage varies. Some Indonesians (espe cially Javanese) use only a single, given name. Others use more than one name; even though the given name comes first, these are often indexed like Chinese names, with no inversion or punctuation (see third and fourth examples) . Indonesians with Muslim names and certain others whose names may include a title or an honorific are indexed by the fi nal element, with inversion. The indexer must therefore ascertain how a person's full name is referred to in text and which part of the name is used for a short reference.
Habibi, B. J. Hatta, Mohammed Marzuki Darusman Pramoedya Ananta Toer 16.81
Suharto Sukarno Suryokusumo, Wiyono
Indexing Japanese names. In Japanese usage the family name precedes the given name; names are therefore not inverted in the index, and no comma is used. If the name is westernized, as it often is by authors writ ing in English, the family name comes last. The indexer must therefore make certain which practice is followed in the text so that the family name always appears first in the index.
Tajima Yumiko [alphabetize under T] Yoshida Shigeru [alphabetize under Y] but Kurosawa, Noriaki [referred to in text as Noriaki Kurosawa] 16.82
Indexing Korean . names. In Korean usage the family name precedes the given name, and this is how it is usually presented even in English language contexts. Persons of Korean origin living in the West, however, often invert this order. The indexer must therefore make certain which practice is followed in the text so that the family name appears first, with or without inversion, in the index.
Kim Dae-jung [alphabetize under K] Oh Jung-hee [alphabetize under O] but Lee, Chang-rae [referred to in text as Chang-rae Lee] 16.83
I ndexing Portuguese names. The Portuguese, unlike the Spanish (see
16.84) , index surnames by the last element. This does not include the designations Filho (son) , Neto (grandson) , and junior, which always fol low the second family name.
Alphabetizing
Camara Junior, Jose Mattoso Juca. Filho, Candido Martins, Luciana de Lima
16.84
Silva Neto, Serafim da Vasconcellos, J. Leite de
Where both Portuguese and Spanish names appear in the same context, cross-references may be necessary. 1 6 . 84
I ndexi ng Spanish names. In Spain and in some Latin American coun tries a double family name is often used, of which the first element is the father's family name and the second the mother's birth name (her father's family name) . The two names are sometimes joined by y (and) . Such compound names are alphabetized under the first element. Cross references will often be needed, especially if the person is generally known under the second element or if the indexer is uncertain where to place the main entry. Webster's is a good guide for persons listed there. Where many Spanish names appear, an indexer not conversant with Spanish or Latin American culture should seek help.
Garcia Lorca, Federico Lorca, Federico Garcia. See Garcia Lorca, Federico Ortega y Gasset, Jose Sanchez Mendoza, Juana
When the particle de appears in a Spanish name, the family name, under which the person is indexed, may be either the preceding or the follow ing name (depending in part on how a person is known) . If it is not clear from the text and the name is not in Webster's or otherwise widely known, a cross-reference will be needed. Balboa, Vasco Nunez de Esquivel de Sanchez, Maria Fernandez de Navarrete, Juan Fernandez de Oviedo, Gonzalo
Traditionally, a married woman replaced her mother's family name with her husband's (first) family name, sometimes preceded by de. Her name should be alphabetized, however, by the first family name (her father's) . Mendoza de Pefia, Maria Carmen [woman's name after marriage) Mendoza Salinas, Maria Carmen [woman's name before marriage) Pefia Montalvo, Juan Alberto [husband's name)
In telephone directories and elsewhere, some women appear under the husband's family name, but this is not a recommended bibliographic or
16.85
INDEXES
indexing practice. Many modern women i n Spanish-speaking countries no longer take the husband's family name. See also 8.11. 16.85
I ndexing Thai names. Although family names are used in Thailand, Thais are normally known by their given names, which come first, as in English names. The name is often alphabetized under the first name, but practice varies. Seek expert help.
Indexing Vietnamese names. Vietnamese names consist of three ele ments, the family name being the first. Since Vietnamese persons are usually referred to by the last part of their given names (Premier Diem, General Giap) , they are best indexed under that form.
Diem, Ngo Dinh [cross-reference under Ngo Dinh Diem] Giap, Vo Nguyen [cross-reference under Vo Nguyen Giap] 16.87
Indexing other Asian names. Throughout Asia, many names derive from Arabic, Chinese, the European languages, and other languages, regard less of where the bearers of the names were born. In the Philippines, for example, names follow a Western order, giving precedence to the fam ily name, though the names themselves may be derived from local lan guages. In some parts of Asia, titles denoting status form part of a name as it appears in written work and must be dealt with appropriately. When the standard reference works do not supply an answer, query the author.
Names of Organizations and Businesses 16.88
Omission o f article in indexed names o f organizations. In indexing or ganizations whose names begin with the (which would be lowercased in running text) , the article is omitted.
Beatles (band) Unicode Consortium University of Chicago 16.89
Indexing personal names a s corporate names. When used as names of businesses or other organizations, full personal names are not inverted,
Alphabetizing
16.91
and the corporate name is alphabetized under the first name or initials. An organization widely known by the family name, however, should be indexed under that name. In both instances, cross-references may be ap propriate. A. G. Edwards & Sons, Inc. [alphabetize under A) Penney, J. C. See J. C. Penney Company, Inc. Saphir, Kurt. See Kurt Saphir Pianos, Inc. but John G. Shedd Aquarium. See Shedd Aquarium
A personal name and the name of that person's company should be in dexed separately. Morgan, Junius S., 39, 42-44; J. S. Morgan & Company, 45-48 J. S. Morgan & Company, 45-48. See also Morgan, Junius S.
Names ofPlaces 16.90
I ndexing names beg inning with "Mount," "Lake," a n d such. Proper names of mountains, lakes, and so forth that begin with a generic name are usually inverted and alphabetized under the nongeneric name.
Geneva, Lake Japan, Sea of McKinley, Mount
Names of cities or towns beginning with topographic elements, as well as islands known as "Isle of . . . , " are alphabetized under the first element. Isle of Pines Isle of Wight Lake Geneva, WI 16.91
Mount Vernon, NY Valley Forge
Indexing names beginning with t h e definite article. Aside from a very few cities such as The Hague (unless the Dutch form Den Haag is used; see 16.92) or The Dalles, where The is part of the formal name and thus capitalized, an initial the used informally with place-names is omitted in indexing. See also 8.45.
16.92
INDEXES
Bronx Hague, The Loop (Chicago's downtown) 16.92
Indexing names beginning with non-Engl ish definite articles. Names of places beginning with definite articles such as El, Le, La, and the like, whether in English- or non-English-speaking countries, are alphabetized according to the article.
Den Haag El Dorado El Paso La Crosse 16.93
Netherlands Ozarks Philippines
La Mancha Le Havre Les Baux-de-Provence Los Alamos
Indexing names o f places beginning with "Saint." Names of places be ginning with Saint, Sainte, St. , or Ste. should be indexed as they appear in the text-that is, abbreviated only if abbreviated in text. Like personal names, they are alphabetized as they appear. Cross-references may be appropriate (e.g., "Saint. See St.," or vice versa) . Note that French hy phenates place-names with Saint. See also 10.30, 11.26.
Saint-Cloud (in France) Sainte-Foy Saint-Luc St. Cloud (in Florida)
Ste. Genevieve St. Louis St. Vincent Island
Punctuating Indexes: A Summary 1 6 . 94
Comma in i ndex entries. In both run-in and indented indexes, when a
main heading is followed immediately by locators (usually page or para graph numbers; see 16.12) , a comma appears before the first locator. Commas appear between locators. Commas are also used when a head ing is an inversion or when a main heading is qualified, without suben tries. The second example illustrates three uses of the comma. For the role of commas in alphabetizing, see 16.61. lighthouses, early history of, 40-42 Sabba da Castiglione, Monsignor, 209, 337; on cosmetics, 190, 195, 198 16.95
Colon in index entries. In a run-in index, when a main heading is fol lowed immediately by subentries, a colon appears before the first sub-
Punctuating Indexes: A Summary
16.10
o
heading. In an indented index, no punctuation is used after the main heading. A colon is also used in a cross-reference to a subentry. See also 16.20. Maya: art of, 236-43; cities of, 178. See also Yucatan: Maya
16.96
Maya art of, 236-43 cities of, 178 See also Yucatan: Maya
Semicolon in index entries. When subentries or sub-subentries are run
in, they are separated by semicolons. Cross-references, if more than one, are also separated by semicolons. astronomy: Galileo's works on, 20-21, 22-23, 24; skills needed in, 548-49. See also Brahe, Tycho; comets; Flamsteed, John 16.97
Period in index entries. In a run-in index a period is used only before See
(or See under) or See also (or See also under) . In an indented index a period is used only before See. When a see or see also reference in parentheses follows a subheading or a subentry in either a run-in or an indented in dex, no period is used. No period follows the final word of any entry. For examples, see 16.17, 16.20, 16.19, 16.143. 16.98
Parentheses i n index headi ngs. Parentheses enclose identification or supplementary information. For the role ofparentheses in alphabetizing, see 16.61.
Charles I (king of England) Charles I (king of Portugal) OfHuman Bondage (Maugham) 16.99
Em dash i n index entries. For use of the em dash in run-in indexes that require occasional sub-subentries, see example B in 16.27.
16.100
E n dash i n i ndex entries. The en dash is used for page ranges and all other inclusive locators (e.g., "dogs, 135-42 ") . For abbreviating inclusive numbers in indexes, see 16.14. See also 6.78, the index to this manual, and examples throughout this chapter.
16.101
INDEXES
The Mechanics of Indexing Before Indexing Begins: Tools and Decisions 16.101
16.102
Schedule for indexing. Anyone making an index for the first time should know that the task is intensive and time-consuming. An index for a three-hundred-page book could take as much as three weeks' work or more. See also 16.4. Indexing from page proofs. For a printed work, the in dexer must have
in hand a clean and complete set of proofs (usually showing final pagina tion) before beginning to index. A PDF version is generally more helpful than a printout because it can be used to search for specific terms (and can be printed out as needed; see also 16.105) . For a journal volume, the work may begin when the first issue to be indexed has been paginated, and it may continue for several months, until page proofs for the final issue in the volume have been generated. For electronic formats, where index entries are linked to their location in the text, additional consider ations may apply (see 16.13) . See also 16.108, 16.117-25. 16.103
Publisher's indexing preferences. Before beginning work, the indexer should know the publisher's preferences in such matters as alphabetiz ing, run-in or indented style, inclusive numbers, handling of numeric headings, and the like (all matters dealt with in earlier sections of this chapter) . For a journal volume index, the style is likely to be well estab lished, and the indexer must follow that style. If the publisher requests an index of a particular length, the indexer should adjust the normal ed iting time accordingly. See also 16.131.
16.104
Indexing tools. The dedicated indexing programs used by many pro fessional indexers automate such tasks as cross-referencing and the collation of entries and subentries and include special options for alphabetizing-for example, to exclude certain words or characters and to conform to either the letter-by-letter or word-by-word system (see 16.58) . Such programs, however, tend to require more learning time than most authors can afford (see 16.4) . Fortunately, an index can be prepared according to the guidelines in this chapter by simply entering terms and locators into a separate document using an ordinary word processor though cross-references and alphabetizing, in particular, will need to be checked manually throughout the process (see 16.57; see also 16.5) . For
The Mechanics ofIndexing
16.108
the latest information about tools for indexing, consult the website of the American Society for Indexing. 16.105
U s i n g the electronic files t o index. Publishers' policies vary as to whether they can agree to supply indexers with page proofs in electronic form. A searchable PDF file can be helpful in double-checking that ad ditional instances of particular terms have not been overlooked. Some indexers may prefer also to annotate and refer to the PDF rather than a paper copy as they create the index. It should be noted, however, that an index cannot be automatically "generated" from a PDF file and that there is no substitute for rereading the whole work. See also 16.5, 16.13, 16.119.
16.106
Formatti ng index entries. Consult with the publisher up front to deter mine whether a run-in or indented index is required (see 16.24-2 8) and whether there are any other specific requirements. Format the manu script accordingly, using a flush-and-hang style (see 16.24) . See also 16.131.
16.107
I ndexing t h e old-fashioned way. Before the advent of word processors
(and their cutting-and-pasting and sorting functions) , indexers used to handwrite or type preliminary entries and subentries on 3" x 5" index cards, then alphabetize and edit the cards, and finally type the index, while further refining it, on 81/z" x 11" sheets. For details, consult Nancy Mulvany, Indexing Books (bibliog. 2.5) , or the thirteenth or fourteenth edition of this manual (no longer in print but available in large libraries) . The procedures described in the following sections can be adapted to the index-card method.
When to Begin 16.108
Preliminary indexing work. Although some planning can be done at the manuscript stage, most indexes are prepared as soon as a work is in fi nal, paginated form, or "page proofs." It is crucial, in fact, that indexing not begin until pagination is final. For indexes in which the locators are paragraph or section numbers rather than page numbers, however (or where entries will be linked to specific locations in the text for electronic formats) , earlier iterations of the final or near-final manuscript can of ten be used to get a head start. Authors who are not preparing their own indexes may compile a list of important terms for the indexer, but doing much more is likely to cause duplication or backtracking.
16.109
INDEXES
What Parts of the Work to Index 16.109
Indexi ng t h e text, front matter, a n d back matter. The entire text of a book or journal article, including substantive content in notes (see 16.110) , should be indexed. Much of the front matter, however, is not indexable-title page, dedication, epigraphs, lists of illustrations and ta bles, and acknowledgments. A preface, or a foreword by some o ne other than the author of the work, may be indexed if it concerns the subject of the work and not simply how the work came to be written. Substantive material in an introduction, whether in the front matter or, more com monly, in the body of the work, is always indexed (for introduction ver sus preface, see 1.43) . Book appendixes should be indexed if they contain information that supplements the text, but not if they merely reproduce documents that are discussed in the text (the full text of a treaty, for ex ample, or a questionnaire) . Appendixes to journal articles are indexed as part of the articles. Glossaries, bibliographies, and other such lists are usually not indexed.
16.110
Indexing footnotes a n d end notes. Notes, whether footnotes or end notes, should be indexed only if they continue or amplify discussion in the text (substantive notes) . Notes that merely contain source citations documenting statements in the text (reference notes) need not be in dexed.
1 6 . 111
Endnote locators in index entries. Endnotes in printed works are re ferred to by page, the letter n (for note) , and-extremely important-the note number, with no internal space (334n14) . If two or more consecutive notes are referred to, two n's and an en dash are used (e.g., 334nn14-16) . Nonconsecutive notes on the same page are treated separately (334n14, 334n16, 334nl9) . If an index entry refers to numbered notes from more than one chapter that occur on the same page in the endnotes, it can be helpful to include the chapter number in parentheses after the note num ber, especially if two notes share the same number or where the notes might otherwise appear to be out of order.
Footnote locators in index entries. Footnotes in a printed work are gen
erally referred to in the same way as endnotes. When a footnote is the only one on the page, however, the note number (or symbol, if numbers are not used) may be omitted (156n) . Note numbers should never be
The Mechanics ofIndexing
1 6 . 115
omitted when several notes appear on the same page. (If symbols are used, use the symbol: e.g., 156n*, 173n*, 173nt.) If there is indexable ma terial in a text passage and in a related footnote, only the page number need be given. But if the text and the footnote materials are not con nected, both text and note should be cited (156, 156n, 278, 278n30) . 1 6 . 113
Indexing notes span ning more than one printed page. For endnotes or footnotes that continue onto another page, normally only the first page number is given. But if the reference is specifically to a part of a note that appears on the second page, the second page number should be used. Referring to a succession of notes, however, may require inclusive page numbers (e.g., 234-35nn19-23) .
16. 114
I ndexing parenthetical text citations. Documentation given as paren thetical author-date citations in text is not normally indexed unless the citation documents an otherwise unattributed statement in the text (see 16.110) . Any author discussed in text should be indexed. In some fields it is customary to index every author named in the text; check with the publisher on the degree of inclusiveness required. See also 16.115.
1 6 . 115
Indexing authors' names for an author index. Author indexes are more
common in disciplines that use a variation of the author-date system (see chapter 15) . Since most authors are cited in text by last name and date only, full names must be sought in the reference list. Occasional discrepancies between text and reference list, not caught in editing, have to be sorted out or queried, adding to the time it takes to create an au thor index. Is L. W. Dinero, cited on page 345, the same person as Lauren Dinero, discussed on page 456? If so, should she be indexed as Dinero, Lauren W. ? (Answer: only if all or most authors are indexed with full first names-a situation that may be determined by the reference list.) Where a work by two or more authors is cited in text, the indexer must determine whether each author named requires a separate entry. Should Jones, Smith, and Black share one index entry, or should three entries appear? And what about Jones et al. ? Chicago recommends the following procedure: Make separate entries for each author whose name appears in text. Do not index those unfortunates whose names are concealed under et al. in text. Text citations Oones, Smith, and Black 1999) (Sanchez et al. 2001) (Sanchez, Cruz, et al. 2002)
Index entries Black, M. X., 366 Cruz, M. M., 435 Jones, E. J., 366 Sanchez, J. G., 435, 657 Smith, R. A., 366
1 6 . 116
16. 116
INDEXES
Indexing i l lustrations, tables, charts, and such. Illustrative matter may be indexed if it is of particular importance to the discussion, especially when such items are not listed in or after the table of contents. Refer ences to illustrations may be set in italics (or boldface, if preferred) ; a headnote should then be inserted at the beginning of the index (see 16.141 for an example) . Such references usually follow in page order.
Alternatively, references to tables may be denoted by t, to figures by f, plates by pl, or whatever works (all set in roman, with no space following the page number) . Add an appropriate headnote (e.g., " The letter t fol lowing a page number denotes a table") . If the number of an illustration is essential, it is safer to use table,fig. , and so on, with no comma follow ing the page number. authors and printers, 69, 208t, 209t, 210f titi monkeys, 88 table 5, 89-90, 12225, 122 fig. 7
Marking Prooft and Preparing Entries 1 6 . 117
Beginning to highlight and enter terms. After a perusal of the table of contents and the work as a whole, an indexer should begin highlighting terms to be used as main headings or subheadings. This is normally done by hand-marking a set of proofs (either on paper or PDF) . Inexperienced indexers are advised to mark the proofs-at least in the early stages with the same kind of detail as is illustrated in figure 16.1. Most indexers prefer to mark one section (or chapter or journal issue) at a time and using a word processor or dedicated indexing software (see 16.104)-to enter and alphabetize the marked terms in that section before going on to the next section. The notes belonging to the section, even if endnotes, should be checked and, if necessary, indexed at the same time (see 16.110) . As the indexer becomes more skilled in marking the proofs, less underlining and fewer marginal notes may suffice.
1 6 . 118
Deciding how many terms to mark. The number of terms to mark on any one page obviously depends on the kind of work being indexed. As a very rough guide, an average of five references per text page in a book will yield a modest index (one-fiftieth the length of the text) , whereas
Sample page of proof from Wayne Booth's For the Love of It, marked up for indexing. See 16.117-25.
FIGURE 16.1.
1 6 . 119
INDEXES
fifteen o r more will yield a fairly long index (about one-twentieth the length of the text or more) . If the publisher has budgeted for a strictly limited number of pages, the indexer should work accordingly. Remem ber that it is always easier to drop entries than to add them; err on the side of inclusiveness. See also 16.30, 16.31, 16.103, 16.109-16. 16.119
How to mark i ndex entries. To visualize the method advocated here, suppose you are indexing a chapter from Wayne Booth's For the Love of It (University of Chicago Press, 1999), a consideration of work and play and work as play (see fig. 16.1) . You have read through the chapter once and now have to go back and select headings and subheadings for indexing this particular section (of which only the first paragraphs are shown here) . You decide that the whole section (pp. 54-56) will have to be indexed under both work and play, so you mark the section head as shown. (On the marked proofs, a colon separates a proposed princi pal heading from a proposed subheading.) Going down the page, you underline Bliss Perry (which will of course be inverted-Perry, Bliss-as a heading; similarly for the other personal names) . You also underline amateur and professional (modifying them to the plural) . In the second paragraph, you underline work and love, with proposed subheads, and Churchill (noting the first name in the margin) . You decide to index Chi cago Symphony Orchestra-which in another work might be tangential but here ties in with the book's major subtheme of musical performance and appreciation-and also mark politicians, with proposed subhead. You underline Huizinga (adding "Johan" in the margin) and the work Homo Ludens, which might also be a subheading under "Huizinga, Johan." In the note, you mark two names (supplying a first name for Pater) , one title, and one additional term (see also 16.110) .
16.120
Planning i ndex subentries. For each term marked, you should make an effort to write in a modification-a word or phrase that narrows the ap plication of the heading, hence a potential subentry. Although some such modifications may eventually be dropped, they should be kept on hand in case they are needed. Otherwise you may end up with some headings that are followed by nothing but a long string of numbers, which makes for an all but useless index entry. The modifications can be altered and added to as the indexing proceeds.
16.121
Recording inclusive numbers for index terms. If a text discussion ex tends over more than one page, section, or paragraph, both beginning and ending numbers-which will depend on what locator system is being used (see 16.12)-must be recorded. See also 16.14.
The Mechanics ofIndexing 16.122
16.126
Typing a n d modifying index entries. Most entries at this stage will in
clude three elements: a heading, a modification (or provisional suben try) , and a locator (page or paragraph number) . While typing, you will probably modify some of the headings and add, delete, or alter subhead ings and locators (a process that may at the same time entail changes to cross-references and to alphabetical order) . After typing each entry, read it carefully against the page proofs-in particular, checking that the page numbers or other locators are correct. You are unlikely to have time to read your final index manuscript against the marked-up proofs, though you should certainly retain the proofs for reference until the work has been published. See also 16.106. 16.123
Alphabetizing entries a s part o f t h e i ndexing process. Many indexers
alphabetize as they type; others let their software do it, intervening as necessary. By this time the indexer should have decided whether to use the letter-by-letter or the word-by-word system (see 16.58-61) . If the system chosen proves unsatisfactory for the particular work as the index proceeds, a switch can be made ifthe publisher agrees. See also 16.57. 16. 124
Final check of indexed proofs. After typing all the entries, read quickly through the marked-up proofs once again to see whether anything index able has been omitted. You may find some unmarked items that seemed peripheral at the time but now, in the light of themes developed in later chapters, declare themselves to be significant. Or you may have missed major items. Now is the time to remedy all omissions.
16.125
Noting errors during i ndexing. Although not engaged to proofread, the indexer has to read carefully and usually finds a number of typographi cal errors and minor inconsistencies. If indexing a book (rather than a journal volume, most of which will already have been published) , keep track of all such errors and send a list to the publisher (who will be very grateful) when, or before, submitting the index.
Editing and Refining the Entries 16.126
Refining t h e terms f o r m a i n headings. The assembled entries must now be edited to a coherent whole. You have to make a final choice among synonymous or closely related terms-agriculture, farming, or crop rais ing; clothing, costume, or dress; life, existence, or being-and, if you think necessary, prepare suitable cross-references to reflect those choices. For
1 6 . 12 7
INDEXES
journals, the terms may have been established i n the indexes fo r pre vious volumes and should be retained. 1 6 . 127
Main entries versus subentries. You also have to decide whether cer tain items are best treated as main entries or as subentries under another heading. Where will readers look first? In a work dealing with schools of various kinds, such terms as kindergarten, elementary school, middle school, and public school should constitute separate entries; in a work in which those terms appear but are not the primary subject matter, they may be better treated as subentries under school. An index with relatively few main entries but masses of subentries is unhelpful as a search tool. Furthermore, in an indented index an excessively long string of suben tries may begin to look like a set of main entries, so that users lose their way alphabetically. Promote subentries to main entries and use the al phabet to its best advantage.
16.128
W h e n t o furnish subentries. Main headings unmodified by subentries
should not be followed by more than five or six locators. If, for example, the draft index of a work on health care includes an entry like the first ex ample below, it should be broken up into a number of subentries, such as those in the second example, to lead readers quickly to the information sought. The extra space needed is a small price to pay for their conve nience. hospitals, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 29-31, 33, 35, 36, 38, 42, 91-92, 94, 95, 96, 98, 101, 111-14, 197 hospitals: administration of, 22, 96; and demand for patient services, 1 6 . 12 9
23, 91-92; efficiency of, 17, 29-31, 33, 111-14; finances of, 28, 33, 36, 38, 42, 95, 112; and length of patient stay, 35, 94, 98, 101, 197; quality control in, 22-25, 31
How t o phrase subheadings. Subheadings should be as concise and in formative as possible and begin with a keyword likely to be sought. A , an, and the are omitted whenever possible. Example A below, not t o be emulated, shows poorly worded and rambling subheadings. Example B shows greatly improved subentries that conserve space. Note the page references immediately following the main entry; when a main entry has one or more subentries, such undifferentiated locators should normally be reserved for definitive or extended discussions of the term (some in dexers will prefer to add defined or a similar subhead) . Example C adds sub-subentries, making for quicker reference but requiring more space (see 16.27, 16.28) . For arrangement of subentries, see 16.68-70.
16.130
1 6 . 130
INDEXES
Checking cross-references against edited i ndex headings. As a final or near-final step in editing the index, make sure that all cross-references match the edited headings. See also 16.15-23.
Submitting the Index 1 6 . 13 1
Index submission format. Having carefully proofread the draft and checked alphabetical order and all cross-references, punctuation, and capitalization to ensure consistency-and having produced an index of the required length, if one has been specified-you will now send the fi nal draft to the publisher. If the publisher requires a printout, allow mar gins of at least one inch both left and right, and leave the text unjustified. Do not format the index in columns. Use hard returns only at the end of each entry and, for an indented-style index (see 16.26), at the end of each subentry. Use single line spacing, and apply hanging indents using your software's indentation feature (see 16.24; see also 2.11) . Do not im pose end-of-line hyphenation (see 2.13) . If there is more than one index, give each an appropriate title (Author Index, Subject Index, etc.) and save each in a separate file. To avert disaster, keep a copy of the final draft that you send to the publisher, as well as your marked-up proofs, until the work has been published. Send the publisher a list of any errors you have found (see 16.125) .
Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else 16.132
What t o do with a very bad index. Editing a well-prepared index can be a
pleasure. Little work should be needed. A poorly prepared one, however, presents serious problems. As an editor, you cannot remake a really bad index. If an index cannot be repaired, you have two choices: omit it or have a new one made by another indexer (at additional cost) . 1 6 . 133
Index-editing checklist. Editing an index requires some or all of the fol lowing steps, not necessarily in the order given here. Note that it is not necessary to check every heading and every locator against the work which would take forever-but it is necessary to read the index carefully and to refer to the latest version of the page proofs from time to time.
1. Check headings-in both the main entries and subentries-for alphabetical order. 2. Check the spelling, capitalization, and font (i.e., italics or roman) of each heading, consulting the page proofs if in doubt.
Editing an Index Compiled by Someone Else
1 6 . 134
3. Check punctuation-commas, colons, semicolons, en dashes, etc.-for proper style and consistency (see 16.94-100). 4. Check cross-references to make sure they go somewhere and that headings match (see 16.21). Make sure they are needed; if only a few locators are in volved, substitute these for the see reference (see 16.16). Ensure that the place ment of all cross-references within entries is consistent. 5. Add cross-references you believe are necessary. 6. Check to make sure there are no false locators such as "193-93" or "12102" (and figure out whether these may be the product of a typo) and make sure the locators to each main heading and subheading are in ascending order. 7. Check subentries for consistency of order, whether alphabetical or chronolog ical. See 16.68-70. 8. If some entries seem overanalyzed (many subentries with only one locator or, worse, with the same locator), try to combine some of them if it can be done without sacrificing their usefulness. If subheadings are more elaborately worded than necessary, try to simplify them. 9. If awkward or unnecessary sub-subentries appear, correct them by adding ap propriate repeated subentries or by adjusting punctuation (see 16.27, 16.28). 10. Look for long strings of unanalyzed locators and break them up, if possible, with subentries (see 16.10, 16.129). 11. Evaluate the accuracy of locators by a random check of five to ten entries. If more than one error shows up, consult the author or the indexer; every locator may have to be rechecked. 12. Ifthe index needs trimming, delete any entries (and cross-references thereto) that you know from your work on the book are trivial, such as references to persons or places used only as examples of something. But be careful. You may offend someone or let yourself in for a lot of work. A handful of unnecessary entries, if they are very short, will not mar an otherwise good index. 16. 134
I nstructions for typesetting the i ndex. At this stage the publisher will have prepared specifications for typesetting the index, and few further instructions are needed. To avoid problems, a brief note such as the fol lowing (for an indented index to a book) may be prefixed to the index manuscript after consulting the detailed specifications:
Set two columns, flush and hang, ragged right; indent subentries one em; indent runovers two ems; preserve en dashes between continuing numbers; leave one line space between alphabetical blocks. Set headnote across both columns. See publisher's design specifications for size and measure.
For an example of a headnote, see 16.141.
1 6 . 13 5
INDEXES
Typographical Considerations for Indexes 16.135
Type size a n d column width for indexes. In print works, indexes are usu
ally set in smaller type than the body of the work, often two sizes smaller. That is, if the body copy is set in ten-on-twelve-point type, and the ex tracts, bibliography, and appendixes in nine-on-eleven, the index will probably be set in eight-on-ten. Indexes are usually set in two columns; with a type page twenty-seven picas wide, the index columns will each be thirteen picas, with a one-pica space between them. In large-format print works, however, the index may be set in three or even four columns. 1 6 . 13 6
Ragged right-hand margin f o r indexes. For very short lines, such as those in an index, justifying the text usually results in either gaping word spaces or excessive hyphenation, making for difficult reading. Chicago therefore sets all indexes without justification ("ragged right") .
16. 137
Indenting index entries. All runover lines are indented, whether the sub entries are run in or indented. In indexes with indented subentries (see 16.26) , runover lines have to be indented more deeply than the suben tries; all runovers, whether from a main entry or a subentry (or even a sub-subentry, should these too be indented) , should be indented equally from the left margin. Thus, in an indented index the subentries may be indented one em, the sub-subentries two ems, and the runovers for all entries three ems. (For avoiding sub-subentries, see 16.27, 16.28.) All these matters, however, must be determined before type is set.
16.138
Fixing bad breaks ia indexes. The final, typeset index should be checked for bad breaks. A line consisting of only one or two page numbers should not be left at the top of a column, for example. A single line at the end of an alphabetic section (followed by a blank line) should not head a column, nor should a single line at the beginning of an alphabetic section remain at the foot of a column. Blemishes like these are eliminated by rebreaking entries or transposing lines from one column to another, by adding to the white space between alphabetic sections, and sometimes by lengthening or shortening all columns on facing pages by one line.
1 6 . 139
Adding "continued" lines in an index. If an entry breaks at the foot of the
last column on a right-hand page (a recto) and resumes at the top of the following left-hand page (a verso) , the main heading should be repeated, followed by the word continued in parentheses, above the carried-over part of the index.
Examples oflndexes
1 6 . 141
ingestive behavior (continued) network of causes underlying, 68; physiology of, 69-70, 86-87; in rat, 100; in starfish, 45, 52-62
In an indented index with indented sub-subentries it may be necessary to repeat a subentry ifthe subentry has been broken. house renovation (continued) structural problems (continued) termite damage, 25-27 warped overhangs, 46-49 1 6 . 14 0
Making typog raphic disti nctions in index entries. A complicated index can sometimes be made easier to read by using different type styles or fonts. If, for example, names of writers need to be distinguished from names of literary characters, one or the other might be set in caps and small caps. Page references to illustrations might be in italic type (see 16.116) and references to the principal treatment of a subject in boldface. If devices of this kind are used, a headnote to the index must furnish a key (see 16.141, 16.143) .
Examples of Indexes 1 6 . 141
A run-in index with italicized references to figu res and tables. Run-in
indexes are the most economical of the five formats exemplified in this section. Note the italic page references and the headnote explaining their use. Boldface could also be used for that purpose (see 16.143) . For more examples and further discussion, see 16.25, 16.27, 16.94-100. See also 16.68, 16.140. Page numbers in italics refer tofigures and tables. Abbot, George, 241-42 ABC, printing of, 164 abridgment: cases of, 246n161; as of fense, 455-56, 607; of Philosophical Transactions, 579n83; restrictions on, 226, 227; works as, 302-3, 316, 316-17
Abridgment (Croke), 302-3 Abridgment (Rolle) , 316, 316-17 absolutism: absence of in England, 48; arbitrary government and, 25152, 252n182; Cromwell and, 273-74; Hobbes and, 308; patronage and, 24; property and, 253, 255; royal
Academie royale des sciences (France), 436, 491n91, 510, 554
If occasional sub-subentries are required in a run-in index, you may re sort to the style illustrated in 16.27, example B, using em dashes. 1 6 . 142
An indented index with run-in sub-subentries. For further examples
and discussion, see 16.28. See also 16.68. American black bear compared with giant panda: activity, 216-17; habitat, 211-12; home range, 219; litter size, 221; movement patterns of males, 124-26, 219 delayed implantation in, 191 reproductive flexibility of, 221 See also bears amino acid content of bamboo, 75-76, 1 6 . 143
86, 89; compared with other foods, 77 artificial insemination, 179 Ascaris schroederi, 162 Asiatic black bear constructing sleeping nests, 140 giant panda serologically close to, 228 See also bears
An indented i ndex with indented sub-subentries and highlighted definitions. Note the deep indentation for runover lines (see 16.137) . A boldface page number indicates that the term is defined on that page (ex plained in a headnote at the beginning of the index) . Italics could also be used for that purpose (see 16.141) . For further discussion and examples, see 16.28. See also 16.68, 16.140.
Page numbersfor definitions are in boldface. brightness temperatures, 388, 582, 589, 602 bright rims, 7, 16, 27-28. See also nebular forms B stars, 3, 7, 26-27, 647 bulbs (in nebulae) . See nebular forms cameras, electronic, 492, 499 carbon flash, 559 Cassiopeia A (3C461). See radio sources; supernovae catalogs of bright nebulae, 74 of dark nebulae, 74, 120 Lundmark, 121
Lynds, 123 Schoenberg, 123 Herschel's (of nebulae), 119 of planetary nebulae, 484-85, 563 Perek-Kohoutek, 484, 563 Vorontsov-Velyaminov, 484 of reflection nebulae, 74 3C catalog of radio sources, revised, 630 central stars. See planetary nebulae Cerenkov radiation, 668, 709 chemical composition, 71. See also abundances; and names of individual elements
Examples oflndexes
1 6 . 145
If occasional sub-sub-subentries are essential (they should be avoided if at all possible) , they must be run in to the sub-subentries in the same way as sub-subentries are run in at 16.28, example A. 1 6 . 144
An index of first lines. Unless all the poems, hymns, or songs indexed have very short lines, indexes of this kind are often set full measure (rather than in multiple columns) for easier reading. Letter-by-letter al phabetizing is normally used. Note that lines beginning with A, An, or The are alphabetized under A or T.
After so long an absence, 295 A handful of red sand, from the hot clime, 108 An old man in a lodge within a park, 315 Beautiful valley! through whose verdant meads, 325 From this high portal, where upsprings, 630 O'er all the hill-tops, 617 Of Prometheus, how undaunted, 185 0 hemlock tree! 0 hemlock tree! how faithful are thy branches, 614 There is no flock, however watched and tended, 107 The young Endymion sleeps Endymion's sleep, 316 1 6 . 145
An index with authors, titles, and fi rst lines combined. To distinguish
the elements, authors' names may be set in caps and small caps, titles of poems in italics, and first lines in roman type, sentence style, without quotation marks. If needed, a headnote to this effect could be furnished. Letter-by-letter alphabetizing should be used. Cermak, it was, who entertained so great astonishment, 819 Certain she was that tigers fathered him, 724 CHESTERVILLE, NORA M., 212 Come, you whose loves are dead, 394 Coming Homeward Out ofSpain, 73 Commemorate me before you leave me, Charlotte, 292 Complaint ofa Lover Rebuked, 29 COMPTON, WILBER C., 96 Confound you, Marilyn, confound you, 459
In a general index, poem titles would be set in roman and enclosed in quotation marks, as in text or notes (see 8.181, 8.182) .
The Mechanics ofIndexing
16.129
Example A (not to be emulated) house renovation balancing heating system, 65 building permit required, 7 called "rehabbing," 8 correcting overloaded electrical circuits, 136 how wallboard is finished, 140-44 installing ready-made fireplace, 191-205 painting outside of house adds value, 11 plumbing permit required, 7 removing paint from doors and woodwork, 156-58
repairing dripping faucets, 99-100 replacing clogged water pipes, 125-28 replacing old wiring, 129-34 separate chimney required for fireplace, 192 straightening sagging joists, 40-42 termite damage to sills a problem, 25 three ways to deal with broken plaster, 160-62 violations of electrical code cor rected, 135 what is involved in, 5
Example B (improvement with fairly inclusive subentries) house renovation, 5, 8 electrical repairs, 129-34, 135, 136 fireplace, installing, 191-205 heating system, balancing, 65 legal requirements, 7, 135, 192
Example C (improvement with sub-subentries) house renovation, 5, 8 electrical repairs: circuit overload, 136; code violations, 135; old wiring, 129-34 heating system: balancing, 65; fire place installation, 191-205 legal requirements: electrical code, 135; permits, 7; separate chimney for fireplace, 192 painting and decorating: painting
If it looks as though an index is going to require a great many sub subentries, the indexer should check with the publisher before proceeding.
Glossary This glossary focuses on key terms related to the typography, design, and produc tion of works published in both print and electronic formats. Many of these terms are too specialized to be treated in the text of the Manual; for terms not covered here that may be defined within the text of the Manual, consult the index. AA. An abbreviation for author's alteration.
See also alteration. adhesive binding. A method of binding that employs glue instead of stitching to hold the pages or signatures together and is widely used for journals and paperback books. Three types of adhesive binding are currently used: perfect binding, notch binding, and burst binding. Contrast case binding; flexi binding. alteration. A change from the manuscript copy introduced in proof, as distin guished from a correction made to eliminate a typesetter's or printer's error. See also AA; DA; EA. app. An abbreviation for application. Now commonly used to refer to any com puter program, app can be used more narrowly to refer to an interactive ver sion of a publication such as a dictionary or other reference work. arabic numerals. The familiar digits used in arithmetical computation. In many type fonts, arabic numerals are available in two basic forms: lining, or aligning (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0), and old style (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o), abbreviated OS and charac terized by ascenders and descenders. Contrast roman numerals. artwork. Illustrative material (photographs, drawings, maps, and so forth) in tended for reproduction. ascender. The portion of a lowercase letter that extends above the x-height, as in b and d. Contrast descender; see also arabic numerals. ASCII file. See plain-text file. back margin. The inner margin of a page; that is, the margin along the binding side of the page. See also gutter. baseline. In type, an imaginary common line that all capital letters, x-heights, and lining arabic numerals rest on. beta testing. The final checking of a website or other application before it is re leased. Such testing is ideally carried out under normal operating conditions by users who are not directly involved in developing the application. binding. (1) A covering for the pages of a publication, using such materials as leather, cloth, and paper. (2) The process by which such a covering is attached. See also adhesive binding; case binding; ftexibinding.
G L O S SARY
bitmap. A digital representation of an image consisting of an array of pixels, in rows and columns, that can be saved to a file. Each pixel in the grid of the bit map contains information about the color value of its position, which is used, for example, to display an image on a monitor or print it to a page. Contrast vector graphic. blanket. In offset printing, the resilient rubber covering of the blanket cylinder, which receives the ink impression from the plate cylinder and offsets it onto the paper. bleed. To run an illustration or other ink coverage beyond the edge of a sheet of paper before it is trimmed. Also used as a noun, to refer to the area beyond the trim. blind embossing. See embossing. blind folio. See folio. blind stamping. See stamping. block quotation. Quoted material set off typographically from the text. Also called extract. Contrast run in. bluelines. An abbreviation for blueline proof; also called blues or (in Europe and Asia) ozalids. A type of photographic proof generated by a printing firm. Though this method of producing proofs is no longer widely used, the term is now sometimes used to refer to the final proof produced from a typesetter's electronic files. See also digital proof. boards. Stiffening material used in binding to form the foundation of the cover; formerly wood, now generally a paper product such as binder's board (the finest quality), pasted board (often used in case binding) , or chipboard (low quality). Redboard is used for flexible bindings. The bare board is sheathed in (or sometimes affixed with) one of a variety of cover materials. body text. The running text of a work, as distinguished from the display text used for chapter openings, subheads, and so forth. boldface. Type that has a darker and heavier appearance than standard type (as in the entries in this list of key terms) . broadside. Designed to be read or viewed normally when the publication is turned ninety degrees. In University of Chicago Press practice, the left side of a broadside table or illustration is at the bottom of the page. Because most publications are taller than they are wide, broadside images are usually land scape. See also landscape. bulk. The thickness of paper measured in number of pages per inch; also used loosely to indicate the thickness of a publication, excluding the cover. burst binding. A type of adhesive binding in which the untrimmed spine is per forated and force-fed with glue. caps. An abbreviation for capital letters. See also small caps. case. A hard cover or binding made by a case-making machine or by hand and usually printed, stamped, or labeled before being glued to the gathered end-
GLOSSARY
papers that are attached t o the signatures. A case that i s covered entirely by one type of material is a one-piece case; a case in which the spine is covered by one type of material and the front and back cover boards by another (often in a different color) is a three-piece case. case binding. A method of encasing a book in a rigid cover, or case. The gathered signatures can be Smyth sewn or side sewn together or adhesive-bound; end papers are glued to the first and last signatures; a hinge of heavy gauze (the su per) is glued to the spine of the sewn signatures; and the case is secured to the book by being glued to the flaps of the super and to both endpapers. Contrast adhesive binding; fte:xibinding. castoff. An estimate of the space, or number of printed pages, that a manuscript will occupy when typeset. catchword. In very old books, a word or part of a word printed below the last line of text to signal the word on the following page. Also called catchphrase. character. A letter, numeral, symbol, or mark of punctuation. character count. An approximate measure of the length of a manuscript made by multiplying the number of characters and spaces in an average line by the number of lines in the manuscript. The "character count" feature of many word-processing programs can provide a precise total. character encoding. A set of machine-readable numbers or other elements-or code points-that correspond to a set of alphanumeric characters and symbols such that they can be interpreted by a computer. See also Unicode. character reference. A plain-text placeholder defined for a markup language such as SGML, HTML, or XML and used to refer to a special character that is unavailable in a particular character encoding or from a particular input de vice such as a keyboard. clothbound. Bound with a rigid cover, usually cloth wrapped around boards. Contrast paperback. CMYK. An abbreviation for the basic colors used in process color printing cyan (C) , magenta (M) , and yellow (Y), plus black (K)-to approximate all the colors in the spectrum. See also RGB. code. See tag. colophon. A statement, usually at the back of a publication (as in this manual) , about the materials, processes, and individuals or companies involved in its preparation, production, and manufacturing. The term is also used to refer to a publisher's logo as it often appears on the title page and spine of a book. See also imprint. color printing. See process color printing. color proof. A form of proof used to check the accuracy of color reproduction before printing. Also called prepress proof color separation. (1) The analysis of color copy for reproduction in terms of the three process colors (plus black) to be used in printing; separation is achieved
GLO SSARY
b y shooting through filters o r b y electronic scanning. (2) A film negative or positive, or a digital file, so produced for preparation of the printing plate. See also process color printing. comp. An abbreviation for comprehensive layout, as for a dust jacket, and also for composition or compositor. compositor. See typesetter. computer-to-plate (CTP) technology. A process in which print-ready electronic files are imposed directly onto offset printing plates, thus eliminating the need for an intermediate stage involving film. continuous tone. An image, such as a photograph, with gradations of tone from dark to light, in contrast to an image formed of pure blacks and whites, such as a pen-and-ink drawing. See also halftone. contract proof. A,n image proof that shows the tonal range, color, and quality that the printer is contractually obligated to match on press. cover. The two hinged parts of a binding, front and back, and the center panel, or spine, that joins them; also the three surfaces making up the covers in this sense, when used to carry printed matter. See also dust jacket. crop. To cut down an illustration, such as a photograph, to improve the appear ance of the image by removing extraneous areas. CSS. An abbreviation for cascading style sheets. A style sheet language used to de fine the presentation of a document marked up in HTML or another formal markup language. cyan. A greenish blue, one of the three primary colors (plus black) used in process color printing. See also CMYK. DA. An abbreviation for designer's alteration. See also alteration. descender. The portion of a lowercase letter that extends below the x-height, as in g and p. Contrast ascender; see also arabic numerals. die. See stamping. . digital printing. A type of printing in which the transfer of electronic images to paper is accomplished with ink-jet or laser printers. Contrast offset printing; see also print on demand. digital proof. A type of proof generated directly from electronic files and typi cally output on a laser printer. See also bluelines. display type. Type used for title pages, chapter openings, subheads, and so on, usually distinguished from the type used for body text by a different, often larger font. See also body text. DOI. An abbreviation for Digital Object Identifier, a unique alphanumeric string (e.g., 10.1086/597483) assigned to a publication or other unit of intellectual property. A DOI appended to https://doi.org/ provides a means of looking up the current location(s) of such an object on the internet. See also ISBN; ISSN. dots per inch (DPI). See resolution. DRM. An abbreviation for digital rights management. Refers to a system designed
G L O S SARY
to protect copyrighted electronic works from unauthorized use, copying, or distribution. drop cap. An uppercase character set in a type size larger than the text and "dropped," or nested, into lines of text, usually as the first character in the opening paragraph of a chapter or other section of text. drop folio. See folio. DTD. An abbreviation for document type definition. In a markup language such as XML, a set of rules about the structure of a document that dictate the relation ships among different tags and allowable text or elements within specified tags. Also called schema. See also tag. dust jacket. Also called jacket. A protective wrapping, usually made of paper, for a clothbound book; its flaps, which fold around the front and back covers, usu ally carry promotional copy. See also cover. EA. An abbreviation for editor's alteration. See also alteration. e-book. An abbreviation for electronic book. See also EPUB. ECF. An abbreviation for elemental chlorine-free. Refers to paper bleached with a chlorine derivative that releases hazardous substances, including dioxin, into the environment. Contrast PCF; TCF. edition. (1) A publication in its original form, or any subsequent reissue of the publication in which its content is significantly revised. (2) More informally, a term used to refer to each format in which a publication appears (for example, a book published in both cloth and paperback bindings, or a journal published in both electronic and print forms) . However, the designation second edition would not be applied to the secondary format, or to a second or subsequent impression of the publication, in the absence of significant content changes. See also impression; reprint. em. A unit of type measurement equal to the point size of the type in question; for example, a six-point em is six points wide. See also point. embossing. Forming an image in relief (that is, a raised image) on a surface such as a case or a paper cover or dust jacket. If the process does not involve metal lic leaf or ink, it is called blind embossing. See also stamping. em dash. A short typographical rule measuring the width of an em. en. A unit of type measurement half the size of an em. en dash. A short typographical rule measuring the width of an en. endpapers. Folded sheets pasted or, rarely, sewn to the first and last signatures of a book; the free leaves are then pasted to the inside of the front and back cov ers to secure the book within the covers. Sometimes endpapers feature printed text or illustrations. Also called endsheets. EPS. An abbreviation for encapsulated Postscript. A type of file used to encode graphics so they can be embedded in a larger Postscript file. EPUB. An abbreviation for electronic publication. An international standard for mat for packaging and encoding content for distribution as a single file based
GLO SSARY
o n XHTML and C S S together with compatible formats and technologies. EPUB can be used as an open format for electronic books, or e-books, or in conjunction with commercial products that employ systems of digital rights management. See also CSS; D RM ; XHTML. extract. See block quotation. F&Gs. See folded-and-gathered sheets. figure. An illustration printed with the text (hence also called a text figure), as distinguished from a plate, which is printed separately. More generally, figure is used to refer to any illustration in a published work, including charts (but not tables). file. A block of digital information with a unique name and location in a computer system or storage medium that can be accessed and manipulated by users of the system or by the system itself. Programs, documents, and images are all examples of data stored in files. flaps. See dust jacket. flexibinding. Also called limp binding. A method of binding in which the pages or signatures are sewn together and the lightweight cover (sometimes with flaps) is then affixed, as in adhesive binding. The result is a publication that is lighter and less bulky than a casebound book but sturdier and more flexible than an adhesive-bound paperback. Contrast adhesive binding; case binding. flush. Even, as with typeset margins. Lines that are set flush left are aligned ver tically along the left-hand margin; lines set flush right are aligned along the right-hand margin. See also justified; ragged right. flush-and-hang style. A copy-setting style in which the first line of each para graph begins flush left and subsequent, or runover, lines are indented (as in this glossary). Also referred to as hanging indent. folded-and-gathered sheets. Also called F&Gs or sheets. The collection of all printed signatures in a publication, folded into imposed page sequence and gathered for binding. See also imposition; signature. folio. A page number, often placed at the outside of the running head at the top of the page. If it is placed consistently at the bottom of the page, the number is a footfolio; if it is placed at the bottom of the page on display pages only, it is a dropfolio. A folio counted in numbering pages but not printed (as on the title page) is a blindfolio; any folio printed is an expressedfolio. Sometimes also used to refer to the page, or leaf, itself. font. A complete assortment of a given size and style of type, usually including capitals, small capitals, and lowercase together with numerals, punctuation marks, ligatures, and the commonly used symbols and accents. The italic of a typeface is considered a part of the equipment of a font of type but is often spoken of as a separate font. Often used as a synonym for typeface. foot folio. See folio. four-color process. See process color printing.
GLO SSARY
FTP.An abbreviation fo rfile transfer protocol. The protocol, o r set o f instructions and syntax, for moving files between computers on the internet. gallery. A section of illustrations grouped on consecutive pages rather than scat tered throughout the text. galley proof. Proof showing typeset material but without final pagination. The term, an anachronism, once referred to the long, narrow columns of type, or "galleys," prepared by a printer before pages were composed, by hand. See also page proof. GIF. An abbreviation for graphic interchangeformat. A file format for compressing and storing bitmapped graphics that contain line art or text for viewing on screen. Contrast JPEG; see also PNG. gutter. The two inner margins (back margins) of facing pages of a book or journal. hairline rule. A very thin rule-whose width is variously defined as one-quarter point, one-half point, or one-fifth of an em. hairspace. See thin space. halftone. An image formed by breaking up a continuous-tone image, such as a photograph, into a pattern of dots of varying sizes. When printed, the dots, though clearly visible through a magnifying glass, merge to give an illusion of continuous tone to the naked eye. halftone screen. A grid used in the halftone process to break an image up into dots. The fineness of the screen is denoted in terms of lines per inch, as in a 133-line screen. hanging indent. See flush-and-hang style. hard copy. A paper copy of text, artwork, or other material, as opposed to a copy that has been stored in digital form. hardcover binding. See case binding. head margin. The top margin of a page. HTML. An abbreviation for hypertext markup language. A specific set of tags used to describe the structure of hypertext documents that make up most web pages. Web browsers interpret these tags to display text and graphics. HTML is an application of SGML. HTTP. An abbreviation for hypertext transfer protocol. The protocol, or set of in structions and syntax, for exchanging web pages and related content on the internet and for enabling links between such content. HTTPS (the S stands for secure) is a version of the protocol that adds support for encryption and related security mechanisms. hypertext. The organization of digital information into associations connected by links. In a hypertext environment, objects such as text and images can con tain links to other objects in the same file or in external files, which users can choose to follow. See also HTML; HTTP. imposition. The process of arranging the pages for a printed book in such a man ner that, when folded, they will appear in the correct order and sequence and
G L O S SARY
in the correct orientation. See also computer-to-plate (CTP) technology; folded-and-gathered sheets. impression. (1) The inked image on the paper created during a single cycle of a press; the speed of a sheet-fed printing press is given in terms of impressions per hour. (2) A single printing of a publication; that is, all the copies printed at a given time. See edition; reprint. imprint. The name of a publisher or a division of a publisher, often as it appears on the title page of a book, sometimes together with a location and a date. See also colophon. indent. To set a line of type so that it begins or ends inside the normal margin. In paragraph indentation the first line is indented from the left margin and the following lines are set full measure. In hanging indentation (also referred to as flush and hang) the first line is set full measure and the following lines are indented. See also flush-and-hang style. internet. A global, public network of computers and computer networks that communicate using TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet pro tocol). ISBN. An abbreviation for International Standard Book Number. Publishers usually assign an ISBN to each book in each format (e.g., cloth, paperback, or e-book format) under a system maintained by the International ISBN Agency and administered in the United States by R. R. Bowker. The ISBN uniquely identifies the book, thus facilitating order fulfillment and inventory tracking. See also DOI; ISSN. ISSN. An abbreviation for International Standard Serial Number. An ISSN is a unique eight-digit number that identifies a titled journal or other periodical through a database of numbers maintained by the ISSN International Centre. Books that are part of a monograph series may also be assigned an ISSN in addition to an ISB � . See also DOI; ISBN. issue. Used primarily to refer to journals or other periodical publications, typi cally to indicate the publication's sequence within a larger volume. Although the issue is often designated by a numeral, other means ofidentification (such as a month or season) may be used instead of or in addition to issue number. See also volume. italic. A slanted type style suggestive of cursive writing (like this) . Contrast ro man. jacket. See dust jacket. JPEG. An abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. A file format com monly used to compress and store bitmapped graphics that contain photo graphic and other continuous-tone images for viewing on-screen. Contrast GIF; PNG. justified. Spaced out to a specified measure, as with printed lines, so that left and right margins are aligned. Contrast ragged right.
G L O S S A RY
kem. The part of a letter that extends beyond the edge of the type body and over laps the adjacent character, as the j in adjacent or the T in To. kerning. The selective adjustment of space between particular characters (called "letterspacing") to improve appearance or ease of reading. landscape. Having a greater dimension in width than in length (or height), as with an image or a document. Contrast portrait; see also broadside. layout. A designer's plan of how the published material, including illustrative content, should appear. leading. Also called line spacing. The visual space between lines of type, usually measured in points from baseline to baseline. This word, derived from the ele ment lead, rhymes with "heading." letterspacing. See kerning. ligature. A single character formed by joining two characters, such as re,fi, orff. Older, more decorative forms (such as ct-a c joined to a t by a loop) are known as quaint characters. line art. Copy for reproduction that contains only solid blacks and whites, such as a pen-and-ink drawing. Contrast continuous tone. line spacing. See leading. lining numbers. See under arabic numerals. lowercase. The uncapitalized letters of a font. Contrast uppercase. macro. From macroinstruction. A sequence of operations that is defined for reuse in a computer program. In word processing, a macro can be used to perform complex or repetitive tasks. makeup. Arrangement of type lines and illustrations into page form. margin. The white space surrounding the printed area of a page, including the back, or gutter, margin; the head, or top, margin; the fore edge, or outside, margin; and the tail, foot, or bottom, margin. Contrast type page. markup. (1) A sequence of characters, often called tags or codes, that indicate the logical structure of a manuscript or provide instructions for formatting it. (2) The insertion of such tags in an electronic manuscript; also, traditionally, pencil markup on a paper manuscript. MathML. An application of XML for tagging mathematical expressions. measure. The length ofthe line (usually in picas) in which type is set. Full measure refers to copy set the full width of the type page. Narrow measure refers to a block of copy (such as a long quotation) indented from one or both margins to distinguish it from surrounding full-measure copy, or to copy set in short lines for multicolumn makeup. metadata. A form of structured resource description; literally, data about data. The metadata for a given publication may include, among other things, copy right information, an ISBN or ISSN, a volume or issue number, the title and creator of the work, and a description. Metadata is typically recorded using a standard syntax based on a markup language such as XML.
G L O S SARY
notch binding. A type of adhesive binding in which the untrimmed spine is notched and force-fed with glue. OCR. An abbreviation for optical character recognition. A technology that converts images of text (as from a scan of a printed page) into character data that can be manipulated like any other digital text. offprint. An article, chapter, or other excerpt from a larger work issued as a sepa rate unit. When offered electronically, sometimes called digital offprint. offset printing. Also called offset lithography. The most common type of printing for large print runs of books and journals. The pages to be printed are trans ferred through computer-to-plate technology to a thin, flexible metal plate, curved to fit one of the revolving cylinders of a printing press. The image on this plate is then transferred to, or offset onto, the paper by means of a rubber blanket on another cylinder. Contrast digital printing. old-style numbers. See under arabic numerals. opacity. The measurement of transparency of paper. The higher a paper's opac ity, the less tendency there is for text and images printed on one side of a sheet to show through to the other side. orphan. The first line of a paragraph stranded at the bottom of a page or column. An orphan can be avoided by changes in wording or spacing to the text that precedes it. Contrast widow. page proof. Proof showing typeset material that has been paginated to reflect the placement of text, illustrations, and other design elements. Some publications may require one or more stages of revised page prooffor checking corrections. paperback. Bound with a cover stock rather than a cloth-and-board cover. Also called paperbound. Contrast clothbound. pattern matching. In word processing, a search or search-and-replace operation that uses a formal syntax to find every instance of a specified string of text or "pattern" and, conditionally, replace it with a different string. Such patterns are known in some contexts as regular expressions. PCF. An abbreviation for process chlorine-free. Refers to recycled papers bleached without using chlorine or chlorine derivatives beyond what may have been used originally to produce the recovered wastepaper. Contrast ECF; see also TCF. PDF. An abbreviation for portable document format. An Adobe Systems file format-and now a formal, open standard (ISO 32000-1)-for stable, device independent delivery of electronic documents. Preserving such elements as fonts, layout, and pagination, PDF is used not only as the basis for many printed publications but also as a format for electronic publications, including many journal articles and e-books. See also Postscript (PS). PE. An abbreviation for printer's error. See also printer's error (PE). perfect binding. A type of adhesive binding that involves mechanically rough ening off about an eighth of an inch from the spine of the folded-and-gathered sheets. This treatment produces a surface of intermingled fibers to which an
G L O S SARY
adhesive is applied, and a cover (usually paper) is wrapped around the pages. Note that the design of a perfect-bound book should account for the fact that part of the inside margin will be lost in the binding process. pica. A unit of type measurement equal to twelve points (approximately one-sixth of an inch) . pixel. See resolution. plain-text file. An informal term for a file that contains data encoded using only letters, numerals, punctuation marks, spaces, returns, line breaks, and tabs with no additional formatting or special characters. Plain-text files are often referred to as ASCII files, although newer encoding schemes may be used, and other kinds of data (such as XML) can also be stored as plain-text files. plate. (1) An image-bearing surface that, when inked, will produce one whole page or several pages of printed matter at a time. (2) A printed illustration, usually of high quality and produced on special paper, pasted or bound into a publication; when so printed, plates are numbered separately from other il lustrations. PNG. An abbreviation for portable network graphic. A file format for compressing and storing bitmapped graphics that contain line art or text for viewing on screen. Contrast JPEG; see also GIF. point. (1) The basic unit of type measurement-0.01384 (approximately one seventy-second) of an inch. (2) A unit used in measuring paper products em ployed in printing and binding-0.001 inches. portable document format. See PDF. portrait. Having a greater dimension in length (or height) than in width, as with an image or a document. Contrast landscape. Postscript (PS). An Adobe Systems programming language used to describe pages (in terms of trim size, font, placement of graphics, and so forth) and to tell output devices how to render the data. Portable Document Format (PDF), a descendant of Postscript, is somewhat more flexible. See also PDF. prepress. The processes undertaken by a printing firm between the receipt of the electronic files and any other materials from the publisher (or its typesetter) and the printing of the publication. prepress proof. See color proof. preprint. Part of a book or journal printed and distributed or posted online be fore publication for promotional purposes or, in time-sensitive fields such as science and medicine, to mitigate the delay of publication schedules and peer review. press sheet. Also called printed sheet or running sheet. In offset printing, a large sheet of paper that emerges from the press with pages printed on both sides, each from a single plate. The sheet must then be folded so that the pages fall into proper sequence. See also signature. presswork. The actual printing of a publication, as distinguished from composi tion, which precedes it, and binding, which follows.
GLO SSARY
printer's error (PE) . A n error made b y the typesetter (or compositor), as distin guished from an alteration made in proof by the author, editor, or designer. print on demand (POD). An application of digital printing that allows one or more copies of a book or other publication to be printed and bound at the time it is ordered. See also digital printing. process color printing. The halftone reproduction of full-color artwork or photo graphs using several plates (usually four), each printing a different color. Each plate is made with a halftone screen. Process colors are cyan, magenta, and yel low, plus black (CMYK) . See also halftone screen. proof. The printed or electronic copy made from electronic files, plates, nega tives, or positives and used to examine and correct a work's text, illustrations, and design elements before final printing. A publication may involve several stages of proof; see bluelines; color proof; digital proof; galley proof; page proof. protocol. A standard set of instructions and syntax that define the rules by which documents are shared between computers over a network. See also FTP; HTTP; internet. PS. See Postscript (PS) . ragged right. Set with an uneven right-hand margin, as with printed lines. Con trast justified. recto. The front side of a leaf; in a book or journal, a right-hand page. To start recto is to begin on a recto page, as a preface or an index normally does. Contrast verso. redline. In word processing, a document in which changes (additions and de letions) are shown, or "tracked," by the application of text attributes such as strikethrough, underlining, boldface, or color. Often used as a verb: to redline. Also called legal blackline. reprint. A publication in its second or subsequent printing, or impression. A re � print may include corrections or new material or both and may be published in a format different from the original printing (for example, as a paperback rather than a clothbound book, or as an e-book) . The extent of the changes usually determines whether the reprint is considered a new edition of the pub lication. See also edition; impression. resolution. (1) The number of pixels per unit of measure used to form an image. In the United States, image resolution is calculated per inch; the more pixels per inch, the higher the quality of the image. (2) The number of actual dots per unit of measure at which an image or page is output, usually by a printer or an image-setting device. In the United States, output resolution is usually ex pressed per inch; the more dots per inch, the higher the quality of the output. RGB. An abbreviation for the additive color model that uses red (R), green (G), and blue (B) pixels to render color images on displays for computers and other devices. RGB images are converted to CMYK for printing.
G L O S SARY
roman. The primary type style (like this), a s distinguished from italic (like this) . roman numerals. Numerals formed from traditional combinations of roman let ters, either capitals (I, II, III, IV, etc.) or lowercase (i, ii, iii, iv, etc.) . Contrast arabic numerals. run in. (1) To merge a paragraph or line with the preceding one. (2) To set quoted matter continuously with text rather than setting it off as a block quotation. running heads. Copy set at the top of a page, often containing the title of the publication or chapter, chapter number, or other information. Such copy is sometimes placed at the bottom of the pages, in which case it is referred to as runningftet. runover. (1) The continuation of a heading, figure legend, or similar copy onto an additional line. (2) In flush-and-hang material, all lines after the first line of a particular item. (3) Text that is longer than intended, running onto another page, or reset material that is longer than the material it was meant to replace. saddle stitching. Also called saddle wiring. A method of binding that involves in serting thread or staples through the folds of gathered sheets, as in pamphlets and magazines. sans serif. A typeface with no serifs (l ike this) . Contrast serif. Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG). See vector graphic. scale. To calculate (after cropping) the proportions and finish size of an illustra tion and the amount of reduction or enlargement needed to achieve this size. In electronic formats, illustrations and other elements are often scaled to ad just to a particular screen size or other parameters. scan. To produce a digital bitmap of an image (text or graphics) using a device that senses alternating patterns of light and dark and of color. The resolution and scaling percentage of the desired output should be considered before the image is scanned. schema. See DTD. screen. A halftone screen; also the dot pattern in the printed image produced by such a screen. serif. A short, light line projecting from the top or bottom of a main stroke of a letter; originally, in handwritten letters, a beginning or finishing stroke of the pen. Contrast sans serif. sewing. The process of stitching signatures together as part of binding. See also side sewing; Smyth sewing. SGML. An abbreviation for standard generalized markup language, an interna tional standard for constructing sets of tags. SGML is not a specific set of tags but a system for defining vocabularies oftags (the names of the tags and what they mean) and using them to encode documents. See also tag; XML. sheet-fed press. A printing press using paper in sheet form. Contrast web-fed press. sidehead. A subhead that (1) lies partly outside the margin of the text and is set
G L O SSARY
on a line ofits own; (2) lies wholly outside the text margin; or (3) begins a para graph and is continuous with the text. A subhead of the third sort is sometimes called a run-in sidehead. See also run in. side sewing. In binding, a method of sewing that involves stitching the signatures from the side, close to the spine, before attaching the case. Libraries typically rebind books in this manner. A side-sewn book is more durable than a Smyth sewn book but will not open flat. See also Smyth sewing. signature. A press sheet as folded, ready for binding. A signature is usually thirty two pages but may be only sixteen, eight, or even four pages if the paper stock is very heavy, or sixty-four pages if the paper is thin enough to permit addi tional folding. The size of the press also affects the size of the signature. See also folded-and-gathered sheets; press sheet. small caps. An abbreviation for small capitals. Capital letters set at the x-height of a font (LIKE THIS), usually for display. Smyth sewing. A method of sewing that involves stitching the signatures indi vidually through the fold before binding them. A Smyth-sewn book has the advantage of lying flat when open, unlike a side-sewn or perfect-bound book. See also perfect binding; side sewing. spec. An abbreviation for specification (plural specs or spex) as in design specs. spine. The "back" of a bound publication; that is, the center panel of the binding, hinged on each side to the two covers, front and back, and visible when the book or other item is shelved. Typically the title of the publication is printed on the spine. Also called the backbone. spread. Two facing pages, a verso and a recto. stamping. Imprinting the spine of a case and sometimes the front cover with hard metal dies. Stamping may involve ink, foil, or other coloring material; if it does not, it is called blind stamping. See also embossing. stub. The left-hand column of a table. See also table. style sheet. (1) A set of programming instructions that, in conjunction with a markup language such as XML or HTML, determine how a document is pre sented on a screen, on a printed page, or in another medium such as speech. (2) A record of terms kept by a manuscript editor to document particular us ages for a specific manuscript. See also CSS. subhead. A heading, or title, for a section within a chapter or an article. Subheads are usually set in type differing in some way from that of the text; for example, in boldface, all capitals, caps and small caps, or upper- and lowercase italic. See also sidehead. subscript. A small numeral, letter, fraction, or symbol that prints partly below the baseline, usually in mathematical material or chemical formulas. superscript. A small numeral, letter, fraction, or symbol that prints partly above the x-height, often in mathematical or tabular material or to indicate a foot note or endnote. -
GLO SSARY
table A more o r less complex list presented a s a n array o f vertical columns and horizontal rows. tag. (1) In SGML and languages derived from SGML, a generic marker used to specify and (when paired) delimit an element in the structure of a document. The process of adding tags to a manuscript is known as tagging or markup. (2) More informally, a synonym for code. See also markup; SGML; XML. TCF. An abbreviation for totally chlorine-free. Refers to paper bleached without using chlorine or chlorine derivatives. Contrast ECF; see also PCF. thin space. A very small space, defined as one-fifth (or sometimes one-sixth) of an em, added between characters. A similar space, known as a hair space, is even smaller than a thin space. thumbnail. A miniature rendition of a page or an image. In electronic publica tions, a thumbnail is often used to indicate a link to a larger electronic object. TIFF. An abbreviation for tagged image fileformat. A file format developed by Al dus and Microsoft and used to store bitmapped graphics, including scanned line art, halftones, and color images. trim size. The dimensions, usually in inches, of a full page in a printed publica tion, including the margins. typeface. A collection of fonts with common design or style characteristics. A typeface may include roman, italic, boldface, condensed, and other fonts. The various typefaces are designated by name: Baskerville, Caslon, and Times Ro man, for example. See also font. type page. The area of a typeset page occupied by the type image, from the run ning head to the last line of type on the page or the folio, whichever is lower, and from the inside margin to the outside margin, including any area occupied by sideheads. typesetter. A person, firm, facility, or machine that prepares books, articles, or other documents for publication. The term, now somewhat of an anachronism, has its origins in the composing-or "setting" -of individual pieces of type, by hand, and binding them together to make individual pages. Also called compositor. type styles. See boldface; italic; roman. Unicode. A system of character encoding developed by the Unicode Consortium and incorporated into the ISO standard for universal multiple-octet coded characters (ISO/IEC 10646) . See also character encoding. unjustified. See ragged right. uppercase. The capital letters of a font. Contrast lowercase. URL. An abbreviation for uniform resource locator, or the address used to locate a document on the internet (e.g., http://www.press.uchicago.edu/). vector graphic. A digital representation of an image defined by shapes such as lines and curves rather than by pixels. Line art is typically created, edited, and scaled as a vector graphic. Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is a standard that defines vector graphics for XML. Because SVG images are both searchable ..
G L O S SARY
and resolution independent, they are a preferred format for websites and mo bile devices. Contrast bitmap. verso. The back side of a leaf; in a book or journal, a left-hand page. Contrast recto. volume. Used to refer (a) to a book or a specific, usually numbered, book in a series or (b) to a series of issues of a journal or other periodical publication. See also issue. web browser. A computer program designed to access information on the inter net or on a local network. See also HTML; web page. web-fed press. A printing press using paper in roll form. Contrast sheet-fed press. web page. A virtual document delivered via the World Wide Web and viewed in a web browse.r. website. A collection of closely related and hyperlinked web pages maintained by an individual or organization. widow. A short, paragraph-ending line appearing at the top of a page. Widows should be avoided when possible by changes in wording or spacing that either remove the line or lengthen it. Contrast orphan. wiki. A website designed to allow visitors to edit and contribute content. World Wide Web. Also called the web. The internet's most widely used informa tion-retrieval service. The World Wide Web uses hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) to allow users to request and retrieve documents (web pages and mul timedia objects) from other computers on the internet. x-height. In type, a vertical dimension equal to the height of the lowercase letters (such as x) without ascenders or descenders. XHTML. An application of XML for producing HTML that conforms to the rules established for a particular XML-based document. See also EPUB; HTML. XML. An abbreviation: for extensible markup language. A subset of the SGML stan dard, used for structuring documents and data on the internet and for publi cation in a variety of electronic formats. See also SGML. XSL. An abbreviation for extensible style sheet language. A family of style sheet languages used to define the presentation of XML documents and their con version, or transformation, into other formats such as HTML (using XSLT, extensible style sheet language transformations).
Bibliography WORKS O N WRI TI NG A N D E D I T I N G Style i.1 Grammar and Usage 1.2 Research and Writing 1.3 WORKS ON P U B L I S H I N G 2 Manuscript Editing and Proofreading 2.1 Illustrations 2.2 Rights and Permissions 2.3 Mathematics 2.4 Indexing 2.5 Design 2.6 Production 2.7 The Publishing Industry 2.s
D I C T I O NA R I E S 3 English Dictionaries 3.1 Bilingual Dictionaries 3.2 Medical and Scientific Dictionaries 3.3
G E N E RAL R E F E R E N C E WORKS 4 Biography 4.1 Geography 4.2 Encyclopedias 4.3 Almanacs and Yearbooks 4.4 Guides to Books, Periodicals, and Other Sources 4.5 Quotations and Trivia 4.6 Abbreviations 4.7
M I S C ELLAN E O U S WORKS C IT E D I N TEXT 5
BIBLI O G RAPHY
The works listed here offer a starting point fo r writers, editors, and oth ers involved in publishing who would like more information about topics covered in this manual. The list includes all the works cited in the text as further resources along with other useful references. Although some make recommendations that diverge from those of this manual, they re flect the specific demands of different disciplines and the evolving tradi tions of writing, editing, and publishing. As with all reference sources, readers should carefully evaluate their suitability for a given purpose.
1
Works on Writing and Editing
1.1 Style The ACS Style Guide: Effective Communication ofScientific Information. 3rd ed. Ed ited by Anne M. Coghill and Lorrin R. Garson. Washington, DC: American Chemical Society, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1021/bk-2006-STYG. ALWD Guide to Legal Citation. 5th ed. Edited by the Association of Legal Writing Directors and Coleen M. Barger. New York: Wolters Kluwer Law & Business, 2014. AMA Manual ofStyle: A Guide for Authors and Editors. 10th ed. Edited by Cheryl Iverson. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007. Also available at http:// www.amamanualofstyle.com/. American Institute of Physics. Author Resource Center. AIP Publishing. http:// publishing.aip.org/authors. Apple Style Guide. Apple, April 2013. https://help.apple.com/asg/mac/2013/ASG _2013.pd£ The Associated Press Stylebook and Briefing on Media Law. Updated annually. New York: Associated Press. Also available at https://www.apstylebook.com/. Australian Guide to Legal Citation. 3rd ed. Melbourne University Law Review Association, in collaboration with Melbourne Journal of International Law. Melbourne, 2010. https://www.law.unimelb.edu.au/files/dmfile/FinalOnline PDF-2012Reprint.pdf. Berkshire Manual ofStylefor International Publishing. Great Barrington, MA: Berk shire Publishing, 2011. The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation. 20th ed. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Law Review Association, 2015. Also available at https://www.legalbluebook .com/. Canadian Guide to Uniform Legal Citation. 7th ed. In English and French. Toronto: Carswell/McGill Law Journal, 2010. Catholic News Service. CNS Stylebook on Religion: Reference Guide and Usage Man ual. 4th ed. Washington, DC: Catholic News Service, 2012.
BIBLIO G RAPHY
C S E Manual. S e e Scientific Style and Format. Editing Canadian English. 3rd ed. Editors' Association of Canada. Toronto: Edi tors Canada, 2015. https://editingcanadianenglish.ca/. Garner, Bryan A. The Elements ofLegal Style. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002. Holoman, D. Kern. Writing about Music: A Style Sheet. 2nd ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2008. International Organization for Standardization. Information and Documentation Guidelines for Bibliographic References and Citations to Information Resources. 3rd ed. ISO 690. Paris: ISO, 2010. In English and French. https://www. iso.org /obp/ui/#iso:std:43320. Journal of Clinical Microbiology. Instructions to Authors. Washington, DC: Amer ican Society for Microbiology. Revised May 2015. http://jcm.asm.org/site /misc/journal-ita org.xhtml. Lipson, Charles. Cite Right: A Q].tick Guide to Citation Styles-MLA, APA, Chicago, the Sciences, Professions, and More. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2011. The Maroonbook: The University of Chicago Manual ofLegal Citation. Anniversary ed. Edited by the University of Chicago Law Review. 2015. https://lawreview .uchicago.edu/page/maroonbook. MHRA Style Guide: A Handbook for Authors, Editors, and Writers of Theses. 3rd ed. London: Modern Humanities Research Association, 2013. Also available at http://www.mhra.org.uk/. Microsoft Manual ofStyle. 4th ed. Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press, 2012. MLA Handbook. 8th ed. New York: Modern Language Association of America, 2016. MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing. 3rd ed. New York: Modern Language Association of America, 2008. New Oxford Style Manual. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2012. Com bines New Hart's Rules and New Oxford Dictionaryfor Writers and Editors. The New York Public Library Writers Guide to Style and Usage. New York: Harper Collins, 1994. The New York Times Manual ofStyle and Usage. Rev. ed. Edited by Allan M. Siegal and William G. Connolly. New York: Three Rivers Press, 1999. Publication Manual ofthe American Psychological Association. 6th ed. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association, 2009. Also available at http://www .apastyle.org/asc/. Reporting on Religion 2: A Stylebook on Religion's Best Beat. Edited by Diane Con nolly and Debra L. Mason. Westerville, OH: Religion Newswriters, 2007. Also available at http://religionstylebook.com/. Sabin, William A. The Gregg Reference Manual: A Manual of Style, Grammar, Us age, and Formatting. 11th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2011. Also available at http://www.mhhe.com/business/buscom/gregg/. _
B I B L I O G RAPHY
Sampsel, Laurie J . Music Research: A Handbook. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford Uni versity Press, 2012. The SBL Handbook ofStyle: For Biblical Studies and Related Disciplines. 2nd ed. Ed ited by Billie Jean Collins. Atlanta, GA: SBL Press, 2014. Scientific Style and Format: The CSE Manualfor Authors, Editors, and Publishers. 8th ed. Compiled by the Style Manual Committee of the Council of Science Editors. Chicago: Council of Science Editors in cooperation with the Univer sity of Chicago Press, 2014. Also available at http://www.scientificstyleandfor mat.org/. Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White. The Elements ofStyle. 4th ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2000. Style Manualfor Political Science. Rev. ed. Washington, DC: American Political Sci ence Association Committee on Publications, 2006. http://www. apsanet.org /files/APSAStyleManual2006.pdf. The Times Style and Usage Guide. Rev. ed. Compiled by Tim Austin. London: Times Books, 2003. Turabian, Kate L. A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Disserta tions: Chicago Style for Students and Researchers. 9th ed. Revised by Wayne C. Booth, Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams, and University of Chicago Press editorial staff. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2018. . Student's Guide to Writing College Papers. 5th ed. Revised by Gregory G. Co lomb, Joseph M. Williams, and the University of Chicago Press editorial staff. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2018. US Geological Survey. Suggestions to Authors ofthe Reports ofthe United States Geo logical Survey. 7th ed. Revised and edited by Wallace R. Hansen. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1991. Also available at http://www.nwrc .usgs.gov/lib/lib_sta.htm. US Government Publi�hing Office. GPO Style Manual: An Official Guide to the Form and Style ofFederal Government Publishing. 31st ed. Washington, DC: Govern ment Publishing Office, 2016. https://www.govinfo.gov/gpo-style-manual. Walker, Janice R., and Todd Taylor. The Columbia Guide to Online Style. 2nd ed. New York: Columbia University Press, 2006. The Wall Street Journal Guide to Business Style and Usage. Edited by Paul R. Martin. London: Free Press, 2002. Words into Type. 3rd ed. Based on studies by Marjorie E. Skillin, Robert M. Gay, and other authorities. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1974. The Yahoo! Style Guide: The Ultimate Sourcebook for Writing, Editing, and Creat ing Content for the Digital World. Edited by Chris Barr. New York: Yahoo! / St. Martin's Griffin, 2010. --
BIBLIOG RAPHY
1.2 Grammar and Usage Aitchison, James. Cassell Dictionary ofEnglish Grammar. 2nd ed. London: Cassell, 2001. Baron, Dennis. Grammar and Gender. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1986. Bernstein, Theodore M. The Careful Writer: A Modern Guide to English Usage. New York: Atheneum, 1965. . Miss Thistlebottom's Hobgoblins: The Careful Writer's Guide to the Taboos, Bugbears, and Outmoded Rules ofEnglish Usage. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1971. Burchfield, Robert W. Unlocking the English Language. New York: Hill and Wang, 1991. Ebbitt, Wilma R., and David R. Ebbitt. Index to English. 8th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990. Follett, Wilson. Modern American Usage: A Guide. Revised by Erik Wensberg. New York: Hill and Wang, 1998. Fowler, H. W. A Dictionary ofModern English Usage. 2nd ed. Revised and edited by Sir Ernest Gowers. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1965. Fowler's Modern English Usage. 4th ed. Edited by Jeremy Butterfield. New York: Oxford University Press, 2015. Garner, Bryan A. The Chicago Guide to Grammar, Usage, and Punctuation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. . Garner's Modern English Usage. 4th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2016. Gordon, Karen Elizabeth. The Deluxe Transitive Vampire: The Ultimate Handbook of Grammar for the Innocent, the Eager, and the Doomed. Rev. ed. New York: Pantheon, 1993. . The New Well-Tempered Sentence: A Punctuation Handbook for the Innocent, the Eager, and the Doomed. Rev. ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1993. Gowers, Ernest. Plain Words: A Guide to the Use ofEnglish. Revised and updated by Rebecca Gowers. London: Penguin Books, 2015. Greenbaum, Sydney. Oxford English Grammar. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. Hale, Constance. Sin and Syntax: How to Craft Wickedly Effective Prose. Rev. ed. New York: Three Rivers Press, 2013. Johnson, Edward D. The Handbook ofGood English. New York: Pocket Books, 1991. Maggio, Rosalie. How to Say It: Choice Words, Phrases, Sentences, and Paragraphsfor Every Situation. 3.rd ed. New York: Prentice Hall, 2009. Merriam-Webster's Dictionary ofEnglish Usage. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1994. --
--
--
B I B L I O G RAPHY
O'Conner, Patricia T. Woe Is I: The Grammarphobe's Guide to Better English i n Plain English. 3rd ed. New York: Riverhead Books, 2009. The Oxford Dictionary ofEnglish Grammar. Edited by Sylvia Chalker and Edmund Weiner. New York: Oxford University Press, 1998. Shertzer, Margaret. The Elements ofGrammar. New York: MacMillan, 1996. Trask, R. L. Language: The Basics. 2nd ed. New York: Routledge, 1999. Trimble, John R. Writing with Style: Conversations on the Art ofWriting. 3rd ed. Bos ton: Pearson, 2010. Wallraff, Barbara. Word Court: Wherein Verbal Virtue Is Rewarded, Crimes against the Language Are Punished, and Poetic Justice Is Done. New York: Harcourt, 2000. Walsh, Bill. Lapsing into a Comma: A Curmudgeon's Guide to the Many Things That Can Go Wro.ng in Print-and How to Avoid Them. Chicago: Contemporary Books, 2000. Williams, Joseph M., and Joseph Bizup. Style: Lessons in Clarity and Grace. 12th ed. Boston: Pearson, 2016. Wilson, Kenneth G. The Columbia Guide to Standard American English. New York: Columbia University Press, 1993. Zinsser, William. On Writing Well: The Classic Guide to Writing Nonfiction. 30th anniversary ed. New York: HarperCollins, 2006.
1.3 Research and Writing Abbott, Andrew. Digital Paper: A Manualfor Research and Writing with Library and Internet MateriatS. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2014. Becker, Howard S. Writingfor Social Scientists: How to Start and Finish Your Thesis, Book, or Article. 2n� ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007. Belcher, Wendy Laura. Writing Your Journal Article in 12 Weeks: A Guide to Aca demic Publishing Success. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, forth coming. Bell, Susan. The Artful Edit: On the Practice ofEditing Yourself. New York: W. W. Norton, 2007. Booth, Wayne C., Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams, Joseph Bizup, and William T. FitzGerald. The Craft of Research. 4th ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. Cook, Claire Kehrwald. Line by Line: How to Edit Your Own Writing. Boston: Mod ern Language Association / Houghton Mifflin, 1985. Gastel, Barbara, and Robert A. Day. How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper. 8th ed. Santa Barbara, CA: Greenwood, 2016. Gerard, Philip. The Art of Creative Research: A Field Guide for Writers. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2017.
B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Germano, William. From Dissertation to Book. 2nd ed. Chicago: University o f Chi cago Press, 2013. Ghodsee, Kristen. From Notes to Narrative: Writing Ethnographies That Everyone Can Read. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. Graff, Gerald, and Cathy Birkenstein. "They Say/ I Say": The Moves That Matter in Academic Writing. 3rd ed. New York: W. W. Norton, 2014. Greene, Anne E. Writing Science in Plain English. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2013. Harman, Eleanor, Ian Montagnes, Siobhan McMenemy, and Chris Bucci, eds. The Thesis and the Book: A Guide for First-Time Academic Authors. 2nd ed. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2003. Hart, Jack. Storycraft: The Complete Guide to Writing Narrative Nonfiction. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2011. . A Writer� Coach: The Complete Guide to Writing Strategies That Work. New York: Anchor Books, 2007. Jensen, Joli. Write No Matter What: Advice for Academics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2017. Kidder, Tracy, and Richard Todd. Good Prose: The Art of Nonfiction. New York: Random House, 2013. Lanham, Richard A. Revising Prose. 5th ed. New York: Pearson Longman, 2007. Lerner, Betsy. The Forestfor the Trees: An Editor's Advice to Writers. Rev. ed. New York: Riverhead Books, 2010. Lipson, Charles. How to Write a BA Thesis: A Practical Guidefrom Your First Ideas to Your Finished Paper. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2005. Luey, Beth, ed. Revising Your Dissertation: Advice from Leading Editors. Updated ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2007. Mccloskey, Deirdre. Economical Writing. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, forthcoming. McMillan, Victoria E. Writing Papers in the Biological Sciences. 5th ed. Boston: Bedford / St. Martin's, 2006. Miller, Jane E. The Chicago Guide to Writing about Multivariate Analysis. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2013. --. The Chicago Guide to Writing about Numbers. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2015. Montgomery, Scott L. The Chicago Guide to Communicating Science. 2nd ed. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2017. Pinker, Steven. The Sense ofStyle: The Thinking Person's Guide to Writing in the 21st Century. New York: Viking, 2014. Pyne, Stephen J. Voice and Vision: A Guide to Writing History and Other Serious Nonfiction. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009. Stein, Arlene, and Jessie Daniels. Going Public: A Guide for Social Scientists. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2017. --
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Sword, Helen. Stylish Academic Writing. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2012. . The Writer's Diet: A Guide to Fit Prose. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. Zeiger, Mimi. Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2000.
--
2
Works on Publishing
2.1 Manuscript Editing and Proofreading Anderson, Laura. McGraw-Hill's Proofreading Handbook. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006. Borel, Brooke. The Chicago Guide to Fact-Checking. Chicago: University of Chi cago Press, 2016. Butcher, Judith, Caroline Drake, and Maureen Leach. Butcher's Copy-Editing: The Cambridge Handbook/or Editors, Copy-Editors, and Proofreaders. 4th ed. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2006. Copyediting: Language in the Digital Age. Bimonthly newsletter published by Mc Murry, Inc. Also available at http://\vww.copyediting.com/. Einsohn, Amy. The Copyeditor's Handbook: A Guidefor Book Publishing and Corpo rate Communications; With Exercises and Answer Keys. 3rd ed. Berkeley: Univer sity of California Press, 2011. Judd, Karen. Copyediting: A Practical Guide. 3rd ed. Menlo Park, CA: Crisp Learn ing, 2001. Lyon, Jack M. Microsoft Word for Publishing Professionals. West Valley City, UT: Editorium, 2008 . . Norris, Mary. Between You & Me: Confessions ofa Comma Queen. New York: W. W. Norton, 2015. Norton, Scott. Developmental Editing: A Handbook for Freelancers, Authors, and Publishers. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009. Saller, Carol Fisher. The Subversive Copy Editor: Advice from Chicago (or, How to Negotiate Good Relationships with Your Writers, Your Colleagues, and Yourself). 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. Stainton, Elsie Myers. The Fine Art of Copyediting. 2nd ed. New York: Columbia University Press, 2002. University of Chicago Press Editorial Staff. But Can I Start a Sentence with "But"? Advice from the Chicago Style Q&A. With a foreword by Carol Fisher Saller. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016.
B I B L I O G RA P H Y
2.2 Illustrations Briscoe, Mary Helen. Preparing Scientific Illustrations: A Guide to Better Posters, Pre sentations, and Publications. 2nd ed. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1996. https:// doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-3986-4. Monmonier, Mark. Mapping It Out: Expository Cartographyfor the Humanities and Social Sciences. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993. Ross, Ted. The Art ofMusic Engraving and Processing: A Complete Manual, Refer ence, and Text Book on Preparing Musicfor Reproduction and Print. Miami: Han sen Books, 1970. Swan, Ann. Botanical Portraits with Colored Pencils. Hauppauge, NY: Barron's Edu cational Series, 2010. Tufte, Edward R. Envisioning Information. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 1990. . The Visual Display of Quantitative Information. 2nd ed. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 2001. --. Visual Explanations: Images and Quantities, Evidence and Narrative. Cheshire, CT: Graphics Press, 1997. Zweifel, Frances W. A Handbook ofBiological Illustration. 2nd ed. Chicago: Uni versity of Chicago Press, 1988. --
2.3 Rights and Permissions Aufderheide, Patricia, and Peter Jaszi. Reclaiming Fair Use: How to Put Balance Back in Copyright. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2011. Bielstein, Susan M. Permissions, a Survival Guide: Blunt Talk about Art as Intellec tual Property. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006. Crews, Kenneth D. Copyright and Your Dissertation or Thesis: Ownership, Fair Use, and Your Rights and Responsibilities. ProQuest, 2013. http://media2.proquest .com/documents/copyright_dissthesis_ownership.pdf. Fischer, Mark A., E. Gabriel Perle, and John Taylor Williams. Perle, Williams & Fischer on Publishing Law. 4th ed. New York: Aspen, 2013. Annual loose-leaf updates. Fishman, Stephen. The Copyright Handbook: What Every Writer Needs to Know. Berkeley, CA: Nolo, 2011. Goldstein, Paul. Goldstein on Copyright. 3rd ed. New York: Aspen, 2005. Loose leaf updates. Kaufman, Roy S. Publishing Forms and Contracts. New York: Oxford University Press, 2008. Nimmer, Melville, and Paul Edward Gellner, eds. International Copyright Law and Practice. Newark, NJ: LexisNexis Matthew Bender, 2004. Loose-leaf updates. Nimmer, Melville, Paul Marcus, David A. Myers, and David Nimmer. Cases and
BIBLIOG RAPHY
Materials o n Copyright and Other Aspects ofEntertainment Litigation, Including Unfair Competition, Defamation, Privacy. 8th ed. New Providence, NJ: Lexis Nexis, 2012. Nimmer, Melville, and David Nimmer. Nimmer on Copyright. Rev. ed. 11 vols. Newark, NJ: LexisNexis Matthew Bender, 2005. Loose-leaf updates. Patry, William F. The Fair Use Privilege in Copyright Law. 2nd ed. Washington, DC: Bureau of National Affairs, 1995. . Moral Panics and the Copyright Wars. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. . Patry on Copyright. 8 vols. St. Paul, MN: Thomson/West, 2007-. Loose-leaf updates. Strong, William S. The Copyright Book: A Practical Guide. 6th ed. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2014. Suber, Peter. Open Access. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2012. http://cyber.law.har vard.edu/hoap/Open_Access_(the_book) . --
--
2.4 Mathematics American Mathematical Society. Author Resource Center. AMS. http://www.ams .org/publications/authors/. Includes access to Swanson, Mathematics into Type. Gowers, Timothy, ed. The Princeton Companion to Mathematics. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2008. Higham, Nicholas J. Handbook ofWritingfor the Mathematical Sciences. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 1998. The International System of Units (SI). 8th ed. Sevres: Bureau International des Poids et Mesures1 2006; updated 2014. http://www.bipm.org/en/sijsi_bro chure/. Knuth, Donald E. The TeXbook. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2000. Kopka, Helmut, and Patrick W. Daly. Guide to LaTeX. 11th ed. Boston: Addison Wesley, 2010. Lamport, Leslie. LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; User's Guide and Refer ence Manual. 2nd ed. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1999. Mittelbach, Frank, et al. The LaTeX Companions: A Complete Guide and Reference for Preparing, Illustrating, and Publishing Technical Documents. 3rd ed. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2007. Paulos, John Allen. Innumeracy: Mathematical Illiteracy and Its Consequences. 1st pbk. ed. New York: Hill and Wang, 2001. Spivak, Michael. The joy of TeX: A Gourmet Guide to Typesetting with the AMS-TeX Macro Package. 2nd ed. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1990. Swanson, Ellen. Mathematics into Type. Updated edition by Arlene O'Sean and Antoinette Schleyer. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1999.
BIBLI O G RAPHY
Thompson, Ambler, and Barry N . Taylor. Guidefo r the Use ofthe International Sys tem ofUnits (SI). Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Tech nology, 2008. http://www.nist.gov/pmljpubs/sp811/.
2.5 Indexing Ament, Kurt. Indexing: A Nuts-and-Bolts Guide for Technical Writers. Norwich, NY: William Andrew, 2001. Booth, Pat F. Indexing: The Manual ofGood Practice. Munich: K. G. Saur, 2001. Browne, Glenda, and Jon Jermey. The Indexing Companion. Melbourne: Cam bridge University Press, 2007. Cleveland, Donald B., and Ana D. Cleveland. Introduction to Indexing and Ab stracting. 4th ed. Santa Barbara, CA: Libraries Unlimited, 2013. Fetters, Linda K. Handbook ofIndexing Techniques: A Guidefor Beginning Indexers. 5th ed. Medford, NJ: Information Today, 2013. Mulvany, Nancy. Indexing Books. 2nd ed. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 2005. Stauber, D. Mi. Facing the Text: Content and Structure in Book Indexing. Eugene, OR: Cedar Row Press, 2004. Wellisch, Hans H. Indexingfrom A to Z. 2nd ed. New York: H. W. Wilson, 1995.
2.6 Design Bringhurst, Robert. The Elements ofTypographic Style. 4th ed. Seattle: Hartley and Marks, 2013. Chappell, Warren, and Robert Bringhurst. A Short History ofthe Printed Word. 2nd ed. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley and Marks, 1999. Craig, James, and Irene Korol Scala. Designing with Type: The Essential Guide to Typography. 5th ed. New York: Watson-Guptill, 2006. Dowding, Geoffrey. Finer Points in the Spacing and Arrangement of Type. Rev. ed. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley and Marks, 1995. Duckett, Jon. HTML and CSS: Design and Build Websites. Indianapolis: Wiley, 2011. Gill, Eric. An Essay on Typography. Boston: David R. Godine, 1988. Hendel, Richard. Aspects of Contemporary Book Design. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 2013. . On Book Design. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1998. Hochuli, Jost, and Robin Kinross. Designing Books: Practice and Theory. Rev. ed. London: Hyphen Press, 2003. Johnston, Edward. Writing and Illuminating and Lettering. 1946; repr., New York: Dover, 1995. Lupton, Ellen. Thinking with Type: A Critical Guide for Designers, Writers, Editors, and Students. 2nd ed. New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 2010.
--
BIBLI O G RAPHY
McLean, Ruari. The Thames and Hudson Manual ofTypography. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1992. Tschichold, Jan. The Form ofthe Book: Essays on the Morality ofGood Design. Point Roberts, WA: Hartley and Marks, 1995. . The New Typography. New ed. Translated by Ruari McLean. With a fore word by Richard Hendel and an introduction by Robin Kinross. Berkeley: Uni versity of California Press, 2006.
--
2.7 Production Beach, Mark, and Eric Kenly. Getting It Printed. 4th ed. Cincinnati: HOW Design Books, 2004. Berger, Sidney E. Rare Books and Special Collections. Chicago: American Library Association, 2014. Book Industry Study Group. BISG Quick Start Guide to Accessible Publishing. BISG, March 2016. https://www.bisg.org/publications/bisg-quick-start-guide-ac cessible-publishing. The Bookman's Glossary. 6th ed. Edited by Jean Peters. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1983. The Columbia Guide to Digital Publishing. Edited by William E. Kasdorf. New York: Columbia University Press, 2003. Eckersley, Richard, Richard Angstadt, Charles M. Eilertson, Richard Hendel, Naomi B. Pascal, and Anita Walker Scott. Glossary of Typesetting Terms. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 1994. EPUB 3 Overview: Recommended Specification. Edited by Garth Conboy, Matt Garrish, Markus Gylling, William McCoy, Murata Makoto, and Daniel Weck. International Digital Publishing Forum, June 26, 2014. http://www.idpf.org /epub/301/spec/epub-overview-20140626.html. Extensible Markup Language (XML). V. 1.1, 2nd ed. Edited by Tim Bray, Jean Paoli, C. M. Sperberg-McQueen, Eve Maler, Fran�ois Yergeau, and John Cowan. W3C recommendation, August 16, 2006. http://www.w3.org/TR/20 0 6/REC -xmlll-20060816. Friedl, Jeffrey E. F. Mastering Regular Expressions. 3rd ed. Sebastopol, CA: O'Reilly, 2006. Glaister, Geoffrey Ashall. Encyclopedia ofthe Book. 2nd ed. New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 2001. Johnson, Arthur W. The Thames and Hudson Manual of Bookbinding. London: Thames and Hudson, 1981. Kinross, Robin, Jaap van Triest, and Karel Martens, eds. Karel Martens: Printed Matter. 2nd ed. London: Hyphen Press, 2002. Lawler, Brian P. Official Adobe Print Publishing Guide: The Essential Resource for Design, Production, and Prepress. 2nd ed. Berkeley, CA: Adobe Press, 2005. ·
B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Lee, Marshall. Bookmaking: Editing, Design, Production. 3rd ed. New York: Norton, 2004. National Information Standards Organization. Journal Article Versions (]AV): Recommendations ofthe NISO/ALPSP ]AV Technical Working Group. Proposed standard NISO RP-8. In partnership with the Association of Learned and Pro fessional Society Publishers. April 2008. Available at http://www. niso.org /publications/rp/RP-8-2008.pdf. Pocket Pal: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook. 20th ed. Memphis, TN: Interna tional Paper, 2007. Register, Renee, and Thad Mcilroy. The Metadata Handbook: A Book Publisher's Guide to Creating and Distributing Metadata for Print and Ebooks. 2nd ed. Co lumbus, OH: DataCurate, 2015. http://themetadatahandbook.com/. Rogondino, Michael, and Pat Rogondino. Process Color Manual: 24,000 CMYK Combinations for Design, Prepress, and Printing. San Francisco: Chronicle Books, 2000. Unicode Consortium. The Unicode Standard. Version 9.0.0. Mountain View, CA: Unicode Consortium, July 2016. http://www.unicode.org/versions/Unicode9 .0.0/. XML. See Extensible Markup Language. XML.com. Textuality Services and O'Reilly Media. https://www.xml.com/.
2.8 The Publishing Industry Benson, Philippa J., and Susan C. Silver. What Editors Want: An Author's Guide to Scientific Journal Publishing. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2012. Brewer, Robert Lee, ed. 2015 Guide to SelfPublishing. Cincinnati, OH: Writer's Digest Books, 2014. Coker, Mark. The Secrets to Ebook Publishing Success. 2014 ed. Smashwords Guides, bk. 3. Los Gatos, CA: Smashwords, 2012. EPUB, Kindle, PDF. Friedman, Jane. The Business of Being a Writer. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2018. Germano, William. Getting It Published: A Guide for Scholars and Anyone Else Se rious about Serious Books. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2016. Ginna, Peter, ed. What Editors Do: The Art, Craft, and Business ofBook Editing. Chi cago: University of Chicago Press, 2017. Greco, Albert N. The Book Publishing Industry. 2nd ed. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 2005. ILMP (International Literary Market Place). Medford, NJ: Information Today. Published annually. Also available at http://books.infotoday.com/directories /ilmp.shtml. Journal ofElectronic Publishing. Published quarterly by Michigan Publishing, Uni versity of Michigan Library. http://www.journalofelectronicpublishing.org/.
BIBLI O G RAPHY
journal ofScholarly Publishing. Published quarterly b y the University o f Toronto Press. Also available at https://www.utpjournals.com/Journal-of-Scholarly -Publishing.html/. Kurowski, Travis, Wayne Miller, and Kevin Prufer, eds. Literary Publishing in the Twenty-First Century. Minneapolis: Milkweed Editions, 2016. LMP (Literary Market Place). Medford, NJ: Information Today. Published annu ally. Also available at http://books.infotoday.com/directories/lmp.shtml. Luey, Beth. Handbook for Academic Authors. 5th ed. New York: Cambridge Uni versity Press, 2009. Rabiner, Susan, and Alfred Fortunato. Thinking Like Your Editor: How to Write Great Serious Nonfiction-and Get It Published. New York: W. W. Norton, 2002. Striphas, Ted. The Late Age ofPrint: Everyday Book Culture from Consumerism to Control. New York: Columbia University Press, 2009. Suzanne, Claudia. This Business ofBooks: A Complete Overview ofthe Industryfrom Concept through Sales. 4th ed. Tustin, CA: WC Publishing, 2003. Thompson, John B. Merchants of Culture: The Publishing Business in the Twenty First Century. 2nd ed. New York: Plume, 2012.
3
Dictionaries
3.1 English Dictionaries American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. 5th ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2011. Also available at https://www.ahdictionary.com/. Barber, Katherine, ed. Canadian Oxford Dictionary. 2nd ed. Oxford: Oxford Uni versity Press, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780195418163.001.0001. Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. 11th ed. Springfield, MA: Merriam Webster, 2003. Continually updated at https://www.merriam-webster.com/. Merriam-Webster Unabridged. See Webster's Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged. Moore, Bruce, ed. Australian Oxford Dictionary. 2nd ed. Oxford: Oxford Univer sity Press, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780195517965.001.0001. New Oxford American Dictionary. 3rd ed. Edited by Angus Stevenson and Chris tine A. Lindberg. New York: Oxford University Press, 2010. https://doi.org/10 .1093/acref/9780195392883.001.0001. Oxford English Dictionary. 2nd ed. 20 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Continually updated at http://www. oed.com/. Roget's II: The New Thesaurus. 3rd ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1995. Roget's 21st Century Thesaurus in Dictionary Form. 3rd ed. Edited by Barbara Ann Kipfer. New York: Bantam Dell, 2005. Shorter Oxford English Dictionary. 6th ed. 2 vols. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007.
B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Webster's New World College Dictionary. 4th ed. Cleveland: Webster's New World, 2001. Webster's Third New International Dictionary ofthe English Language, Unabridged. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1993. Continually updated, as Merriam Webster Unabridged, at https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/. Wiktionary: The Free Dictionary. San Francisco: Wikimedia Foundation. https:// www.wiktionary.org/.
3.2 Bilingual Dictionaries ABC Chinese-English Comprehensive Dictionary. Edited by John Defrancis. Hono lulu: University of Hawai'i Press, 2003. Cassell's Italian Dictionary. Compiled by Piero Rebora, Francis M. Guercio, and Arthur L. Hayward. New York: John Wiley, 1994. Kenkyiisha's New Japanese-English Dictionary. 5th ed. Tokyo: Kenkyiis ha, 2003. Larousse Unabridged French Dictionary: French-English, English-French. Edited by Faye Carney. Paris: Larousse, 2010. Minjung's Essence English-Korean Dictionary. 11th ed. Elizabeth, NJ: Hollym Inter national Corp., 2015. Oxford Arabic Dictionary: Arabic-English, English-Arabic. Edited by Tressy Arts. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2014. Oxford German Dictionary: German-English, English-German. 3rd ed. Edited by Werner Scholze-Stubenrecht, J. B. Sykes, M. Clark, and 0. Thyen. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008. Oxford-Hachette French Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Marie-Helene Correard et al. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007. Oxford Latin Dictionary. 2nd ed. Edited by P. G. W. Glare. 2 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012. Oxford-Paravia Italian Dictionary. 3rd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010. Oxford Russian Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Marcus Wheeler, Boris Unbegaun, Paul Falla, and Della Thompson. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007. Oxford Spanish Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Beatriz Galimberti Jarman and Roy Russell. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008. The University of Chicago Spanish-English Dictionary. 6th ed. Edited by David Pharies. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2012.
3.3 Medical and Scientific Dictionaries Clapham, Christopher, and James Nicholson. Concise Dictionary ofMathematics. 4th ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. A Dictionary ofBiology. 6th ed. Edited by Elizabeth A. Martin and Robert Hine.
B I B L I O G RAPHY
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780 199204625.001.0001. A Dictionary ofChemistry. 6th ed. Edited by John Daintith. Oxford: Oxford Univer sity Press, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780199204632.001.0001. A Dictionary of Mechanical Engineering. Edited by Tony Atkins and Marcel Es cudier. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref /9780199587438.001.0001. A Dictionary ofPhysics. 6th ed. Edited by John Daintith. Oxford: Oxford Univer sity Press, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780199233991.001.0001. Dorland's Illustrated Medical Dictionary. 32nd ed. Philadelphia: Elsevier Saunders, 2012. Oxford Dictionary of Science. 6th ed. Edited by Elizabeth A. Martin. New York: Oxford University Press, 2010. Stedman's Medical Dictionary. 28th ed. Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. Also available at http://stedmansonline.com/. USP Dictionary ofUSAN and International Drug Names. Rockville, MD: US Phar macopeial Convention. Revised annually. Available at http://www.usp.org /store/products-services/usp-dictionary.
4
General Reference Works
4.1 Biography American Men and Women ofScience. 32nd ed. 8 vols. Farmington Hills, MI: Gale, 2014. American National Biography Online. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000 - . Updated semiannually. http://www. anb.org/. Burke's Peerage, Baronetage, and Knightage. 107th ed. Multiple vols. London: Burke's Peerage, 1826-. Also available, with additional related resources, at http://www.burkespeerage.com/. Canadian Who's Who. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Published annually, with semiannual supplements. Also available at http://canadianwhoswho.ca/. Chambers Biographical Dictionary. 9th ed. London: Chambers Harrap, 2011. Concise Dictionary ofNational Biography: From Earliest Times to 1985. 3 vols. Ox ford: Oxford University Press, 1992. Dictionary of American Biography. 11 vols. New York: Scribner's, 1995. Supple ments. Succeeded by American National Biography. Dictionary of Canadian Biography. 14 vols. Toronto: University of Toronto / Universite Laval, 1966-. Supplements. Continued, with updates, at http:// www.biographi.ca/. A Dictionary ofScientists. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999. Published online 2003. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780192800862.001.0001.
B I B L I O G RA P H Y
Directory ofAmerican Scholars. 10th ed. 6 vols. Detroit: Gale Group, 1942-. The International Who's Who. London: Europa/ Routledge, 1935-. Published an nually. Also available at http://www.worldwhoswho.com/. Marquis Who's Who on the Web. New Providence, NJ: Marquis Who's Who. Contin ually updated. http://www.marquiswhoswho.com/. Merriam-Webster's Biographical Dictionary. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1995. Continued by the biographical entries in Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictionary and Merriam-Webster Unabridged (bibliog. 3.1) . New York Times. Obituaries. https://www.nytimes.com/section/obituariesj. Also available from ProQuest Historical Newspapers. Oxford Dictionary ofNational Biography. 60 vols. Prepared under various editors. New York: Oxford University Press, 1885-2004. Also available at http://www .oxforddnb.com/. Thomson, David. The New Biographical Dictionary ofFilm. 6th ed. Knopf, 2014. Who'.5 Who. London: Bloomsbury, 1849-. Published annually. Who's Who in America. New Providence, NJ: Marquis Who's Who, 1899-. Pub lished biennially. See also Marquis Who's Who on the Web.
4.2 Geography Canadian Geographical Names. Geographical Names Board of Canada, Natu ral Resources Canada. Continually updated. http://www.nrcan.gc.ca/earth -sciences/geography/place-names/10786. Columbia Gazetteer ofthe World. 2nd ed. Edited by Saul B. Cohen. New York: Colum bia University Press, 2008. Online ed., http://www.columbiagazetteer.org/. Getty Thesaurus of Geographic Names Online. Getty Research Institute. Los Angeles: J. Paul Getty Trust. Continually updated. http://www.getty.edu/re search/tools/vocabularies/tgn/. Mayhew, Susan. A Dictionary of Geography. 4th ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780199231805.001.0001. Merriam-Webster's Geographical Dictionary. 3rd ed. Springfield, MA: Merriam Webster, 1997. Continued by the geographical entries in Merriam-Webster'.5 Collegiate Dictionary and Merriam-Webster Unabridged (bibliog. 3.1) . NGA GEOnet Names Server (GNS). Washington, DC: National Geospatial-Intel ligence Agency. Continually updated. http://geonames.nga.mil/gns/html/. Oxford Atlas ofthe World. New York: Oxford University Press, 1992-. Updated an nually. The Times Comprehensive Atlas ofthe World. 14th ed. London: Times Books, 2014. United States Board on Geographic Names. US Department of the Interior and US Geological Survey. Continually updated. https://geonames.usgs.gov/. The World Factbook. Washington, DC: Central Intelligence Agency. Continually updated. https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
4.3 Encyclopedias The Canadian Encyclopedia. Historica Canada. http://www.thecanadianencyclope dia.ca/. Columbia Encyclopedia. 6th ed. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000. Encyclopedia Americana. 30 vols. Danbury, CT: Scholastic Library, 2006. Also available from Grolier Online. The New Encyclopaedia Britannica. 15th ed. 32 vols. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Bri tannica, 2010. Final print version. Continued online, as Encyclopaedia Britan nica, at https://www.britannica.com/. Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia. San Francisco: Wikimedia Foundation. https:// www.wikipedia.org/.
4.4 Almanacs and Yearbooks Canadian Almanac and Directory. Toronto: Grey House, 1847-. Published annu ally. The Europa World ofLearning. London: Europa / Routledge, 1947-. Published an nually. Also available at http://www.worldoflearning.com/. Europa World Year Book. London: Europa / Routledge, 1926-. Published annually. Also available at http://www.europaworld.com/pub/. The Statesman's Yearbook. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 1864-. Published an nually. Also available at http://www.statesmansyearbook.com/. Whitaker's Almanack. London: J. Whitaker & Sons / Stationery Office / Blooms bury, 1868-. Published annually. World Almanac and .6ook ofFacts. New York: World Almanac Books, 1868-. Pub lished annually.
4.5 Guides to Books, Periodicals, and Other Sources ABI/Inform Complete. Ann Arbor, MI: ProQuest. http://www.proquest.com/products -services/abi_inform_complete.html. Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. See RDA: Resource Description and Access. Ashley, Lowell E. Cataloging Musical Moving Image Material: A Guide to the Bib liographical Control of Video recordings and Films ofMusical Performances and Other Music-Related Moving Image Material. Canton, MA: Music Library As sociation, 1996. Australian and New Zealand Books in Print. Melbourne: D. W. Thorpe, 1958-2003. Bibliographic lndex. New York: H. W. Wilson, 1937-2011. BIOSIS Serial Sources. Philadelphia: Thomson Reuters, 2012.
BIBLIOG RAPHY
Book Review Digest. New York: H. W. Wilson, 1903 -. Published monthly, except for February and July, with annual cumulations. Also available, as Book Review Digest Plus, at https://www. ebscohost.com/wilson. Book Review Index. Detroit: Gale Research Company, 1965-. Published monthly, with quarterly and annual cumulations. Also available as Book Review Index Online. Books in Print. New York: R. R. Bowker. Published annually. Also available at http://www.booksinprint.com/. British Books in Print. London: J. Whitaker; New York: R. R. Bowker. From 1988 to 2003 titled Whitaker's Books in Print; before 1988 variously titled British Books in Print or The Reference Catalogue ofCurrent Literature. Continued by Books in Print, global edition. Canadian Books in Print. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Published annually through 2006. Continued by Books in Print, global edition. Catalog of U.S. Government Publications. Washington, DC: Government Publish ing Office. https://catalog.gpo.gov/. Citing Records in the National Archives of the United States. General Information Leaflet 17. Washington, DC: National Archives and Records Administration, 2010. https://www.archives.gov/publications/general-info-leaflets/17-citing -records.html. Dissertation Abstracts International. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms Inter national. Published monthly with annual cumulations. Guide to Reference. 12th ed. Edited by Bob Kieft. Chicago: American Library As sociation, 2008. Ceased updating as of 2016. http://www.guidetoreference .org/. Guide to the Contents ofthe Public Record Office. 3 vols. London: Her Majesty's Sta tionery Office, 1963-68. Guide to U.S. Government Publications. Edited by Donna Batten. Formerly known as Andriot. Detroit: Gale Research Company. Updated annually. Humanities Index. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published quarterly with annual cu mulations. Continued by Humanities Index International at EBSCOhost. Index Islamicus. Leiden: Brill. Published quarterly with quinquennial cumulations. Also available at http://bibliographies.brillonline.com/browse/index-islamicus. Library of Congress Subject Headings. Washington, DC: Library of Congress Cat aloging Distribution Service. Published annually. Now available online only, from http://www. Ioc.gov/aba/. Livres disponibles [French books in print] . 8 vols. Paris: Cercle de la librairie, 19772004. The New Walford Guide to Reference Resources. 9th ed. 3 vols. London: Facet, 2005-15. New York Times Index. New York: New York Times Company. Annual cumulations. Available from ProQuest Historical Newspapers. NLM Catalog: Journals Referenced in the NCBI Databases. Bethesda, MD: Na-
BIBLIOGRAPHY
tional Center fo r Biotechnology Information, U S National Library o f Medi cine. https://www. ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/nlmcatalog/journals. O'Gorman, Jack, ed. Reference Sources for Small and Medium-Sized Libraries. 8th ed. Chicago: American Library Association, 2014. PAIS International in Print. New York: Public Affairs Information Service. Pub lished monthly, with every fourth issue being cumulative. Continued by PAIS International, ProQuest. Pemberton, John E., ed. The Bibliographic Control of Official Publications. New York: Pergamon, 1982. Also available at http://www. sciencedirect.com/sci ence/book/9780080274195. PubMed. Bethesda, MD: US National Library of Medicine. https://www. ncbi.nlm .nih.gov/pubmed/. RDA: Resource Description and Access. Chicago: American Library Association; Ot tawa: Canadian Library Association; London: Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals, 2010. Updated annually. Available at http:// www. rdatoolkit.org/. Reader's Guide to Periodical Literature. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published quar terly, with annual cumulations. Also available from EBSCOhost. Rodgers, Frank. A Guide to British Government Publications. New York: H. W. Wil son, 1980. Schmeckebier, Laurence F., and Roy B. Eastin. Government Publications and Their Use. 2nd ed. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution, 1969. Science Citation Index. Philadelphia: Institute for Scientific Information. Pub lished bimonthly with annual cumulations. Continued by Thomson Reuters Web of Science. Social Sciences Index. New York: H. W. Wilson. Published quarterly with annual cumulations. Also available from EBSCOhost. UKOP: Catalogue of f!nited Kingdom Official Publications. London: Chadwyck Healey. Continually updated. http://www.ukop.co.uk/. Ulrich's International Periodicals Directory. New York: R. R. Bowker. Published an nually. Supplemented quarterly by Ulrich's Update. Continued by Ulrichsweb Global Serials Directory, from ProQuest, http://ulrichsweb.serialssolutions .com/. Verzeichnis Lieferbarer Bucher [German books in print] . Frankfurt am Main: Ver lag der Buchhandler-Vereinigung. Published annually. Also available at http:// www. vlb.de/. Web of Science. See Science Citation Index. Whitaker's Books in Print. See British Books in Print.
BIBLI O G RAPHY
4.6 Quotations and Trivia Bartlett, John. Bartlett's Familiar Quotations: A Collection ofPassages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to Their Sources in Ancient and Modern Literature. 18th ed. Ed ited by Geoffrey O'Brien. New York: Little, Brown, 2012. Crystal, David, and Hilary Crystal. Words on Words: Quotations about Language and Languages. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000. The Oxford Dictionary ofQuotations. 8th ed. Edited by Elizabeth Knowles. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/978019966870 0.001.0001. Schott, Ben. Schott's Original Miscellany. 1st US ed. New York: Bloomsbury, 2003. Shapiro, Fred R., ed. Yale Book of Q}lotations. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2006.
4.7 Abbreviations Abbreviations.com. STANDS4 Network. Continually updated. http://www. abbre viations.com/. Acronyms, Initialisms & Abbreviations Dictionary: A Guide to Acronyms, Abbrevi ations, Contractions, Alphabetic Symbols, and Similar Condensed Appellations. 49th ed. 11 vols. Edited by Kristin Mallegg. Farmington Hills, MI: Gale, 2015. Davis, Neil M. Medical Abbreviations: 32,000 Conveniences at the Expense ofCom munication and Safety. 15th ed. Warminster, PA: Neil M. Davis Associates, 2011. Department ofDefense Dictionary ofMilitary and Associated Terms. Joint Publica tion 1-02. Washington, DC: Joint Chiefs of Staff. Updated monthly. http:// www. dtic.mil/doctrine/dod_dictionary/. Dorland's Dictionary ofMedical Acronyms and Abbreviations. 7th ed. Philadelphia: Saunders, 2015. International Organization for Standardization. Information and Documentation Rules for the Abbreviation ofTitle Words and Titles ofPublications. ISO 4. Paris: ISO, 1997. Molloy, Mike. Acronym Finder. Continually updated. http://www.acronymfinder .com/. Vance, Burt. A Dictionary ofAbbreviations. Online only. Oxford University Press, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780199698295.001.0001. Webster's Guide to Abbreviations. Springfield, MA: Merriam-Webster, 1985. Super seded by the entries for abbreviations in Merriam-Webster's Collegiate Dictio nary and Merriam-Webster Unabridged (bibliog. 3.1) .
BIBLIOGRAPHY
5
Miscellaneous Works Cited in Text
ALA-LC Romanization Tables: Transliteration Schemes for Non-Roman Scripts. Compiled and edited by Randall K. Barry. Washington, DC: Library of Con gress, 1997. Updated at http://www. loc.gov/catdir/cpso/roman.html. American Naturalist. Journal published monthly by the University of Chicago Press for the American Society of Naturalists. http://www.journals.uchicago .edu/toc/an/current. Baker-Shenk, Charlotte, and Dennis Cokely. American Sign Language: A Teacher's Resource Text on Grammar and Culture. Washington, DC: Gallaudet University Press, 1991. Daniels, Peter T., and William Bright, eds. The World's Writing Systems. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996. Duden: Die deutsche Rechtschreibung. 26th ed. Der Duden in zwolf Blinden, vol. 1. Mannheim: Dudenverlag, 2013. Gall, Gerald L., F. Pearl Eliadis, and France Allard. The Canadian Legal System. 5th ed. Scarborough, ON: Carswell, 2004. Grevisse, Maurice. Le bon usage: Grammaire franfaise. 15th ed. Edited by Andre Goosse. Paris: Duculot, 2011. Also available at http://www. lebonusage.com/. HGNC. Database of human gene names. HUGO Gene Nomenclature Commit tee. http://www. genenames.org/. History of Religions. Journal published quarterly by the University of Chicago Press. http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/toc/hr/current. Horticulture. Magazine published ten times a year by F+W Publications. International Code ofNomenclature for Algae, Fungi, and Plants (Melbourne Code). Prepared and edited by John McNeill et al. Regnum Vegetabile 154. Konig stein, Germany: Kqeltz Scientific Books, 2012. Also available at http://www .iapt-taxon.org/nomen/. International Code of Zoological Nomenclature. 4th ed. London: International Trust for Zoological Nomenclature, 1999. Also available at http://www. iczn .org/iczn/index.jsp. International Journal ofMiddle East Studies. Journal published quarterly by Cam bridge University Press for the Middle East Studies Association of North America. International Telecommunication Union. Notation for National and International Telephone Numbers, E-Mail Addresses and Web Addresses. ITU-T Recommenda tion E.123, February 2, 2001. http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-E.123-200102 -I/en. Lesina, Roberto. Il nuovo manuale di stile. 2nd ed. Bologna: Zanichelli, 2009. MacEllven, Douglass T., Michael J. McGuire, Neil A. Campbell, and John N. Davis. Legal Research Handbook. 6th ed. Markham, ON: LexisNexis Canada, 2013.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Mouse Genome Database. Mouse Genome Informatics. http://www.informatics .jax.org/. The New Grove Dictionary ofMusic and Musicians. 2nd ed. 29 vols. Edited by Stan ley Sadie. New York: Grove, 2001. Also available at http://www.oxfordmusic online.com/. The Oxford Classical Dictionary. 4th ed. Edited by Simon Hornblower, Anthony Spawforth, and Esther Eidinow. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1093/acref/9780199545568.001.0001. Physical Review Letters. Published weekly by the American Physical Society. http://journals.aps.org/prl/. Pullum, Geoffrey K., and William A. Ladusaw. Phonetic Symbol Guide. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1996. Real Academia Espanola and Asociaci6n de Academias de la Lengua Espanola. Diccionario panhispdnico de dudas. Madrid: RAE / ASALE, 2005. Also available at http://www. rae.es/. . Ortografia de la lengua espanola. Madrid: RAE / ASALE, 2010. Also avail able at http://www. rae.es/. Thorin, Suzanne E., and Carole Franklin Vidali. The Acquisition and Cataloging of Music and Sound Recordings: A Glossary. Canton, MA: Music Library Associa tion, 1984. Unicode Collation Algorithm. Unicode Technical Standard no. 10. Version 9.0.0. Edited by Mark Davis, Ken Whistler, and Markus Scherer. Unicode Consor tium, May 18, 2016. http://unicode.org/reports/trlO/trl0-34.html. Valli, Clayton, Ceil Lucas, Kristin J. Mulrooney, and Miako Villanueva. Linguistics ofAmerican Sign Language: An Introduction. 5th ed. Washington, DC: Gallau det University Press, 2011. Wertheim, Eric. The Naval Institute Guide to Combat Fleets ofthe World: Their Ships, Aircraft, and Systems. 16th ed. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute Press, 2013. Zurick, Timothy. Army Dictionary and Desk Reference. 4th ed. Mechanicsburg, PA: Stackpole Books, 2010. --
Index References are to paragraph numbers except where specified as table, figure (fig.), or page number (p.). Page numbers in the online edition link directry to terms in theglossary. a and an
and abbreviations, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 choice between, 5.74, 5.250, 7.32, 7.33 and coordinate nouns, 5.75 as indefinite articles, 5.70, 5.72, 5.73 meaning affected by, 5.75, 5.76, 5.77 omitted from titles in running text, 8.169 in titles, disregarded in alphabetizing, 14.71, 14.79, 14.80, 16.51, 16.52, 16.56, 16.68 See also articles (definite and indefinite) AAs (author's alterations), 2.70, 2.135, 2.136, p. 975 abbreviations, general alphabetizing of, 1.44, 15.37, 16.64, 16.93, fig. 1.8 a or an with, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 articles with, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 in chart labels, 3.45 in compound terms, 6.80 definitions and uses, 10.2, 10.3 derived from proper names, 10.6, 10.49, 10.52 at end of sentence, 6.14 indexing of, 16.46, 16.49, 16.64 lists of: alphabetizing, 1.44, fig. 1.8; cross-checking, 2.32; format and placement, 1.4, 1.44, 2.23, 14.60, fig. 1.8, fig. 14.3; for frequently cited works, 14.60, fig. 14.7; when to create, 10.3 in notes, 10.3, 10.24, 10.26, 10.27, 10.42, 10.44 numbers with, 7.89 (sec. 1), 9.16-17 plurals of, 7.15, 8.121, 10.49, 10.52, 10.53, 10.65, 14.150 possessives of, 6.43, 6.44, 7.17, 8.189 punctuation with: ampersands, 6.21, 10.10; commas (see commas: with
abbreviations, general (continued) abbreviations); hyphens, 6.80; peri ods (see periods [punctuation) : with abbreviations); slashes, 6.109, 10.4; and surrounding text, 6.123 spelled out: capitalization, 2.23, 10.6, 10.21, 10.52; marking manuscript for, 2.93; marking proofs for, 2.129; parentheses with, 7.17, 10.3 vs. spelled-out forms: after first occur rence, 1.44, 10.26; repeated after long interval, 10.3 (see also under abbreviations, specific) in tables, 3.56, 3.62, 3.67, 3.81, fig. 3.12 typographic considerations: capitaliza tion, 10.6, 10.25-26, 10.49, 10.52, 10.63; italic vs. roman type, 2.23, 10.7; line breaks, 7.44; small caps vs. lowercase, 10.41; small vs. full-size capitals, 10.8, 10.38; spacing, 9.16, 9.55-56, 10.5, 10.10, 10.12, 10.49, 10.58, 10.66 word division, 7.44 See also abbreviations, specific; acro nyms; contractions; initialisms abbreviations, specific Bible, 10.42, 10.44-48, 14.238-39 business and commerce, 10.69 (see also company names below) commas with: academic and profes sional designations, 10.21, 10.22; addresses, mailing, 10.27, 10.29; e.g. and i.e., 5.250; etc. and et al., 6.20; Inc., Ltd., and such, 6.44; /r., Sr., and such, 6.43; o.s., n.s. (old series, new series), 14.126, 14.184 company names, 8.189, 10.23-25, 14.133, 14.134, 14.136 computer terminology, 7.77, 7.80, 9.11, 10.39, 10.40, 10.49
geographical terms: compass points, 10.34, 10.35; latitude and longitude, 10.36; postal vs. standard abbrevia tions, 10.33 for illustrative matter in indexes, 16.116 of italicized terms, 2.23, 10.7 journal titles, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, 16.49 Latin, 7.55, 10.7, 10.42 (see also et al.; ibid.)
in legal-style citations (see under legal and public documents, source cita tions for) in mailing addresses, 10.27, 10.28, 10.29, 10.33, 10.34
mathematical, 12.3, 12.11, 12.17, 12.36, 12.49, 12.60, 12.64, table 12.2 musical works, 8.195, 8.196 names, personal, 10.11-22; civil titles, 10.13, 10.14; given names, 10.11; fr., Sr., III, and such, 6.43, 7.42, 10.19, 16.41; list of, 14.60; punctuation and spacing, 10.12; with Saint, 16.74; speakers in interviews or discus sions, 13.48 (see also initials: in and as names; titles and offices of people below)
place-names: Canadian provinces and territories, 10.28; city plus state, comma with, 10.29; country names, 10.31, 10.32, 14.290; with Fort, Saint, and such, 10.30, 11.26, 16.93; US, when to use, 10.32; US states and territories, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27, 14.130
in publication details, 1.21 resources on, 10.1 scholarly, 10.42 scientific and technical (see under scien tific and technical terminology) in source citations: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.244-47, 14.250; clas sic English works, 14.254; editions, 14.113, 15.6; editor, translator, and such, 14.20-21, 14.23, 14.68-69, 14.103-4, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15; frequently cited works, 13.67, 14.59-60, fig.
abbreviations, specific (continued) 14.7; interviews and personal communications, 15.53; legal-style citations (see under legal and public documents, source citations for); non-English bibliographic terms, 14.102; organization names, 14.274, 15.37; pseud, 14.80, 15.35; publish ers' names, 14.133-34, 14.136; recto and verso, 14.154-55; reference lists, generally, 15.15; self-published materials, 14.137; states, provinces, and countries, 14.130; s.v. (sub verbo) , 14.232; titles of works, 14.59-60, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, fig. 14.7
vs. spelled-out form: Bible, 10.44; civil titles, 10.13, 10.14; compass points in place-names, 10.34; country names, 10.31, 10.32, 14.290; edited by, 14.20-21, 14.103-4, 14.122, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15; given names, 10.11; latitude and longitude, 10.36; legal and public documents, 14.274; orga nization names, 10.24, 10.26; Saint, St., 10.20; social titles, 10.16, 10�17; states and territories, 10.27, 10.28; United States vs. US, 10.32 time designations (see under time des
ignations) titles and offices of people: academic and professional designations, 7.15, 10.4, 10.16, 10.21, 10.22; civil titles, 10.13, 10.14; honorifics, 10.18; mili tary, 8.24, 10.13, 10.15; social titles, 10.4, 10.16, 10.17; St., 10.20
titles of works: italics for, 10.7; resources on, 15.46; vs. short titles, 14.59; in source citations, 14.59-60, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, fig. 14.7
for typescripts, 14.226 units of measurement (see under units of measurement) in vessel names, 8.116 See also postal codes; and specific abbreviations
about the author. See biographical notes abridgements, 2.61, 4.14, 4.75 absolute (independent) possessive pro nouns, 5.49 absolute (positive) adjectives, 5.84 absolute (positive) adverbs, 5.162
INDEX
absolute constructions, 5.35, 5.111 abstractions, 8.37, 8.94 abstract nouns, 5.5, 5.7 abstracts of books, 1.76, 2.25 and copyright issues, 4.64 of dissertations and theses, 14.215 of journal articles, 1.87, 1.92-95, 2.25, 14.186
manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.25
and metadata, 1. 92, 2.25 proofreading of, 2.100 source citations for, 14.186, 14.215
accessibility (continued) subsidiary rights for, 4.64 tables, 3.88 text-to-speech tools, 2.82nl, 3.28, 7.49, 12.2nl
accession numbers for databases, 2.34, 14.215, 14.257, 14.270
access rights and abstracts, 1.93 and database searches, 1.111 as metadata, 1.92 open-access publishing models, 4.52, 4.60, 4.61, 4.66
in table of contents, 1.87
Abu, Abd, Ibn, 16.75
accordingly, 6.57
academic concerns course names, 8.86 degrees and affiliations: abbreviations, 7.15, 10.4, 10.16, 10.21, 10.22; of au thor, 1.19, 1.50, 1.64, 1.66, 1.92, 1.95, 1.100; capitalization, 8.29, 10.21, 10.22; in contributors' list, 1.64, 2.41, fig. 1.10; omitted in source citations,
accusative case. See objective (accusative) case ache, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) acknowledgments on copyright page, 1.20, 1.30, 1.31, figs.
14.73
honors and awards, 8.31, 8.83 institutions and departments, 6.81, 8.68, 8.85, 14.215, 14.217 (see also institu tions; universities) lectures and lecture series, 8.87, 14.217, 14.264, 14.267
letter grades, 7.65 student status terms, 8.29 subjects and disciplines, 7.2, 8.30, 8.85, 8.86
titles and offices, 8.28-31, 16.40 See also universities academic year, 1.80. See also publication date accents. See special characters access dates author-date reference system, 15.50 generally, 14.12 journal articles, 1.83, 14.176 maps, 14.237 reference works, 14.233 scientific databases, 14.257 websites and web pages, 14.12, 14.207, 15.50
accessibility illustrations, 3.28 resources for, 2.82nl, 3.28, 12.2nl
1.3-4
of data sources, 3.77 format of term, 8.179 of grants and subventions, 1.20, 1.31 illustration credits in, 3.30 in journals, 1.89, 1.95 material appropriate for, 1.43 omitted in indexing, 16.109 and permissions, 4.102, 4.103 placement in book, 1.4, 1.41, 1.42 separate section for, 1.42, 4.103 submission of, 2.3 in table notes, 3.77 in unnumbered notes, 14.55 acquisition numbers, for musical record ings, 14.263 acronyms as adjectives, 10. 9 articles with, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 capitalization, 10.6, 10.26 definition and use, 10.2 disease and medical terms, 8.144 indexing of, 16.49, 16.64 journal titles, 16.49 small vs. full-size capitals for, 10.8 space omitted in, 10.5 See also abbreviations, general; abbrevia tions, specific; initialisms active voice, 5.19, 5.115, 5.118, 5.119, 5.135, 5.192
I N D EX
acts and treaties source citations for, 14.275, 14.290 treatment in text, 8.66, 8.80, 8.81 See also legal and public documents AD (anno Domini), and such, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 additions and insertions marking manuscript for, 2.94, 2.95, fig. 2.6 marking proofs for, 2.125, fig. 2.6 stetting or reversal of, 2.130 address, spoken. See dialogue; direct ad dress; speech; speeches addresses, email hyperlinks to, 1.121 line breaks in, 7.46 omitted in source citations, 14.214 punctuation with, 6.8, 6.104 treatment in text, 14.17 See also addresses, mailing; URLs addresses, mailing abbreviations in, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27-29, 10.33-34
compass points in, 10.34 numbers in, 9.50-52, 9.54 publishers', 1.19, 1.20, 1.21, 1.84, 1.95 treatment in text, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29 See also addresses, email; compass points and directions; geographical terminology adhesive binding, p. 975 adjective clusters, 5.167 adjectives, 5.68-96 acronyms as, 10.9 attributive, 5.79 avoiding bias in uses,. 5.260 be-verbs as part of, 5.154 clusters, 5.167 coinage of (see derived from proper names below) compound, 6.80 dates as, 5.83 defined, 5.68 degrees, 5.84-89; comparative, 5.85, 5.87-88, 5.201; equal and unequal comparisons, 5.88; noncomparable, 5.89; positive (absolute), 5.84; super lative, 5.86, 5.87, 7.89 (sec. 1) dependent clauses as, 5.219, 5.225 derived from proper names: in non English languages, 11.26, 11.39, 11.70; from organization names, 8.62; from personal names, 8.60,
adjectives (continued) 8.61; from place-names, 5.69, 8.45; proper adjectives, defined, 5.69; religious terms, 8.96, 8.97 (see also proper adjectives) hyphens with, 7.89 (sec. 2) infinitives as, 5.107 as interjections, 5.208 irregular, 5.87 as nouns (adnouns), 5.94 nouns as, 5.24, 5.259, 7.27, 7.89 (sec. 2) and parenthetical elements in sentences, 6.48 participles as, 5.90, 5.111 position, 5.79-83; after possessive pronouns, 5.80; basic rules, 5.79; and dates, 5.83; meaning affected by, 5.76, 5.77; predicate, 5.79, 5.82; when modifying pronoun, 5.81 postpositive, 5.79 predicate, 5.79, 5.82 prepositional phrases as, 5.176, 5.178 and pronouns, 5.29, 5.49, 5.78, 5.80, 5.81 punctuation: commas, 5.91, 6.36-37; dates in text, 5.83; hyphenation, 5.92, 5.93, 6.80
relative, 5.56 repeated, 6.37 sex-specific labels as, 5.259 special types: coordinate, 5.91, 6.36; participial, 5.90, 5.111; phrasal (com pound modifiers), 5.79, 5.92, 5.93, 7.85, 7.89 (secs. 2, 3) as verbs, 5.95 See also articles (definite and indefinite) adjuncts, 5.68. See also adjectives administrative bodies, 8.63. See also busi ness and commerce; governmental entities; institutions; organization names adnouns, 5.94 adverbial clauses, 5.225 adverbial objectives, 5.26 adverbs, 5.156-71 adverbial conjunctions, 5.202 adverbial phrases, 5.158, 5.161, 6.31, 6.32, 7.89 (sec. 3) compound, 5.161, 7.86, 7.89 in compound modifiers, 7.85 conjunctive (however, therefore, and such), 5.204, 6.49, 6.57
INDEX
adverbs (continued) defined, 5.156 degrees, 5.162-66; comparative, 5.163, 5.201; irregular, 5.165; noncompara ble, 5.166; positive (absolute), 5.162; superlative, 5.86, 5.87, 5.164, 7.89 (sec. 1) dependent clauses as, 5.225 flat (bare), 5.160, 5.250 formation of, 5.158 formed from nouns, 5.158 hyphens with, 7.89 (sec. 2) infinitives as, 5.107 as interjections, 5.208 in introductory phrases, 6.31 -ly ending, 5.93, 5.158, 5.160, 5.163, 5.164, 7.85, 7.86, 7.89 (sec. 2) for negation, 5.230, 5.233 nouns as (adverbial objectives), 5.26 phrasal, 5.161 phrasal verbs as, 5.102 position, 5.167-71; and linking verbs, 5.170; meaning affected by, 5.167; modifying intransitive verbs, 5.169, 5.170; modifying participles, 5.114; modifying words other than verbs, 5.168, 7.89 (sec. 2) ; replacing preposi tional phrases, 5.190; in verb phrases, 5.104, 5.171
prepositional phrases as, 5.176, 5.178 vs. prepositions, 5.184 punctuation with, 6.31, 6.49, 6.57 sentence, 5.157 simple, 5.160 in split infinitives, 5.108 and suffixes, 5.158-59, 5.163-64 See also infinitives; participles advertising. See promotion affixes. See prefixes; suffixes African languages, 11.23-24. See also Arabic language after, 5.202, 5.250 afterwords, 1.4, 1.26, 1.54, 14.110 agents, literary, 4.18 age terms, hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 1) aggregators, 1.105, 4.63, 4.64, 4.65
agreement of pronoun with antecedent, 5.42 of verb with subject, 5.138, 5.139, 5.141, 5.143, 5.205, 5.250 ah, 6.35
A H (anno Hegirae or anno Hebraico), and such, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 aircraft, 8.2, 8.116-18. See also vehicles and
vessels a.k.a., 10.69 al, el (Arabic definite article), 8.14, 11.79, 11.80, 16.75 Albanian language, 11.70 albeit, 5.201 albums, 8.197
alignment of facing pages, 2.117 marking manuscript for, 2.98 marking proofs for, 2.127 in mathematical expressions, 12. 9, 12.18, 12.20, 12.21, 12.23, 12.38, 12.67
in outlines, 6.132 of quotation marks in poetry, 13.28 in tables: cells, 3.70-74, figs. 3.19-21; decimal points, 3.72, 3.86, figs. 3.1415, fig. 3.20 See also lists in text; margins all, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) all caps acronyms and initialisms, 10.6, 10.2526
computer terminology, 7.77, 8.155 for emphasis, 7.52 gene symbols, 8.132 newspaper headlines, 14.192 postal codes, 10.33 See also abbreviations, general; abbreviations, specific; acronyms; initialisms all rights reserved, 1.20, 1.22, 4.41, figs. 1.1-4 along with, 5.142 alphabetizing, 16.56-93
alphabetizing (continued) dedicated indexing software for, 16.104, 16.123
glossaries, 1.61 index cross-references, 16.17, 16.20 indexes of first lines, 16.144, 16.145 index main headings, 16.56 index subentries, 16.68-70 index subentries, generally, 16.68-70 letter-by-letter: basics of, 16.59; for bibliographies, 14.65; for indexes of first lines, 16.144, 16.145; preferred, 16.58; word-by-word compared, 16.57, 16.58, 16.61, 16.123
list of contributors, 1.64, fig. 1.10 names, non-English personal, 16.75-87; Arabic, 16.75; Asian, other, 16.87; Burmese, 16.76; Chinese, 16.77; Hungarian, 8.13, 16.78; Indian, 16.79; Indonesian, 16.80; Japanese, 16.81; Korean, 16.82; Portuguese, 16.83; Spanish, 16.83, 16.84; Thai, 16.85; Vietnamese, 16.86 names, personal: basic rules, 16.7175; compound, 16.72; as corporate names, 16.89; with initials, 8.13, 16.63, 16.78; with Mac, Mc, or O', 16.73; with numbers, 16.66; with par ticles, 16.71, 16.84; with Saint, 16.74; sovereigns and other rulers, 16.37; titled persons, 16.38 (see also names, non-English personal above) non-English words, 16.67, 16.92 numerals, 16.65, 16.6.6, 16.103 vs. numerical order for index subentries, 16.69
organization names, 16.46, 16.64, 16.88-89
as part of indexing process, 16.122, 16.123
person, place, and thing with same name, 16.62 place-names, 16.90-93 and prepositions, 16.53, 16.68 publisher's preferences, 16.103 and punctuation, 16.59-61 reference lists, 2.63, 15.11, fig. 15.1 resources on, 16.58 special characters, 16.67 titles of works, 16.51-54, 16.56 (see also articles disregarded in above)
alphabets dictionary tables, 11.76, 11.91 modernizing archaic letters, 13.7 non-Latin, 11.2, 11.72-73, 11.90, 11.110, 11.115, 11.122, 12.12, tables 11.2-5 See also Arabic language; Cyrillic alphabet; Greek alphabet; Hebrew language; International Phonetic Alphabet; Latin alphabet; letters (alphabet); special characters; Unicode standard; and names ofother languages
alterations author's (AAs), 2.70, 2.135, 2.136, p. 975 defined, p. 975 designer's (DAs), 2.135, p. 978 editor's (EAs), 2.135, 2.136, 14.47, p. 979 and printer's errors, 2.135, pp. 984, 985 and proofreading, 2.110 alternative questions, 5.212 alternative text, 2.82nl, 3.28, 3.88 although, 5.201 ALWD Guide to Legal Citation (Associa
tion of Legal Writing Directors and Barger), 14.269. See also legal-style citations a.m. , p.m., 9.37, 9.38, 10.41
ambitransitive (ergative) verbs, 5.99 American Indians, 7.10, 8.5, 8.38 American Medical Association (AMA), 14.3, 14.76
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1.35 American Psychological Association (APA), 14.3
American Sign Language (ASL), 11.125-35 and Deaf, deafterms, 8.43 fingerspelling in, 6.77, 11.130 resources on, 11.127 signed languages, defined, 11.125 signs: components of, 11.126; compound, 11.129; glosses of, 11.128-35; handshapes, 11.132; lexicalized, 11.131; nonmanual, 11.135; pronouns, possessives, and reference, 11.134 ampersands alphabetizing, 16.64 in company names, 6.21, 10.24, 14.135
INDEX
ampersands (continued) initialisms with, 10.10 in legal-style citations, 14.300 for Old and Middle English, 11.123 in publishers' names, 14.135 serial comma omitted before, 6.21 spacing with, 10.10 in titles of works, 8.165 in URLs and email addresses, 7.46 See also and; conjunctions analytic vs. synthetic languages, 5.221 anaphoric pronouns, 5.28. See also pro nouns: antecedents and
ampersand for, 6.21 between with, 6.78, 9.60 both with, 5.199, 5.244, 5.250 coordinate adjectives separated by, 5.91 in generic cross-references of indexes, 16.23 in lists, 6.131
pronoun and antecedent with, 5.32, 5.33, 5.34
in publishers' names, 14.135 punctuation with, 6.19, 6.22, 6.23 sentences beginning with, 5.203, 5.250 and serial commas, 6.19 slash instead of, 6.106 in spelled out numbers, 9.5 as subordinating conjunction, 5.201 in titles of works, 8.165 for two or more authors or editors in source citations, 14.76 and verb number, 5.205 See also ampersands; conjunctions and if, 6.26 and/or, 5.250 and other stories, 14.92 and so forth or and the like, 6.20, 11.32 and then, 6.23, 6.57
angle brackets for callouts, 2.30 in generic markup, 2.16, 2.30, 2.81, 6.104
for less than and more than, 3.83, 12.15 in mathematical expressions, 6.104, 12.26, 12.31, 12.55, 12.59
for special characters, 2.16 with URLs, 6.8, 14.17 in XML, 6.104 See also brackets
vernacular names, 8.128-29 animations, 1.107, 2.4. See also multimedia content Annals ofthe Congress ofthe United States, 14.287 annotated bibliographies, 14.64, fig. 14.10
annotations as copyrightable, 4.5 keyed to line or page numbers, 14.53, figs. 14.5-6 in PDF files, 1.118, 2.71, 2.119, 2.133 See also notes; source citations announcements in journals, 1.86, 1.87, 1.89, 1.99
anonymity ofresearch subjects, 13.49 anonymous works copyright of, 4.25 source citations for, 14.79, 14.212, 15.34
use ofAnonymous and Anon., 10.42, 14.79, 15.34
ANSI (American National Standards Institute), 1.35 ante, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) antecedents. See under pronouns anthologies author-and-title indexes for, 16.6 as collective works, 4.8 and copyright issues, 4.55, 4.64 editorial additions bracketed in, 6.99 material copyrightable in, 4.5 permissions and fees for, 4.105 unnumbered source notes in, 14.54 See also compilations of previously published material; derivative works anti, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) any, 5.7 any, as prefix, 5.238, 5.250
APA (American Psychological Association), 14.3
aphorisms. See figures of speech; maxims Apocrypha, 8.106, 10.46. See also Bible apodosis, 5.228 apostrophes, 6.116-18 directional or "smart," 2.80, 2.85, 6.115, 6.117
I N D EX
apostrophes (continued) and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 marking on manuscript, 2.94 marking on proofs, 2.132 in non-English languages: African lan guages, 11.24; Chinese, 11.84; Czech, 11.70; French, 11.35; German, 11.40; Greek, 11.116; Hebrew, 11.93; Italian, 11.48, 11.52-53; Japanese, 11.87 other punctuation with, 6.118 in plurals, 6.116, 7.13, 7.15 in possessives: attributive nouns, 7.27; basic use, 5.50, 6.116; compounds, 7.24;for . . . sake expressions, 7.21; general rule, 7.16; genitive case, 7.25; gerunds, 7.28; italicized or quoted terms, 7.29; joint (group) possessives, 5.22; nouns plural in form, singular in meaning, 7.20; with of, 7.26; proper names, 7.17, 7.19, 7.28; two nouns as unit, 7.23; words ending in unpro nounced s, 7.18 vs. prime symbol, 9.16 vs. single closing quotation mark, 2.80, 6.9 uses, other: abbreviated decades (e.g., ' 70s), 9.33; abbreviated years, 9.30; contractions, 5.50, 6.116, 7.30; vs. hamza, 11.77; inappropriate, 5.49, 5.50, 5.250, 6.117, 7.9, 7.65; legal-style citations, 14.274; nouns, genitive, 5.9, 5.20, 5.21 appendixes chronologies as, 1.60· discographies in, 1.63 as electronic supplementary data, 1.59, 1.78 figures or illustrations in, numbering of, 3.11 format ofterm, 8.179 glossaries as, 1.61 indexing of, 16.109 multiple, 1.48 notes to, 1.62 numbering of, 1.59, 8.180 parenthetical references to, 14.56 placement in book, 1.4, 1.59 running heads for, 1.14 submission of, 2.3 as work made for hire, 4.10
appositives clauses as, 5.227 commas with, 5.23, 6.28, 6.41 defined, 5.23 place-names, 8.54 and pronouns, 5.12, 5.36, 5.51 vs. serial commas, 6.19 subordinating conjunctions in, 5.201 titles and offices of people as, 8.21, 8.30, 8.36 apps defined, p. 975 functional features in, 1.119 generally, 1.118 indexes in, 1.125 for magazine articles, 14.189 markup for, 2.83 multimedia content, 14.268 names of, 8.154, 8.155 navigation in, 1.120, 1.123 PDF format for, 1.118 proofing and testing of, 2.137, 2.138, 2.139, 2.140 required to read electronic publications (see file formats and devices) site map for, 2.137 specified in source citations, 14.137, 14.159, 14.160, 14.189, 14.268 terminology specific to, 7.76 video games as, 8.190 See also electronic publications; multiple formats, publications in Arabic language, 11.76-81 articles, 8.14, 11.79, 11.80, 16.75 capitalization, 8.14, 11.80 names, 8.14, 16.75 resources on, 11.76 special characters, 11.76, 11.77, 11.81, 11.92, table 11.2 spelling, 11.78 word division, 11.81 arabic numerals building and apartment numbers, 9.52 Chicago's preference for, 9.67 defined, p. 975 divisions in publications and documents, 9.26, 9.27, 9.28 enzyme names, 8.133 illustrations, 3.12 and line breaks, 7.43
INDEX
arabic numerals (continued) parts of book, 8.180 ranges (inclusive), 9.61, 9.62 roads and thoroughfares, 9.50, 9.51 vs. roman numerals, 14.147, table 9.1 sequels, 8.189 in source citations: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.243, 14.244, 14.249; journal volume numbers, 14.171; parts of books, 8.180, 14.147; parts of poems and plays, 8.184, 14.254; vs. roman numerals, 14.147; scriptural references, 14.241; volume numbers ofmultivolume works, 14.116 spacecraft, 9.44 table columns, 3.56 text page numbers, 1.4, 1.9, 1.46, 1.47, 2.38 unions and lodges, 9.49 See also inclusive (continuing) numbers; numbers; roman numerals archaeology, 7.2, 9.34 archival practices, 1.114, 2.78, 2.87. See also backup copies archives, 4.83, 14.292, 14.296. See also legal and public documents; letters (correspondence); manuscript col lections; unpublished and informally published materials articles (definite and indefinite), 5.70-78 and abbreviations, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 appropriate use of, 5.74, 5.250, 7.32, 7.33 in Arabic, 8.14, 11.79, 11.80, 16.75 astronomical names with, 8.138, 8.140 a vs. an, 5.74, 5.250, 7.32, 7.33 in blog titles, 8.192 collective nouns with, 5.7 common nouns with, 5.5 coordinate nouns with, 5.75 defined, 5.70 definite, generally, 5.71, 5.73, 5.75 disregarded in alphabetizing, 14.71, 14.79-80, 15.34, 16.48-49, 16.51-52, 16.56, 16.68, 16.88, 16.91 with epithets, 8.35 and gender, 5.11, 5.255 in headline-style capitalization, 8.159 with honorifics, 10.18 indefinite, generally, 5.72-74 in indexes of first lines, 16.144
articles (definite and indefinite) (continued) in index subentries, 16.51, 16.52, 16.68, 16.129 meaning affected by, 5.75, 5.76, 5.77 omission of, 5.77, 8.169, 8.170, 14.33, 14.170, 14.193 organization names with, 8.68, 8.70, 14.134, 16.88, 16.89 in personal names, 8.11, 16.75 place-names with, 8.59, 16.91, 16.92 as pronoun substitute, 5.78 proper names with, generally, 5.6 with titles of people used in apposition, 8.21, 8.30 in titles of works, 8.169-70, 8.192, 14.98, 14.170, 14.193-94, 16.48-49, 16.5152, 16.56 zero (implicit), 5.77 See also a and an; the articles, periodical. See journal articles; magazines; newspapers art styles and movements, 8.79. See also cultural movements and styles artwork author's inventory of, 3.17 commissioned, 3.33 continuous-tone, 3.3, p. 978 copyright issues, 4.15, 4.98 covers and jackets, 1.30, 1.73, 4.77, 4.90, 4.100, 4.101 creators' names, indexing of, 16.50 credit lines for, 1.30, 1.73, 3.33, 8.199 cropping, scaling, and shading, 3.19 defined, p. 975 identification for publisher, 3.16 inventory of, 3.17-18 original dimensions noted for, 3.27 redrawn by publisher, 3.20 scans, 2.27, 3.15 source citations for, 14.235-37 submission to publisher, 2.2, 2.4, 2.27, 3.3, 3.4, 3.15-20 titles of, 8.198-201; in captions, 3.22; cartoons, 8.200; exhibition catalogs, 8.201, 14.236; generic, 3.22; index ing, 16.50; maps, 8.199, 14.237; paint ings, statues, and such, 8.57, 8.198; in source citations, 14.86, 14.235 use of term, 3.1 See also captions; illustrations
ascenders, p. 975 ASCII (plain-text) files, p. 985 asfar as, 5.201, 5.250 asfollows, 6.64, 13.16. See also introductory words and phrases Asian names Burmese, 16.76 Chinese, 8.15, 11.83, 11.85, 11.88, 16.77 Indian, 16.79 Indonesian, 8.18, 16.80 Japanese, 8.16, 11.88, 16.81 Korean, 8.17, 16.82 other, 8.18, 16.87 Thai, 16.85 Vietnamese, 16.86 See also South Asian languages as if, 5.201, 5.250 ASL. See American Sign Language as much as, 5.201 as so, so as, 5.199, 5.244 associations, 8.70, 10.26. See also organiza tion names as soon as, 5.201 asterisks for footnotes, 14.25, 14.27, 14.49, 14.51, fig. 14.4 in legal-style citations, 14.276 in tables, 3.79, 3.80, fig. 3.22 for text breaks, 1.58, 2.8 as though, 5.201 astronomical and astrophysical terminology, 8.137-42 abbreviations in, 9.10, 10.60-62 celestial bodies, 8.138-42, 10.61 descriptive terms, 8.142 Myr and Gyr, 9.10 resources on, 8.137, 10.60, 10.62 sun and moon, 8.141 See also metric system; scientific and technical terminology as well as, 5.142, 5.201, 6.19 at, in legal-style citations, 14.273, 14.276, 14.285 atlases, 4.10 at sign (@), 16.64 attribute pronouns, 5.45
attribution and fair-use doctrine, 4.75, 4.84, 4.92 importance of, 4.15, 4.75, 4.92 unnecessary, 13.5 See also illustration credits and credit lines; permissions; source citations; text citations attributive adjectives, 5.79 attributive nouns, 5.24, 7.27 audiobooks, 1.75, 14.264. See also multime dia content; sound recordings audio rights, 4.64 audiovisual materials. See movies and film; multimedia content; musical works; sound recordings; television and television programs Australia, 1.34 author-and-title indexes, 16.6 author-date reference system authors' names: anonymous works, 15.34; authors with same last name, 15.22; basic form, 15.6, 15.12; editor in place of author, 15.9, 15.19, 15.36; examples and variations, 15.9; initials vs. full names, 15.12, 15.33, 15.53; more than three authors, 15.9, 15.29; multimedia content, 15.57; orga nizations as authors, 15.37; proper form of name to use, 15.12, 15.33; pseudonyms, 15.35; same author, same year, 15.20, 15.29; single vs. several, order for, 15.16; 3-em dashes for, 15.17-20 basic format: example, fig. 15.1; ex amples and variations, 15.9; page numbers and other locators, 15.8; reference list entry structure, 15.5, 15.6, 15.22; text citation structure, 15.5, 15.7, 15.22 biogs and blog posts, 15.51 cross-checking, 2.32, 15.21 cross-references, 15.42 disciplines using, 14.2 and indexing, 16.114, 16.115 interviews and personal communications, 15.53 in journals, 1.108 legal and public documents, 14.271, 15.58-59 multiauthor books, 15.10
INDEX
author-date reference system (continued) multimedia content, 15.57 and notes and bibliography system, 14.2, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3
notes used with, 14.39, 14.50, 14.271, 15.11, 15.31, fig. 15.2 patents, 15.55 periodicals, 15.9, 15.46-49; initials for authors' given names, 15.33; issue number in parentheses, 15.47; news papers and magazines, 15.49; titles of, 15.13, 15.38, 15.46 publication date: basic structure and punctuation, 15.5, 15.6, 15.9, 15.25; blog posts, 15.51; editions with mul tiple, 15.40;forthcoming, 15.18, 15.45; letters in published collections, 15.43; manuscript collections, 15.54; mul timedia content, 15.57; multivolume works published over several years, 15.41; newspapers and magazines, 15.49; "no date," 15.44, 15.50; vs. notes and bibliography system, 15.2, 15.3; placement of, 15.14; references arranged by, 15.18, 15.19; reprint and modern editions, more than one date, 15.40; social media content, 15.52
secondary sources, quotations from, 15.56
social media content, 15.52 syntactic considerations with, 15.28 websites and web pages, 15.4, 15.50 See also reference lists; source citations; text citations; titles of works in source citations; and specific materials to document
author queries and ambiguity in tracking changes, 2.84
bias-free language issues, 5.254 comment style for, 2.69 on cross-references, 2.60 example of, fig. 2.4 and fact-checking, 2.56 generally, 2.2 inserting in electronic files, 2.87 marking, 2.92 placement in margins of, 2.10, 2.43, 2.91, 2.92-93
author queries (continued) on quotations and previously published material, 2.61 on running heads, 2.76 on silent changes, 2.85 on source citations, 2.62, 2.63, 2.64, 2.69
sticky notes for, 2.92 on subheads in table of contents, 2.57 on table totals, 3.81 authors academic degrees and affiliations, 1.19, 1.50, 1.64, 1.66, 1.92, 1.95, 1.100
accuracy of, 2.7, 2.56, 13.6 alterations on proofs (AAs), 2.70, 2.135, 2.136, p. 975 approval before editing, 2.50 backup copies of manuscript as respon sibility of, 2.4, 2.40, 2.71 biographical notes (see biographical notes) books published by (see self-published materials) collected works of single, 8.178 communications with manuscript editors, 2.68-72; checking author's changes, 2.72; cover letter and instructions, 2.70, 2.88, 2.92; early contact, 2.68; editing sample, 2.52, 2.68; permissions double-checked, 4.79; sample of editing, 2.52, 2.68; sending edited manuscript, 2.71, 2.88 (see also author queries) field notes of, 13.49 financial assistance for, 1.31 indexing, role in: list of terms for indexer, 16.30, 16.108; manuscript preparation, 16.24; vs. professional indexers, 16.3, 16.4; responsibility for, 2.2, 2.70; and software, 16.104 interaction with readers, 1.118 interviews by, 13.48 (see also interviews and discussions) list of previous publications on copyright page, 1.18 multiple (see multiauthor volumes) own work used by, 3.31, 4.66, 4.78 papers in collection of, 14.231 permissions as responsibility of (see permissions)
INDEX
authors (continued) proofreading as responsibility of, 2.101 publication process and schedule for, 2.2, figs. 2.1-2 review of copyedited manuscript, 2.2, 2.70-72, 2.82, 2.88, 2.101 royalties, 4.37, 4.52, 4.58, 4.64, 4.69, 4.104 translations by, 11.14 warranties by, 4.52, 4.72, 4.73 websites of, 1.113, 1.121, 4.66, 4.67 See also author queries; authors' names; contributors to multiauthor volumes and journals; copyright; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; proofreading; publishing agreements author's alterations (AAs), 2.70, 2.135, 2.136, p. 975 authorship, in copyright. See copyright authors' names in books: chapter display, 1.50, 2.32; copyright notice, 1.22, 4.42; covers and jackets, 1.69, 1.70; epigraphs, 1.37; forewords and introductions, 1.40, 14.105; multiauthor volumes, 1.38, 1.50, 1.64, 2.32, fig. 1.10; run ning heads, 1.83; table of contents, 1.38; title page, 1.19, 14.73, 14.82, 14.101, 15.12 as copyright management information, 4.15 in electronic file names, 2.37 given names, 10.11, 14.83, 15.33 hyperlinks from, 1.121 indexing: in separate index, 16.6, 16.115, 16.145; with titles of works, 16.50, 16.97 in journals and journal articles: first page of article, 1.95, 1.100; as metadata, 1.92, 1.100; retractions, 1.91; running heads, 1.83; source citations, 14.168, 14.185, 15.33; table of contents, 1.87, fig. 1.11 as metadata, 1.75 in production checklist, 2.77 proofreading of, 2.108, 2.134 screen names, 14.208, 14.209, 15.52 in source citations (see authors' names in source citations) in species names, 8.124 See also anonymous works; contributors
authors' names (continued) to multiauthor volumes and journals; pseudonyms and pseudonymous works authors' names in source citations author-date reference system: alpha betization, 15.11, 15.16, 15.18, 15.20; anonymous works, 15.34; authors with same last name, 15.22; basic form, 15.6, 15.7, 15.12; editor in place of author, 15.9, 15.19, 15.36; examples and variations, 15.9; and indexing, 16.114, 16.115; initials vs. full names, 15.12, 15.33, 15.53; more than three authors, 15.9, 15.29; organizations as authors, 15.37; proper form of name to use, 15.12, 15.33; pseudonyms, 15.35; same author, same year, 15.20, 15.29; single vs. several authors, order for, 15.16; 3-em dashes for, 15.17-20 legal-style citations, 14.272, 14.285, 14.305 notes and bibliography system, 14.7284; alphabetization, 14.62, 14.65-66, 14.71, fig. 14.8; alternative forms of, 14.82; anonymous works, 14.79; authors known by given name, 14.83; basic note and bibliography entry structure, 14.20-21; chronological order for single author with multiple titles, 14.71; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.244, 14.245; different coauthors with, 14.66; editor in place of author, 14.103; editor vs. author, 14.104; examples and variations, 14.23; footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.48, 14.57; forewords, prefaces, and such, 14.110; form of, generally, 14.19, 14.23, 14.73, 14.101; initials vs. full names, 14.73-74; mononyms, 14.83; in multivolume works, 14.117, 14.122; organizations as authors, 14.70, 14.84; pseudonyms, 14.8081; punctuation of, 6.20; repeated names, 1.124, 6.94, 14.65, 14.67-71, 14.79; short forms, 14.30-32, 14.108, 14.185; single author, 14.75; 3-em dashes in, 1.124, 2.14, 6.94, 14.65, 14.67-71, 14.79; in title ofwork, 14.78; two or more authors or editors, 14.23,
INDEX
authors' names in source citations (continued) 14.32, 14.76; two or more authors or editors with same family name, 14.77 automobiles, 8.117. See also vehicles and vessels auxiliary (helping) verbs, 5.144-53
back matter (continued) recto vs. verso for elements, 1.4, 1.53,
can, could, 5.146, 5.250 in contractions, 5.105 defined, 5.103, 5.144 do, 5.152, 5.215, 5.231 have, 5.132, 5.133, 5.153 with infinitives, 5.106 may, might, 5.147, 5.250 modal, generally, 5.145 must, 5.148 ought, should, 5.149, 5.150, 5.250 and parallel structure, 5.245 in verb phrases, 5.104 will, would, 5.131, 5.134, 5.151, 5.231 averages, in tables, 3.74 awards and prizes, 1.99, 8.31, 8.83, 8.115, 8.172 axes, x and y, 3.43, 3.52, fig. 3.8 Azeri language, 11.70
See also many ofthe above elements under their own headings backslashes, 6.105, 6.112
back counters (subtrahends), 9.66 back issues, 1.84 back margin, p. 975 back matter, 1.59-68 acknowledgments, 1.42 added later in production process, 1.9 afterwords, 1.4, 1.26, 1.54, 14.110 appendixes, 1.59 bibliography or reference list, 1.63 biographical notes, 1.66 chronologies, 1.60, fig. 1.9 colophons (logos), 1.67 editor's notes, 1.45 in electronic publications, 1.122, 1.125 endnotes, 1.4, 1.61, 1.62 glossaries, 1.61 illustration credits, 1.4, 3.30 indexable material in, 16.109 indexes, 1.65 in journals, 1.88, 1.90, 2.134 list of abbreviations, 1.44, fig. 1.8 list of contributors, 1.50, 1.64, 2.41, 14.55, fig. 1.10 overview, 1.3 pagination of, 1.4, 1.8, 1. 9 in production checklist, 2.77
1.65
running heads for, 1.14, 1.15 submission of, 2.3 in table of contents, 1.38, fig. 1.5
backup copies of citation data, 14.5 electronic files, 2.4, 2.40, 2.78, 2.80, 14.5 paper-only manuscripts, 2.6, 2.71, 2.90 See also archival practices bar charts, 3.43, fig. 3.8 bar codes, 1.69, 1.74, 1.75, 1.84 bare (flat) adverbs, 5.160, 5.250 barely, 5.90, 5.230
baseline, p. 975 battles, campaigns, wars, and such, 8.11314 BC, AD, and such, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 because, 5.201, 5.250, 6.24 before, 5.202 Berne Convention, 4.2, 4.30, 4.39 besides, 6.57 beta (Greek character), 11.45 beta testing, 2.138, p. 975 between . . . and, 6.78, 9.60 be-verbs (be, is, are, was, etc.) in cleft sentences, 5.246 contractions with, 5.105 forms and tenses of, 5.100, 5.154, 5.155 it as subject of, 5.47, 5.240 as linking verbs, 5.45, 5.101 with not, 5.231 noun or pronoun following, 5.18 in passive voice, 5.118, 5.154 with present participles, 5.118 in progressive tenses, 5.135 bi, as prefix, 5.250, 7.89 (sec. 4) bias-free language, 5.251-60 alternatives for, 5.255
editor's attention to, 2.51, 5.254 and gender-specific suffixes, 5.257 necessary gender-specific language, 5.258
INDEX
bias-free language (continued) noun forms in, 5.11 purposes of, 5.251 sex-specific labels, 5.259 Bible abbreviations, 10.44-48; ofBible and biblical, 10.42; books ofBible, 10.44-47; chapter and verse, 14.239; resources on, 10.44, 14.238; versions and sections of Bible, 10.48, 14.240 books of, 8.105, 10.44-47 capitalization of, 8.103, 8.104 in Hebrew language, 11.97 named parts of (e.g., Sermon on the Mount), 8.107 resources on, 10.44, 14.238 sections of, 8.106, 10.48, 14.240 versions of, 8.104, 10.48 See also biblical citations biblical citations abbreviations in, 10.44-48 chapter and verse, 14.239 punctuation of, 6.62, 9.26 resources on, 14.238 versions of Bible in, 10.48, 14.240 See also Bible bibliographic essays, 14.64, fig. 14.11 bibliographies, 14.61-71 abbreviations in, 10.3, 10.27 alphabetizing: authors with different co authors, 14.66; authors with multiple works, 14.68-69, 14.71; example, fig. 14.8; letter-by-letter vs. word-by-word, 14.65; multiple authors, 14.66, 15.16, 15.18, 15.20; readability of, 14.62 authors' names in (see authors' names in source citations) chronological order for, 2.63, 14.71 for each chapter in multiauthor vol umes, 1.63, 14.62 editing and checking, 2.32, 2.56, 2.63, 2.64, 2.80 format: basic structure, 14.21, 14.62; ex amples, 14.23, figs. 14.8-11; hanging (flush-and-hang) indentation, 1.63, 2.11, 2.24, fig. 14.8; headnotes, 14.63, 14.64, fig. 14.9; manuscript prepa ration guidelines, 2.24, 14.67, 15.17; sections in, 14.63, 14.263, fig. 14.9; 3-em dashes, 1.124, 2.14, 6.94, 14.65, 14.67-71, 14.79; type size, 1.63
bibliographies (continued) format of term, 8.179 as guide to further reading, 14.63 and indexing, 16.109 notes in relation to, 14.61 omission of, 14.31 placement in book, 1.4, 1.63, 14.62 vs. reference lists, 14.71, 15.3 special types: annotated, 14.64, fig. 14.10; bibliographic essays, 14.64, fig. 14.11; discographies, 1.63, 14.262, 14.263, 15.57, fig. 14.12; selected, 14.64, fig. 14.9; single-author, 14.64, 14.71 subheads in, 14.63, 14.263 submission of, 2.3 symbols in, 10.43 titles of works in (see titles of works in source citations) as work made for hire, 4.10 works appropriate for inclusion, 2.63 See also notes and bibliography system; reference lists; source citations; and specific types ofsources billion, 5.250 bills, legislative, 14.283. See also legislation
binary operations and relations, 12.15, 12.16, 12.20, 12.23 binary systems, 9.11 binding defined, p. 975 types: adhesive, p. 975; burst, p. 976; case or hardcover, p. 976-77; limp (flexi-), p. 980; notch, p. 983; perfect, p. 984; saddle stitched, p. 987; sewn, pp. 987, 988 bio, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) biographical notes components of, 1.18, 1.66 on covers or jackets, 1.66, 1.70, 1.71 editing of, 2.57 of editors, compilers, and such, 1.66 in journals, 1.100, 14.55 as metadata, 1.75, 1.100 in multiauthor volumes, 1.50, 1.64, 2.41, 14.55, fig. 1.10 placement in book, 1.4 proofreading of, 2.108 in unnumbered notes, 1.50, 14.55 biographies, indexing of, 16.70 BISAC, 1.75
INDEX
bitmapped images, 2.137, p. 976 blackboard (double-struck) symbols, 12.14, 12.66
blanket, p. 976 blank lines, 1.58, 2.8, 2.98 bleed, p. 976 blind (unexpressed) folios, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.39, 1.46, 1.49, 3.6, p. 980 blind stamping, p. 988 block quotations beginning in text, 13.23 capitalization in, 13.20 converting to run-in, 13.31 defined, 13.9, p. 976 generic markup of, 2.74, 2.80, 2.81 indentation in, 2.11, 2.19 manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.11, 2.19, 2.20, 13.9
from non-English materials, 11.11 note references or notes within, 13.7 paragraphs within, 2.19, 13.22, 13.32-33, 13.35, 13.56
permissions for, 4.95, 13.3 of poetry (see poetry: quotations from) proofreading of, 2.113 punctuation in: colons, 6.63, 6.65; edit ing of, 2.61; ellipses, 13.56; periods, 13.17; quotation marks, 13.31 quotation beginning in text, 13.23 vs. run-in, 13.9-10 text citations for, 13.70-72, 15.26 text following, 2.12, 2.21, 13.24 within notes, 14.38 See also quotations; source citations; text citations biogs and blog posts defined, 14.205 source citations for, 14.205-6, 14.208, 15.51
treatment in text, 8.192 See also online publications; social media content; URLs; websites and web pages Bluebook, The (Harvard Law Review Asso ciation), 14.269. See also legal-style citations bluelines, p. 976 blurb, author's. See biographical notes boards, p. 976 boats. See vehicles and vessels body text, p. 976
boldface defined, p. 976 in manuscript, 2.15 marking manuscript for, 2.97 marking proofs for, 2.131 proofreading of, 2.113 and punctuation, 6.3 uses: computer terminology, 7.79; dynamics in music writing, 7.75; em phasis, 7.51; highlighting key terms, 7.56; indexes, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141, 16.143; mathematical expressions, 12.52, 12.56; notes, 14.53, fig. 14.6 See also typographic considerations book, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) book-club rights, 4.64 book design, 1.30, 2.73 Book Industry Study Group, 1.75 book notes section, 1.94, 1.98. See also reviews book reviews, 1.87, 1.94, 1.98, 4.10, 14.153, 14.202
books abstracts for, 1.76, 2.25 divisions of: for letters and diaries, 1.52; outline of, 1.4; overview, 1.3; pagination of, 1.7, 1.8; for poetry, 1.51; running heads in, 1.12; in table of contents, 1.38, fig. 1.5 (see also parts of below) electronic supplementary data, 1.59, 14.112
errata, 1.68 interactive, 14.268 (see also multimedia content) ISBN (see ISBN) metadata for, 1.75, 1.76, 2.25 multiple formats, 1.2, 1.26, 14.159 pages, definitions, 1.5 pagination in, 1.6-9, 1.46, 1.49, 1.51 parts of, 1.4; back matter (see back matter); chapter display, 1.8, 1.12, 1.16, 1.46, 1.49-50, 2.32, 13.37; chapters, 1.49; conclusion, 1.53; divisions into, 1.48; epilogue, 1.4, 1.54; front matter (see front matter); galleries, 1.6; generic terms for, 3.5, 8.179, 14.110; illustrations and tables, 1.8, 1.39; introductions, 1.43, 1.47; markup of, 2.73; running heads, 1.10-16; second half title, 1.4, 1.8, 1.46; subheads,
INDEX
books (continued) 1.55-57; text breaks, 1.58, 2.8 (see also divisions of above, and many of the above elements under their own headings) publication process and schedule, 2.2, fig. 2.1 reviews of, 1.87, 1.94, 1.98, 4.10, 14.153, 14.202 signatures in, 1.41, 3.6, 14.154, p. 988
simultaneous print/electronic publish ing model, 1.2, 14.159 source citations for, author-date refer ence system, 15. 9, 15.40-45 source citations for, notes and bibliog raphy system, 14.100-163; author's names, generally, 14.19, 14.23, 14.73, 14.101 (see also authors' names in source citations: notes and bibliog raphy system); basic format, 14.19; book-length work within, 14.109; on CD-RO Ms and fixed media, 14.163; chapters, 14.23, 14.54, 14.106-8, 14.120, 14.161, 14.181, 15.9; consulted online, 14.161-62; e-books, 14.137, 14.159-60; editions (see editions: source citations for); editor, trans lator, and such, 14.103-5; electronic supplementary data, 14.112; elements to include, 14.100; examples and variations, 14.23; ghostwritten books, 14.105; introductions, prefaces, etc., 14.110; letters in published collec tions, 14.111; locators, 14.53, 14.106, 14.153-58, fig. 14.5 (see also page numbers in source citations); multi volume works, 14.116-22, 14.124-25, 14.144; non-English bibliographic terms and abbreviations, 14.102; publication details (see publication details); self-published materials, 14.132, 14.137; series, 14.123-26; titles (see titles of works in source citations: notes and bibliography system) See also authors' names; covers of jour nals and paperback books; e-books; electronic publications; hardcover books; multiple formats, publica tions in; online publications; source citations; titles of works Books, in publishers' names, 14.134
scientific names: authors' names in, 8.124; divisions higher than genus, 8.126; English derivatives from taxo nomic system, 8.127; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.2, 8.119, 8.120-25, 8.127, 8.158-59, 8.173; hybrids, 8.125; resources on, 8.119 vernacular names, 8.128-30 See also scientific and technical termi nology both . . . and, 5.199, 5.244, 5.250
braces in mathematical expressions, 6.104, 12.26, 12.28, 12.35. See also
delimiters brackets, 6.99-104 angle brackets: for callouts, 2.30; in ge neric markup, 2.16, 2.30, 2.81, 6.104; for less than and more than, 3.83, 12.15; in mathematical expressions, 6.104, 12.26, 12.31, 12.55, 12.59; in XML, 6.104
Dirac bracket notation, 12.55 font for, 6.5 other punctuation with: commas, 6.18; ellipses, 11.32, 11.49, 11.65, 13.53, 13.58, 14.97; exclamation points, 6.73, 6.74; generally, 6.103; parenthe ses, 6.97, 6.101, 14.38, 15.28, 15.40; periods, 6.13; question marks, 6.70; quotation marks, 13.63 in quotations (see under quotations) in source citations: annotated bibliog raphies, 14.64; for author's name, 14.74, 14.79, 15.34; for counted page numbers, 14.155; for editor's or translator's notes, 14.51; with ellipses in very long titles, 14.97; legal-style citations, 14.294, 14.298; for non-English titles, 14.99; within parentheses, 14.38, 15.28, 15.40; for pseudonyms, 14.80-81, 14.208, 15.35; for publication details, sur mised, 14.132, 14.145, 15.34, 15.44 uses, other: editorial interpolations and clarifications, 6.99; mathematical ex-
INDEX
brackets (continued) pressions, 12.50 (see also delimiters); music dynamics, 7.75; phonetics, 6.102; with sic, 13.61; transcriptions of discussions or interviews, 13.48; translated text, 6.96, 6.100, 11.15; URLs, 6.8, 14.17 See also parentheses; punctuation Braille, 4.64 brand names, 7.80, 8.69, 8.146, 8.153-54. See also trademarks breathing marks, 2.80, 11.110, 11.112 British Library, 1.34 British style acronyms, 10.6 contractions, 10.4 dashes, 6.83, 6.85 dates, 6.38 double consonants in past indicative, 5.130
millions, billions, and trillions, 5.250, 9.8
parentheses within parentheses, 6.97 past tense and past participle, 5.100 period asfall stop, 6.12 plural-form proper names, 5.15 pronounced h, 7.32 quotation marks, 6.9, 13.30 shan't in, 5.231 singular they, 5.48n5 spelling, 7.3, 16.29 than with I, 5.183 titles of nobility, 8.32 which and that, 5.250, 6.27 See also European style; United Kingdom broadcast networks, channels, and such, 8.189, 10.25
broadside layout defined, p. 976 for tables, 2.115, 3.51, 3.86, 3.87, fig. 3.16, fig. 3.25 brochures. See pamphlets, brochures, and reports buildings names of, 8.57, 8.68, 8.172, 11.26, 11.61 numbers of, 9.52 religious, 8.101, 9.48 bulk, p. 976 bullets, 2.21, 6.130, 6.131 Burmese names, 16.76 burst binding, p. 976
business and commerce abbreviations used in, 10.23-25, 10.69, 14.133, 14.134, 14.136
generic terms vs. proper names, 7.80 in source citations: corporate features omitted from names in, 14.134, 14.136; imprints, parent companies, and such, 14.138-41; news services, 14.200; private documents, 14.219; reports, brochures, and such, 14.220 titles and offices in, 8.27 See also company names; governmental entities; institutions; organization names but
for negation, 5.237 punctuation with, 6.22, 6.23, 6.46 sentences beginning with, 5.203, 5.250 but if, 6.26 by, in long passive, 5.192 bylaws, 9.28. See also legal and public
documents ca. (circa), 7.55, 10.42
calendar designations. See dates; time designations calendar year, 1.80. See also publication date calibers, firearm, 9.19 call letters (broadcasting), 10.25 callouts (illustrations and tables) cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.65, 2.66 definition and format, 2.26, 2.30, 3.8 figure, table spelled out in, 8.180 markup of, 2.87 and placement offeature, 3.8, 3.51 vs. text references, 2.30, 3.8, 3.51 working numbers in, 3.13 calls for papers, 1.89, 1.99 campaigns, military, 8.114 campus locations, 6.81 can, could, 5.146, 5.250 can, may, 5.250 can, not, 5.231
Canada CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.34
currency, 9.21 First Peoples, 8.38 legal and public documents, 14.269, 14.293-96
INDEX
Canada (continued) numbers, 5.250, 9.55 provinces and territories, 10.28, 14.130, 14.193
academic degrees and affiliations, 8.29, 10.21, 10.22
academic subjects and courses of study, 8.85-86
brand names and trademarks, 8.69, 8.146, 8.153-54, 10.6
calendar and time designations, 8.8890
with colons, 6.63 and common nouns, 5.5 company names, 8.68, 8.69 computer terminology, 7.77, 7.79, 7.80, 8.155
consistency in text and illustrations, 2.65
dialogue, 7.52, 13.43 editor's note on, 1.45 and ellipses, 13.53 for emphasis, 7.52 generic terms for parts of books, 8.179, 8.180
in glossaries, 2.23 groups of people: ethnic and national groups, 8.38; generations, 8.42; physical characteristics, 8.43; sexual orientation and gender identity, 8.41; socioeconomic cl�sses, 8.40 historical and cultural terminology, 8.71-79; acts, treaties, and govern ment programs, 8.66, 8.75, 8.80-81; awards, 8.31, 8.83, 8.115; cultural movements and styles, 8.60, 8.61, 8.79; events, 8.75-78, 8.89, 8.108, 8.113-14; oaths and pledges, 8.84; periods, 8.71-74 I (pronoun), 5.40 in illustration labels and keys, 3.20 in indexes: checking, 16.133; crossreferences, 16.17, 16.18, 16.20; main heading and subentries, 16.11 initial the in periodical titles, 8.170 intercaps (midcaps), 8.154 interjections, 7.31 lectures and lecture series, 8.87
capitalization (continued) letters as shapes, 7.67 in lists, 2.23, 6.130, 6.131 marking manuscript for, 2.97 marking proofs for, 2.131 military terminology, 8.112-15 names, personal (see names, personal, capitalization of) non-English languages: African lan guages, 11.23; Arabic, 8.14, 11.80; Asian, other, 8.18; Azeri, 11.70; Chinese, 8.15, 11.88, 11.89; Danish, 11.70; Dutch, 8.10, 11.70; in English context, 11.3, 11.4; English language compared, 11.18; English transla tions, 11.9-10, 11.18, 14.99; French, 8.7, 11.26, 11.27; German, 7.54, 8.8, 11.39; Hebrew, 11.93; Hungarian, 8.13; Indonesian, 8.18, 16.80; Italian, 8.9, 11.46; Japanese, 8.16, 11.88, 11.89; Korean, 8.17; Latin, 11.54; Norwegian, 11.70; Polish, 11.70; Portuguese, 8.8, 11.70; Russian, 8.12, 11.99, 11.100; Spanish, 8.11, 11.61; Swedish, 11.70; titles of works (see under titles of works: capitalization); Turkish, 11.70 organization names, 8.62-70; abbre viations, 10.6, 10.26; associations, 8.70; companies, 8.68; governmental entities, 8.52, 8.62-65; institutions, 8.68, 8.85; political and economic organizations and movements, 8.6667, 8.70
part and chapter titles, 2.58 permissible changes to, 8.165, 13.7, 13.18, 13.19, 14.88
personifications, 8.37 physical characteristics, 8.43 place-names: cities and towns, 5.69, 8.45, 8.53; compass points and direc tions, 8.46, 8.47; continents, coun tries, oceans, 8.45, 11.61; political divisions, 8.51, 8.52; popular names and epithets, 8.48; public places and structures, 8.56-58; real vs. metaphorical names, 8.50; regions, 8.47, 8.54; topographical divisions, 8.53-55; urban areas, 8.49 pronouns, 5.40 proper nouns, generally, 5.6, 8.1
INDEX
capitalization (continued) questions within sentence, 6.42 quotations, 8.162, 13.18-21, 13.53 religious terms, 8.91-111; deities, 8.91, 8.92; events and concepts, 8.89, 8.94, 8.99, 8.108-10; groups, 8.96-102; names and titles, 8.19, 8.26, 8.33, 8.36; objects, 8.111; places of wor ship, 8.101; religious figures, 8.93, 8.95; religious works, 8.103-7 scientific and technical terminology: abbreviations, 10.6, 10.49; astro nomical and astrophysical, 8.138, 8.140-42; botanical and zoological, 8.120, 8.126, 8.127, 8.128, 8.158; ge netic, 8.132; geological, 8.135, 8.136; medical, 8.144, 8.145, 8.146; physical and chemical, 8.148, 8.149; titles of works, 8.168, 15.13, 15.38 seasons as issue numbers, 1.80 in source citations: and other stories and such, 14.92; author-date reference system, 15.6, 15.9, 15.13, 15.38; blog comments, 14.208; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.247; examples and variations, 14.23; legal-style cita tions, 14.272, 14.274, 14.280, 14.284, 14.290; magazine departments, 14.190; newspaper headlines, 14.192, 14.195; news services, 14.200; pub lishers' names, 14.136; titles of works (see under titles of works in source citations) sparing use of ("down style"), 8.1 spelled-out forms of abbreviations, 10.6, 10.21, 10.52 subheads, 1.56, 2.18, 2.59, 8.158 tables, 3.54, 3.55, 3.56, 3.59 text references to illustrations and tables, 3.50 titles and offices (see under titles and offices of people) titles of works (see under titles of works) unusual, 8.4, 8.69, 8.154 URLs, DOis, and such in text, 14.17 vessels and vehicles, 8.116-17 words derived from proper names, 8.1, 8.60-62, 8.96-97 words for Platonic ideas (e.g., Truth), 8.94 See also all caps; capital letters; headline-
capitalization (continued) style capitalization; historical and cultural terminology; lowercase let ters; names, personal; names, proper; sentence-style capitalization capital letters for compass points in addresses, 10.34 drop caps, 13.37, p. 979 full-size: for emphasis, 7.52; preferred to small caps, 9.34, 10.8, 10.38; small caps compared to, 7.52 for generations, 8.42 initial, decorative, 13.37 for keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.78 for musical elements, 7.72-74 plurals of, 7.15, 7.65 for scholastic letter grades, 7.65 standing for names, 7.66 used as words, 7.15 See also caps and small caps format; letters (alphabet); small caps caps, p. 976. See also capital letters caps and small caps format in indexes, 16.140, 16.145 in legal-style citations, 14.272 for mathematical copy, 12.56 for speakers' names in drama, 13.46 captions, 3.21-28 accessibility issues, 3.28 capitalization, 3.21, 3.22 for charts, 3.44, fig. 3.9 credit lines in (see illustration credits and credit lines) defined, 3.7, 3.21 electronic supplementary data noted in, 3.26 examples of, 3.21-27, fig. 3.1, figs. 3.4-9 for illustrations with parts, 3.12, fig. 3.4, figs. 3.6-7 journal cover, inside, 1.84 in lists of illustrations, 1.39, 3.40, fig. 1.7 locators for parts of illustration in (e.g., above, left) , 3.24 manuscript and editorial concerns: cross-checking, 2.32; editing, 2.65; guidelines for authors, 2.3, 2.26, 2.37; proofreading, 2.115; separate file for, 2.26, 2.37, 3.18; submission of, 2.3; working numbers, 2.28, 3.13 for maps, 8.199
INDEX
captions (continued) for musical examples, fig. 3.5 omission of, fig. 3.3 original dimensions noted in, 3.27 proofreading of, 2.113 punctuation in, 3.21, 3.23, 3.24, 6.14 separating illustration number from, 3.23, 6.120 syntax of, 3.21 titles of works in, 3.21, 3.22 carets, 2.94, 2.125, 2.132 cartoons, 8.200 cascading style sheets (CSS), p. 978 case binding, p. 976-77 case fractions (text-sized with horizontal bar), 12.45 case of nouns and pronouns, 5.17-22 and conjunctions, 5.196 defined, 5.9, 5.17 errors in, 5.3 7 genitive, overview, 5.20 joint and separate genitives, 5.22 nominative (subjective), overview, 5.18 nouns, generally, 5.9 objective (accusative), overview, 5.19 ofgenitive, 5.21, 5.191 personal pronouns, 5.44-46 pronouns, generally, 5.35 pronouns, rules for, 5.41 pronouns in apposition, 5.36 relative pronouns, 5.57 word order in place of, 5.221 See also genitive case; nominative (sub jective) case; objec!tive (accusative) case case studies, 13.49 castoff, p. 977 catachresis, 5.249 Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) data, 1.20, 1.34, 1.75, fig. 1.1 catalogs archival (UK), 14.297, 14.303 astronomical, 8.139 exhibitions, 8.201, 14.236 musical, 8.196 See also library catalogs cc, 10.69 CCC (Copyright Clearance Center), 1.79, 1.103, 4.97 CD-ROMs, source citations for, 14.163 CE, BCE, AD, and such, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38
celestial bodies, 8.138-42, 10.61 cells. See tables centuries first vs. later decades of, 9.33 hyphenation of, 7.87, 7.89 (sec. 3) numerical designations for, 8.71 plurals for, 7.8 spelled out and lowercased, 7.89 (sec. 3), 9.32 See also historical and cultural termi nology cf. ("compare"), 10.42, 14.42 changes from earlier practice. See depar tures from earlier practice chapter display, 1.8, 1.12, 1.16, 1.37, 1.46, 1.49-50, 2.32, 13.37 chapter numbers as alternative to page numbers in electronic publications, 14.160, 14.161 arabic numerals for, 8.180, 9.26, 14.147 in chapter display, 1.49 chap. with, 14.150 for conclusions, 1.53 consecutive, across parts of book, 1.48 cross-references to, 2.35 in double and multiple numeration, 1.57, 2.28, 3.11, 3.50 in endnote subheads, 1.62, 14.46 generic markup of, 2.81 in index locators for endnotes, 16.111 proofreading of, 2.113 in running heads, 1.12, 1.15, 14.47 in source citations, 14.106, 14.153 chapters abbreviation of term, 10.42, 14.150 abstracts for, 1.76, 2.25 appendixes at end of, 1.59 bibliographies or reference lists for each, 1.63, 14.62, 15.10 books offered as individual, 1.59, 1.62, 1.63, 14.62 conclusions as, 1.53 cross-references to, 2.35, 8.180 decorative initials for first word, 13.37 division into, 1.49 endnotes after each, 1.62, 14.43, 14.46, fig. 14.3 multiple authors of, 1.50 openers of (chapter display), 1.8, 1.12, 1.16, 1.37, 1.46, 1.49-50, 2.32, 13.37 pagination of, 1.8, 1.46, 1.49
INDEX
chapters (continued) publishing agreements for, 4.58, fig. 4.2 running heads for, 1.12, 1.15, 14.47 source citations for: chapter in multivolume work, 14.120; chapter in single-author book, 14.106; chapters in multiauthor volumes, 14.107-8, 15.42; DOls for, 14.161; examples of, 14.23, 15.9; note referring to entire, 1.49, 2.22, 14.27; previously published, 14.54, 14.181; shortened citations, 14.108; titles, 14.23, 14.86, 14.106-7, 14.272, 15.9
unnumbered source notes for, 1.49, 1.50, 14.27, 14.54
as works made for hire, 4.58 See also chapter numbers; chapter titles chapter titles conclusions, 1.53 editing of, 2.58 in endnote subheads, 1.62, 14.46 generic markup of, 2.80, 2.81 introductions, 1.47 in legal-style citations, 14.272 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.17 no punctuation following, 6.14 and note reference numbers, 1.49, 2.22, 14.27
proofreading of, 2.134 quotation marks for, 8.163, 14.23, 14.86, 14.106-7, 15.9
in running heads, 1.12, 2.76 in table of contents, 1.38, 2.17, 2.32, 2.58, fig. 1.5
wording, 1.49, 1.55 character count, p. 977 character encoding, p. 977 character-level formatting, 2.73, 2.81, 2.82, 2.82nl, 7.49
character references, p. 977 characters, p. 977 characters, fictional, 5.129, 8.35. See also dialogue; literary works characters, special. See special characters character sets. See fonts and typefaces; special characters charts and graphs, 3.41-46 as alternative to tables, 3.48 appropriate use and definition of, 3.41 axes and curves in, 3.43, 3.52, fig. 3.8 consistency in, 2.65, 3.42
charts and graphs (continued) credit line for commissioned, 3.33 electronic files, preparation of, 3.43 examples of, figs. 3.8-10 fair use of, 4.91 genealogical and pedigree, 3.46, fig. 3.10 indexing of, 16.116 labels on, 3.44, 3.45 as line art, 3.4, 3.41 symbols or patterns used in, 3.25, figs. 3.8-9
titles of, 3.44 See also illustrations; tables chemical terminology, 8.147-52 abbreviations, 10.63 laws and theories, 8.148 mass number, 8.150 metric units, 8.152 names and symbols, 7.89 (sec. 1), 8.149, 10.63
resources on, 8.147, 10.63 Chinese language, 11.82-85, 11.88-90 characters for, 11.90 names, 8.15, 11.83, 11.85, 11.88, 16.77 romanization systems (Pinyin, WadeGiles), 11.82-85, 16.77 titles of works, 11.89 chronological order for bibliographies and reference lists, 2.63, 14.71, 15.18, 15.19
for index subentries, 16.70, 16.133 for letters and diaries, 1.52 chronologies, 1.4, 1.60, fig. 1.9 chronology systems, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 Church, church, 8.98, 8.101. See also religions and religious concerns CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.20, 1.34, 1.75, fig. 1.1 circa, ca, 7.55, 10.42
citation management software, 14.5, 14.12 cited-by statistics, 1.120 cities and towns administrative agencies and depart ments, 8.63 judicial bodies, 8.64
INDEX
cities and towns (continued) laws and ordinances, 14.288, 14.300 legislative bodies, 8.62 names: in addresses, punctuation of, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29; alphabetiz ing, 16.90-93; areas within, 8.49; capitalization, 5.69, 8.45, 8.53; English forms of non-English cities, 14.131; with Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 10.30, 11.26, 16.90, 16.93; as locations of manuscript collections, 14.227; in newspaper titles, 14.193, 14.194, 16.48; in place of publication, 14.129; on title page, 1.19 numbered divisions of, 9.46 See also civil and civic concerns; govern mental entities; place of publication civil and civic concerns awards and honors, 8.31, 8.83 committee minutes and such, 14.229 holidays, 8.89 titles and offices, 8.19, 8.22, 10.13, 10.14, 14.284 See also cities and towns; governmental
entities; public places and structures class, socioeconomic, 8.40. See also groups of people classical Greek and Latin works, 14.242-51 artworks, 8.198 capitalization, 11.54, 14.247 resources on, 14.244 source citations, 14.242-52; abbrevia tions, 14.244-47, 14.250; authors' names, 14.244, 14.245; collections of inscriptions, 14.249; editions, 14.246, 14.248, 14.251; editors' names, 14.260, 14.263-65; fragments of texts, 14.250; identifying numbers or letters, 14.243, 14.245, 14.249; punctuation in, 14.245, 14.250; superscripts in, 14.248; text citations, 14.242; titles, 14.245, 14.247, 14.248; translators' names, 14.246 See also Greek language; Latin language classic English works, 1.47, 14.162, 14.25354, 14.267-68
restrictive and nonrestrictive, 5.23, 6.27, 6.28 See also conjunctions; phrases cleft sentences, 5.246-48 clerical titles, 8.26, 8.33, 10.18, 16.39. See also religions and religious concerns climate, named events of, 8.77 closed (solid) compounds, 7.82, 7.83, 7.88. See also compound terms close-up mark, 2.125, 11.130, fig. 2.6 clothbound, p. 977 CMYK mode, 3.3, p. 977 co, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) Code ofFederal Regulations, 14.289 codes and coding. See markup for manu-
script editing; markup languages, formal coinage of words, 7.14. See also words derived from proper names collected works. See compilations of previ ously published material; derivative works; multiauthor volumes collected works of author, 8.178 collections. See legal and public documents; manuscript collections; unpublished and informally published materials collections of classical inscriptions, 14.249 collective nouns, 5.5, 5.7, 5.15, 5.138 collective works, 4.8, 4.10, 4.58, fig. 4.2. See also multiauthor volumes colloquial speech adverb suffixes in, 5.158 conjunctions in, 5.196 contractions in, 7.30 flat adverbs in, 5.160 vs. grammar, 5.249
INDEX
colloquial speech (continued) grammatical ellipses in, 5.229 interjections as, 5.207 like in, 5.185, 5.250 singular they in, 5.48 they without antecedent in, 5.30 See also common expressions; dialect; figures of speech; maxims; slang colons, 6.61-67 and capitalization, 6.63 common misuses of, 6.67 em dashes instead of, 6.85 marking manuscript for, 2.93 marking proofs for, 2.132 other punctuation with: ellipses, 13.54; parentheses, 6.98; quotation marks, 6.10, 6.65
spacing with, 2.9, 6.62, 14.116, 14.152, 14.177
uses: captions, 3.24; with dates in titles of works, 14.93; direct address, 6.53, 6.66; double or multiple numeration, 1.57; glossaries, 1.61; indexes, 16.19, 16.20, 16.25, 16.95; introducing lists, 6.129, 6.130; non-English languages, 11.116; overview, 6.61; with page numbers for journal articles, 15.9; pathnames, 6.112; with publication details, 14.127, 14.177; with quotations or speech, 6.10, 6.63, 6.65, 13.16; ratios, 6.62, 9.58; scriptural citations, 9.26, 14.239, 14.241; tables, 3.60, 3.78; table source notes, 2.31, 3.77; between titles and subtitles, 1.19, 8.164-65, 14.89-91, 14.96, 14.151, 14.169; transcriptions of discussions or interviews, 13.48; twenty-four-hour system of time, 9.39, 9.40; between volume and page numbers, 14.23, 14.116, 14.152, 14.177, 15.23, 15.48 See also punctuation; semicolons colophons (logos), 1.19, 1.69, 1.70, p. 977 colophons (production details), 1.67, p. 977
color in charts and graphs, 3.43 continuous tone vs. halftone images, 3.3, 3.6, p. 978 in editing paper-only manuscripts, 2.91, 12.65
in electronic journals, 1.107
color (continued) in electronic supplementary data, 1.78 for ethnic groups, 8.38 hyphenation of, 7.89 in illustrations, 1.6, 2.37, 3.3, 3.15, 3.19, 3.43
for journal covers, 1.84 in line art, 3.19 names for, 7.89 (sec. 1) process printing, 8.11 for proofreading marks, 2.123 and punctuation, 6.3 for tracking changes, 2.84 color proofs, p. 977. See also prepress color separation, p. 977-78 columns avoiding multiple, 2.23 in indexes, 1.65, 16.24, 16.135, 16.138 in vertical lists, 6.130 See also magazines; newspapers; tables; tabular material combining forms, 7.82, 7.89 (secs. 2, 4) command papers (UK), 14.302 commands, 5.214. See also imperative sentences commas, 6.16-55 with abbreviations: academic and pro fessional designations, 10.21, 10.22; addresses, mailing, 10.27, 10.29; e.g. and i.e., 5.250; etc. and et al., 6.20; Inc., Ltd., and such, 6.44 ; /r., Sr. , and such, 6.43; old series and new series, 14.126, 14.184
with clauses: in compound predicates, 6.23; dependent, 6.24-27; indepen dent, 6.22-23, 6.32; relative, 6.27; restrictive and nonrestrictive, 5.23, 6.27, 6.28
em dashes instead of, 6.85 in indexes: and alphabetizing, 16.5961; cross-references, 16.19-20; generally, 16.94; inverted names (see indexing: names, personal); locators, 16.25, 16.94; titles ending with question mark or exclamation point, 16.54 marking manuscript for, 2.93, 2.94 marking proofs for, 2.132 other punctuation with: apostrophes, 6.118; brackets, 6.18; ellipses, 13.54; exclamation points, 6.125; paren-
INDEX
commas (continued) theses, 6.18, 6.98; question marks, 6.42, 6.125; quotation marks, 2.80, 6.9, 6.40 pairs of, 6.17, 6.26, 6.32 vs. parentheses, 6.95 serial (Oxford), 6.19-21, 6.23, 8.165, 14.135 in source citations: with access dates, 14.176; and other stories and such, 14.92; between authors' names, 14.76; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.245; interviews and personal communications, 15.53; legal-style citations, 14.273; maga zine article page numbers, 14.188; nonconsecutive locators, 14.148; notes, 14.19, 14.20; or with double titles, 14.91; page and issue numbers, 14.177, 15.47; periodical citations, 14.167, 14.171, 14.176; with publica tion details, 14.127-28; publishers' names, 14.134-35; text citations, 15.7, 15.9, 15.23, 15.29, 15.30, 15.44, 15.45; titles ofworks, 14.91, 14.93, 14.229; with volume numbers, 14.152 uses, other: addresses, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29; adverbial phrases, 6.31, 6.32; appositives, 5.23, 6.28, 6.41; with but, 5.250; captions, 3.24; com pound predicates, 6.23; conjunctive adverbs, 6.49, 6.57; and consecutive conjunctions, 6.26; coordinate adjec tives, 5. 91, 6.36; with coordinating conjunctions, 6.22, 6.32; dates, 5.83, 6.17, 6.38, 9.54; direct address, 6.53; editorial interpolations, 6.18; global positioning coordinates, 10.36; glossed American Sign Language, 11.133; grammatical ellipses, 6.54; homonyms, 6.55; with including, 6.50; interjections, 5.206, 6.35; introductory phrases, 6.30-31, 6.33-35, 13.14; with fr., Sr. , and such, 6.43, 16.41; lists, 6.129, 6.131, 12.19; mathematical expressions, 12.16, 12.18, 12.19, 12.28, 12.36, 12.38; with not phrases, 6.45, 6.46; numbers, 9.54-56, 9.63; parenthetical elements in sentences, 6.48, 6.51; participial
commas (continued) phrases, 6.30, 6.32; place-names, 5.69, 6.39; preceding main clause, 6.24; questions, 6.42; quotations, 6.40, 13.14; quoted titles or expres sions, 6.41; repeated adjectives, 6.37; such as, 6.50; suspended hyphens, 7.88; that is, namely, for example, and such, 6.51; the more, the less, and such, 6.47; titles of works, 6.17, 8.165, 8.167, 16.48, 16.49; with too and either, 6.52; twenty-four-hour system of time, 9.40; and which vs. that, 6.27 when to omit, 6.125 See also punctuation commercial terms and abbreviations, 10.69 common expressions, 7.60, 7.64. See also colloquial speech; figures of speech; maxims common-law copyright, 4.2, 4.15, 4.19, 4.23 common nouns (concrete, abstract, and collective), 5.5 communications. See interviews and discus sions; personal communications comp (comprehensive layout; compositor), p. 978 companies. See business and commerce; company names company names abbreviations, 8.189, 10.23-25, 14.133, 14.136 alphabetizing of, 16.89 ampersands in, 6.21, 10.24, 14.135 articles in, 8.68, 14.134, 16.88 capitalization, 8.68, 8.69 corporate features in, 14.134, 14.136 Inc., Ltd., and such with, 6.44, 6.123, 10.23, 10.24 indexing of, 16.89 non-English names, 10.23, 14.135, 14.136 omissible parts of, 14.134 possessives of, 7.17 spelled out in running text, 10.24 with unusual capitalization (e.g., eBay), 8.69 comparative adjectives, 5.85, 5.87-88, 5.201 comparative adverbs, 5.163, 5.201 comparison or degree, 5.201. See also degrees under adjectives and adverbs
INDEX
compass points and directions abbreviations, 10.34, 10.35 capitalization, 8.46, 8.47 hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 1) latitude and longitude, 10.36 competing publications, 4.52 compilations of previously published material, 2.43-47 and copyright, 2.46, 4.5 illustrations in, 2.47 notes in, 2.45 permissible changes to, 2.44, 2.61 permissions for, 4.105 source notes in, 1.50, 2.46, 14.54 as work made for hire, 4.10 See also anthologies; compilers; deriv ative works; previously published materials compilers abbreviation of term in source citations, 10.42, 14.103-4, 15.36 in addition to author, 14.104 as authors of forewords, 1.40 biographical notes on, 1.66 and copyright, 4.8 notes on changes, 2.44 permissions as responsibility of, 4.105 in place of author, 14.103, 15.36 See also compilations of previously published material; editors complex (phrasal) prepositions, 5.174 complex sentences, 5.219, 5.225 composition sign, 12.15 compositors and composition. See type setters and typesetting; typographic considerations compound adverbs, 5.161, 7.86, 7.89 compound-complex sentences, 5.220 compound predicates, 6.23 compound sentences, 5.218 compound terms abbreviated, 6.80 adjectives as, 6.80 adverbs as, 5.161, 7.86, 7.89 alphabetizing of, 16.58, 16.60, 16.72, 16.84 in ASL, 11.129 and bias-free language, 5.257 closed compounds, trend toward, 7.83 conjunctions as, 5.197
compound terms (continued) defined, 7.82 en dashes in, 6.80-81 genitives of, 5.20 hyphenation, 7.81-89; adverbs ending in -(y, 7.86, 7.89; with compound modifiers, 5.92, 5.93, 7.8, 7.85; en dash vs. hyphen, 6.80; ethnic groups and nationalities, 7.89 (sec. 2), 8.39; guide to, 7.89; headline-style titles, 8.161, 11.26; and line breaks, 2.112; personal names, 8.6; with prefixes or suffixes, 6.80, 7.40, 7.81, 8.161 names, personal, 8.6, 16.72 names, proper, 5.6, 7.85, 7.89 non-English languages: French, 11.26; German, 11.44; Greek, 11.121; Latin, 11.58; Spanish, 11.68 open, generally, 6.106, 7.82, 16.58 permanent, 7.82 person pronouns (-selfforms), 5.48, 5.51, 5.250 in phrasal adjectives, 5.79, 5.92, 5.93, 7.85, 7.89 (secs. 2, 3) plurals of, 7.7 possessives of, 7.24 prepositional phrases with, 5.179 prepositions as, 5.173 pronoun case errors in, 5.3 7 pronouns, relative, 5.65 readability of, 7.84 slashes with, 6.106 suspended (second part omitted), 7.88, 7.89 (sec. 1) temporary, 7.82 types of, 7.82, 7.83 and word division, 2.112, 7.40, 7.42, 11.44 See also hyphens and hyphenation; prefixes; suffixes; word division computer software. See software computer terminology, 7.76-80 abbreviations in, 7.77, 7.80, 9.11, 10.39, 10.40, 10.49 application-specific variations in, 7.76 apps, devices, and operating systems, 7.78, 8.155 binary systems, 9.11 capitalization, 7.77, 7.79, 7.80, 8.155 fonts for, 7.79 resources for, 7.76
INDEX
computer-to-plate (CTP) technology, p . 978 concert reviews, 14.201, 14.203 conclusions, 1.4, 1.48, 1.53, 1.76 concordances, 16.5 concrete nouns, 5.5, 5.7 conditional clauses (protases), 5.228 conferences announcements of, 1.86, 1.89, 1.99 names of, 8.70 papers and posters presented at, 14.217 proceedings of, 1.18, 1.39, 4.8, 4.59, 14.217 See also speeches; unpublished and informally published materials; working papers conflicts ofintere st, 1.95 Congress, US. See US Congress Congressional Globe, 14.287 Congressional Record, 14.286 conjugation. See verbs conjunctions, 5.196-205 adverbial, 5.202 as and as if, 5.185 beginning a sentence with, 5.203, 5.204, 5.250 compound predicates joined by, 6.23 consecutive, 6.26 defined, 5.196 in imperative sentences, 6.22 independent clauses with, 6.22, 6.32, 6.59 in index subentries, 16.68 as interjections, 5.208 vs. prepositions, 5.184 punctuation with, 6.19, 6.22, 6.23, 6.26, 6.32, 6.59 and quotations in text, 6.40 than as, 5.183 types: coordinating, 5.198, 5.230, 6.22, 6.26, 6.32, 8.159; correlative, 5.198, 5.199, 5.230, 5.244, 5.250; simple vs. compound, 5.197; subordinating, 5.175, 5.200-201, 5.225, 6.24, 6.26 and verb number, 5.205 in vertical lists, 6.131 See also and; but; or conjunctive adverbs (however, therefore, and such), 5.204, 6.49, 6.57 connecting Oinking) verbs, 5.45, 5.82, 5.93, 5.101, 5.154, 5.170, 6.30 connectives, misleading, 5.142
constitutions and amendments, 8.80, 9.28, 14.272, 14.280 contact clauses, 5.226 content proof, 2.140 continents, 8.45, 8.53 continued lines in indexes, 16.139 in tables, 3.86-87, fig. 3.25 continuous (imperfect, progressive) tenses, 5.119, 5.128, 5.135 continuous publishing model, 1.82, 1.113, 14.174 continuous-tone artwork, 3.3, p. 978 contractions apostrophes in, 5.50, 6.116, 7.30 defined, 5.105, 10.2 in non-English languages, 11.40, 11.48 non-US-style, 10.4, 10.23 with not, 5.231 vs. possessives, 5.50 in verb phrases, 5.104 contract proof, p. 978 contracts, private, 14.219 contracts, publication. See publishing agreements contributed volumes. See collective works; multiauthor volumes contributors to multiauthor volumes and journals biographical notes, 1.100, 14.55 communications with, 2.68 lists of: vs. biographical notes, 14.55; cross-checking, 2.32; format and placement of, 1.4, 1.50, 1.64, 1.100, fig. 1.10; volume editor's responsibil ity for, 2.41 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.36 other (ghostwriters, authors offore words, etc.), 14.105 publishing agreements for, 2.42, 4.5557, 4.58, 4.59, fig. 4.1 See also authors; authors' names; journal articles; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; multiauthor volumes controlled vocabularies, 1.93 conversation. See dialogue; direct address; speech coordinate adjectives, 5.91, 6.36 coordinate clauses, 5.218, 5.220 coordinated universal time (UTC), 10.41
INDEX
coordinate nouns, 5.75 coordinating conjunctions, 5.198, 5.230, 6.22, 6.26, 6.32, 8.159 coordination, 5.242 copula Oinking) verbs, 5.45, 5.82, 5.93, 5.101, 5.154, 5.170, 6.30 copy, types of, 2.110 copyediting. See manuscript editing; manu script editors copyright, 4.1-38 accuracy and candor in process, 4.49 alternatives to, 4.62 assignment or licensing of, 4.34-38 authorship rights, 4.6, 4.13-18 authorship varieties, 4.7-12; collective works, 4.8; individual and joint authors, 4.7, 4.12; "life plus seventy" rule, 4.23, 4.25, 4.26; original owner, 1.22, 1.24, 4.6, 4.11, 4.42; works made for hire, 4.9-12, 4.24, 4.38 benefits ofregistering, 4.50 changes in, 1.24 date of, 1.22, 1.23, 1.24, 14.142 deposit requirements, 4.47 and derivative works, 4.14, 4.31, 4.45 of dissertations and theses, 4.60 dual system of, 4.2, 4.19, 4.23 duration: jointly authored works, 4.23; lengthened in 1978, 4.20; overview, table 4.1; for works created after 1977, 4.23-25, 4.98; for works created before 1978, 4.19, 4.26-30, 4.98 electronic publications, 4.13, 4.47, 4.6366, 14.14 extensive paraphrasing under, 4.89 importance of, 4.1 law relevant to, 4.2, 4.10, 4.19, 4.26 material covered by, 4.3, 4.5 of material derived from public-domain works, 4.22 for new editions, 4.28 ofnon-US publications, 4.29-30, 4.47 of online publications, 4.13, 4.47, 14.14, 14.267 and open-access publishing models, 4.61 and photocopying, 4.17, 4.35, 4.55, 4.64, 4.66 preregistration, 4.50 of previously published materials, 2.46, 4.5
copyright (continued) and public display, 4.13, 4.14, 4.34 publisher's responsibilities for, 4.32 "reasonable effort" to correct mistakes, 4.45 registration of, 4.4, 4.19, 4.46, 4.48-50 renewal of, 1.24, 4.19, 4.27, 4.31-33, 4.41, 14.143 subdivision of, 4.34 subsidiary rights, 4.64-69; author's electronic use of own works, 4.66; author's retention of, 4.18; vs. basic rights, 4.17; categories of, 4.64; dis tribution outside the US, 4.34, 4.64, 4.76; economic considerations, 4.65, 4.66, 4.69; electronic rights, 4.63, 4.64, 4.65; granting permissions for, 4.70, 4.71; moral, 4.15; non-US pub lications, 4.29-30; and public-access policies, 4.68; translation rights, 4.34, 4.64; university licenses, 4.67 symbol for, 1.22, 4.41, 10.43 termination of transfers under, 4.38 word forms for, 5.250 works ineligible for, 4.11 See also copyright notice; copyright page, contents of; fair-use doctrine; illustration credits and credit lines; intellectual property rights; licenses for copyrighted works; permissions; publishing agreements Copyright Act (1976) (and amendments), 1.20, 4.2, 4.20, 4.84 Copyright Clearance Center (CCC), 1.79, 1.103, 4.97 copyright lines, journals, 1.79, 1.84, 1.86, 1.95, 1.103, 2.134 copyright management information, 4.15 copyright notice, 4.39-46 components, 1.22, 4.41-46, figs. 1.1-2 as copyright management information, 4.15 different regimes of, 4.2, 4.40 mistakes in, 4.39, 4.46 necessity for, 4.27 in notes, unnumbered, 14.54 old rules removed, 4.4, 4.39 placement of, 1.20, 1.22, 4.43, figs. 1.1-4 renewal, 1.24 types of material: derivative works, 4.45; electronic publications, 1.122;
INDEX
copyright notice (continued) government-produced works, 4.44; journals, 1.79, 1.84, 1.86, 1.95, 1.103, 2.109, 2.134, 4.43 copyright page, contents of acknowledgments, 1.20, 1.30, 1.31, figs. 1.3-4 author's previous publications, 1.18 changes and renewals, 1.24 CIP data, 1.20, 1.34, fig. 1.1 copyright notice, 1.20, 1.22, 4.43, figs. 1.1-4 country of printing, 1.20, 1.27 DOis, 1.20, 1.28, 1.33, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3-4 editions, 1.20, 1.23, 1.25, 1.26, 14.113, fig. 1.2 examples, figs. 1.1-4 grant information, 1.31 illustration credits, 1.30, 1.73, 3.30, 4.78 impression line, 1.20, 1.28, figs. 1.1-4 ISBN, 1.20, 1.32, fig. 1.1 pagination omitted from, 1.7 paper durability statement, 1.20, 1.35, fig. 1.1 permissions, 1.20, 1.30, 4.78, fig. 1.4 place of publication, 14.129 proofreading of, 2.134 publication date, 1.22, 1.25, 14.142 publisher's address, 1.20, 1.21 publisher's responsibility for, 2.3, 2.57 publishing history, 1.25 running heads omitted from, 1.11 translation information, 1.29, fig. 1.3 See also copyright notice corporations. See business and commerce; organization names correlative conjunctions, 5.198-99, 5.230, 5.244, 5.250. See also either . . . or; neither
• . .
nor; not only . . . but also
correspondence. See letters could, can, 5.146, 5.250 counter, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) counties, judicial bodies of, 8.64 countries adjectives from names, 5.69, 8.45 capitalization, 11.61 in newspaper titles, 14.193 in place of publication, 14.130 regions of, 8.47, 8.54 when to abbreviate names, 10.31, 10.32, 14.290
countries (continued) See also cities and towns; governmental entities; states (US); and specific countries
courses of study, 8.86 courtesy, in illustration credit lines, 3.34, 4.102 courts, 14.276-79 basic elements in source citations, 14.276 Canadian, 14.294 international, 14.304 names and terms, treatment in text, 8.64 United Kingdom, 14.298 US federal, 14.278 US state and local, 14.279 US Supreme Court, 4.93, 14.277 See also legal and public documents; legal-style citations cover image, 1.75, 1.84 covers of journals and paperback books artwork, 1.30, 1.73, 4.77, 4.90, 4.100, 4.101 author's previous publications, 1.18 biographical notes, 1.66, 1 �70, 1.71 colophons (logos), 1.69, 1.70 country of printing, 1.27 defined, p. 978 design of, 1.115 DOis, 1.33 endpapers, 1.72 and front matter, 1.85 gatefolds (French flaps), 1.70 as historical context, 1.105 illustration credit lines, 1.73 image of, 1.75, 1.84 ISBNs and bar codes, 1.32, 1.69, 1.74, 1.75, 1.84 metadata on, 1.75 promotional copy on, 1.70 proofreading of, 2.103, 2.108, 2.109, 2.134 table of contents, 1.87, 2.109 See also hardcover books: jackets Creative Commons (CC) licenses, 3.32, 3.34, 4.52, 4.60, 4.62 credits and credit lines. See illustration credits and credit lines criminal cases. See legal cases Croatian language, 11.70 cropping, 3.19, p. 978
INDEX
cross, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3)
CrossMark, 1.112 Crossref (DOI registration agency), 1.33, 1.79, 1.112, 14.8 cross-references, in indexes, 16.15-23 accuracy, 16.130 alphabetizing in, 16.17, 16.20 and used with generic, 16.23 blind, 16.16 capitalization of, 16.17, 16.18, 16.20 checking and editing, 16.126, 16.130, 16.133 correspondence with entry wording, 16.21 dedicated indexing software for, 16.104 vs. double posting, 16.16 following subentries, 16.10, 16.18, 16.20, 16.26 generally, 16.15 generic, 16.23 in indented style, 16.20, 16.26, 16.28 italics in, 16.15, 16.20, 16.22, 16.23 for organization names, 16.46, 16.89 overuse of, 16.15 for personal names: Arabic names, 16.75; Chinese names, 16.77; as corporate names, 16.89; married women's, 16.36; with numbers, 9.42; with particles, 16.71; Portuguese and Spanish names, 16.83, 16.84; saints, 16.42; titled persons, 16.38; Vietnam ese, 16.86 placement and punctuation, 16.17-20, 16.23, 16.26, 16.95-97 for place-names, 16.93 in run-in style, 16.20, 16.25, 16.96 "see also" and "see also under," 16.20, 16.26, 16.96 "see" and "see under," 16.16-19, 16.96 shortened, 16.21 to subentries, 16.19, 16.20 and term choice, 16.29, 16.30, 16.126 typing and modifying, 16.122 cross-references, in source citations alternative real names, 14.82 authors preferring initials, 14.74 legal-style citations, 14.272 newspapers, 14.196 pseudonyms, 14.81 several chapters from same book, 15.42 in text citations, 15.30
cross-references, in text alterations in, 2.136 cf and see, 14.42 checking and editing, 2.32, 2.35, 2.60 electronic publications, 1.120, 1.121, 2.35 for illustrations, 2.28 mathematical copy, 12.24, 12.25 mathematical enunciations, 12.56 notes and citations, 14.28, 14.31 in previously published materials, 2.44 proofreading, 2.134 specific page numbers, 2.35, 2.60 to whole chapters, 2.35, 8.180 See also hyperlinks CSS (cascading style sheets), p. 978 cultivated varieties (cultivars), 8.130 cultural movements and styles descriptive designations, 8.72 period names, 8.73, 8.74 treatment in text, 8.60, 8.61, 8.79, 11.88 See also historical and cultural terminology curly braces in mathematical expressions. See delimiters currency, 9.20-25 dates with, 9.25 K abbreviation in, 9.24 large amounts of, 9.24 non-US, 9.21-23, 9.25 resources on, 9.21 words vs. symbols and numerals for, 9.20 curves, in graphs, 3.43 cut-in heads (tables), 3.53, 3.58, fig. 3.14 cyan, p. 978 cyber, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) Cyrillic alphabet and capitalization, 11.99 languages using, 11.70 titles of works, 11.100 transliteration, 11.98, table 11.3 and word division, 11.104-8 See also Russian language Czech language, 11.70 da (Portuguese particle), 8.8 daggers and double daggers (symbols), 3.79, 14.25, 14.49 dangling terms gerunds, 5.116 infinitives, 5.109 participles, 5.115
I N D EX
Danish language, 11.70 DAs (designer's alterations), 2.135, p. 978 dashes length of, compared, 6.75 marking manuscript for, 2.96 vs. parentheses, 6.95 preceding epigraph source, 1.37 2-em dashes, 2.96, 6.75, 6.93, 7.66, 13.59 typing, in manuscript preparation, 2.14 See also em dashes; en dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; punctuation; 3-em dashes data, as singular or plural, 5.14, 5.250 databases accession numbers for, 2.34, 14.215, 14.257, 14.270 bibliographic, 14.67 and copyright issues, 4.55, 4.56 dissertations and theses in, 4.60 and electronic rights, 4.65 hyperlinks to, 1.86, 1.96, 1.109 institutional repositories, 4.60, 4.66, 4.67, 14.215 legal, 14.270, 14.276, 14.300 metadata in, 1.75, 1.92, 1.121 in place ofindex, 1.110, 1.111 for proofreading, 2.140 publisher's rights database, 4.71 search for copyright owner via, 4.82 in source citations: dissertations and theses, 14.215; formatting hiding publications from, 15.17; legal-style citations, 14.270, 14.276; magazine articles, 14.189; names vs. URLs or DOis for, 14.9, 14.11, 14.161, 14.164, 14.175; newspaper articles, 14.191; permalinks for, 14.9; scientific, 14.257; shortened citations, 14.276 data cells. See tables data falsification, 1.91 data sets, as electronic supplementary data, 1.78 date of download. See access dates date of publication. See publication date dates abbreviations: months, 10.39, 14.171, 14.224, 15.15; years, 9.30, 9.64 adjectival use of, 5.83 alphabetizing of, 16.65 avoiding ambiguity in, 6.108, 9.35
dates (continued) avoiding ofin, 5.250 centuries (see centuries) of copyright, 1.22, 1.23, 1.24, 14.142 currency with, 9.25 decades, 9.33 in diaries, 1.52 editorial doubt, 6.68 fiscal year (FY), 9.64 in foreword, 1.40 formats for: all-numeral styles, 6.108, 9.35, 9.36; day-month-year, 6.38, 6.108, 9.35, 14.224, fig. 1.9; month day-year, 6.38, 6.108, 9.35, 14.224; year-month-day (ISO), 6.108, 9.36, 9.40 holidays, 8.89 inclusive, 6.78-79, 9.34, 9.60, 9.64, 14.117, 14.144, 14.171 incomplete, 6.79 in legal-style citations: acts and treaties, 14.290; bills and resolutions, 14.283; cases and court decisions, 14.276, 14.279, 14.294, 14.298; hearings, 14.284; international entities, 14.305; legislation, 14.288, 14.295, 14.300; legislative debates and hearings, 14.285-87, 14.301 months (see months) numbers for (see under numbers) in prefaces, 1.41 punctuation: commas, 5.83, 6.17, 6.38, 9.54; en dashes, 6.78-79, 14.117, 14.144, 14.171, 15.41; hyphens, 6.108, 9.36; slashes, 6.107, 6.108, 6.113 in source citations: access dates, 14.12, 14.176, 14.207, 14.233, 14.237, 14.257, 15.50; interviews, 14.211, 15.53; manuscript collections, 14.224; multimedia content (recording or performance date), 14.261, 14.263; patents, 14.258; unpublished mate rials, 14.215-17, 15.53 (see also in legal-style citations ab011e) in titles of works, 14. 93 unspecified date of death, 6.79 work period known (ft.) , 10.42 years (see years) See also periods of time; publication date; time designations
INDEX
day-month-year date format, 6.38, 6.108, 9.35, 14.224, fig. 1.9 days of the week, 8.88, 10.40. See also dates; time designations de, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) de, d', de la, du, 8.7, 8.9, 16.84 dead (foul) copy or proofs, 2.105, 2.110 deadlines indexing, 2.2, 16.4, 16.101 proofreading, 2.102 publication schedule, 2.2, figs. 2.1-2 Deaf, deaf, 8.43 debates, source citations for, 14.286-87, 14.301 decades, 9.33 decimal points in celestial coordinates, 10.61 dex (decimal exponent), 9.12 vs. double and multiple numeration, 1.57nl in global positioning coordinates, 10.36 with millions, billions, and such, 9.8, 9.24 in monetary amounts, 9.20, 9.23 in non-US style, 9.55 in SI style, 9.55, 9.56 in tables, alignment of, 3.72, 3.86, figs. 3.14-15, fig. 3.20 and use of zero, 9.19 See also fractions; periods (punctuation) decked heads (spanner heads), 3.53, 3.57, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.16 declarative sentences (statements), 5.211, 5.246, 6.12, 6.68 dedications format and placement of, 1.4, 1.7, 1.36 omitted in indexing, 16.109 running heads omitted from page, 1.11 submission of, 2.3 defamation, 4.70 defective words, 5.146 definite articles. See articles (definite and indefinite) definitions, in text highlighted in index, 16.143 mathematical, 12.25, 12.56 numbering of, 12.25, 12.56 punctuation of, 7.58 See also glossaries
degrees (academic). See academic con cerns: degrees and affiliations degrees (measurement), abbreviations for, 10.49, 10.52, 10.58. See also International System of Units; metric system; units of measurement degrees (positive, comparative, super lative). See under adjectives and adverbs degree symbol, 9.16, 10.36, 10.49, 10.58, 10.61 deictic (demonstrative) pronouns, 5.52 deities, 8.91, 8.92. See also religions and religious concerns; religious works deletions marking manuscript for, 2.94, 2.95, 2.124, fig. 2.6 marking proofs for, 2.124 stetting or reversal of, 2.130 whiz-deletions, 5.226, 5.247 delimiters, 12.26-35 alternative cases, 12.35 binomial coefficients, 12.32 common, 12.26 functional notation, 12.27 functions enclosed by, 12.17 inner product denoted by, 12.31 intervals, 12.30 for radicals in text, 12.44 rewriting fractions using exponents, 12.49 set notation, 12.28-29 vertical bars, 12.26, 12.28, 12.33-34 demonstrative (deictic) pronouns, 5.52 denominal verbs, 5.25 departments administrative type, 8.63 capitalization, 14.190 in magazines, 8.177, 14.190 . See also academic concerns: institutions and departments departures from earlier practice biographical notes placement, 1.66 commas with etc. and et aL, 6.20 commas with questions in sentences, 6.42 double titles connected by or, 8.167, 14.91 email not hyphenated, 7.89 (sec. 3) short form vs. ibid., 13.66, 14.34
INDEX
departures from earlier practice (continued) titles of websites, 8.191, 14.206 US as noun, 10.32 dependent (subordinate) clauses commas with, 6.24-27 in complex sentences, 5.219 in compound-complex sentences, 5.220 conditional (protases), 5.228 defined, 5.225 with different, 5.195 em dashes with, 6.89 parallel structure in, 5.242 quotations as, 13.14 relative, 3.54, 5.56, 5.60, 5.225, 5.226, 5.227, 6.27
remote, 5.60 subordinating conjunctions with, 5.200201, 5.225, 6.24, 6.26 See also relative pronouns
derivative works and copyright issues, 4.14, 4.31, 4.45 and Creative Commons licenses, 4.62 and enhanced electronic rights, 4.64 license to make, 4.34 public-domain work in, 4.22 See also compilations of previously pub lished material; previously published materials descenders, p. 978 describing words. See adjectives design book, 1.30, 2.73 and footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.44 of journals, 1.84, 1.115' of tables, 3.86 templates for, 2.2 testing, 2.139 designer's alterations (DAs), 2.135, p. 978 design mockups (wire frames), 2.139 determinants, 12.51 determiners, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7. See also articles (definite and indefinite) developmental editing, 2.48, 2.50 devices. See file formats and devices dex (decimal exponent), 9.12 diacritical marks. See special characters diaeresis (Greek), 11.110, 11.113
diagrams genealogical, 3.46, fig. 3.10 text references and callouts for, 2.30
diagrams (continued) wording of, 2.65 See also charts and graphs; illustrations dialect, 5.25, 5.185, 5.236, 10.42. See also colloquial speech dialogue capitalization in, 7.52, 13.43 direct discourse, 13.39, 13.44 in drama, 13.8, 13.46-47 and fair-use doctrine, 4.87 faltering or interrupted, 6.87, 6.89, 13.41, 13.50, 13.58
in field notes, 13.49 hanging (flush-and-hang) indentation in, 13.46
indirect discourse, 13.45 interjections in, 5.207 in interviews and discussions, 13.48 multiple paragraphs in, 13.32, 13.39 in non-English materials: French, 11.31; Italian, 11.47; Russian, 11.101; Span ish, 11.64 numerals in, 13.44 permissible changes to, 13.8 punctuation: colon preceding, 6.63, 6.65; ellipses, 13.41; em dashes, 6.91, 11.11, 11.19, 13.41-42; quotation marks, 13.32, 13.39-45 single-word speech, 13.40 titles and offices of people in, 8.20 unspoken discourse, 13.43 See also direct address; quotations; speech diaries, 1.52. See also letters (correspon dence); manuscript collections dictionaries for abbreviations, 10.1, 10.3, 10.6, 10.23, 10.31, 14.244
alphabetizing in, 16.58 alphabet tables in, 11.76, 11.91 biographical, 8.5, 16.32, 16.71, 16.84 contractions in, 7.30 electronic versions, 1.118, 1.120, 1.121, 14.233
for forms of address, 8.33 for generation terms, 8.42 for geographical terminology, 8.47, 16.32 HTML format for, 1.118 for hyphenation of compound terms, 7.81, 7.82, 7.89
INDEX
dictionaries (continued) for indexing of proper names, 16.32 interjections in, 7.31 for irregular adjectives, 5.87 and language settings, 2.80 legal, 8.82 matter not found in, 7.4 music, 7.70, 8.193 for named natural phenomena, 8.77 for names ofletters, 7.68 for non-English words and phrases, 7.53, 7.54, 11.3, 11.75 organizing principle of, 1.123 for personal names, 8.3, 8.5, 8.6, 16.71, 16.84 for place-names, 8.44 for plant and animal names, 8.119, 8.128, 8.129 for plural forms, 5.13, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.9, 7.10, 7.14 for problematic words, 5.250 for pronounced h, 7.32 recommended, 2.54, 2.112, 5.250, 7.1, 7.2 running heads in, 1.13 source citations for, 14.232-33 for special characters, 11.76 for spelling, generally, 7.1 for technical abbreviations, 10.49 for trademarks, 8.153 for transliteration, 11.74, 11.83, 11.86, 11.91, 11.98 for word division, 7.36, 7.37, 7.38, 7.41, 7.42 for words derived from proper names, 8.60, 8.61 See also reference works die copy, 1.69, 2.108 Digital Library Federation, 1.114 Digital Object Identifiers. See DOis digital printing, 1.28, p. 978 digital proofs, p. 978 digital rights, 4.63, 4.64, 4.65 digital rights management (DRM), 4.65, p. 978-79 dimensions, 3.27 diphthongs capitalization, 11.70 never divided, 7.39, 11.33, 11.42, 11.50, 11.66, 11.118 non-English languages: Dutch, 11.70;
diphthongs (continued) French, 11.33; German, 11.42; Greek, 11.118; Italian, 11.50; Latin, 11.55; Old and Middle English, 11.124; Russian, 11.108; Spanish, 11.66 Dirac bracket notation, 12.55 direct address in imperative mood, 5.122 punctuation, 6.53, 6.66 titles and offices ofpeople in, 8.20, 8.32, 10.16, 10.17 See also dialogue; quotations; speech directional ("smart") quotation marks and apostrophes, 2.85, 6.115, 13.7 directions. See compass points and directions directives. See imperative sentences directors' names, 14.203 direct quotations. See block quotations; quotations; run-in quotations disabilities, people with. See accessibility disciplines and subjects, academic, 7.2, 8.30, 8.85, 8.86. See also academic concerns; scholarly works, generally discographies, 1.63, 14.262, 14.263, 15.57, fig. 14.12 discussions. See dialogue; direct address; interviews and discussions; personal communications; speech; transcrip tions diseases, infections, procedures, and such, 8.144, 8.145 display (mathematical expressions). See under mathematical expressions display pages, 1.7, 1.11, 1.12, 1.16 display type, p. 978 dissertations and theses copyright for, 4.60 institutional repositories, 4.60, 4.66, 4.67, 14.215 microform editions, 14.115 source citations for, 14.215 titles of, in text, 8.188 distance, 7.89 (sec. 1), 10.49. See also metric system; physical quantities; units of measurement distribution copyright owner's right of, 4.13 license for, 4.34 publishing agreements on, 4.51
INDEX
distribution (continued) source citations for, 14.141 subsidiary rights to, 4.34, 4.64, 4.76 distributive pronouns, 5.67 ditto marks, 3.62, 10.42 division of words. See word division division sign, 12.15 divisions of books. See books: divisions of do, 5.152, 5.215, 5.231 docket numbers, 14.276 Doctor, Dr., 10.16 documentation. See source citations document comparison software, 2.86 document-delivery companies, 4.64 document type definitions (DTDs), p. 979 DOis (Digital Object Identifiers) and continuous publishing model, 1.82 on copyright page, 1.20, 1.28, 1.33, fig. 1.1, figs. 1.3-4 defined, 1.33, 1.79, 14.8, p. 978 for journal articles, 1.79, 1.82, 1.92, 1.103 in metadata, 1.33, 1.79, 1.92 resolvers for, 14.8 resources on, 14.8n2 in source citations: book reviews, 14.202, books, 14.100, 14.161; vs. database names, 14.11, 14.161, 14.175; electronic supplementary data, 14.187; journal articles, 14.23, 14.175, 14.178-79, 14.186, 15.9; periodicals, generally, 14.164; vs. permalinks, 14.9; publications in multiple formats, 14.16; reference entries, 14.234; short forms for, 14.10 treatment in text, 14.17-18 in version tracking, 1.28 See also URLs dollars. See currency dots. See periods (punctuation) double comparative or superlative error, 5.87 double genitives (double possessives), 5.21, 5.49, 7.26 double negatives, 5.236 double or multiple numbering, 1.57, 1.57nl, 2.28, 2.29, 3.11, 3.50, 12.25 double possessives (double genitives), 5.21, 5.49, 7.26 double posting, in indexes, 16.16, 16.30 double-struck (blackboard) symbols, 12.14, 12.66
"down style" (capitalization), 8.1. See also sentence-style capitalization drama divisions of, 8.184 format of, 3.8, 13.46 quotation of, 13.47, 13.57 source citations for: classic English works, 14.253-54; frequently cited works, 13.67; reviews, 14.201, 14.203; short forms for, 14.254 titles of, 8.183 See also classical Greek and Latin works; dialogue; speech dramatic rights, 4.64 drawings. See artwork; charts and graphs; illustrations; line art DRM (digital rights management), 4.65, pp. 978-79 drop caps, 13.37, p. 979 drop folios, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.49, p. 980 drug names, 8.146 DTDs (document type definitions), p. 979 Dublin Core Metadata Initiative, 1.92 dummy auxiliaries, 5.152. See also do "dummy" folios, 1.81 dust jackets, 1.71, p. 979. See also covers of journals and paperback books; hardcover books: jackets Dutch language, 8.10, 8.45, 11.70 DVDs. See multimedia content dynasties, 9.45, 11.85 e, compound terms with (e.g., email), 7.89
(sec. 3) each, 5.33, 5.67, 5.250 each other, one another, 5.53 earth, 8.140
EAs (editor's alterations), 2.135, 2.136, 14.47, p. 979 East, eastern, 8.46, 8.47 e-books biographical notes in, 1.50 CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.34 as common publishing format, 1.2 cross-references in, 2.35 defined, p. 979 front matter in, 1.122 functional features in, 1.119 hyperlinks in, 1.118, 1.120, 1.121 impression numbering, 1.28
INDEX
e-books (continued) indexes in, 1.125, 16.7, 16.13 ISBNs for, 1.28, 1.32, fig. 1.1, fig. 1.4 markup for, 2.83 navigation in, 1.120, 1.123, 2.35 parts of, 1.4 PDF as basis of, 1.118 percentage of work as orientation method, 1.123 proofing and testing of, 2.139, fig. 2.8 as reprints, 14.159 source citations for, 14.100, 14.137, 14.159-60 See also electronic publications; EPUB; multiple formats, publications in ECF (elemental chlorine-free), p. 979 edited by
on title page, 1.19 when to abbreviate or spell out, 14.2021, 14.103-4, 14.122, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15 edited works. See compilations of previ ously published material; derivative works; editors; multiauthor volumes editing, types of, 1.116, 2.48-50. See also manuscript editing editions abbreviation of term, 10.42, 14.20-21, 14.113, 15.6 capitalization of term, 8.176 citations to forthcoming works in new, 14.146 copyright issues, 4.28 on copyright page, 1.20, 1.23, 1.25, 1.26, 14.113, fig. 1.2 definition and preferences concerning, 1.26, p. 979 facsimile, 1.47 folio, 14.155, 14.225 vs. impressions, 1.23, 1.26 as metadata, 1.75 microform, 4.64, 14.115 number of, 1.19, 1.70 permissions for, 4.101 preface for new, 1.41 publications in multiple formats as, 1.26 publishing agreements on subsequent, 4.52 source citations for, 14.113-15; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.246, 14.248, 14.251; classic English works, 14.253; copublications, 14.140; die-
editions (continued) tionaries and encyclopedias, 14.232, 14.233; folio, page citation for, 14.155, 14.225; microform, 14.115; multi media content, 14.265; newspapers, 14.191; other than first, 14.113; pub lication date, 14.142, 15.40; reprint and modern, 14.54, 14.114, 14.159, 15.40; standards, 14.259 titles, 8.176 editorial board information, 1.84, 1.85, 2.109, 2.134 editorial interpolations and clarifications, 13.59-63 editorial doubt, 6.68, 14.132, 15.34, 15.44 and errors, 13.7 italics for emphasis, 13.62 missing or illegible words, 13.59 notes, 13.7, 13.58 punctuation for: brackets, generally, 6.99, 6.103; commas, 6.18; exclama tion points, to be avoided, 6.73; 2-em dashes, 6.93, 13.59 quotation marks in, 13.63 sic, 6.73, 7.55, 13.61 in transcriptions of discussions or inter views (e.g., laughter), 13.48 See also permissible changes to quoted and referenced materials editorials, 1.87, 1.102, 14.195. See also letters to the editor editorial style. See house style editorial we, 5.47 editors and anthology permissions, 4.105 biographical notes on, 1.66 copyright ownership of, 4.8, 4.57, 4.58, 4.59 forewords by, 1.40 of journals, 1.84, 1.87, 1.89, 1.102, 2.134, 4.57 manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.41-42 notes of, 1.45, 1.95, 14.51 prefaces by, 1.41 and publishing agreements, 4.57 responsibility for bias-free language, 2.51, 5.254 See also authors; editorial interpolations and clarifications; editors' names;
INDEX
editors (continued) manuscript editors; multiauthor volumes editor's alterations (EAs), 2.135, 2.136, 14.47, p. 979 editors' names abbreviation of term, 10.42, 14.20-21, 14.23, 14.68-69, 14.103-4, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15 on covers or jackets, 1.69, 1.70 form of, 1.19 in multiauthor volumes, 1.64 proofreading of, 2.109, 2.134 in source citations, 14.23, 15.9; abbre viation of term, 14.20-21, 14.23, 14.68-69, 14.103-4, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15; vs. authors' names, 14.104; of book reviews, 14.202; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.246, 14.249, 14.250; of journal articles, 14.183; of journal supplements, 14.179; legal-style cita tions, 14.305; ofmultivolume works, 14.117, 14.119, 14.122; omission of term in text citations, 15.7, 15.9, 15.22, 15.36; in place of author, 14.103, 15.9, 15.19, 15.36; repeated names, 14.6869; series of works, 14.123; shortened citations, 14.32; of special issues of journals, 14.178 special issues of journals, 1.87, 14.178 See also authors' names editor's notes, 1.45, 1.95, 14.51 educational use of materials, 4.64, 4.66 e.g. , 5.250, 6.51, 10.7, 10.42 either, 5.67, 6.52 either . . . or, 5.33, 5.143, 5.199, 5.205, 5.244 elect, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) electronic enhancements. See supplemen-
conversion of, 2.7, 2.79, 2.80, 2.113, 2.137 as copyrightable, 4.3 date style for sorting in, 9.36 document comparison software, 2.86 formats for (see file formats and devices) illustrations and tables, preparation
electronic files (continued) of: artwork, prints vs. scans, 2.27; charts, 3.43; digital artwork, 3.15; file formats, pp. 981, 982, 985, 989; identified for publisher, 3.16; notes, 2.31; numbering of, 2.28, 2.29; prepa ration of tables, 3.47; separate files for each component, 2.26, 2.36, 2.80, 3.1, 3.16; submission to publisher, 3.3, 3.4, 3.15-20; text references and callouts, 2.30 indexer's use of, 16.102, 16.105 index submitted as, 16.131 list of, in production checklist, 2.77 for manuscript submission, 2.4, 2.7, 2.36-40 MP3 audio files, 10.49 naming of (see file names) numbering pages in, 2.38 password protection of, 2.88
prepress proofs generated from, 2.107 updating, 2.72 See also manuscript editing; PDF files; software; tracking changes; version control; word-processing software electronic mailing lists, 14.210. See also email; social media content electronic publications accessibility issues, 2.82nl, 3.28, 3.88, 7.49, 12.2nl
aggregators, 1.105, 4.64, 4.65 and alignment of quotation marks in poetry, 13.28 authority and permanence of, 14.14 common use of, 1.2 components: biographical notes, 1.50, 14.55; cross-references, 1.120, 1.121, 2.35; front and back matter, 1.122, 1.125; hyperlinks, generally, 1.121; illustrations, 1.107, 3.8, 3.28, 3.38; indexes, 1.125, 16.1, 16.7, 16.13, 16.15, 16.102; running heads, 1.12; site map, 2.137; table of contents, 1.87, 1.122, 1.123, fig. 1.11; tables, 1.106, 3.48, 3.76 copyright issues, 4.13, 4.47, 4.63-66, 14.14
country of printing, 1.27 devices required to read (see file formats and devices) educational use of, 4.64 enhanced electronic rights, 4.64
INDEX
electronic publications (continued) formats for, 1.77, 1.118, 14.175 (see also file formats and devices; multiple formats, publications in) functional features in, 1.119, 1.120, 1.121 institutional repositories, 4.60, 4.66, 4.67, 14.215
markup for, 2.83 (see also markup lan guages, formal) navigation as organizing principle for, 1.120
page number markers in, 1.123n2, 1.125, 14.160, 16.13
periodicals as, generally, 14.164-65 prepress, 2.2 print elements not always used in: fixed page numbers, 1.6, 1.81, 1.123, 2.35, 14.47, 14.49, 14.160; footnotes, 14.27, 14.49, 14.52; paper durability statement, 1.35; recto and verso, 1.5; running heads, 1.10, 1.83, 1.123, 14.47 proofing and testing of, 1.92, 2.103, 2.137-40, fig. 2.8 published before print version, 1.78, 1.81, 1.86, 1.104, 1.112-13, 14.172
punctuation in, 6.2, 6.4, 6.8, 6.84 reflowable formats: illustration place ment in, 3.8; and indexes, 16.13; line breaks in, 6.82, 6.90, 6.113, 7.36, 7.47, 14.18; location information, 1.6, 1.123; navigation in, 1.123, 2.35, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23; and text breaks, 1.58 scanned versions, 14.162 searchable nature of, 14.22, 16.2 source citations for: access dates, 14.12, 14.176, 14.207, 14.233, 14.237, 14.257, 15.50; alternate versions, 14.16; books consulted online, 14.161-62; CD-RO Ms and fixed media, 14.163; e-books, 14.137, 14.159-60; editions of older works, 14.162; examples of, 14.23, 15.9; and id. (idem), 14.279; identifiers for (see DOis; URLs); and navigation, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23; permanent records of chang ing sources, 14.15, 14.191; revision dates, 14.13, 14.207, 14.233, 15.50 spaces and spacing, 6.11, 6.120, 9.55, 9.56 unpublished manuscripts as, 14.216
electronic publications (continued) See also apps; databases; DOis; e-books; hyperlinks; hyperlinks for source citations; online publications; simul taneous print/electronic publishing model; URLs; websites and web pages electronic rights, 4.63, 4.64, 4.65 electronic workflow checklists for, 2.139 and formal markup languages, 1.117, 2.83, 2.137
metadata for, 1.92 proofing and testing, 1.92, 2.137-40, fig. 2.8 as standard, 1.2, 1.77 See also electronic files; manuscript edit ing; markup for manuscript editing; markup languages, formal elided elements in mathematical expres sions, 12.19, 12.20 ellipses, 13.50-58 danger of skewed meaning with, 13.51 defined, 6.15, 13.50 editing of, 2.61 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 non-English uses: French, 11.32; Italian, 11.49; Russian, 11.102; Spanish, 11.65
other punctuation with: brackets, 11.32, 11.49, 11.65, 13.53, 13.58, 14.97;
uses, other: in deliberately incomplete sentences, 13.55; in drama, 13.57; in mathematical expressions, 12.19, 12.20; missing or illegible words, 13.59; for partial or whole paragraphs, 13.56; in poetry, 13.57; shortening very long titles, 13.58, 14.97; in table cells, 3.67, 3.68, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.18 when not to use, 13.52 See also ellipses, grammatical ellipses, grammatical clauses with, 5.226, 6.54 colons with, in lists, 6.67 commas with, 6.54
I N D EX
ellipses, grammatical (continued) and conjunctions beginning sentences, 5.203 defined, 5.229 exclamations, 5.216 in one-word sentences, 5.97 and relative pronouns, 5.226, 5.247 else, 5.67, 5.201 em, p. 979 email addresses: hyperlinks to, 1.121; line breaks in, 7.46; omitted in source citations, 14.214; punctuation with, 6.8, 6.104; treatment in text, 14.17 as copyrightable, 4.3 journal table of contents sent by, 1.86 non-English materials in, 11.30 source citations for, 14.210, 14.214 term not hyphenated, 7.89 (sec. 3) embedded elements comments, 2.39 fonts, 12.13 indexes, 16.7 URLs, 1.121 em dashes, 6.85-92 in British style, 6.83, 6.85 defined, p. 979 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 keyboarding for manuscript, 2.14 length of, 6.75 and line breaks, 6.90 marking manuscript for, 2.96 marking proofs for, 2.132 in non-English languages: with dia logue, 6.91; French, 11.28, 11.31; Italian, 11.47; for quotations, 11.11, 11.19, 13.42; Russian, 11.101, 11.103; Spanish, 11.63, 11.64 other punctuation with, 6.87, 6.89, 6.90 and permissible changes, 13.7 uses: before that is, namely,for example, and such, 6.51, 6.88; dialogue, 6.91, 11.11, 11.19, 13.41-42; glossaries, 1.61; indexes, 6.92, 16.27, 16.99, 16.141; lists, 6.92; parenthetical elements in sentences, 6.48, 6.85; to set off not phrase, 6.46; between subject and pronoun, 6.86; sudden breaks, 6.87, 13.41; table cells with no data, 3.67, 3.68, 6.92; titles of works, 8.164, 8.165, 14.90
em dashes (continued) See also dashes; en dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; 3-em dashes; 2-em dashes emojis and emoticons, 5.250 emphasis added to original quotation, 13.62 adjective position for, 6.79 boldface or underlining for, 7.51 capitals for, 7.52 colons for, with quotations, 13.16 commas for, 6.46 exclamation points for, 6.71 and hyphenation, 9.14 italics for, 7.48, 7.50, 13.62, 14.37 quotation marks (scare quotes) for, 7.57, 7.60, 11.47, 14.94 and so-called, 7.59 word order for, 5.224 employment opportunities, 1.99 em spaces, 2.126, 3.23, 3.54, 6.120 en, p. 979 enclitics (Greek), 11.114 encyclopedias for geographical terminology, 8.47 · for named natural phenomena, 8.77 organizing principle of, 1.123 for personal names, 8.3, 16.71 source citations for, 14.232-33 See also reference works en dashes, 6.78-84 in British style, 6.83, 6.85 defined, p. 979 length of, 6.75 and line breaks, 6.82 in manuscript, 2.14 marking manuscript for, 2.96 marking proofs for, 2.132 permissible changes to, 13.7 punctuation and spacing with, 6.79, 14.144 slash instead of, 6.107 uses: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.245; in compound terms, 6.80-81; in directions, 7.89 (sec. 1); with ex as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 3); in harmonic progressions, 7.73; in inclusive dates, 6.78-79, 14.117, 14.144, 14.171, 15.41; in inclusive numbers, 2.80, 6.78-79, 9.60, 16.100, 16.134; in indexes, 16.100, 16.111, 16.134; as minus sign,
INDEX
en dashes (continued) 6.84; in musical pitch series, 7.70; in source citations for journal articles, 14.171; for unfinished number ranges, 6.79, 15.41 See also dashes; em dashes; hyphens and hyphenation; inclusive (continuing) numbers end matter. See back matter endnotes after each chapter, 1.62, 14.43, 14.46, fig. 14.3 editing of, 2.62 examples, figs. 14.6-7 vs. footnotes, 1.124, 2.77, 2.80, 14.43-48, 14.57, 14.59 footnotes used with, 14.49-51, fig. 14.4 generic markup of, 2.81 glossary terms in, 1.61 index entries for, 16.111 in journal articles, 1.108, 14.43, 14.46 keyed to line or page numbers, 14.53, fig. 14.6 length considerations, 14.56 lists of abbreviations placed with, 14.60, fig. 14.3 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.22 multiple paragraphs in, 14.40 numbering of (see note numbers) overview, 14.43 placement in book, 1.4, 1.61, 1.62, 14.46 in previously published materials, 2.45 pros and cons of, 14.45 running heads for: checking proofs for, 2.114; description of, 1.15, 1.62, 14.47; example, fig. 14.2; importance of, 14.45; page numbers in, 1.15, 1.62, 2.76, 2.114, 2.136, 14.47, fig. 14.2; placement of, 1.10; preparation of, 2.76 special needs of, 14.48 subheads in, 1.62, 2.81, 14.146, fig. 14.2 See also footnotes; notes; shortened citations endpapers, 1.72, p. 979 English language abbreviation of English, 10.42 Old and Middle, 7.35, 11.70, 11.122-24 See also British style enhanced electronic rights, 4.64 enhancements. See supplementary data, electronic
e n spaces, 6.120, 13.29 Enter key (hard return), 2.12, 2.19, 2.80 enunciations, mathematical, 12.25, 12.56 environmental impact, paper standards for, 1.35, pp. 979, 984, 988 enzyme names, 8.133 epigraphs defined, 13.36 and fair-use doctrine, 4.87 format and placement of, 1.37, 13.36 generic markup of, 2.80 notes to, 1.49, 14.52 omitted in indexing, 16.109 pagination omitted, 1.7 as part of chapter displays, 1.49 placement in book, 1.4 quotation marks omitted from, 13.36 running heads omitted from page, 1.11 submission of, 2.3 epilogues, 1.4, 1.54 epithets, 8.34, 8.35, 8.48. See also genus and species names eponyms, 5.6 EPS (encapsulated Postscript), p. 979 EPUB and accessibility, 7.49 defined, pp. 979-80 and impression numbering, 1.28 and indexes, 16.13 journals, 1.77 and navigation, 1.120 overview, 1.118 page number markers in, 1.123n2, 1.125 proofing and testing of, fig. 2.8 Unicode standard required by, 11.2 and XML, 1.117 See also e-books equal-space mark, 2.125, fig. 2.6 equals sign, 7.46, 10.43, 10.45-47, 14.250, fig. 3.10. See also mathematical expressions equations. See mathematical expressions eras, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38. See also periods of time ergative (ambitransitive) verbs, 5.99 errata books, 1.68 journals, 1.90, 1.94, 1.112 errors in grammar and punctuation apostrophes, 5.49, 5.50, 5.250, 6.117, 7.9, 7.65
INDEX
errors in grammar and punctuation (continued) colons, 6.67
dangling gerunds, 5.116 dangling infinitives, 5.109 dangling participles, 5.115 double comparative or superlative, 5.87 misleading connectives, 5.142 number of predicate nouns, 5.141 overuse of compound adverbs, 5.161 overuse of prepositions, 5.187-92 possessive pronoun with apostrophe, 5.50
in pronoun antecedents, 5.28 pronoun case, 5.37 remote clauses, 5.60 See also errors in text errors in text checking for, 2.56, 2.108, 13.6 correction of, 1.27, 1.28, 2.69, 2.70 elimination of, 2.2 errata pages, 1.68, 1.90, 1.94, 1.112 and file conversion, 2.80, 2.113, 2.137 indexer's notation of, 16.125, 16.131 in original quotation, 13.7, 13.61 paraphrasing to avoid, 13.4 in prepress proofs, 2.107 regression testing for, 2.138 responsibility assigned for (see alterations) silent correction, 13.7 spelling, 2.111 See also errata; errors in grammar and punctuation; perniissible changes to quoted and referenced materials; proofreading Esq., 10.16 eszett, 11.45 et al.
appropriate use of, 5.250, 15.53 and indexing authors' names, 16.115 meaning of, 10.42 punctuation with, 6.20, 6.123, 10.4 roman type for, 7.55 in source citations: author-date ref erence system, 15.9, 15.29; four or more authors, 14.23, 14.32, 14.76; not italicized in text citations, 15.29; shortened citations, 14.32 etc. (et cetera), 5.250, 6.20, 10.7, 10.42
ethnic groups, 7.10, 7.89 (sec. 2), 8.38, 8.39. See also countries; groups of people ethnographic field notes, 2.61, 13.49 et seq. , 10.42, 16.12 Eucharist, 8.110
Europe currency, 9.20, 9.23 resources on European Union, 14.304 See also British style; European style; and specific countries and languages
European style all-numeral dates, 9.35 decimal markers, 9.55 metric units, spelling of, 8.152 numerals with sovereigns, 9.41 period between title and subtitle, 14.89 space between digits, 9.55, 9.56 twenty-four-hour system of time, 9.39, 9.40 See also British style
uses: editorial interpolation, to be avoided, 6.73; with ellipses, in Rus sian, 11.102; exclamatory questions, 5.213, 6.72; generally, 6.71; with introductory oh or ah, 6.35; inverted, in Spanish works, 11.19, 11.62; in mathematical expressions, 12.32; in titles of works, 6.124-26, 14.92, 14.96, 16.54 See also exclamations; interjections;
punctuation
INDEX
exclamations, 5.216, 6.35. See also exclamation points; interjections exclamatory questions, 5.213 exhibitions, 8.201, 14.236 expletives, 5.30, 5.47, 5.239-41, 6.93 exponents abbreviations with, 10.66, 12.49 dex (decimal exponent), 9.12 rewriting fractions using, 12.49 uncertainties in, 12.60 See also mathematical expressions expressed folios, p. 980 expression, defined in copyright, 4.5 extra, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) extracts. See block quotations
fan diagrams, 3.46. See also charts and graphs feature definition documents, 2.139 federal court decisions. See legal and public documents; legal cases; legal-style citations Federal Register, 14.289 female and male, 5.259 few, 5.230 fewer, less, 5.250 ff., 10.42, 14.148-49, 16.12 fiction. See dialogue; literary works field notes, 2.61, 13.49
figures abbreviation of term, 3.9, 10.42, 14.150, 14.158, 16.116
fables, 8.185 Facebook, 8.191. See also social media content facing pages alignment of, 2.117 tables on (broadside), 2.115, 3.51, 3.86, 3.87, fig. 3.16, fig. 3.25 facsimile editions, 1.47 fact-checking, 2.56, 13.5 facts of publication. See publication details fair-use doctrine, 4.84-94 and attribution, 4.75, 4.84, 4.92 Chicago's guidelines for, 4.94 and Creative Commons licenses, 4.62 and dissertations and theses, 4.60 general rules, 4.86 legal overview, 4.84 and photocopying, 1.103 "rules of thumb," 4.85 and specific materials: charts, tables, and graphs, 4.91; data in tables, 3.77; epigraphs, 4.87; illustrations, 3.32; interior monologues, 4.87; interviews, 4.77; paraphrasing, 4.89; pictorial and graphic, 4.90; unpublished works, 4.88 statements on, 1.84 and unnecessary permissions, 4.93 See also acknowledgments; illustration credits and credit lines; permissible changes to quoted and referenced materials; source notes fairy tales, 8.185 F&Gs (folded-and-gathered sheets), 2.107, p. 980
defined, p. 980 source citations for, 14.158 text references to, 3.9 use of term, 3.1, 3.5, 3.9, 3.23 See also artwork; captions; illustrations figures of speech, 2.51, 7.60, 7.62 file extensions, 2.37, 7.77 file formats and devices for e-books, 14.100, 14.137, 14.159 for electronic supplementary data, 14.112, 14.187
functional features in, 1.119 and hyperlinks, 1.121 and illustration quality, 1.107 for illustrations, pp. 981, 982, 985, 989 for journal articles, 14.175 for magazine articles, 14.189 in metadata, 1.75 for multimedia content, 2.4, 14.187, 14.261, 14.267, 14.268
names of, 8.155 for publications in multiple formats, 1.77, 14.16
terminology and punctuation specific to, 7.76, 7.78
testing of, 2.138, 2.139, 2.140 for unpublished documents, 14.225 See also apps; electronic publications; software; and specificformats file-hosting services, for version control, 2.78
file names for artwork, 3.16 extensions, 2.37, 7.77
INDEX
file names (continued) format for, 7.79 in production checklist, 2.77 for proofreading, 2.103 slashes in, 6.112 typographic considerations, 7.79 for version control, 2.78 files, p. 980. See also electronic files file transfer protocol (FTP), p. 980. See also URLs film. See movies and film; multimedia content financial terminology, 10.69. See also business and commerce; currency fingerspelling, 6.77, 11.130 finite verbs, 5.35, 5.138 Finnish language, 11.70 firearm calibers, 9.19 first-line indentation. See paragraph (first line) indentation first lines indexes of, 16.6, 16.144, 16.145 references to, 8.182 fiscal year (FY), 9.64 fl. (ftoruit), 10.42 fl (flush left), 2.127 flat (bare) adverbs, 5.160, 5.250 flexibinding (limp binding), p. 980 flush, p. 980 flush-and-hang style. See hanging (flush and-hang) indentation flush left (ragged right) justification, 2.10, 3.73, 7.47, 16.136, fig. 3.19, p. 986. See also justificatimr flyleaf, 1.72 fold, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) folded-and-gathered sheets (F&Gs), 2.107, p. 980 folios defined, 1.5, p. 980 folio editions, 14.155, 14.225 manuscript collections, 14.225 See also page numbers folktales, 8.185 fonts and typefaces archaic, 13.7 for computer terminology, 7.79 defined, pp. 980, 989 for digital artwork, 3.15 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 embedded, 12.13
fonts and typefaces (continued) Gothic (Fraktur), 11.45, 12.65, 12.66, 12.68 for letters as shapes, 7.67 for mathematical copy, 12.11-13, 12.66 for old-style numbers, 3.86 permissible changes to, 13.8 proofreading of, 2.113, 2.131, 10.8 and punctuation, 6.4-6, 6.129 sans serif, p. 987 serif, p. 987 specialized, for non-English materials, 11.21, 11.72, 11.90, 11.110 See also boldface; italics; roman (type); typographic considerations; Unicode standard foot folios, p. 980 footnotes continued across pages, 14.41, 16.113, fig. 14.1 editing of, 2.62 vs. endnotes, 1.124, 2.77, 2.80, 14.43-48, 14.57, 14.59 endnotes used with, 14.49-51, fig. 14.4 examples, fig. 14.1, figs. 14.4-5 index entries for, 16.112 in journals, 1.108 keyed to line or page numbers, 14.53, fig. 14.5 length considerations, 14.40, 14.56 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.22 not always used in electronic publications, 14.27, 14.49, 14.52 numbering of (see note numbers) overview, 14.43 in previously published materials, 2.45 proofreading, 2.134 pros and cons of, 14.44 for tables (see tables: notes to) unnumbered, 1.50, 2.46, 14.52, 14.54 See also endnotes; notes; shortened citations for, 5.201 foreign-language materials. See non English materials foreign names. See non-English names foreign rights. See rights to distribution outside the US foreign words and phrases. See non-English words and phrases
INDEX
forewords format of, 1.40 format of term, 8.179, 14.110 indexing of, 16.109 material appropriate for, 1.43 mentioned on covers or jackets, 1.70 pagination, 1.7 placement in book, 1.4 vs. prefaces, 5.250 source citations for, 14.105, 14.110 as work made for hire, 4.10 for example, 6.51, 6.58, 6.64, 6.88 format information. See file formats and devices formatting manuscript for submission. See manuscript preparation guidelines for authors forms, titles of, 8.187 forms of address, 6.66, 8.33, 10.16, 10.17. See also dialogue; direct address; speech for . . . sake expressions, 7.21 Fort, 10.30, 11.26, 16.90 forthcoming
generally, 8.188, 14.146 for journal articles, 1.78, 1.104, 1.113, 14.172 in reference lists, 15.18, 15.45 forums, electronic, 14.210 forward slash. See slashes foster, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) foul (dead) copy or proofs, 2.105, 2.110 fr (jlush right), 2.127 fractions case (text-sized with horizontal bar), 12.45 hyphenation, 7.89, 9.14 and line breaks, 6.113 in mathematical copy, 12.45-49; in display, 12.46, 12.47; multiple and multilevel, 12.48; rewritten with exponents, 12.49; and subscripts and superscripts, 12.47, 12.49; in text, 12.45, 12.47 simple, 9.14 slashes in, 6.110, 6.113, 12.45, 12.47 spelled out, hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 1) symbols for, 6.110, 9.15 whole numbers with, 9.15 See also decimal points Fraktur (Gothic) type, 11.45, 12.65, 12.66, 12.68
France, currency, 9.23. See also French language fraud. See data falsification; plagiarism free, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) French flaps (gatefolds), 1.70 French language, 11.25-37 abbreviation ofFrench, 10.42 abbreviations, 10.17 capitalization, 8.7, 11.26, 11.27 decimal markers, 9.55 dialogue, 11.31 ligatures, 7.34, 7.35 proper names, 8.7, 11.26, 16.93 punctuation: ellipses, 11.32; em dashes, 11.28, 11.31; guillemets, 11.28-32; periods omitted from contractions, 10.4; quotation marks, 11.30; spacing with, 11.28-29, 11.31-32 resources on, 11.25, 11.27 Saint in place-names, 11.26, 16.93 social titles, 10.17 special characters, 11.37 titles of works, 11.27, 16.48, 16.52 word division, 11.33-36 from, 6.78, 9.60 frontispieces, 1.18, 1.39, 3.22 front matter, 1.17-45 acknowledgments, 1.4, 1.41, 1.42, 1.89 author's signature, 1.41 biographical notes, 1.18, 1.66 chronologies, 1.4, 1.60 copyright information (see copyright notice; copyright page, contents of) dedication, 1.4, 1.7, 1.11, 1.36, 2.3, 16.109 editing of, 2.57 editorials, 1.102 in electronic publications, 1.122 epigraph and epigraph source, 1.4, 1.37 examples, figs. 1.1-4 forewords, 1.40 frontispieces, 1.18, 1.39, 3.22 half-title page, 1.17, 2.3 as historical context, 1.105 indexing of, 16.109 information for contributors, 1.88 introduction appropriate to, 1.43 journals, 1.84-85, 1.87-91, 2.102, 2.105, 2.134 list of contributors, 1.64 lists of abbreviations, 1.44, fig. 1.8
INDEX
front matter (continued) lists of illustrations and tables, 1.39, 3.38, figs. 1.6-7 online publications, 1.122 overview, 1.3 pagination of, 1.4, 1.7, 1.9, 1.18, 2.38, 2.57 prefaces, 1.41 in production checklist, 2.77 publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes, 1.45, 1.95, 14.51 recto vs. verso for elements, 1.4 running heads, 1.11, 1.16 series title, 1.4, 1.18 special issue noted, 1.84, 1.87, 1.89 submission of, 2.3 table of contents, 1.38, 1.87, fig. 1.5 title page, 1.17-19 See also many ofthe above elements under their own headings FTP (file transfer protocol), p. 981. See also
URLs
full,ful, as suffixes, 7.89 (sec. 3) full bibliographies, 14.64. See also bibliog
raphies full measure, p. 983 full-size caps (capitals) for emphasis, 7.52 preferred to small caps, 9.34, 10.8, 10.38 small caps compared to, 7.52 full stops. See periods (punctuation) funding sources, 1. 92 fused participles, 5.114 future perfect tense, 5.134 future tense, 5.131 FY (fiscal year), 9.64 galleries callouts not needed for, 3.8 defined, p. 981 in list of illustrations, 3.39 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.28 numbering illustrations in, 2.28, 3.14 placement of, 3.6 plates in, 3.5 in table of contents, 1.38, 1.39, 3.39, fig. 1.5, fig. 1.7 unpaginated, 1.6, 3.6, fig. 1.7 galley proofs, 2.104, p. 981 games, 8.190. See also video games gatefolds (French flaps), 1.70
capitalization for terms, 8.41 for named natural phenomena, 8.77 necessary gender-specific language, 5.258
and non-English personal names, 8.11, 8.12
in nouns, 5.11 and personal identification, 5.256 pronouns, 5.43, 5.47, 5.57 See also bias-free language gender identity or expression, 5.256, 8.41 genealogical charts, 3.46, fig. 3.10. See also charts and graphs general, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) generic markup. See markup for manuscript editing genetics, 8.131-33 genitive case definition and uses, 5.9, 5.20-22 form of, 5.41 joint (group), 5.22 ofgenitive, 5.21, 5.191 possessives, 5.20, 7.25 pronoun and gender in, 5.43 reciprocal pronouns, 5.53 See also possessives genus and species names, 8.120-25 abbreviation of genus name, 8.121 and author names, 8.124 divisions higher than genus, 8.126 English derivatives from, 8.127 italics for, 8.2, 8.120, 8.122, 8.123, 8.173 plant hybrids, 8.125 resources on, 8.119 in sentence- and headline-style capital ization, 8.158, 8.159 subspecies and varieties, 8.122 unspecified species and varieties, 8.123 geographical terminology abbreviation ofgeography, 10.42 abbreviations: Canadian provinces and territories, 10.28; city plus state, comma with, 10.29; compass points, 10.34, 10.35; country names, 10.31, 10.32, 14.290; latitude and longi tude, 10.36; place-names with Fort,
INDEX
geographical terminology (continued) Saint, and such, 10.30, 11.26, 16.90, 16.93; postal vs. standard abbrevia tions, 10.33; US states and territories, 10.4, 10.27, 14.130; US vs. United States, 10.32
generic terms for, 8.53, 8.54, 8.55, 8.56, 8.57, 10.30, 11.26
non-English terms for, 8.55, 11.26, 11.99, 16.93
real vs. metaphorical names, 8.50 regions, 8.47, 8.54 resources on, 8.47, 16.32 urban areas, 8.49 See also place-names geological terminology, 8.134-36, 10.42 German language, 11.38-45 articles (parts of speech), 16.52 billion, 5.250
capitalization, 7.54, 8.8, 11.39 names, 8.8 nouns, 7.54, 11.39 orthographic reform, 11.38, 11.43, 11.45 punctuation, 11.40-41 resources on, 11.38 special characters, 11.45 titles of works, indexing of, 16.48, 16.52 word division, 11.42-44 Germany currency, 9.23 formerly GDR (German Democratic Republic) and FRG (Federal Republic of Germany), 10.31 See also German language gerunds in compound terms, hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 2) dangling, 5.116 defined, 5.112 vs. participles, 5.113 possessives with, 7.28 word division, 7.41 See also participles ghostwritten books, source citations for, 14.105
GIF files, p. 981 global changes in manuscript editing, 2.69, 2.79, 2.80, 2.85
in proofreading, 2.111, 2.113, 2.122 global positioning coordinates, 10.36 glossaries boldface for terms appearing in, 7.56 format and alphabetizing, 1.61, 2.23 format of term, 8.179 hyperlinks to, 1.121 and indexing, 1.61, 16.109 placement in book, 1.4 punctuation, 1.61, 2.23 submission of, 2.3 glosses ASL signs, 11.128-35 in index entries: abbreviated organiza tion names, 16.46; authors' names after titles, 16.50, 16.97; newspaper titles, 16.48; parentheses for, gener ally, 16.98 (see also personal names in indexes below) parentheses for, generally, 6.96, 16.98 personal names in indexes: clerical titles, 16.39; entities with same name, 16.45, 16.62; married women, 16.36; people with same name, 16.35; persons with unknown full names, 16.43; pseudonyms, 16.34; saints, 16.42; sovereigns and other rulers, 16.37, 16.97; titled persons, 16.38 single quotation marks for, 11.63 translations of non-English terms, 6.96, 6.100, 11.5 See also editorial interpolations and clar
ifications; translations and translated works GMT (Greenwich mean time), 10.41 "gold" open access, 4.61 Google Books, 14.10, 14.162 Google Play Books, 14.159. See also file formats and devices Gothic (Fraktur) type, 11.45, 12.65, 12.66, 12.68
governmental entities (continued) capitalization of, 8.52, 8.62-65 courts, 14.276-79; basic elements in source citations, 14.276; Canadian, 14.294; international, 14.304; names and terms, treatment in text, 8.64; United Kingdom, 14.298; US federal, 14.278; US state and local, 14.279; US Supreme Court, 4.93, 14.277 forms published by, 8.187 legislative and deliberative, 8.62, 14.281-88
loose-leaf services of, 14.220 numbered divisions, 9.46 numbers for successive governing bodies, 9.45 programs of, 8.66, 8.75, 8.80 public-domain works produced by, 4.21, 4.44, 4.68, 4.75
titles and offices of people, 8.19, 8.22 See also cities and towns; civil and civic concerns; countries; institutions; legal and public documents; legal cases; legislation; presidential docu ments; states (US); unpublished and informally published materials grades, scholastic, 7.65 graduate student publications. See disserta tions and theses grammar correction of, in previously published materials, 2.44 defined, 5.1 parts of speech, 5.3, i0.42 preventive, 5.57 schools ofthought, 5.2, 5.218 vs. usage, 5.249 See also adjectives; adverbs; conjunc tions; errors in grammar and punc tuation; exclamations; interjections; nouns; prepositions; pronouns; syntax; verbs; word usage grants and subventions, 1.20, 1.31 graphs. See charts and graphs great, great-grand, 7.89 (sec. 3) Great Britain. See British style; United Kingdom Greek alphabet beta (�) vs. eszett (8) , 11.45 for mathematical copy, 12.12, 12.13, 12.68, table 12.3
Greek alphabet (continued) numbers in, 11.117, table 11.5 transliteration, 11.110-15, table 11.4 typesetting, 11.111 See also Greek language Greek language, 11.110-21 abbreviation of Greek, 10.42 possessives in, 7.19 punctuation, 11.116 resources on, 11.110 unaccented words, 11.114 word division, 11.118-21 See also classical Greek and Latin works; Greek alphabet "green" open access, 4.61 Greenwich mean time (GMT), 10.41 group (joint) genitive, 5.22 groups of people, 8.38-43 colors designating, 8.38 compound nationalities, 8.39 ethnic and national groups, 7.10, 7.89 (sec. 2), 8.38, 8.39 generations, 8.42 kinship terms, 8.36 physical characteristics, 8.43 socioeconomic classes, 8.40 See also bias-free language; names, per sonal; titles and offices of people guillemets permissible changes to, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19, 13.7
Handle System, 14.8 handshapes (ASL), 11.132 hanging (flush-and-hang) indentation bibliographies, 1.63, 2.11, 2.24, fig. 14.8 defined, 2.11, pp. 980, 982 dialogue and drama, 13.46 glossaries, 2.23 indexes, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131 lists of abbreviations, 2.23 reference lists, 1.63, 2.24 runover lines in, 2.24, 16.137 transcriptions of interviews or discussions, 13.48 vertical lists, 2.11, 6.130 See also indexes: indented style; indexes: run-in style Hansard Parliamentary Debates (UK), 14.301 Hanyu Pinyin system. See Pinyin system hard copy, p. 981. See also manuscript editing: paper-only; manuscripts: paper-only hardcover books binding, p. 977 clothbound covers: defined spine copy, 1.69; description of, 1.69; endpapers, 1.72; proofreading of, 2.108 jackets (dust jackets), 1.71; artwork, 1.73, 4.100, 4.101; author's previous publications, 1.18; biographical in formation, 1.66; country of printing, 1.27; defined, p. 978; DOis, 1.33; illustration credit lines, 1.73; ISBN and bar codes, 1.32, 1.69, 1.74; meta data on, 1.75; proofreading of, 2.100, 2.103, 2.108 paper-over-board format (lithocase), 1.71 See also covers of journals and paperback books hardly, 5.230 hard return (Enter key), 2.12, 2.19, 2.80 hard vs. soft hyphens, 2. 96 Hausa language, 11.23-24 have, has, had, 5.132, 5.133, 5.153 Hawaiian language, 11.70, 11.70nl he, him, his, 5.47, 5.48, 5.49, 5.50, 5.252 . headings chronologies, fig. 1.9 endnotes, 14.46 indexes, 16.131
headings (continued) letters and diaries, 1.52 lists of abbreviations, 14.60 lists o fillustrations and tables, fig. 1.6 for navigation, 14.160, 15.23 with note numbers, 14.27 proofreading of, 2.113, 2.134 punctuation in, 6.14 reference lists, 15.5, 15.10 See also index entries; subheads headlines, 7.52, 14.191, 14.192, 14.195 headline-style capitalization in author-date reference system, 15.6 chapter and part titles, 2.58 examples of, 8.160 generally, 8.1 hyphenated compounds in, 8.161, 11.26 journal article titles, 8.168, 14.169 magazine article titles, 14.188 magazine departments, 14.190 mottoes, 7.62 newspapers, 14.192, 14.195 non-English words and phrases, 11.4, 11.10, 11.27, 11.54 and permissible changes, 8.165 principles of, 8.159 publishers' names, 14.136 series titles, 14.123 signs and notices, 7.61 subheads, 2.18, 2.59, 8.158 table titles, 3.54, 3.55 titles containing quotations, 8.162 titles in captions, 3.21, 3.22 titles of websites, 14.206 titles of works, generally, 8.168, 14.87 unpublished titles, 8.188 website titles, 8.191 See also sentence-style capitalization head margin, p. 981 headnotes bibliographies with sections, 14.63, 14.64, fig. 14.9 indexes, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141, 16.143, 16.145 notes to tables, 3.78 previously published materials, 2.46 Hebrew language, 11.91-97 capitalization and italics, 11.93 prefixes, 11.93 resources on, 11.91 romanization systems, 11.91
INDEX
Hebrew language (continued) special characters, 11.92, table 11.2 unromanized phrases in, 11.96 vowels, 11.97 word division, 11.95, 11.96 height, 3.27, 7.89 (sec. 1), 10.66. See also units of measurement helping (auxiliary) verbs. See auxiliary (helping) verbs help menus, 1.122, 8.155 hence, 6.57 he or she, him or her, 5.250, 5.255 Hepburn system, 11.86-87 her, hers, 5.49, 5.50 herself, 5.51 hidden text, 2.39, 2.80, 2.113 highways and interstates, 8.56, 9.50, 10.33, 11.26. See also addresses, mailing himself, 5.51 historic, historical, 5.250, 7.33
historical and cultural terminology abbreviations, 10.42 acts, treaties, and government pro grams, 8.66, 8.75, 8.80-81, 14.275, 14.290
movements and styles: descriptive des ignations, 8.72; period names, 8.73, 8.74; treatment in text, 8.60, 8.61, 8.79, 11.88
oaths and pledges, 8.84 periods oftime: capitalization, 8.71-74; centuries, 7.8, 7.87, 7.89, 7.89 (sec. 3) , 8.71, 9.32, 9.33; decades, 9.33; descriptive designations, 8.72; eras, 8.135, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38; numerical designations, 8.71; traditional names, 8.73 See also academic concerns; legal cases;
political terminology holidays, 8.89 home pages, 1.84, 1.86, 1.87, 1.122. See also websites and web pages homonyms, 6.55, 7.38 Honorable, Hon., 8.32, 8.33, 10.18
honorifics abbreviations, 10.18 alphabetizing, 16.67, 16.80, 16.87 capitalization of, 8.26, 8.33 in index entries, 16.39 non-English, 16.76, 16.80, 16.87 pronouns in, 5.40 See also titles and offices of people honors. See awards and prizes horticultural terminology. See botanical terminology house, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) house style author communications, 2.68, 2.70 editing for, 2.49, 2.55 generally, 1.116 for indexes, 16.103, 16.106, 16.118, 16.123, 16.129
proofreading for, 2.113 for source citations, 1.108-9, 2.64, 14.2-4
for tables, 3.86 See also style sheets (editorial) how, 5.202, 6.69 however, 5.157, 5.204, 6.49, 6.57
HTML (hypertext markup language), 1.77, 1.117, 1.118, 1.119, 2.139, p. 981. See also online publications; websites and web pages HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol), 7.80, 14.17, p. 981. See also URLs HTTPS, p. 981 humanities style. See notes and bibliogra phy system; source citations hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands, 9.3, 9.4, 9.54 Hungarian language, 8.13, 11.70, 16.78 hybrids, plant, 8.125 hyper, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) hyperlinks added to printed work, 4.64 cross-checking, 2.32, 2.34 for DOis, 1.33, 1.121 in e-book formats, 1.118, 1.120, 1.121 for errata, 1.68, 1.90 generally, 1.121 in HTML format, 1.118 for illustrations, 1.96, 1.107, 3.8, 3.51 in indexes, 1.125, 16.7, 16.13, 16.15, 16.102, 16.108
INDEX
hyperlinks (continued) in journals: for errata, 1.90; home pages, 1.86; illustrations, 1.107; to related works, 1.86; for retractions, 1.91; for source citations, 1.96, 1.106, 1.109, 14.6; tables, 1.106; tables of contents, 1.86, 1.87, 1.90, fig. 1.11 markup for, 2.73, 2.83 metadata for, 1.92, 1.121 in online publications, 1.120, 1.121, 1.122 in PDF files, 1.118, 1.121 and tables, 1.96, 1.106, 3.51 testing of, 2.137, 2.138 See also DOis; hyperlinks for source citations; URLs hyperlinks for source citations advantages of, 1.124 annotations, 14.53 and author-date reference system, 15.5, 15.9 checking, 2.34 consistency in, 2.64 and footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.43, 14.45 generally, 14.19, 15.5 in journals, 1.96, 1.106, 1.109, 14.6 and metadata, 1.92 multiauthor volumes, 1.50 and shortened citations vs. ibid., 1.124, 14.34 source notes for previously published material, 14.54 tables, 1.106 and 3-em dashes, 1.124, 14.67, 15.17 unnumbered notes, 14.27, 14.52 and URLs in citations, 14.6, 14.23 to works cited, 1.109, 14.61 hypertext, p. 981. See also HTTP; hyperlinks hypertext markup language (HTML), 1.77, 1.117, 1.118, 1.119, 2.139, p. 981. See also online publications; websites and web pages hyphenated compounds, 7.82. See also compound terms hyphens and hyphenation capitalization issues, 8.161, 11.26 in compound terms, 7.81-89; adverbs ending in -ly, 7.86, 7.89; before or after noun, 7.85; with compound modifiers, 5.92, 5.93, 7.8, 7.85; en dash vs. hyphen, 6.80; ethnic groups and nationalities, 7.89 (sec. 2), 8.39;
hyphens and hyphenation (continued) guide to, 7.89; headline-style titles, 8.161, 11.26; and line breaks, 2.112; multiple hyphens, 7.87; personal names, 8.6; with prefixes or suffixes, 6.80, 7.40, 7.81, 7.87-89, 8.161; sus pended hyphens, 7.88, 7.89 (sec. 1); trend toward closed, 7.83 vs. dashes, 6.75, 6.80 guide to, 7.89 manuscript and editorial concerns: electronic file cleanup, 2.61, 2.80; guidelines for authors, 2.13; marking manuscript for, 2.96; marking proofs for, 2.132; proofreading, 2.105, 2.112, 2.116; soft vs. hard hyphens, 2.96; stacks of, 2.112, 2.116, 7.47; typo graphic considerations, 7.47 non-English languages: Arabic, 11.79; Chinese, 11.84, 11.88; compound terms from, 7.89; French, 11.26; glossed American Sign Language, 11.128; Hebrew, 11.93; Japanese, 11.87, 11.88 personal names with, 8.6, 8.7, 8.14, 11.88, 16.36, 16.72 readability as key to, 7.84 software settings for, 2.13, 2.80, 7.36, 7.38 URLs, DOis, and such in text, 2.13, 7.46, 14.18 uses, other: all-numeral dates, 6.108, 9.36; double or multiple numera tion, 1.57; fractions, 7.89, 9.14; gene names, 8.132; global positioning coordinates, 10.36; keyboard com binations and shortcuts, 7.78; mass, in chemical terms, 8.150; music writing, 7.71; noun plus numeral or enumerator, 7.89, 9.13; phrasal adjec tives, 5.92, 5.93; separators (numbers and letters), 6.77; in source citations for journal articles, 14.171; telephone numbers, 9.57 See also compound terms; dashes; em dashes; en dashes; punctuation; 3-em dashes; 2-em dashes I (pronoun) antecedent absent, 5.30 appropriate use of, 5.250 capitalization of, 5.40
INDEX
I (pronoun) (continued) misuse of, 5.37 with personally, 5.250 than with, 5.183 ibid. meaning of, 10.42 roman type for, 7.55, 10.7 uses: notes, 1.124, 14.34, 14.48; text citations, 13.66, 14.58 Ibn, Abu, Abd, 16.75 iBooks, 14.159. See also file formats and
and editorial discretion, 2.51 and ergative verbs, 5. 99 and fused participles, 5.114 and genitive case, 5.20 and grammatical ellipses, 5.229 negative, 5.211 only in, 5.186 prepositional, 5.193-95 and problematic words and phrases, 5.250
and transitive and intransitive verbs, 5.98
zero article in, 5.77 See also colloquial speech; dialect; slang i.e., 5.250, 6.51, 10.7, 10.42 if, 5.124, 5.201, 6.24, 6.40. See also con-
illustration credits and credit lines, 3.29-37 contents of, 3.29, 4.102 editing of, 2.65 format of, 4.102 importance of, 4.75, 13.3 placement of, 3.30; in back matter, 1.4, 3.30; on copyright page, 1.30, 1.73, 3.30, 4.78; on cover or jacket, 1.73; list of illustrations and tables, 3.38 proofreading of, 2.108 types of material: adapted material, 3.37; author's own work, 3.31, 4.78; commercial agency material, 3.36; commissioned material, 3.33; cover or jacket artwork, 1.30, 1.73; interior
illustration credits and credit lines (continued)
book design, 1.30; maps, 3.33, 8.199; obtained free of charge, 3.34; public-domain work, 3.35; requiring permission, 3.32; translations of quoted materials, 11.14 See also permissions; source notes illustrations, 3.3-46 accessibility issues, 3.28 acquisition of: adapted material, 3.37; commercial agency material, 3.36, 4.99, 4.101; commissioned material, 3.33; material obtained free of charge, 3.34; previously published material, 2.47; public-domain ma terial, 3.35; published work needing permission, 2.2, 2.3, 3.32; works made for hire, 3.33, 4.10, 4.75 blind page numbers for, 1.7, 1.39 credits for (see illustration credits and credit lines) defined, 3.1 electronic files, preparation of: artwork, prints vs. scans, 2.27; charts, 3.43; digital artwork, 3.15; file formats, pp. 981, 982, 985, 989; identified for publisher, 3.16; numbering of, 2.28; separate files for each component, 2.26, 2.36, 2.80, 3.16; submission to publisher, 3.3, 3.4, 3.15-20; text references and callouts, 2.30 as electronic supplementary data, 3.9, 3.26
examples of, figs. 3.1-10 fair use of, 3.32, 4.90 frontispieces, 1.18, 1.39, 3.22 galleries: callouts not needed for, 3.8; in list of illustrations, 3.39; manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.28; numbering illustrations in, 2.28, 3.14; placement of, 3.6; plates in, 3.5; in table of contents, 1.38, 1.39, fig. 1.5, fig. 1.7; unpaginated, 1.6, 3.6, fig. 1.7 hyperlinks to, 1.96, 1.107, 3.8, 3.51 indexing of, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141 on journal cover, 1.84 keys to (legends), 3.7, 3.12, 3.19-21, 3.24, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6 in letters to the editor, 1.101 manuscript and editorial concerns:
INDEX
illustrations (continued) cross-checking, 2.32; editing of, 2.65; electronic file cleanup, 2.80; guide lines for authors (see manuscript preparation guidelines for authors: illustrations and tables); inventory of artwork, 3.17-18; placement, 2.62, 3.8; proofreading, 2.107, 2.115, 2.137 numbering, 3.9-14; arabic numerals for, 3.12; continuous vs. separate, 3.10; conventions of, 2.28; double or multiple numeration, 1.57, 2.28, 3.11; in galleries, 2.28, 3.14; in index locators, 16.116; separating captions from, 3.23; text references to, 3.9, 3.50, 8.180; working (temporary) numbers, 2.28, 3.13 original dimensions noted for, 3.27 pagination of, 1.8, 1.39, 2.115 parts, identification of, 3.12, 3.24, figs. 3.6-7
permissions for, 2.2, 2.3, 3.18, 3.29, 3.30, 3.32, 4.95, 4.98-101
photo releases for, 4.77 plates: defined, 3.5, p. 985; indexing of, 16.116; lists of, 1.39, fig. 1.7; number ing of, 2.28; text references to, 3.9; use of term, 3.23 reproduction of: cropping, scaling, and shading, 3.19; halftones, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1-2, p. 981; previously published material, 2.47; publisher's redrawing of, 3.20; scans, 2.27, 2.47, 3.15 and running heads, 1.8, 1.16, 2.115 source citations for, 14.158 submission to publisher, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.27, 3.3, 3.4, 3.15-20
symbols or patterns used in, 3.7, 3.25, 3.45, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6, figs. 3.8-9 vs. tables, 3.2 text references and callouts (see callouts; text references to illustrations and tables) thumbnails, 1.96, 1.107, 3.8, 3.51, 4.90, p. 989
types: color, 1.6, 2.37, 3.3, 3.15, 3.19, 3.43; continuous-tone, 3.3, p. 978; line art, 3.4, 3.19-20, 3.41, figs. 3.3-4, fig. 3.6; musical examples, 3.4, fig. 3.5; text figures and plates as, 3.5 unnumbered, 3.13, fig. 3.3
illustrations (continued) as works made for hire, 3.33, 4.10, 4.75 See also artwork; captions; charts and graphs; lists of illustrations and tables; tables image agencies, 3.36, 4.99, 4.101 images. See artwork; illustrations imperative mood, 5.122, 5.155, 5.160, 5.214, 5.255. See also imperative sentences imperative sentences (directives) as in, 5.250 conjunctions in, 6.22 conjunctive adverbs in, 6.57 defined, 5.214 exceptional, 5.215 for gender neutrality, 5.255 indirect questions as, 6.69 infinitives in, 5.109 negative, 5.152, 5.235 periods with, 6.12 question marks with, 6.68 understood you in, 5.51, 5.122, 6.22 imperfect (progressive, continuous) tenses, 5.119, 5.128, 5.135
implicit (zero) articles, 5.77 imposition, pp. 981-82 impressions defined, 1.26, p. 982 vs. editions, 1.23, 1.26 impression lines, 1.20, 1.28, figs. 1.1-4 and publication date, 14.143 See also reprints imprints, 14.138-39, p. 982. See also publish ers' names in, after chapter titles in source citations, 14.106, 15.9 inasmuch as, 5.201, 5.250 Inc., 6.44, 10.23, 10.24, 14.134 including, 6.50, 10.42
with abbreviations and symbols, 9.17 commas with, 9.63 dates, 6.78-79, 9.34, 9.60, 9.64, 14.117, 14.144, 14.171
en dashes in, 2.80, 6.78-79, 9.60, 16.100, 16.134
full style for, 9.62, 9.64 in index entries, 16.12, 16.14, 16.29, 16.100, 16.103, 16.113, 16.121
INDEX
inclusive (continuing) numbers (continued) with percent, 7.89 (sec. 1) and repeated quantities, 9.17 roman numerals, 9.61, 16.14 in tables, 3.83 unfinished ranges of, 6.79, 15.41 words between, 9.60 See also numbers; page ranges inclusive language. See bias-free language indeed, 6.49, 6.57 indefinite articles. See articles (definite and indefinite) indefinite pronouns, 5.47, 5.67, 5.139, 5.256 indentation bibliographies, 1.63, 2.11, 2.24, 14.64, fig. 14.8 definitions, 2.11, pp. 980, 982 dialogue and drama, 13.8, 13.46 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 glossary entries, 2.23 indexes, 16.24, 16.106, 16.131, 16.137 marking manuscript for, 2.98 paragraphs, 2.11, 2.12 proofreading of, 2.113, 2.126 quotations: block quotations, 2.11, 2.19; drama excerpts, 13.8, 13.47; interviews and discussions, 13.48; paragraphs within, 2.19, 13.22; poetry extracts, 2.11, 2.20, 13.25-27 runover lines (see runover lines) in tables, 3.60, 3.61, 3.63, 3.73, 3.74, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.21 text following block quotations, 2.21, 13.24 types of, 2.11 vertical lists, 2.11, 2.21, 6.130 word-processing function, 2.11, 2.12, 2.19, 2.20, 2.21, 2.24, 2.80, 16.131 See also block quotations; indexes: in dented style; margins; quotations indented style (indexes). See under indexes independent (absolute) possessive pro nouns, 5.49 independent clauses adverbs modifying, 5.156 antecedents in, 5.57, 5.59 colons with, 6.61 commas with, 6.22-23, 6.32 in complex sentences, 5.219 in compound-complex sentences, 5.220 in compound sentences, 5.218
independent clauses (continued) conjunctions with, 6.22, 6.32, 6.59 defined, 5.225 introducing quotations, 13.16 passive voice in, 5.115 quotations of, 6.40, 8.162 semicolons with, 6.56-59 and sentence types, 5.217-20 in simple sentences, 5.217 See also dependent (subordinate) clauses independent possessives, 5.49 independent professionals book designers, 2.73 editors, 2.48, 2.73 indexers, 2.70, 16.3, 16.4 for obtaining permissions, 4.76nl proofreaders, 2.101 index cards, 16.107 index entries cross-references (see cross-references, in indexes) double posting, 16.16, 16.30 examples, 16.141-45 inclusive (continuing) numbers in, 16.12, 16.14, 16.29, 16.100, 16.103, 16.113, 16.121 locators: appropriate use of, 16.12; chap ter numbers with, 16.111; checking, 16.133;.ff. and et sec. not appropriate with, 16.12; italics and boldface for, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141, 16.143; long strings of, 16.120, 16.128, 16.133; with main headings, 16.9; across mul tiple volumes, 1.9; for notes, 14.157, 16.111-13, 16.117; number per entry, 16.10, 16.120, 16.128, 16.133; number per page, 16.118; page ranges, 16.12, 16.14, 16.100, 16.113, 16.121; pagina tion final for, 2.104-6, 2.113, 2.118, 16.108; paragraph numbers as, 1.125, 2.106, 16.12, 16.13, 16.108; punc tuation with, 16.25, 16.94, 16.100; for scattered entries, 16.12; for subentries, 16.10; undifferentiated, after main headings with subentries, 16.129 main headings: alphabetizing, 16.56 (see also alphabetizing); checking of, 16.133; cross-references following, 16.17, 16.26; definition and use, 16.9; headings beginning with numerals,
INDEX
index entries (continued) 16.65; initial lowercase letters, 16.11; inversion in, 16.9, 16.56, 16.94; noun or noun phrase for, 16.9; refining terms for, 16.126; vs. subentries, 16.127; typing and modifying, 16.122; undifferentiated locators after, 16.129
punctuation, 16.94-100; and alpha betizing, 16.59; checking, 16.133; colons, 16.19, 16.20, 16.25, 16.95; cross-references, 16.17-20, 16.26, 16.95-97; em dashes, 6.92, 16.27, 16.99, 16.141; en dashes, 16.100, 16.111, 16.134; in indented style, 16.26, 16.28, 16.95; inversions, 9.42, 16.94; with locators, 16.94, 16.100; in run-in style, 16.25, 16.27, 16.95, 16.96; subentries, 6.92, 16.95-96; sub-subentries, 16.27, 16.28, 16.99, 16.142
subentries: alphabetizing, 16.68-70 (see also alphabetizing); articles in, 16.51, 16.52, 16.68, 16.129; checking of, 16.133; chronological order, 16.70, 16.133; cross-references in, 16.10, 16.18, 16.20, 16.26; cross-references to, 16.19, 16.20; definition and use, 16.10; excessive number of, 16.133; indentation, 16.137; initial lowercase letters in, 16.11; vs. main entries, 16.127; marking proofs for, 16.120; numerical order, 16.69; punctuation, 6.92, 16.95-96; run-in vs. indented style, 16.25-26, 16.68, 16.103, 16.14143; syntax for, 16.10, 16.68, 16.129; typing and modifying, 16.122; when to use, 16.120, 16.128, 16.133 sub-subentries: avoiding, 16.27, 16.133; and continued lines, 16.139; indented style for, 16.143; punctuation, 16.27, 16.28, 16.99, 16.142; run-in style for, 16.27, 16.142; syntax for, 16.129 sub-sub-subentries, 16.28, 16.143 vanity entries, 16.31 See also alphabetizing; indexes; indexing indexes automatic "generation" not possible, 16.105 continued lines, 16.139 editing of, 2.67, 16.132-34
length of, 16.103, 16.118, 16.133 order of multiple indexes, 1.65 placement in book, 1.4, 1.65 proofreading of, 2.2, 2.105 publisher's preferences, 16.103, 16.106, 16.118, 16.123, 16.129
quality of, 16.132 repagination issues, 2.118 run-in style: chronological order for subentries in, 16.70; continued lines, 16.139; cross-references, 16.20, 16.25, 16.96; description, 16.25; ex amples, 16.141; hanging (flush-and hang) indentation, 16.24, 16.106; indentation guidelines, 16.137; punc tuation in, 16.25, 16.27, 16.95, 16.96; for sub-subentries, 16.28, 16.142; sub-subentries in, 16.27, 16.28, 16.141 running heads for, 1.14, 16.6 vs. searching, 1.110, 1.111, 16.2, 16.7 single vs. multiple indexes, 16.6, 16.115, 16.131
submission format of, 16.131 in table of contents, 1.38, fig. 1.5 titles for, 16.131 types: author-and-title, for anthologies, 16.6; authors' names, 16.6, 16.115, 16.145; embedded, 16.7; first lines, 16.6, 16.144, 16.145; hyperlinked, 1.125, 16.7, 16.13, 16.15, 16.102, 16.108; journals (see journals: indexes); multivolume works, 1.9;
INDEX
indexes (continued) online, 1.96, 1.109, 1.125; past con tributors, 1.100; single vs. multiple, 16.6, 16.115, 16.131
typographic considerations: bad breaks, 16.138; continued lines, 16.139; dis tinguishing types of entries and lo cators, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141, 16.143; justification, 16.131, 16.136; multiple indexes, 16.6; running heads, 1.14, 16.6; separate vs. consecutive pagina tion in multivolume works, 1.9; titles of works, 16.47; typesetting instruc tions, 16.134; type size and column width, 1.65, 16.135 value of, 16.2· as works made for hire, 4.10 See also alphabetizing; index entries; indexing indexing, 16.56-93 author's role in: list of terms for indexer, 16.30, 16.108; manuscript prepara tion, 16.24; vs. professional indexers, 16.3, 16.4; responsibility for, 2.2, 2.70; and software, 16.104 from first proofs, 2.104, 2.106, 2.118 glossaries, 1.61, 16.109 mechanics: alphabetizing (see alphabet izing); checking cross-references, 16.130; editing and refining entries, 16.124, 16.126-30; editing someone else's index, 16.132-33; index-card method, 16.107; marking proofs, 16.117-21, fig. 16,1; noting errors in text, 16.125, 16.131; pagination final for, 2.104-6, 2.113, 2.118, 16.108; parts of work to index, 16.109-16; preliminary work, 16.108; prepa ration, 16.101-7; and publisher's preferences, 16.103, 16.106, 16.118, 16.123, 16.129; software, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.117, 16.123; submitting index, 16.131; typesetting instruc tions, 16.134; typing entries, 16.122, 16.123, 16.131
indexing (continued) Indonesian, 16.80; Japanese, 16.81; Korean, 16.82; Portuguese, 16.83; Spanish, 16.83, 16.84; Thai, 16.85; Vietnamese, 16.86 names, personal: academic titles and of fices in, 16.40; basic rules, 16.71-75; clerical titles with, 16.39; compound, 16.72; as corporate names, 16.89; familiar forms of, 16.33, 16.71; full name unknown, 16.43; hyphens in, 16.72; with initials, 8.13, 16.63, 16.78; fr., Sr., III, and such with, 6.43, 16.41; Mac, Mc, or O' with, 16.73; as main entry, 16.9; married women's, 16.36, 16.84; non-English (see names, non-English personal above); with numbers, 16.37, 16.41, 16.66; with particles, 16.71, 16.84; people with same name, 16.35; pseudonyms, 16.34; saints, 16.42; Saint with, 16.74; sovereigns and other rulers, 16.37, 16.66; titled persons, 16.38 names, proper: abbreviations as, 16.46, 16.64; cross-references for (see cross-references, in indexes); entities with same name, 16.35, 16.45, 16.62; incomplete or unknown, 16.44; or ganizations, 16.46, 16.64, 16.88-89; passing mentions of, 16.31; person, place, and thing with same name, 16.62; resources on, 16.32, 16.71; variants of, 16.32 (see also names, per sonal above and place-names below) notes, 14.157, 16.110-13, 16.117 place-names, 16.90-93; definite article with, 16.91, 16.92; entities with same name, 16.62; with Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 16.90, 16.93; old vs. pres ent forms, 16.29; from short form in text, 16.44; two places with same name, 16.45 professional indexers, 2.70, 16.3, 16.4 publication process and schedules, 2.2, 2.67, 2.70, 16.4, 16.101
resources on, 16.8, 16.13, 16.58, 16.84, 16.104, 16.107
term choices: editing of, 16.124, 16.126-27, 16.129; marking proofs for, 16.117-20, fig. 16.1; noun or noun
INDEX
indexing (continued) phrase, 16.9; passing mentions omit ted, 16.31; reflective of text, 16.2930; and type of material, 16.118 titles of works, 16.47-55; article at beginning of, 16.48-49, 16.51-52, 16.56; authors, first lines, and titles, 16.145; with authors' names in parentheses, 16.50, 16.97; double posted under authors' names, 16.50; non-English, 16.48, 16.49, 16.52, 16.53; periodicals, 16.48-49; preposi tion at beginning of, 16.53; question mark or exclamation at end of, 16.54; separate index of titles, 16.6; subtitles omitted, 16.54; typographic treatment of, 16.47; works entries, 16.50 (see also alphabetizing: articles disregarded in) See also alphabetizing; index entries; indexes India, names in, 16.79 indicative mood, 5.121, 5.122, 5.124, 5.129, 5.130
indirect questions, 5.201, 6.42, 6.69 Indonesian language, names, 8.18, 16.80 infinitives, 5.106-9 dangling, 5.109 defined, 5.106 gerunds as substitute for, 5.112 with have, 5.153 personal pronoun as subject of, 5.44 split, 5.108, 5.171 uses of, 5.107 infinity symbol, circled (paper durability), 1.35
inflected genitives, 5.20 informal speech. See colloquial speech; slang infra, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) initialisms ampersands in, 10.10 articles with, 5.250, 7.33, 10.9 capitalization, 10.6, 10.25, 10.26 company names, 8.189, 10.24, 10.25 country names, 10.31, 10.32 definition and use, 10.2 disease and medical terms, 8.144 indexing of, 16.49, 16.64 journal titles, 14.170, 16.49
initialisms (continued) possessives of, 7.17, 8.189 small vs. full-size capitals for, 10.8 space omitted in, 10.5, 10.10 versions and sections of Bible, 10.48 See also abbreviations, general; abbrevia tions, specific; acronyms initials decorative, in text, 13.37 in and as names: alphabetizing of, 8.13, 16.63, 16.78; in author's preface, 1.41; for authors with same last name, 15.22, 16.35; for hyphenated given name, 8.7; and indexes of authors' names, 16.115; punctuation of, 7.66, 10.4, 10.12; in source citations, 14.7374, 15.12, 15.33, 15.53; spacing of, 8.4; vs. spelled-out names, 16.63, 16.115; and word division, 7.42 spacing of, 6.121, 7.66, 8.4, 10.12, 14.74, 15.33 See also initialisms in-law, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) in order that, 5.201 in press, 1.78, 1.86, 1.113, 8.188, 14.146. See also forthcoming inscriptions, collections of, 14.249 insertions. See additions and insertions Instagram, 8.191. See also social media
content institutions churches as, 8. 98 names: academic, 6.81, 8.68; as authors, 14.70; capitalization, 8.68, 8.85; in non-English languages, 11.26, 11.61, 11.88; place-names within, 6.39, 6.81; possessives of, 7.20; in source citations for dissertations, theses, lectures, and such, 14.215, 14.217; unusual capitalization in, 8.69 titles and offices in, 8.25, 8.27, 8.28 See also academic concerns; business and commerce; governmental enti ties; organization names; universities integral sign, 12.41 intellectual property rights basic vs. subsidiary, 4.17-18 derivative works and performance, 4.14 originality, 4.3, 4.5, 4.72 public display, 4.13, 4.14, 4.34
INDEX
intellectual property rights (continued) reproduction and distribution, 4.13, 4.34, 4.51, 4.64, 4.76 subdivision of, 4.34 trademark protection, 4.16 See also copyright; subsidiary rights intensifiers, 5.156 intensive and reflexive pronouns, 5.41, 5.51, 5.53 inter, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) interactive books, 14.268. See also multimedia content intercaps (midcaps), 8.69, 8.154 interior (internal) discourse, 13.43 interior monologues, 4.87, 13.43. See also dialogue; sp'eech interjections, 5.206-9 abbreviation of interjection, 10.42 capitalization, 7.31 as colloquial, 5.207 defined, 5.206 exclamations as, 5.216, 6.35 functional variation in, 5.208 punctuation with, 5.206, 6.35 spelling of, 7.31 words used exclusively as, 5.209 See also exclamation points internal (interior) discourse, 4.87, 13.43 International Digital Publishing Forum, 1.28 International ISBN Agency, 1.32, 1.74 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) archival practices, 1.114 country name abbreviations, 10.31 currency codes, 9.21, 9.23 ISBNs, 1.32 standard date format, 6.108, 9.35, 9.36 International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), 11.22 International Standard Book Number. See ISBN International Standard Serial Number. See ISSN International System of Units (Systeme international d'unites, SI), 10.51-59 base quantities and units, 10.52, 10.54 binary systems, 9.11 decimal points, 9.55, 9.56 derived units, 10.57, 10.60 form for, 10.52
International System of Units (Systeme international d'unites, SI) (continued) grams, 10.55 mega-, giga-, tera-, and such, 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55, 10.56 non-SI units, 10.59 overview, 10.51 resources on, 9.56, 10.51 SI units referred to as abbreviations, 10.2 technical abbreviations, list of, 10.49 internet abbreviations ofrelated terms, 10.49 defined, p. 982 images from, 3.15 protocols, 14.17 treatment of term, 7.80 See also addresses, email; biogs and blog posts; electronic publications; hy perlinks; online publications; URLs; websites and web pages interpolations and clarifications. See editorial interpolations and clarifications interrogative pronouns, 5.54-55, 5.58 interrogative sentences. See questions interviews and discussions editing of, 2.61 releases for, 4.77 source citations for, 14.211-13, 15.53 transcription of, 13.48 See also dialogue; direct address; personal communications; speech; transcriptions in-text citations. See text citations intra, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) intransitive verbs, 5.35, 5.98, 5.169, 5.170 introductions abstracts for, 1.76 copyright of, 4.75 format of term, 8.179, 14.110 indexing of, 16.109 to journal special issues, 1.102 location and format of, 1.43, 1.46, 1.47, 1.48 to parts of text, 1.38, 1.48 placement in book, 1.4, fig. 1.5 for previously published materials, 2.46 source citations for, 14.105, 14.110 submission of, 2.3 introductory words and phrases and alphabetizing, 16.68 colons with, 6.63-65, 13.16
INDEX
introductory words and phrases (continued) commas with, 6.30-31, 6.33-35, 13.14 em dashes with, 6.86 italics for, in legal-style citations, 14.272 no punctuation with, 13.15 inversion of names bibliographies and reference lists: first author's name only, 4.21, 14.23, 14.66, 14.76, 14.101, 15.9; single au thor, 14.75, 15.6; titles of manuscript collections, 14.229 personal names in indexes (see indexing: names, personal) inverted word order adverbial phrases with, 6.31 in exclamations, 5.216 indexes, 16.9, 16.56, 16.68, 16.90, 16.94 quotations with, 13.14 as syntax variation, 5.224 of titles beginning with articles, 16.4849, 16.51-52, 16.56 See also inversion of names Ireland, 1.34 irregular (strong) verbs, 5.100, 5.130, 5.144. See also auxiliary (helping) verbs irregular adjectives, 5.87 irregular adverbs, 5.165 irregular nouns, 5.20, 7.5, 7.16, 7.27 ISBN (International Standard Book Number) on copyright page, 1.20, 1.32, fig. 1.1 on covers and jackets, 1.74 defined, p. 982 for e-books, 1.28, 1.32, fig. 1.1, fig. 1.4 hyphenation of, 6.77 as metadata, 1.75 proofreading of, 2.108 for publications in multiple formats, 1.20, 1.32, 4.64, fig. 1.1, fig. 1.4 resources on, 1.32 ISBN Agency for the United States, 1.32, 1.74 ISO. See International Organization for Standardization ISSN (International Standard Serial Num ber), 1.20, 1.32, 1.79, 1.84, 1.86, 1.92, 1.103, p. 982 ISSN International Centre, 1.32 issue numbers in copyright line, 1.103 on journal cover, 1.84, 2.109
issue numbers (continued) as metadata, 1.92 numerals for, 9.27, 14.171 omission of, 15.48 overview, 1.80 proofreading of, 2.134 and retractions, 1. 91 i n source citations, 14.23, 14.165, 14.171, 14.177, 14.185, 15.9, 15.47 in table of contents, 1.87 issues (of periodicals), p. 982. See also issue numbers it, 5.47, 5.115, 5.239, 5.240, 5.246, 8.77, 8.118 Italian language, 11.46-53 abbreviation of Italian, 10.42 capitalization, 8.9, 11.46 punctuation, 11.47, 11.48, 11.49, 11.52-53 quotations and dialogue, 11.47 resources on, 11.46 special characters, 11.53 word division, 11.50-52 italics defined, p. 982 within italicized titles, reversed, 8.173, 14.95 marking manuscript for, 2.73, 2.97, 12.63 marking proofs for, 2.131 plurals of words in, 7.12 possessives in, 7.29 proofreading of, 2.113, 2.131 and punctuation, 6.2, 14.89 and semantic markup, 2.82nl, 7.49 for titles of works (see under titles of works) vs. underlining, 2.15, 2.80 uses: abbreviations, 2.23, 10.7, 10.50, 14.60; added to original quotation, 13.62; computer terminology, 7.79; in cross-references in source citations, 14.81; emphasis, 7.48, 7.50, 13.62, 14.37; enzyme names, 8.133; epigraphs, 13.36; gene names, 8.132; genus and species, 8.2, 8.120, 8.122, 8.123, 8.173; glossary terms, 2.23; glossed American Sign Language, 11.133; highlighting key terms, 7.56; index cross-references, 16.15, 16.20, 16.22, 16.23; index references to illustrations, 16.116, 16.140, 16.141; legal-style citations, 14.272; for let ters as letters (e.g., a), 7.64; locators
INDEX
italics (continued) (e.g., above, left) in captions, 3.24; mathematical copy, 12.10, 12.11, 12.56, 12.63, 12.65; music dynamics, 7.75; N, n, in tables, 3.85, fig. 3.20; non-English terms in English con text, 7.53, 7.54, 11.3, 11.5, 11.75, 11.88, 11.94, 14.272; notes keyed to text by page numbers, 14.53, fig. 14.6; notes to tables, 3.77, 3.78; numbers and letters in lists, 6.129; rhyme schemes, 7.69; run-in subheads, 2.18; SI base quantities, 10.54; sic, 6.73, 7.55, 13.61; significance (probability) levels (p), 3.80; stage di_rections, 13.46; totals in tables, 3.63, fig. 3.15; transcriptions of discussions or interviews, 13.48; words and phrases used as words, 6.2, 7.63
copyright lines in, 1.95, 1.103 dates of submission and acceptance, 1.95, 1.104
editor's notes in, 1.95 endnotes in, 1.108, 14.43, 14.46 first-page information, 1.95, 1.103 hyperlinks within, 1.96 making changes to after submission, 2.5 menus in, 1.96 metadata for, 1.92, 1.100 page ranges for, 1.79, 1.81, 1.87, 1.92,
word-processing styles for, 2.82 See also non-English materials; non English words and phrases; typo graphic considerations Italy, 9.23. See also Italian language
it is I, it is me, 5.250 its, it's , 2.111, 5.50, 5.250
published before print version, 1.78,
1.103, 14.23, 14.174
14.171 1.81, 1.86, 1.104, 1.112-13, 14.172
jackets of books. See covers of journals and paperback books; hardcover books: jackets Jacobian matrix, 12.51 Japan, 9.23. See also Japanese language Japanese language, 11.86-90 characters for, 11.90 · names, 8.16, 11.88, 16.81 resources on, 11.85 romanization system (Hepburn system), 11.86-87
generally, 1. 94; home page, 1.84, 1.86, 1.87; hyperlinks (see under hyperlinks); illustrations, 1.84, 1.107; indexes (see indexes); issues, 1.80; letters to the editor, 1.94, 1.101; list ofupcoming issues, 1.84, 1.86, 2.109; masthead, 1.84, 1.85; pagination, 1.81, 1.82, fig. 1.11; retractions, 1.91; running heads or feet, 1.83, 2.76; sections, 1.83, 1.87, 1.95; table of con tents, 1.84, 1.86, 1.87, 1.90, 2.109, fig. 1.11; tables, 1.106, 3.60, 3.64, 3.86; volumes, 1.80, 1.81, fig. 1.11 continuous publishing model, 1.82, 1.113, 14.174
contributors (see contributors to multi author volumes and journals; journal articles: authors' names) copyright of, 1.79, 1.84, 1.95, 1.103, 2.109, 4.43, 4.59, 4.64
and Creative Commons licenses, 4.62 defined, 14.166 design, 1.84, 1.115 editorial policy, 1.84, 1.86, 1.88 editor's copyright, 4.57 electronic workflow for, 1.77 errata and corrections, 1.90, 1.94, 1.112 frequency of publication, 1.80, 1.84, 1.86 history of, on home page, 1.86 house style, 1.108-9, 1.116, 2.49, 2.64, 14.2-4, 16.103
indexes: authors' names, 16.6; informa tion about, 1.84, 1.86; keywords, 1. 93, 16.7, 16.30, 16.126; of past contribu tors, 1.100; preparation for, 16.102, 16.103; to printed volumes, 1.110; schedule for, 16.4; vs. searching,
INDEX
journals (continued) 1.110, 1.111, 16.7; term choices for, 16.30 ISSN, 1.20, 1.79, 1.84, 1.86, 1.92, 1.103, p. 982 issue numbers (see issue numbers) new series of, 14.184 open-access publishing models, 4.61 organizing principle, 1.80 peer review for, 2.5 production schedule, 2.102, fig. 2.2 proofreading of, 2.102, 2.134 publishing agreements, 4.55-57, fig. 4.1
simultaneous print/electronic publishing model for (see simultaneous print/electronic publishing model) special issues, 1.84, 1.87, 1.89, 1.102, 4.59, 14.178
supplements, 14.179 titles: abbreviations of, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, 16.49; in copyright line, 1.103; on cover, 1.84; indexing of, 16.49; initial the in, 8.170, 14.170; italicized terms within, 8.173; italics and capi talization, 8.168, 14.86, 14.170, 15.9; magazine, journal, review, and such, 8.171; in names of awards and prizes, 8.172; non-English language, 14.98, 14.170; in running heads, 1.83; series, 14.184; shortened, 15.13, 15.46; similar names, 14.182; subjects not interchangeable with, 8.174; in table of contents, 1.87 trademark protection, 4.16 treatment of term, 8.171 version control, 1.112 volume editor's responsibilities, 2.41, 2.42 volume numbers (see under volumes and volume numbers) work made for hire in, 4.10 See also abstracts; contributors to multi author volumes and journals; covers of journals and paperback books; journal articles; and many ofthe above elements under their own headings
JPEG files, p. 982 Jr. ("Junior"), 6.43, 7.42, 10.19, 16.41 judicial bodies, 14.276-79 basic elements in source citations, 14.276
Canadian courts, 14.294 international courts, 14.304 names and terms, treatment in text, 8.64 numbered divisions of, 9.46 UK courts, 14.298 US courts, 14.277-79 See also legal and public documents; legal-style citations justification defined, p. 982 flush left (ragged right), 2.10, 3.73, 7.47, 16.136, fig. 3.19, p. 986 indexes, 16.131, 16.136 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.10 marking manuscript for, 2.98 marking proofs for, 2.127 and spacing, 2.125, 6.120, 6.121 words in table columns, 3.73, fig. 3.19 See also margins K (1,000), 9.24 kern, kerning, 12.11, p. 983
keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.78 keys, computer, 7.77 keys, musical, 7.74 keys to illustrations (legends) capitalization and consistency, 3.20 vs. captions, 3.21 defined, 3.7 letters in, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6 scaling of, 3.19 See also labels keywords in abstracts, 1.93 for books, 1.75, 1.76, 2.25 context-sensitive searching for, 1.111, 1.120
in journal indexes, 1.93, 16.7, 16.30, 16.126
for journals, 1.92, 1.95 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.25 in shortened running heads, 2.76 kind, kinds, 5.52 Kindle, 14.159. See also file formats and
devices kinship terms, 7.89 (sec. 3), 8.36
INDEX
Koran (Qur'an), 8.103, 11.77, 14.241 Korean language, 8.17, 16.82
layout, p. 983
1.
leaders (several spaced periods), 3.64, fig. 3.16. See also ellipses leading, 2.125, p. 983. See also line spacing leaf numbers. See folios least, 5.86, 5.87, 5.88, 5.163, 7.89 (sec. 2) leaves, book, 1.5. See also folios; page numbers lectures and lecture series, 8.87, 14.217, 14.264, 14.267. See also speeches left or right indent, 2.11 legal and public documents acts and treaties, 8.66, 8.80, 8.81,
(line) and II. (lines), 14.156 labels vs. captions, 3.21 in charts, 3.44-45 in illustrations and keys, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, fig. 3.3, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6 marked on line art to be redrawn, 3.20 scaling of, 3.19 on submitted artwork, 2.27 of x and y axes, 3.43, fig. 3.8 See also keys to illustrations labor unions, 8.70, 9.49 landscape, p. 983 "last modified" dates, 14.13 LaTeX, 12.2, 12.9, 12.68, fig. 12.3, table 12.1 Latin alphabet IPA notation, 11.22 languages using, generally, 11.18-20, 11.70
special characters, 11.2, 11.21, 11.22, table 11.1 (see also special characters) See also transliteration and transliterated text; and specific languages Latin language, 11.54-59 abbreviations in, 7.55, 10.7, 10.42 (see also et al., ibid.) capitalization, 11.54 ligatures for, 7.34 prepositions in, 8.159 for provisional chemical elements, 10.63 roman type for terms in, 7.55, 10.7, 10.42, 13.66
special characters, 11.59 titles of works in, 11.54 word division, 11.55-58 See also classical Greek and Latin works; genus and species names; scientific and technical terminology latitude, 10.36. See also compass points and directions laws and statutes. See legislation laws and theories mathematical, 12.56 schools of thought, 8.79 scientific, 8.148 See also philosophical terms and movements; scientific and technical terminology
quotations in, 13.18, 13.21 resources and stylebooks on, 14.3, 14.269, 14.270, 14.287, 14.289, 14.290, 14.292, 14.297 shall in, 5.250 See also legal and public documents,
source citations for legal and public documents, source cita tions for, 14.269-305 abbreviations in: cases and court decisions, 14.276-77, 14.279, 14.294, 14.298; congressional debates and hearings, 14.285-87; constitutions, 14.280; generally, 14.274; interna tional entities, 14.304; legislation, 14.295; legislative debates, 14.301; legislative documents, 14.281, 14.299; UK command papers, 14.302 acts and treaties, 14.275, 14.290 arabic vs. roman numerals in, 14.147 author-date reference system, 14.271, 15.58-59
bills and resolutions, 14.283 Canada, 14.269, 14.293-96 cases and court decisions, 8.82, 14.272, 14.275-79, 14.294, 14.298, 15.59
Chicago- vs. legal-style, 14.291 constitutions, 14.272, 14.280 courts, 14.276-79, 14.294, 14.298, 14.304 id. in, 14.35, 14.275, 14.279 international entities, 14.304-5
INDEX
legal and public documents, source citations for (continued) loose-leaf services, 14.220 municipal ordinances, 14.288, 14.300 note form, 14.271 online documents, 14.270, 14.276, 14.298, 14.300, 14.305
page numbers and other locators, 14.273, 14.276, 14.284, 14.290, 14.294, 14.303, 14.305 private (e.g., wills), 14.219 resources and stylebooks on, 14.3, 14.269, 14.270 secondary sources, 14.291 shortened citations, 14.275, 14.276, 14.279 typefaces, 14.272 United Kingdom, 14.297-303; command papers, 14.302; legal cases, 14.298; parliamentary debates, 14.301; par liamentary publications, 14.299; re sources on, 14.297, 14.300; statutes, 14.300; unpublished, 14.303
United States: bills and resolutions, 14.283; congressional reports and documents, 14.285; debates before 1873, 14.287; debates since 1873, 14.286; hearings, 14.284; legal cases, 14.277-79; legislation, 14.282, 14.288; municipal ordinances and state laws, 14.288; presidential docu ments, 14.289; secondary sources on, 14.291; unpublished, 14.292 unpublished, 14.292;14.296, 14.303 legal blacklining (redlining), p. 986. See also tracking changes legal cases source citations for: basic elements, 14.276; Canadian cases, 14.294; ital ics for, 14.272, 14.276; notes and text citations, 8.82, 15.59; short forms, 14.275; UK courts, 14.298; US courts, 14.277-79
treatment in text, 8.82 v. in, 8.82, 14.276 legal-style citations, 14.269-75 abbreviations in, generally, 14.274 vs. Chicago-style, 14.291 note form, 14.271 page numbers and other locators,
legal-style citations (continued) 14.273, 14.276, 14.284, 14.290, 14.294, 14.303, 14.305 resources on, 14.3, 14.269, 14.270 shortened citations, 14.275, 14.276, 14.279 typefaces, 14.272 See also courts; legal and public docu
ments legends, 3.7, 3.12, 3.19-21, 3.24, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6. See also captions legislation abbreviations, 14.281, 14.299 bills and resolutions compared, 14.283 Canadian, 14.295 debates on, 14.286-87, 14.301 formal and generic names for, 8.80, 8.81 hearings on, 14.284 published text of, 14.282 secondary sources on, 14.291 short forms for names, 14.275 state, 14.288 United Kingdom, 14.300 US federal, 14.282 US state and municipal, 14.288 See also acts and treaties; copyright; legal and public documents legislative and deliberative bodies abbreviations, 14.281, 14.283 hearings of, 14.284 names and terms for, 8.62 See also legal and public documents length (measurement). See International System of Units; metric system; units of measurement length (parts of text) books, 14.153 indexes, 16.103, 16.118, 16.133 manuscripts, 2.4, 2.52, p. 977 notes, 14.40, 14.56 quotations, 13.10, 13.25 table titles and column heads, 3.54 lesbian, gay, 8.41 less, 5.7, 5.85, 5.87, 5.88, 5.163, 6.47, 7.89 (sec. 2) less,fewer, 5.250 let, 5.215
letter-by-letter alphabetizing basics of, 16.59 for bibliographies, 14.65
INDEX
letter.-by-letter alphabetizing (continued) for indexes offirst lines, 16.144, 16.145 preferred for indexes, 16.58 vs. word-by-word, 16.57, 16.58, 16.61, 16.123
letters (alphabet) archaic, 13.7 hyphens to separate, 6.77 as letters, 7.15, 7.64 marking spacing changes between, 2.125
names of (spelled-out pronunciations), 7.68
ordinal, superscript, 11.27 plurals of, 7.15, 7.64, 7.65 spellings for, 7.68 uses: in common expressions, 7.64; generations, 8.42; as identifiers in classical Greek and Latin works, 14.243, 14.245, 14.248; illustration parts, 3.7, 3.12, 3.24, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6; lists and outlines, 2.21, 6.127, 6.129, 6.132, 7.45; multiple appendixes, 1.59; musical symbols, 7.71-75; notes to parts of tables, 3.79, figs. 3.14-15; parts of book, 8.180; rhyme schemes, 7.69; same-author, same-year works in reference lists, 15.20; scholastic grades, 7.65; shapes (e.g., S curve), 7.67; standing for proper names, 7.66; vessel names, 8.116 See also alphabetizing; alphabets; capital letters; initialisms; initials; special characters letters (correspondence) chronological order, 1.52 copyright issues, 4.19 multiple paragraphs quoted, 13.35 permissible changes, 13.8 punctuation in, 6.14, 6.53, 6.66 quotations from, 13.10, 13.61 source citations for: examples, 14.229; in manuscript collections, 14.228; private collections, 14.231; published collections, 14.111, 15.43; shortened citations, 14.111 See also letters to the editor; manuscript collections; personal communica tions; unpublished and informally published materials
letters to the editor, 1.94, 1.101, 14.196. See also editorials lexicalized signs (ASL), 11.131 libel, 4.73
libraries. See archival practices; databases; library catalogs; manuscript collec tions Library and Archives Canada, 1.34 library catalogs alphabetization in, 16.58 Chinese romanization in, 11.82 non-English bibliographic terms in, 14.102
for non-English titles, 14.98 for personal names, 8.3, 16.71 for publishers' names, 14.133, 14.138 Library of Congress, 1.32, 1.34, 4.47, 11.82, 11.84. See also Cataloging in-Publication (CIP) data; library catalogs licenses for copyrighted works Copyright Clearance Center, 1.79, 1.103, 4.97
Creative Commons, 4.62 electronic works, 4.64, 4.65, 4.66 exclusive vs. nonexclusive, 4.35 goals of parties to, 4.36 handling requests for, 4.70 journals, 1.103 and open-access publishing models, 4.61
payment for, 4.37 rights database as record of, 4.70 and subsidiary rights, 4.17, 4.34 termination of, 4.38 universities' claim to, 4.67 See also copyright; intellectual property rights; permissions; publishing agreements; subsidiary rights "life plus seventy" rule, 4.23, 4.25, 4.26 ligatures, 7.34, 7.35, 11.37, 11.122, p. 983 like, as, 5.185, 5.250 like, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) limp (flexi-) binding, p. 980
line art charts and graphs as, 3.4, 3.41 color in, 3.19 defined, p. 983 examples of, figs. 3.3-4, fig. 3.6 publisher's redrawing of, 3.20
INDEX
line art (continued) scaling of, 3.19 See also illustrations line breaks and em dashes, 6.90 and en dashes, 6.82 mathematical expressions, 12.23, 12.50 and nonbreaking spaces, 6.11, 6.119, 6.121, 7.42, 7.44, 7.45, 11.28 and numbers, 7.42, 7.43, 7.44 and proper names, 7.42 in reflowable electronic formats, 6.82, 6.90, 6.113, 7.36, 7.47, 14.18 run-in lists, 7.45 and slashes, 6.113 and URLs, 2.13;6.113, 7.46, 14.18 See also word division line editing. See manuscript editing line numbers avoiding use of I. , ll., 14.156 footnotes keyed to, 14.53, fig. 14.5 format of, 14.156 punctuation of, 9.54 in text citations, 13.67 lines (rules) above continued footnotes, 14.41, fig. 14.1 avoided in illustrations, 3.19 to be filled in, 6.93 in tables, 3.53, 3.57, 3.58, 3.74, 3.86, figs. 3.13-14, fig. 3.16 lines (text) blank, 1.58, 2.8, 2.98 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 indentation, symbol for, 2.98, 2.126 marking manuscript for, 2.98 proofreading of, 2.116, 2.117 as text break, 1.58, 2.8 widows and orphans, 2.116, 2.117, pp. 984, 990 See also justification; leading; line spacing line spacing and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 for manuscript editing, 2.91 for manuscript submission, 2.6, 2.8, 2.19-20, 2.22-24 between paragraphs or stanzas in quota tions, 13.22, 13.24, 13.25 word-processing styles for, 2.82 linking (copula or connecting) verbs, 5.45, 5.82, 5.93, 5.101, 5.154, 5.170, 6.30. See also be-verbs
links. See hyperlinks lists in text, 6.127-32 elided, in mathematical expressions, 12.19 outlines, 2.21, 2.36, 6.127, 6.132 run-in, 6.128, 6.129, 6.131, 7.45 vertical: abbreviations in, 10.29; as alternative to tables, 3.51; as block quotations, 13.10; manuscript prepa ration guidelines, 2.21; in mathe matical expressions, 12.16, 12.18; placement of, 2.62; punctuation and format, 2.11, 2.21, 6.92, 6.129-31, 6.132; vs. run-in, 6.128, 6.129, 6.131 See also outlines lists of abbreviations alphabetizing, 1.44, fig. 1.8 cross-checking, 2.32 format and placement, 1.4, 1.44, 2.23, 14.60, fig. 1.8 for frequently cited works, 13.67, 14.60, fig. 14.7 when to create, 10.3 lists of donors, 8.20 lists ofillustrations and tables, 3.38-40 alterations in, 2.136 appropriate use of, 1.39, 3.38 artwork inventory linked to, 3.17 captions shortened for, 1.39, 3.40, fig. 1.7 cross-checking, 2.32 editing of, 2.57 format and placement, 1.39, 3.30, 3.38, figs. 1.6-7 for galleries, 3.39 and indexing, 16.109 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.26 as navigation aid, 3.38 placement in book, 1.4, 2.26 proofreading of, 2.115 submission of, 2.3 See also illustration credits and credit lines lists of special characters, 2.3, 2.16, 11.21, 11.122, 12.13 literary agents, 4.18 literary works characters in, 5.129, 8.35 cultural terms for (e.g., deconstruction), 8.79 dramatic rights, 4.64 fair use of, 4.86, 4.87 frequent reference to single, 13.67
INDEX
literary works (continued) personification in, 8.37 rhyme schemes, 7.69 sound recordings of, 14.264 titles, 9.43, 16.50 and trademark protection, 4.16 See also classical Greek and Latin works; plays; poetry; quotations; titles of works literature cited. See source citations lithocase (paper-over-board format), 1.71 little, 5.90, 5.230 live-stage rights, 4.64 location numbers, in e-books, 1.123, 14.160 locators in captions, for parts of illustrations (e.g., above, left), 3.24 in classical Greek and Latin works (see classical Greek and Latin works: source citations) in electronic publications: alternatives, 1.123, 2.35, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23; database accession numbers, 2.34, 14.215, 14.257, 14.270 (see also hyperlinks) ff., 10.42, 14.148-49, 16.12 in index entries (see index entries: locators) in legal-style citations, 14.273 paragraph numbers as, 1.125, 2.106, 14.148, 16.12, 16.13, 16.108 See also locators in source citations; page numbers; volumes and volume numbers locators in source citations chapter numbers, 14.106, 14.153 folio editions, 14.155 generally, 14.22, 15.8, 15.23 illustration and table numbers, 14.158 line numbers, 14.53, 14.156, fig. 14.5 numbered notes, 14.157 signed signatures, 14.154 loc. cit. (loco citato), 10.42, 14.36 logo, publisher's, 1.19, 1.69, 1.70 longitude, 10.36. See also compass points and directions loose-leaf services, 14.220 Lord, Lady, 8.32, 16.38 lowercase letters abbreviations ending with, 10.4 defined, p. 983
lowercase letters (continued) "down style," 8.1 in index entries, 16.11 marking manuscript for, 2.97 marking proofs for, 2.131 personal names beginning with, 8.4, 8.5 proper names beginning with, 8.69, 8.154 See also capitalization; sentence-style capitalization Ltd., 6.44, 10.23, 14.134 -(y, words ending in adjectives, 5.158 adverbs, 5.93, 5.158, 5.160, 5.163, 5.164, 7.85, 7.86 hyphenation not needed with, 7.85, 7.86, 7.89 (sec. 2) lyrics, 4.87, 13.3. See also musical works Mac, Mc, 16.73 macro, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4)
macros, 2.79, 2.80, p. 983 Madame, Mme, 10.17 Mademoiselle, Mlle, 10.17 magazines copyright notice, 4.43 defined, 14.166 indexing names of, 16.49 serial rights, 4.64 source citations for, 14.188-90; article titles, 14.188; author-date reference system, 15.49; dates, 14.165, 14.188; vs. journals, 14.166; magazine titles, 14.190; newspaper supplements, 14.197; online articles, 14.189; page numbers, 14.188-89; regular depart ments, columns, and features, 8.177, 14.190 treatment of term, 8.171 See also journals; newspapers; period icals mailing addresses abbreviations in, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27-29, 10.33-34 compass points in, 10.34 numbers in, 9.50-52, 9.54 publisher's, 1.19, 1.20, 1.21, 1.84, 1.95 treatment in text, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29 See also compass points and directions; email; geographical terminology mailing lists, electronic, 14.210
INDEX
mail-to links, 1.86, 1.121 main headings. See under index entries male and female, 5.259 manuscript collections noncopyright restrictions on, 4.83 quotations from, 4.83, 13.61 source citations for, 14.221-31; author date reference system, 15.54; col lections ofletters and such, 14.228; dates for, 14.224; examples, 14.229, 14.230; folios, page numbers, and such, 14.225; lists of abbreviations for, 14.60, fig. 14.7; locations of depositories, 14.227; musical scores, 14.256; note forms vs. bibliographic entries, 14.222; one vs. several items cited from a collection, 14.230; pa pers and manuscripts (terms), 14.226; private collections, 14.231; resources on, 14.221; specific vs. generic collec tion titles, 14.223 titles of, 8.188, 14.222, 14.223, 14.226 See also letters (correspondence); un published and informally published materials manuscript editing, 2.48-99 basics: author availability, 2.52; author queries (see author queries); author's review, 2.2, 2.70-72, 2.82, 2.88, 2.101; vs. developmental editing, 2.48, 2.50; errors and fact-checking, 2.56, 2.108, 13.6; estimating time for, 2.52; mechanical editing, 1.116, 2.45, 2.49; reference works for, 2.54; stages of editing, 2.53, 2.79; style sheets, 2.55, 2.83, 2.111, fig. 2.3; substantive editing, 2.48, 2.50, 2.51; volume editor's responsibilities, 2.41-42
checking consistency and format: cross-checking, 2.32-35, 2.53, 2.59; en dash, 2.14; note citations against reference lists and bibliographies, 2.32, 2.63, 15.21; notes vs. reference numbers in text, 2.32, 2.53, 2.62; per missions against manuscript, 4.79; style sheets for, 2.55, fig. 2.3; subhead hierarchy, 2.59; text citations against reference lists, 2.32, 2.63, 15.21; titles and subtitles against table of contents, 2.58
manuscript editing (continued) electronic editing mechanics, 2.78-89; backup copies, 2.40, 2.78, 2.80; cleaning up files, 2.39, 2.53, 2.59, 2.61, 2.63, 2.79-80, 2.85, 14.5; doc ument comparison software, 2.86; final checks and preparation, 2.89; global changes, 2.69, 2.79, 2.80, 2.85; markup (see markup for manuscript editing; markup languages, formal); in PDF files, 1.118; silent changes, 2.69, 2.85; version control, 2.5, 2.78, 2.79; word-processing styles, 2.82, 2.83, fig. 2.4 (see also tracking changes; word-processing software) independent professionals for, 2.48, 2.73 paper-only, 2.90-99; author queries, 2.92; backup copies, 2.6, 2.71, 2.90; capitalizing and lowercasing, 2.97; checking author's changes, 2.72; circling, 2.93, 2.95; conventions of, 2.91; dashes and hyphens, 2.96; and electronic file cleanup, 2.79; example of, fig. 2.5; and generic markup, 2.99; indentation and spacing, 2.98; insertions, deletions, and substi tutions, 2.94, 2.95, fig. 2.6; italics and boldface marks, 2.97; keeping a clean copy, 2.90; manuscript format considerations for, 2.6, 2.8; marking manuscript components, 2.99; mathematical copy, 12.61-68, figs. 12.1-2; note renumbering, 2.62; and proofreading, 2.110; punctuation changes, 2.95; style sheets for, 2.55, fig. 2.3; type specifications, 2.74, 2.93 (see also author queries) preparing final manuscript for produc tion, 2.73-77; checking markup, 2.73; checklist for, 2.77; document com parison software for, 2.86; markup (see markup for manuscript editing; markup languages, formal); pagi nation, 2.75-76; preparing running heads, 2.76; type specifications, 2.74 resources on, 2.54, 2.56 schedule for, 2.2, 2.52 specific parts: captions, 2.65; cross references, 2.60; front matter, 2.57; illustrations, 2.65; indexes, 2.67, 16.132-34; lists and outlines, 2.21;
INDEX
manuscript editing (continued) mathematical copy, 12.2, 12.13, 12.61-68, figs. 12.1-2; quotations and previously published material, 2.61, 2.69, 2.91, 11.16; source citations, 2.62-64; subheads, 2.59; tables (see below); titles of parts, chapters, and articles, 2.58 tables, 3.81-88; adjusting and checking, 2.32, 3.81, 3.86; basic approach, 2.66; continued lines and repeated column heads, 3.86-87, fig. 3.25; electronic file cleanup, 2.80; N, n, 3.85; number ranges, 3.83; percent, percentage, 3.82; signs and symbols, 3.82-84 and word division, 7.36, 7.46 See also manuscript editors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors manuscript editors communications with authors, 2.68-72; checking author's changes, 2.72; cover letter and instructions, 2.70, 2.88, 2.92; early contact, 2.68; edit ing sample, 2.52, 2.68; permissions double-checked, 4.79; sending edited manuscript, 2.71, 2.88 (see also author queries) discretion and flexibility, 2.48, 2.51, 2.64 post-proofreading tasks, 2.101 production process role, 2.2 schedule for editing, 2.52 software knowledge, 2.79 See also manuscript editing manuscript preparation guidelines for authors, 2.3-47 basics: accuracy and consistency, 2.7, 2.56, 13.6; changes after submis sion, 2.5; checklist, 2.3; indexing as responsibility of authors, 2.2, 2.70; letter to publisher, 2.4, 2.15, 2.39; list of special characters, 2.3, 2.16, 11.21, 11.122, 12.13; proofreading before submission, 2.100; publication pro cess and schedule for, 2.2, figs. 2.1-2; submission requirements, 2.2, 2.3-6, 2.36-40 cross-checking tasks: checklist of, 2.32; citation data and format, 14.5; cross references, 2.32, 2.35; quotations, 2.32, 2.33, 13.6; URLs, 2.3, 2.32, 2.34 electronic files: accuracy and consis-
manuscript preparation guidelines for authors (continued) tency, 2.7; backups, 2.4, 2.40, 14.5; embedded and hidden comments removed, 2.39; naming, 2.37; for notes in compilations, 2.45; number ing pages in, 2.38; separate vs. single, 2.36, 2.80; source citation coding re moved, 14.5 (see also electronic files) formatting, 2.7-25; abbreviations list, 2.23; abstracts and keywords, 2.3, 2.25; bibliographies and reference lists, 2.24, 14.67, 15.17; block quota tions, 2.11, 2.19, 2.20, 13.9; chapter and part titles, 2.17; dashes, 2.14; glossaries, 2.23; hyphens, 2.13; ital ics, boldface, and roman, 2.15, 12.63, 12.65; justification and margins, 2.10; keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.78; line spacing, 2.6, 2.8, 2.19-20, 2.22-24; lists, 2.21; notes, 2.22, 14.24, 14.41, 14.43, 14.53; para graphs, 2.12, 2.19, 2.20; publisher's guidelines, 2.7; spacing between words, 2.9; subheads, 2.1�; word division, 2.13, 7.36, 7.46, 7.47 (see also electronic files) illustrations and tables, 2.26-31, 3.1520; artwork, scans for, 2.27; captions, 2.3, 2.26, 2.37; identification and inventory of artwork, 3.16-18; notes, 2.31; numbering of, 2.28, 2.29; preparation of tables, 3.47; separate files for each component, 2.26, 2.36; submission to publisher, 3.3, 3.4, 3.15; text references and callouts for, 2.26, 2.30, 2.32, 2.65-66, 3.8-9 (see also illustrations; tables) special types of works: compilations and previously published materials, 2.4347; multiauthor volumes or journals, 2.41-42 See also mathematical copy: manuscript preparation; permissions; proofread ing; version control manuscripts abbreviation of term, 7.15, 7.33, 10.42, 14.226 acceptance of, 4.52 file conversion, 2.7, 2.79, 2.80 length of, 2.4, 2.52
INDEX
manuscripts (continued) making changes after submission, 2.5 numbering pages of, 2.38 paper-only, 2.6, 2.8, 2.37, 2.38, 2.43, 2.45, 2.61 version of record, 2.5 See also electronic files; manuscript collections; manuscript editing; man uscript preparation guidelines for authors; word-processing software maps consistency with text, 2.65 credit lines for, 3.33, 8.199 keys to, 3.7 lists of, 1.39 numbering of, 3.10 place-names on, 2.60, 3.20, 8.45 preparation for reproduction, 3.20 source citations of, 14.237 symbols or patterns used in, 3.25 titles of, 8.199, 14.237 as works made for hire, 4.10 See also illustrations margins adjusting for tables, 3.86 author queries and corrections in, 2.10, 2.43, 2.91, 2.92-93 definitions, pp. 975, 981, 983 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 indexes, 16.131 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.10 marking proofs for, 2.127 proofreading corrections in, 2.120 running heads in, 1.10 screen, in online publications, 1.122 silent changes to, 2.85 See also justification marketing. See promotion markup defined, p. 983 semantic, 2.82nl, 7.49 word-processing styles for, 2.18, 2.21, 2.82, 2.83, fig. 2.4 See also markup for manuscript editing; markup languages, formal markup for manuscript editing (generic markup) angle brackets in, 2.16, 2.30, 2.81, 6.104 callouts, 2.87 character-level formatting, 2.73, 2.81 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80
markup for manuscript editing (generic markup) (continued) vs. formal markup languages, 2.81 information, in production checklist, 2.77 overview, 2.73 and paper-only markup, 2. 99 part and chapter titles, 2.58 semantic, 2.82nl, 7.49 subheads, 2.59, 2.80, 2.81 tables, 3.86 tags for, 2.81 type specifications in, 2.74, 2.93 See also markup languages, formal markup languages, formal abbreviations ofnames, 10.49 and accessibility, 3.28, 3.88, 12.2nl and electronic workflow, 1.117, 2.83, 2.137 vs. generic markup, 2.81 HTML, 1.77, 1.117, 1.118, 1.119, 2.139, p. 981 and hyperlinks, 1.120 JATS, 1.117 LaTeX, 12.2, 12. 9, 12.68, fig. 12.3, table 12.1 MathML, 12.2, 12.2nl, p. 983 and metadata, 1.75, 1.92 overview, 2.83 in plain-text files, p. 985 and punctuation, 6.4, 6.8, 6.104 semantic markup in, 2.82nl, 7.49 SGML, p. 987 small caps in, 10.8 Unicode standard required by, 11.2 and word-processing styles, 2.82 XHTML, p. 990 XSL, p. 990 mass (noncount) nouns, 5.7 mass-market paperbacks, 4.64 masthead, journal, 1.84, 1.85 mathematical copy abbreviations: in mathematical expres sions, 12.3, 12.11, 12.17, 12.64, table 12.2; of mathematics, 10.42; statistics, 10.50, table 12.3 enunciations, 12.25, 12.56 fractions in, 12.45-49 manuscript preparation, 12.61-68; author's role in, 12.3, 12.13, 12.62; examples of, 12.68, figs. 12.1-2;
INDEX
mathematical copy (continued) fonts, 12.11-13, 12.66; format, 12.61; kerning, 12.11; potentially ambiguous symbols, 12.68, table 12.4; software for, 12.2, 12.2nl, 12.9, table 12.1; subscripts and superscripts, 12.67; typefaces, 12.63, 12.65 punctuation in, 12.7, 12.18, 12.38, 12.54 resources on, 12.1-2, 12.23 See also decimal points; International System of Units; mathematical expressions; metric system; scientific and technical works mathematical expressions, 12.3-60 abbreviations in, 12.3, 12.11, 12.17, 12.36, 12.49, 12.60, 12.64, table 12.2 commas in, 12.16, 12.18, 12.19, 12.28, 12.36, 12.38 consistency of notation, 12.4 delimiters, 12.26-35; alternative cases, 12.35; binomial coefficients, 12.32; common, 12.26; functional notation, 12.27; functions enclosed by, 12.17; inner product denoted by, 12.31; intervals, 12.30; for radicals in text, 12.44; rewriting fractions using expo nents, 12.49; set notation, 12.28-29; vertical bars, 12.26, 12.28, 12.33-34 determinants in, 12.51 in display, 12.21-23; alternative cases, 12.35; centering, 12.21, 12.24; frac tions, 12.46, 12.47; line breaks, 12.23, 12.50; numbering of, 1.57, 12.24-25, 12.56; qualifying clauses, 12.22; radicals, 12.43-44 elided elements in, 12.19, 12.20 fractions in, 12.46-49 in letters to the editor, 1.101 matrices in, 12.50-51 means in, 12.59 probability, 9.19, 10.50, 12.57, 12.58 punctuation with, 12.15, 12.18-20, 12.28, 12.35, 12.42 qualifying clauses in, 12.22 radicals, 12.43-44 scalars, vectors, and tensors, 12.38, 12.52-55 sentences beginning with mathematical symbols, 12.7 signs and symbols: adjacent, 12.8; angle brackets, 6.104, 12.26, 12.31,
mathematical expressions (continued) 12.55, 12.59; binary operations and relations, 12.15; braces, 6.104, 12.35 (see also delimiters above); brackets and parentheses (see delimiters above); conciseness of, 12.6; consis tency of, 12.4; delimiters (see above); differentials, spacing around, 12.42; division sign, 12.15; double-struck (blackboard) symbols, 12.14, 12.66; fonts for, 12.11-13, 12.66; functions, 12.17, 12.26, table 12.2; generally, 12.9; integral sign, 12.41; list of, table 12.1; means, 12.59; minus sign, 6.84, 10.36, 12.15, 12.60; multiplication, 12.15, 12.20, 12.53; potentially ambig uous, 12.68, table 12.4; preferred to generic alternatives, table 12.1; probability, 12.58; product sign, 12.40; proof symbol, 12.56; radical sign, 12.42-44; and sentences, 12.7, 12.18; slashes, 6.110, 12.15, 12.42, 12.45, 12.47; special, 12.14; special characters for, 12.10, 12.12-13, 12.68, tables 12.3-4; statistics, table 12.3; summation sign, 12.39; verbal translations of, 12.3; vertical bars, 12.26, 12.28, 12.33-34, 12.46, 12.51; vs. words, 12.5 spacing in, 12.16-17, 12.19, 12.21-22, 12.42 standard deviations in, 12.59 standards for, 12.3 statistics, 12.58-60, table 12.3 subscripts and superscripts, 12.36-38; alignment, 12.38, 12.67; complex, 12.37; and fractions, 12.47, 12.49; ital ics for, 12.63; marking, 12.67; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncertainties expressed as, 12.60; vector and tensor notation, 12.53, 12.54 summations and integrals, 12.39-42 in tables, 3.84 uncertainties, 12.60 vertical lists in, 12.16, 12.18 See also decimal points; mathematical copy MathML, 12.2, 12.2nl, p. 983 matrices (mathematical), 12.50-51 matrixes (table), 3.68, figs. 3.17-18 maxims (proverbs), 7.60, 7.62, 13.5, 13.38. See also figures of speech
INDEX
may, can, 5.250 may, might, 5.147, 5.250 Mc, Mac, 16.73 me, 5.37, 5.57, 5.183, 5.250
mean, notation of, 3.74, 10.50, 12.59, table 12.3. See also tables measure, p. 983 measurement. See decimal points; frac tions; International System of Units; mathematical expressions; metric system; physical quantities; units of measurement mechanical editing, 1.116, 2.48, 2.49. See also manuscript editing medals, 8.115 media, as singular, S.14 media companies, 10.25 medical terminology, 8.143-46 medieval works, 7.35, 11.122-24, 14.252 medium spaces, 12.23 meetings. See conferences; proceedings of conferences and symposia; speeches; unpublished and informally pub lished materials; working papers mega, giga, tera, and such, as prefixes, 7.89 (sec. 4), 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55, 10.56 memoranda, 14.111, 14.229, 14.231. See also pamphlets, brochures, and reports meta, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) metadata and abstracts, 1.92, 2.25 for books, 1.75, 1.76, 2.25 defined, 1.75, p. 983 DOis, 1.33, 1.79, 1.92 for hyperlinks, 1.92, 1.121 for journal articles, 1.92, 1.100 page number markers as, 1.123n2 publishers' databases for, 1.75, 1.92, 1.121 for running heads, 1.12 search tools for, 1.33 version numbers in, 1.28 See also keywords Metadata Handbook, The, 1.75 metaphorical use of proper names, 8.50, 8.66, 8.79 meteorological phenomena, 8.77 metric system, 8.152, 10.49. See also Inter national System of Units Mexico, 9.21 micro, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) ·
microform editions, 4.64, 14.115 mid, as prefix, 7.87, 7.89 (sec. 4) midcaps (intercaps), 8.69, 8.154 Middle and Old English, 7.35, 11.122-24 might, may, 5.147, 5.250 military terminology battles and campaigns, 8.114 capitalization, 8.112-15 medals and awards, 8.115 numbered military units, 9.47 resources on, 8.116, 10.15 ships and other craft, 8.2, 8.116 titles and ranks, 8.19, 8.24-25, 10.13, 10.15 twenty-four-hour system, 9.39 units, 8.112, 9.47 wars and revolutions, 8.113 millions, billions, and trillions, 5.250, 9.8, 9.24 mini, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) minus sign, 6.84, 10.36, 12.15, 12.60 mobile devices, 1.118. See also apps modal auxiliary verbs, 5.145-51 modern editions, 14.114, 15.40 Modern Language Association, 14.3 Moldavian language, 11.70 monarchs. See sovereigns and other rulers money dates with currency, 9.25 hyphenation for, 7.88, 7.89 (sec. 1) K abbreviation in, 9.24 large amounts of, 7.89 (sec. 1), 9.24 non-US, 9.21-23, 9.25 resources on, 9.21 words vs. symbols and numerals for, 9.20 See also bar codes mononyms, 14.83 Monsieur, M., 10.17 Montenegrin language, 11.70 month-day-year date format, 6.38, 6.108, 9.35, 14.224 months abbreviations, 10.39, 14.171, 14.224, 15.15 capitalization, 8.88 dates in text, 9.31 inclusive span of, 14.171 in non-English-language titles, 14.98 See also dates monuments, 8.57. See also sculpture
moral rights, 4.15 more, 5.85, 5.87-88, 5.163, 6.47, 7.89 (sec. 2) mosques, 8.57, 8.101. See also religions and religious concerns most, 5.86, 5.87, 5.88, 5.163, 7.89 (sec. 2) motion pictures. See movies and film; multimedia content mottoes. See figures of speech; maxims Mount, mountains, 8.53, 10.30, 16.90 move-left/move-right marks, 2.127 movies and film characters in, writing about, 5.129 contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10 sequels to, 9.43 source citations for, 14.201, 14.203, 14.265, 14.267, 15.57 and subsidiary rights, 4.14, 4.64 titles of, 8.189, 14.86 See also multimedia content MP3 audio files, 10.49 Mr., Mrs. , Ms., 10.16 much, 5.7 much, very, 5.90, 5.250 multi, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4)
multiauthor volumes authors' names in, 1.38, 1.50, 1.64, 2.32, fig. 1.10 as collective works, 4.8 components: appendixes, 1.59; bibli ographies and reference lists, 1.63; biographical notes, 1.50, 1.64, 2.41, 14.55, fig. 1.10; dedication, 1.36; illustrations, 2.28, 3.11, 3.31; notes, 1.62, 14.43, 14.46, fig. 14.3; prefaces, 2.41, 2.44; table of contents, 1.38, 1.39, 2.32, 2.41 consistent style across, 2.49 contributors (see contributors to multi author volumes and journals) editor's responsibilities, 2.41-42 entries for, in source citations: alpha betical order for, 14.66, 15.16, 15.18, 15.20; authors with same family
multiauthor volumes (continued) name, 14.77; chapters, 14.23, 14.1078, 15.9, 15.42; examples, general, 14.23, 15.9; indexing of, 16.115; repeated names in bibliography, 14.69; shortened citations, 14.32, 14.108; text citations for, 15.7, 15.22, 15.29; word order and punctuation, 14.76, 15.7 indexing for, as responsibility of volume editor, 2.42 as joint works, 4.7, 4.12, 4.52 permissions for, 2.41 proofreading of, 2.42 publishing agreements for, 2.42, 4.58, 4.59, fig. 4.2 source citations in: bibliographies or reference lists for each chapter, 1.63, 14.62, 15.10; checking on submission, 2.41; endnotes after each chapter, 1.62, 14.43, 14.46, fig. 14.3; unnum bered source notes, 1.50, 2.46, 14.54 symposium proceedings as, 4.59 version control for, 2.41 See also manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; previously published materials multimedia content abbreviations for terms (e.g., DVD), 10.49 animations, 1.107, 2.4 archival practices for, 1.114 contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10 in electronic journals, 1.107 as electronic supplementary data, 1.78, 14.187 file formats and devices specified, 2.4, 14.187, 14.261, 14.267, 14.268 in HTML, 1.118 as illustrations, 3.1 metadata for, 1.75 online, 14.267 in PDF files, 1.118 source citations for, 14.261-68; apps, 14.268; author-date reference system, 15.57; basic elements, 14.261; discog raphies, 1.63, 14.262, 14.263, 15.57, fig. 14.12; musical recordings, 14.263; online, 14.267; performances, 14.261, 14.266; recorded readings, lectures,
INDEX
multimedia content (continued) audiobooks, and such, 14.264; video and film recordings, 14.265 still images for, 3.15 streaming formats, 14.263 subsidiary rights for, 4.64 video clips and files, 1.107, 1.114, 2.4 on websites, biogs, and social media, 14.205 multiple formats, publications in books, 1.2, 1.26, 14.159 chapters as works made for hire, 4.58 CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.34 common practice of, 1.2 copyright issues, 4.34, 4.47, 4.64 electronic supplementary data: books, 1.59, 14.112; hyperlinks to, 1.96; illustrations, 3.9, 3.26; noted in print version, 1.78; in table of contents, 1.78, 1.87 electronic version published before print, 1.78, 1.81, 1.86, 1.104, 1.112-13, 14.172 embedded indexes for, 16.7 and formal markup languages, 1.117 format choices, 1.77, 14.16 illustrations, 1.107, 3.9, 3.10, 3.17, 3.26 ISBNs for, 1.20, 1.32, 4.64, fig. 1.1, fig. 1.4 ISSNs for, 1.79, 1.86 and letters to the editor, 1.101 noting differences, 1.78, 1.81, 1.114, 2.137, 3.9, 3.17, 3.26, 14.16 and page number marKers, 14.160 proofreading for, 2.140 as separate editions, 1.26 source citation considerations, 14.16, 14.172 source citations for, 14.112, 14.159, 14.187 and version control, 1.112 workflow for, 2.82, 2.137, 2.138 See also DOis; electronic files; simulta neous print/electronic publishing model multiple or double numbering, 1.57, 1.57nl, 2.28, 2.29, 3.11, 3.50, 12.25 multiplication crosses (dimensions), 3.27 multiplication signs in mathematical expressions, 12.15, 12.20, 12.53 plant hybrids, 8.125
multivolume works components: acknowledgments, 1.42; indexes, 1.9; pagination, 1.9; titles and volume numbers, 8.175 consistent style across, 2.49 source citations for, 14.116-22; authors' and editors' names, 14.117, 14.119, 14.122; chapters and parts of individ ual volumes, 14.120; one volume in two or more books, 14.121; particular volume, 14.118-19; published over several years, 14.117, 14.144, 15.41; vs. series, 14.124; specific volume of, 14.118, 15.41; volume and page numbers, 14.116, 14.118-20, 15.41; within series, 14.125; work as whole, 14.117 See also series of works; volumes and volume numbers municipalities. See cities and towns; civil and civic concerns; governmental entities; place of publication museums, 4.98, 8.68, 14.140 musical group names, 8.68 musical works and fair-use doctrine, 4.87 indexes of first lines of songs, 16.6, 16.144 letters for, 7.71-75 musical examples in, 3.4, fig. 3.5 resources on, 7.70, 8.193 source citations for: performances, 14.201, 14.203, 15.57; recordings, 14.263; scores, 14.255, 14.256 symbols in, 7.71-75 titles, 8.193-97; indexing of, 16.50; instrumental works, 8.195; operas, songs, and such, 8.194; opus numbers, 8.196; recordings, 8.197; resources on, 8.193 See also multimedia content; sound recordings must, 5.148 my, mine, 5.49, 5.50 myself, 5.250 N, n, in tables, 3.55, 3.72, 3.75, 3.85, fig. 3.20 n. , nn. (note, notes), 7.15, 14.150, 14.157,
names,.personal abbreviations, 10.11-22; given names, 10.11; honorifics, 10.18; initials (see initials: in and as names); /r., Sr., III, and such, 6.43, 7.42, 10.19, 16.41; list of, 14.60; punctuation and spacing, 10.12; speakers in discussions or interviews, 13.48 alphabetizing, basic rules, 16.71-74 (see also alphabetizing) alternative spellings indicated, 6.106 articles in, 8.11, 16.75 capitalization (see names, personal, capitalization of) clerical titles with, 8.26, 8.33, 10.18, 16.39 compound, 8.6, 16.72 consistency in spelling, 8.3 deities, 8.91, 8.92 epithets, 8.34, 8.35 familiar forms, 11.78, 14.74, 16.33, 16.71 fictional characters, 8.35 honorifics with (see honorifics) hyphenated and extended, 8.6, 8.7, 8.14, 11.88, 16.36, 16.72 incomplete or unknown, 16.43-44 indexing (see under indexing) initials (see initials: in and as names) and kinship terms, 8.36 letters standing for, 7.66 in list of contributors, 1.64, fig. 1.10 Mac, Mc, or O' in, 16.73 married women's, 8.11, 16.36, 16.84 non-English: alphabetizing of (see under non-English names); in English con text, 8.7-18; particles in, 8.5, 8.7-11 nonliteral use, 8.60 numerals with, 6.43, 7.42, 9.42, 10.8, 10.19, 16.37, 16.41, 16.66 particles in: alphabetizing, 16.71, 16.84; capitalization, 8.4, 8.5, 8.7-10 patronymics, 8.12 personal usage preferences, 8.3, 8.4 as phrasal adjectives, 5.93 plurals of, 7.9 possessive forms of, 7.17, 7.19, 7.28 pseudonyms, 4.25, 13.49, 14.80-81, 14.208, 15.35, 16.34 religious figures, 8.93, 8.95, 10.20, 14.83, 16.42 resources on, 8.3, 8.5, 8.6, 16.71, 16.84
names, personal (continued) with Saint, 16.74 saints, 8.93, 10.20, 14.83, 16.42 screen names, 14.208, 14.209, 15.52, 16.64 shortened, 8.6, 8.11, 8.14, 16.43 sovereigns and other rulers, 9.41, 16.37, 16.66, 16.98 stage names, 16.34 titled persons, 16.38 2-em dash to indicate omitted, 6.93 word division, 7.42 words derived from, 8.60, 8.61 See also authors' names; contributors to multiauthor volumes and journals; editors' names; titles and offices of people; translators' names names, personal, capitalization of, 8.3-18 Asian, other, 16.87 Burmese, 16.76 Chinese, 8.15, 11.83, 11.85, 11.88, 16.77 Dutch, 8.10 epithets and nicknames, 8.34, 8.35, 8.48 French, 8.7 German, 8.8 Hungarian, 8.13, 16.78 hyphenated and extended names, 8.6 Indian, 16.79 Indonesian, 8.18, 16.80 Italian, 8.9 Japanese, 8.16, 11.88, 16.81 Korean, 8.17, 16.82 non-English names, 8.7-18 overview, 8.4 particles with, 8.4, 8.5, 8.7-10 Portuguese, 8.8 resources on, 8.3 Russian, 8.12 Spanish, 8.11, 16.84 Thai, 16.85 unusual capitalization, 8.4 Vietnamese, 16.86 names, proper abbreviations, indexing of, 16.46, 16.64 abbreviations derived from, 10.6, 10.49, 10.52 as academic subjects, 8.85 beginning with lowercase letter, 8.69, 8.154 brand names and trademarks, 4.16, 7.80, 8.69, 8.130, 8.146, 8.153-54, 10.6
INDEX
names, proper (continued) broadcast networks, channels, and such, 8.189, 10.25 capitalization, generally, 5.6, 8.1 compound, 5.6, 7.85, 7.89 defined, 5.6 generic terms with, 8.53, 8.56, 8.57 in headline-style capitalization, 8.159 in historical period designations, 8.71-73 hyphenation of, 7.85, 7.89, 8.39 indexing (see under indexing) non-English (see under non-English names) ofgenitive with, 5.21 organizations (see organization names) personal (see names, personal) place-names (see place-names) plurals, 5.15, 7.9 possessives of, 7.17, 7.19, 7.20, 7.27, 7.28 real vs. metaphorical, 8.50, 8.66, 8.79 in titles of works, 11.89 used as words, 7.63 variants of, 16.32 vessels and vehicles, 8.2, 8.116-18 word division, 7.42 words derived from (see words derived from proper names) See also capitalization narrow measure, p. 983 National Information Standards Organi zation (NISO), 1.35, 1.117. See also International Organization for Standardization nationality, terms for, 8.38, 8.39. See also countries; groups of people National Library ofAustralia, 1.34 nations. See countries; governmental entities; nationality, terms for Native Americans, 7.10, 8.5, 8.38 natural phenomena, named events, 8.77 navigation, 1.120, 3.38. See also hyperlinks n.b., NB (nota bene), 10.42 n.d. (no data), 3.67 n.d. (no date), 10.42, 14.145, 14.263, 15.18, 15.44, 15.50, 15.54 near, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) negation, 5.230-38 any- and some- words with, 5.238 and auxiliary verbs, 5.147 but and except for, 5.237 in cleft sentences, 5.246
negation (continued) and comparisons, 5.88 defined, 5.230 double negatives, 5.236 in idioms, 5.211 interrogative and imperative statements, 5.152, 5.235 neither-nor for, 5.230, 5.234 no for, 5.233 not for, 5.231, 6.45 pronouns and adverbs for, 5.230, 5.233 in verb phrases, 5.104 negative questions, 5.104, 5.235 neither, 5.67 neither . . . nor, 5.33, 5.143, 5.199, 5.230, 5.234, 5.244, 5.250 neo, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) Netherlands, 8.45. See also Dutch language networks, broadcast, 8.189, 10.25. See also television and television programs neutral citations, for Canadian and UK legal cases, 14.294, 14.298 new series (n.s.), 10.42, 14.126, 14.184 newspapers copyright issues, 4.8, 4.10 headlines, 7.52, 14.191, 14.192, 14.195 serial rights, 4.64 source citations for, 14.191-200; author-reference system, 15.49; basic information needed, 14.165, 14.191; editorials, 14.195; headlines, 14.191, 14.192, 14.195; letters to the editor, 14.196; news services and news releases, 14.200; readers' comments, 14.196; regular columns, 14.195; in text vs. bibliography, 14.198; time stamps, 14.191; titles of papers, 14.193, 14.194; unsigned articles, 14.199, 15.49; weekend supplements, magazines, and such, 14.197 titles: in building or award names, 8.172; city names in, 14.193, 14.194, 16.48; indexing of, 16.48; initial the in, 8.170, 14.193, 14.194; instead of au thor's name, 14.199, 15.49; italics for, 14.86, 14.193; non-English, 14.194; plurals of, 7.12 news releases (press releases), 14.200 news services, 14.200 New Testament, 8.106, 10.47. See also Bible New Zealand, 9.21
INDEX
nicknames, 8.34, 8.35, 8.48 9/11 (September 11, 2001) , 9.35 NISO (National Information Standards Organization), 1.35, 1.117. See also International Organization for Stan dardization no, 5.33, 5.230, 5.232, 5.250, 6.34 no., nos. (musical works), 8.195 nobility, 8.32, 16.38. See also sovereigns and other rulers no data (n.d.), 3.67 no date (n.d.), 10.42, 14.145, 14.263, 15.18, 15.44, 15.50, 15.54 "no derivatives" clause, 4.62 nominalizations (zombie nouns), 5.189 nominative (subjective) case absolute constructions, 5.35 and gender, 5.43 intensive pronouns, 5.51 misuse of, 5.37 nouns, 5.9, 5.18 pronoun after linking verb, 5.45 pronoun as subject of clause, 5.44 pronouns, overview, 5.41 relative pronouns, 5.58, 5.66 non, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) nonbreaking spaces with ellipses, 6.121, 13.50, 13.54, 13.58 generally, 6.119 with Jr., Sr., and such, 7.42 in non-English-language materials, 11.28, 11.29 in numbers, 6.121, 7.44, 9.55, 9.56 in run-in lists, 7.45 between single and double quotation marks, 6.11 Unicode for, 6.121 in units of measurement, 6.121, 7.44 noncomparable adjectives, 5.89 noncomparable adverbs, 5.166 noncount (mass) nouns, 5.7 none, 5.67, 5.250 non-English materials capitalization: African languages, 11.23; Arabic, 8.14, 11.80; Asian, other, 8.18; Azeri, 11.70; Chinese, 8.15, 11.88, 11.89; Danish, 11.70; Dutch, 8.10, 11.70; in English context, 11.3, 11.4; English language compared, 11.18; English translations, 11.9-10, 11.18, 14.99 (see also translations
non-English materials (continued) and translated works); French, 8.7, 11.26, 11.27; German, 7.54, 8.8, 11.39; Hebrew, 11.93; Hungarian, 8.13; Ital ian, 8.9, 11.46; Japanese, 8.16, 11.88, 11.89; Korean, 8.17; Latin, 11.54; Norwegian, 11.70; Polish, 11.70; Portuguese, 8.8, 11.70; Russian, 8.12, 11.99, 11.100; Spanish, 8.11, 11.61; Swedish, 11.70; titles of works (see under titles of works: capitalization); Turkish, 11.70 English context considered, 8.7-18, 11.3-5, 11.19 IPA notation, 11.22 overview, 11.1 permissible changes to, 11.7, 11.15-16, 11.19, 11.28, 13.7 punctuation: apostrophes (see under apostrophes); brackets, 6.96, 6.99, 14.99; colons, 11.116; ellipses, 11.32, 11.49, 11.65, 11.102; em dashes (see under em dashes); exclamation points, 11.19, 11.62, 11.102; glossed American Sign Language, 11.133; guillemets, 11.7, 11.19, 11.28-32, 11.41, 11.47, 11.63-64, 11.101, 13.7; permissible changes to, 11.7, 11.11; question marks, 11.19, 11.62, 11.102, 11.116; quotation marks (see under quotation marks); semicolons, 11.7, 11.116; in translations, 6.96, 6.99, 6.100, 11.12, 11.19 quotations in English context: French, 11.28-32; Greek, 11.116; punctua tion, 11.3, 11.19; Russian, 11.101; typographic style of, 11.11 (see also translations and translated works: quotations) running heads, 2.76 in source citations: bibliographic terms, 14.102; English forms of cities (place of publication), 14.131; journal articles, 11.26-27, 14.170, 14.183; journal titles, 14.98, 14.170; musical scores, 14.255; newspaper titles, 14.194; publishers' names, 14.135, 14.136; series titles, 14.123; titles of works (see titles of works below) special characters, generally, 11.2, 11.21, tables 11.1-5
INDEX
non-English materials (continued) titles of works, 11.6-10; articles in, 8.170, 14.98, 14.170; brackets for, 14.99; capitalization (see under titles of works: capitalization); cautions about shortening, 2.76; dates in, 14.93; indexing of, 16.48, 16.49, 16.52, 16.53; italic vs. roman type, 11.8, 11.89, 11.100, 14.99; permissible changes to, 11.7; short forms, 14.33; subtitles, 14.89; translated, 11.9, 11.10, 14.99, fig. 1.3 titles of works, specific languages: Chinese, 11.89; French, 11.27, 16.48, 16.52; Japanese, 11.89; Latin, 11.54; Russian, 11.100 See also European style; non-English names; non-English words and phrases; special characters; transla tions and translated works; Unicode standard; and specific languages non-English names personal: alphabetizing of (see under al phabetizing); indexing of (see index ing: names, non-English personal); particles in, 8.5, 8.7-10; treatment in English context, 8.7-18 personal, by group: Arabic, 8.14, 16.75; Asian, other, 8.18, 16.87; Burmese, 16.76; Chinese, 8.15, 11.83, 11.85, 11.88, 16.77; Dutch, 8.10; French, 8.7; German, 8.8; Hungarian, 8.13, 16.78; Indian, 16.79; Indonesian, 8.18, 16.80; Italian; 8.9; Japanese, 8.16, 11.88, 16.81; Korean, 8.17, 16.82; Portuguese, 8.8, 16.83; Russian, 8.12, 11.98; Spanish, 8.11, 16.83, 16.84; Thai, 16.85; Vietnamese, 16.86 place-names, 8.59, 11.61, 11.85, 11.87, 11.99, 14.131, 16.92 proper names, other: company names, 10.23, 14.135, 14.136; in English context, 11.4; French, 11.26; generic terms in geographic names, 8.55; German, 11.39; newspaper titles, 14.194; nouns, roman for, 7.53; publishers' names, 14.135, 14.136; in titles of works, 11.89 non-English words and phrases alphabetizing of, 16.67, 16.92 bibliographic terms, 14.102
non-English words and phrases (continued) first use of, 7.53, 11.75 generic terms in geographic names, 8.55 glossaries for, 1.61 hyphenation, 7.89 (sec. 1), 11.26, 11.79, 11.84, 11.87-88, 11.93, 11.128 italics for, 7.53, 7.54, 11.3, 11.5, 11.75, 11.88, 11.94, 14.272 in legal-style citations, 14.272 ligatures in, 7.35 as mottoes, 7.62 in place-names, 8.55, 11.26 plurals of, 7.12, 11.3 roman type, 7.53-55 translations of, 6.96, 6.100, 11.4-5, 11.18-19 word division (see under word division) nonprofit organizations, 4.64, 4.68 non-US publications, copyright of, 4.29-30, 4.47 NOOK, 14.159. See also e-books noon and midnight, 9.38 no place (n.p.) , 10.42, 14.132 nor, 5.33, 5.34, 5.138, 7.8 North, northern, 8.46, 8.47 Norwegian language, 11.70 not, 5.104, 5.230, 5.231, 6.45 not . . . but, 6.46 notch binding, p. 984 note numbers, 14.24-28 citations to, 14.157 format of, 14.24 in index entries, 16.111, 16.112 keyed to line or page numbers, 14.53, figs. 14.5-6 for multiple citations and references, 14.28 placement of, 14.26, 14.27 and punctuation, 14.26 reducing number of, 14.57 vs. reference numbers, 14.24 renumbering of, 2.44, 2.62 sequencing ofnumbers and symbols, 14.25, 14.49, fig. 14.4 symbols instead of, 3.79, 14.24, 14.25, 14.49, 14.51, 16.112, fig. 14.4 in tables, 2.22, 2.31, 3.79 with titles and subheads, 14.27 unnumbered notes in relation to, 14.52 See also note reference numbers/symbols
INDEX
note reference numbers/symbols avoiding in chapter display, 1.49, 2.22, 14.27 cross-checking, 2.32, 2.53, 2.62 for editor's or translator's notes, 14.51 format for, 14.24 generally, 14.19 multiple, 14.28 and note placement, 2.134 placement of, 14.26 with subheads, 14.27 for table notes, 3.79 See also note numbers notes, 14.24-60 abbreviation of term (n., nn.), 7.15, 14.150, 14.157, 15.23, 16.111, 16.112 abbreviations in, 10.3, 10.24, 10.26, 10.27, 10.42, 10.44 author-date reference system with, 14.39, 14.50, 14.271, 15.11, 15.31, fig. 15.2 authors' names (see authors' names) basic structure, 14.20, 14.22, 14.23 biblical citations in, 10.44, 10.45-48, 14.239 bibliographies in relation to, 14.61 for chapters of multiauthor volumes, 1.62, 14.43, 14.46, fig. 14.3 citations plus commentary in, 14.37 citations to, 14.157, 15.23 continued across pages, 14.41, 16.113, fig. 14.1 converted in electronic file cleanup, 2.80 cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.63, 15.21 cross-references to, 14.28 editing of, 2.62, 2.63 examples, figs. 14.1-7 footnotes not always used in electronic publications, 14.27, 14.49, 14.52 footnotes plus endnotes, 2.22, 14.49-51, fig. 14.4 footnotes vs. endnotes, 1.124, 2.77, 2.80, 14.43-48, 14.57, 14.59 format of, 1.62 for frequently cited works, 13.67, 14.5960, fig. 14.7 generic markup of, 2.81 glossary terms in, 1.61 hyperlinks to (see hyperlinks for source citations)
notes (continued) ibid. in, 1.124, 14.34, 14.48 indexing of, 14.157, 16.110-13, 16.117 in journals, 1.108, 14.43, 14.46 keyed to line or page numbers, 14.53, figs. 14.5-6 legal cases in, 8.82 legal-style citation form, 14.271 length considerations, 14.40, 14.56 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.22, 14.24, 14.41, 14.43, 14.53 multiple citations in single, 14.28, 14.35, 14.57 multiple paragraphs in, 14.40 numbering (see note numbers) original, in edited or translated material, 13.7, 14.51, fig. 14.4 overview, 14.43 part titles for, 1.48 placement in book, 1.4, 1.61, 1.62, 14.46 in previously published materials, 2.44, 2.45 proofreading, 2.134 publication facts (see publication details) quotations within, 11.13, 14.38 reference numbers or symbols for (see note reference numbers/symbols) remedies for excessive, 14.56-60; abbreviations, 14.59-60, fig. 14.7; avoiding overlong, 2.62, 14.56; footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.45, 14.59; several citations in single, 14.57; text citations, 14.34, 14.58 scholarly symbols in, 10.43 see and cf in, 14.42 shortened citations in, 14.19, 14.29-36, 14.48 source notes (see source notes) submission of, 2.3 substantive, 14.37-39, 14.49, 16.110 for tables (see under tables) titles of works in (see titles of works in source citations) unnumbered: acknowledgments in, 14.55; biographical notes in, 1.50, 14.55; for compilations, 2.46; for en tire chapter, 1.49, 1.50, 14.27, 14.54; for epigraphs, 1.49, 14.52; keyed to text by line or page numbers, 14.53, figs. 14.56; numbered notes in relation to, 1.49, 14.25, 14.49, 14.52, fig. 14.4
INDEX
notes (continued) within quotations, 13.7, 13.58 See also endnotes; footnotes; note num bers; notes and bibliography system; source citations; source notes; and specific materials to document
notes and bibliography system, 14.19-23 and author-date reference system, 14.2, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3 disciplines that use, 14.2 elements to include, 14.100 examples and variations, 14.23 flexibility of, 14.2 notes, basic structure, 14.20 overview, 14.19 page numbers and other locators, gen erally, 14.22 relationship ofnotes and bibliographies in, 14.61 See also bibliographies; notes; shortened citations; source citations; titles of works in source citations; and specific materials to document not only . . . but also, 5.199, 5.244, 6.46
noun phrases in American Sign Language, 11.134 as antecedents ofrelative pronouns, 5.59, 5.62 with expletives, 5.239 hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 2) for index entries, 16.9 with possessive, 5.80, 7.24 See also nouns nouns, 5.4-26 as adjectives, 5.24, 5.259, 7.27, 7.89 (sec. 2) adjectives as (adnouns), 5.94 as adverbs (adverbial objectives), 5.26 adverbs formed from, 5.158 agreement of personal pronoun with, 5.42 attributive, 5.24, 7.27 case (see case of nouns and pronouns) coinages, 7.14 collective, 5.5, 5.7, 5.15, 5.138 in compound terms, hyphenation of, 7.89 concrete, 5.5, 5.7 coordinate, 5.75 definitions: common (concrete, abstract,
nouns (continued) and collective), 5.5; generally, 5.4; mass (noncount), 5.7; proper, 5.6 dependent clauses as, 5.219 em dash between pronoun and intro ductory, 6.86 formed from verbs (nominalizations), 5.189 functional variations of, 5.24-26 genitive case (see genitive case) for index entries, 16.9 infinitives as, 5.107 as interjections, 5.208 irregular, 5.20, 7.5, 7.16, 7.27 nominative (subjective) case (see nominative (subjective) case) in non-English languages: Danish, 11.70; German, 7.54, 11.39; Norwegian, 11.70 objective (accusative) case (see objective (accusative) case) possessives, generally, 7.16 (see also possessives) predicate, 5.18, 5.141 prepositional phrases as, 5.176 prepositions with, 5.172 proper (see names, personal; names, proper; place-names) properties, 5.8-12; case, 5.9 (see also case of nouns and pronouns); gender, 5.11; number (see number, of nouns and pronouns); person, 5.12, 5.30, 5.39, 5.40 quoted titles or expressions as, 6.41 repeating, for gender neutrality, 5.255 table titles as, 3.54 titles of works as singular, 8.166 as verbs, 5.25, 5.250 See also appositives; noun phrases; place-names; plurals; pronouns noun-to-verb transitions, 5.25, 5.250 now, 5.202 n.p. (no place, no publisher, no page), 10.42, 14.132 n.s. (new series), 10.42, 14.126, 14.184 nth degree, 9.6. See also ordinal numbers number, of nouns and pronouns and antecedents, 5.32-33, 5.42, 5.57, 5.62, 5.255 defined, 5.10, 5.41
INDEX
number, of nouns and pronouns (continued) indefinite pronouns, 5.67 numbers, 9.19, 9.20 with one in antecedent, 5.62 and verb number, 5.137, 5.138, 5.139 number, ofverbs, 5.137, 5.138, 5.139, 5.140, 5.141, 5.142, 5.205 numbering appendixes, 1.59, 8.180 captions, 2.28, 3.13 chapters (see chapter numbers) double or multiple, 1.57, 1.57nl, 2.28, 2.29, 3.11, 3.50, 12.25 illustrations (see illustrations: numbering) impressions, 1.28, figs. 1.1-4 manuscript pages in electronic file, 2.38 mathematical definitions, 12.25, 12.56 mathematical expressions, 1.57, 12.2425, 12.56 musical works, 8.195, 8.196 notes (see note numbers) record groups, in government archives, 14.292 subhead considerations, 1.57 table columns, 3.56 tables, 1.57, 2.29, 3.50, 3.54, 16.116 See also issue numbers; numbers; page numbers; pagination; tables numbers abbreviation for number, 8.195, 8.196, 14.123, 14.171, 15.15 (see also issue numbers) abbreviations and symbols with, 7.89 (sec. 1), 9.16-17 addresses and thoroughfares, 9.50-52, 9.54 alignment, in tables, 3.72, 3.86, figs. 3.14-15, fig. 3.20 alphabetic characters in (error), 2.80 alphabetizing in indexes, 16.65, 16.66, 16.103 a or an with, 7.33 basic principles, 9.2; alternative rule, 9.3; consistency, flexibility, and read ability, 9.1, 9.7, 9.13, 9.14, 9.19 building and apartment numbers, 9.52 Chicago's preference for arabic vs. roman numerals, 9.67 commas between digits, 9.54-56
numbers (continued) in compound terms, 7.89 (sec. 4) dates: centuries, 7.8, 8.71, 9.32, 9.33; decades, 9.33; eras, 9.34, 9.64; ISO all-numeral style, 6.108, 9.35, 9.36; month and day, 9.31; periods of time, 8.71; year abbreviated, 9.30; year alone, 9.29 defined, p. 975 editorial uses: column heads in tables, 3.86, fig. 3.24; divisions in publica tions and documents, 9.26-28; file names, 2.37; lists, 2.11, 2.21, 6.129, 6.130, 6.131, 7.45; notes applying to specific parts of table, 3.79; outlines, 6.127, 6.132; table columns, 3.56 enzyme names, 8.133 fractions (see fractions) Greek, 11.117, table 11.5 hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands, 9.3, 9.4, 9.54 hyphenation in: all-numeral dates, 6.108, 9.36; double or multiple nu meration, 1.57; fractions, 7.89 (sec. 1), 9.14; noun plus numeral or enumer ator, 7.89 (sec. 2), 9.13; separators, 6.77; telephone numbers, 9.57 inclusive (continuing) (see inclusive (continuing) numbers) index entries beginning with, 16.65 in initialisms, 10.2 large, 5.250, 9.8-12, 9.24 and line breaks, 7.42, 7.43, 7.44 millions, billions, and trillions, 5.250, 9.8, 9.24 numbered divisions in publications and documents, 9.26, 9.27, 9.28 old-style, 3.86, 12.9 ordinals (see ordinal numbers) paragraphs (see paragraph numbers, as locators) parts of book in text, 8.180 physical quantities, 9.13-17; with abbreviations and symbols, 9.16-17; dimensions, 3.27; in general context, 9.13; simple fractions, 9.14; whole numbers plus fractions, 9.15 plurals of, 7.15, 9.53 possessive forms of, 7.17 in proper names: and line breaks, 7.42;
INDEX
numbers (continued) military units, 9.47; personal names, 6.43, 7.42, 9.42, 10.8, 10.19, 16.37, 16.41, 16.66; places of worship, 9.48; political and judicial divisions, 9.46; sequels, 8.189, 9.43; sovereigns and other rulers, 9.41, 16.66; successive governments and dynasties, 9.45; unions and lodges, 9.49; vehicles and vessels, 8.116, 9.44 ranges (see inclusive [continuing] numbers; page ranges) ratios, 6.62, 9.58 resources on, 9.1 roads and thoroughfares, 9.50, 9.51 sections (see section numbers, as locators) sentences beginning with, 9.5 sequels, 8.189, 9.43 source citations: arabic vs. roman numerals, 14.147; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.243, 14.244, 14.249; parts of books, 14.147; parts of poems and plays, 8.184, 14.254; scriptural references, 14.241 space between digits, 6.121, 9.55, 9.56 spacecraft, 9.44 spelled out: alternative rule, 9.3; begin ning a sentence, 9.5; building and apartment numbers, 9.52; Chica go's general rule, 9.2; consistency, readability, and flexibility, 9.7; dates, 9.29, 9.31-33, 9.35; direct discourse, 13.44; fractions, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 9.14, 9.15; general rule, 9.2; in headline style capitalization, 8.161; hundreds, thousands, and hundred thousands (round numbers), 9.4; hyphens with, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 9.13; inclusive range of, 9.60; marking manuscript for, 2.93; marking proofs for, 2.129; military units, 9.47; money, 9.20; ordinals, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 9.6; places of worship, 9.48; plurals of, 9.53; political and judicial divisions, 9.46; roads and thoroughfares, 9.51; successive governments and dynasties, 9.45; time designations, 9.37, 9.38, 9.40; in titles of works, 8.165; to with inclu sive numbers, 9.60 (see also physical quantities above)
numbers (continued) telephone numbers, 6.77, 9.57 in titles ofworks, 8.165, 14.88 with units of measurement, 7.44, 9.1617, 10.49 uses, other: age terms, 7.89 (sec. 1) ; binary systems, 9.11; celestial bodies, 8.139; chemical elements, 10.63; decimal fractions, 9.19, 9.59; dex with, 9.12; gene and enzyme names, 8.132, 8.133; mass, in chemical terms, 8.150; mega-, giga-, tera-, and such, 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55, 10.56; mon etary amounts, 9.20-25; multiple books within one volume, 14.121; percentages, 9.18; powers of ten, 9.9, 9.11, 9.12 See also arabic numerals; chapter numbers; currency; decimal points; International System of Units; issue numbers; line numbers; mathemati cal expressions; metric system; note numbers; numbering; page numbers; page ranges; roman numerals; subscripts; superscripts; Unicode standard; volumes and volume numbers number sign (pound sign), 2.98, 2.125, 3.79, 11.131 numerals. See arabic numerals; numbering; numbers; roman numerals numerical order, index subentries in, 16.69 nursery rhymes, 8.185 O, oh, 6.35, 7.31. See also interjections O', 16.73
oaths, 8.84 objective (accusative) case and gender, 5.43 and like, 5.185 nouns, 5.9, 5.19 in prepositional phrases, 5.44, 5.172, 5.183 pronoun as object of infinitive, 5.44 pronoun as object of verb or preposition, 5.35, 5.37, 5.44 pronouns, overview, 5.41 relative pronouns, 5.57, 5.66 oblique objects, 5.172 oceans, 8.45, 8.53 o'clock, 9.37, 9.38, 10.41
INDEX
OCR (optical character recognition), 2.43, 10.49, p. 984 odd, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3)
only, 5.186 op., opp. (musical works), 8.196
of
op. cit., 10.42, 14.36
in genitive case, 5.20, 5.21, 5.191 limiting use of, 5.250 and possessive, 7.20, 7.25, 7.26, 7.29 offprints, p. 984 offset printing, 3.3, figs. 3.1-2, p. 984 ofgenitive, 5.21, 5.191 ofwhom, ofwhich, 5.63, 5.64 oh, 0, 6.35, 7.31. See also interjections ohm symbol, 10.49, 10.56 'okina, 11.70, 11.70nl old, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) Old and Middle English, 7.35, 11.70, 11.12224 old series (o.s.), 14.126 old-style numbers, 3.86, 12.9 Old Testament, 8.106, 10.45. See also Bible on, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 3) once, 5.201 one, 5.62, 5.255 one another, each other, 5.53 one of, 5.140 ONIX, 1.75 online publications copyright of, 4.13, 4.47, 14.14, 14.267 formal markup for, 2.83 front and back matter in, 1.122 functional features in, 1.119 hyperlinks in, 1.120, 1.121, 1.122 indexes in, 1.96, 1.109, 1.125 navigation in, 1.120, 1.123 PDF format for, 1.118 proofing and testing of, 2.137-40 reference works, 1.118, 1.120, 1.121, 14.233 screen margins, 1.122 site maps in, 2.137 source citations for: books, 14.161-62; dictionaries and encyclopedias, 14.233; legal and public documents, 14.270, 14.276, 14.298, 14.300, 14.305; magazine articles, 14.189; multimedia, 14.267 (see also websites and web pages: source citations for) wikis, 14.13, p. 990 See also electronic publications; HTML; multiple formats, publications in; supplementary data, electronic; websites and web pages
open-access publishing models, 4.52, 4.60, 4.61, 4.66 open compounds, 6.106, 7.82, 16.58. See also compound terms open-source model, 4.61, 7.80. See also open-access publishing models operas, 8.194. See also musical works operating systems, 7.78, 8.155. See also file formats and devices optical character recognition (OCR), 2.43, 10.49, p. 983 option clauses, 4.53
opacity, p. 984
or
in dates, 7.8 in double titles of works, 8.167, 14.91 in lists, 6.131 pronoun and antecedent with, 5.33, 5.34 punctuation with, 6.22, 6.51 slash instead of, 6.106 as subordinating conjunction, 5.201 and verb agreement, 5.138, 5.143, 5.205, 5.250 See also conjunctions; coordinating conjunctions ordinal numbers day of the month as, 9.31 format of, 9.6 hyphenation, 7.89 (sec. 1) in legal-style citations, 14.274, 14.300 military units, 9.47 nd, th, and rd in (e.g., 122nd), 9.6 in non-English languages, 11.27 numbered streets, 9.51 permissible changes to, 14.88 personal names with, 6.43, 9.42, 10.19 successive governments and dynasties, 9.45 organization names abbreviations, 10.23-26, 14.274, 15.37, 16.46, 16.64 alphabetizing of, 16.46, 16.64, 16.88-89 articles in, 8.68, 8.70, 14.134, 16.88, 16.89 associations, 8.70, 10.26 as authors, 14.70, 14.84, 15.37 capitalization (see under capitalization) companies (see company names)
INDEX
organization names (continued) in non-English languages, 11.26, 11.61 numbered branches of, 9.49 periodical titles in, 8.172 place-names within, 6.39, 6.81 possessives of, 7.20, 7.27 in source citations, 14.84, 14.259, 14.305, 15.37 treatment in text, 8.62-70 See also business and commerce; govern mental entities; institutions original expression and originality, 4.3, 4.5, 4.72. See also intellectual property rights ornaments for text break, 1.58, 2.8 orphans (lines), 2.116, p. 984 "orphan works" problem, 4.82 orthographic reforms, 11.38, 11.43, 11.45, 11.67, 11.70 o.s. (old series), 14.126 otherwise, 5.201 ought, should, 5.149, 5.250 out, in compound terms, 7.89 (sec. 2) outlines, 2.21, 2.36, 6.127, 6.132. See also lists in text out-of-print publications, 4.52 over, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) overlapping characters, 6.5 Oxford (serial) commas, 6.19-21, 6.23, 8.165, 14.135. See also commas p (probability), 3.80, 10.50 p., pp., 7.15, 10.42, 14.150-51, 14.225 page, 9.27 page count. See length (parts of text)
page numbers (folios) alternatives for refiowable electronic publications, 1.123, 2.35, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23 appropriate use of, 1.6, 9.26 blind (unexpressed), 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.39, 1.46, 1.49, 3.6, p. 980 in books, arabic vs. roman numerals, 9.26 cross-checking text citations and refer ence lists for, 2.32, 15.21 cross-references to specific pages within same text, 2.35, 2.60 descriptive headers with, 2.38 drop, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.49, p. 980 "dummy," 1.81
page numbers (folios) (continued) fixed, not always used in electronic pub lications, 1.6, 1.81, 1.123, 2.35, 14.47, 14.49, 14.160 inclusive ranges (see page ranges) as index locators (see index entries: locators) in lists of illustrations and tables, 1.39, 3.40, fig. 1.7 location of, 1.6 of manuscript, 2.38 markers for, in electronic publications, 1.123n2, 1.125, 14.160, 16.13 in multivolume works, 1.9, 14.116, 14.120, 15.41 no comma in, 9.54 for permission requests, 4.95 proofreading of, 2.114, 2.134 in running heads for endnotes, 1.15, 1.62, 2.76, 2.114, 2.136, 14.47, fig. 14.2 in source citations (see page numbers in source citations) in table of contents, 1.38, 2.134, fig. 1.5 three zeros for temporary, 2.35 See also inclusive (continuing) numbers; locators; page numbers in source citations page numbers in source citations alternatives for electronic publications, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23 arabic vs. roman numerals, 14.147, 14.171 author-date reference system, generally, 15.9, 15.23 chapters with, 14.106-7 with citations to notes, 14.157 classical Greek and Latin works, 14.243, 14.251 classic English works, 14.253 e-books, 14.160 examples and variations, 14.23 ff. and passim, 14.148-49 forthcoming works, 14.146 generally, 14.22, 15.8 ibid. with, 14.34 journal articles, 14.174, 14.177, 15.23 legal-style citations, 14.273, 14.276, 14.284, 14.290, 14.294, 14.303, 14.305 magazine articles, 14.188-89 multivolume works, 14.116, 14.120, 15.41 in notes, 14.153
INDEX
page numbers in source citations (continued)
notes and bibliography system, generally, 14.22 notes keyed to, 14.53, fig. 14.6 p. and pp. , 14.150-51, 14.225 periodicals, generally, 14.165 ranges, author-date reference system, 15.8, 15.9, 15.21 ranges, notes and bibliography system, 14.23, 14.106-7, 14.110, 14.148-49, 14.167, 14.174 reprint and modern editions, 14.114 for sources of quotations, 13.67 text citations, 15.27, 15.30 volume numbers with (e.g., 10:122) , 14.23, 14.116, 14.152, 14.177, 15.23, 15.48 page proof, p. 984. See also proofs page ranges condensing, 9.61, 16.14 en dashes in, 6.78, 9.60, 16.100, 16.134 as index locators, 16.12, 16.14, 16.100, 16.113, 16.121 for journal articles, 1.79, 1.81, 1.87, 1.92, 1.103, 14.23, 14.174 on journal cover or spine, 1.84, 2.109, 2.134 in running heads, 1.15, 2.76, 14.47, fig. 14.2 in source citations: author-date refer ence system, 15.8, 15.9, 15.21; vs. ff., 14.148-49; notes and bibliography system, 14.23, 14.106-7, 14.110, 14.148-49, 14.167, 14.174 pages abbreviation of term (p., pp.), 7.15, 10.42, 14.150-51, 14.225 bad breaks in, 16.138 checking overall appearance, 2.116, 2.117 defined, 1.5 facing: alignment of, 2.117; proofreading of, 2.116; tables on, 2.115, 3.51, 3.86, 3.87 See also page numbers; pagination; proofs pagination avoiding repagination, 2.122 basic guidelines for, 1.6-9 in book review and book notes sections, 1.98, 14.153
pagination (continued) and continuous publishing model, 1.82, 14.174 determining page 1, 1.46 of final manuscript for production, 2.75-76 of folio editions, 14.155 and indexing, 2.104, 2.105, 2.106, 2.113, 2.118, 16.108 journals, 1.81, 1.82, fig. 1.11 and metadata, 1.75 multivolume works, 1.9 parts of books: back matter, 1.4, 1.8, 1.9; chapter display, 1.8, 1.49; chapters, 1.8, 1.46, 1.49; conclusions, 1.53; dedication, 1.7, 1.36; epigraphs, 1.37; front matter, 1.4, 1.7, 1.17, 2.38, 2.57; galleries, illustrations, and tables, 1.8, 1.39, 2.115; introductions in front matter, 1.43; introductions in main text, 1.47; part-title page with text, 1.8; second half title, 1.4, 1.8, 1.46 roman numerals in, 1.4, 1.7, 1.9, 2.38, 2.57, 9.26 in signed signatures, 14.154 within volumes, 1.81, fig. 1.11 See also page numbers; page ranges; recto pages; verso pages paintings, 8.198, 14.235. See also artwork pamphlets, brochures, and reports art exhibition catalogs, 8.201, 14.236 congressional reports and documents, 14.285 in manuscript collections, 14.229 in private collections, 14.231 source citations, generally, 14.220 titles of, 8.186 paper durability statements, 1.20, 1.35, 1.84, fig. 1.1 environmental standards, 1.35, pp. 979, 984, 988 opacity, p. 984 trim size, p. 989 paperback rights, 4.64 paperbacks, 4.64, p. 984. See also covers of journals and paperback books paper durability statements, 1.20, 1.35, 1.84, fig. 1.1 paper-only editing. See under manuscript editing
I N D EX
paper-over-board format (lithocase), 1.71 papers, unpublished, 14.217, 14.218. See also unpublished and informally published materials paragraph (first-line) indentation defined, 2.11, p. 982 glossary entries, 2.23 paragraph format, 2.11, 2.12 paragraphs instead oflists, 6.130 paragraphs within block quotations, 2.19, 13.22 text following block quotations, 2.21, 13.24 in transcriptions of discussions or inter views, 13.48 paragraph mark, 2.98, 2.126, 10.43, 14.273 paragraph numbers, as locators in electronic publications, 1.123, 1.125, 14.160 in indexes, 1.125, 2.106, 16.12, 16.13, 16.108 legal and public documents, 14.273 ranges of, 14.148 paragraphs abbreviation of term, 10.42 conjunction at beginning of, 5.203 defined, in word processing, 2.11, 2.82 indentation of, 2.11, 2.12 instead of vertical lists, 6.130 interruptions in, 2.12 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.12, 2.19, 2.20 marking manuscript f�r, 2.98 marking proofs for, 2.126 notes with multiple, 14.40 symbol for, 2.98, 2.126, 10.43, 14.273 within quotations, 2.19, 13.22, 13.32-33, 13.35, 13.39, 13.56 word-processing styles for, 2.82 See also paragraph numbers, as locators paragraph style (indexes). See indexes: run-in style parallel bars. See vertical bars parallel structure, 5.242-45 and auxiliary verbs, 5.245 and correlative conjunctions, 5.244 and en dashes, 6.78 lists and outlines, 6.127 in prepositional phrases, 5.243 subheads, 2.59 paraphrasing, 4.89, 11.17, 13.4, 13.45
parentheses, 6.95-98 and alphabetizing, 16.59, 16.60, 16.61 back to back, 6. 98 font for, 6.5, 6.129 in indexes: authors' names after titles, 16.50, 16.97; continued lines, 16.139; cross-references, 16.18, 16.20, 16.26, 16.97; endnote locators, 16.111 (see also glosses: in index entries) with in-text citations for quotations, 13.64 marking proofs for, 2.132 other punctuation with: brackets, 6.97, 6.101, 14.37, 14.38, 15.28, 15.40; colons, 6.98; commas, 6.18, 6.98; exclamation points, 6.74, 6.98; mul tiple sets of parentheses, 6.97, 6.101; periods, 6.13, 6.98; question marks, 6.70, 6.98 scholarly abbreviations in, 10.42 sentences in, 6.13, 6.98 in source citations: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.250; dissertations and theses, 14.215; with issue num bers, 14.177, 15.47; journal articles, 14.171, 14.177, 14.182, 15.9, 15.47; legal-style citations, 14.276, 14.28386, 14.288, 14.294-95, 14.298, 14.300, 15.59; newspaper articles, 14.193, 14.197; note reference num bers, 14.26; notes, 14.19, 14.20, 14.39; reprint editions with multiple dates, 15.40; websites and web pages, 14.207 (see also text citations) in table titles and heads, 3.55, 3.56, fig. 3.12 uses: abbreviations, 7.17, 10.3; brand names, 8.146; captions, 3.24; clarification of italics for emphasis, 13.62, 14.37; enclosing numbers or letters in lists, 6.129; withforthcom ing or in press, 8.188; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.124; glosses or translations, 6.96, 11.5, 11.10 (see also glosses: in index entries); i.e. and e.g. , 6.51; labeling for mathematical expressions, 12.24; letters for parts of books, 8.180; mathematical expressions, 12.45, 12.50 (see also delimiters); music dynamics, 7.75; notes to tables, 3.78; parenthetical el-
INDEX
parentheses (continued) ements in sentences, 6.48, 6.51, 6.85, 6.95; table titles and heads, 3.55, 3.56, fig. 3.12; telephone numbers, 9.57; time zones, 10.41; translations of quotations, 11.12, 11.13 See also glosses; parenthetical elements in sentences; punctuation; text citations parenthetical elements in sentences, 6.48, 6.51, 6.85, 6.95 Parliament (UK), 14.298-301 participial phrases, 5.111, 5.115, 5.231, 6.30, 6.32 participial prepositions, 5.175 participles as adjectives, 5.90, 5.111 adverbs modifying, 5.114 be-verbs with, 5.118, 5.154 in compound terms, hyphenation of, 7.89 (sec. 2) dangling, 5.115 formation of, 5.110 fused, 5.114 vs. gerunds, 5.113 and negation, 5.231 past, 5.90, 5.100, 5.119 and prepositions, 5.175 present, 5.110, 5.118, 7.41 table titles as, 3.54 word division, 7.41 See also gerunds; participial phrases particles negating, 5.231 in personal names: alphabetizing, 16.71, 16.84; capitalization, 8.4, 8.5, 8.7-10 in phrasal verbs, 5.102 parties, political, 8.66 parts and part titles articles, stories, chapters, and such, 8.177 collected works of author, 8.178 division into, 1.48, fig. 1.5 editing of, 2.58 format of terms, 8.179, 8.180 generic terms for, 8.179, 8.180, 14.110 introductions to, 1.38 in letters and diaries, 1.52 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.17 numerals for, 9.26 pagination, 1.4, 1.8, 1.46, 2.75
parts and part titles (continued) part-title page with text, 1.8 in poetry, 1.51 i n running heads, 1.12, 1.16 source citations for, 14.147, 14.150 submission of, 2.3 in table of contents, 1.38, 2.32, fig. 1.5 See also books: parts of parts of books. See books: parts of parts of speech, 5.3, 10.42. See also adjec tives; adverbs; articles (definite and indefinite); conjunctions; interjec tions; nouns; prepositions; pronouns; verbs; word usage Party/party, 8.66 passim, 7.55, 14.149, 16.12 passive voice and dangling participles, 5.115 defined, 5.118 infinitives in, 5.106 linking verbs in, 5.101 long (with by), 5.192 with past participles, 5.119, 5.135, 5.154 password protection, 2.88 past perfect (pluperfect) tense, 5.126, 5.127, 5.133 past tense, 5.100, 5.125, 5.126, 5.130, 5.133 patents, 14.258, 15.55 pathnames, 6.112. See also file names patronymics, 8.12 pattern matching, 2.79, 2.80, p. 984 PCF (process chlorine-free), p. 984 PCN (Preassigned Control Number), 1.34 PDF files annotation of, 1.118, 2.71, 2.119, 2.133 as content proof, 2.140 for continuous publishing model, 1.82, 14.174 defined, p. 984 description, 1.118 for digital artwork, 3.15 edited manuscript sent as, 2.71, 2.88 electronic journals as, 1.77 front matter in, 1.122 functional features in, 1.119 hyperlinks in, 1.118, 1.121 indexer's use of, 16.102, 16.105 line breaks in, 7.36 for manuscript submission, 2.4, 2.8, 2.37 navigation, 1.120, 1.123 prepress proofs as, 2.107
INDEX
PDF files (continued) proofreading in, 1.118, 2.2, 2.100, 2.103, 2.119, 2.133 searching, 1.118, 2.111, 2.133, 16.102, 16.105 testing of, 2.139 time and user stamps in, 2.133 pedigree charts, 3.46. See also charts and graphs peer review, 2.5 pencil editing. See manuscript editing: paper-only percent, percentage, 3.82, 7.89 (sec. 1), 9.18 percent sign, 3.82, 9.18, 10.58 perfect binding, pp. 984-85 performances and rights, 4.14, 4.64 source citations for, 14.201, 14.203, 14.261, 14.266, 14.267, 15.57 periodicals copyright registration forms for, 4.48 defined, 14.164 regular departments, columns, and features, 8.177, 14.190, 14.195 serial rights, 4.64 source citations for: basic citation structure, 14.167; basic information needed, 14.165; initials for authors' given names, 15.33; journal articles (see journal articles, source citations for); journals vs. magazines, 14.166; legal-style citations, 14.272; maga zines (see under magazines); newspa pers (see under newspapers); reviews, 14.201-4; URLs and DOis, 14.164 titles: abbreviations of, 10.7, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, 16.49; articles and features within, 8.177; in building or award names, 8.172; indexing of, 16.48-49; initial the in, 8.170, 14.170; italics for, 8.163, 8.168; in legal-style citations, 14.272; magazine,journal, review, and such, 8.171; sentence style capitalization, 15.38; treatment in text, 8.168 volume, issue, and page numbers in, 9.27 See also journals; magazines; newspa pers; reviews periods (punctuation), 6.12-15 with abbreviations: academic and pro fessional designations, 10.4, 10.21,
periods (punctuation) (continued) 10.22; biblical citations, 10.45-47, 14.239; business and commerce, 10.69; at end of sentence, 6.14; eras, 9.34; generally, 10.4; in legal-style ci tations, 14.274; military titles, 10.15; omitted in technical abbreviations, 10.49; organization names, 10.23, 10.26; scholarly, 10.42; slash instead of, 6.109; specific abbreviations, 5.250; time designations, 10.39-41; units of measurement, 10.64 leaders (several spaced periods), 3.64, fig. 3.16 marking manuscript for, 2.93 marking proofs for, 2.132 omitting, 6.14, 6.123, 10.4, 10.49, 14.96 other punctuation with: apostrophes, 6.118; brackets, 6.13; closing quota tion marks, 2.80, 6.9; ellipses, 13.53, 13.56-58, 14.97; em dashes, 6.89; ex clamation points, 6.124; parentheses, 6.13, 6.98; question marks, 6.124; 3-em dashes, 6.94 permissible changes to, 11.7, 13.7 single space after, 2.9, 6.7, 6.12 slash instead of, 6.109 uses: abbreviations (see with abbrevia tions above); a.m. and p.m. , 9.37; cap tions, 3.21, 3.23; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.249, 14.250; compass points in addresses, 10.34; double or multiple numeration, 1.57, 2.28, 2.29, 3.11, 3.50, 12.25; with.ff., 14.149; glossaries, 1.61, 2.23; imperative sentences, 6.12; indexes, 16.17, 16.20, 16.97; initials of personal names, 7.66, 10.4, 10.12; numerals with sovereigns, 9.41; outlines and lists, 2.21, 6.130, 6.131, 6.132; preceding quotation, 13.17; publishing history on copyright page, 1.25; run-in sub heads, 2.18, 2.59; source citations, 14.19, 14.21, 14.167, 14.176, 14.254, 15.6; between titles and subtitles in European style, 14.89; transcriptions of discussions or interviews, 13.48; twenty-four-hour system of time, 9.40; words or phrases standing alone, 6.12 See also ellipses; punctuation; URLs
INDEX
periods of time centuries, 7.8, 7.87, 7.89, 7.89 (sec. 3), 8.71, 9.32, 9.33 cultural, 8.71-74 decades, 9.33 descriptive designations, 8.72 eras, 8.135, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 geological, 8.135 numerical designations, 8.71 prehistoric cultural periods, 8.74 traditional period names, 8.73 See also dates; time designations periphrastic comparatives, 5.85, 5.163 periphrastic superlatives, 5.86, 5.164 permalinks, 14.9, 14.15 permanent compounds, 7.82. See also com pound terms permissible changes to quoted and refer enced materials basic approach, 2.44 capitalization, 8.165, 13.7, 13.18, 13.19, 14.88 cautions about, 2.44, 2.61 initial a, an, or the, 8.169 non-English materials, 11.7, 11.15-16, 11.19, 11.28, 13.7 overview, 13.7-8 punctuation, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19, 13.7, 13.30-31, 14.88 spaces and spacing, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19 titles of works, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 14.88, 14.91 and translations, 11.15, 11.16 typography and layout, 13.8 See also editorial interpolations and clarifications permissions, 4.73-83 blanket, 3.32 case studies and field notes, 13.49 checking, 4.79 on copyright page, 1.20, 1.30, 4.78, fig. 1.4 and Creative Commons licenses, 4.62 criteria for, 13.3 defined, 4.17 and dissertations and theses, 4.60 fees and record keeping, 4.79, 4.95, 4.96, 4.98, 4.101, 4.104, 4.105 granting, 4.70, 4.71 in illustration credit lines, 3.30, 3.32, 4.102
permissions (continued) manuscript and editorial concerns, 2.2, 2.3, 2.65, 4.79 for multiauthor volumes, 2.41 in notes, 14.54 obtaining, 4.75-83, 4.95-101; archives' restrictions, 4.83; for author's own work, 4.78; automating process of, 4.97; basic principles, 4.75; beyond immediate use, 4.80; communica tions on, 4.95-101; complexity of process, 4.76; independent profes sionals for, 4.76nl; interview and photo releases, 4.77; "orphan works" problem, 4.81, 4.82; sample letters, 4.96, fig. 4.3 overview, 4.1 in prefaces, 1.41 role of counsel, 4.74 in separate acknowledgment section, 4.103 special types of material: archival ma terial, 4.83; author's previously pub lished material, 4.66, 4.78; compila tions, 4.105; email addresses, 14.214; illustrations, 2.2, 2.3, 3.18, 3.29, 3.30, 3.32, 4.98-101; interviews, 14.211; po etry, 4.95, 13.3; previously published materials, 2.2-3, 4.66, 4.78, 4.105, fig. 1.4; tables, 3.77, 4.95; unpublished works, 2.3, 4.81, 4.83, 13.3 unnecessary, 4.93 US Supreme Court on, 4.93 See also acknowledgments; copyright; fair-use doctrine; illustration credits and credit lines; source notes persistent URLs (permalinks), 14.9, 14.15 person of nouns and pronouns, 5.12, 5.30, 5.39, 5.40 of verbs, 5.136, 5.138, 5.143 personal communications author-date reference system, generally, 15.53 notes and bibliography system, gener ally, 14.214 permissions for, 2.2, 2.3 posts on private electronic forums as, 14.210 social media messages as, 14.205, 14.209, 14.214, 15.52
INDEX
personal names. See names, personal personal pronouns. See under pronouns person-first language, 5.260 personification, 5.43, 8.37 per vs. slash, 6.109, 10.4 PEs (printer's errors), 2.135, p. 984, p. 985 Philippines, names in, 16.87 philosophical terms and movements, 7.58, 8.79, 8.94 phonetics, 6.102, 7.64, 11.22 photocopying cautions about, 2.6, 12.65 classroom and educational use, 4.64, 4.66 copyright issues, 4.17, 4.35, 4.55, 4.64, 4.66 for cropping, 3.19 and fair-use doctrine, 1.103 of manuscript, 2.6, 2.71, 2.91, 2.92, 2.116 for musical examples, fig. 3.5 photocopy, use of term, 14.218 for previously published material, 2.43 process and fees for, 1.103, 4.97 See also print-on-demand (POD) titles photographs commissioned, 3.33 copyright registration forms for, 4.48 fair use of, 4.90 halftones, 3.3, 3.6, figs. 3.1-2, p. 981 labeled in illustrations, fig. 3.6 original, labeling, 3.16 permissions and credit lines for, 3.29, 3.30, 3.33, 4.98, 4.99, 4.101 previously published, 2.47 releases for, 4.77 reproduction-quality prints, 2.27 source citations for, 14.235 titles of, 8.198 See also illustrations photomicrographs, 3.27 phrasal (complex) prepositions, 5.174 phrasal adjectives (compound modifiers), 5.79, 5.92, 5.93, 7.85, 7.89 (secs. 2, 3) phrasal adverbs, 5.161 phrasal connectives, misleading, 5.142 phrasal pronouns, 5.27 phrasal verbs, 5.102, 5.181 phrases adjectival (compound modifiers), 5.79, 5.92, 5.93, 7.85, 7.89 (secs. 2, 3) adverbial, 5.158, 5.161, 6.31, 6.32, 7.89 (sec. 3)
phrases (continued) articles as affecting meaning of, 5.76 introductory (see introductory words and phrases) with not, 6.45 with not only . . . but also and such, 6.46 parallel structure in, 5.242 parenthetical, 6.48, 6.51, 6.85, 6.95 participial, 5.111, 5.115, 5.231, 6.30, 6.32 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 5.23, 6.29, 6.30, 6.41, 6.50 standing alone, 6.12 with such as and including, 6.50 with the more, the less, and such, 6.47 used as words, 7.63 verb phrases, 5.104, 5.171, 5.239, 5.245, 7.89 (sec. 2) See also clauses; conjunctions; par enthetical elements in sentences; prepositions physical characteristics, 8.43 physical quantities, 9.13-17 with abbreviations and symbols, 9.16-17 dimensions, 3.27 in general context, 9.13 simple fractions, 9.14 whole numbers plus fractions, 9.15 See also International System of Units; metric system; units of measurement physical science terminology, 8.147-52 abbreviations, 10.63 chemical names and symbols, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 8.149, 10.63 compound terms, 7.89 (sec. 1) laws and theories, 8.148 mass number, 8.150 metric units, 8.152 radiations, 8.151 resources on, 8.147, 10.63 See also scientific and technical termi nology pica, p. 985 Pinyin system, 11.82-85, 16.77. See also Chinese language; Wade-Giles system pitches, musical, 7.71 pixels (resolution), p. 986 place, conjunctions as indicating, 5.201 place-names, 8.44-59 adjectives derived from, 5.69, 8.45 alphabetizing, 16.74, 16.90-93 capitalization (see under capitalization)
INDEX
place-names (continued) compass points and directions, 7.89, 8.46-47, 10.34-36 continents, countries, oceans, 8.45 definite article with, 8.59, 16.91, 16.92 in forewords, 1.40 with Fort, Mount, Saint, and such, 10.30, 11.26, 16.90, 16.93 indexing (see under indexing) institutional names with, 6.39, 6.81 on maps in text, 2.60, 3.20, 8.45 mountains, rivers, and such, 8.53-55, 10.30, 16.90 in non-English languages, 8.59, 11.61, 11.85, 11.87, 11.99, 14.131, 16.92 non-English terms in, 8.55, 11.26 old vs. present forms, 16.29 plurals of, 7.9, 8.53, 8.56, 8.57 political divisions, 1.27, 8.51, 8.52 popular names and epithets, 8.48 possessives of, 7.17 public places and structures, 8.56-59 punctuation, 5.69, 6.17, 6.39 real vs. metaphorical, 8.50 regions, 8.47, 8.54 resources on, 8.44 in source citations: manuscript collection depositories, 14.227 with the, 8.45, 8.59, 16.91 topographical divisions, 8.53-55 urban areas, 8.49 US states and territories, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27, 14.130 See also cities and towns; geographical terminology; maps; place of publi cation place of publication, 14.128-32 basic format, 14.127 books published before 1900, 14.128 city in, 14.129 country of printing, 1.27, 14.130 English names for non-English cities, 14.131 journals, 14.182 in legal-style citations, 14.305 "no place," 10.42, 14.132 omitted in self-published materials, 14.132, 14.137 states, provinces, and countries, 14.130 surmised, 14.132 plagiarism, 1.91, 4.75, 4.92
plain-text file, p. 985 planets, 8.138-42. See also earth plants, 8.119-30 cultivated varieties (cultivars), 8.130 illustrations, figs. 3.3-4, fig. 3.6 scientific names: authors' names in, 8.124; divisions higher than genus, 8.126; English derivatives from taxo nomic system, 8.127; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.120-25; hybrids, 8.125; resources on, 8.119 vernacular names, 8.128-30 See also scientific and technical termi nology plates defined, 3.5, p. 985 indexing of, 16.116 lists of, 1.39, fig. 1.7 numbering, 2.28 text references to, 3.9 when to use or omit term, 3.23 See also galleries; illustration credits and credit lines; illustrations Platonic ideas, 8.94 plays divisions of, 8.184 format of, 13.46 quotation of, 13.47, 13.57 source citations for: classic English works, 14.253-54; frequently cited works, 13.67; reviews, 14.201, 14.203; short forms, 14.254 titles of, 8.183 See also classical Greek and Latin works; dialogue; speech pledges, 8.84 pluperfect (past perfect) tense, 5.126, 5.127, 5.133 plurals, 5.13-16, 7.5-15 abbreviations, 7.15, 8.121, 10.49, 10.52, 10.53, 10.65, 14.150 alternative forms, 7.6 anomalies of, 5.16 apostrophes in, 6.116, 7.13, 7.15 centuries, 7.8 collective nouns, 5.7, 5.15 compound terms, 7.7 for gender neutrality, 5.255 generally, 5.13 genitives of, 5.20 letters (alphabet), 7.15, 7.64, 7.65
I N D EX
plurals (continued) in mathematical expressions, 12.3 Native American group names, 7.10 non-English words, 7.12, 11.3 noun coinages, 7.14 numbers, 7.15, 9.53 and phrasal adjectives, 5.92 place-names, 7.9, 8.53, 8.56, 8.57 political divisions, 8.52 possessive form of, generally, 7.16 (see also possessives) pronouns, 5.52, 5.67 proper names, 5.15, 7.9 singular form for, 7.11 singular sense with, 5.14, 7.20 standard forms, 7.5 titles of works, 7.12 units of measurement, 9.19, 10.65, 10.67, 10.68 used as words, 5.14 words in quotation marks, 7.13 words or phrases in italics, 7.12 See also number, of nouns and pronouns plus sign, 7.72, 7.78, 9.57, 11.130, 12.15, 12.60 p.m., a.m. , 9.37, 9.38, 10.41 PNG, p. 985 POD (print-on-demand) titles, 1.28, p. 985 podcasts, 8.189 poetry abbreviations in (e.g., v. for verse), 10.42 book divisions for, 1.51 fair use of, 4.86, 4.87 first lines: indexes of, 16.6, 16.144, 16.145; references to, 8.182 interjections in, 5.207 proofreading of, 2.113 quotations from, 13.25-29; centered, 2.20, 13.25; and ellipses, 13.57; for mat, 13.25; generic markup of, 2.81; indentation, 2.11, 2.20, 13.25-27; manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.20; multiple stanzas in, 13.34; in notes, 14.38; and paragraph format, 2.12; permissions for, 4.95, 13.3; quo-. tation marks within poems, 13.28; run in to text, 6.111, 6.113, 13.29, 13.34; runover lines, 2.20, 13.25, 13.27; text citations for, 2.20, 13.71-72 rhyme schemes, 7.69 source citations: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.243; classic English
poetry (continued) works, 14.253-54; footnotes keyed to line numbers, 14.53, fig. 14.5; short forms, 14.254; sound recordings of, 14.264; text citations for, 2.20, 13.71-72 terms (e.g., canto, stanza) , 8.184 titles ofpoems, 8.181, 14.86 See also classical Greek and Latin works points, p. 985. See also ellipses; periods (punctuation) Polish language, 11.70 political terminology geographical entities in, 8.48 political and economic organizations and movements, 8.66, 8.70 political divisions, 1.27, 8.51, 8.52 unofficial groups and movements, 8.67 See also governmental entities popes, 8.26, 9.41, 16.36. See also sovereigns and other rulers pop-up boxes, 15.17 portable document format (PDF) files. See PDF files portrait, p. 985 Portuguese language, 8.8, 11.70, 16.83 position bars, in e-books, 1.123 positive (absolute) adjectives, 5.84 positive (absolute) adverbs, 5.162 positive questions, 5.235 possessives, 7.16-29 of abbreviations, 6.43, 6.44, 7.17, 8.189 adjectives after, 5.80 as antecedents of pronouns, 5.29 apostrophes for, generally, 5.50, 6.116 with appositives, 6.28 vs. attributive form, 7.27 basic rule and exceptions, 7.16, 7.20-22 of compound terms, 7.24 vs. contractions, 5.50 definition and uses of, 5.20 for . . . sake expressions, 7.21 and fused participles, 5.114 genitive with, 5.20, 7.25 with gerunds, 7.28 in glossed American Sign Language, 11.134 has, have to denote, 5.153 independent, 5.49 for initialisms, 7.17, 8.189 of italicized or quoted terms, 7.29
INDEX
possessives (continued) joint (group), 5.22 joint vs. separate possession, 7.23 in names of diseases, 8.144 of nouns plural in form, singular in sense, 7.20 of numbers, 7.17 ofwith, 7.20, 7.25, 7.26, 7.29 of plural nouns, basic rule, 7.16 and prepositions, 5.183, 7.26 of pronouns: adjectives after, 5.80; generally, 5.35; indefinite pronouns, 5.67; and joint (group) possessives, 5.22; personal, 5.49-50, 7.28; relative pronouns, 5.63, 5.64 of proper names, 7.17, 7.19, 7.20, 7.27, 7.28 text citations following, 15.25 ofwords ending in unpronounced s, 7.18 See also genitive case post, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) Postal Atlas system, 11.82, 11.85 postal codes Canadian provinces and territories, 10.28 in place of publication, 14.130 punctuation with, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29 vs. standard abbreviations, 10.33 US states and territories, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27 zip code with, 10.29 See also addresses, mailing posters, presented at meetings, 14.217 postpositive adjectives, 5.79 Postscript (PS), pp. 979, 985 pound sign (number sign), 2.98, 2.125, 3.79, 11.131 pound sterling symbol, 9.20, 9.22 powers often (scientific notation), 9.9, 9.11, 9.12 pre, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) Preassigned Control Number (PCN), 1.34 predicate adjectives, 5.79, 5.82 predicates compound, 6.23 defined, 5.18 as linking verbs, 5.82, 5.101 nominative, 5.18, 5.141 prefaces acknowledgments in, 1.42 author's and editor's, order for, 1.41 defined, 1.41
prefaces (continued) editorial method explained in, 1.45 vs. forewords, 5.250 format of term, 8.179, 14.110 illustration credits in, 3.30 indexing of, 16.109 material appropriate for, 1.43 and multiauthor volumes, 2.41, 2.44 new, noted on title page, 1.26 pagination, 1.7 placement in book, 1.4 quotation issues explained in, 13.7, 13.48, 13.58, 13.59, 13.61 running heads for, 1.11 second or subsequent editions or re printings, 1.41 source citations for, 14.110 submission of, 2.3 prefixes combining forms, 7.82, 7.89 (secs. 2, 4) defined, 7.82 division of words with, 7.40 Greek language, 11.121 Hebrew language, 11.93 hyphenation, 6.80, 7.40, 7.81, 7.87-89, 7.89 (secs. 2, 4) , 8.161 mid- as, 7.87 negating, 5.230 in non-English languages, 11.58, 11.93 numerical expressions with, 9.8, 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55 Russian language, 11.106, 11.107 in SI units, 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55, 10.56 standing alone, 7.89 See also compound terms prehistoric cultural periods, 8.74 preliminary pages (prelims). See front matter prepositional phrases, 5.176-83 active voice to eliminate, 5.192 as adverbs, 5.176, 5.178 adverbs replacing, 5.190 clashing (repeated), 5.181 defined, 5.176 elliptical, 5.182 function, 5.177 with intransitive verbs, 5.98 limiting, 5.187-92 objective (accusative) case in, 5.44, 5.172, 5.183 parallel structure in, 5.243
I N D EX
prepositional phrases (continued) and personal pronouns, 5.44, 5.183 as phrasal connectives, 5.142 placement, 5.178, 5.179 pronoun affected by, 5.183 prepositions, 5.172-95 vs. adverbs, 5.184 adverbs modifying, 5.156 appropriate use of, 5.195 avoiding overuse of, 5.187-92 complex (phrasal), 5.174 vs. conjunctions, 5.184 with dates in titles of works, 14.93 defined, 5.172 ending se_ntences with, 5.180 functional variation, 5.184 in headline-style capitalization, 8.159, 14.284, 14.290 idiomatic uses, 5.193-95 in indexing, 16.53, 16.68 in Latin expressions, 8.159 like, 5.185, 5.250 and nominalizations, 5.189 in non-English languages, 11.58, 11.121 with nouns used as adjectives, 5.24 ofgenitive, 5.21, 5.191 only, 5.186 participial, 5.175 in phrasal verbs, 5.102 and possessives, 5.183, 7.26 simple and compound, examples, 5.173 See also prepositional phrases prepress (preliminary presswork), 2.2, 2.107, p. 985 . prepress services, 3.15 preprints, 1.113, 14.173, p. 985. See also elec tronic publications: published before print version present perfect tense, 5.132 present tense, 5.125, 5.129 President, president, 8.19, 8.21, 8.22, 8.28 presidential documents orders and proclamations, 14.289 programs, 8.75 speeches, 8.76, 14.289 treaties, 8.66, 8.80, 8.81, 14.275, 14.290 Press, in publishers' names, 14.134 press releases (news releases), 14.200 press sheets (F&Gs), 2.107, pp. 980, 985 presswork, p. 985
preventive grammar, 5.57 previously published materials of authors, on copyright page, 1.18, figs. 1.3-4 compilations of: and copyright, 2.46, 4.5; illustrations in, 2.47; manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.43-47; notes in, 2.44, 2.45; permissible changes to, 2.44, 2.61; permissions for, 4.105; source notes for, 1.50, 2.46, 14.54; as work made for hire, 4.10 copyright of, 2.46, 4.5 editing of, 2.61, 2.91 permissions for, 2.2, 2.3, 4.66, 4.78, 4.105, fig. 1.4 source citations for, 14.54, 14.181 See also derivative works; quotations price, 1.75, 1.98, 2.108, 2.109, 2.134, 4.63. See also bar codes; currency prime and double prime symbols, 9.16, 9.17, 10.36, 10.61, 10.66, 11.92 printed sheets. See press sheets printer's errors (PEs), 2.135, pp. 984, 986 print-on-demand (POD) titles, 1.28, p. 986 print technologies digital printing, p. 978 folded-and-gathered sheets (F&Gs), 2.107, pp. 980, 985 prepress (preliminary presswork), 2.2, 2.107, p. 985 sheet-fed press, p. 987 web-fed press, p. 990 See also binding privacy, right of, 4.73 prizes and awards, 1.99, 8.31, 8.83, 8.115, 8.172 pro, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) probability mathematical copy and expressions, 9.19, 10.50, 12.57, 12.58 in tables, 3.80, fig. 3.22 proceedings of conferences and symposia, 1.18, 1.39, 4.8, 4.59, 14.217. See also conferences; multiauthor volumes; special issues, journal process color printing, p. 986 product codes (bar codes), 1.69, 1.74, 1.75, 1.84 product sign, 12.40
INDEX
professional titles. See titles and offices of people programs, names of, 8.66, 8.75. See also conferences; governmental entities; pamphlets, brochures, and reports programs, software. See software progressive (imperfect, continuous) tenses, 5.119, 5.128, 5.135 prologues. See introductions promotion and abstracts, 1.76, 2.25 artwork for, 4.77, 4.100, 4.101 and covers and jackets, 1.70 in journals, 1.77, 1.84, 1.86, 2.109 pronouns, 5.27-67 and adjectives, 5.29, 5.49, 5.78, 5.80, 5.81 antecedents: absent, 5.30, 5.61; defined, 5.28; demonstrative pronoun, 5.52; different genders, 5.57; errors, 5.28; for gender neutrality, 5.255; mul tiple, 5.34; possessives as, 5.29; and pronoun number, 5.32-33, 5.42, 5.57, 5.62, 5.255; relative pronouns, 5.57, 5.59-62 and appositives, 5.12, 5.36, 5.51 article as substitute for, 5.78 and assimilation of quoted material into text, 13.12 attribute, 5.45 and bias-free language issues, 5.47-48, 5.252, 5.255-56 classes: adjective, 5.49; demonstrative (deictic), 5.52; indefinite, 5.47, 5.67, 5.139, 5.256; interrogative, 5.54-55, 5.58; list of, 5.38; reciprocal (each other, one another), 5.53; reflexive and intensive, 5.41, 5.51, 5.53; relative (see relative pronouns) in contractions, 5.104, 5.105 definition and uses of, 5.27-30 distributive, 5.67 em dash between introductory noun and, 6.86 as interjections, 5.208 it, 5.47, 5.115, 5.239, 5.240, 5.246, 8.77, 8.118 for named natural events, 8.77 negating, 5.230, 5.233 personal, 5.39-48; after linking verb,
pronouns (continued) 5.45; after than or as . . . as, 5.46; agreement of noun with, 5.42; case of, 5.44-46; changes in form (nominative, objective, genitive), 5.9, 5.35, 5.41 (see also case of nouns and pronouns); compound ( selfforms), 5.51, 5.250; form of, 5.39, 5.41; and gender, 5.43, 5.47, 5.48; identification of, 5.40; misuse of, 5.37; possessive, 5.49-50, 7.28; and prepositional phrases, 5.44, 5.183; singular they, 5.48, 5.48n5, 5.252, 5.256; special uses of, 5.47 (see also he, him, his; she, -
her, hers)
personal, in non-English languages: Danish, 11.70; German, 11.39; glossed American Sign Language, 11.134; Italian, 11.46; Norwegian, 11.70; Polish, 11.70; Swedish, 11.70 person of, 5.30, 5.39, 5.40 phrasal, 5.27 possessive: adjectives after, 5.80; gen erally, 5.35; indefinite, 5.67; and joint (group) possessives, 5.22; personal, 5.49-50, 7.28; relative pronouns, 5.63, 5.64 prepositions with, 5.172 properties, 5.31-37; case (see case of nouns and pronouns); gender, 5.43, 5.47, 5.57; number (see number, of nouns and pronouns); overview, 5.31 for religious figures, 8.95 selfforms of, 5.48, 5.51, 5.250 singular they, 5.48, 5.48n5, 5.252, 5.256 for vehicles and vessels, 8.118 proofreader's marks, 2.119-33 capitalization changes, 2.131 circling comments and instructions, 2.121, 2.124, 2.127, 2.128, 2.129, 2.131 conventions in, 2.119 deletions, 2.124, 2.130 em spaces, 2.126 examples of, fig. 2.5, fig. 2.7 for extensive changes, 2.122 font changes, 2.131 items to be spelled out, 2.129 legibility, 2.123 list of, fig. 2.6 -
I N D EX
proofreader's marks (continued) paragraph and indentation changes, 2.126 placement of, 2.120 position or alignment (justification) changes, 2.98, 2.127 punctuation changes, 2.124, 2.132 spacing between letters or words, 2.125 stet, 2.130 transposition ofitems, 2.128 See also manuscript editing: paper-only proofreading, 2.100-140 assigning responsibility for errors, 2.135-36 defined, 2.100 double-checking in, 2.134 editor's style sheet for, 2.111, 2.112 example, fig. 2.7 extensive changes after, 2.122 global changes, 2.111, 2.113, 2.122 independent professionals for, 2.101 indexer's assistance in, 16.125, 16.131 ofindexes, 2.2, 2.105 and metadata, 1.92 of multiauthor volumes, 2.42 in PDF files, 1.118, 2.2, 2.100, 2.103, 2.119, 2.133 process and checks: comparing copy with proofs, 2.110; fonts and type faces, 2.113, 2.131, 10.8; illustrations and tables, 2.107, 2.115, 2.127, 2.137; master set and routing of corrected version, 2.103; overall appearance, 2.116; page numbers, 2.114, 2.134; queries and instructions in, 2.116, 2.118, 2.121; quotations, 2.113; running heads, 2.76, 2.114; for sense, 2.118; spelling, 2.111; stages of proof, 2.103-9; word division, 2.112 responsibility for, 2.42, 2.101 revised proofs, 2.103, 2.105 schedule for, 2.2, 2.102, 16.4 specific types of material: compilations, 2.43; copy in noneLatin alphabets, 11.73; electronic publications, 2.100, 2.103, 2.137-40 standard for, 2.119 See also proofreader's marks; proofs proofs defined, pp. 984, 986 digital, p. 978
proofs (continued) indexing from, 16.4, 16.102, 16.105, 16.108, 16.117, 16.133 marking, for indexing, 16.117-21, fig. 16.1 in production checklist, 2.77 stages, 2.103-9; book cover and jacket, 2.108; F&Gs, 2.107, pp. 980, 985; first pages and galley proofs, 2.104, p. 981; index proofs, 2.105; journal cover, 2.109; master set maintained, 2.103; prepress and press, 2.2, 2.107, p. 977; revised, 2.103, 2.105, p. 984 See also alterations; proofreader's marks; proofreading proof symbol, 12.56 proper adjectives defined, 5.69 in non-English languages, 11.26, 11.39, 11.70 from place-names, 5.69, 8.45 religious terms, 8.96, 8.97 See also words derived from proper names proper names. See names, proper proper nouns, 5.6. See also names, personal; names, proper; place-names prophets, 8.93 prose extracts. See block quotations protases (conditional clauses), 5.228 proto, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) protocols (network), 14.17, p. 986. See also FTP; HTTP proverbs (maxims), 7.60, 7.62, 13.5, 13.38. See also figures of speech provinces, Canadian, 10.28, 14.130, 14.193 pseudo, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) pseudonyms and pseudonymous works blog comments, 14.208 copyright, 4.25 of human research subjects, 13.49 indexing of, 16.34 source citations for, 14.80-81, 15.35 public-access policies, 4.68 publication date in book review and book notes sections, 1.98 journal articles, 1.92, 1.95, 1.104, 14.171 journals: in copyright line, 1.103; cur rent, on home page, 1.86; identified by, 1.79; location in, 1.84, 1.87; proof-
INDEX
publication date (continued) reading of, 2.109, 2.134; and volume number, 1.80 location in works: copyright notice, 1.22, 4.41; copyright page or title page, 1.19, 1.20, 1.22, 1.25, 14.142; journals, 1.84, 1.87 as metadata, 1.75, 1.92 "no date" (n.d.), 10.42, 14.145, 14.263, 15.18, 15.44, 15.50, 15.54 source citations, author-date reference system: basic structure and punc tuation, 15.5, 15.6, 15.9, 15.25; blog posts, 15.51; editions with more than one date, 15.40; letters in published collections, 15.43; manuscript col lections, 15.54; multimedia content, 15.57; multivolume works published over several years, 15.41; newspapers and magazines, 15.49; "no date," 15.44, 15.50; vs. notes and bibliogra phy system, 15.2, 15.3; placement of, 15.14; references arranged by, 15.1720; social media content, 15.52 source citations, notes and bibliography system, 14.142-46; artworks, 14.235; basic format, 14.127, 14.142; blog posts, 14.208; books published before 1900, 14.128; copublications, 14.140; journal articles, 14.171; magazines, 14.165, 14.188; multimedia content, 14.261, 14.263; multivolume works, 14.117-19, 14.144; new impressions and renewal of copyright, 14.143; newspapers, 14.165, 14.191, 14.197; "no date," 14.145; periodicals, gener ally, 14.165; reference works, 14.232; social media content, 14.209; specific volume of multivolume work, 14.118; websites and web pages, 14.207 when available in previous year, 1.22 See also forthcoming publication details abbreviations in, 1.21 absence of, 10.42, 14.132, 14.145 basic formats, 14.127, 15.6, 15.9, 15.14, 15.25 in book review and book notes sections, 1.98 for classical Greek and Latin works, 14.246, 14.248
publication details (continued) for dissertations and theses, 14.215 form of work (e.g., microfilm), 14.115 in journals, 1.84, 1.87 See also authors' names; copyright; editions; place of publication; publication date; publishers' names; source citations public display, and copyright, 4.13, 4.14, 4.34 public-domain works and copyright, 1.103 derivative works based on, 4.22 government-produced, 4.21, 4.44, 4.68, 4.75 illustrations, 3.35 non-US publications as, 4.29 quotations from, 4.75 source citations for, 14.54 when works become, 4.19, 4.20, 4.27 See also copyright: duration public laws. See legislation public places and structures buildings and monuments, 8.57, 8.68, 8.101, 8.172, 9.48, 9.52, 11.26, 11.61 non-English names for, 8.59 roads and thoroughfares, 8.56, 9.50, 9.51, 10.33, 11.26 rooms, offices, and such, 8.58 publishers addresses, 1.19, 1.20, 1.21, 1.84, 1.95 agreements with (see publishing agreements) archival practices of, 1.114 as authors, 14.84 copublications, 14.140 distribution arrangements, 14.141 and fair-use "rules of thumb," 4.85 generic markup style, 2.81 grants for, 1.31 house style: author communications, 2.68, 2.70; editing for, 2.49; gen erally, 1.116; for indexes, 16.103, 16.106, 16.118, 16.123, 16.129; proofreading for, 2.113; for source citations, 1.108-9, 2.64, 14.2-4; for tables, 3.86 logos, 1.19, 1.69, 1.70 main editorial offices, 14.129 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.7 notes on text, 1.45
INDEX
publishers (continued) parent companies, imprints, and such, 14.138-41 permissions from out-of-business, 4.82 websites of, 1.21, 1.59, 1.68, 1.118, 4.94, 4.97 See also copyright; publication details; publishers' names; publishing agreements publishers' names Books and Press in, 14.134 location in works: book review and book notes sections, 1. 98; copyright notice, 4.42; covers and jackets, 1.69, 1.70; edition details, 1.25; journals, 1.84; title page·, 1.19, 14.129, 14.133 as metadata, 1.75 omissible parts of, 14.134 resources on, 14.133, 14.138 self-published or privately published works, 14.137 in source citations, 14.133-41; abbrevi ations in, 14.133-34, 14.136; and or ampersand in, 14.135; basic format, 14.127; copublications, 14.140; distributed books, 14.141; imprints, parent companies, and such, 1.19, 14.138-41; non-English names, 14.135, 14.136; preferred form, 14.133; when to omit, 14.128 See also publishers publishing agreements, 4.51-63 author's alterations limited by, 2.136 author's warranties, 4.52, 4.70, 4.72, 4.73 basic provisions, 4.52 and copyright owner's rights, 4.13 examples of, figs. 4.1-2 illustrations noted in, 3.15 journal articles, 4.55-57, fig. 4.1 multiauthor volumes, 2.42, 4.58, 4.59, fig. 4.2 new books, 4.52-54 "no derivatives" clause, 4.62 and non-English rights, 4.64 open-access publishing models in, 4.52, 4.66 publisher's responsibilities: copyright tasks, 4.32; rights and permissions requests, 4.70, 4.71, 4.76nl; subsidi ary rights, 4.17-18
publishing agreements (continued) rights to reproduction and distribution, 4.51 for self-published materials, 4.63 subsidiary rights (see subsidiary rights) symposia proceedings, 4.59 See also copyright; intellectual property rights; licenses for copyrighted works; permissions publishing history, 1.25, 2.46. See also editions publishing schedule basic schedule, 2.2, fig. 2.1, fig. 2.2 indexing, 2.2, 2.67, 2.70, 16.4, 16.101 journals, 2.102, fig. 2.2 manuscript editing, 2.2, 2.52 proofreading, 2.2, 2.102, 16.4 volume editor's responsibility for, 2.41 PubMed, 1.111, 4.68 punctuation and alphabetizing, 16.59, 16.60, 16.61 author queries about, 2.69 basic function of, 6.1 in captions, 3.21, 3.23, 3.24, 6.14 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 in electronic publications, 6.2, 6.4, 6.8, 6.84 errors in (see errors in grammar and punctuation) with interjections, 5.206, 6.35 and italics, 6.2, 14.89 marking manuscript for, 2.93, 2.95, 2.96 marking proofs for, 2.124, 2.132 in mathematical copy, 12.7, 12.18, 12.38, 12.54 with mathematical expressions, 12.15, 12.18-20, 12.28, 12.35, 12.42 multiple marks at same place, 6.122-26, table 6.1 non-English materials (see under non English materials) permissible changes to, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19, 13.7, 13.30-31, 14.88 spaces following, 2.9, 6.7, 6.12, 6.62, 14.116 tables (see under tables) with trademark symbols, 8.153 typographic considerations, 6.2-6, 6.14 ofURLs, DOis, and such in text, 2.13, 6.8, 6.104, 6.112, 7.46, 14.17-18 foryes and no, 5.250 See also abbreviations, general; abbrevi-
INDEX
punctuation (continued) ations, specific; braces in mathemat ical expressions; brackets; colons; commas; dashes; ellipses; exclama tion points; guillemets; hyphens and hyphenation; parentheses; periods (punctuation); question marks; quotation marks; quotations; semi colons; slashes; suspension points; typographic considerations quaint characters, p. 983 quantities. See International System of Units; metric system; numbers; physical quantities; scientific and technical terminology; units of mea surement quasi, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) queens. See sovereigns and other rulers queries. See author queries question marks, 6.68-70 vs. exclamation mark, 6.72 inverted, in Spanish works, 11.19, 11.62 marking proofs for, 2.132 in non-English materials, 11.19, 11.62, 11.102, 11.116 other punctuation with: commas, 6.42, 6.125; ellipses, 11.102, 13.54; em dashes, 6.89; exclamation points, 6.126; generally, 6.70; parentheses, 6.70, 6.98; periods, 6.124; quotation marks, 6.10, 6.70, 13.69 in relation to surrounding text, 6.70 in source citations: publication details, surmised, 14.132, 15.44; with text citations, 13.69 in titles of works, 6.124-26, 14.92, 14.96, 16.54 uses, other: declarative or imperative sentences, 6.68; editorial doubt, 6.68, 14.132, 15.34, 15.44; indirect questions, 6.69; interpolation for missing or illegible words, 13.59; within sentences, 6.69-70 when to omit, 6.69 See also punctuation; questions questions alternative, 5.212 in American Sign Language, 11.135 as cleft sentences, 5.246 comma with, 6.42
questions (continued) conjunctions for, 5.201, 5.202 declarative structure in, 5.213 defined, 5.212 exceptional types of, 5.213 exclamations as, 6.72 exclamatory, 5.213 indirect, 5.201, 6.42, 6.69 negation in, 5.104, 5.235 and pronouns, 5.54-55, 5.58 question marks with, 6.68 rhetorical, 5.213 tag, 5.213 who or whom with, 5.66 wh- questions, 5.212 within sentences, 6.42, 6.63, 6.65, 6.69-70 word order in, 5.224 yes-no, 5.212, 5.213 See also question marks quite, 5.90 quotation marks alternatives to, 6.91, 11.11, H.19, 13.42 in British style, 6.9, 13.30 closing, 6.9-11, 13.68, 13.70, table 6.1 directional or "smart," 2.85, 6.115, 13.7 double vs. single, 7.58, 13.30-31, 13.33, 13.63 (see also single below) editing of, 2.61 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 font for, 6.6 inverted, split-level, 11.41 marking proofs for, 2.132 non-English materials: Chinese, 11.89; French, 11.30; German, 11.41; for guillemets, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19, 13.7; Italian, 11.47; Japanese, 11.89; quotations, 11.3; Spanish, 11.63; translations, 11.5, 11.12; transliterated materials, 2.80 omission of, 13.36-38, 13.45 other punctuation with, 6.9-11, 6.114; colons, 6.10, 6.65, 13.16; commas, 2.80, 6.9, 6.40; in computer terminology, 7.79; ellipses, 13.41; em dashes, 6.87, 6.90; exclamation points, 6.10, 6.74, 13.30, 13.69; in non-English languages, 11.29, 11.41, 11.47, 11.63; parentheses, 6.98; peri ods, 2.80, 6.9; question marks, 6.10, 6.70, 13.69; quotation marks (single
INDEX
quotation marks (continued) and double), 6.11, 6.120, 8.177, 13.3031; semicolons, 6.10; summary, table 6.1 and paragraphing, 13.32-35 permissible changes to, 13.7 plurals ofwords in, 7.13 possessives of terms in, 7.29 vs. primes and double primes, 9.16, 10.36 scare quotes, 7.57, 11.47, 14.94 single: directional or "smart" char acters for, 2.80, 2.85, 6.115, 6.117; vs. double, 7.58, 13.30-31, 13.33; double next to, 6.11, 6.120, 8.177; for horticultural cultivars, 8.130; in non English-language materials, 11.30, 11.63, 11.77; in terms quoted within titles, 14.94 speech, dialogue, and conversation, 13.32, 13.39-45; alternatives to quo tation marks, 6.91, 11.11, 11.19, 13.42; direct discourse, 13.39, 13.44; indirect discourse, 13.45; single-word speech, 13.40; unspoken discourse, 13.43 uses, other: common expressions and figures of speech, 7.60; computer ter minology, 7.79; in editorial interpola tions, 13.63; episodes and segments in television, radio, and podcasts, 8.189; epithets and nicknames, 8.34; first lines of poems, 8.182; glossed American Sign Language, 11.128, 11.133; lectures; 8.87; non-English materials (see above); notes keyed to text by line or page numbers, 14.53; with so-called, 7.59; songs and shorter musical compositions, 8.194; and text citations for quotations, 13.6869; titles of works (see under titles of works); unpublished materials, 14.292; within poems, 13.28; words and phrases used as words, 7.63 See also guillemets; punctuation; quo tations quotations basic principles: accuracy, 13.6; attri bution and fair use, 4.64, 4.75, 4.84, 4. 92; commonly known facts and ex pressions, 13.5; credit and permission for, 13.3; danger of skewed meaning,
quotations (continued) 13.51; in modern scholarship, 13.2; paraphrase vs. quotation, 4.89, 11.17, 13.4 beginning in text, 13.23 brackets in: adjustments in capitaliza tion, 13.18, 13.21, 13.53; adjustments in tenses and pronouns, 13.12; "brackets in the original," 6. 99; editorial interpolations and clarifica tions, 6.99, 6.103 (see also editorial interpolations and clarifications); glosses or translations, 6.96, 6.99; intervening words of text, 13.23; missing or illegible words, 13.59; other punctuation with, 6.103; sic, 13.61; text citations, 13.7, 15.28, 15.40 capitalization, 8.162, 13.18-21, 13.53 in context of original, 4.84, 4.86 cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.33, 13.6 editing, 2.61, 2.69, 11.16 editorial interpolations and clarifica tions (see editorial interpolations and clarifications) errors in original source, 13.7, 13.61 generic markup of, 2.74, 2.80, 2.81 indentation: block quotations, 2.11, 2.19; drama excerpts, 13.8, 13.47; interviews and discussions, 13.48; paragraphs within, 2.19, 13.22; poetry extracts, 2.11, 2.20, 13.25-27 interruptions in, 13.14 length of, 13.10, 13.25 manuscript preparation guidelines for, 2.11, 2.19, 2.20, 13.9 non-English materials in English context (see under non-English materials) non-English terms in, 6.96 note references or notes within, 13.7, 13.58 original spelling in, 7.3 overview, 13.1 paragraphs within, 2.19, 13.22, 13.32-33, 13.35, 13.39, 13.56 vs. paraphrasing, 4.89, 11.17, 13.4 permissible changes (see permissible changes to quoted and referenced materials) poetry (see under poetry) proofreading of, 2.113 punctuation: brackets (see brackets
INDEX
quotations (continued) in above); colons, 6.10, 6.63, 6.65, 13.16; commas, 6.40, 13.14; ellipses, 13.50-58; non-English materials in English context, 11.3, 11.19; periods, 13.17; quotation marks (see quotation marks); slashes, 13.29 quotations within, 13.30-31, 13.33 relation to text: assimilation, 3.15, 13.11-12; initial capital or lowercase letter, 13.18-21; introductory phrases and words before, 13.14-16; poetry, 13.25-29; run-in vs. block, 13.9-10; text following, 2.12, 2.21, 13.24 from secondary sources, 14.260, 14.291, 15.56 sic with, 6.73, 7.55, 13.61 sources for (see source citations; text citations for below) and syntax, 13.11, 13.18-20 text citations for, 13.64-72; block quo tations, 13.70-72, 15.26; in brackets, 13.7, 15.28, 15.40; "brackets in the original" in, 6.99; epigraphs, 1.37, 1.49, 13.36, 14.52; errors in original source, 13.7; frequently cited works, 13.67; full, 13.65; ibid. in, 13.66; non English materials (see non-English materials above); parentheses with, 13.64; placement of, 15.26; poetry, 2.20, 13.71-72; run-in quotations, 13.68-69, 15.26; shortened, 13.66-67, 13.70 text citations within original, 13.7 in titles of works, 8.162, 14.94 within notes, 11.13, 14.38 word forms for, 5.250 See also block quotations; dialogue; di rect address; editorial interpolations and clarifications; ellipses; epigraphs; fair-use doctrine; guillemets; max ims; poetry; punctuation; quotation marks; run-in quotations; source citations; speech quoted in, 14.260, 15.56 Qur'an (Koran), 8.103, 11.77, 14.241 q.v. (quod vide), 10.42 race, 8.38, 8.39. See also groups of people radiations, 8.151 radical sign, 12.42-44
radio and radio programs, 8.189 ragged right (flush left) justification, 2.10, 3.73, 7.47, 16.136, fig. 3.19, p. 986. See also justification ranges (numbers). See inclusive (continuing) numbers rarely, 5.230 rather, 5.201 ratios, 6.62, 9.58 re, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) readers' comments on blog posts, 14.208, 15.51 in newspapers, 14.196 on online multimedia content, 14.267 on social media posts, 14.209, 15.52 reading lists, 1.78 reciprocal pronouns (each other, one another), 5.53 record group numbers, 14.292 recoverability, principle of, 5.229 recto pages abbreviatiOn, 14.154-55 always odd-numbered, 1.5 beginning of gallery, 3.6 defined, p. 986 first journal page, 1.81 first page of index, 1.65 in folio editions, 14.155 parts of book starting on, 1.4, 1.49, 1.51, 1.53, 1.54, 1.65 proofreading for correct use of, 2.114, 2.115 running heads for, 1.11-15 in signed signatures, 14.154 specified on final manuscript for produc tion, 2.75, 2.76, 2.77 See also page numbers; pagination; verso pages redlining, p. 986. See also tracking changes reference lists abbreviations in, generally, 15.15 authors' names (see authors' names in source citations) vs. bibliographies, 14.71, 15.3 cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.63, 15.21 cross-references to other titles in, 15.42 editing of, 2.63, 2.64 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 format: examples and variations, 15.9, 15.22, fig. 15.1; hanging (flush and-hang) indentation, 1.63, 2.24;
INDEX
reference lists (continued) manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.24, 14.67, 15.17; overview, 15.5-6; page numbers and other locators, 15.8; type size, 1.63 headings for, 15.5, 15.10 hyperlinks to and from (see hyperlinks for source citations) importance of, 15.10 manuscript preparation guidelines for authors, 15.17 metadata for, 1.92 multiauthor volumes, 15.10 order of entries: alphabetical, 2.63, 15.11, fig. 15.1; chronological, 2.63, 14.71, 15.18, 15.19.; same-author, sameyear works, 15.20; single vs. several authors, 15.16; works with multiple publication dates, 15.40 placement in book, 1.4, 1.63, 15.10 publication date, placement of, 15.14 publication details: editions with multiple, 15.40; forthcoming works, 15.18, 15.45; letters in published col lections, 15.43; multivolume works published over several years, 15.41; "no date," 15.18, 15.44 scholarly symbols in, 10.43 secondary sources quoted, 15.56 submission of, 2.3 3-em dash in, 15.17-20; caveats, 15.17; chronological order for repeated names, 1.124, 15.18, 15.19; with ed ited, translated, oi' compiled works, 15.19; with same author, same year, 15.20 titles as entries, 15.39 See also author-date reference system; bibliographies; source citations; text citations; titles of works in source citations reference works HTML format for, 1.118 hyperlinks in, 1.118, 1.120 indexes for, 16.26 for indexing, 16.32 for manuscript editing, 2.54 online versions, 1.118, 1.120, 1.121, 14.233 organizing principle of, 1.123 source citations for, 14.103, 14.232-34 titles of, 8.191
reference works (continued) See also catalogs; dictionaries; encyclo pedias; "resources on" under specific topics
reflexive and intensive pronouns, 5.41, 5.51, 5.53 reflowable formats illustration placement in, 3.8 and indexes, 16.13 line breaks in, 6.82, 6.90, 6.113, 7.36, 7.47, 14.18 location information, 1.6 navigation in, 1.123, 2.35, 14.22, 14.160, 14.174, 15.23 and notes, 14.49 and text breaks, 1.58 regions, national and world, 8.47, 8.54. See also geographical terminology; place names; political terminology regression testing, 2.138 regular expressions, p. 984. See also pattern matching relationship terms, 7.89 (sec. 3), 8.36 relative adjectives, 5.56 relative adverbial conjunctions, 5.202 relative clauses, 3.54, 5.56, 5.60, 5.225, 5.226, 5.227, 6.27 relative pronouns, 5.56-66 antecedents absent with, 5.30, 5.61 antecedents of, 5.57, 5.59-62 in cleft sentences, 5.246, 5.247 compound, 5.65 defined, 5.56 -ever suffix, 5.65, 5.66 gender, number, and case of, 5.57, 5.66, 5.140 for gender neutrality, 5.255 and grammatical ellipses, 5.226, 5.247 one in antecedent, 5.62 positional nuances of, 5.58 possessive forms of, 5.63, 5.64 in remote clauses, 5.60 as subjects, 5.140 See also relative clauses; that; what; which; who, whom, whose
religions and religious concerns buildings, 8.101, 9.48 concepts, 8.94, 8.99, 8.108, 8.109 events: holidays, 8.89; services and rites, 8.110; theologically important (e.g., the Exodus), 8.108
INDEX
religions and religious concerns (continued) groups: Church, church, 8.98, 8.101; councils, synods, and such, 8.102; denominations, sects, orders, and movements, 8.97; jurisdictions and divisions of, 8.100; major religions, 8.96 names and titles: abbreviations, 10.18, 10.22; alternatives to God, 8.92; capitalization, 8.19, 8.26, 8.33, 8.36; deities, 8.91, 8.92; honorifics, 8.26, 8.33, 10.18, 16.39; indexing of, 16.37, 16.39; kinship terms, 8.36; in non-English languages, 11.26, 11.88; numbered places of worship, 9.48; numerals with, 9.41, 9.48; popes and patriarchs, 8.26, 9.41, 16.36, 16.37; pronouns for, 8.95; religious figures, 8.93, 8.95, 10.20, 14.83, 16.42 religious objects, 8.111 See also Bible; biblical citations; religious works religious works Qur'an (Koran), 8.103, 11.77, 14.241 resources on, 14.238, 14.241 source citations for, 6.62, 9.26, 10.48, 14.238-41 treatment in text: concepts, 8.94, 8.99, 8.108, 8.109; prayers, creeds, and such, 8.107; scriptures, 8.103, 8.104 Upanishads, 8.103, 14.241 See also Bible; religions and religious concerns repetition, author queries about, 2.69 reporters (for court cases and decisions), 14.276, 14.277, 14.278, 14.279, 14.294, 14.298 reports. See pamphlets, brochures, and reports reprints abbreviation of reprint or reprinted, 10.42 copyright dates of, 1.23, fig. 1.2 defined, p. 986 e-books as, 14.159 vs. editions, 1.23, 1.26 editorial interpolations and clarifications in, 6.99 introduction for, 1.47 prefaces for, 1.41 rights to, 4.55, 4.64, 4.78, 4.101, fig. 4.1
reprints (continued) source citations for, 14.54, 14.114, 14.159, 15.40 unnumbered source notes, 1.50, 14.54 See also impressions reproduction and copyright, 4.13, 4.34, 4.51, 4.64. See also photocopying resolution (pixels), p. 986 resolutions, 14.283. See also legislation; US Congress restrictive and nonrestrictive clauses and phrases, 5.23, 6.27, 6.28, 6.29, 6.30, 6.41, 6.50 retractions, 1. 91 Reverend, Rev., 10.18, 16.39 reverse italics, 8.173, 14.95 reviews basic format, 1. 98 of books, 1.87, 1.94, 1.98, 4.10, 14.153, 14.202 quoted on paperback covers, 1.70 source citations for, 14.153, 14.201-4 revised and expanded, 1.26 revised editions. See editions revised proofs, 2.103, 2.105, p. 984 revision dates maps, 14.237 online reference works, 14.233 websites and web pages, 14.13, 14.207, 15.50 revisions. See tracking changes revolutions, 8.113 RGB mode, 3.3, p. 986 rhetorical questions, 5.213 rhyme schemes, 7.69 right or left indent, 2.11 rights. See copyright; intellectual property rights; publishing agreements; sub sidiary rights rights to distribution outside the US, 4.34, 4.64, 4.76 rivers, 8.53, 8.54, 8.55 roads and thoroughfares abbreviations of, 10.33 names of, 8.56, 11.26 numbers of, 9.50, 9.51 See also addresses, mailing roman (type) abbreviations, 10.7, 10.42, 12.11, 12.36, 12.64, 16.116 Anon. and pseud , 14.79
INDEX
roman (type) (continued) apostrophe and s in possessives of italicized terms, 7.29 artworks of antiquity, 8.198 case names in citations, 14.272 city or state names with newspaper titles, 14.193, 14.194 as default, 7.49, p. 987 defined, p. 987 figure in text, 3. 9 for gene products, 8.132 generic terms for parts of books, 8.179, 8.180 index cross-references, 16.22 indexes of authors, first lines, and titles, 16.145 italicized terms within titles (reverse italics), 8.173, 14.95 journal and magazine article titles in source citations, 14.169, 14.188 key terms after first occurrence, 7.56 Latin terms, 7.55, 10.7, 10.42, 13.66 legal-style citations, 14.272, 14.273, 14.276, 14.288, 14.290 letters as shapes, 7.67 letters standing for names, 7.66 maps, descriptions of, 14.237 marking proofs for, 2.131 mathematical expressions, 12.11, 12.36, 12.64, 12.65 names of apps, devices, and operating systems, 8.155 names ofletters, 7.68 non-English words, 7.53-55 opus numbers, 8.196 performers on recordings, 8.197 periodical departments or columns, 8.177, 14.195 phonetic symbols, 7.64 proper names used as words, 7.63 scholastic letter grades, 7.65 in scriptural citations, 14.239, 14.241 for s in plural form ofitalicized terms, 7.12, 12.3 titles of series and editions, 14.124, 8.176 titles of websites, 14.206, 8.191 titles with quotation marks (see titles of works: quotation marks for) transliterated terms after first occur rence, 11.75, 11.110
roman (type) (continued) UK legal and public documents, 14.298, 14.300 volume numbers, 14.23, 14.171, 15.9 words for musical pitches, 7.71 See also boldface; italics; quotation marks; special characters; trans literation and transliterated text; typographic considerations Romanian language, 11.70 romanization. See transliteration and trans literated text roman numerals vs. arabic numerals, 14.147, table 9.1 capitals: enzyme names, 8.133; musical chords, 7.73; with personal names, 6.43, 7.42, 9.42, 10.8, 16.37, 16.41, 16.66; sequels, 9.43; sovereigns and other rulers, 9.41; vessels and such, 9.44 Chicago's preference for arabic over, 9.67 defined, p. 987 divisions within legal instruments, 9.28 general principles, 9.65 inclusive ranges, 9.61, 16.14 musical chords, 7.73 in pagination, 1.4, 1.7, 1.9, 2.38, 2.57, 9.26 subtrahends (back counters), 9.66 See also arabic numerals; numbers rooms, offices, and such, 8.58 royalties failure to pay, 4.37 multiauthor works, 4.58 permissions fees from, 4.104 publishing agreements on, 4.52 and subsidiary rights, 4.64, 4.69 royalty. See nobility; sovereigns and other rulers R. R. Bowker Company, 1.32, 1.74 rulers. See sovereigns and other rulers rules Oines) above continued footnotes, 14.41, fig. 14.1 avoided in illustrations, 3.19 in tables, 3.53, 3.57, 3.58, 3.74, 3.86, figs. 3.13-14, fig. 3.16 run in, p. 987. See also indexes: run-in style; run-in lists; run-in quotations run-in lists, 6.128, 6.129, 6.131, 7.45 "run in" mark, 2.126
INDEX
run-in quotations assimilation into text, 13.11-12 vs. block, 13.9-10 capitalization, 13.19, 13.21 converting block quotations to, 13.31 defined, 13.9 multiple paragraphs in, 13.32-33, 13.35 poetry, 6.111, 6.113, 13.29, 13.34 punctuation: colons, 13.16; commas, 13.14; quotation marks, 13.30, 13.68; slashes, 13.29 text citations for, 13.68-69, 15.26 See also text citations run-in style (indexes). See under indexes run-in subheads, 1.56, 2.18, 2.59, 6.14 running feet, 1.10, 1.83 running heads, 1.10-16 choice of content for, 1.11, 2.76, 14.47 defined, 1.10, p. 987 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.76 no punctuation following, 6.14 not always used in electronic publica tions, 1.10, 1.83, 1.123, 14.47 omission of, 1.12, 1.16, 1.49, 2.115, 3.86, 3.87 proofreading of, 2.76, 2.114 publisher's responsibility for, 2.3 shortening of, 2.76 specific instances: appendixes, 1.14; back matter, 1.14, 1.15; electronic publications, 1.12; endnotes (see un der endnotes); front matter, 1.11, 1.16; and illustrations, 1.8, 1.16, 2.115; in dexes, 1.14, 16.6; journals, 1.83, 2.76; reference works, 1.13; and tables, 1.16, 2.115, 3.86, 3.87; text, 1.12 title metadata for, 1.12 running sheets. See press sheets runover lines defined, p. 987 drama quotations, 13.47 hanging indentation for, 2.24, 16.137 indexes, 16.26, 16.28, 16.137 mathematical expressions, 12.23 outlines, 6.132 poetry extracts, 2.20, 13.25, 13.27 tables, 3.61, 3.73, fig. 3.12 vertical lists, 2.21, 6.130 Russian language, 11.98-108 alphabet (see Cyrillic alphabet) capitalization, 8.12, 11.99, 11.100
Russian language (continued) names, 8.12, 11.98 punctuation, 11.101-3 quotations and dialogue, 11.101 resources on, 11.98 special characters, 11.98, table 11.3 titles of works, 11.100 word division, 11.70, 11.104-8 saddle stitching (saddle wiring), p. 987 saddle wiring (saddle stitching), p. 987 Saint, St.
alphabetizing of, 16.74, 16.93 for names of saints, 8.93, 10.20, 16.42 personal names with, 16.74 place-names with, 10.30, 11.26, 16.90, 16.93 when to spell out, 10.20 See also saints saints as authors, 14.83 indexing names of, 16.42 non-English names of, 11.26 treatment in text, 8.93, 10.20 Sanskrit language, 11.74 sans serif, p. 987 scalars, 12.52 scale, p. 987 scaling, 3.19 scans and scanning copyright issues, 4.17 defined, p. 987 for electronic versions of older works, 14.162 for illustrations, 2.27, 2.47, 3.15 OCR for, 2.43, p. 983 scarcely, 5.230 scare quotes, 7.57, 11.47, 14.94 schedules. See publishing schedule schemas (document type definitions), p. 979 scholarly works, generally abbreviations and symbols used in, 10.42-43 anonymity of research subjects in, 13.49 books and journals as core, 1.1-2 and citation management software, 14.5 conflicts of interest noted in, 1.95 editors' notes in, 1.45 fair-use tradition in, 4.87 licensing revenue as supporting, 4.66
INDEX
scholarly works, generally (continued) retaining original meaning of quota tions, 13.51 role of quotations in, 13.2 role of source citations in, 14.1 scientific and technical terminology abbreviations: astronomical and astro physical, 9.10, 10.61-62; botanical and zoological, 8.121, 8.122, 8.123, 8.124; capitalization, 10.6, 10.49; chemical elements, 10.63; latitude and longitude, 10.36; list of, 10.49; periods omitted in, 10.4; resources on, 10.1; SI units, 10.49, 10.51-59; statistics, 10.50; units of measure ment, 10.64-68 astronomical and astrophysical, 8.13742, 9.10, 10.60-62 botanical and zoological (see botanical terminology; zoological terminology) data as plural, 5.14, 5.250 genetic, 8.131-33 geological, 8.134-36, 10.42 hyphenation of, 7.89 medical, 8.143-46 physical and chemical, 7.89 (sec. 1, chemical terms), 8.147-52, 10.63 resources on, 8.119, 8.128-31, 8.134, 8.137, 8.143, 8.147 See also International System of Units; metric system; scientific and techni cal works; units of measurement scientific and technical works abstracts, 1.93, 1.95 · abstracts for, 1.76 author's warranties for, 4.73 continuous publishing model, 1.82, 1.113 errata, 1.68 hyperlinks for source citations in, 14.6 illustrations, 2.28, 3.11, 3.25, 3.27, figs. 3.6-9 indexes for, 1.110-11, 16.6, 16.7, 16.11, 16.26 letters to the editor, 1.101 numbers, generally, 9.1, 9.3, 9.54 open-access publishing models, 4.61 percent symbol in, 9.18 preprints, 1.113 publication history, 1.104 punctuation, 6.9 sections and subsections in, 1.57
scientific and technical works (continued) source citations for: access dates, 14.12, 14.257; author-date reference system preferred, 14.3, 15.5; databases, 14.257; et al. in, 14.76; initials for au thors' given names, 15.12, 15.33; num bered reference system, 1.108, 14.28; titles of works, 8.168, 15.13, 15.38 subhead levels in, 1.56 tables in, 3.48 titles, 8.168, 15.13, 15.38, 15.46 twenty-four-hour system of time in, 9.39 units of measurement in, 9.16, 10.64-68 See also computer terminology; mathematical copy; mathematical expressions; scientific and technical terminology scientific notation (powers often), 9.9, 9.11, 9.12 screen, p. 987 screen margins, 1.122 screen names, 14.208, 14.209, 15.52, 16.64 screen numbers, in e-books, 1.123 scriptures, 8.103, 8.104, 14.238-41. See also Bible; biblical citations; religious works sculpture, 8.57, 8.198, 14.235 search engines feature definition documents for, 2.139 vs. indexes, 1.110, 1.111, 16.2, 16.7 journal-specific, 1.86 and keywords, 1.76, 1.93, 1.111, 1.120, 2.25 and metadata, 1.75, 1.76, 1.92 and plurals, 7.5 searching in electronic publications, 14.22, 16.2 in manuscript files, 2.36, 2.79, 2.80 in PDF files, 1.118, 2.111, 2.133, 16.102, 16.105 See also search engines seasons, 1.80, 8.88, 14.171. See also dates secondary sources, 14.260, 14.291, 15.56 section mark, 3.79, 10.43, 14.273 section numbers, as locators double or multiple numeration, 1.57 in electronic publications, 1.123, 14.160 in indexes, 16.108 legal and public documents, 14.273, 14.283, 14.295 newspapers, 14.191
INDEX
sections and subsections abbreviations ofsection, 10.42, 14.150 in bibliographies, 14.63, 14.263, fig. 14.9 cross-references to, 2.35 in journals, 1.83, 1.87, 1.95 newspapers, 14.191 openings, decorative initials for, 13.37 in reference lists, 15.11 in scientific and technical works, 1.57 symbol for, 3.79, 10.43, 14.273 use of term, 1.48 See also section numbers, as locators; subheads see, 14.42. See also cross-references, in indexes seldom, 5.230 selected bibliographies, 14.64, fig. 14.9 self, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 3) self, as suffix, 5.48, 5.51, 5.250 self-published materials checking markup for, 2.73 copyright page, 1.20, 1.21 design templates for, 2.82 editing for, 2.48, 2.52 illustrations in, 3.15 ISBN and bar codes, 1.32 keywords for, 1.76 metadata for, 1.75, 1.76 PCN (Preassigned Control Number), 1.34 place of publication, 14.132, 14.137 proofreading for, 2.101, 2.137 reliability of materials, 14.14 retail platforms for, 1.75, 1.76, 2.73, 4.63, 14.132, 14.137 source citations for, 14.132, 14.137 title page, 1.19 semantic markup, 2.82nl, 7.49 semi, as prefix, 5.250, 7.89 (sec. 4) semicolons, 6.56-60 marking proofs for, 2.132 other punctuation with: closing quo tation marks, 6.10; ellipses, 13.54; parentheses, 6. 98 in source citations: classical Greek and Latin works, 14.245; copublications, 14.140; more than one subtitle, 14.90; notes with multiple citations, 14.57; and or with double titles, 14.91; text citations, 15.7, 15.22, 15.24, 15.28, 15.30 uses: before conjunction, 6.59; before
semicolons (continued) conjunctive adverbs, 6.57; before that is, namely,for example, and such, 6.51, 6.58; in complex series, 6.60; independent clauses, 6.5659; indexes, 16.17, 16.20, 16.23, 16.25, 16.96; lists, 6.129, 6.131; in mathematical copy, 12.7, 12.18, 12.38, 12.54; in non-English languages, 11.7, 11.116; for series of elements in sen tence, 6.60, 6.129; tables, 3.80; titles of works, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 14.90-91 See also colons; punctuation sentence adverbs, 5.157 sentence fragments. See ellipses, gram matical sentences adverbs modifying, 5.157 beginnings of: conjunctions, 5.203, 5.204, 5.250; lowercased names, 8.4, 8.5; mathematical symbols, 12.7; numbers, 9.5; percentages, 9.18; years, 9.5, 9.29;yes or no, 6.34, 13.40 cleft, 5.246-48 deliberately incomplete, 13.55 ellipses after complete, 13.53 glossed American Sign Language, 11.133 and list format, 6.129, 6.130 and mathematical expressions, 12.7, 12.18 one-word, 5.97 parallel structure in, 5.242-45 in parentheses, 6.13, 6.98 parenthetical elements in, 6.48, 6.51, 6.85, 6.95 pauses or breaks, 6.16, 6.87 (see also interjections) prepositions ending, 5.180 questions within, 6.42, 6.63, 6.65, 6.69-70 series of elements in (see series of elements in sentence) series ofrelated, 6.61, 6.63 subjects and predicates of, 5.18 traditional structures, 5.217-20 types of, 5.211-16; complex, 5.219, 5.225; compound, 5.218; compound complex, 5.220; declarative (statements), 5.211, 5.246, 6.12, 6.68; elliptical (see ellipses, grammatical); exclamations, 5.216, 6.35; imperative
INDEX
sentences (continued) (directives) (see imperative sen tences); interrogative (see questions); simple, 5.217 URLs within, 6.8 See also clauses; syntax sentence-style capitalization titles of works: basic principles and examples, 8.158; classical Greek and Latin works, 11.54, 14.247; "down style," 8.1; in journal reference lists, 8.158, 8.168, 15.13, 15.38; non English, 11.6, 11.27, 14.98-99, 14.123, 14.194; translations, 14.99 uses, other: captions, 3.21; chart titles, 3.44; first lines of poems, 8.182; non-English words and phrases, 11.4; subheads, 1.56, 2.18, 2.59, 8.158; tables, 3.54, 3.55, 3.56, 3.59 See also headline-style capitalization September 11, 2001, 9.35 sequels, numbers for, 8.189, 9.43 Serbian language, 11.70 serial (Oxford) commas, 6.19-21, 6.23, 8.165, 14.135. See also commas serial publications, copyright registration forms for, 4.48. See also periodicals serial rights, first or second, 4.64 series, 8.176 series of elements in sentence and ampersands, 6.21 colons to introduce, 6.61, 6.67 commas within, 6.19-21, 6.23, 8.165, 14.135 and em dash, 6.86 semicolons within, 6.60, 6.129 series oflectures. See lectures and lecture series series of works ISBN and ISSN for, 1.32 source citations for, 14.86, 14.123-26, 14.218 titles of series: in book review and book notes sections, 1.98; capitalized but not italicized, 8.2, 8.176, 14.86, 14.123-24; on covers or jackets, 1.70; in front matter, 1.4, 1.18; proofread ing of, 2.108 unfinished date ranges for, 6.79 working papers in, 14.218
series of works (continued) See also multivolume works; volumes and volume numbers serif, p. 987 sewing (signatures), 8.14, p. 987 sexual orientation, terms for, 8.41 SGML, p. 987 shading, 3.19, 3.43, 3.64 shall, 5.131, 5.231, 5.250 shan't, 5.231 s/he, 5.250, 5.252, 5.256 she, her, hers, 5.49, 5.50 sheet-fed press, p. 987 ships and other craft, 8.2, 8.116-18 shortened citations, 14.29-36 vs. abbreviated titles, 14.59 anonymous works in text citations, 15.34 authors' names, 14.30-32, 14.185 basic structure, 14.30 biblical citations, 14.239 and bibliography, 14.61, 14.64 blog posts and comments, 14.208 chapters, 14.108 classical Greek and Latin works, 14.244 criteria for, 14.29 cross-reference to full citation, 14.31 databases, 14.276 examples and variations, 14.23 vs. ibid., 1.124, 13.66, 14.34, 14.48 idem, op. cit., loc. cit., discouraged, 14.35-36 journal articles, 14.23, 14.33, 14.185 journal titles, 15.13, 15.46 in legal style, 14.275, 14.276, 14.279 letters in published collections, 14.111 manuscript collections, 14.229 multiauthor volumes, 14.32, 14.108 multivolume works, 14.118 newspapers, 14.196 in notes, 14.19, 14.48 poetry extracts, 13.72 quotations, 13.66-67, 13.70 same-author, same-year works in text citations, 15.29 secondary sources, 14.291 short forms for DOis and URLs, 14.10 in table source notes, 3.77 titles as reference list entries, 15.39 very long titles, 14.97 should, 5.149, 5.150, 5.250
INDEX
SI. See International System of Units; metric system sic, 6.73, 7.55, 13.61 sideheads, pp. 987-88 side sewing, p. 988 signatures (book), 1.41, 3.6, 14.154, p. 988 signatures (name), 1.41, 10.11 signed languages, 11.125. See also American Sign Language signs, quotation of, 7.61. See also symbols, general signs and notices, 7.61 simple adverbs, 5.160 simple sentences, 5.217 simultaneous print/electronic publishing model books, 1.2, 14.159 common use of, 1.2 and formal markup languages, 1.117 and formats, 1.77 and illustrations, 1.107, 3.10, 3.17, 3.26 and ISSNs, 1.79, 1.86 and letters to the editor, 1.101 noting differences, 1.78, 1.81, 1.87, 14.16 page ranges noted, 1.81 proofreading for, 2.140 source citation considerations, 14.16 and tables, 1.106 and version control, 1.112 See also multiple formats, publications in since, 5.201, 5.202, 5.250 singular. See number, of nouns and pronouns Sir, Dame, 8.32, 16.38 site license, 1.86 site map, 2.137 slang, 5.95, 7.57 slant. See slashes slashes, 6.105-13 in abbreviations, 6.109, 10.4 alternative terms for, 6.105 vs. backslashes, 6.105, 6.112 in dates, 6.107, 6.108, 6.113 dividing poetry lines, 6.111, 6.113, 13.29, 13.34 double, dividing poetry stanzas, 13.34 double, in URLs, 14.18 in fractions, 6.110, 6.113, 12.45, 12.47 in generic markup, 2.81 and line breaks, 6.113
slashes (continued) in mathematical expressions, 6.110, 12.15, 12.42, 12.45, 12.47 in publishers' names, 14.138 resources on, 6.105 signifying alternatives, 6.106 in source citations for journal articles, 14.171 trailing, 14.17 in two-year spans, 6.107, 6.113 in URLs, DOis, and such, 6.112, 14.17, 14.18 See also punctuation small caps (capitals) for acronyms and initialisms, 10.8 after ornamental text break, 1.58 a.m. and p.m., 9.37, 10.41 defined, p. 988 for emphasis, 7.52 for era abbreviations, 9.34 full-size capitals compared to, 7.52 full-size capitals preferred to, 9.34, 10.8, 10.38 glosses in ASL, 11.128-35 lowercase preferred to, 10.41 marking proofs for, 2.131 and permissible changes, 13.8 proofreading for, 2.113 See also capital letters "smart" (directional) quotation marks and apostrophes, 2.85, 6.115, 13.7 Smyth sewing, p. 988 so, 5.88, 5.202-3, 6.22 so-called, 7.59 social media content defined, 14.205 electronic mailing lists, 14.210 and personal communications, 14.205, 14.209, 14.214, 15.52 source citations for, generally, 14.209, 15.52 titles for, 8.191, 14.206 URLs for, 14.10, 14.209 See also biogs and blog posts social titles, 10.16, 10.17 socioeconomic terminology. See groups of people soft vs. hard hyphens, 2.96 software conversion errors, 2.80, 2.113, 2.137 names of apps, 8.155
INDEX
software (continued) small caps in, 10.8 sorting functions, 14.65, 14.67, 15.17, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.123 and special characters, 2.16, 11.45, 11.72 specific types: artwork, 3.4, 3.15; citation management, 14.5, 14.12; document comparison, 2.86; indexing, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104, 16.117, 16.123; manu script editing, 2.79, 2.80; manuscript preparation, 2.4, 2.7, 2.77; mathe matical copy, 12.2, 12.2nl, 12.9, table 12.1; page layout, 6.121, 7.36; PDF proofreading tools, 2.133 See also computer terminology; da tabases; file formats and devices; tracking changes; Unicode standard; word-processing software solid (closed) compounds, 7.82, 7.83, 7.88. See also compound terms solidus. See slashes some, 5.7 songs, 8.194. See also musical works sort, sorts, 5.52 so that, 5.201 sound recordings contributions to, as work made for hire, 4.10 discographies, 1.63, 14.262, 14.263, 15.57, fig. 14.12 source citations for, 14.263, 14.264, 15.57 titles of, 8.197 See also multimedia content source citations, 14.1-5 author queries about, 2.62, 2.63, 2.64, 2.69 basic elements, 14.100 basic systems, 1.108, 13.64, 14.2-3 citation management software, 14.5, 14.12 editing of, 2.62-64 flexibility and consistency, 2.64, 14.4 house style for, 1.108-9, 2.64, 14.4 hyperlinks for (see hyperlinks for source citations) pop-up boxes in, 15.17 purpose of, 14.1 remedies for excessive annotation: abbreviations, 14.59-60, fig. 14.7;
source citations (continued) avoiding overlong notes, 14.56; combining notes, 14.57; footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.45, 14.59; text citations, 14.34, 14.58 and secondary sources, 14.260, 15.56 shortened citations (see shortened citations) style manuals for, 2.54, 14.3 See also author-date reference system; bibliographies; illustration credits and credit lines; notes; notes and bibliography system; reference lists; source notes; and specific types ofsources (e.g., books) and specific elements (e.g., authors' names) source notes previously published materials, 1.50, 2.46, 4.78, 14.54 tables, 2.31, 2.61, 3.76-77, 3.81 See also attribution; illustration credits and credit lines; source citations; text citations South, southern, 8.46, 8.47 South Asian languages, 11.109, 16.79, table 11.2 sovereigns and other rulers Arabic rulers of older times, 8.14 as authors, 14.83 indexing of, 16.37, 16.66, 16.98 and legal and public documents, 14.298, 14.302 numerals for, 9.41, 16.66 titles of, 8.23 See also nobility Soviet Union, former, 10.31 sp. , spp., 8.122, 8.123 Space bar, 2.12 spacecraft, 8.117, 9.44. See also vehicles and vessels spaces and spacing, 6.119-21 and abbreviations, 9.16, 9.55-56, 10.5, 10.10, 10.12, 10.49, 10.58, 10.66 in biblical citations, 9.26 in captions, 3.23 characters in different fonts, 6.5 decimals, 9.55 and electronic file cleanup, 2.80 in electronic publications, 6.11, 6.120, 9.55, 9.56
INDEX
spaces and spacing (continued) em spaces, 2.126, 3.23, 3.54, 6.120 en spaces, 6.120, 13.29 with.ff., 14.149 hair spaces, 6.5, 6.11, 6.120, p. 988 indexes, 16.28, 16.59, 16.111, 16.131 initials, 6.121, 7.66, 8.4, 10.12, 14.74, 15.33 and justification, 2.125, 6.120, 6.121 marking manuscript for, 2.98 marking proofs for, 2.125 in mathematical expressions, 12.16-17, 12.19, 12.21-22, 12.42 medium, 12.23 with multiplication sign, for plant hybrids, 8.125 names with particles, 8.5 nonbreaking (see nonbreaking spaces) non-English materials and quotations: French, 11.28-29, 11.31-32; Italian, 11.47, 11.48; permissible changes, 11.7, 11.11, 11.19; Spanish, 11.63, 11.65 numbers, 6.62, 6.121, 9.55-58 with percent symbol, 9.18 with punctuation: ampersands, 10.10; colons, 2.9, 6.62, 14.89, 14.116, 14.151, 14.152, 14.177, 15.48; ellipses, 6.121, 11.49, 11.65, 13.50, 13.54, 13.55, 13.58; en dashes, 6.79, 14.144; generally, 2.9, 6.7, 6.12, 6.62, 14.116; parentheses, back to back, 6.98; slashes, 6.106, 6.111, 13.29, 13.34, 14.138; 2-em dashes, 6.93 between sentences, 2.9, 2.80 with suspended hyphens, 7.88, 7.89 (sec. 1) in table titles, 3.54 thick, 12.23 thin: defined, p. 988; in French mate rials, 11.28-29, 11.31-32; in math ematical expressions, 12.17, 12.42; for overlapping characters, 6.5; in poetry quotations, 13.29; between single and double quotation marks, 6.11, 6.120 with units of measurement, 6.119, 6.121, 7.44, 9.16 vertical lists, 6.130 width of, 6.120 within paragraphs, 2.12
spaces and spacing (continued) See also leading; lines (text); line spac ing; margins Spanish language, 11.60-69 abbreviation of Spanish, 10.42 capitalization, 8.11, 11.61 dialogue, 11.64 names, 8.11, 16.83, 16.84 punctuation: ellipses, 11.65; em dashes, 11.63, 11.64; guillemets and quota tion marks, 11.63, 11.64; question marks and exclamation points, inverted, 11.19, 11.62 resources on, 11.60, 11.67 special characters, 11.69 word division, 11.66-68 spanner heads (decked heads), 3.53, 3.57, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.16 speakers' names (dialogue and drama), 13.8, 13.39, 13.46, 13.48. See also dialogue; drama; lectures and lecture series; speech spec (specification), p. 988 special characters and alphabetizing, 16.67 in archaic fonts, 13.7 author's list of, 2.3, 2.16, 11.21, 11.122, 12.13 bitmapped images for, 2.137 breathing marks, 2.80, 11.110, 11.112 conversion errors in, 2.80, 2.137 described in angle brackets, 2.16 eszett (B) vs. Greek beta, 11.45 generic markup of, 2.81 in indexes, 16.29 listed, tables 11.1-5 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.16, 11.21, 11.122, 12.13 in mathematical expressions, 12.10, 12.12-13, 12.52, 12.68, tables 12.3-4 non-English languages: African lan guages, 11.24; Arabic, 11.76, 11.77, 11.81, 11.92, table 11.2; Azeri, 11.70; Czech, 11.70; Finnish, 11.70; French, 11.37; generally, 11.2, 11.21, 11.70, 11.72-73, table 11.1-5; German, 11.45; Greek, 11.110-15, 11.117, table 11.4; Hawaiian, 11.70, 11.70nl; Hebrew, 11.92, table 11.2; Hungarian, 11.70; Icelandic, 11.70; Italian, 11.53; Jap-
INDEX
special characters (continued) anese, 11.87, table 11.2; Latin, 11.59; Moldavian, 11.70; Montenegrin, 11.70; Old and Middle English, 11.70, 11.12224; Portuguese, 11.70; resources on, 11.45, 11.82, 16.67; Romanian, 11.70; Russian, 11.98, table 11.3; Serbian, 11.70; South Asian languages, 11.109, table 11.2; Spanish, 11.69; specialized fonts for, 11.21, 11.72, 11.90, 11.110; Turkish, 11.70; Unicode for, generally, 11.2; Uzbek, 11.70 proofreading, 2.132 resources on, 11.76, 16.67 style sheet for, 2.55 and transliteratio·n, 2.80, 11.2, 11.72, 11.74, 11.90 See also diphthongs; ligatures; math ematical expressions; symbols, specific; Unicode standard special issues, journal, 1.84, 1.87, 1.89, 1.102, 4.59, 14.178 species. See genus and species names speech colloquial (see colloquial speech) direct discourse, 13.39, 13.44 discussions and interviews, 13.48 drama, 13.46-47 grammatical ellipses in, 5.229, 13.41 indirect discourse, 13.45 interjections in, 5.207 numerals in direct discourse, 13.44 paused, interrupted, or faltering, 6.87, 6.89, 13.41, 13.50, 13:58 punctuation: colons, 6.63, 6.65, 13.16; commas, 13.14; ellipses, 13.41; em dashes, 13.41; quotation marks, 13.32, 13.39-45 questions in, 5.213 single-word speech, 13.40 unspoken discourse, 13.43 See also dialogue; direct address; quo tations speeches presidential, 8.76, 14.289 source citations for, 14.217, 14.267, 14.289, 15.57 treatment of names and titles, 8.70, 8.76, 8.188 See also lectures and lecture series
spelling of alphabet letters, 7.68 author queries about, 2.69 British-style, 7.3, 16.29 checking, 2.89 common errors of, 2.111 consistency, 2.65, 2.89, 8.3 contractions, 7.30 discipline-specific, 7.2 editor's note on, 1.45 in indexes, 16.29, 16.33, 16.71, 16.133 interjections, 7.31 with ligatures, 7.34, 7.35 metric units, 8.152 non-US, 7.3 orthographic reforms, 11.38, 11.43, 11.45, 11.67, 11.70 permissible changes to, 13.7 personal names, 6.106, 8.3, 11.78, 14.74, 16.33, 16.71 proofreading of, 2.111 resources on, 7.1 retaining original in quotations, 7.3 and sic, 13.61 of spelled-out abbreviations or numbers, 2.129 See also plurals; possessives; word divi sion; and specific languages spell-out mark, 2.129 spine and spine copy, 1.69, 1.70, 1.71, 1.84, 2.108, 2.109, p. 988 spiritual leaders. See clerical titles; religions and religious concerns split infinitives, 5.108, 5.171. See also infinitives sports, 8.68, 8.70, 8.78, 9.19 spread, p. 988 square brackets. See brackets Sr. ("Senior"), 6.43, 7.42, 10.19, 16.41 stable URLs (permalinks), 14.9, 14.15 stacked style (indexes). See indexes: indented style stage directions, 13.46 stage names, 16.34 stamping, p. 988 standard deviations, notation of, 10.50, 12.59, fig. 3.8, table 12.3 standards, source citations for, 14.259 statements (declarative sentences), 5.211, 5.246, 6.12, 6.68
INDEX
states (US) abbreviations and postal codes, 10.4, 10.8, 10.27, 14.130 in addresses, punctuation, 6.39, 10.27, 10.29 capitalization, 8.51 constitutions, 14.280 judicial bodies, 14.279 laws, 14.288 in newspaper titles, 14.193 in place of publication, 14.130 statistics abbreviations in, 10.50, table 12.3 mathematical expressions of, 12.58-60, table 12.3 means and standard deviations, 10.50, 12.59, fig. 3.8, table 12.3 resources on, 12.57 See also mathematical copy; mathemati cal expressions status. See honorifics; titles and offices of people statutes. See legislation step, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 3) stereotypes. See bias-free language stet, 2.130 sticky notes, 2.92 stochastic theory, 12.59 stock agencies, material from, 3.36, 4.99, 4.101 stratigraphy, 8.136. See also geological terminology streaming formats, 4.64, 8.189, 14.263 stream of consciousness, 13.43 streets, avenues, and such, 8.56, 9.51, 10.3334, 11.26, 11.61. See also addresses, mailing; roads and thoroughfares strike-through, 2.84 strong (irregular) verbs, 5.100 stub column, 3.59-64 abbreviations in, 3.62 and alignment, 3.70 defined, 3.52, p. 988 heads for, 3.56, 3.59, fig. 3.15 leaders with, 3.64, fig. 3.16 for matrixes, 3.68, figs. 3.17-18 omission of, fig. 3.19 runover lines in, 3.61, fig. 3.12 subheads in, 3.60, fig. 3.13 See also tables
style defined, 2.49 mechanical editing for, 1.116, 2.48, 2.49 style, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) style manuals, 2.54, 5.250, 14.3 styles (word processing), 2.18, 2.21, 2.82, 2.83, 2.84, fig. 2.4 style sheets (editorial) defined, p. 988 manuscript editing, 2.55, 2.83, 2.111, fig. 2.3 proofreader's use of, 2.111, 2.112 style sheets (electronic), pp. 988, 990 sub, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) subentries. See index entries: subentries subheads, 1.55-57 as alternative to page numbers, 14.160, 14.174 capitalization, 1.56, 2.18, 2.59, 8.158 cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.59 defined, p. 988 editing of, 2.59 generic markup of, 2.59, 2.80, 2.81 levels, placement, and typographic style, 1.56, 2.59 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.18 no punctuation following, 6.14 and note reference numbers, 14.27 numbers with or instead of, 1.57 period at end omitted, 2.18 proofreading of, 2.113, 2.134 run-in, 1.56, 2.18, 2.59, 6.14 sideheads, 1.56, p. 987 single, 1.56 specific uses: appendix, 1.59; bibliog raphies, 14.63, 14.263; endnotes, 1.62, 2.81, 14.46, fig. 14.2; journal articles, 1.97; list of illustrations, fig. 1.6; running heads, 1.12, 1.13; table of contents, 1.38, 1.87, 2.32, 2.57, 2.59; tables, 3.58, 3.60, 3.61, figs. 3.13-4 text following, 1.55, 2.59 See also sections and subsections subject headings, 1.75, 1.92, 1.93. See also keywords subjective case. See nominative (subjective) case subjective complements, 5.101 subjects and disciplines, academic, 7.2, 8.30, 8.85, 8.86
INDEX
subject-verb agreement, 5.138, 5.139, 5.141, 5.143, 5.205, 5.250 subject-verb-object (SVO) pattern, 5.221, 5.222 subjunctive mood, 5.123-27 subordinate clauses. See dependent (subor dinate) clauses subordinating conjunctions, 5.175, 5.200201, 5.225, 6.24, 6.26 subordination, 5.225. See also dependent (subordinate) clauses subscriptions to journals, 1.84, 1.86, 2.109, 2.134. See also access rights subscripts in chemical symbols, 8.149 defined, p. 988 in glossed American Sign Language, 11.134 marking manuscript for, 2.94 mathematical expressions, 12.36-38; alignment, 12.38, 12.67; complex, 12.37; and fractions, 12.47; italics for, 12.63; limits, 12.17; marking, 12.67; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncer tainties expressed as, 12.60; vector and tensor notation, 12.53, 12.54 musical octaves, 7.72 See also superscripts subsidiary rights, 4.64-69 author's electronic use of own works, 4.66 author's retention of, 4.18 vs. basic rights, 4.17 categories of, 4.64 · distribution outside the US, 4.34, 4.64, 4.76 economic considerations, 4.65, 4.66, 4.69 electronic rights, 4.63, 4.64, 4.65 granting permissions for, 4.70, 4.71 moral, 4.15 non-US publications, 4.29-30 and public-access policies, 4.68 translation, 4.34, 4.64 university licenses, 4.67 See also copyright; intellectual property rights; permissions substantive editing, 2.48, 2.50, 2.51 substantive notes, 14.37-39, 14.49, 16.110 subtitles capitalization, 8.158, 8.159, 8.161, 8.164, 14.87, 14.89, 14.90, 14.91
subtitles (continued) cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.58 editing of, 2.58 indexing principle on, 16.54 as metadata, 1.75 omission of, 8.168, 16.54 or connecting, 8.167, 14.91 permissible changes to, 8.165, 11.7 placement of, 1.17, 1.19, 1.49, 1.69, 1.70 punctuation: colons, 1.19, 8.164-65, 14.89-91, 14.96, 14.169; semicolons, 8.167, 14.90 in running heads, 1.12, 2.76 with sequel numbers, 9.43 source citations for, 14.87-91, 14.165 two or more, 8.167, 14.90 subtrahends (back counters), 9.66 sub verbo (s.v.), 1.123, 10.42, 14.232 sub voce (s.v.), 10.42 such as, 5.250, 6.50 such that, 5.201 suffixes adjectives with: comparative forms, 5.85, 5.87-88; double comparative or superlative error, 5.87; overview, 5.68; phrasal, 7.85; superlative forms, 5.86 and adverbs, 5.158-59, 5.163-64 and bias-free language, 5.257 compound terms with, 7.89 division of words with, 7.40 and hyphenation, 7.81 negating, 5.230 pronouns: personal (-selj) , 5.48, 5.51, 5.250; relative (-ever), 5.65, 5.66 for words derived from proper names, 8.60 See also compound terms summation sign, 12.39 sun, 8.141 super, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) superlative adjectives, 5.86, 5.87, 7.89 (sec. 1) superlative adverbs, 5.164, 7.89 (sec. 1) superscripts celestial coordinates, 10.61 classical Greek and Latin works, 14.248 defined, p. 988 marking manuscript for, 2.94 mass, in chemical terms, 8.150 mathematical expressions, 12.36-38;
INDEX
superscripts (continued) alignment, 12.38, 12.67; complex, 12.37; and fractions, 12.47, 12.49; ital ics for, 12.63; marking, 12.67; powers often, 9.9; simple, 12.36; spacing, 12.16; uncertainties expressed as, 12.60; vector and tensor multiplica tion, 12.53 musical octaves, 7.72 in non-English words and phrases, 11.27 note reference numbers, 14.19, 14.24 in notes to tables, 3.79, fig. 3.24 not used for ordinal numbers, 9.6 See also subscripts supplementary data, electronic books, 1.59, 14.112 hyperlinks to, 1. 96 illustrations, 3.9, 3.26 journals, 1.78, 1.87, 1.96, 1.114, 14.187 noted in print version, 1.78 source citations for, 14.112, 14.187 in table of contents, 1.78, 1.87 supplements journals, 14.179 newspapers, 14.197 supporting information. See supplementary data, electronic supra, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) suspension points, 13.50. See also ellipses s.v. (sub verbo, sub voce), 1.123, 10.42, 14.232 SVO (subject-verb-object) pattern, 5.221, 5.222 Swahili language, 11.23-24 Swedish language, 11.70 syllabary, 11.85 symbols, general a or an with, 7.33 in illustrations or captions, 3.7, 3.25, 3.45, fig. 3.4, fig. 3.6, figs. 3.8-9 as labels, 3.7, 3.45 as note references, 3.79, 14.24, 14.25, 14.49, 14.51, 16.112, fig. 14.4 for page numbers to be supplied later, 2.35 SI abbreviations referred to as, 10.2 in tables, 3.62, 3.82-84, figs. 3.12-13, fig. 3.22 in vertical lists, 2.11 See also manuscript editing: paper-only; mathematical expressions; proof reader's marks; special characters
symbols, specific alignment, vertical and horizontal, 2.127 celestial coordinates, 10.61 chemical, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 8.149, 10.63 copyediting (see manuscript editing: paper-only) currency, 9.20-25 for large numbers, 9.10, 9.24 mathematical (see mathematical expressions: signs and symbols) musical, 7.71-75 ornamental text breaks, 1.58 on proofs (see proofreader's marks) scholarly, 10.43 SI units, 10.52, 10.54-55, 10.56-58 technical, 10.49 units of measurement, 3.56, 9.16-17, 10.52, 10.54-58, fig. 3.12 symposia. See conferences; lectures and lecture series; proceedings of confer ences and symposia; speeches; un published and informally published materials; working papers syntax, 5.210-48 for avoiding gender bias, 5.255 captions, 3.21 clauses overview, 5.225-28 cleft sentences, 5.246-48 defined, 5.210 expletives, 5.239-41 in indexes, 16.10, 16.68, 16.129 negation, 5.230-38 parallel structure, 5.242-45 and quotations, 13.11, 13.18-20 sentence types, 5.211-16 in tables, 3.54, 3.59 table stub entries, 3.59 and text citations, 15.28 traditional sentence structures, 5.217-20 word order, 5.216, 5.221-24 See also ellipses, grammatical synthetic comparatives, 5.85, 5.163 synthetic superlatives, 5.86, 5.164 synthetic vs. analytic languages, 5.221 Systeme international d 'unites (SI). See International System of Units table of contents abbreviations list noted in, 1.44, 14.60 chapter titles in, 1.38, 2.17, 2.32, 2.58, fig. 1.5
INDEX
table of contents (continued) components of, 1.38, fig. 1.5 editing of, 2.57-58 in electronic publications, 1.87, 1.122, 1.123, fig. 1.11 electronic supplementary data in, 1.78, 1.87 errata in, 1.68, 1.90 example, fig. 1.5 final manuscript, 2.75 galleries in, 1.38, 1.39, 3.39, fig. 1.7 hyperlinks in, 1.86, 1.87, 1.90, fig. 1.11 journals, 1.84, 1.86, 1.87, 1.90, 2.109, fig. 1.11 multiauthor volumes, 1.38, 1.39, 2.32, 2.41 omission of, 1.38 online publications, 1.122 page numbers in, 1.38, 2.134, fig. 1.5 pagination, 1.7, 1.38 and permissions process, 4.105 placement in book, 1.4 placement of, 1.38, 1.84 proofreading of, 2.134 running heads after first page of, 1.11 subheads in, 1.38, 1.87, 2.32, 2.57, 2.59 submission of, 2.3 tables, 3.47-88, figs. 3.11-25 abbreviation of term, 16.116 abbreviations in, 3.56, 3.62, 3.67, 3.81, fig. 3.12 accessibility issues, 3.88 in appendixes, 1.62 appropriate use of, 3.48 basic structure, 3.52, fig. 3.11 body and cells: alignment and format ting, 3.70-74, figs. 3.19-21; defined, 3.65; empty, 3.65, 3.67, 3.68, 6.92, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.17; multiple values in single cell, 3.69, fig. 3.13; numbers in, 3.72; rows of, 3.70; words in, 3.73, fig. 3.19 broadside, 2.115, 3.51, 3.86, 3.87, fig. 3.16, fig. 3.25 callouts to (see callouts) column heads: alignment, 3.71; cut-in, 3.53, 3.58, fig. 3.14; format, 3.56; for multiple values in single cell, 3.69, fig. 3.13; no period in, 6.14; paren thetical information in, 3.56, fig. 3.12; repeated, 3.86-87, fig. 3.25; rules to
tables (continued) separate, 3.53, 3.57, 3.58, figs. 3.13-14; signs and symbols in, 3.84; spanner (decked), 3.53, 3.57, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.16; stub, 3.56, 3.59, fig. 3.15; text in notes, 3.86, fig. 3.24 columns: alignment of, 3.71-73, figs. 3.19-20; data in, 3.66; in matrixes, 3.68, figs. 3.17-18; stub, 3.52, 3.56, 3.59-64, 3.70, figs. 3.15-18; totals, averages, and means, 3.74, fig. 3.21 (see also column heads above) consistency in and across, 3.49, 3.56, 3.59, 3.74, 3.81, 3.86 continued lines in, 3.86-87, fig. 3.25 defined, 3.2, p. 989 doubled up, 3.53, 3.86, fig. 3.23 editing of (see under manuscript editing) electronic files, 2.26, 2.31, 2.36, 2.80, 3.47 in electronic publications, 1.106, 3.48, 3.76 as electronic supplementary data, 1.78 fair use of, 4.91 generic markup for, 3.86 and hyperlinks, 1.96, 1.106, 3.51 vs. illustrations, 3.2 inclusive numbers in, 3.83 indentation in, 3.60, 3.61, 3.63, 3.73, 3.74, fig. 3.13, fig. 3.21 indexing of, 16.116, 16.141 in letters to the editor, 1.101 lists of (see lists of illustrations and tables) machine-readable, 1.106 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.22, 2.26, 2.29-30, 3.47 matrixes, 3.68, figs. 3.17-18 N, n, 3.55, 3.72, 3.75, 3.85, fig. 3.20 "not applicable" and "no data available" in, 3.67 notes to, 3.76-80; abbreviation defi nitions in, 3.62, 3.67; for broadside tables, 3.87; column head text in, 3.86, fig. 3.24; editing, 2.61, 3.81; examples of, figs. 3.14-15; format ting, 2.31, 3.77; hyperlinks for, 1.106; vs. identical cell contents, 3.66; numbering, 2.22, 2.31, 3.79; order and placement, 3.76; vs. parentheti cal elements, 3.55; and rounding for
I N D EX
tables (continued) totals, 3.75; significance (probability) levels, 3.80, fig. 3.22; source notes, 2.31, 2.61, 3.76-77, 3.81; to specific parts of table, 3.79, fig. 3.11, figs. 3.1315, fig. 3.24; to whole table, 3.78, figs. 3.11-12, fig. 3.14, fig. 3.17, fig. 3.20, fig. 3.22, fig. 3.24 numbering of, 1.57, 2.29, 3.50, 3.54, 16.116 and pagination, 1.8 permissions for, 3.77, 4.95 placement of, 2.62, 3.51 proofreading of, 2.115, 2.127, 2.137 punctuation: ellipses, 3.67, 3.68, fig. 3.15, fig. 3.18; em dashes, 3.67, 3.68, 6.92; notes to whole table, 3.78; parenthe ses, 3.54-56, fig. 3.12; semicolons, 3.80; significance (probability) levels, 3.80, fig. 3.22; stub entries, 3.59, 3.60; in table titles, 3.54, 3.55 resources on, 3.47 rules in, 3.53, 3.57, 3.58, 3.74, 3.86, figs. 3.13-14, fig. 3.16 and running heads, 1.16, 2.115, 3.86, 3.87 runover lines in, 3.61, 3.73, fig. 3.12 shading in, 3.64 signs and symbols in, 3.62, 3.82-84, figs. 3.12-13, fig. 3.22 source citations for, 14.158 statistical material in, 10.50 syntax in, 3.54, 3.59 titles of, 3.54, 3.55 totals in, 3.53, 3.63, 3.74-75, 3.81, figs. 3.15-16, fig. 3.21 units of measurement in, 3.56, figs. 3.12-13 word-processor function for, 2.26, 2.36, 3.47 See also captions; illustrations tabs, 2.11, 2.12, 2.19, 2.21, 2.24, 2.80, 6.130, 6.132. See also indentation; margins tabular material abbreviations in, 10.3, 10.24, 10.26, 10.27, 10.29, 10.32 in HTML format, 1.118 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.29 placement of, 3.51 proofreading of, 2.127 See also columns; tables tag questions, 5.213
tags defined, p. 989 in formal markup, 2.83 in generic markup, 2.81 See also markup for manuscript editing; markup languages, formal taxonomic indexes, 16.6 TCF (totally chlorine-free), p. 989 technical writing. See computer terminology; scientific and technical termi nology; scientific and technical works technology. See computer terminology; sci entific and technical works; software telephone conversations. See personal communications telephone numbers, 6.77, 9.57 television and television programs broadcast networks, 8.189, 10.25 reviews of, 14.201, 14.203 source citations for, 14.265 titles of programs and episodes, 8.189 See also multimedia content temperature, 9.16, 10.36, 10.49, 10.52, 10.58, 10.61 temporary compounds, 7.82 temporary numbers, 2.28, 3.13 tense. See under verbs tenses. See under verbs tensors, 12.38, 12.52, 12.53, 12.54 ter (Dutch particle}, 8.10 territories, 10.4, 10.27, 10.28. See also geographical terminology test-case documents, 2.139 testing, electronic formats, 1.92, 2.138-39 tests (examinations), 4.10 text. See books; electronic publications; journals; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors textbooks, 1.10, 4.10, 4.76nl, 4.79, 4.104, 7.56, 14.62 text citations abbreviations in, 10.3, 10.44, 14.59 additional material in, 15.24 authors' names: and anonymous works, 15.34; authors with same last name, 15.22; editor in place of, 15.36; et al. in citation and/or text, 15.29; more than three, 15.29; organizations as, 15.37; pseudonyms as, 15.35; same author, same year, 15.20, 15.29; in
INDEX
text citations (continued) text, not repeated in citation, 15.25 (see also authors' names) basic approach: examples and vari ations, 15.9; format, 15.5, 15.22, fig. 15.2; function, 15.10; order within citation, 15.30; page, volume numbers, and other locators in, 15.8, 15.23; page numbers in, 15.27, 15.30; placement in text, 15.25-28 biblical citations in, 10.44, 10.45-48, 14.239 classical Greek and Latin works in, 14.242 cross-checking, 2.32, 2.63, 15.21 ibid. in, 13.66, i4.58 and indexing, 16.114, 16.115 multiple references in single citation, 15.30 multiple references to same source, 13.66, 14.58, 15.27 for newspaper articles, 14.198 original, in quotations, 13.7 publication details in, 15.25, 15.41, 15.44-45 punctuation: brackets, 13.7, 15.28, 15.40; commas, 15.7, 15.9, 15.23, 15.29, 15.30, 15.44, 15.45; semicolons, 15.7, 15.22, 15.24, 15.28, 15.30 for quotations, 13.64-72; block quota tions, 13.70-72, 15.26; in brackets, 13.7, 15.28, 15.40; "brackets in the original" in, 6.99; epigraphs, 1.37, 1.49, 13.36, 14.52; "errors in original source, 13.7; frequently cited works, 13.67; full, 13.65; ibid. in, 13.66; non English materials (see non-English materials: quotations in English context); parentheses with, 13.64; placement of, 15.26; poetry, 2.20, 13.71-72; run-in quotations, 13.68-69, 15.26; shortened, 13.66-67, 13.70 reducing notes by using, 14.34, 14.58 in relation to surrounding text, 15.25-26 shortened citations in, 13.66-67, 13.70, 15.29, 15.34 and syntax, 15.28 year plus a, b, c in, 15.20, 15.29 See also author-date reference system; reference lists; source citations; titles of works in source citations
text messages, 14.214. See also personal communications text references to illustrations and tables vs. callouts, 2.30, 3.8, 3.51 cross-checking of, 2.32, 2.65, 2.66 and electronic supplementary data, 3.9 format for, 2.30 to numbered illustrations and tables, 3.9, 3.50, 8.180 to parts of illustration, 3.12 and placement offeature, 3.8, 3.51 See also callouts text-to-speech tools, 2.82nl, 3.28, 7.49, 12.2nl Thai names, 16.85 than, 5.46, 5.183, 5.196, 5.201 that
antecedents of, 5.59, 5.61 in cleft sentences, 5.246 as demonstrative pronoun, generally, 5.52 instead of thefact that, 5.250 in phrasal conjunction (e.g., provided that), 5.197 possessive form of, 5.63 prepositions with, 5.172 punctuation with, 6.27 quotations following, 6.40 as relative pronoun, generally, 5.56 in remote relative clauses, 5.60 as subordinating conjunction, 5.201 vs. which, 5.250, 6.27 that if, 6.26 that is, 6.51, 6.58, 6.88 the
in blog titles, 8.192 and coordinate nouns, 5. 7 5 definition of articles, 5.70, 5.71 disregarded in alphabetizing, 14.71, 14.79, 14.80, 16.48, 16.91 with earth, 8.140 with epithets, 8.34 with ethnic and national group names, 8.38 with honorifics, 10.18 and index entries, 16.48-49, 16.88, 16.91, 16.144 meaning affected by, 5.75, 5.76, 5.77 with names of celestial bodies, 8.138 with non-English words and phrases, 8.59, 11.4
INDEX
the (tontinued)
in periodical titles, 8.170, 14.170, 14.188 in personal names, 8.5 in place-names, 8.45, 8.59, 16.91 in publishers' names, 14.134 in titles in running text, 8.169, 8.170 with titles of people, 8.21, 8.30, 10.18 in website titles, 8.191 See also articles (definite and indefinite) their, theirs, 5.49, 5.50, 5.250 their, they're, there, 5.50, 5.250 Thema, 1.75 themself, 5.48 then, for and then, 6.23, 6.57 theorems, numbering of, 12.25, 12.56 theories. See laws and theories there, 5.115, 5.239, 5.241, 5.246, 5.250 there, their, they're, 5.50, 5.250 therefore, 5.250, 6.49, 6.57 theses. See dissertations and theses they
and antecedents, 5.30 as indefinite, 5.47 personal identification with, 5.256 singular use of, 5.48, 5.48n5, 5.252, 5.256 thick spaces, 12.23 thin spaces defined, p. 989 in French materials, 11.28-29, 11.31-32 in mathematical expressions, 12.17, 12.42 for overlapping characters, 6.5 in poetry quotations, 13.29 between single and double quotation marks, 6.11, 6.120 though, 5.201 3-em dashes and computer sorting, 14.67, 15.17 keyboarding for manuscript, 2.14 length of, 6.75 marking manuscript for, 2.96 not appropriate in manuscript bibliogra phies, 14.67 for repeated names in source citations, 1.124, 2.14, 6.94, 14.65, 14.67-71, 14.79, 15.17-20 through, 5.205, 6.78, 7.8, 9.60 thumbnails, 1.96, 1.107, 3.8, 3.51, 4.90, p. 989 thus, 5.250, 6.57
TIFF, p. 989 time designations abbreviations: a.m. and p.m., 9.37, 9.38, 10.41; chronology systems, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38; days of the week, 10.40; eras, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38; months, 10.39, 14.171, 14.224, 15.15; numerical designations, 9.30, 9.33, 9.35, 9.37, 9.39, 9.40; time of day, 10.41; time zones, 8.90, 10.41; units (seconds, minutes, etc.), 10.68; and word division, 7.44 adverbs indicating, 5.166 capitalization, 8.88-90 chronology systems, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38 hyphenation, 7.89 (sec. 1) international systems, 10.41 periods of, 8.71-74; centuries, 7.8, 7.87, 7.89, 7.89 (sec. 3) , 8.71, 9.32, 9.33; decades, 9.33; descriptive designa tions, 8.72; eras, 8.135, 9.34, 9.64, 10.38; geological, 8.135; numerical designations, 8.71; prehistoric cul tural periods, 8.74; traditional period names, 8.73 spelled out, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 9.37, 9.38, 9.40 subordinating conjunctions for, 5.201 time of day: abbreviations, 10.41; en dashes with, 6.78; noon and midnight, 9.38; seconds and dates included with, 9.40; twenty-four hour system, 9.39, 9.40 time zones, 8.90, 10.41, 14.191 See also dates timeless facts, 5.129 time stamps, 14.191, 14.207, 14.209, 14.233 titled persons, 8.32, 16.38 title page, 1.17-19 across two pages, 1.18 author of foreword on, 1.40 authors', editors', and translators' names on, 1.19, 14.73, 14.82, 14.101, 15.12 distribution information on, 14.141 editing of, 2.57 edition number on, 1.19, 1.26, 14.113 journal special issue, 1.89 multiauthor volumes, 2.41 new preface noted on, 1.26 in page sequence, 1.4 pagination omitted from, 1.7
INDEX
title page (continued) permissible changes to title when citing, 8.165, 14.88, 14.91 place of publication on, 14.129 proofreading of, 2.134 publication date on, 1.19, 14.142 publishers' names on, 1.19, 14.129, 14.133 running heads omitted from, 1.11 submission of, 2.3 titles and offices of people abbreviations: academic and profes sional designations, 7.15, 10.4, 10.16, 10.21, 10.22; civil titles, 10.13, 10.14; honorifics, 10.18; military titles and ranks, 8.24, 10.13, 10.15; Saint, 10.20; social title·s , 10.4, 10.16, 10.17 academic, 8.28-31, 16.40 in apposition (before name), 8.21, 8.30, 8.36 Arabic rulers ofolder times, 8.14 capitalization, 8.19-26, 8.28-33; aca demic titles and offices, 8.28, 8.29, 8.31; appositives, 8.21, 8.30, 8.36; basic rule and exceptions, 8.19-20; civic and academic honors, 8.31; civil titles, 8.19, 8.22; descriptive titles, 8.30; "down style" for, 8.1; honorifics, 8.26, 8.33; kinship terms, 8.36; military and quasi-military titles, 8.19, 8.24-25; nobility, 8.32; in non-English languages, 11.46, 11.61; organizational and corporate titles, 8.27; popes, 8.26; religious titles, 8.19, 8.26, 8.33, 8.36; sovereigns and other rulers, 8.23 civil, 8.19, 8.22, 10.13, 10.14, 14.284 names replaced by, 8.19, 8.20 nobility, 8.32, 16.38 President, president, 8.19, 8.21, 8.22, 8.28 religious: abbreviations, 10.18; capitalization, 8.19, 8.26, 8.33, 8.36; indexing, 16.39 saints, 8.93, 10.20, 11.26, 14.83, 16.42 social titles, 10.4, 10.16, 10.17 sovereigns and other rulers: indexing, 16.37, 16.66, 16.98 the with, 8.21, 8.30, 10.18 (see also honorifics) titles of works, 8.156-201 abbreviations of: italics for, 10.7, 14.60; resources on, 15.46; vs. short titles,
titles of works (continued) 14.59; in source citations, 14.59-60, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, fig. 14.7 alphabetizing, 16.51-54, 16.56 articles at beginning of, 8.169-70, 8.192, 14.98, 14.170, 14.193-94, 16.48-49, 16.51-52, 16.56 artworks and exhibitions, 8.57, 8.198201, 14.86, 14.235 in award and building names, 8.172 biogs and blog posts, 8.192, 14.206, 14.208 in book review and book notes sections, 1.98 capitalization, 8.157-62; basic prin ciples, 8.157; "down style" for, 8.1; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; exhibitions, 8.201; forms, 8.187; headline-style, 8.15960 (see also headline-style capital ization); hyphenated compounds in headline-style, 8.161; magazine articles, 14.188; manuscript collec tions, 14.223; musical works, 8.194, 8.195, 8.196; non-English works (see capitalization of non-English works below) ; part and chapter titles, 2.58; poetry, 8.182; quotations in titles, 8.162; sentence-style, 8.158 (see also sentence-style capitalization); series and editions, 8.176; subtitles, 8.158, 8.159, 8.161, 8.164, 14.87, 14.89, 14.90, 14.91; unpublished and in formally published materials, 8.188; volume, 8.175 capitalization ofnon-English works: Chinese and Japanese, 11.89; En glish translations, 11.9, 11.10, 14.99; French, 11.27; generally, 11.6, 14.98, 15.6; Latin, 11.54; newspapers, 14.194; series titles, 14.123 in captions, 3.21, 3.22 collected works of author, titles within, 8.178 conferences, meetings, or speeches, 8.70 as copyright management information, 4.15 on covers or jackets, 1.69, 1.70 cross-checking of, 2.32 dissertations and theses, 8.188, 14.215
INDEX
titles of works (continued) double titles connected by or, 8.167, 14.91 in epigraph source, 1.37 folktales, fables, nursery rhymes, and such, 8.185 forms, 8.187 inclusive years in, 9.64 indexing (see under indexing) italicized terms within, 8.173 italics for: abbreviations, 10.7, 14.60; in abbreviations lists, 14.60; artworks, 8.57, 8.198-201, 14.86, 14.235; biogs, 8.192, 14.86, 14.206, 14.208; book length work within book, 14.109; books, generally, 8.163, 8.168, 14.86; folktales, fables, nursery rhymes, and such, 8.185; generally, 8.2, 8.163, 15.6; journals, 8.168, 14.86, 14.170, 15.9; legal cases, 8.82, 14.272, 14.276; long poems, 8.181; magazine,journal, review, and such, 8.171; movies, television, radio, and podcasts, 8.189; newspapers, 14.86, 14.193; in non-English languages, 11.8, 11.89, 11.100, 14.99; operas and long musical compositions, 8.194; pamphlets and reports, 8.186; peri odicals, generally, 8.163, 8.168; plays, 8.183; recordings, 8.197; in shortened citations, 14.33; standards, 14.259; vessels and vehicles, 8.116; video games, 14.86; within collected works of author, 8.178 journal articles (see under journal articles) journals (see under journals) journal supplements, 14.179 magazine,journal, review, and such, 8.171 magazine articles, 14.188 magazines, 14.190 maps, 8.199, 14.237 as metadata, 1.12, 1.75, 1.92 movies, television, radio, and podcasts, 8.189, 14.86 multivolume works, 8.175 musical works, 8.193-97 newspapers (see under newspapers) non-English materials (see under nonEnglish materials)
titles of works (continued) pamphlets and reports, 8.186 periodical articles and parts of books, 8.177-80 permissible changes to, in citations, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 14.88, 14.91 for permission requests, 4.95 plurals of, 7.12 poems and plays, 8.181-84 poetry, 8.181, 14.86 possessives of, 7.29 in production checklist, 2.77 proofreading of, 2.108, 2.134 punctuation: colons, 1.19, 8.164-65, 14.89-91, 14.93, 14.96, 14.169; commas, 6.17, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 14.91, 14.93, 14.229, 16.48, 16.49; double titles connected by or, 8.167, 14.91; exclamation points, 6.124-26, 14.92, 14.96, 16.54; question marks, 6.12426, 14.92, 14.96, 16.54; quotations in titles, 8.162; in relation to surround ing text, 6.41, 8.166; semicolons, 8.165, 8.167, 11.7, 14.90-91 quotation marks for: in bibliographies, generally, 14.21; chapters, 8.163, 14.23, 14.86, 14.106-7, 15.9; conferences and speeches, 8.70; dissertations and theses, 14.215; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; folktales, fables, nursery rhymes, and such, 8.185; generally, 8.2, 8.163, 15.6; journal articles, 8.163, 8.177, 14.86, 14.169, 14.188, 15.9; magazine articles, 14.188; in non-English languages, 11.8, 11.89; in notes, generally, 14.20; poems, 14.86; in shortened citations, 14.33; titles within titles, 8.173, 14.94; unpublished materials, 8.188, 14.216; website sections and blog posts, 8.191, 8.192, 14.206, 14.208 quotations in, 8.162, 14.94 as running heads, 1.12, 1.83 in running text, 8.166 sequels, 8.189, 9.43 series and editions, 8.2, 8.176 shortening of, 8.168, 13.58 (see also shortened citations) source citations (see titles of works in source citations)
INDEX
titles o fworks (continued) subjects not interchangeable with, 8.174 titles within titles, 8.173 trademark protection of, 4.16 unpublished materials, 8.188, 14.216 video games, 8.190 websites and web pages, 8.2, 8.191-92, 14.206-7, 14.272 See also bibliographies; chapter titles; covers of journals and paperback books; half titles; reference lists; title page; titles of works in source citations titles of works in source citations, 14.85-99 abbreviations, 14.59-60, 14.170, 15.13, 15.46, fig. 14.7; frequently cited works, 13.67, 14.59-60, fig. 14.7 articles in, 8.170 author-date reference system: abbrevia tions, 15.13, 15.46; anonymous works, 15.34; capitalization, 15.6, 15.13; examples and variations, 15.9; gener ally, 15.13; italics or quotation marks for, 15.6, 15. 9; resources on, 15.46; sentence-style capitalization, 15.38 capitalization: book titles and subtitles, 14.87, 14.89-91, 14.97; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; journal articles, 14.169, 15.38; journals, 8.168, 14.86, 14.170, 15.9; magazine articles, 14.188; manuscript collections, 14.223; non English-language works, 14.98-99, 14.123, 14.170, 14.194, 15.6; religious works, 8.103-7; specific vs. generic titles for manuscript collections, 14.223; website and blog titles, 14.206 italics for: in bibliographies, generally, 14.21; biogs, 14.86, 14.206, 14.208; book-length work within a book, 14.109; books, generally, 14.86; journals, 14.86, 14.170; legal cases, 14.272, 14.276; newspapers, 14.86, 14.193; in non-English languages, 14.99; in notes, generally, 14.20; in shortened citations, 14.33; standards, 14.259; video games, 14.86 legal-style citations: articles and chapters, 14.272; hearing testimony,
titles of works in source citations (continued)
14.284; international entities, 14.305; legal cases, 14.272, 14.276; legislation, 14.295, 14.300; legislative debates, 14.286-87; legislative reports and documents, 14.285; treaties, 14.290 notes and bibliography system: abbre viations, 14.59-60, 14.170, fig. 14.7; alphabetical order for works of single author, 14.71; and other stories and such with, 14.92; anonymous works, 14.79, 14.212; author's name in title, 14.78; capitalization, 14.20-21, 14.87, 14.89-90; chapter titles, 14.23, 14.86, 14.106-7, 14.272; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.245, 14.247, 14.248; dates in titles, 14.93; dissertations and theses, 14.215; double titles with or, 14.91; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; exclamation points in, 14.92, 14.96; footnotes vs. endnotes, 14.48; itali cized terms within (reverse italics), 14.95; magazine articles, 14.188; magazines, 14.190; manuscript collections, 14.222, 14.223, 14.226; maps, 14.237; multimedia content, 14.261, 14.263; non-English works, 14.33, 14.89, 14.93, 14.98-99, 14.123, 14.194; older and very long titles, 14.97; periodicals, generally, 14.165; permissible changes, 14.88, 14.91; question marks in, 14.92, 14.96; reviews, 14.201, 14.202; series and editions, 14.123-24; social media content, 14.206, 14.209; standards, 14.259; subtitles, 14.87-91, 14.165; titles within titles, 14.94; translated titles, 14.99; unpublished materials, 14.216; websites and web pages, 14.206-8, 14.272 (see also italics for above; quotation marks for below) quotation marks for: in bibliographies, generally, 14.21; chapters, 14.23, 14.86, 14.106-7; dissertations and theses, 14.215; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; journal articles, 14.86, 14.169, 14.188; magazine articles, 14.188; in notes,
INDEX
titles of works in source citations (continued)
generally, 14.20; poems, 14.86; in shortened citations, 14.33; titles within titles, 14.94; unpublished materials, 14.216; website sections and blog posts, 14.206, 14.208 series titles, 14.123 to
in date ranges, 7.8 en dash for, in inclusive numbers, 6.78, 9.60 in headline-style capitalization, 8.159 in infinitive, 5.106, 5.108 with ought, 5.250 for ratios, 9.58 in source citations for letters, 14.228 together with, 5.142 tone marks, 11.84 too, 6.52 totals, in tables, 3.53, 3.63, 3.74-75, 3.81, figs. 3.15-16, fig. 3.21 tracking changes (redlining) ambiguity in, 2.84 author's review of, 2.71, 2.89 in author's review of copyedited manuscript, 2.88 conventions of, 2.15, 2.84 defined, p. 986 vs. document comparison software, 2.86 example of, fig. 2.4 explained in cover letter, 2.70 removed before submission of manuscript, 2.39 when not to use, 2.79, 2.85 See also manuscript editing; word processing software trade books, 4.18 trademarks, 4.16, 8.69, 8.130, 8.153-54, 10.6. See also brand names trade paperbacks, 4.64 trailing slashes, in URLs, 14.17 trains, 8.117. See also vehicles and vessels trans, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) transcriptions, 2.61, 2.80, 10.11, 13.6, 13.4849. See also American Sign Language transgender, 8.41 transitive verbs, 5.19, 5.98, 5.118 translated by, abbreviated or spelled out, 14.20-21, 14.103-4, 15.6, 15.9, 15.15
translations and translated works copyright of, 1.20, 1.29, 4.14, 4.75, fig. 1.3 credit for, 11.14 dedication, 1.36 non-English terms in English context, 6.96, 6.100, 11.4-5, 11.18-19; capital ization, 11.18; glosses, 6.96, 6.100, 11.5; proper names, 11.4; punctua tion, 11.19 punctuation, 6.96, 6.99, 6.100, 11.12, 11.19 quotations: including or omitting trans lation, 11.12; paraphrasing vs. transla tion, 11.17; placement of translations, 11.12; retranslation caution, 11.17; source plus translation, 11.13; trans lation adjusted, 11.15; translation credited, 11.14; translation edited, 2.61, 11.16; translation plus source, 11.13; typographic style of, 11.11 retranslation, 11.17 rights for, 4.34, 4.64 source citations for, 14.99, 14.183 subsidiary rights for, 4.34, 4.64 titles ofworks, 11.9, 11.10, 14.99, fig. 1.3 translator's notes on, 1.45, 14.51 as works made for hire, 4.10 translators biographical notes on, 1.66 notes by, 1.45, 14.51, fig. 14.4 See also editors; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; translators' names translators' names on covers or jackets, 1.70 in source citations: abbreviation of term, 10.42, 14.20-21, 14.103-4, 15.6, 15.15, 15.19; vs. authors' names, 14.104; classical Greek and Latin works, 14.246; examples and variations, 14.23, 15.9; for journal articles, 14.183; omission of term in text citations, 15.7, 15.22, 15.36; in place of author, 15.36; shortened citations, 14.32 on title page, 1.19 transliteration and transliterated text, 11.71-75 citing religious works in, 14.241 italics vs. roman type for terms in, 11.75, 11.88-89, 11.110
INDEX
transliteration and transliterated text (continued)
proper names, 11.4 resources on, 11.71, 11.74, 11.76, 11.8283, 11.86, 11.91, 11.98 and special characters, 2.80, 11.2, 11.72, 11.74, 11.90 titles of works and institutions, 11.6-10 Unicode for non-Latin alphabets, 11.2, 11.72-73, 11.90, 11.110, 11.115, 11.122, tables 11.2-5 See also Arabic language; Chinese language; Cyrillic alphabet; Greek alphabet; Hebrew language; Japanese language; Russian language; South Asian languages transportation. See business and commerce; roads and thoroughfares; vehicles and vessels transpose mark, 2.95, 2.128 transposition, marking proofs for, 2.128 treaties and acts source citations for, 14.275, 14.290 treatment in text, 8.66, 8.80, 8.81 See also legal and public documents trillion, 5.250 trim size, p. 989 Turkish language, 11.70 Turkmen language, 11.70 turn ofthe century, 9.32 twenty-four-hour system, 9.39, 9.40 Twitter, 8.191. See also social media content 2-em dashes length of, 6.75 with letters standing for names (e.g., A-) , 7.66 marking manuscript for, 2.96 for missing or illegible words, 6. 93, 13.59 typefaces. See fonts and typefaces type page, p. 989 typescripts, abbreviation for, 14.226 typesetters and typesetting adjusting and checking tables (checklist), 3.86 definition of typesetter, p. 989 errors assigned to, 2.135 Greek alphabet, 11.111 and indexes, 16.134 instructions to, 2.74, 2.81, 2.93, 2.116, 2.118, 2.121
typesetters and typesetting (continued) musical examples, 3.4, fig. 3.5 See also fonts and typefaces; typographic considerations type size appendixes, 1.59 bibliographies and reference lists, 1.63 block quotations, 2.19 endnotes, 1.62 indexes, 1.65, 16.135 subheads, 2.18 title and subtitle, 1.19 word-processing styles for, 2.82 See also typographic considerations type styles. See boldface; capital letters; fonts and typefaces; italics; roman (type); typographic considerations typewritten manuscripts, 2.6, 2.8, 2.37, 2.38, 2.43, 2.45 typographic considerations abbreviations: italic vs. roman type, 10.7; line breaks, 7.44; small caps vs. lowercase, 10.41; small vs. full-size capitals, 10.8, 10.38; spacing, 10.5 appendixes, 1.59 captions, 3.9, 3.22, 3.23, 3.24, 3.30 charts and graphs, 3.42 computer terminology, 7.79 digital artwork submission, 3.15 epigraphs, 13.36 epilogues and afterwords, 1.54 foreword, 1.40 glossaries, 1.61 illustration numbers, 3. 9 indexes (see under indexes) journals, 1.84, 1.115 letters as shapes, 7.67 list format, 6.128 for manuscript formatting, 2.7, 2.18, 2.19, 2.20 markup for, 2.74 mathematical copy, 12.61-68 mathematical expressions, 12.4 notes keyed to text by page numbers, 14.53, fig. 14.6 ornaments for text breaks, 1.58 permissible changes, 13.8 prefaces, 1.41 and proofreading, 2.113 publisher's, translator's, and editor's notes, 1.45
INDEX
typographic considerations (continued) punctuation, 6.2-6, 6.14 quotations from non-English-language materials, 11.11 single-glyph fractions, 6.110 subheads, 1.56, 2.59 subtitles, 8.164, 14.91 table of contents and list of illustrations, 1.39 tables, 3.49, 3.54, 3.60, 3.63, 3.86 user-defined typography in electronic publications, 1.123 See also boldface; design; fonts and typefaces; italics; special characters; type size ultra, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) un, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4)
uncertainties, 12.60 undated works, n.d. (no date) for, 10.42, 14.145, 14.263, 15.18, 15.44, 15.50, 15.54. See also access dates; publica tion date under, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 4) underlining (underscore), 2.15, 2.80, 2.84, 2.97, 7.51, 12.63, 12.65, 13.8 underscore. See underlining unexpressed (blind) folios, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.39, 1.46, 1.49, 3.6, p. 980 Unicode standard characters not available in, 2.16, 2.137 defined, p. 989 directional or "smart" quotes, 6.115, 6.117 en dash and minus sign distinguished, 6.84 and generic markup, 2.81 and IPA notation, 11.22 mathematical signs and symbols, 12.9, 12.12, table 12.1 non-Latin alphabets, 11.2, 11.72-73, 11.90, 11.110, 11.115, 11.122, tables 11.2-5 "smart" apostrophes, 6.115, 6.117 spaces defined in, 6.120, 6.121 special characters with Latin alphabet, 11.2, 11.21, 11.22, table 11.1 uniform resource locators. See URLs unions, 8.70, 9.49 United Kingdom CIP (Cataloging-in-Publication) data, 1.34
United Kingdom (continued) currency, 9.20, 9.22, 9.25 Greenwich mean time, 10.41 legal and public documents, 14.297303; command papers, 14.302; legal cases, 14.298; parliamentary debates, 14.301; parliamentary publications, 14.299; resources on, 14.297, 14.300; statutes, 14.300; unpublished docu ments, 14.303 units of measurement, 10.67 See also British style United Nations, 8.62, 14.290, 14.304, 14.305 United States legal and public documents: bills and resolutions, 14.283; congressional reports and documents, 14.285; debates before 1873, 14.287; debates since 1873, 14.286; hearings, 14.284; legal cases, 14.277-79; legislation, 14.282, 14.288; municipal ordinances and state laws, 14.288; presidential documents, 14.289; secondary sources on, 14.291; unpublished, 14.292 as word, 7.20, 10.32 See also governmental entities; legal and public documents; states (US); and headings beginning with US United States Code (U.S.C.), 14.282, 14.289 units of measurement abbreviations for, 10.51-59; derived units, 10.57, 10.60; grams, 10.55; non-SI units accepted by SI, 10.59; numbers with, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 9.16-17; periods with, 10.64; plurals of, 10.65, 10.67; prefixes, 9.10, 9.11, 10.49, 10.55, 10.56; referred to as symbols in SI, 10.2; repeated quantities, 9.17; SI, generally, 10.51, 10.52; SI base units, 10.54; in tables, 3.56, fig. 3.12; technical, list of, 10.49; US measure, 10.64-68 length, area, and volume, 10.66 numbers with, 7.44, 9.16-17, 10.49 plurals of, 9.19, 10.65, 10.67, 10.68 spacing with, 6.119, 6.121, 7.44, 9.16 symbols for, 3.56, 9.16-17, 10.52, 10.5458, fig. 3.12 in tables, 3.56, figs. 3.12-13
INDEX
units o f measurement (continued) United Kingdom, 10.67 weight and capacity, 10.67 See also numbers Universal Product Code. See bar codes universities abbreviation of term, 10.42, 14.134, 15.15 names of, 8.68 nonexclusive licenses claimed by, 4.67 in publishers' names, 14.134 student status terms, 8.29 See also academic concerns unless, 5.201 unpublished and informally published materials · copyright, 4.26, 4.48 defined, 14.146 fair use of, 4.88 permissions for, 2.2, 2.3, 4.81, 13.3 preprints, 1.113, 14.173, p. 985 source citations for: article not yet accepted, 14.146, 14.172; books not under contract, 14.146, 15.45; disser tations and theses, 14.215; file format noted for, 14.225; generally, 14.216; interviews and personal communi cations, 14.211-12, 14.214, 15.53; lec tures, papers, and posters presented at meetings, 14.217; legal-style citations, 14.292, 14.296, 14.303; manuscript collections, 14.221-31, 14.255, 15.54; musical works, 14.256; permanent records retained by au thor, 14.15, 14.207, 14.209; preprints, 14.173; private documents, 14.219; websites and biogs, 14.205-10, 15.51 titles of, 8.188, 14.216 working papers, 14.218 See also biogs and blog posts; disserta tions and theses; interviews and dis cussions; legal and public documents; letters (correspondence); manuscript collections; personal communica tions; websites and web pages until, 5.202, 9.60 up, in compound terms, 7.89 (sec. 2) Upanishads, 8.103, 14.241 uppercase, p. 989. See also capitalization; capital letters "up style." See headline-style capitalization
URLs (uniform resource locators) abbreviation of, 10.49 additional publishing information with, 14.7 on copyright page, fig. 1.1 cross-checking of, 2.3, 2.32, 2.34 defined, p. 989 DOI-based URLs defined, 1.33, 1.79, 14.8 embedded in electronic publications, 1.121 and line breaks, 2.13, 6.113, 7.46, 14.18 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.3, 2.13 permalinks, 14.9, 14.15 recommended use in citations, 14.6, 14.16, 14.161, 15.4 resources on, 14.6nl short forms for, 14.10 for specific types of material: abstracts, 14.186; artworks, 14.235; biogs, 15.51; book reviews, 14.202; books, 14.100, 14.161; databases, vs. names, 14.9, 14.11, 14.161, 14.164, 14.175; disser tations and theses, 14.215; electronic mailing list subjects and threads, 14.210; electronic supplementary data, 14.112, 14.187; individual reference entries, 14.234; interviews, 14.213; journal articles, 1.83, 14.23, 14.175, 15.9 (see also journal articles, source citations for); journal home pages, 1.84; journal special issues and supplements, 14.178-79; lectures and papers, 14.217; legal and public documents, 14.270, 14.276, 14.305; magazine articles, 14.189; manu script collections, 14.221; multi media content, 14.261; newspaper articles, 14.191; online reference works, 14.233; periodicals, generally, 14.164-65; publications in multiple formats, 14.16; scanned electronic editions, 14.162; scientific databases, 14.257; social media content, 14.10, 14.209; standards, 14.259 treatment in text: hyphenation, 2.13, 7.46, 14.18; line breaks, 2.13, 6.113, 7.46, 14.18; punctuation, 2.13, 6.8, 6.104, 6.112, 7.46, 14.17-18; syntax, 14.17 as website identifier, 8.191 See also access dates; DOis; electronic publications; hyperlinks
INDEX
usage. See word usage US Congress abbreviations for, 14.281, 14.283 bills and resolutions, 14.283 copyright provisos of, 4.26, 4.29, 4.40 debates before 1873, 14.287 debates since 1873, 14.286 documents and reports, 14.285 hearings, 14.284 members of, 8.22 numbered electoral districts, 9.46 numbers for successive terms and sessions, 9.45 presidential vetoes, 14.289 terms for, 8.62 See also acts and treaties; legal and public documents US Constitution, 8.80, 9.28, 14.280 US Copyright Office, 4.4, 4.19, 4.27, 4.4750, 4.82. See also copyright use-case documents, 2.138, 2.139 user interface specifications, 2.139 US House of Representatives, 8.22, 8.62, 14.281, 14.283. See also US Congress US ISSN Center, 1.32 US Postal Service, 10.33, 10.34. See also postal codes US Senate, 8.22, 8.62, 14.281, 14.283. See also US Congress US Supreme Court, 4.93, 14.277 US vs. United States, 10.32 UTC (coordinated universal time), 10.41 Uzbek language, 11.70 v., 8.82, 10.42, 14.276 var., 8.122, 8.123
variables, in tables, 3.52 vector graphic, pp. 989-90 vectors, 12.52, 12.53 Vedas, 14.241 vehicles and vessels, 8.2, 8.116-18, 9.44 verbal nouns, 5.107. See also infinitives verb phrases, 5.104, 5.171, 5.239, 5.245, 7.89 (sec. 2) verbs, 5.97-155 adjectives as, 5.95 auxiliary (helping) (see auxiliary (help ing) verbs) conjugation: past participles, 5.100, 5.110, 5.119 (see also participles);
verbs (continued) present participles, 5.110, 5.118, 7.41 (see also participles) definitions: auxiliary verbs, 5.103, 5.144; contractions, 5.105; ergative, 5.99; generally, 5.97; linking (copula or connecting), 5.101; phrasal, 5.102; principal and auxiliary (modal), 5.103, 5.144; regular and irregular, 5.100; tenses, 5.128; transitive and intransitive, 5.98 -ed vs. -t for past tense and past partici ple, 5.100 finite, 5.35, 5.138 gerunds, 5.112-13, 5.116, 7.28, 7.41, 7.89 (sec. 2) and indefinite pronouns, 5.67 infinitives, 5.44, 5.106-9, 5.112, 5.153, 5.171 as interjections, 5.208 linking (copula or connecting), 5.45, 5.82, 5.93, 5.101, 5.154, 5.170, 6.30 with mass nouns, 5.7 misleading connectives with, 5.142 mood: defined, 5.120; imperative, 5.122, 5.155, 5.160, 5.214, 5.255; indicative, 5.121, 5.122, 5.124, 5.129, 5.130; and modal auxiliary verbs, 5.144; sub junctive, 5.123-27 nouns as, 5.25, 5.250 nouns formed from (nominalizations), 5.189 with nouns in objective case, 5.19 objects of, 5.35, 5.37, 5.44, 5.225, 5.239, 6.67 participles (see participles) and personal pronouns, 5.44, 5.45 phrasal, 5.102, 5.181 phrasal adjectives following, 5.93 properties, 5.117-43; agreement of subject with, 5.138, 5.139, 5.141, 5.143, 5.205, 5.250; mood (see above); num ber, 5.137, 5.138, 5.139, 5.140, 5.141, 5.142, 5.205; overview, 5.117; person, 5.136, 5.138, 5.143; and predicate nominative, 5.141; tenses (see below); voice (see active voice; passive voice) in references to works, 5.129, 8.166 tenses: and assimilation of quoted material into text, 13.12; of be-verbs, 5.155; defined, 5.128; future, 5.131;
INDEX
verbs (continued) future perfect, 5.134; past, 5.100, 5.125, 5.126, 5.130, 5.133; past indica tive, 5.130; past perfect (pluperfect), 5.126, 5.127, 5.133; present, 5.125, 5.129; present indicative, 5.129; present perfect, 5.132; progressive (imperfect, continuous), 5.119, 5.128, 5.135 verb phrases, 5.104, 5.171, 5.239, 5.245, 7.89 (sec. 2) verb stem (present indicative), 5.129 See also adverbs; be-verbs vernacular names, 8.128-30 version control and archival ·practices, 1.114 document comparison software for, 2.86 journal articles, 1.112 in manuscript editing, 2.5, 2.78, 2.79 multiauthor volumes, 2.41 and preprints, 1.113 in proofreading, 2.103, 2.105, 2.110 version numbers, 1.28 verso pages abbreviation, 14.154-55 always even-numbered, 1.5 blank after half-title, 1.4, 1.18 defined, p. 990 in folio editions, 14.155 last page of journal, 1.81 page after second halftitle, 1.46 parts of book starting on, 1.4, 1.18 proofreading for correct use of, 2.114-15 running heads, 1.lr-15 in signed signatures, 14.154 specified on final manuscript for produc tion, 2.75-76 See also page numbers; pagination; recto pages vertical bars in mathematical expressions, 12.26, 12.28, 12.33-34, 12.51 in notes to tables, 3.79 vertical lists abbreviations in, 10.29 as alternative to tables, 3.51 as block quotations, 13.10 manuscript preparation guidelines, 2.21 in mathematical expressions, 12.16, 12.18 placement of, 2.62
vertical lists (continued) punctuation and format, 2.11, 2.21, 6.92, 6.129-31, 6.132 vs. run-in, 6.128, 6.129, 6.131 very, 7.89 (sec. 2) very, much, 5.90, 5.250 vice, as prefix, 7.89 (sec. 3) video biogs, 8.192 video games, 8.190, 14.86, 14.268. See also multimedia content video recordings clips and files, 1.107, 1.114, 2.4 numbering of, 3.10 source citations for, 14.265 See also multimedia content Vietnamese names, 16.86 virgule. See slashes viz. (videlicet), 10.42 voice active, 5.19, 5.115, 5.118, 5.119, 5.135, 5.192 passive: and dangling participles, 5.115; defined, 5.118; infinitives in, 5.106; linking verbs in, 5.101; long (with by) , 5.192; with past participle, 5.119, 5.135, 5.154 volume editor. See editors; editors' names; manuscript preparation guidelines for authors; multiauthor volumes volumes and volume numbers abbreviation of volume: in bibliographies and reference lists, generally, 14.21, 15.6, 15.15; generally, 10.42, 14.150; multivolume works, 8.175, 14.116; in notes, generally, 14.20; omission of, 14.152; plural of, 7.15; series of works, 14.123; in text citations, generally, 15.23 defined, p. 990 front matter in series of works, 1.18 journals: arabic numerals for, 9.27; in copyright line, 1.103; on cover, 1.84, 2.109, 2.134; current, on home page, 1.86; defined, 1.80; issue numbering within, 1.80; issues identified by, 1.79; as metadata, 1.92; omission of, 1.80; proofreading of, 2.134; and retractions, 1.91; in source citations, 14.23, 14.171, 14.177, 15.9; in table of contents, 1.87, fig. 1.11 pagination within, 1.81, fig. 1.11
INDEX
volumes and volume numbers (continued) punctuation with, 6.62, 14.23 in source citations: arabic numerals for, 14.147, 14.171; generally, 14.165, 15.23; journals, 14.23, 14.171, 14.177, 15.9; legal and public documents, 14.276, 14.287, 14.294, 14.301, 14.303; multivolume works, 14.116, 14.118-19, 15.41; page numbers with, 14.23, 14.116, 14.152, 14.177, 15.23, 15.48; text citations, 15.23; when to omit vol., 14.152 treatment of term volume, 8.175 (see also abbreviation of volume above) See also multivolume works; series of
works von, van, van den, 8.8, 8.10 vs., v., 10.42
Wade-Giles system, 11.82, 11.84-85, 16.77. See also Chinese language; Pinyin system wars, revolutions, battles, and such, 8.11314 we, you, they, 5.47 web (term), 7.80, 7.89 (sec. 3) web-based publications. See electronic
publications; online publications; websites and web pages web browsers, p. 990 web-fed presses, p. 990 websites and web pages of authors, 1.113, 1.121, 4.66, 4.67 campus, 4.66 copyright of, 4.2, 4.13 corporate, as resource for usage, 8.69, 10.24
defined, 14.205, p. 990 identifying sites with no formal title, 8.191
of journals, 1.84, 1.86, 1.87 owner or sponsor of, 14.14, 14.207, 14.267
permissions processing via, 4.97 preprints on, 1.113 of publishers, 1.21, 1.59, 1.68, 1.118, 4.94, 4.97
source citations for, 14.205-10; access dates, 14.12, 14.207, 15.50; author date reference system, 15.4, 15.50; basic approach, 14.205; italics or
websites and web pages (continued) quotation marks for titles, 14.86, 14.206, 14.208; revision dates, 14.13, 14.207, 15.50; site discontinued before publication, 14.207; in text vs. bibliography, 14.207, 14.208; titles, 14.206-8, 14.272; website, 14.207 (see also online publications: source
citations for) titles of, 8.2, 8.191-92, 14.206-8, 14.272 See also biogs and blog posts; electronic publications; HTML; hyperlinks; online publications; URLs weight, 7.89 (sec. 1) , 10.67. See also units of measurement well, 5.206, 6.34
Wellcome Trust, 4.68 West, western, 8.46, 8.47 what
as adverbial conjunction, 5.202 antecedent absent with, 5.30, 5.61 in cleft sentences, 5.246 with -ever suffix, 5.65 as interrogative pronoun, 5.54-55 possessive form of, 5.63 as relative pronoun, 5.56 as subordinating conjunction, 5.201 when, 5.201, 5.202, 6.24, 6.69 where, 5.201, 5.202 whether, 5.201, 5.250, 6.40 which antecedent absent with, 5.30 antecedents of, 5.59, 5.61 with -ever suffix, 5.65 as interrogative pronoun, 5.54-55 in nonrestrictive clauses, 6.27 possessive form of, 5.63, 5.64 prepositions with, 5.172 punctuation with, 6.27 referent of, 5.55 as relative pronoun, 5.56 in remote relative clauses, 5.60 vs. that, 5.250, 6.27 while, 5.250 whiz-deletions, 5.226, 5.247 who, whom, whose antecedent absent with, 5.30, 5.61 declension of, 5.56 distinguishing among, 5.250 with -ever suffix, 5.66 for gender neutrality, 5.255
INDEX
who, whom, whose (continued)
as interrogative pronouns, 5.54-55, 5.58 in nonrestrictive clauses, 6.27 objective pronouns as antecedents of, 5.57
possessive form of, 5.63, 5.64 prepositions with, 5.172 as question within sentence, 6.69 referent of, 5.55 in remote relative clauses, 5.60 who vs. whom, 5.66 whoever, whomever, whichever, whatever, 5.65, 5.66, 5.250 who's, whose, 5.50, 5.250 wh- questions,. 5.212 why, 5.201, 5.202, 5.206, 6.69 wide, compound terms with, 7.89 (sec. 3) widows (lines), 2.116, 2.117, p. 990 Wikipedia, 8.191 wikis, 14.13, p. 990 wildcards, 2.79 will, would, 5.131, 5.134, 5.151, 5.231 wills, source citations for, 14.219 wire frames (design mockups), 2.139 with, in source citations for ghostwritten books, 14.105 without, 5.201 woman vs. lady as adjective, 5.259 word breaks. See word division word-by-word alphabetizing, 14.65, 16.57, 16.58, 16.60, 16.61, 16.123
word count, for manuscript submission, 2.4, 2.52 word division, 7.36-47
abbreviated units of measure, 7.44 basic rules, 7.36, 11.20 compound terms, prefixes, and suffixes, 2.112, 7.40, 7.42, 11.44
diphthongs never divided, 7.39, 11.33, 11.42, 11.50, 11.66, 11.118
gerunds and present participles, 7.41 non-English words: Arabic, 11.81; French, 11.33-36; generally, 11.20; German, 11.42-44; Greek, 11.118-21; Hebrew, 11.95, 11.96; Italian, 11.5052; Latin, 11.55-58; Polish, 11.70; proofreading for, 2.112; Russian, 11.70, 11.104-8; Spanish, 11.66-68; two-letter word endings, 7.37 pronunciation as basis for, 7.38 proofreading for bad breaks, 2.112
word division (continued) proper names, 7.42 resources on, 7.36 typographic considerations, 7.47 URLs, DOis, and such in text, 2.13, 6.113, 7.46, 14.18
after vowel, 7.39, 7.42 words not appropriate for, 7.37, 11.36 See also line breaks word order, 5.221-24 SVO (subject-verb-object) pattern, 5.221, 5.222
syntactic patterns listed, 5.223 syntactic variations, 5.224 See also inverted word order; syntax word-processing software for author's review of copyedited manu script, 2.71, 2.88 directional or "smart" quotes and apostrophes, 6.115, 6.117 for electronic file cleanup, 2.79 ellipsis character, 13.50 em dash character, 2.14 formatting codes, 2.63, 2.81, 2.82 functions in: character-level formatting, 2.81; commenting, 2.39, 2.84, 2.87, 2.88; document comparison, 2.86; equation editing function, 12.2; global changes, 2.69, 2.79, 2.80, 2.85, 2.111, 2.113, 2.122; hyphenation, 2.13, 2.80, 7.36, 7.38; indentation, 2.11, 2.12, 2.19, 2.20, 2.21, 2.24, 2.80, 16.131; keyboard combinations and shortcuts, 7.78; language settings, 2.80; macros, 2.79, 2.80, p. 983; non breaking spaces, 6.121; note function, 2.22, 14.24, 14.41, 14.43; outlines, 2.21, 2.36; pattern matching, 2.79, 2.80, p. 984; search and replace, 2.79; sorting, 14.65, 14.67, 16.5, 16.57, 16.104; spell checking, 2.89, 2.111; styles, 2.18, 2.21, 2.82, 2.83, 2.84, fig. 2.4; tables, 2.26, 2.36, 3.47; tabs, 2.11-12, 2.19, 2.21, 2.24, 2.80 for indexing, 16.104, 16.117, 16.131 for manuscript editing, 2.79, 2.80 special characters, 2.16, 11.45, 11.72 third-party add-ins, 2.79 and Unicode standard, 11.2 See also manuscript editing; tracking
changes
I N D EX
words coinage of, 7.14 (see also words derived from proper names) emphasizing particular, 7.50-52, 11.47, 13.62, 14.94 en dash to connect, 6.78, 6.80, 6.81 introductory (see introductory words and phrases) key terms, 7.56 missing or illegible in original source, 6.93, 6.104, 13.59 non-English, italics for, 7.53, 7.54, 7.55, 11.3, 11.5, 11.75, 11.88, 11.94, 14.272 vs. numerals (see numbers: spelled out) parallel structure in, 5.242 phonetic transcription of, 6.102 problematic, list of, 5.250 scare quotes for, 7.57, 11.47, 14.94 single, for questions within sentences, 6.69 so-called with, 7.59 spacing between, 2.9, 2.125 stacked at end ofline, 2.116 standing alone, 6.12 2-em dash to indicate omitted, 6.93 words and phrases used as, 7.63 See also compound terms; hyphens and hyphenation; non-English words and phrases; sentences; word division; word usage words as words, 5.14, 6.2, 7.63 words derived from proper names abbreviations, 10.6, 10.49, 10.52 adjectives: from names of ethnic and national groups, 8.38; in non-English languages, 11.26, 11.39, 11.70; from organization names, 8.62; from personal names, 8.60, 8.61; from place-names, 5.69, 8.45; proper adjectives, defined, 5.69; religious terms, 8.96, 8.97 capitalization, 8.1, 8.60-62, 8.96-97 resources on, 8.60, 8.61 word usage, 5.249-50 consistency in, 5.14 and dialect, 5.25 good vs. common, 5.250 vs. grammar, 5.249 jargon, 5.25, 5.95, 5.174 myths and misunderstandings, 5.171, 5.180, 5.203
word usage (continued) preposition usage, 5.195 problematic words and phrases, list of, 5.250 style guides for, 5.250 See also bias-free language; British style; European style; grammar; and specific parts ofspeech
working papers, 14.218. See also unpub lished and informally published materials works, index entries using, 16.50 works-cited lists, 15.5. See also reference lists works made for hire contributors' chapters as, 4.58 copyright issues, 4.9-12, 4.24, 4.38 credit line for, 3.33 employer as author of, 4.9 illustrations as, 3.33, 4.10, 4.75 world, parts of compass points and directions, 8.46, 8.47 continents, countries, oceans, 8.45 political divisions, 1.27, 8.51, 8.52 popular names and epithets for, 8.48 real vs. metaphorical names, 8.50 regions, 8.47, 8.54 See also place-names world rights, 4.76 world's fairs, 8.201 World Wide Web, 7.80, p. 990. See also internet would, will, 5.131, 5.134, 5.151 x
andy axes, 3.43, 3.52, fig. 3.8 x-height, p. 990 Xhosa language, 11.23 XHTML, p. 990 XML (extensible markup language) angle brackets in, 6.104 defined, p. 990 and electronic workflow, 1.117 vs. generic markup, 2.81 for metadata, 1.75, 1.92 overview, 2.83 in plain-text files, p. 985 Unicode standard required by, 11.2 and word-processing styles, 2.82 See also markup languages, formal x-ray, 8.151
I N D EX
XSL (extensible style sheet language), p. 990
year-month-day (ISO) date format, 6.108,
yet, 6.22. See also coordinating conjunctions you, understood, 5.51, 5.122, 6.22 you, your, yours, and you're, 5.30, 5.41, 5.47, 5.48, 5.49, 5.50, 5.250
9.36
years abbreviations, 9.30, 9.64 in ages, 7.89 (sec. 1) commas in, 9.54 editorial doubt, 6.68 inclusive ranges of, 9.60, 9.64, 14.144 incomplete range, 6.79 plurals of, 7.15 sentences beginning with, 9.5, 9.29 slashes with. two-year spans, 6.107, 6.113 unspecified date of death, 6.79 words vs. numerals for, 9.29 work period known (jl.), 10.42 See also dates; publication date; time designations yes, 5.250, 6.34
yes-no questions, 5.212, 5.213
zero (O), 2.35, 3.67, 3.72, 9.19, 9.20, 12.9 zero (implicit) articles, 5.77 zip codes, 10.29. See also addresses, mail ing; postal codes zombie nouns (nominalizations), 5.189 zoological terminology illustrations, fig. 3.7 resources on, 8.119, 8.128 scientific names: author names in, 8.124; divisions higher than genus, 8.126; English derivatives from taxonomic system, 8.127; genus, species, and subspecies, 8.120-24; resources on, 8.119
vernacular names, 8.128-29 See also scientific and technical termi nology
The Chicago Manual ofStyle Designed by Matt Avery Typeset by Graphic Composition, Inc., Bogart, Georgia Book printed and bound by Edwards Brothers Malloy, Ann Arbor, Michigan Jacket printed by Phoenix Color, Hagerstown, Maryland Composed in Lyon, designed by Kai Bernau, and Atlas Grotesk, designed by Kai Bernau, Susana Carvalho, and Christian Schwartz Printed on 50# Glatfelter Offset Bound in Arrestox Linen
D I S T R I B U T E D BY T H E C H I C A G O D I STRIBUTION C E N T E R
![Indexes: A Chapter from The Chicago Manual of Style [1 ed.]
0226104060, 9780226104065, 9780226104195](https://dokumen.pub/img/200x200/indexes-a-chapter-from-the-chicago-manual-of-style-1nbsped-0226104060-9780226104065-9780226104195.jpg)
![21st Century Manual of Style [Reprint ed.]
0440220742, 9780440220749](https://dokumen.pub/img/200x200/21st-century-manual-of-style-reprintnbsped-0440220742-9780440220749.jpg)
![A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Dissertations: Chicago Style for Students and Researchers [9 ed.]
9780226494425, 9780226430577, 9780226430607](https://dokumen.pub/img/200x200/a-manual-for-writers-of-research-papers-theses-and-dissertations-chicago-style-for-students-and-researchers-9nbsped-9780226494425-9780226430577-9780226430607.jpg)
![A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Dissertations: Chicago Style for Students and Researchers [8 ed.]
9780226816371, 9780226816388, 9780226816395, 2012036981](https://dokumen.pub/img/200x200/a-manual-for-writers-of-research-papers-theses-and-dissertations-chicago-style-for-students-and-researchers-8nbsped-9780226816371-9780226816388-9780226816395-2012036981.jpg)
![Chicago Manual of Style [17th ed.]](https://dokumen.pub/img/200x200/chicago-manual-of-style-17thnbsped.jpg)